Specification For Onshore Pipelines

GAIL (India) Limited
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
Laying and Construction of 10 x 32 km, Steel Pipeline,
Terminals and Associates Facilities for supplying RLNG
from Ibrahimpur to M/s RRVUN LTD at Dholpur,
Rajasthan
Vol-II of IV
TENDER NO.: 05/51/23JV/GAIL/001
MECON LIMITED
SCOPE MINAR
15th Floor, North Tower
Laxmi Nagar District Centre
DELHI 110 092
July, 2006
CONTENTS
LIST OF SPECIFICATION/ STANDARDS
VOLUME-II
Page 1 of 2
S.No. Title
Specification No.
1.
SPECIFICATION FOR MAINLINE CONSTRUCTION
MEC/S/05/62/01A
2.
SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING OF ONSHORE CROSS-COUNTRY

PIPELINE WITH ADDENDUM-I TO ABOVE SPECIFICATION
MEC/S/05/62/02A
3.
SPECIFICATION FOR HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF

ONSHORE PIPELINES
MEC/S/05/62/03A
4.
SPECIFICATION FOR MAJOR WATER CROSSINGS

(CONVENTIONAL)
MEC/S/05/62/04
5.
SPECIFICATION FOR PIPELINE CROSSING ROADS,

RAILROADS, MINOR WATER AND OTHER CROSSINGS
MEC/S/05/62/05
6.
SPECIFICATION FOR PIPING, FABRICATION AND ERECTION
MEC/S/05/62/06
7.
SPECIFICATION FOR SHOP AND FIELD PAINTING
MEC/S/05/62/07A,R1
8.
SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF PIPELINE CORROSION COATING
MEC/S/05/62/08
9.
SPECIFICATION FOR DOCUMENTATION FOR

PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION
MEC/S/05/62/69,R0
10.
SPECIFICATION FOR PIPELINE MARKERS
MEC/S/05/62/10
11.
SPECIFICATION FOR FLUSHING AND TESTING
MEC/S/05/62/11,R0
12.
SPECIFICATION FOR CASING INSULATORS AND END SEALS
MEC/S/05/62/12
13.
SPECIFICATION FOR VENTS, DRAINS AND WELLS
MEC/S/05/62/15
14.
SPECIFICATION FOR GASKETS, NUTS AND BOLTS
MEC/S/05/62/019,R0
15.
PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
MEC/S/05/62/21B
16.
SPECIFICATION FOR FIELD JOINT COATING

(ON-SHORE PIPELINE)
MEC/S/05/62/13B, R2
17.
SPECIFICATION FOR 3 LPE COATING OF PIPE
MEC/S/05/62/014,R-2
18.
SPECIFICATION FOR FITTINGS & FLANGES UPTO 16 SIZE
MEC/TS/05/62/025,R-1
19.
SPECIFICATION FOR FLANGES & WELDED FITTINGS

(18 NB & ABOVE)
MEC/TS/05/62/026,R-0
20.
SPECIFICATION FOR ASSORTED PIPES FOR TERMINALS
MEC/TS/05/62/59A,R-0
D:\old data\FATEH\IDPL_Dholpur\SCC\Final\Content - Vol-II, III & IV.doc
CONTENTS
LIST OF SPECIFICATION/ STANDARDS
VOLUME-II
Page 2 of 2
S.No. Title
Specification No.
21.
SPECIFICATION FOR PRE-COMMISSIONING/ COMMISSIONING
MEC/S/05/62/61,R1
22.
SPECIFICATION FOR HEALTH, SAFETY AND

ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT (HSE)
MEC/S/05/62/65
23.
SPECIFICATION FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
MEC/S/05/62/66,R0
24.
SPECIFICATION FOR CALIPER PIGGING
MEC/S/05/62/70
25.
SPECIFICATION FOR FIELD JOINT COATING OF PIPELINE

FOR HDD CROSSING
MEC/S/05/62/74
26.
SPECIFICATION FOR PIPELINE CROSSING USING

DIRECTIONAL DRILLING METHOD
MEC/S/05/62/75
27.
SPECIFICATION FOR FLOW TEE
MEC/S/05/62/011,R-0
28.
SPECIFICATION FOR LONG RADIUS BENDS
MEC/TS/05/62/015,R-1
29.
SPECIFICATION FOR INSULATING JOINTS
MEC/TS/05/62/009,R-0
30.
SPECIFICATION FOR SPLIT TEE
MEC/TS/05/62/011A,R-1
31.
SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE SAFETY VALVE
MEC/TS/05/62/056
32.
SPECIFICATION FOR CARTRIDGE FILTER
MEC/TS/05/62/017,R-1
33.
SPECIFICATION FOR QOEC
MEC/S/05/62/013,R-0
34.
SPECIFICATION FOR PIG SIGNALLERS
MEC/S/05/62/048
35.
SPECIFICATION FOR SCRAPPER TRAP
MEC/S/05/62/007,R-1
36.
SPECIFICATION FOR PLUG VALVES
MEC/TS/05/62/003,R-2
37.
SPECIFICATION FOR GLOBE VALVE
MEC/TS/05/62/005
38.
SPECIFICATION FOR CHECK VALVES
MEC/TS/05/62/004,R-2
39.
Specification for Temporary Cathodic Protection System
MEC/TS/05/62/016A
40.
Specification for Permanent Cathodic Protection System
MEC/TS/05/62/016B
41.
Specification for Corrosion Survey
MEC/TS/05/62/016C
42.
Specification for Cathodic Protection CPPSM Units
MEC/05/S/26/072A
D:\old data\FATEH\IDPL_Dholpur\SCC\Final\Content - Vol-II, III & IV.doc
SPECIFICATION
FOR
MAINLINE CONSTRUCTION (ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO. MEC/S/05/62/01A
(PROCESS & PIPING DESIGN SECTION)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
Document6
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF: RANCHI (BIHAR)
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
MAINLINE CONSTRUCTION
(ONSHORE)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 1 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCE CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
3.0
REQUIREMENTS OF R.O.U. AND ACCESS THERETO
4.0
RIGHT-OF-WAY
5.0
HANDLING, HAULING, STRINGING AND STORING OF MATERIALS
6.0
TRENCHING
7.0
BENDING
8.0
LINING UP
9.0
LAYING OF PIPE
10.0
BACK-FILLING
11.0
TIEING-IN
12.0
SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS ON THE PIPELINE
13.0
WORKING SPREAD LIMITATIONS
14.0
CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION OF RIGHT-OF-WAY
15.0
MAINTENANCE DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
PREPARED BY
Document6
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF : RANCHI (BIHAR)
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 2 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This specification covers the minimum requirements for the various activities to
be carried out by CONTRACTOR for or about the construction of cross-country
pipelines.
1.2
The various activities covered in this specification include the following works of
pipeline construction :
Document6
Clearing, grubbing and grading of Right-of-way
Construction of all temporary facilities required in connection with the

WORKS
Staking of the pipeline route
Handling, hauling, stringing and storing of all materials
Trenching
Field-bending of line pipe
Lining-up
Pipeline laying
Backfilling
Tieing-in
Installation of auxiliary facilities and appurtenances forming a part of

pipeline installation
Clean-up and restoration of Right-of-way;
Maintenance during defects liability period.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 3 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
1.3
This specification shall be read in conjunction with the conditions of all

specifications and documents included in the CONTRACT between COMPANY
and CONTRACTOR.
1.4
CONTRACTOR shall, with due care and vigilance, execute the work in
compliance with all laws, by-laws, ordinances, regulations etc. and provide all
services and labour, inclusive of supervision thereof, all materials, excluding the
materials indicated as "COMPANY Supplied materials" in the CONTRACT,
equipment, appliances or other things of whatsoever nature required in or about
the execution of the work, whether of a temporary or permanent nature.
1.5
CONTRACTOR shall take full responsibility for the stability and safety of all
operations and methods involved in the WORK.
1.6
CONTRACTOR shall be deened to have inspected and examined the work

area(s) and its surroundings and to have satisfied himself so far as practicable
as to the form and nature thereof, including sub-surface conditions, hydrological
and climatic conditions, the extent and nature of the WORK and materials
necessary for the completion of the WORK, and the means of access to the
work area(s).
1.7
CONTRACTOR shall be deemed to have obtained all necessary information

subject as above mentioned as to risks, contingencies and all other
circumstances, which may influence the WORK.
1.8
CONTRACTOR shall, in connection with the WORK, provide and maintain at his
own costs, all lights, guards, fencing, watching etc., when and where necessary
or required by COMPANY or by any duly constituted authority and/ or by the
authorities having jurisdiction thereof for the protection of the WORK and
properties or for the safety and the convenience of public and/ or others.
2.0
2.1
Reference has been made in this specification to the latest edition of the
following codes, standards and specifications :
a)
Document6
ANSI B 31.8
Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping

Systems
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 4 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
b)
ANSI B 31.4
Liquid Petroleum
Systems
Transportation
Piping
c)
API 1104
Standard for Welding Pipelines and Related

Facilities
d)
API 1105
Bulletin on Construction Practices for Oil and

Products Pipelines
e)
Part 1992
Title 49
Transportation of Natural and Other Gas

by Pipeline (US Department of Transportation
- Pipeline Safety Standards)
f)
Part 195
Transportation of Liquids by Pipeline (US

Department of Transportation - Pipeline
Safety Standards).
In case of differences between the requirements of this specification and that of

the above referred codes, standards and specifications, the requirements of this
specification shall govern.
2.2
3.0
For the purpose of this specification the following definitions shall hold:
the words "Shall" and "Must" are mandatory.
the works "Should, "May" and "Will" are non-mandatory, advisory or

recommended.
REQUIREMENTS OF R.O.U. AND ACCESS THERETO

CONTRACTOR shall, before starting any clearing operations, familiarise himself
with all the requirements of the Authorities having jurisdiction over the Right of
Way for work along the pipeline route or in connection with the use of other
lands or roads for construction purpose.
CONTRACTOR shall notify COMPANY well in advance during work progress,
the method of construction for crossing road, pipeline, cable, railway, river and
other existing obstacles.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 5 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
CONTRACTOR shall not commence work on such crossings before having

obtained approval from the authorities and land owners concerned to the
satisfaction of COMPANY. The crossings shall be installed to meet at all times
the requirements and conditions of the permit issued by the authorities
concerned. In the absence of any specific requirements by authorities,
CONTRACTOR shall comply with COMPANY'S instructions.
The right of ingress and egress to the ROW shall be limited to points where such
ROW intersects public roads, Arrangements for other access required by the
CONTRACTOR shall be made by him at his own cost and responsibility, and for
such access, the conditions of this specifications shall also apply.
Where the ROW comes within 30 metres of an existing line or facility,
CONTRACTOR shall propose and provide methods to safe-guard the existing
line or facility (e.g. a demarcation fence). No work is allowed in such area
without COMPANY's prior approval.
3.1
Safety measures during construction of pipelines inside the area

influenced by high voltage lines
3.1.1
General
Pipelines which are constructed inside the area of high voltage lines may be
electrically influenced by the high voltage lines. The voltage caused by the
influence may at times be high enough to pose danger to personnel working on
the pipeline. It is imperative therefore, that the instructions given below should
be strictly observed.
3.1.1.1
It is a necessity that all personnel working on the pipeline which is being laid in
the area influenced by the high voltage systems, be given clear instructions on
measures to be taken.
3.1.1.2
Vehicles and equipment must be earth-connected. This may be effected by

attaching an uninsulated cable or chain (which touches the ground) of adequate
length to the underside of the vehicle.
3.1.1.3
If its not impossible for plant and/ or materials to come within 50m of the
centre of the high voltage systems, special measures must be taken to prevent
any approach beyond that distance, unless article 3.1.2 is complied with.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 6 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
3.1.1.4
DURING THUNDERSTORMS OR WHEN DISCHARGES ARE

OBSERVED ON INSULATORS ALL PERSONNEL MUST LEAVE THE AREA
OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE LINE AND PIPELINE.
3.1.1.5
To prevent electrical voltage in a non-buried section of the pipeline from

rising to dangerous levels, the length of the pipeline section which has been
welded together before burial must not exceed the length at which the max.
admissible voltage may be induced. This length may be calculated using an
approved calculation method.
3.1.1.6
Before a pipeline section is lowered into the trench the structure's earth
electrodes indicated in the drawings or determined with calculation method must
have been installed and connected both to the pipeline section already buried
and to the section which is about to be buried. The electrical connections which
serve the purpose of preventing dangerous voltages must have a min. area of
2.
35mm
Said connections must not be interrupted until after the permanent safety earth
connections have been installed and connected to the entire uninterrupted
pipeline.
3.1.1.7
The welded connection between the pipeline section and the section
already buried must be installed at a distance of at least 50m from the nearest
point of a pylon base.
3.1.1.8
Personnel doing work inside the area of influence of the high voltage
system must wear electrically insulating foot-wear (e.g. rubber kneeboots) and
wear insulating rubber or plastic gloves.
3.1.2
Additional measures for work at less than 50m from the centre of the high
voltage system.
If work is done at less than 50m from the centre of the high voltage system, the
regulations below must be complied with in addition to the rules specified in
clause 3.1.1.
3.1.2.1
Document6
The work must not be started until agreement has been reached with the
authorities which controls the high voltage system, about the implementation of
the safety measures specified in this section.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
3.1.2.2
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 7 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Measures must be taken to prevent excavating and hoisting equipments

from approaching high voltage lines to within any of the following distances.
This distance depends on the voltage carried. For individual connections the
distance must be :
0
40
200
50 KV
200 KV
380 KV
3m
5m
8m
The measures taken may be as follows :
3.1.2.3
1.
Special selection of equipment, or limiting or blocking certain directions of

movement, or limiting the operational area, thereby making it impossible
for any work to tbe done at a distance from the high voltage line of less
than the accepted minimum.
2.
In case the measures recommended in 1. above are not feasible,

installation of clearly visible markers of sufficient height or laying out a "no
passage beyond this point" line of drums painted bright red and white
must prevent any work being done inside the danger area. Further, an
inspector must be prevent all the time.
In the event that a vehicle, crane etc. should accidently come into contact
with a live cable of a high voltage system or flash-over of electrical charge
occurs, the driver must not leave his vehicle because this will pose a serious
threat to his life.
The vehicle or crane must break the contact WITHOUT ANY HELP FROM
OUTSIDE.
The driver must not leave his vehicle unitl be has managed to leave "the
dangerous area, or alternatively, when the Electricity Authorities have given
notice that the cable(s) have been put out of circuit. In case a serious fire starts
in the vehicle, he is permitted to jump from the vehicle, clearing it as far as
possible, while the jump should possible be to a dry spot.
Document6
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
4.0
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 8 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
RIGHT-OF-WAY
The CONTRACTOR is required to perform his construction activities within the
width of Right-of-way set aside for construction of pipeline, unless he has made
other arrangements with the land owner and/ or tenant for using extra land.
Variation in this width caused by local conditions or installation of associated
pipeline facilities or existing pipelines will be identified in the field or instructed to
the CONTRACTOR by COMPANY.
The ROW boundary lines shall be staked by the CONTRACTOR, so as to
prepare the strip for laying the pipeline. CONTRACTOR shall also establish all
required lines and grades necessary to complete the work and shall be
responsible for the accuracy of such lines and grades.
4.1
Staking
Prior to cleaning operations CONTRACTOR shall :
1)
Install Bench Marks, Intersection Points and other required survey

movements.
2)
Stake markers in the centreline of the pipeline at distance of maximum

100 metres for straight line sections and maximum 10 metres for
horizontal bends. Wherever ROW centreline has been staked on ground,
CONTRACTOR shall exercise care in accurately staking the pipeline
centreline, in consultation with COMPANY.
3)
Stake two ROW markers at least at every 100 metres.
4)
Set out a reference line with respect in pipeline centreline at a convenient

location. Markers on reference line shall be at a distance of maximum
100m for straight line sections and maximum 10m for horizontal bends.
5)
Install distance markers locating and indicating special points, such as

but not limited to :
Document6
Contract limits, obstacle crossings, change of wall thickness,

including corresponding chainage, etc.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 9 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
ROW markers shall be staked out at the boundary limits of Right-of-way

wherever possible. ROW markers shall be painted red with numbers painted in
white. Number shall be identical to centreline marker number with letters A (left
side) and B (right side) added, (looking, in flow direction). Reference markers
shall also carry the same information as its corresponding centreline markers.
Markers shall be of suitable material so as to serve their purpose and shall be
coloured distinctly for easy identification. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible
for the maintenance and replacement of the reference line markers until the
permanent pipeline markers are placed and the as-built drawings are submitted
and approved.
Any deviation from the approved alignment shall be executed by
CONTRACTOR after seeking COMPANY approval in writing prior to clearing
operations.
4.2
Monuments
All shrines, monument, border stones, stone walls and the like shall be protected
and shall be subjected to no harm during construction. Any violation of the
above by the CONTRACTOR shall be brought to the notice of the COMPANY
and other concerned authorities. Restoration of the above shall wholly be the
responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.
4.3
Fencing
Prior to clearing or grading of the Right-of-way or stringing of pipe,
CONTRACTOR shall open fences on or crossing the construction Right-of-way
and install temporary gate of sound construction made of similar materials and
suitable quality to serve purpose of original fence. Adjacent post shall be
adequately braced to prevent slackening of the remainder of the fence. Before
such fences are cut and opened, CONTRACTOR shall notify the land owner or
tenant, and where practicable, the opening of the fences shall be in accordance
with the wishes of said owner and tenant. In all cases where CONTRACTOR
removes fences to obtain work route, CONTRACTOR shall provide and install
temporary fencing, and on completion of construction shall restore such fencing
to its original conditon.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 10 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
CONTRACTOR shall install temporary fencing on either side of ROW where in

COMPANY's opinion, it is considered essential to ensure safety and noninterference, especially in areas like grasing lands, villages etc.
Fencing shall be removable type wherever necessary, to permit crossing of
traffic. The type of fencing must be suitable for the situation in accordance with
user. The pole distance shall not be greater than 6m. The minimum height of the
fencing shall be 1.2m above grade. Fencing can consist of one or more rows of
smooth wire and/ or of barbed wire.
Fencing shall be continuously maintained and the thorough-ways inspected to
be shut during the execution of the work.
4.4
Row Clearing and Grading
4.4.1
All stumps shall be grubbed for a continuous strip, with a width equal to trench
top width plus two metres on either side centred on the pipeline centreline.
Further, all stumps will be grubbed from areas of the construction Right-of-way,
where Right-of-way grading will be required. Outside of these areas to be
graded and the mentioned trench strip, at the option of CONTRACTOR, the
stumps may either be grubbed or cut off to ground level. Any stump cut off must
be left in a condition suitable for rubber-tyred pipeline equipment traffic.
4.4.2
All grubbed stumps, timber, bush undergrowth and root cut or removed from the
Right-of-way shall be disposed of in a manner and method satisfactory to
COMPANY, land-owner and/ or tenant, and Government Authorities having
jurisdication and as soon as practical after the initial removal. In no case, it shall
be left to interfere with the grading and laying operations. Whenever stumps are
grubbed and a hole is left in the ground, CONTRACTOR shall back-fill the hole
and compact it to prevent water from gathering in it and creating a big hole.
4.4.3
CONTRACTOR shall grade the pipeline Right-of-way as required for proper

installation of the pipeline, for providing access to the pipeline during
construction, and for ensuring that the pipeline is constructed in accordance with
the good engineering and construction practices.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 11 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
4.4.4
CONTRACTOR shall grade sharp points or low points, without prejudice to

section 6.0 of this specification, to allow the pipe to be bent and laid within the
limits set forth in these specifications and drawings as regards the minimum
elastic curvature permitted, and shall drill, blast or excavate any rock or other
material which cannot be graded off with ordinary grading equipment in order to
make an adequate working space along the pipeline.
4.4.5
No temporary or permanent deposit of any kind of material resulting from

clearing and grading shall be permitted in the approach to roads, railways,
streams, ditches, drainage ditches and any other position which may hinder the
passage and/or the natural water drainage.
4.4.6
The Right-of-Way clearing and grading operations shall in no case involve

embankment structures of any type and class without prior approval of the
authorities having jurisdiction over the same.
4.4.7
In the case of natural or artificial deposits of loose soil, sand, heaps of earth, or
other fill materials, these shall be removed till stable natural ground level is
reached so as to ensure the construction of the pipeline ditch is in stable ground.
4.4.8
In the case of Right-of-Way clearing and grading on hillside or in steep slope

areas, proper barriers or other structures shall be provided to prevent the
removed materials from rolling downhill. The Right-of-Way crossfall shall not
exceed 10%.
4.4.9
Wherever the pipeline Right-of-Way runs across plantations, alongside

farmyards, built up areas, groups of trees, horticultural spreads, gardens, grassfields, ditches, roads, paths, railways or any other area with restrictions of some
kind, CONTRACTOR shall grade only the minimum area required for digging
and constructing the pipeline. In the said places, CONTRACTOR shall carry out
the works in such a way that damage done from the pipeline construction is
kept to a minimum.
4.5
Provision of Detours
CONTRACTOR shall do all necessary grading and bridging at road, water and
other crossings and at other locations where needed, to permit the passage of
its men and equipment. It is understood that the CONTRACTOR has recognised
such restricctive features of the Right-of-Way and shall provide the necessary
detoors and execute the works without any extra cost to COMPANY. Public
travel shall not be inconvenienced nor shall be wholly obstructed at any point.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 12 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
CONTRACTOR at his own cost shall furnish and maintain watchman detours,
lanterns, traffic lights, barricades, signs, wherever necessary to fully protect the
public.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for moving its equipment and men across
or around watercourses. This may require the construction of temporary bridges
or culverts. Temporary bridging or access to fording required for Right-of-Way
crossing water courses shall be constructed. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that
such temporary works shall not interfere with normal water flow, avoid overflows,
keep the existing morphology unchanged and shall not unduly damage the
banks or water courses. No public ditches or drains shall be filled or bridged for
passage of equipment until CONTRACTOR has secured written approval of the
Authorities having jurisdiction over the same. CONTRACTOR shall furnish
COMPANY a copy of such approval.
4.6
Steep and Rocky Terrain

Grading operations could normally be carried out along the Right-of-way with
mechanical excavators or manually. In certain areas, grading may have to be
resorted to exclusively by blasting.
In rough or steep terrain, CONTRACTOR may have to grade access roads and
temporary bypass roads for its own use. Where such access roads do not fall on
the Right-of-Way, CONTRACTOR shall obtain necessary written permission
from land owners and tenants and be responsible for all damages caused by the
construction and use of such roads, and at no extra cost to COMPANY,
Wherever rocky terrain is encountered, grading shall be carried out in all types of
solid rocks which cannot be removed until loosened by blasting, drilling, wedging
or by other recognised means of quarrying solid rocks.
Where use of explosives is required in connection with Right-of-Way grading
and trenching, CONTRACTOR shall comply fully with requirements of the use of
explosives as provided under clause 6.3 of this Specification.
4.7
Off Right-of-Way Damages

CONTRACTOR shall confine all its operations within limits of the Right-of-Way.
Any damage to property outside ROW shall be restored or settled to the
CONTRACTOR's account.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 13 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
CONTRACTOR shall promptly settle all off Right-of-Way damage claims.

Should CONTRACTOR fail to do so, COMPANY shall give written notice to
CONTRACTOR that if CONTRACTOR does not settle such claims within seven
days after such notice, COMPANY shall have the authority to settle claims from
the account of the CONTRACTOR.
5.0
HANDLING, HAULING, STRINGING AND STORING OF MATERIALS.
5.1
General
The CONTRACTOR shall exercise utmost care in handling in pipe and other
materials. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for all materials and their
identification until such time that the pipes and other materials are installed in
permanent installation. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for materials,
however, method of storage shall be approved by COMPANY.
CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the COMPANY for the cost of replacement of
all COMPANY supplied materials damaged during the period in which such
materials are in the custody of the CONTRACTOR. It shall be CONTRACTOR's
responsibility to unpack any packing for the materials supplied by COMPANY.
5.1.2
Document6
"Taking Over" of Line Pipe

The following stipulations shall apply in case CONTRACT provides for supply of
line pipe, bare and/or corrosion coated, by COMPANY.
CONTRACTOR shall receive and 'take over' against requisition, line pipe from
the COMPANY's designated place(s) of delivery as defined in the CONTRACT.
CONTRACTOR shall perform visual inspection of the bare pipes and coating of
the corrosion coated pipes, as the case may be, in the presence of COMPANY
and all damages shall be recorded. In the case of corrosion coated pipes
CONTRACTOR at his option may carry out holiday detection at a prescribed set
voltage and record such holidays, in the presence of COMPANY, at the time of
'taking over'. However, if CONTRACTOR proposes to perform only visual
inspection of coating, then repair of all holidays found at the time of laying the
pipeline shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to
COMPANY. The CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to extra compensation for
repair and rectification of defects recorded at the time of taking over as per the
rate set forth in the "CONTRACT". Repair of all damages after taking over the
delivery of the materials shall be to the CONTRACTOR'S cost. In case of delay
in handing over of COMPANY supplied material, CONTRACTOR shall be fully
responsible for stopping and rearranging means of transportation at no extra
cost to the COMPANY.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
5.2
Handling and Hauling of Line Pipe
5.2.1
Bare Pipe
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 14 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
CONTRACTOR shall unload, load, stockpile and transport the bare pipes using
suitable means and in a manner to avoid denting, flattening, or other damage to
pipes. Pipe shall not be allowed to drop or strike objects which will damage the
pipe but shall be lifted or lowered from one level to another by suitable
equipment. Lifting hooks when used, shall be equipped with a plate curved to fit
the curvature of the pipe. In loading pipe on trucks each length shall be lowered
to position without dropping and each succeeding length shall rest on special
supports on the truck and shall be separated from the adjacent pipes. After
loading, suitable chains and padding shall be used to tie the load securely to
each bolster. Pipes, when stock piled, shall be placed on suitable skids to keep
them clear of the ground and flood water. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all
necessary timber or other materials required for the stock-piling. While stacking,
the number of allowable layers of bare pipes shall be calculated as per API
RP5L1 and shall be agreed with COMPANY. The stacks must be properly
secured against sliding and shall consist of pipes of the same diameter and wall
thickness. Adjacent stacks of pipes having different dimensional characteristics
shall be clearly separated.
Pipes which are damaged at the time of delivery or "taking-over" (when line pipe
is supplied by COMPANY), particularly those which are dented, buckled, or
otherwise permanently deformed, must be stacked separately and may be
transported to the sites only when these defects have been repaired or
eliminated.
5.2.2
Corrosion Coated Pipes

The CONTRACTOR shall load, unload, transport and stockpile the coated pipes
using approved suitable means and in a manner to avoid damage to the pipe
and coating. CONTRACTOR shall submit to the COMPANY, a complete
procedure indicating the manner and arrangement used for handling and
stacking of coated pipes for COMPANY approval prior to commencement of
handling operations.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 15 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Use of vaccum lifting equipments are preferred. Hooks may also be used for
handling the pipes provided they have sufficient width and depth to fit the inside
of the pipe and covered with soft material like rubber, teflon or equivalent, so as
not to cause damages to bevel or pipe ends. During hoisting, cables/wire ropes
shall have sufficient inclination compared to pipe axis so that they do not come
into contact with external coating.
Coated pipes may be handled by means of slings and belts of proper width
(minimum 60mm) made of non-metallic/non - abrasive materials. In this case,
pipes to be stacked shall be separated row by row to avoid damage by rubbing
the coated surface in the process of taking off the slings. Use of round sectional
slings are prohibited.
During handling, suitable handling equipment with proper length of booms shall
be used. Fork lifts may be used provided that the arms of the fork lift are
covered by suitable pads preferably rubber. Before lifting operations it is
essential to ensure that the pipe surface is free from foreign material with sharp
edges. Belts/slings when used shall be cleaned to remove hard materials such
as stone, gravel etc. Coated pipes shall not be bumped against any other pipe
or any other objects. Rolling, skiding or dragging shall be strictly forbidden.
Coated pipes at all times shall be stacked completely clear from the ground so
that the bottom row of pipes remain free from any surface water. The pipes shall
stacked at a slope so that driving rain does not collect inside the pipe.
The coated pipes at all times shall be stacked by placing them on ridges of sand
free from stones and covered with a plastic film or on wooden supports provided
with suitable cover. This cover can, for example, consist of dry, germ free straw
with a plastic film, otherwise foam rubber may be used. The supports shall be
spaced in such a manner so as to avoid permanent bending of the pipes,
particularly in case of small diameter pipes with low wall thickness. The pipes
shall be stacked so that the uncoated bevelled ends are in line at one end thus
making differences in length clearly noticeable.
Stacks shall consist of limited number of layers so that the pressure exercised
by the pipe's own weight does not cause damages to the coating. Each pipe
section shall be separated by means of spacers suitably spaced for this
purpose. Stacks shall be suitably secured against falling down and shall consist
of pipe sections having the same diameter and wall thickness. The weld bead of
pipes shall be positioned in such a manner so as not to touch the adjacent
pipes.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 16 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Coated Pipes stacked in open storage yards/dump yards shall be suitably

covered on top to decrease direct exposure to sunlight.
The ends of the pipes during handling and stacking shall always be protected
with bevel protecters.
The lorries/rail wagons shall be equipped with adequate pipe supports having as
many round hollow beds as the number of pipes to be placed on the bottom of
the lorry bed. Supports shall be provided for at least 10% of the pipe length.
These supports shall be lined with a rubber protection and shall be spaced in a
manner as to support equal load from the pipes. The rubber protection shall be
free from all nails and staples where pipes are in contact. The second layer and
all subsequent layers shall be separated from other layers with adequate
number of separating layers of protective material such as straw in plastic
covers or otherwise to avoid direct touch between the coated pipes.
All stachions of lorries/rail wagons used for transportation shall be covered by
non-abrasive material like rubber belts or equivalent. Care shall be exerclsed to
properly cover the top of the stanchions and convex portions such as
reinforcement of the truck/rail wagon only, rivets etc. to prevent damage to the
coated surface.
5.3
Stringing of Pipe
Pipes shall be unloaded from the stringing trucks and lowered to the ground by
means of by means of boom tractor or swinging crane or other suitable
equipment using lifting devices as mentioned earlier. Dragging or sliding of pipe
shall not be permitted. Special precaution shall be taken during stringing of
corrosion corrosion coated pipe as per the special requirements of previous
para. Stringing of pipe shall only be carried out in daylight and after clearing and
grading operations have been completed. Pipes shall not be strung along the
ROW in rocky areas where blasting may be required, until all blasting is
completed and the area cleared of all debris.
The stringing of the pipe on the ROW shall be done in such a manner so as to
cause the least interference with the normal use of the land crossed and to
avoid damage to and interference with the pipes. The sequence of pipes must
be interrupted at suitable intervals, spaced to coincide with passages, roads,
railwys, water crossings as well as at other places if requested by landowner /
tenants to permit use of land.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 17 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
In case line pipe supply is by different manufacturers s, CONTRACTOR shall

string all line pipes of one manufacturer before commencing the stringing of line
pipes of another manufacturer.
When parallel pipelines are being constructed, bumping against and contact
with the strung sections of pipe shall be avoided, whether the stringing of the
pipes for the individual lines is carried separately or simultaneously.
The pipe lengths shall be properly spaced in order to make easier the handling
during the welding phase.
It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to see that pipe is strung as
per the approved drawings for the proper placement of pipe by size, thickness,
grade and other specifications. Any additional handling of pipes due to failure to
comply with the requirements shall be at the CONTRACTOR's expense.
5.4
Repair of Damaged pipes

After the pipes have been strung along the ROW, they shall be inspected by the
CONTRACTOR and by the COMPANY. All defective pipe ends shall have to be
repaired as per the directions of the COMPANY or as per the requirements of
this specification.
5.5
Materials other than linepipe

CONTRACTOR shall receive and take over against requisition all COMPANY
supplied materials from COMPANY's designated place(s) of delivery as defined
in the CONTRACT. CONTRACTOR shall perform visual inspection and defects,
if any noted, shall be recorded separately. The CONTRACTOR shall be entitled
to extra compensation for repair and rectification of such defects at the rates set
forth in the "CONTRACT".
The CONTRACTOR shall perform the necessary loading, unloading, hauling
from points designated by the COMPANY and storing, if necessary, of all
materials. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise care in handling, storing and
distribution of materials in order to avoid damage and deterioration of these
materials and prevent their theft or loss.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 18 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Materials excluding line pipe shall be stored in sheltered storages. Such

materials shall not be strung on the Right-of-Way but shall be transported in
covered conveyances for use only at the time of installation.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all valves and whenever applicable, other
materials are fitted with suitable end covers of the type approved by COMPANY.
Materials with worked surfaces such as flanges, pipe fittings, etc. must be
stacked and handled so as to avoid contact with the ground or with substances
that could damage them.
The manufacturer's instructions regarding temperature and procedure for storing
materials which are subject to alteration of the original properties and
cnaracteristics did to unsuitable storage must be strictly complied with and, if
required, an adequate heat conditioning shall be provided for these materials.
When supplied in containers and packages they must not be thrown or
dropped, not handled using hooks which could damage the container or the
materials, either during loading/unloading or during successive handling, until
their final use.
Storage of coating materials which are susceptible to deterioration or damages
especially due to humidity, exposure to high thermal cconditions or other
diverse weather conditions, shall be suitably stored and protected. These
materials shall be kept permanently in store, supported above the ground in a
dry place, protected against the weather and transported for use only at the time
and in quantities necessary for immediate application. Deteriorated materials
shall not be used and replaced with no extra cost to COMPANY.
5.6
Identification
CONTRACTOR shall provide all pipes, bends, etc. greater than 2" with serial
numbers as soon as possible and measure their length and state is on the
pipes, etc. Pipes to be bent shall be measured prior to bending. Identification
(i.e. letter, number and length) shall be indelible.
All serial numbers shall be recorded in a list, which shall also state appurtenant
pipe numbers.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 19 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Beside recording the stamped - in pipe numbers, length of pipe and painted-on
serial numbers, the stamped-in numbers of T-pieces, bends, valves, etc. and the
batch numbers of bends, T-pieces, valves, etc. and the make of valves, shall
also be recorded in said list.
Before a pipe length, pipe end, etc. is cut the painted serial number and
stamped-in pipe number shall be transferred by CONTRACTOR in the presence
of COMPANY to either side of the joint which is to be made by cutting, and the
changes shall be recorded in the above mentioned list stating the (new) length.
The results shall be such that all pipes, pups, etc. of diameter greater than 2"
bear clear marks painted on.
CONTRACTOR shall explicitly instruct his staff that parts which cannot be
identified must not be removed, except after permission by COMPANY.
As a general rule parts must be marked as described above before being
moved. In no conditions may unmarked parts be incorporated into the WORK.
6.0
TRENCHING
6.1
Location
CONTRACTOR shall, excavate and maintain the pipeline trench on the staked
center line of the pipeline taking into account the curves of the pipeline.
6.2
Excavation
6.2.1
CONTRACTOR shall, by any method approved by COMPANY, dig the pipeline

trench on the cleared and graded Right-of-Way. In cultivable land and other
areas specifically designated by the COMPANY, top 60mm of the arable soil on
the pipeline trench top and 500mm on either side shall be excavated and stored
separately to be replaced in original position after backfilling and compacting
rest of the trench.
Suitable crossing shall be provided and maintained over the open ROW where
necessary, to pemit general public, property owners or his tenants to cross or
move stock or equipment from one side of the trench to the other.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 20 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Care shall be exercised to see that fresh soil recovered from trenching
operation, intended to be used for backfilling over the laid pipe in the trench, is
not mixed with loose debris or foreign material. The excavated material shall
never be deposited over or against the strung pipe.
6.2.2
In steep slope area or on the hillside, before commencing the works, proper
barriers or other protection shall be provided to prevent removed materials from
rolling downhill.
6.2.3
On slopes where there is danger of landslide, the pipeline trench shall be

maintained open only for the time strictly necessary. Forever, the COMPANY
may require excavation of trench by hand, local route detours and limiting the
period of execution of the works.
6.2.4
In certain slope sections before the trench cuts through the water table, proper
drainage shall be ensured both near the ditch and the Right-of-Way in order to
guarantee soil stability.
6.2.5
All sewers, drains ditches and other natural waterways involved in the execution
of the works shall be maintained open and functional. The same applies to
canals, irrigation canals, pipelines and buried facilities crossed by the ditch for
which temporary pipeline shall be laid, if required, and proper temporary
installations provided.
6.3
Blasting
Blasting for trenching and the related removal of scattered rock and debris
caused by the blasting from the Right-of-Way and/or adjacent property, shall be
performed by CONTRACTOR as part of his work.
Every possible precaution shall be taken to prevent injuries and damages to
persons and properties during blasting operations, which shall be performed in
accordance with Standard Rules for Blasting.
CONTRACTOR shall obtain necessary permits for storage and use of
explosives and comply with the laws, rules and regulations of the respective
Governmental agencies having jurisdiction thereof. No blasting will be allowed
without prior and due notice given by CONTRACTOR to COMPANY,
Government authorities, land-owners, property occupants, adjacent work crew,
and other concerned parties.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 21 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
CONTRACTOR shall employ only such workmen who are experienced in the
type of work to be performed, to supervise, handle and use explosives.
6.3.1
Areas to be blasted are to be categorised as follows:

a)
Where blasting is to be carried out beyond 50 meters away from any

existing pipeline or structures (either above or below ground) the
CONTRACTOR shall submit his proposed blasting procedure and
perform a trial blast for COMPANY's approval.
b)
Where blasting is to be carried out between 50 and 15 meters from any

existing pipeline or structure (either above or below ground) the
CONTRACTOR shall submit a procedure for controlled blasting e.g.
break-holes, slit trench etc. which will also detail out safety precautions to
safeguard the existing pipelines. This procedure will be approved by
COMPANY prior to commencement and performing of trial blasting.
c)
No blasting is allowed within 15 metres of any existing pipeline or

structure (either above or below around).
6.3.2
All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent stones from falling outside
the Right-of-way and in cultivated areas and to avoid any damage to the
installation and properties existing nearby.
6.3.3
Blasting and removal of debris shall be carried out prior to stringing the pipes.
6.3.4
Ground vibration due to blasting near the existing structures shall be

continuously monitored using certified instruments to be provided by
CONTRACTOR and approved by COMPANY and the peak particle velocities
shall not exceed 50 mm/ sec.
COMPANY reserves the right to refuse blasting where possible danger exists to
property, existing utilities or other structures. In such locations other methods of
extracting rock shall be proposed by CONTRACTOR and shall be approved by
COMPANY.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
6.4
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 22 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Normal Cover and Trench Dimensions

The trench shall be excavated to a minimum so as to provide, on both sides of
the installed pipeline, a clearance as indicated in the job standard/ drawings and
to a depth sufficient to provide the minimum cover as indicated below. The
dimensions in the table below shall govern except as noted herein or as shown
on the job standards or detailed construction drawings or as required by
authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is greatest. Minimum depth of cover
shall be measured from the top of pipe corrosion/ concrete weight coating (as
applicable) to the top of undisturbed surface of the soil or top of graded working
strip or top of road or top of rail whichever is lower. Fill material in working strip
shall not be considered to add to the depth of cover. However, surface of fill
material placed to fill hollows may be used to determine the depth of cover
subject to prior approval by COMPANY.
Sl.
No.
Location
Minimum Cover in meters
a)
Industrial, Commercial &

Residential Areas
1.0
b)
Minor Water Crossings/ Canals
1.5
c)
Drainage ditches at road and railroads
1.0
d)
Rocky area
1.0
e)
Uncased/ Cased Road Crossings
1.2
f)
Railroad Crossings
1.4
g)
Other Areas
1.0
For pipelines transporting High Vapour Pressure Hydrocarbons such as liquified

petroleum gas, butane, propane, etc., the minimum cover at locations à' and `c'
above shall be 1.2m.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
6.5
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 23 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Cutting and Removal of Paving

Whenever it is permitted by Authorities and / or COMPANY to open cut a paved
road crossing, or where the line is routed within the road pavement,
CONTRACTOR shall remove the paving in accordance with the restrictions and
requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction thereof or as directed by
COMPANY. The open cut for the road crossing shall be carried out only when
the section of pipeline to be laid is complete. After laying the pipeline, backfilling
shall be immediately performed and all the area connected with the works shall
be temporarily restored.
Throughout the period of execution of such works, CONTRACTOR shall provide
and use warning signs, traffic lights or lanterns, barricades, fencing, watchman,
etc. as required by the local authorities having jurisdiction and/ or COMPANY.
For all roads, paths, walkway etc. which are open-cut, CONTRACTOR shall
provide temporary diversions properly constructed to allow the passage of
normal traffic with the minimum of inconvenience and interruptions.
The paving shall be restored to its original condition after the pipeline is installed.
6.6
Extra Depth and Clearance

At points where the contour of the earth way require extra depth to fit the
minimum radius of the bend as specified or to eliminate unnecessary bending of
the pipe according to customary good pipeline practice, or where a deep trench
is required at the approaches to crossings of roadways, railroads, rivers,
streams, drainage ditches, and the like, CONTRACTOR shall excavate such
additional depth as may be necessary at no extra cost to the COMPANY.
CONTRACTOR shall excavate to additional depth where the pipeline
approaches and crosses other pipelines, sewers, drain pipes, water mains,
telephone, conduits, and other underground structures, so that the pipeline may
be laid with at least 50 centimeters free clearance from the obstacle or as
specified in the drawings, or such greater minimum distances as may be
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 24 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Where the pipeline crosses areas, whose easements specifically require greater
than normal depths of cover, the trench shall be excavated to extra depth in
accordance with the Right-of-way Agreements or as required.
CONTRACTOR shall excavate all such additional depths as may be necessary
at no extra cost to the COMPANY.
6.7
Grades, Bends and Finish of Trench

The trench is to be cut to a grade that will provide a firm, uniform and continuous
support for the pipe. Bends shall be made in the pipe at significant changes in
grade of the trench. COMPANY reserves the right to set the grade of the trench
and locate the bends if so desired, in which case CONTRACTOR shall
excavate, at no extra cost, the trench and bend the pipe to such a grade.
COMPANY desires to reduce to a minimum the required number of cold field
bends to lay the pipe to conform to the general contour of the ground and
maintain a normal cover. This can be accomplished by cutting the trench slightly
deeper at the crest of ridges and by gradually deepening the trench in
aproaches to crossings. Such trenching work shall be done by CONTRACTOR
at no extra cost to the COMPANY.
COMPANY intends that there will be a minmum of hand grading of the trench
bottom. However, to achieve this, CONTRACTOR will have to dig as square a
bottom of the trench as possible with his equipment. This in part can be
obtained by adjusting and adopting the crumbling shoe and digging teeth of the
trenching machines and by use of a drag behind the trenching machines or
manually dressing-up the same. CONTRACTOR shall do such hand work in the
trench as is necessary to free the bottom of the trench from loose rock and hard
clods and to trim protruding roots from the bottom and side walls of the trench.
6.8
Padding
In all cases where rock or gravel or hard soil is encountered in the bottom of the
trench, COMPANY will decide the exact extent of trench padding, that will be
required. The thickness of the compacted padding shall not be less than
150mm. In those areas that are to be padded, the trench shall be at least
150mm deeper than otherwise required, and evenly and sufficiently padded to
keep the pipe, when in place, at least 150mm above bottom of excavated trench.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 25 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Acceptable padding shall be placed under the pipeline before its installation, and
around after installation to establish at both sides and on top of the pipe a
permanent layer of padding. The thickness of compacted padding on top of pipe
corrosion coating shall be at least 150mm. Padding materials that are approved
by COMPANY shall be graded soil/ sand and/ or other materials containing no
gravel, rock, or lumps of hard soil. Sand used for padding shall pass through
sieve size ASTM-10 or ISO-2.00.
When specified in the CONTRACT, rock shield may be used in place of or in
addition to sand padding as indicated above. Such rock shield shall be in
accordance with the specification issued for the purpose and shall be subject to
COMPANY approval.
6.9
Protection of Trench
CONTRACTOR shall keep the trench in good condition until the pipe is laid, and
no claim is to be made to the COMPANY by reason of its caving either before or
after pipe is laid.
All lumber, sheet-piling jacks or other materials, that may be necessary to shore
the trench, in order to prevent caving are to be furnished and removed by
CONTRACTOR.
CONTRACTOR shall dewater if necessary, using well point system or other
suitable systems, shore, or do what else might be required to excavate the
trench, install the pipe in it and backfill the trench in accordance with these
specifications at no extra cost to COMPANY.
6.10
Protection of Underground Utilities and Special Methods

Details of some underground utilities, as far as acquired by COMPANY, shall be
indicated in the Drawings. However, CONTRACTOR shall obtain plans and full
details of all existing and planned underground services from the relevant Local
Authorities and shall follow these plans closely at all times during the
performance of work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for location and
protection of all underground lines and structures. In special locations the use of
trenching machine, backhoe may result in damage to property and subsurface
structures likely to be encountered during excavation. At such places,
CONTRACTOR shall excavate the trench manually to same specification at no
extra cost.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 26 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Where the pipeline crosses other underground utilities/ structures, the

CONTRACTOR shall first manually excavate to a depth and in such a manner
that the utilities/ structures are located.
Temporary under pinning or any other type of supports and other protective
devices necessary to keep the interfering structure intact shall be provided by
the CONTRACTOR at his own cost and shall be of such design as to ensure
against their possible failure.
Despite all precautions, should any damage to any structure/ utility etc., occur,
the Owner/ Authority concerned shall be contacted by the CONTRACTOR and
repair shall forthwith be carried out by the CONTRACTOR at his expense under
the direction and to the satisfaction of COMPANY and the concerned Owner/
Authority. If CONTRACTOR fails to repair in reasonable time, COMPANY
reserves the right to have the repair executed at the cost of the CONTRACTOR.
6.11
Encroachments and Working near other utilities

In locations, where pipeline has to be laid in the body of a road, canal, dyke or
other locations under jurisdiction of Government/ Public Bodies, the
CONTRACTOR shall perform such work without extra compensation, according
to the requirement of concerned Authorities. When it becomes necessary that
CONTRACTOR has to resort to hand digging, well point, erection of sheet piling
or any other special construction methods in these areas, no extra
compensation shall be paid. CONTRACTOR shall contact the Authorities
concerned in order to become familiar with their requirements.
In locations, where the pipeline has to be laid more or less parallel to an existing
pipeline, cable and/ or other utilities in the Right-of-way, CONTRACTOR shall
perform the work to the satisfaction of the Owner/ Authority of the existing
pipeline/ cable/ utility. In such locations CONTRACTOR shall perform work in
such a way that even under the worst weather and flooding conditions, the
existing pipeline/ utilities remain stable and shall neither become undermined
nor have the tendency to slide towards the trench.
CONTRACTOR shall be liable for any damage occuring to, or resulting from
damage to other pipelines, underground structure/ utilities, as laid down in
clause 6.10 of this specification.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
6.12
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 27 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Provisions for negative buoyancy to the pipe

CONTRACTOR shall check if up-floating danger is present in open trench and
then shall take appropriate measures to prevent up-floating such as applying soil
dams and dewatering of trench or temporary filling of water into the line (in
exceptional cases).
In the case of water on the ditch bottom when the pipeline is being laid, the ditch
shall be drained to the extent and for the time required to make a visual
inspection of the ditch bottom. After this inspection, the presence of water will be
allowed provided its level does not cause sliding of the ditch sides and pipe
floating before backfilling when no concrete weighting is provided.
The water pumped out of the ditch shall be discharged into a natural water
course.
Wherever up-floating of the pipeline after backfilling is to be reckoned with, antibuoyancy measures shall be provided by CONTRACTOR for areas indicated in
the drawings or as may be encountered during construction, using one or a
combination of the following methods :
weighting by applying a continuous concrete coating around the pipe;
weighting by installing saddle weights;
installing metal anchors screwed into the suboil in pairs;
deeper burial of pipeline;
provision of select backfill material.
The above provisions shall be in accordance with the relevant specifications

and/ or job standards/ drawings.
7.0
BENDING
CONTRACTOR shall preferably provide for changes of vertical and horizontal
alignment by making elastic bends. CONTRACTOR may provide cold field
bends, at its option for change of direction and change of slope. COMPANY at
its option, may authorise fabricated bends for installation at points where in
COMPANY's judgement the use of such bends is unavoidable.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 28 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Overbends shall be made in such a manner that the center of the bend clears
the high points of the trench bottom. Sag bends shall fit the bottom of the trench
and side bends shall conform and leave specified clearance to the outside wall
of the trench.
7.1
Elastic Bends
The minimum allowable radius for elastic bends in the buried pipeline including
that for continuous concrete weight coated pipe shall be in accordance with
relevant job standards. The elastic bend shall be continuously supported over its
full length. A radius smaller than permitted in elastic bending shall require a cold
bend.
7.2
7.2.1
Cold Field Bends

The radius of cold field bends shall not be less than 40 times the pipe nominal
diameter for pipe diameter 18 inch and above and shall not be less than 30
times the pipe nominal diameter for pipe diameter less than 18 inch.
7.2.2
CONTRACTOR shall use a bending machine and mandrel and employ

recognized and accepted methods of bending of coated pipe in accordance with
good pipeline construction practice. However, bending machines shall be
capable of making bends without wrinkles, buckles, stretching and with minimum
damage to the coating.
7.2.3
CONTRACTOR shall, before the start of the work, submit and demonstrate to
COMPANY a bending procedure which shall conform with the recommendations
of the manufacturer of the bending machine. The procedure shall include
amongst other steps - lengths, maximum degree per pull and method and
accuracy of measurement during pulling of the bend. This procedure and the
equipment used shall be subject to COMPANY's approval.
7.2.4
Pipes with longitudinal welds shall be bent in such a way that the weld lies in the
plane passing through the neutral axis of the bend which shall be installed
positioning the longitudinal weld in the upper quadrants. If horizontal deviations
are to be achieved by joining more adjacent bends, the bending of the pipe
lengths shall be made by positioning the longitudinal welds alternatively 70mm
above and below the plane passing through the neutral axis in such a way that
the bends are welded with the longitudinal welds displaced by about 150mm and
situated in the upper quadrants. In case of vertical bends formed from a number
of pipe lengths, the longitudinal welds shall be positioned on the plane passing
through the neutral axis of the bend to the right and left alternatively.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 29 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
7.2.5
The pads, dies and rolls of the bending equipment shall have relatively soft
surfaces to avoid damage to the pipe coating. Where applicable, fully retaining
bending shoes shall be used. Roller type bending machines are preferred.
7.2.6
The ends of each bent length shall be straight and not involved anyway in the
bending. The length of the straight section shall permit easy joining. In no event
shall the end of the bend be closer than 1.5m from the end of a pipe or within
one meter of a girth weld.
7.2.7
The ovalisation caused on each pipe by bending shall be less than 2.5% of the
nominal diameter at any point. Ovalisation is defined as the reduction or
increase in the internal diameter of the pipe compared with the nominal internal
diameter. A check shall be performed on all bends in the presence of
COMPANY by passing a gauge consisting of two discs with a diameter equal to
95% of the nominal internal diameter of the pipe connected rigidly together at a
distance equal to 300mm.
7.2.8
Cold bent pipes on site shall have the corrosion coating carefully checked with
the aid of a holiday detector for cracks in the coating down to the pipe wall. It
must also be checked whether the coating has disbonded from the pipe wall
during bending by beating with a wooden mallet along the outer radius. Any
defects or disbonding of the coating caused during bending (also forced ridges
in the coating) shall be repaired at the CONTRACTOR's expense in accordance
with COMPANY approved procedures.
7.2.9
When pipelines are laid in parallel, the horizontal bends shall be concentric.
7.3
Miter and Unsatisfactory Bends

All bends showing buckling, wrinkles, cracks or other visible defects or which are
in any way in disagreement, in whole or in part, with this specification shall be
rejected.
No miter bends shall be permitted in the construction of the pipe line.
CONTRACTOR shall cut out and remove any bend or bends which do not meet
the specifications and shall replace the same with satisfactory bends at no
additional cost to the COMPANY. In the event the CONTRACT provides for
supply of line pipe by COMPANY, the pipes required for replacement will be
furnished by COMPANY, but the cost of replacement of such pipes shall be
borne by CONTRACTOR.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 30 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Cutting of factory made bends and cold field bends for any purpose are not
permitted.
8.0
LINING UP
Each length of pipe shall be thoroughly examined internally and externally to
make sure that it is free from visual defects, damage, severe corrosion (sea
water pitting), dirt, animals or any other foreign objects. Each length of the pipe
shall be adequately swabbed, either by use of canvas belt disc of proper
diameter or by other methods approved by the COMPANY. Damaged/corroded
pipes shall be kept separate. Each length of pipe shall be pulled through just
before being welded.
8.1
Pipe Defects and Repairs

It is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to repair all internal and/or external defects.
8.1.1
Acceptability of defects in the pipe detected during inspection at the work site
shall be determined in accordance with latest edition of COMPANY's own
material specification or CODE ANSI B31.8/B 31.4 whichever is more stringent.
8.1.2
The maximum permissible depth of dents in pipes upto and including 12

3/4
is 5mm and for pipes over 12 " OD is 2% of the nominal pipe diameter.
8.1.3
Dents which contain a stress concentrator such as scratch, gauge, arc burn or
groove, and dents located at the longitudinal, spiral or circumferential weld shall
be removed by cutting out the damaged portion of pipe as a cylinder.
8.1.4
Repair on line pipe shall be executed as specified in COMPANY's material

specification or Code ANSI B 31.8/B 31.4, whichever is more stringent. A record
of all repairs is to be maintained by CONTRACTOR. This record, provided with
the pipe identification number is to be submitted to the COMPANY.
8.1.5
If due to cutting or repairs, the pipe identification number is removed, it shall be

reprinted immediately by CONTRACTOR in the presence of COMPANY. In the
event, the CONTRACT provides for supply of line pipe by COMPANY,
CONTRACTOR shall be charged for any pipe length due to loss of identification
number. No pipe without identification number shall be transported and/or
welded into the pipeline.
Document6
3/4"
OD
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 31 OF53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
8.1.6
Repair of damaged pipe ends by hammering and/or heating is not allowed. If the
dented area is minor and at least 200mm away from the pipe end, and the steel
is not stretched, severed, or split in the COMPANY's opinion, the pipe may be
straightened with a proper jack.
8.2
Pipe Handling And Skid Spacing
8.2.1
When lifting pipe, care must be taken not to kink or overstress it. Proper pipe
slings approved by COMPANY shall be used. CONTRACTOR shall submit his
method of skidding and skid spacing for COMPANY's approval. A strip of soft
material shall be placed in between skid and pipe to protect the external coating
of the pipe. The material shall be approved by the COMPANY.
8.2.2
The maximum skid spacing is not allowed before the stringer bead and the top
and bottom reinforcements are completed, provided that the distance between
the incomplete weld and the skid shall not exceed 9 (nine) percent of the skid
spacing.
8.2.3
Skids shall be atleast 1.20 meter long. For pipe with an O.D. of 12-3/4 inch and
larger the skids in contact with the pipe shall have a width of at least 200mm.
For pipe with an O.D. of less than 12 inch the skids in contact with the pipe shall
have a width of atleast 150mm. Pipe supports shall be stable, so that pipe
movement will not cause the supports to move. Skids shall not be removed
under a string before lowering in. The welded pipe shall be maintained on skids
at the minimum distance of 500mm above ground. Crotches shall be installed at
frequent intervals (atleast every 10th support) with a greater number required at
bends and undulation grounds.
8.3
Night Caps
At the end of each day's work or every time when joining and welding operations
are interrupted, the open ends on the welded strings of pipes shall be capped
with a securely closed metal cap or plug as approved by COMPANY so as to
prevent the entry of dirt, water, or any foreign matter into the pipeline. These
covers shall not be removed until the work is to be resumed. The caps/plugs
used shall be mechanical type and shall not be attached to pipe by welding or
by any other means which may dent, scratch or scar the pipe.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
8.4
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 32 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Temporary Caps
Whenever the welded strings of pipes are left open at intervals to be tied in later
after an appreciable time lag, under roads, railroads, rivers, marshy crossings,
ets., temporary caps approved by COMPANY shall be welded to the ends of the
pipe.
9.0
LAYING OF PIPE
9.1
Lowering In Trench
9.1.1
Lowering can start after removal from ditch bottom of all off cuts, pipe supports,
stones, roots, debris, stakes, rock projections below underside of pipe and any
other rigid materials which could lead to perforation or tearing of the coating.
Sand padding and / or rock shield shall be provided as required in accordance
with clause 6.8 of this specification.
9.1.2
Lowering shall follow as soon as possible, after the completion of the joint
coating of the pipeline. In the case of parallel pipelines, laying shall be carried
out by means of successive operations, if possible without interruption.
9.1.3
Before lowering in, a complete check by a full circle holiday detector for pipe
coating and for field joint coating shall be carried out and all damages repaired
at CONTRACTOR's cost. All points on the pipeline where the coating has been
in contact with either the skids or with the lifting equipment during laying, shall be
carefully repaired. If, after checking, it becomes necessary to place the pipeline
again on supports at the bottom of the trench, these must be padded in such a
way as to prevent damage to the coating, thus avoiding necessity for further
repairs when the pipe is finally raised and laid. Before the last operation, a check
must be made of the coating at points of contact with the supports.
9.1.4
Before lowering in, short completed sections of the pipeline shall be cleaned
with compressed air in order to remove all dirt, etc. from the inside of pipe
sections.
9.1.5
The pipeline shall be lifted and laid using, for all movements necessary, suitable
equipment of non-abrasive material having adequate width for the fragility of the
coating. Care shall be exercised while removing the slings from around the
coated pipe after it has been lowered into the trench. Any damage caused to the
coating shall be promptly repaired. Lowering in utilizing standard pipe cradles
shall be permitted if CONTRACTOR demonstrates that pipe coating is not
damaged. No sling shall be put around field joint coating.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 33 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
9.1.6
Wherever the pipeline is laid under tension, as a result of an assembly error (for
example, incorrect positioning of bends, either horizontal or vertical), the trench
shall be rectified or in exceptional cases a new assembly shall be carried out, to
be approved by COMPANY, so that it fits the excavation and the laying bed.
9.1.7
Laying shall be carried out under safe conditions so as to avoid stresses and
temporary deformations of the equipments which may cause damage to the
pipeline itself and to the coating. In localised points where the right-of-way is
restricted to the minimum necessary for the transit of mechanical equipment, the
laying shall be carried out using other suitable means. The pipe shall be placed
on the floor or the excavation, without jerking, falling, impact or other similar
stresses. In particular, care must be taken that the deformation caused during
the raising of the pipe work from the supports, does not exceed the values for
the minimum allowable radius of elastic curvature, so as to keep the stresses on
the steel and on the coating within safe limits. The portion of the pipeline
between trench and bank shall be supported by as many side-booms as
required and approved by COMPANY for holding the line in gentle S-curve
maintaining minimum elastic bend radius as specified in job standard. Lowering
in and back-filling shall preferably be carried out at the highest ambient
temperature.
9.1.8
The pipeline must be laid without interruption for the whole or the length of
section available. Where water is present, no laying shall be permitted until the
ditch has been drained to the extent and for the time necessary to make visual
inspection possible of the bed on which the pipe is to be laid. Following such
inspections, the presence of water will be permitted, provided that it is not so
high as to cause cave-in of the walls of the trench or floating of the pipeline
before backfilling, when weighting is not provided for the pipe.
9.1.9
CONTRACTOR shall take precautions immediately after lowering in to prevent

the movement of the pipe in trench.
9.1.10
In laying parallel pipelines in the same trench, the minimum distances between
the pipeline indicated in the approved drawings shall be observed. Once the first
pipeline has been positioned, it shall in no way be disturbed by laying of the
subsequent pipeline.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 34 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
At every seven meters along the trench sand/earth filled bags shall be placed
between the parallel pipelines so as to ensure maintenance of the minimum
stipulated distance between the parallel lines.
9.2
Overhead Sections and Sections in Tunnel
9.2.1
The following works shall be completed before proceeding with the assembly
and laying of overhead pipelines :
9.2.2
Construction of the pipe support structures or of mounts on supports.
Paints and/or coating of the pipework, as indicated in the engineering

specification.
The erection of the supports shall be carried out taking care that the elevation
and alignment is in accordance with the drawings.
In the case of metal work supports, prefabrication and/or assembly shall take
into account the maximum allowed free span and the supports shall not interfere
with the pipeline welds.
9.2.3
In case roller supports are used, the roller shall be lubricated, then checked for
smooth rotation and, in case of seizure, the defect shall be repaired or roller
shall be replaced. In the case of overhead section where the pipeline is slanting,
the alignment of the end supports shall be made after placing the pipeline in
position. Before installation of the pipe section, all the rollers shall be perfectly
centered acting on the seat of the support plates.
The above alignment operations shall be carried out before connecting the
overhead section with the ends of the buried section.
9.2.4
Lifting, moving and laying of the pipeline shall be carried out in accordance with
the provisions of clause 9.1.5.
An insulation sheet shall be installed to isolate the pipe from the support or
support from the earth.
The sheet shall be hard polyethylene at least 5mm thick.
It shall extend at least to 1cm outside the saddles or clamps.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 35 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
9.2.5
Moving supports, if any, shall be centered on their support and allow for a
movement of at least 300mm in both directions.
9.2.6
A comprehensive report/method statement on the laying operation to be used

shall be submitted to the COMPANY well in advance for approval. The report as
a minimum shall include, but not limited to the following:
(a)
Method of installation by lifting (as a preferred method).
(b)
Pulling method and related calculations, whenever lifting method cannot

be used.
(c)
Pulling device and its characteristics
(d)
Method of anchoring the pulling device
(e)
Characteristics of the pulling rope
(f)
Braking device, if any
(g)
Pipeline assembly systems.
10.0
BACK-FILLING
10.1
Backfilling shall not be done until the pipe and appurtenances have the proper fit
and the pipe is following the ditch profile at the required depth that will provide
the required cover and has a bed which is free of extraneous material and which
allows the pipe to rest smoothly and evenly. Before any such work is done, it
shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to first secure the approval of
COMPANY. If any backfilling is done without COMPANY's approval, COMPANY
will have the right to require removal of the backfill for examination, and the cost
of such uncovering and refilling shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. Backfilling of
trench in water courses shall be carried out as per the relevant specifications
issued for the purpose.
10.2
Backfilling shall be carried out immediately after the pipeline has been laid in the
trench, inspected and approved by the COMPANY, so as to provide a natural
anchorage for the pipeline, thus avoiding long exposure of coating to high
temperature, damaging actions of adverse weather conditions, sliding down
of trench sides and pipe movement in the trench. If immediate back filling is
not possible, a covering of atleast 200mm of earth, free of rock and hard lumps
shall be placed over and around the pipe and coating.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 36 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
On no account the top soil from the ROW be used for this purpose. In general,
the trench shall be dry during backfilling. Deviations there of must have prior
approval of the COMPANY. The backfill material shall contain no extraneous
material and/or hard lumps of soil which could damage the pipe / coating or
leave voids in the backfilled trench. After the initial backfill has been placed into
the trench to a level slightly above the surrounding ground, CONTRACTOR shall
compact the backfill material. The surplus material shall be neatly crowned
directly over the trench and the adjacent excavated areas on both sides of the
trench as per clause 6.2.1, to such a height which will, in COMPANY's opinion,
provide adequately for future settlement of the trench backfill during the
maintenance period and thereafter. The crown shall be high enough to prevent
the formation of a depression in the soil when backfill has settled into its
permanent position. Should depression occur after backfill, CONTRACTOR
shall be responsible for remedial work at no extra cost to COMPANY. Surplus
material, including rock, left from this operation shall be disposed of to the
satisfaction of land owner or authority having jurisdiction at no extra cost to the
COMPANY.
For further requirements reference is made to Section of 14.0 "Clean-up and
Restoration of Right-of-Way" of this specification.
10.3
Rock, gravel, lumps of hard soil or like materials shall not be backfilled directly
onto the pipe unless 'padding' and/or rock shell has been provided as per
Section 6.0 of this specification. When "Padding" as described in Section 6.0 of
this specification is to be used, the following shall be applicable.
Where rock, gravel, lumps of hard soil or like materials are encountered at the
time of trench excavation, sufficient earth, sand or select backfill materials shall
be placed around and over the pipe to form a protective cushion extending at
least to a height of 150mm above the top of the pipe. Select backfill materials for
padding that are acceptable to COMPANY shall be soil, sand, clay or other
material containing no gravel, rock or lumps or hard soil. Whether such padding
material would be taken from the adjacent spoil bank or imported from
elsewhere shall be directed by COMPANY. All these works shall be carried out
by CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to COMPANY. Loose rock may be returned
to the trench after the required selected backfill material has been placed,
provided the rock placed in the ditch will not interfere with the use of the land by
landowner, or tenant.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 37 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
10.4
When the trench has been dug through drive ways or roads, all backfills shall be
executed with sand or a suitable material as approved by COMPANY and shall
be thoroughly compacted. In certain cases, special compaction methods, such
as moistening or ramming of the backfill in layers may be required by
COMPANY. COMPANY and any public or private authority having jurisdiction
over a road, street or drive way may require that the surface of the backfill be
graveled with crushed rock or some other purchased material and the road shall
be repaved. In such instances, CONTRACTOR shall comply with said
requirements at no extra cost to COMPANY.
10.5
Trenches excavated in dykes which are the property of railways or which are
part of main roads shall be graded and backfilled in their original profile and
condition. If necessary, new and/or special backfill materials shall be supplied
and worked-up. The materials required may include gravel, special stabilization
materials or stabilized mixtures. However, special processing and/or compacting
methods shall require the approval of COMPANY and/or competent authorities.
10.6
The trench in irrigated and paddy fields shall be backfilled to within 300mm of
the top, then rammed and further backfilled until the trench is completely
backfilled. Surplus material remaining after the operation shall be spread over
the ROW as specified in Section 14.0 "Clean-up and Restoration of Right-ofWay", of this specification.
10.7
At the end of each day's work, backfilling shall not be more than 500 meters
behind the head end of lowered-in pipe, which has been padded and approved
for backfill. The backfill shall be maintained by CONTRACTOR against
washouts etc., until the completion and final acceptance of the work by
COMPANY.
10.8
CONTRACTOR shall furnish materials and install breakers in the trench in steep
areas (slope generally 10% and more) for the purpose of preventing erosion of
the backfill. The type of breakers installed shall be as per the approved
drawings. Breakers shall be constructed of grout bags filled with a mixture of 4:1
Sand:Portland cement at COMPANY's direction. CONTRACTOR may propose
other methods such as foam dams etc. which shall be subject to approval by
COMPANY. Such works shall be at no extra cost to COMPANY.
CONTRACTOR shall pay attention to the direction of backfilling in such steep
areas.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 38 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
10.9
When backfilling the trenches in sloping terrains or steep areas, where in the
opinion of the COMPANY, the backfill may be washed out of the trench, sheet
piling or other effective water breakers across the trench shall be provided by
CONTRACTOR. This is to divert the flow of water away from the trench into
normal drainage followed before laying the line. In no case, the water is to be
drained via the trench or via channels other than those followed before the line
was laid.
10.10
CONTRACTOR shall leave the pipe uncovered at certain locations to allow

COMPANY to survey the center line of the pipe and the level of the pipeline in
the backfilled trench. Within 48 hours after backfilling, COMPANY shall have
carried out such survey and informed CONTRACTOR of any realigning, if
required. Thereafter CONTRACTOR shall compact the backfill.
The maximum allowable deviation from the centerline for land sections as
staked out by COMPANY and as referenced by CONTRACTOR after backfilling
is limited to:
Pipeline dia upto and including 24"
Pipeline greater than 24"
:
:
200mm
300mm
10.11
Before backfilling of the trench, CONTRACTOR shall comply with the

requirements of Clause 6.12 of this specification.
10.12
Stabilization of backfill shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR in sandy

areas and other such places to obtain consolidated cover as directed by the
COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall carry out the stabilization over the pipeline at
no extra cost to COMPANY.
The backfill shall be stabilized preferably with 150mm layer of marl, mattresses
of gatch other than straw or other stable materials. The width of stablisation shall
be atleast 5.0 meters on either side of the pipeline, plus one meter for every 10
meters height of dune (where the line passes through the dune areas).
10.13
Document6
Temporary workers shall be installed during backfilling and the survey as per
clauses 10.10 to locate the pipeline axis. These markers shall then be replaced
with permanent pipeline markers.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 39 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
10.14
Backfilling shall be preferably carried out at the highest ambient temperature.
11.0
TIEING-IN
11.1
The unconnected sections of the pipe line at various locations have to be tied in
after the sections are coated, lowered and backfilled. The sections to be
connected shall have at the ends, sections of over lapping, uncovered pipe of
sufficient length to absorb, without inducing excessive stresses in the steel,
small displacements necessary for perfect alignment and connection of the
ends.
11.2
Tie-in shall preferably be carried out at ambient temperatures corresponding to

the average operating temperature in the case of a pipeline conveying fluids at
normal temperatures and at the maximum ambient temperature in the case
where the pipeline is carrying fluids at high temperature.
11.3
CONTRACTOR shall carry out tie-in-welding (including necessary cutting,

bevelling, grinding of pipe weld seams and line-up etc.) cleaning, priming,
coating and backfilling for the tie-in portion as per relevant specifications.
CONTRACTOR shall also excavate the required bell-holes for the connection.
Bell-holes made to facilitate welding shall provide adequate clearance to enable
the welders to exercise normal welding ability and skill. All tie-in welds shall be
radiographically examined.
11.4
The tie-in should be done in such a way as to leave a minimum of strain in the
pipe. If necessary, with respect to the trench, realigning of the pipe shall be done
to eliminate force or strain in the pipe by the CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to
COMPANY.
11.5
If a pup end cannot be avoided for tie-in, the minimum length that shall be
added is 1.0 meters and two or more such pups shall not be welded together. All
cut-off lengths greater than 1.0 meters shall be moved ahead in order to be
welded into the pipeline at a suitable location. Tie-in with two or more pups may
be used provided that they each have minimum length of 1.0 meter and are
separated by an entire length of pipe. In no case more than three (3) welds shall
be permitted on a 10 meter length of pipeline.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 40 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
11.6
In connecting pipes, special items, fittings and equipment where different wall
thickness are to be welded, CONTRACTOR shall follow the procedures
indicated in ANSI B31.8/ANSI B31.4, as applicable. The required tapering shall
be done by CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to COMPANY.
11.7
For tie-in of adacent sections of pipeline already pressure tested, the pup used
for tie-in shall be of single length or off-cuts of pipe which have already been
hydrostatically tested. CONTRACTOR shall take care that sufficient number of
pretested pipes with different wall thicknesses are readily available.
12.0
SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS ON THE PIPELINE.
12.1
General
12.1.1
In addition to constructing the pipeline, CONTRACTOR shall also install certain

other auxiliary facilities and appurtenances.
CONTRACTOR shall do all work necessary at each of the installations to
provide facilities which are complete in all respects and ready for operation.
Without limiting the generality thereof, the work required to complete the
installations shall, where applicable, include all site surveys, site preparation,
filling, grading, fencing, foundations, installation of block valves, side valves,
pipework, pipe supports, pressure gauges, mechanical facilities, civil work,
painting, installation of all electrical equipments, motors, cables, conduIt, wiring
and fixtures and hooking up of same; installation of all instruments, piping,
valves and fittings; mount all instruments and make all piping and electronic
connections, etc.
On completion, all elements of each installation shall be checked our and tested
for full and correct operation in the presence of and to the satisfaction of
COMPANY. All work shall be carried our strictly in accordance with the
appropriate codes, the approved drawings, and this and other related
specifications.
CONTRACTOR shall fabricate all piping and install valves and fittings as
required by the detailed engineering drawings prepared by him and approved by
COMPANY.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 41 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Stainless steel lines will be "swaged" using permanent fittings installed with a
hydraulic device.
Cold bending for the fitting of 1/2" and 1/4" pipes is allowed when special
bending tools are used with guides to prevent flattening. The minimum radius
allowed shall not be less than R = 10 D where D is the outside diameter of pipe.
The bending tool shall be subject to COMPANY's approval.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the piping assemblies are not in a strain prior
to the final bolting or welding. CONTRACTOR shall also ensure that all
equipment and piping are thoroughly swabbed clean of all dust, refuse, weldingspatter, scale, or any potentially detachable matter prior to the tie-in or final
bolting.
12.1.2
Dimensional tolerances.
These tolerances apply to in line items and corrections for other lines. These
tolerances can be executed on items such as vents, drains, dummy supports,
field supports, temperature and pressure connections, where the deviation will
not affect another spool.
12.1.3
a)
General dimension such as face to face, face or end to end, face or end
to center, and center to center : 3 mm.
b)
Inclination of flange face from true in any direction: 4 mm per meter.
c)
Displacement of branch connection from indicated location: 1.6mm.

When multiple branches are involved, the displacement of the branches
shall not exceed 3mm from a common point.
d)
Rotation of flange bolt holes shall not exceed 1.6 mm.
Flanged connections.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all flange faces are parallel and centered,
according to standard practice, prior to final bolting. CONTRACTOR shall not
use bolting forces as a means for attaining alignment. A gasket of proper size
and quality shall be installed between the flanges at each joint.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 42 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Bolts shall be tightened in diagonal sequence and shall be centered with equal
amounts of thread visible on both sides. Bolts shall be uniformly tightened to
produce a leak-proof joint. Bolts that yield during tightening shall be remover and
discarded. It is mandatory that a torque wrench is used for bolt tightening.
12.1.4
Threaded connections.
Damaged threads shall be cut from the end of a run and the pipe shall be
rethreaded.
CONTRACTOR shall properly align all threaded joints. Pipe entering unions
shall be true to centreline so the union will not be forced during tightening. The
threaded pipe shall not project through fittings to cause interference with valves
or other operating mechanisms.
Except for the threaded connections of instruments, which will require periodic
testing and maintenance, all threaded connections shall be seal welded. The
latter joints shall be made up without pipe joint compound and with a minimum
of oil from the threaded cutter. Seal welds should taper into the pipe with as little
discontinuity as possible and should cover all threads.
12.1.5
Welded connections
Where the Ends of the piping components being welded have an internal
surface misalignment exceeding 1.6mm, the wall of the component extending
internally shall be trimmed by machining so that the adjoining internal surfaces
will be approximately flush. All welding shall be performed in accordance with
the specification " Specification for welding of pipelines and related facilities".
Tie - ins between fixed points shall be made at maximum ambient temperature.
.
12.1.6
Civil Work
Civil work shall be provided in accordance with Specifications issued for the
purpose.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
12.1.7
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 43 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Painting
All exposed surfaces like piping, valves, structures, and miscellaneous
appurtenances shall be painted in accordance with the specifications issued for
this purpose. The corrosion coating on pipe surface will end approximately 0.3
meter above the finish grade and it will be necessary for CONTRACTOR to
provide a clean interface at the junction of the protective coating and the paint.
12.1.8
Coating of buried-Installations, etc.

All buried valves, insulating joints, flowtees, bends, other in-line fittings and
appurtenances shall be coated with minimum three coats of approved quality of
coal-tar epoxy or any other equivalent suitable COMPANY approved coating at
no extra cost to the COMPANY. For buried pipes either heat shrink tapes
conforming to COMPANY's specification or coal tar epoxy shall be used.
CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY a report used alongwith all the test
certificates. Only after obtaining written approval from the COMPANY,
CONTRACTOR shall commence the work of coating.
12.1.9
Clean-up
After all required tests have been concluded satisfactorily CONTRACTOR shall
clean up the site as laid down in the specifications issued for the purpose. The
Site finish shall be graded in accordance with the approved drawings.
12.2
Installation of Valves and Valve Stations
12.2.1
Block and sectionalising valve stations shall be installed as shown on the

approved drawings. It is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to have the units
completely assembled, tested and made fully functional including all related
instruments etc.
12.2.2
The civil and structural work shall be carried our in accordance with the relevant
specifications issued for the purpose and in accordance with the approved
drawings as directed by COMPANY. This work as a minimum shall include
clearing, grading, fencing, foundations, etc, as required. All above ground
structures shall be painted as per the specification and color code given by the
COMPANY.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 44 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
12.2.3
A suitable concrete foundation as directed by COMPANY shall be constructed

on which the valve shall be firmly installed, after embedding an insulating sheet
of hard polyethylene with a thickness of atleast 5mm or equivalent. Such
insulating sheet is also to be installed under pipe clamps, etc.
12.2.4
Valves with flow arrows shall be installed according to the normal flow in the
pipeline. During, welding, the valves shall be in fully open position. In addition all
manufacturer's instructions shall be followed.
Care shall be taken to avoid entry of sand particles etc. to valve body, seals etc.
during transportation, storage, assembly and installation.
12.2.5
For valves and piping installed below ground and/or above ground, the anticorrosion coating/painting shall be as per the requirements of the relevant
specifications issued for the purpose. The anti-corrosion coating below ground
shall extend upto 300mm above grade at the lowest point.
12.2.6
Sectionalizing valves shall be installed on sections of the pipeline in the

horizontal position only or with an inclination not greater than that allowed by the
valve manufacturer. Installation shall be done in such a way that there is no
strain in the welded joint while the pipeline at upstream and downstream sides
are straight.
12.2.7
All valves shall always be handled using equipment and methods to avoid
impact, shaking and other stresses. In particular, the equipment and tools for
lifting and handling shall never be done through handwheel, valve stem, joints
and other parts which may suffer damage.
12.2.8
All sectionalizing valve and any other inline assemblies shall be prefabricated
and tested hydrostatically ex-situ as per applicable specification. All such
assemblies shall be installed at the locations shown in the drawings only after
successful completion of the hydrostatic test and dewatering. Thereafter the
ends of the assembly shall be closed off. CONTRACTOR shall carry out
necessary excavation, cutting, bevelling and welding of the tie-ins required for
the installation of such assembly. The tie-in joints shall be radiographically
examined over 100% length and also 100% ultrasonically examined prior to
backfilling. All works shall be executed in accordance with the relevant
specifications issued for the purpose.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 45 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
12.3
Installation of Scraper Launchers and Receivers
12.3.1
Scraper stations shall be fabricated and installed as per the approved drawings
and whenever applicable as per the requirements of clause 12.2 of this
specification. It is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to have the units completely
assembled, tested and made fully functional including all instruments & related
piping.
12.3.2
The civil and structural works for the scraper stations shall be carried out as per
the relevant specifications, in accordance with the drawings and as directed by
the COMPANY. The work as a minimum shall include site survey, site
preparation, clearing, grading, fencing, foundations, etc. as required.
12.3.3
It shall be CONTRACTOR's responsibility to maintain elevations shown on the

approved drawings and to carry out any pipework adjustments, necessary for
this purpose. Field cuts shall be square and accurate and field welds shall not
be performed under stress of pipe ends.
12.3.4
The painting for the scraper stations shall be carried out as per "Specifications
for Painting". The underground sections shall be coated as specified for the
pipeline upto atleast 300mm above grade.
12.3.5
The hydrostatic testing of the scraper stations shall be executed after installation
in accordance with the relevant specification issued for the purpose.
12.4
Installation of Insulation Joints
12.4.1.1
Insulation joints shall be installed at the locations shown in the drawings.

CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval from the COMPANY before installation of
the insulation joints.
12.4.2
Handing and installation of the insulating joints shall be carried out with all
precautions required to avoid damage and excessive stresses and that the
original pup length is not reduced.
12.4.2
The insulating joints and the welded joints shall be protected by external coating
as per relevant specifications issued for the purpose.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
12.4.4
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 46 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
The in-line inserting shall be made on the buried pipeline; care shall be taken to
operate at an external temperature as close as possible to the pipeline operating
temperature.
The joints shall be inserted on straight sections and laid on a fine sand bed.
12.4.5
During the execution of the in-line connection welding, the propagation of heat
shall be avoided. To achieve this, the joint shall be kept cold by means of nags
continuously wetted.
12.4.6
Insulating joints shall be electrically tested before welding into the pipeline. The
electrical conductance test shall be carried out using a Megger. Measurement of
the insulation resistance across the joints shall be approx. one (1) Mega Ohm.
The tests shall be repeated after installation and welding of the joint into the
pipeline to verify that the assembly is undamaged.
13.0
WORKING SPREAD LIMITATIONS

CONTRACTOR shall, in general, observe the following maximum distances
between the working mainline spread:
Between ROW grading, clearing and backfilling
:40 Kms
Between backfilling and final clean-up
:15 Kms
The above limitations do not apply to point spreads such as continuous rock
blasting, river crossing, etc.
Any deviations from the above shall require prior approval of COMPANY.
COMPANY reserves the right to stop the work, in case the approved spread
limitations are exceeded and CONTRACTOR shall not be paid any
compensation for stoppage of work.
14.0
CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION OF RIGHT OF WAY
14.1
CONTRACTOR shall restore the ROW and all sites used for the construction of
pipelines, water crossing and other structures in accordance with COMPANY's
instructions, and deliver them to the satisfaction of COMPANY.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
14.2
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 47 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Surplus Materials
The following stipulations shall apply in case CONTRACT provides for supply of
line pipe, bare and/or corrosion coated, by COMPANY.
All surplus and defective materials supplied by COMPANY shall be collected by
CONTRACTOR and delivered to designated stockpile areas.
All Pipe-ends shorter than 1.0m shall be returned to COMPANY being scrap, all
pipes longer than 8.0m shall be reconditioned (bevels, coating, provided with
pipe letter, number and length) and be returned to COMPANY's designated
stockpile areas together with all undamaged, unused COMPANY supplied
materials. All pieces between 1.0 and 8.0m shall be charged to the
CONTRACTOR by COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall record these returned
materials in the Material account, to be prepared by him.
14.3
Disposal
14.3.1
All surplus and defective materials supplied by CONTRACTOR and all trash,
refuse and spoiled materials shall be collected and disposed of by
CONTRACTOR.
14.3.2
The ROW shall be cleared of all rubbish, broken skids, empty cans, card board,
sacks, stamps, trash, and leftover construction material. All burnable matter shall
be burned, but only after obtaining appropriate permits for such burning. If
burning is not allowed, CONTRACTOR shall haul the clean-up material to
approved dumping area. All scrap metal and unburnable material shall be
disposed of, in an appropriate manner, but never be buried in the ROW.
14.3.3
Surplus soil can only be removed from the Owner's plot after authorisation by
COMPANY.
14.3.4
All dumping fees connected with the disposal of materials shall be to the
account of CONTRACTOR.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 48 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
14.3.5
All loose stones and rock exposed by the construction operations and scattered
over the ROW or adjacent grounds shall be removed by CONTRACTOR and be
transported to a location considered suitable by the authorities having
jurisdiction, for satisfactory disposal. For stones, gravel or other hard material
which may be buried in the trench the provisions of the specifications shall apply
with the understanding that the use of the land by the land-owner and/or tenant
will not be interfered with.
14.4
Temporary Structures
All auxiliary structures such as bridges, culverts, sheet piling, posts, signs, etc.,
which were erected or installed by CONTRACTOR as temporary measure, shall
be removed. However, it may be necessary to remove the fence of ROW during
the maintenance period.
14.5
Repair of Damage
Damages to roads, bridges, private property shall be repaired by
CONTRACTOR. All fences and other structures which are damaged during
construction shall be restored to original condition.
Slopes, water course sides or banks which have been partially or totally
demolished during the execution of the works shall be properly consolidated and
restored without waiting for their natural consolidation and settling.
All boundary stones which have been moved or removed during the work must
be reset in their original location to the satisfaction of the landowner concerned.
14.6
On completion of clean-up, the ROW shall be restored to such stable and

usable condition as may be reasonably consistent with the condition of the ROW
prior to laying the pipeline. The COMPANY shall be completely indemnified and
held harmless by CONTRACTOR from any and against all claims, demands,
losses, expenses etc. that may arise in this behalf or the COMPANY may
anyway suffer or sustain, relative to, arising out of, or in connection with same.
The COMPANY may require from the CONTRACTOR signed Releases from
land owners regarding satisfactory indemnification and restoration of their lands.
14.7
Special precautions shall be taken near slopes prone to erosions and land
slides. All necessary steps shall be taken to ensure the rapid growth of grass by
providing wicker barriers and by regulating the drainage of surface waters.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 49 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
14.8
All cadastral or geodetric markers which may have been removed during the
execution of the works shall be restored in their exact position.
14.9
Ditches for which no instructions for restoration have been issued, or restoration
cannot be done according to existing banks because of the absence of it, shall
be restored as instructed by COMPANY. The bed of ditches crossed by the
pipeline, shall be cleaned over the full width or the ROW, also outside the ROW
if necessary. This restoration might involve the supply and installation proper
materials for backfill and protection, sodding or other precautions to prevent
erosion or guarantee the stability. Work has to be done after deliberation and
acceptance of the authorities and COMPANY. Other field drains have to be
restored by hand and/or special equipment to be used for that purpose as soon
as possible and if necessary, also outside the ROW.
14.10
Any subsidence, cave-ins, wash-outs, which have been caused during the
pipeline construction and maintenance, caused by whatever reason within the
edge of ditches and open drains, shall be repaired by CONTRACTOR
immediately or at first notice given by COMPANY.
14.11
After the clean-up, the ROW of pastures has to remain fenced and to be
removed during the maintenance period. When agricultural and other traffic
(requested by tenant) have to cross the ROW the cross-overs have to be fenced
with the same material as the ROW. If necessary, special materials have to be
used to allow traffic on the cross-over. Fencing of the right-of-way as specified
shall not be removed until CONTRACTOR has obtained written permission by
COMPANY. In general this has to be done during the maintenance period.
14.12
All openings in or damage to the fence or enclosures shall be repaired by

installing new fencing of quality which shall be at least equal to the parts
damaged or removed. Provisional gates shall be removed and replaced with
new fencing. All repairs to fences and enclosures shall be carried out to the
complete satisfaction of COMPANY, land owner and/or tenant.
14.13
If, in the opinion of COMPANY, the sod in pasture land has been damaged by
vehicles and wheel tracks are visible, the ROW shall be tilled with a disc-harrow
or rotary cultivator several times. The damaged sod shall be firmly cut up and
thoroughly mixed through the top-soil. In general the ROW has also to be
ripped. After this procedure no closed-in layers must be found and sufficiently
loose top-soil 25 to 30cm thick must be present. The whole procedure has to be
approved by COMPANY. Subsequently, the entire ROW which is part of pasture
land, shall be prepared for seeding and fertilized according to the instructions of
COMPANY.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 50 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
14.14
In crop fields the tillage shall consist of passing over the land several times with
a disc harrow, cultivating with a spading machine, or plow, to a depth of approx.
20 cm. In general the ROW has also to be ripped. After this cultivation process
no closed-in layers must be found in the ROW. The equipment used and
methods adopted shall require the approval of COMPANY. Ripping, has to be
done with rippers with a distance of 50 cm between the ripper blades. The type
to be used shall be approved by COMPANY.
14.15
A sapling of any plant/tree uprooted or cut during construction shall be planted

along the route as per the direction of the COMPANY and in accordance with
the Forest Preservation Act, 1981. The cost of sapling and its plantation shall be
to CONTRACTOR's account.
14.16
The ROW and the backfilled trench in particular has to be finished in such a way
that after settlement of the soil the fields are at their original level.
If during the maintenance period certain parts of the ROW are lower than the
original level, COMPANY can order CONTRACTOR to bring these parts to the
original level. If the level of the ROW for clean-up is ordered by COMPANY, risk
of above mentioned additional restoration shall not be to CONTRACTOR's
account.
In cases where heavy damage has occurred to the structure of the subsoil as a
result of special circumstances, COMPANY reserves the right to order
CONTRACTOR to carry out special work. Said special work can include:
-
spading with dragline (depth 30 - 80 cm);
spading with dragline (depth 80 - 100 cm);
fertilizing;
cover with sand.
If during clean-up operations, soil shortages become apparent outside the

trench, CONTRACTOR shall supplement said soil shortage using suitable
materials, approved by COMPANY.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 51 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
If site and/or climatic conditions should render this necessary, COMPANY shall
have the right to order CONTRACTOR to suspend certain parts of the WORK
related to the clean-up and postpone it to a later date.
14.17
Soil Surplus
If on site, as a result of the work and after careful backfilling and compacting, a
sub-soil surplus exists, this shall be worked up by grading and compacting below
the sub-soil top layer and as a rule this shall be done in the same plot of land. It
shall not be permitted to remove the surplus from the plot concerned, unless it
concerns rejected soil which has to be removed. Working up surplus soil or
removal of rejected soil shall be considered to pertain to the WORK.
To work a soil surplus into the ground CONTRACTOR shall remove an
additional strip of top soil beside the trench. Next the upper layer of sub-soil shall
also be removed. Both soil types shall be stored separately across a width
depending on the size of the soil surplus. The soil surplus shall then be
distributed across the trench thus widened, after which it shall be graded and
compacted and subsequently the top layer of sub-soil and the top-soil shall be
replaced in the correct order, in accordance with the Specifications.
In case COMPANY has given prior permission for mixed excavation of the subsoil as well as in cases where COMPANY deems mixed excavation permissible,
the above provision of separate storage of the upper layer of sub-soil shall not
apply to the working up of the soil surplus.
In cases where the soil surplus can be worked up in other plots where soil
shortages have arisen due to the WORK, this shall only be done after prior
permission by land-owner, land-user and COMPANY.
14.18
Soil Shortages
If due to unforeseen circumstances during backfilling and compacting there isn't
enough soil to fill the trench properly, or to install the crown height as stipulated,
CONTRACTOR shall supply the necessary backfill material.
Soil shortages shall be supplemented and applied before the top-soil is
replaced.
Document6
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 52 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
The soil to be supplied shall be worked up in those locations and into those
layers where a soil shortage has been established. The quality of the
supplemented soil shall be equal to that of the shortage.
15.0
MAINTENANCE DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

Defects liability Period (defined as period of liability in the CONTRACT) means
the period of 12 months calculated from the date certified in the Completion
Certificate.
COMPANY reserves the right to carry out instrumented pigging survey of the
completed pipeline.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for making good with all possible speed at
his expense any defect in or damage to any portion of the Work which may
appear or occur during the Defects liability Period and which arise either:
a)
b)
from any defective material (other than supplied by COMPANY),

workmanship or design (other than a design made, furnished or specified
by COMPANY and for which CONTRACTOR has disclaimed
responsibility in writing), or
from any act or omission of CONTRACTOR done or omitted during the
said period.
If such defect shall appear or damage occur, COMPANY shall forthwith inform
CONTRACTOR thereof stating in writing the nature of the defect or damage.
If any such defect or damage be not remedied within a reasonable time,
COMPANY may proceed to execute the work at CONTRACTOR's risk and
expense, provided that he does so in a reasonable manner. Such defect or
damage can be, but is not limited to:
Document6
Clean up of ROW, including water courses
Sagging or sinking of site level or pipe supports
Sliding of ditch banks
Repair of fencing or removal of construction fencing
Repaving of pavements, repair of pavements, repair of coating,

painting
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
(ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 53 OF 53
MEC/S/05/62/01
REVISION A
Realigning markers, signs
Leak/burst of pipe, leaking flanges, washouts
Short-circuit in casings
Construction defects such as dents, ovality, welding offsets/defects, etc.

detected during intelligent pigging survey.
etc.
Company reserves the right to have the required Computerised Potential

Logging Test executed during the DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD and whenever
conditions are more favorable for this job. The work shall at or as soon as
practicable after the expiration of the Defects Liability Period be delivered to
COMPANY in the conditions required by the CONTRACT, fair wear and tear
excepted, to the satisfaction of COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall finish the
work, if any outstanding, at the date of completion as soon as possible after
such date and shall execute all such work.
Document6
SPECIFICATION
FOR
WELDING OF ONSHORE GAS PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO. MEC/S/05/62/02 A
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
\\Akjha\work contrac\standard TS for Pipe Line WC (Vol-II) MASTER FOLDER\02A welding onshore gas pipeline\Welding of Onshore Gas Pipelines with addendum - I 02A.doc
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
WELDING OF ONSHORE GAS

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 1 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION 0
CONTENTS
01.
SCOPE
02.
APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS & SPECIFICATIONS
03.
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
04.
WELDING CONSUMABLES
05.
EQUIPMENT & ACCESSORIES
06.
WELDING PROCESSES
07.
BEVEL CLEANING AND BEVEL INSPECTION
08.
ALIGNMENT AND SPACING
09.
WEATHER CONDITIONS
10.
WELDING
11.
HEAT TREATMENT
12.
INSPECTION AND TESTING
13.
REPAIR OF WELDS
14.
DESTRUCTIVE TESTING
15.
ULTRASONIC INSPECTION
16.
RADIOGRAPHY
Sheet No.
Rev
Description
PREPARED BY
Date
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 2 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION 0
CONTENTS
Annexure-I
Electrode Qualification Test Record
Annexure-II
Stress Relief Heat Treatment Procedure Specification
Annexure-III
Welding Procedure Qualification Test Record
Annexure-IV
Welder Qualification Test Record
Annexure-V
Welders Identification Card
Annexure-VI
Radiographic Procedure for Pipe Welding
PREPARED BY
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
01.
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 3 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
SCOPE
This specification stipulates requirements for fabrication of all types of welded
joints in carbon steel piping systems covering the pipeline and its facilities, which
will include the following:
All line pipe joints of the longitudinal and circumferential butt welded and
socket welded types.
Branch connections
Joints in welded/ fabricated piping components.
Attachments of castings, forgings, flanges and supports to pipes.
Attachments of smaller connections for vents/ drain pipes and tappings for
instrumentation.
Note: Any approval accorded to the Contractor shall not absolve him of his
responsibilities and guarantees.
02.
APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS & SPECIFICATIONS

All welding works, equipment for welding, heat treatment, other auxiliary
functions and the welding personnel shall meet the requirements of the latest
editions of the following codes, standards and specifications as listed below :-
03.
Code for Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping System (ANSI B31.8).
Standard for welding of Pipelines and Related Facilities (API 1104).
Specification for welding Electrodes and Filler Materials (ASME Sec. II C).
Non Destructive examination (ASME Sec. V).
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
In general carbon steel is used in this specification. The details of material

specifications will be given in a welding Specification Chart attached
alongwith other project data sheets.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE

PIPELINES
04.
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 4 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
The CONTRACTOR will keep a record of test certificates of all the materials
for the reference of the welding engineer.
WELDING CONSUMABLES
The electrode shall be suitable for the welding process recommended and base
metal used. Physical properties of the welds produced by an electrode
recommended for the welding of a particular base metal shall not be lower than
the minimum values specified for the base metal unless otherwise specified in
Welding Specification Chart and shall correspond to the physical properties of the
class of electrode adopted. The choice of electrode shall be made after
conducting the required tests on the electrodes as per relevant standards, and
shall be the sole prerogative of the COMPANY.
The welding electrodes/ filler wires supplied by the CONTRACTOR shall conform
to the class specified in the welding specification chart. The materials shall be of
the make approved by the COMPANY.
The CONTRACTOR shall submit batch test certificates from the electrode
manufacturers giving details of physical and chemical tests carried out by them
for each batch of electrode to be used.
Electrode Qualification test records shall be submitted as per Annexure-I with
respect to the electrodes tested by the CONTRACTOR and submitted for
approval of the COMPANY.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide at his own expenses all the welding
consumbles necessary for the execution of the job such as electrodes, oxygen,
acetylene etc. and the same shall be approved in advance by the Purchaser/
Consultant.
The electrodes used shall be free from rust, oil grease, earth and other foreign
matter which affect the quality of welding.
All electrodes shall be purchased in sealed containers and stored properly to
prevent deterioration. The electrodes removed from the containers (except
cellulosic coated electrodes) shall be kept in holding ovens at the temperature
recommended by the electrode manufacturer. Ovens shall be used for low
hydrogen electrodes only. Out-of-the oven time of electrodes, before they are
consumed, shall not exceed the limits recommended by the electrode
manufacturer. The electrodes shall be handled with care to avoid any damage to
the flux covering.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 5 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
Different grades of electrodes shall be stored separately. Cellulosic electrodes

used shall however be used as per specific recommendations of manufacturer.
04.01
Shielding Gas
The composition and purity of shielding gas when required by the welding
processes other than shielded metal arc welding, when permitted by the
COMPANY, shall have prior approval of the COMPANY. Where appropriate,
gases or gas mixture of the following quality shall be used.
a)
argon complying with BS 4365
b)
carbon dioxide complying with type 1 specified in BS 4105
c)
gas mixture that have been proved to be satisfactory as a result of

procedure approval tests.
When a gas mixture is used which has specified additions, e.g. 2% 02,5% CO2
the variation of such addition shall not exceed 10% of that stated. Moisture
content shall correspond to a dew point of - 30C or lower.
05.
EQUIPMENT & ACCESSORIES
5.1
The CONTRACTOR shall have sufficient number of welding and cutting

equipment, auxiliaries and accessories of sufficient capacities to meet the target
schedule.
5.2
All the equipment for performing the heat treatment including transformers,
thermocouples, pyro-meters, automatic temperature recorders with suitable
calibration arrangements, etc. shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR, at his
own expenses and these shall bear the approval of the COMPANY. Adequate
means of measuring current and voltage shall be available.
5.3
Redoing of any work necessitated by faulty equipment or operation used by the

CONTRACTOR, will be done at his own expense.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 6 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
06.
WELDING PROCESSES
6.1
Welding of various materials under this specification shall be carried out using
Shielded Metal Arc Welding process (SMAW) with the approval of the
COMPANY.
6.2
The welding processes to be employed are given in the welding specification

chart. Any deviation desired by the CONTRACTOR shall be obtained through the
express consent of the COMPANY.
6.3
Automatic process shall be employed only with the express approval of the
COMPANY. The welding procedure adopted and consumables used shall be
specifically approved.
6.4
A combination of different welding processes or a combination of electrodes of

different classes/ makes could be employed for a particular joint only after
qualifying the welding procedures to be adopted and obtaining the approval of
the COMPANY.
07.
BEVEL CLEANING AND BEVEL INSPECTION

Line pipe supplied by COMPANY shall have bevel ends as specified in the
applicable specification for Line Pipe attached with the Bid Package. Any
modification thereto, if required by CONTRACTOR due to his special welding
technique shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost.
Before welding, all rust and foreign matter shall be removed from the bevelled
ends by power operated tools. This shall be effected inside and outside and for a
minimum distance of 25mm from the edge of the weld bevel. The bevels shall be
thoroughly inspected at this stage. If any of the ends of the pipe joints are
damaged to the extent that, in the opinion of COMPANY, satisfactory weld
spacing cannot be obtained and local repair by grinding cannot be successfully
done, the damged ends shall be cut and re-bevelled to the satisfaction of the
COMPANY, with an approved bevelling machine. Manual cutting and weld
repairs of bevels is not allowed. Should laminations, split ends or inherent
manufacturing defects in the pipe be discovered, the lengths of pipe containing
such defects shall be removed from the line to the satisfaction of COMPANY. On
pipes which have been cut back, a zone extending 25mm back from the new
field bevel, shall be ultrasonically tested to the requirement of the line pipe
specification to ensure freedom from laminations. The new bevel shall be
subjected to 100% visual and 100% dye penetrant/ MPI tests. A report shall be
written for all testing and records kept.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
08.
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 7 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
ALIGNMENT AND SPACING

Immediately prior to line-up CONTRACTOR shall inspect the pipe ends inside
and outside for damage, dents, laminations etc. Pipe for welding shall be set up,
correctly spaced, allowing for temperature changes during welding, in correct
alignment and shall in no circumstances be sprung into position. Temporary
attachments of any kind shall not be welded to the pipe. Welds joining the
sections of the pipelines, valve installation or similar welds classified as tie-in
welds shall be made in the trench. Otherwise the alignment and welding shall be
made alongside the ditch with the pipe supported on skids and back pad or other
suitable means approved by COMPANY, at least 500mm above the ground,
unless approved by the COMPANY in specific cases.
Seam orientation of welded pipe shall be selected to ensure that at the
circumferential welds, the longitudinal welds shall be staggered in the top 90 of
the pipeline, or 250mm whichever is the lesser. A longitudinal joint shall pass an
appurtenance of a structural element at a minimum distance of 50mm. Should a
section of the line containing uncompleted welds fall from the skids, the
CONTRACTOR shall immediately inform COMPANY.
Every effort shall be made to reduce misalignment by the use of the clamp and
rotation of the pipes to obtain the best fit. For pipe of same nominal wall
thickness off-set shall not exceed 1.6mm. The off set may be checked from
outside using dial gauges. Any branch connection, sleeve, etc. shall be atleast
150mm from any other weld. The welds for fittings shall be so located that the toe
of the cold dressing is permissible only in cases of slight misalignment and may
only be carried out with a bronze headed hammer. Hot dressing shall not be
permitted. When welding pipes of different wall thickness (as directed by
COMPANY) a special transition piece shall be used. This shall have a minimum
of 1:4 taper. The welds shall be subject to both ultrasonic and radiographic
inspection.
The root gap shall be accurately checked and shall conform to the qualified
welding procedure. The use of internal line-up clamps is mandatory for pipe
diameters 10" and above. However, in some cases (tie-in welds, flanges, fittings,
diameter of pipe 10" etc.) where it is impossible to use internal clamps, an
external line-up clamp may be used.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 8 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
The internal line-up clamp shall not be released before the entire root pass has
been completed.
When as external line-up clamp is used, all spaces between bars or atleast 60%
of the first pass shall be welded before the clamp is released and the pipe
remaining adequately supported on each side of the joint.
Segments thus welded shall be equally spaced around the circumference of the
pipe. Slag, etc. shall be cleaned off and the ends of the segments shall be
prepared by grinding, so as to ensure continuity of the weld bead.
09.
WEATHER CONDITIONS
The parts being welded and the welding personnel shall be adequately protected
from rain and strong winds. In the absence of such a protection no welding shall
be carried out. The completed welds shall be suitably protected in case of bad
weather conditions.
10.0
WELDING
10.1
Root Pass
a)
Root pass shall be made with electrodes/ filler wires recommended in the
welding specification chart attached along with other project data sheets.
The size of the electrodes used shall be as per the approved welding
procedure.
b)
Position or roll welding may be permitted. Separate procedures shall be

submitted and qualified for up hill, down hill, vertical down and roll welding.
The vertical up method of welding shall be sued for the root pass of the
tie-ins, special crossings, fittings and special parts, filled welds, repairs
and when an external line up clamp is used. The down hill welding may be
used for root run welding of tie-ins and special crossings when (a) the
edges are machined or have equivalent preparation (b) line up clamps are
used and the fit up is geometrically and mechanically similar to one of the
oridinary line welding without misalignment or uneveness.
c)
The root pass of butt joints shall be executed properly so as to achieve full
penetration with complete fusion of the root edges. Weld projection inside
the pipe shall not exceed 3mm wherever not specified by the applicable
code.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
10.2
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 9 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
d)
Any deviation desired from the recommended welding technique and

electrodes indicated in the welding specification chart shall be adopted
only after obtaining express approval of the COMPANY.
e)
Welding shall be continuous and uninterrupted during a pass.
f)
On completion of each run, craters, welding irreigularities, slag, etc., shall

be removed by grinding and chiselling.
g)
While the welding is in progress care shall be taken to avoid any kindof
movement of the components, shocks, vibration and stresses to prevent
occurance of weld cracks.
h)
Fillet welds shall be made by shielded metal arc welding process

irrespective of the thickness and class of piping. Electrode size shall not
exceed 3.25mm diameter for socket joints. Atleast two passes shall be
made on socket weld joints
i)
Peening shall not be used.
Joint Completion
In case of manual welding, the first pass shall be carried out by a minimum of two
welders, working simultaneously and so placed as to cause minimum distortion
of the pipe.
The number of welders and the allowable welding sequences shall be as those
laid down in the qualified welding procedure specification. Once the deposit of
the first pass has been started, it must be completed as rapidly as possible,
reducing interruptions to the minimum. The welding and wire speed shall be
approximately same as that established in the qualified welding procedure
specification.
The pipe shall always be adequately supported and must not be pumped or
shaken during welding. The clamp shall be removed, as indicated in clause 8.0
above. Before starting the second pass, the first pass shall be cleaned and
flattened with rotating grinders.
The interruption between completion of the first pass and starting the second
pass shall be as stated in the procedure specification, normally not exceeding
four minutes.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 10 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
For crack prevention a top and bottom reinforcement of at least one electrode
shall be applied before lowering the pipe on the skid.
The welding speed selected shall enable production of a bead which is
sufficiently thick and which shows no undercutting.
The time lapse between second and third pass shall be as stated in the
procedure specification, normally not exceeding five minutes. After completion of
the third or following passes, welding operations may be suspended, so allowing
the joint to cool down, provided that the thickness of the weld metal deposited is
equal to at least 50% of the pipe thickness. Upon restarting, depending on the
materials, wall thickness and welding process, a preheating to atleast 100C
shall be carried out. Subsequent passes up to weld completion shall be protected
to avoid rapid cooling, if meteorological conditions so dictate. Cleaning between
passes shall be done carefully so as to reduce the possibility of inclusions.
Electrodes starting and finishing points shall be staggered from pass to pass.
Arc-strikes outside the bevel on the pipe surface are not permitted. Arc - strike or
arc-burn on the pipe surface outside the weld, which are caused accidentally by
electrical arcs between the electrodes, electrode holder, welding cable shall be
removed by grinding in accordance with a procedure approved by COMPANY
and the repair checked by ultrasonic, radiographic, magnetic particle or
dyepenetrant tests which the COMPANY feels necessary. The pipe wall
thickness after grinding shall not be less that the minimum thickness limit
permitted for the pipe. Repair of arc-strikes by welding is prohibited.
The completed weld shall be carefully brushed and cleaned and shall appear free
from spatters, scales, etc.
These requirements apply not only to completed welds but also to the bare strip
at least so wide so as to allow full skid examination at both ends of the pipe to
allow a good ultrasonic inspection when it is required.
11.0
HEAT TREATMENT
11.1
Preheating
a)
Preheating requirements for the various materials shall be as per the

welding specification chart.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
11.2
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 11 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
b)
Preheating shall be performed using resistance or induction/ heating

methods. Preheating by gas burners, utilising acetylene or propane gas
may also be carried out. Oxypropane gas may be used with the
permission of the COMPANY under careful supervision.
c)
Preheating shall extend uniformly to atleast three times the thickness of

the joint, but not less than 50mm, on both sides of the weld.
d)
Preheating temperature shall be maintained over the whole length of the

joint during welding. Temperature indicating crayons or other temperature
indicating devices shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR to check the
temperature.
Postweld Heat Treatment

a)
Post weld heat treatment, wherever required for joints between pipes and
fittings, pipe body and supports shall be carried out by the
CONTRACTOR at his expense as per the relevant specifications,
applicable standards and the instructions of the COMPANY.
b)
The heat treatment of welded joints shall be carried out as per the
requirements laid down in ANSI B31.8 and other special requirements
mentioned in welding specification chart.
c)
The CONTRACTOR shall submit for the approval of the COMPANY, well
before carrying out actual heat treatments the details of the post weld heat
treatment procedure, as per Annexure-II attached, that he proposes to
adopt for each of the materials/ assembly/ part involved.
d)
Post weld heat treatment shall be done in a furnace or by using an electric

resistance or induction heating equipment, as decided by the COMPANY.
e)
While carrying out local post weld heat treatment, technique of application
of heat must ensure uniform temperature attainment at all points of the
portion being heat treated. Care shall be taken to ensure that width of
heated band over which specified post weld heat treatment temperature is
attained is atleat as that specified in the relevant applicable standards/
codes.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 12 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
The width of the heated band centred on the weld shall at least be equal
to the width of weld plus 2" (50mm). The temperature gradient shall be
such that the length of the material on each side of the weld, at a
temperature exceeding half the heat treatment temperature, is atleast 2.5
rt wherer is the bore radius and t is the pipe thickness at the weld.
f)
Throughout the cycle of heat treatment, the portion outside the heat band
shall be suitably wrapped with insulation so as to avoid any harmful
temperature gradient on the exposed surface of pipe. For this purpose
temperature at the exposed surface of the pipe shall not be allowed to
exceed 400C.
g)
The temperature attained by the portion under heat treatment shall be

recorded by means of thermocouple pyrometers. Adequate number of
thermocouples shall be attached to the pipe directly at equally spaced
locations along the periphery of the pipe joint. The minimum number of
thermocouples attached per joint shall be 2 upto 10" dia and 3 for 12" dia
and above. However, the COMPANY can increase the required minimum
number of thermocouples to be attached, if found necessary.
h)
Automatic temperature recorders which have been suitably calibrated

shall be employed. The calibration chart of each recorder shall be
submitted to the COMPANY prior to starting the heat treatment operation
and its approval shall be obtained.
i)
Immediately on completion of the heat treatment, the post weld heat

treatment charts/ records alongwith the hardness test results on the weld
joints (whenever required as per the welding specification chart) shall be
submitted to COMPANY for its approval.
j)
Each joint shall bear an identification number which shall be maintained in

the piping sketch to be prepared by the CONTRACTOR. The joint
identification number shall appear on the corresponding post weld heat
treatment treatment charts. The same identification numbers shall also be
followed for identification on corresponding radiographic films. The chart
containing the identification number and piping sketch shall be submitted
to the COMPANY in suitable folders.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 13 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
k)
Vickers hardness/ Brinnel hardness of the heat affected zone as well as of

the weld metal, after heat treatment shall be measured using a suitable
hardness tester and shall not exceed the maximum hardness specified in
the welding specification chart. The weld joint shall be subjected to reheat
treatment, when hardness measured exceeds the specified limit, at the
CONTRACTOR's own expense.
l)
The CONTRACTOR shall arrange for the hardness testing and shall
maintain the records of all the joints tested. These records shall be
checked by the COMPANY.
12.0
12.1
General
a)
The COMPANY's Inspector shall have free access to all concerned areas,
where the actual work is being performed. The CONTRACTOR shall be
also provide the COMPANY's inspector all means and facilities necessary
to carry out inspection.
b)
c)
The COMPANY is entitled to depute its own inspector to the shop or field
where pre-fabrication and erection of pipelines are being done, with (but
not limited to) the following objectives :i.
To check the conformance to relevant standards/ specifications

and suitability of various welding equipment and the welding
performance.
ii.
To supervise the welding procedures qualification.
iii.
To supervise the welder's performance qualification.
iv.
To carry out visual/NDT examination of the weldings.
v.
To check whether shop/ field welding is being executed is in

conformity with the relevant specification and codes of practice
followed in pipe construction.
CONTRACTOR shall intimate sufficiently in advance the commencement

of qualification tests, welding works and acceptance tests, to enable the
COMPANY's inspector to be present to supervise the same.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
12.2
12.3
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 14 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
Welding Procedure Qualification

a)
Welding procedure qualification shall be carried out in accordance with the

relevant requirements of API 1104 latest edition or other applicable codes
and other job requirements by the CONTRACTOR at his expense. The
CONTRACTOR shall submit the welding procedure specification chart
format as per Annexure-III (attached) immediately after the receipt of the
order.
b)
COMPANY's inspector will review, check and approve the welding

procedure submitted and shall release the procedure for procedure
qualification tests. The procedure qualification test shall be carried out by
the CONTRACTOR under field conditions at his own expense. A complete
set of test results in format as per Annexure-III (attached) shall be
submitted to the COMPANY's Inspector for approval immediately after
completing the procedure qualification test and atleast 2 weeks before the
commencement of actual work. Standard tests as specified in the code
shall be carried out in all cases. In addition to these, tests, other tests like
radiography, macro/ micro examination, hardness tests, dye penetrant
examination, charphy V-notch etc. shall be carried out on specimens. It
shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to carry out all the tests
required to the satisfaction of the COMPANY's Inspector. The destructive
testing of welded joints shall be as per Clause 14.0.
Welder's Qualification
a)
Welders shall be qualifed in accordance with the API 1104 and other
applicable specifications by the CONTRACTOR at his expense. The butt
weld test pieces of the qualification test shall meet the radiographic test
requirements specified in Clause 12.5 and 16.0 of this specification. The
COMPANY's Inspector shall witness the test and certify the qualification of
each welder separately. Only those welders who have been approved by
the COMPANY's Inspector shall be employed for welding.
CONTRACTOR shall submit the welder qualification test reports in the
standard format as shown in Annexure-IV and obtain express approval,
before commencement of the work. It shall be the responsibility of
CONTRACTOR to carry out qualification tests of welders.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE

PIPELINES
b)
c)
d)
12.4
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 15 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
The welders shall always have in their possession the identification card
as shown in Annexure-V and shall produce it on demand by the
COMPANY's Inspector. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR
to issue the identity cards after it has been duly certified by the
COMPANY.
No welder shall be permitted to work without the possession of identity
cards.
If a welder is found to perform a type of welding or in a position for which
he is not qualified, he shall be debarred from doing any further work. All
welds performed by an unqualfiied welder shall be cut and redone by a
qualified welder at the expense of the CONTRACTOR.
Visual Inspection
Inspection of all welds shall be carried out by COMPANY as per the latest
editions of the applicable codes and specifications. All finished welds shall be
visually inspected for parallel and axial alignment of the work, excessive
reinforcement, concavity of welds, shrinkage, cracks, under-cuts, dimensions of
the weld, surface porosity and other surface defects. Undercutting adjacent to the
completed weld shall not exceed the limits specified in the applicable standard/
code.
12.5
Non Destructive Examination

The non destructive examination shall mainly consist of examination using x-ray
radiography as detailed in Clause 16.0.
Radiographic examination of one hundred percent (100%) girth welds will be
required by the COMPANY.
For 150# Rating Pipeline, welds shall meet the standards of acceptability as set
forth in API 1104. However for higher class rating pipeline welds shall meet the
standards of acceptability as set forth in API 1104 and as well as the
requirements laid in subsequent paragraphs.
The CONTRACTOR shall make all the arrangements for the radiographic
examination of work covered by the specification at his expense.
The COMPANY will review all the radiographs of welds and inform the
CONTRACTOR regarding acceptable welds. The decision of the COMPANY
shall be final and binding in the regard.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 16 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
i.
Any length of inadequate penetration of the root bead as defined by API1104 is not acceptable except that root concavity is allowed as per API
1104.
ii.
Any amount of incomplete fusion at the root of the joint as detailed in para
6.3.4 of API 1104 sixteenth edition May, 1983 (Ref. Fig. 13) is considered
unacceptable.
iii.
Unrepaired burn through areas are unacceptable.
All requirements mentioned in the specification shall be arranged and executed

by the CONTRACTOR through his own resources. In addition, for pipes with wall
thickness 9.5mm and above, ultrasonic inspection is required in the following
cases as per clause 15.0 of this specification.
a)
On the first 100 welded joints corresponding to each automatic (GTAW/

GMAW) welding procedure used.
b)
When 20mm or more are cut from the pipe end as supplied, the ends shall
be ultrasonically inspected for an additional length of 20mm to assure no
lamination exist.
c)
When welds are repaired.
d)
When in the opinion of COMPANY, ultrasonic inspection is required to

confirm or clarify defects indicated by radiography.
e)
When automatic procedure is used at least 10 cm on each weld shall be

ultrasonically inspected at COMPANY's discretion.
In addition, ultrasonic inspection may be required for certain critical weldings of

the pipeline (i.e. tie-ins, welding of valves, flanges) randomly selected at
COMPANY's discretion. All fillet and groove welds other than those radiographed
shall by subjected to dye penetrant/ MP inspection. The non-destructive test
system used for inspecting welds must be approved by the COMPANY.
Weld quality is judged on the basis of the acceptability criteria mentioned below:
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 17 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
Any weld which as a result of radiographic and/ or ultrasonic examination in the

opinion of COMPANY exhibits imperfections greater than the limits stated in API1104 latest edition or as superseded in this article shall be considered defective
and shall so be marked with an identification paint marker.
In addition to the API-1104 requirements, the welds containing cracks including
crater cracks regardless of size of location is unacceptable.
1.
Any length of inadequate penetration of the root bead as defined by API1104 is not acceptable except that root concavity is allowed as per API
1104.
2.
Any amount of incomplete fusion at the root of the joint as detailed in API
1104 is considered unacceptable.
3.
Suitable records shall be maintained by the CONTRACTOR as desired by the

COMPANY on the day to day work done on welding, radiography, ultrasonic
testing. The CONTRACTOR shall present the records to the COMPANY on day
to day basis and whenever demanded, for approval.
12.6
Destructive Testing
The COMPANY has the authority to order the cutting of upto 0.1% of the total
number of welds completed for destructive testing at no extra cost of COMPANY.
The destructive testing of weld joints shall be made as per Clause 14.0.
In addition, welds already cut out for defects for any reason may also be
subjected to destructive testing. The sampling and the re-execution of welds shall
be carried out by the CONTRACTOR at his own expense. If the results are
unsatisfactory, welding operations shall be suspended and may not be restarted
until the causes have been identified and the CONTRACTOR has adopted
measures which guarantee acceptable results. If it is necessary in the
COMPANY's opinion the procedure shall be re-qualified. The weld joint
represented by unsatisfactory welds shall stand rejected unless investigation
prove otherwise.
13.0
REPAIR OF WELDS
13.1
With the prior permission of COMPANY, welds which do not comply with the
standards of acceptability shall be repaired or the joint cut out and re-welded.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 18 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
A separate welding procedure specification sheet shall be formulated and

qualified by CONTRACTOR for repair welds simulating the proposed repair to be
carried out. Separate procedures are required to be qualified for (a) thorough
thickness repair (b) external repair and (c) internal repair. Welders shall be
qualified in advance for repairs. The root pass, for repairs opening the root, shall
be done by the vertical uphill technique. The procedure shall be proven by
satisfactory procedure tests to API 1104 including the special requirement of the
specification, and shall also be subject to metalographic examination, hardness
surveys and Charpy tests to determine the effects of repair welding on the
associated structure.
Root sealing or single pass repair deposit shall not be allowed. Internal root
defects shall be ground thoroughly and welded with a minimum of two passes.
However, while grinding for repairs, care shall be taken to ensure that no grinding
marks are made on the pipe surface anywhere.
The repair shall be subjected, as a minimum requirement to the same testing and
inspection requirements as the original weld. The re-radiography of repaired weld
shall be limited to 6 weld length on either edge of the repaired area. A 100%
ultrasonic test shall be done at the repaired area externally. Any repaired area
that is wide, irregular or rough shall be rejected and a full cut out shall be done.
Repairs are limited to a maximum of 30% of the weld length. Welds not meeting
the specification after one repair shall be cut out depending upon the extent of
repair. A report of all repairs shall be maintained by CONTRACTOR.
13.2
Limitations on Repairs
Only one attempt at repair of any region is permitted. Repairs are limited to a
maximum of 30% of the weld length measuring over cap. Welds containing
cracks shall be cut out and rebevelled to make a joint.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
13.3
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 19 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
Weld Rejected by Accumulation of Defects

Where a weld is rejected by the accumulation of defect clause, as defined by API
1104 and this specification, repairs within these limitations are permitted. Defects
in the filling and capping passes shall be repaired preferentially.
14.
DESTRUCTIVE TESTING OF WELDED JOINT - BUTT WELDS
14.1
Preparation
Having passed the visual and the non-destructive-inspection the test weld shall
be subject to mechanical test.
After satisfactory completion of all visual and non-destructive testing the test weld
shall be set aside for a period not less than 24hours. No further work on the test
weld and no cutting of test specimens from the weld shall be performed until a
period of at least 24 hours has expired.
Weld specimens shall be taken from the positions indicated in Fig. 1 of this
specification from areas as free from defects as possible; for this reason it is
necessary to take the previous non-destructive tests into account. The minimum
number of tests to be carried out is given in Table-1 of this specification.
The tests shall be carried out in laboratories approved by the COMPANY. The
specimens shall be prepared in accordance with the figures given in the
paragraphs which refer to the individual tests.
14.2
Tensile Strength
Specimens shall be taken from the position indicated in Fig. 1 & 1A of this
specification. Two ISO type specimens and two API - type specimens shall be
taken.
14.2.1
The ISO test specimen are shown in Fig. 2 of this specification.

Method
The test shall be carried out in accordance with ISO:375.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 20 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
Table-1
Type and Number of Test Specimens for
Procedure Qualification Test & Production Welds
Number of Specimens
Pipe Size, Out

Side DiamterInches
Tensile
API
Tensile
ISO
Nick
Break
Root
Bend
Face
Bend
Side
Bend
Macro
Bend
Hardness
Impact
Total
Wall Thickness - inch (12.7mm) and Under

Under 2-3/8
2-3/8 to 4-
incl.
Over 4- less
than 12.75
12
24
12- 3/4 and

over
24
44
Wall Thickness - Over inch (12.7mm)

4- and smaller
Over 4- less
than
12-3/4
12
24
12-3/4 and over
24
44
14.3
Nick-Break Test
14.3.1
Preparation
Specimens for Nick-break test with notches thus worked can
break in the base metal, instead of in the fusion zone; therefore an
alternative test piece may be used after authorisation by the
COMPANY with a notch cut in the reinforcement of outside weld bead
to a maximum depth of 1.5mm measured from the surface of the weld
bead.
14.4
14.4.1
Macroscopic Inspection
Preparation
Specimens shall be taken from the positions indicated in Fig. 1 of this
specification and shall be prepared in accordance with ASTM E2 and
E3.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 21 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
The width of the macrosection has to be at least three times the width of the
weld. The section is to be prepared by grinding and polishing and etched to
clearly reveal the weld metal and heat affected zone.
14.4.2
Method
Specimens shall be carefully examined under the microscope, with a
magnification of atleast 25 times (25:1). The COMPANY may ask for a
macrograph with 5 times (5:1) magnification for DOCUMENTATION purposes.
14.4.3
Requirements
Under macroscopic examination, the welded joints shall show good penetration
and fusion, without any defect exceeding the limits stated in the evaluation
criteria of the nick break test.
14.5
Hardness Test
14.5.1
Preparation
The prepared macrosection is to be used for hardness testing using the Vickers
method with 10 kg load Indentations are to be made along traverses each
approximately 1mm below the surface on both sides of the weld.
In the weld metal a minimum of 6 indentations equally spaced along the
traverses are to be made. The HAZ indentations are to be made along the
traverses for approximately 0.5mm each into unaffected materials, and starting
as close to the fusion line as possible.
One indentation on each side of the weld along each traverse is to be made on
parent metal. Refer Fig.3. The indentations are to be made in the adjacent
regions as well on the opposite sides of the macrosection along the specified
traverses.
14.5.2
Method
The test shall be carried out in accordance with Recommendation ISO R81,
Vickers hardness, using a laboratory type machine controlled as prerecommendation ISO R146 and using a diamond pyramid penetrator set at 2.37
rad (136) with a load of 10 kg.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
14.5.3
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 22 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
Requirements
Hardness value shall not exceed the limit specified in welding Specification chart.
In case of a single reading having a slightly (+10 HV) higher value than the
specified limit, further indentations shall be made to check if the high value was
an isolated case.
All the hardness values contained from the heat affected zone shall not exceed
100 HV with respect to the average hardness of the values obtained for the base
metal. If these additional tests give a hardness within the specification limit the
slightly higher value may be accepted.
14.6
14.6.1
Charpy - V - Notch Impact Test

Specimens shall be taken from the position indicated in Fig. 1 of this
specification. The test specimens will be prepared in accordance with ISO R148.
Charpy V-notch specimens shall have dimensions as given in Fig. 3 of this
specification.
Three test specimens shall be taken from each sample and they shall be cut and
worked so that their length is transverse and perpendicular to the weld bead with
the notch position as shown in Fig. 4 of this specification. The notch shall be
perpendicular to the roller surface. The test specimen width shall depend upon
the pipe wall nominal thickness as following :
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
14.6.2
Nominal Wall Thickness in mm Test Specimen width mm

Over 12
Over 9.5 and upto 12
From 7 upto 9.5
Less than 7
10
7.5
5
2.5
Test Method
The test shall be carried out as indicated in ISO R148 "Beam impact test Vnotch".
Test pieces shall be immersed in a thermostatic bath and maintained at the test
temperature for at least 15 minutes. They shall then be placed in the testing
machine and broken within 5 seconds of their removal from the bath. The test
temperature shall be as mentioned in Special conditions of the Contract.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
14.6.3
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 23 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
Requirements (Note-1)
The impact energy shall be :
Sl.
No.
Test Specimen in "Average of three

mm
Specimens (Note-2)
Joules (Min.)
Minimum Single
Value (Note-1)
Joules
1.
2.
3.
4.
10.0
7.5
5.0
2.5
22.0
17.0
15.0
8.0
27.0
21.5
18.5
10.0
Note :
1)
14.7
Only one value is permitted to be lower than average value upto the value
specified.
2)
These values are specified for resistance to brittle fracture only, where
additional requirements are specified in project data sheet. (Ex. pipeline
materials with arrest properties i.e. a higher upper shelf charpy V-energy
for resistance against propagating ductile fractures) the same shall be
followed.
Bend Test Requirements
The Bend test Specimens shall be made and tested as per the requirements of
API 1104 Sixteenth Edition May 1983 except that the dimensions of the Jig for
guided bend test Fig. 5 para 2.6 API 1104 shall be modified as follows:
Radius of the Plunger À'
2t
Radius of the die `B'
3 t + 1.6mm
Radius of the die `C'

:
50.8mm
The acceptance criterion on shall however be as per para 2.643 and 2.653 of API
1104 Eighteenth edition May 1994.
Note : t = thickness of specimen
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
15.
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 24 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
In addition to the radiographic inspection, ultrasonic inspection is required as per
conditions listed in paragraph 12.5 of this specification. This section concerns
manual ultrasonic inspection. However ultrasonic by automatic equipment may
be used if approved by the COMPANY.
15.1
Equipment and Operators

The CONTRACTOR who carries out the ultrasonic inspection shall have
sufficient qualified personnel equipment and instruments at his disposal to be
able to effect the tests without hindering or delaying the pipeline assembly
operations.
The operators shall be fully qualified as per a recognised standard (ASME Sec. V
or equivalent) and they shall have as minimum level II. The operators shall be
able to :
calibrate the equipment ;

perform an operational test under production conditions;
interpret the screen picture ;
evaluate the size and location of reflectors
interpret the type of defects detected
The COMPANY has the option of checking the ability of personnel employed for
ultrasonic testing by means of qualification tests.
The CONTRACTOR appointed to carry out ultrasonic inspection shall supply all
the instruments necessary for their execution on site.
15.2
Specification for Ultrasonic Inspection Procedure Qualification

Before work beqins, the CONTRACTOR shall present a specification describing
the proposed U.T. procedure qualification.
This specification shall state, as an indication only but not limited to the following
information :
type of U.T. equipment used
MECON LIMITED
TITLE

PIPELINES
15.3
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 25 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
type and dimensions of transducers

frequency range
details for calibration
coupling medium
inspection technique
record details
reference to the welding procedure where it is intended to adopt the
specification.
temperature range of the joints to be inspected.
Qualification of Ultrasonic Inspection Procedure

The ultrasonic inspection procedure shall be approved by the COMPANY. Before
inspection begins, the COMPANY may require the qualification test of the
ultrasonic inspection procedure. This specification test consists in testing (under
normal operating conditions) some CONTRACTOR welds made according to the
same production procedure, where there are typical defects the test intends to
detect.
This test shall be conducted in the presence of the COMPANY.
15.4
Test Procedure
Circumferential welds shall be inspected from both sides using angled probes.
The surface with which the probes comes into contact shall be free of metal
spatter, dirt, iron oxide, and scales of any type; therefore it shall be necessary to
clean a strip at least 50mmwide on both sides of the weld with steel wire brushes
and anyhow the cleaned strip must be atleast wide enough to allow full skip
examination.
If, during the test, echoes of doubtful origin appear, it shall be necessary to
inspect a convenient area on the pipe surface, close to the weld, with a straight
beam transducer in order to check whether any manufacturing defects are
present which could have interfered with the ultrasonic beam.
By way of an example, the equipment shall include but not be limited to the
following :
ultrasonic equipment and coupling medium
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 26 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
sample sections for calibration of instruments
equipment for cleaning of surface to be examined
rules calibrated in centimeters for exact location of the position of defects.
The characteristics of the above - listed instruments and equipment shall

guarantee:
a)
that the required standards of the inspection procedure, as previously

established and approved by the COMPANY, are satisfied.
b)
continuous operation
All the instruments and equipment shall be approved by the COMPANY
before being used. The COMPANY has the authority to reject any item
which is considered unsuitable. The decision of the COMPANY is final.
The CONTRACTOR appointed to carry out ultrasonic inspections shall
also ensure the operational efficiency and maintenance of the instruments
and equipment, and shall immediately substitute any item rejected by the
COMPANY.
All the instruments and equipment necessary for carrying out ultrasonic
inspection on site shall satisfy the requirements laid down by the public
boards of institutions which regulate `safety at work'.
15.5
Ultrasonic Instruments
The Ultrasonic Instruments shall satisfy the following:
be pulse type, able to generate, receive and display, on the screen a

cathode ray tube (CRT) pulse at frequencies between 1 and 6 MHz. The
useful part of the CRT screen shall be at least 70mm wide and at least
50mm high.
shall have variable amplification, with steps of 1 or 2 dB over a range of a

least 60 dB.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
15.6
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 27 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
the regulation control shall be accurate to within 1 db and this accuracy

shall be certified by the instrument manufacturer.
may be powered by a battery or an electric generator. In the first case, the

autonomy of operation (endurance) of the instrument shall be sufficient to
carry on working without frequent interruptions, and the instruments shall
be equipped with an automatic switch which switches it off when the
battery runs down; in the second case, there must be a voltage stabilising
device with a tolerance of 2 Volts.
Probes
The probes used shall have dimensions, frequencies, and a refraction angle
suited to the type of steel, the diameter, the thickness of the pipe and to the joint
design.
15.7
Reference Sample Pieces

The efficiency of the equipment used, the effective refraction angle of the probe,
and the beam output point, shall be checked using a V1 and V2 sample block, IIW
type or calibration block ASTM E-428.
For the calibration of runs and the regulation of detection sensitivity during the
test, a calibration piece shall be used. This piece shall be taken from the
production material, and will be at least 150mm long (measured in the direction of
the axis), and at least 50mm wide (measured in the direction of the
circumference) (see Fig. 5 of this specification).
In the middle of the inside and the outside surface of the calibration piece a
groove shall be made. The groove will have a rectangular cross-section, a flat
bottom and the following dimensions.
depth : 1 0.1mm
breadth (measured parallel to the 150mm side) : 1 01mm
Length (measured parallel to the 50mm side) not less than 30mm
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 28 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
In addition, the calibration piece shall have a hole, 2mm in diameter, passing
through its thickness and positioned so that during calibration the echoes
returning from the two grooves do not interfere with those returning from the hole.
15.8
Calibration
For a precise check of the sound paths necessary for a full inspection of the weld
joint, the probe shall be moved (half skip and full skip distance) until internal and
external notches on the test piece are detected (See Fig. 5 of this specification).
The relevant defect limits the path lengths on the time base. The calibration of
reference sensitivity is obtained by utilising the through - drilled test hole in the
thickness of the reference block to draw the distance - amplitude correction curve
relevant to the test probe.
Calibration shall be carried out according to the following procedure ; place its
internal vertex until the maximum height of echo is displayed on the screen ; this
echo is adjusted to 80% of full screen height by means of the sensitivity adjuster
set in dB. Without varying the amplification, the probe placed at full skip distance
from the hole is moved to detect the external vertex of the hole until the
maximum height of echo is obtained. The straight line connecting the peaks of
the two echoes obtained by the above procedure, represents 100% reference
level, while the one connecting the two points at half height of the same echoes
represents "50% reference level".
The two straight lines shall be marked on the screen with a pen. Calibration shall
be repeated each time tests are re-started ; at intervals not longer than 30
minutes during normal operations; each time the conditions fixed in advance are
altered. This calibration is applicable provided that the crystal of the probe is 8 x
9mm size. Should this size of the crystal be different, the value of the sensitivity
obtained from the calibration by a crystal of a different size shall be brought to the
value of sensitivity obtained from the calibration by a 8 x 9mm crystal. The
sensitivities of the two different size probes shall be compared through the
echoes obtained on the notch of the test piece with the probe position at half skip
of the distance.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
15.9
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 29 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
Regulation of Amplification During Production Testing

The amplification during production testing shall be obtained by adding 2-6 dB
(according to the surface condition of the pipe and its cleaness) to the reference
amplification.
15.10
Qualification of Ultrasonic Testing Operators

Before the inspection begins or during the same inspection, the COMPANY may
require a qualification test for the ultrasonic equipment operators.
15.11
Evaluation of Indications Given by Ultrasonic Tests

Each time that echoes from the weld bead appear during production testing, the
instrument amplification shall be altered to coincide with the reference
amplification and the probe shall be oved until maximum response is obtained,
paying attention all the time of the probe-tube coupling.
If, under these conditions, the heights of the defect echo is equal to or greater
than that of the reference echo, the defect shall be evaluated according to other
clauses of this Specification. If the defect has also been detected by the
radiographic and or visual examination, the dimensions shall be judged
according to the type of examination which detects the greater defect. Returns
which are less that 50% of the reference echo, will not be considered. If returns
are above 50% but lower than 100% of the reference echo, and if the operator
has good reasons to suspect that the returns are caused by unfavourably
oriented cracks, the same shall be informed to the COMPANY. Moreover, when
there is a defect to be repaired, such defect shall be removed for a length
corresponding to the one where no more return echo is given.
15.12
Other Equipment
The use of rules calibrated in centimeters, attached if possible to the probe, for
the precise location of the position of welding defects, is recommended. Defect
location is effected by measuring the projection distance between the probe
output and the reflecting surface.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 30 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
The operators carrying out the tests shall have besides the probing instrument,
tools for cleaning the pipe surface (files, brushes, etc.), as well as, the coupling
liquid or paste appropriate for the temperature of the section to be examined.
16.0
RADIOGRAPHY
16.1
Scope
This covers the radiographic inspection of all types of welded joints of the main
pipeline.
The welded joints shall include the following :-
16.2
i.
Full girth welds on the mainline construction including double jointing of

pipe, if adopted.
ii.
Welds for installation of block valves, insulating joints and other

appurtenances and tie-ins.
iii.
Welds at scraper launching and receiving barrels.
iv.
Terminal Piping
Applicable Standards
This specification shall apply in conjunction with the following (all latest edition):
i.
API 1104, Standard for welding Piplines and Related Facilities.
ii.
ANSI B31.8, Code for Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.
iii.
ANSI B31.4, Code for Liquid Petroleum Transportation Piping Systems.
iv.
ASTM E94, Recommended practice for Radiographic Testing.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 31 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
v.
ASTM E142, Standard Method for Controlling Quality of Radiographic

Testing.
vi.
The American Society for Non-destructive Testing. Recommended

Practice No. SNT - TC-1A Supplement A.
16.3
Procedure
16.3.1
The radiographic examination procedure to be adopted shall be submitted by the

CONTRACTOR as per Annexure VI.
16.3.2
The procedure of radiographic examination shall be qualified to the entire

satisfaction of COMPANY prior to use. It shall include but not be limited to the
following requirements :
i.
Lead foil intensifying screens, at the rear of the film shall be used for all
exposures.
ii.
Type 2 and 3 films as per ASTM E-94 shall be used.
iii.
A densitometer shall be used to determine film density. The transmitted

film density shall be 2.0 and 3.5 throughout the weld. The unexposed
base density of the film shall not exceed 0.30.
iv.
Radiographic identification system and documentation for radiographic

interpretation reports and their recording system.
16.3.3
The CONTRACTOR shall qualify each procedure in the presence of the

COMPANY prior to use.
16.3.4
The procedure of radiographic examination shall produce radiographs of

sufficient density, clarity and contrast so that defects in the weld or in the pile
adjacent to the weld, and the outline and holes of the penetrameter are clearly
discernible.
16.3.5
All the girth welds of mainline shall be subjected to 100% radiographic

examination. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all the radiographs to the
COMPANY, immediately after processing them, together with the corresponding
interpretation reports on approved format. The details of the radiographs all
alongwith the joint identification number shall be duly entered in a register and
signed by the CONTRACTOR and submitted to the COMPANY for approval.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 32 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
16.3.6
When the radiation source and the film are both on the outside of the weld and
located diametrically opposite each other, the maximum acceptable length of film
for each exposure shall not exceed the values given in Table-4 of API 1104. The
minimum film overlap, in such cases, shall be 40mm. The ellipse exposure
technique may be used on nominal pipe sizes of 2 inch and smaller provided that
the source of film distance used is a minimum of 12 inch.
16.3.7
Three copies of each acceptable radiographic procedure (as per Annexure-VI)

and three copies of radiographic qualification records, shall be supplied to
COMPANY. One set of the qualifying radiographs on the job shall be kept by the
CONTRACTOR's authorised representative to be used as a standard for the
quality of production radiographs during the job. The other two sets shall be
retained by COMPANY for its permanent record.
16.3.8
Three copies of the exposure charts relating to material thickness, kilo voltage,
source of film distance and exposure time shall also be made available to
COMPANY by the CONTRACTOR.
16.3.9
The CONTRACTOR shall, on a daily basis, record for each radiograph (1)
radiograph's number, (2) welder's number (3) approximate chainage of weld
location, (4) whether or not the welds meet the specified acceptance standards
and (5) the nature and approximate location of unacceptable defects observed. It
must be possible to relate back to a particular butt weld and welder on piping
drawing and pipe line alignment drawing.
16.3.10
Each day's production of processed radiographs shall be properly packaged

separately, identified by at least the (1) date, (2) radiographic unit, (3) job
locations, (4) starting and ending progress survey stations and (5) shall include
original and three copies of the daily radiographic record. The package shall be
submitted to the COMPANY daily when possible, but in no event later than noon
of the following day.
16.3.11
The CONTRACTOR shall provide all the necessary facilities at site, such as a
dark room with controlled temperature, film viewer etc. to enable the COMPANY
to examine the radiographs.
16.3.12
The CONTRACTOR, if found necessary, may modify the procedure of

radiographic examination suiting to the local conditions prevailing. This shall,
however, be subject to the approval of the COMPANY.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 33 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
16.3.13
COMPANY shall have free access to all the CONTRACTOR's work facilities in
the field.
16.3.14
Any approval granted by the COMPANY shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of
his responsibilities and guarantees.
16.4
Radiation Source
16.4.1
Radiographic examination shall be carried out using x-radiations, Radiographic

examination by Gamma rays may be allowed, at the discretion of the
COMPANY, in case of inaccessible joints. Radiography by Gamma-Ray for tie-in
joints shall be acceptable provided Du AGFA film or equivalent is used and the
reqd. sensitivity obtained. Radiography by Gamma-Ray for tie-in-joints shall be
acceptable provided D4 AGFA film or equivalent is used and the required
sensitivity obtained.
16.4.2
Whenever possible, pipeline welds will be inspected by placing the radiation

source inside the pipe, on the pipeline axis, with a radiation of 6.28 rad. (360C).
If it is impossible to place the radiation source inside the pipe, the weld will be
inspected with the source on the outside. An overlap of at least 40mm at the
ends of each film shall be required to ensure that the first and last location
increment numbers are common to successive films and to establish that no part
of a weld has been omitted.
16.5
Level of Quality
The quality level of Radiographic sensitivity required for radiographic inspection
shall be at least equivalent to the values in Fig. 6
16.6
Penetrameters
The image quality indicator (abbreviation : IQI) shall be used for the qualification
of the welding procedure and during normal line production. Radiographic
sensitivity shall be measured with the wire image quality indicator
(Penetrameter). The penetrameter shall be selected according to DIN54109 ro
ISO1027. For radiographs made with the source on the outside, a penetrameter
shall be placed on each side of the film with the smaller wiere of the
penetrameter turned towards the end of the film itself. When a complete weld is
radiographed in a single exposure using a source inside the piping, four
penetrameter approximately equally spaced around the circumference shall be
used. During the procedure qualification, IQI shall be placed both on the source
side and on the film side. The sensitivity obtained with IQI on the source side
shall not be less than the values shown in Fig. 6 of this specification.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 34 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
The sensitivity limit may be considered to have been reached when the outline of
the IQI, its identification number and the wire of the required diameter show up
clearly on the radiograph.
The COMPANY may authorise use of types of IQI other than those planned,
provided that they conform with recognised standards and only if the
CONTRACTOR is able to demostrate that the minimum sensitivity level required
is obtained. For this demostration, a test shall be carried out comparing the IQI
specified and the CONTRACTOR's, to show up the identification number and
other details of the proposed IQI, which must be visible in the test radiograph.
16.7
Film Identification Markers

All films shall be clearly identified by lead numbers, letters, and/or markers. The
image of the markers shall appear on the films, without interfering with the
interpretation. These markers positions shall also be marked on the part to be
radiographed and shall be maintained during radiography.
16.8
Protection and care of film
16.8.1
All unexposed films shall be protected and stored properly as per the
requirements of API 1104 standard and ASTM E.94.
16.8.2
The exposed and unexposed film shall be protected from heat, light, dust and
moisture. Sufficient shielding shall be supplied to prevent exposure of film to
damaging radiation prior to and following the use of the film for radiographic
exposure.
16.9
Re-radiography
16.9.1
The weld joints shall be re-radiographed in case of unsatisfactory quality of the

radiographs, at the expense of the CONTRACTOR.
16.9.2
All the repaired weld joints shall be re-radiographed at no extra cost to the
COMPANY in the same manner as that followed for the original welds. In
addition, the repaired weld areas shall be identified with the original identification
number plus the letter R to indicate the repair.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 35 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
16.9.3
When evaluating repair film, radiographers shall compare each section

(exposure) of the weld with the original film to assure repair was correctly marked
and original defect removed.
16.9.4
The COMPANY will review prior to any repair of welds, all the radiographs of
welds which contain, according to the CONTRACTOR's interpretation,
unacceptable defects. The final disposition of all unacceptable welds shall be
decided by the COMPANY.
16.10
Qualification of Radiographers
16.10.1
Pipeline radiographers shall be qualified in accordance with the requirement of

API 1104 and to the full satisfaction of COMPANY.
16.10.2
Certification of all the radiographers, qualified as per 16.10.1 above, shall be

furnished by the CONTRACTOR to the COMPANY before a radiographer will be
permitted to perform production radiography. The certificate record shall include :
i.
Background and Experience Record
ii.
Training Course Record
iii.
Technical Examination Record
iv.
Doctor's report on radiographer's Oaecuer 0-1 acquity eye test.
v.
Date of qualification
16.10.3
The radiographers shall be required to qualify with each radiographic procedure

they use, prior to performing the work assigned to him in accordance with the
specification.
16.11
Preservation of Radiographs
16.11.1
The radiographs shall be processed to allow storage of films without any

discoloration for at least three years. All the radiographs shall be presented in
suitable folders for preservation alongwith necessary documentation.
16.11.2
All radiographs shall become property of the COMPANY.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 36 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
16.12
Equipment and Accessories
16.12.1
CONTRACTOR shall make necessary arrangement at his own expense, for

providing the radiographic equipment, radiographic film and all the accessories
for carrying out the radiographic examination for satisfactory and timely
completion of the job.
16.12.2
For carrying out the mainline radiographic examination the CONTRACTOR shall
be equipped with suitable mobile/ stationary type dark rooms.
These shall have all the required facilities for film processing. Film viewer used
shall be equipped with the film illuminator that has a light source of sufficient
intensity and suitably controlled to allow viewing film densities upto 4.0 without
damaging the film.
16.13
Radiation Protection
16.13.1
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the protection and personnel monitoring

of personnel with or near radiation sources.
16.13.2
The protection and monitoring shall comply with local regulations.
16.13.3
In view of visual hazards in the handling of Radioactive source of material,

CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for complying with all rules and
regulations set forth by Atomic Energy Commission or any other Government
agency of India in this regard and COMPANY shall not be responsible and shall
be kept indemnified by the CONTRACTOR for default (s) of whatever nature by
the CONTRACTOR. Safety equipment as considered adequate by the
COMPANY for all necessary personnel shall be made available for use and
maintained for immediate and proper use by the CONTRACTOR.
16.14
Display of Safety Instructions
16.14.1
The safety provisions shall be brought to the notice of all concerned by display on
a notice board at a prominent place at the work spot. The person responsible for
the "safety" shall be named by the CONTRACTOR.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 37 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
16.15
Enforcement of Safety Regulations
16.15.1
To ensure effective enforcement of the rules and regulations relating to safety

precautions, the arrangement made by CONTRACTOR shall be open to
inspection by COMPANY or its representatives.
16.16
First Aid and Industrial Injuries
16.16.1
CONTRACTOR shall maintain first aid facilities for its employees and
contractors.
16.16.2
CONTRACTOR shall make outside arrangements for ambulance service and for
treatment of industrial injuries. Names of those providing these services shall be
furnished to COMPANY prior to start of work and their telephone no. shall be
posted prominently in CONTRACTOR's field office.
16.16.3
All critical industrial injuries shall be reported promptly to the COMPANY and a
copy of CONTRACTOR's report covering each personal injury requiring the
attention of physician shall be furnished to the COMPANY.
16.17
No Exemption
16.17.1
Notwithstanding the above there is nothing in these to exempt the

CONTRACTOR from the operation of any other act or rules in force.
sub-
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 38 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
ANNEXURE-I
Sheet 1 of 3
ELECTRODE QUALIFICATION TEST RECORD
A.
Tested at (Site name)
Date :
Manufacturer's Name
Brand Name
Batch Number & Size Tested
Classification & Code
Intended for Welding in Positions :

In combination with (if any)
B.
Code of Reference
(used for testing)
Special requirements
All Weld Tensile Test

Base Material used
Pre-heat temp.
Postweld Heat Treatment Details :

Visual Examination
Radiographic Examination Results:

Tensile Test Results
Sl.No. Identification No.
U.T.S.
Yield Point Elongation
1.
2.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 39 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
ANNEXURE-I
Sheet 2 of 3
C.
D.
Impact Test Results

Test Temperature
Notch in :
Type of Specimens
(Charpy)
Size of Specimens :
Sl.No. Specimen No.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Impact Valve
Chemical Analysis Result

Electrode Size used
Batch No.
%C
E.
Average
%S
:
%P
%SI
%Mn
%Cr
%Ni
%Mo
Other
Fillet Weld Test Results

Welding Positions
Base Materials
Size of Electrode used
Visual Inspection Results
Macro Test results
1)
2)
3)
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 40 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
ANNEXURE-I
Sheet 3 of 3
F.
1.
Fracture Test Results
Remarks
Other Test Results

Transverse Tensile Test
In combination with
Base Material used
Position of Welding
Preheat Temperature
Post Weld Heat Treatment :
2.
Radiography
Identification No.
U.T.S.
Fracture in
Remarks
Guided Bend Test

Position
ID No.
Root, Face or Side Bend
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Any other Tests
Conclusion :
Remarks
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 41 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
ANNEXURE-II
Sheet 1 of 2
STRESS RELIEF HEAT TREATMENT PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
Name of the Heat-Treater :
Name of the Project :
1.
2.
Specification Reference No.:
General Details
Name of the Equipment
Name of the Assembly/ Part
Assembly/ Part Drawing No.
Material
Furnace Details
Type of Heating
Gas/ Oil/ Elec. Res./ Induction
Type of Heating
(Tick mark)
Capacity (Size)
Maximum Temp.(C)
Method of Temp.
Measurement
Atmosphere Control :
3.
Heat Treatment Cycle Details

Changing Temp. C
Rate of Heating, C/ Hr.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 42 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
ANNEXURE-II
Sheet 2 of 2
4.
Soaking Temp. C
Soaking Time, Hrs.
Rate of Cooling, C/ Hr.
Mode of Cooling
Other Details, if any.
Notes :
The following documents shall be furnished alongwith the specifications :
i.
Material Test Certificates
ii.
Assembly/ Part Drawing.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 43 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
ANNEXURE-III
Sheet 1 of 3
WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION TEST RECORD
Example of record form for welding procedure approval test :
Project/ Contract
Pipe and Coating Material
Process
Outside Diameter
Pipe Thickness
Joint Design (Sketch Attached)
Make and type of filler
metal
Contractor
Diameter
Current
a.c/d.c
Electrode +ve
/ -ve
Root
Second Run
Other Runs
Other Electrical
Characteristics
Shielding Gas :
Type or mixture
Flow
Shielding Flux
Position
Direction of Welding :
Root
:
Second Run
:
Other Runs
:
Vertical up/ Vertical down

Number of Welders :
Root
Second Run
Other Runs
Volts
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 44 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
ANNEXURE-III
Sheet 2 of 3
Time lapse between commencement of
root and commencement of second run
Time lapse between commencement of
second run and commencement of other run
Minimum number of runs before joint
allowed to cool
Maximum time between commencement
and completion or weld
Type of line-up clamp
Removal of clamp after
run
Lowering off after

run
Cleaning
Preheating
Minimum temperature C Ambient Temperature C
Type of heater to be used
Interpass temperature
Minimum C
Maximum C
Post weld heat treatment

Speed of travel
Test Results
State acceptable non-acceptable
(with reasons) or give numerical results
Non-destructive test :Visual
Radiograph
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 45 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
ANNEXURE-III
Sheet 3 of 3
Destructive Tests
Transverse tensile
Tensile strength (with units)
Fracture location
Test temperature
Macro-examination
Fillet weld fracture
Hardness Survey :Type
Load
Location of hardness measurement (Sketch)
Hardness rang :
Parent metal
Heat affected zone
Weld
Charpy V-notch impact tests
Specimen location and size
Notch location
Test temperature
Results (with units)
Additional test and tests and results e.g. chemical analysis, micro-examination, CTOD tests,
bend tests etc.
The statements in this record are correct. The test joints were prepared, welded and tested in
accordance with the requirements of this specification.
Inspector
Date :
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 46 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
ANNEXURE-IV
Sheet 1 of 1
Example of record form for welder approval test
Welder test certificate
Test No.
Project/ Contract
Date
Contractor
Inspector
Welder s Name
Address
Pipe Material
Pipe Thickness
Pipe Outside Diameter
Welding Process
Root
Fill and Cap
Root
Current
Voltage
Second run
Current
Voltage
Full and cap
Current
Voltage
Direction of travel
Root : Vertical
up/ Vertical
down
Fill and cap:

Vertical up/
Vertical down
Electrode/ Wire
Reason for failure

Visual
Non-destructive testing
Butt joint
Fillet weld
Number of attempts
Comments
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 47 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
ANNEXURE-V
Sheet 1 of 1
WELDERS IDENTIFICATION CARD
Name
Identification
Photograph
Date of Testing
Valid Until
Approval of Welding
Welding Position
:
:
Material
Diameter
Wall Thickness
Type of Welding
Consumables
Approved by :
Employer's Signature with seal
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PIPELINES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 48 OF 48
MEC/S/05/62/02
REVISION
ANNEXURE-VI
Sheet 1 of 1
RADIOGRAPHIC PROCEDURE FOR PIPE WELDING
1.
Location
2.
Date of Testing
3.
Name of Supervised Contractor
4.
Material
5.
Dia & Thickness
6.
Type of Weld Joint
7.
Radiation Source
8.
Type of equipment (External/ Internal)
9.
Intensifying Screens and Material
10.
Filter Type and placement mask, Diaphragm Lead Screen etc. adjacent to Radiation
Source or Specimen.
11.
Geometric Relationship (Source local spot size, max and min source strength, object to
film distance, radiation angle with respect to weld and film).
12.
Limit of film coverage
13.
Film type and make
14.
Exposure Time
15.
Processing (time temperature for development, stop bath or rinse, fixation, washing,
drying etc.)
16.
Density
17.
Sensitivity
18.
Type of penetrameter.
Approval of the COMPANY
Signature of CONTRACTOR with Seal
ADDENDUM 1 TO SPECIFICATION NO. MEC/S/05/62/02A

1)
Special Points
Followings points are to be considered strictly.
i)
Acceptance criterion for welding procedure qualification and their

testing welder qualification & their testing and non-destructive
examinations of weld joints shall be as per API-1104 (Latest editions)
ii)
Same criterion as mentioned above shall also be applicable to above

ground piping system.
SPECIFICATION
FOR
HYDROSTATIC TESTING
OF ONSHORE PIPELINE
SPECIFICATION NO. MEC/S/05/62/03
(PROCESS & PIPELINE DESIGN SECTION)
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
Hydrostatic Testing of Onshore Crosscountry Pipelines
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 1 OF 17
MEC/S/05/62/03
REVISION A
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
3.0
GENERAL
4.0
HYDROSTATIC TEST PROCEDURE MANUAL
5.0
TEST PRESSURE
6.0
EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION
7.0
PROCEDURES
8.0
ACCEPTANCE
9.0
TERMINATION
10.0
TEST REPORT
11.0
MEASUREMENTS
12.0
CALCULATION
13.0
PRECAUTIONS DURING THE TEST
14.0
PRESERVATION OF PIPELINE
FIGURES
FIG.1
TABLES
TABLE 1
Sheet No.
Rev
Description
PREPARED BY
WATER COMPRESSIBILITY FACTOR VS PRESSURE AND

TEMPERATURE.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN WATER THERMAL EXPANSION FACTOR
AND STEEL THERMAL EXPANSION FACTOR.
Date
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 2 OF 17
MEC/S/05/62/03
REVISION
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This specification covers the minimum requirements of supply, works and operations to
be performed by CONTRACTOR for hydrostatic testing of cross-country steel pipelines
transporting hydrocarbons in liquid or gaseous phase under high pressure. This
specification does not cover the requirements of drying/precommissioning of the tested
pipelines. This specification shall be read in conjunction with the conditions of all
specifications and documents included in the CONTRACT between COMPANY and
CONTRACTOR.
2.0
2.1
Reference has been made in this specification to the latest edition/ revision of the
following codes, standards and specifications.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
ANSI B 31.8
Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.
ANSI B 31.4
Liquid Petroleum Transportation Piping Systems.
API RP 1110
Pressure Testing of Liquid Petroleum Pipelines.
ASME Sec. VIII Div-1
Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code.
OISD 141
Design & construction requirements for cross-country
hdyrocarbon pipeline
2.2
In case of conflict between the requirements of this specification and that of the above
referred coded, standards, and specifications, the requirements of this specifications
shall govern.
2.3
For the purpose of this specification the following definitions shall hold:
-
the words 'shall' and 'Must' are mandatory;
the words 'Should', 'May', and 'Will' are non-mandatory, advisory or

recommended.
3.0
GENERAL
3.1
Hydrostatic test shall be performed on the entire length of the pipeline. Hydrostatic test
shall be performed in accordance with approved Hydrostatic Test Diagrams for each
test section. The maximum length of each test section shall not exceed 25 kms.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 3 OF 17
MEC/S/05/62/03
REVISION
3.2
For pipeline sections which in COMPANY's opinion, once installed would require an
inordinate amount of effort for repair in case of a leak, a provisional pre-test shall be
conducted. However, after installation, such pretested sections shall be tested again
alongwith the entire pipeline.
3.3
Hydrostatic test shall commence only after mechanical and civil works completion, i.e.,
all welds have been accepted and the pipeline has been laid and backfilled according
to the specifications. Hydrostatic test shall include those sections which have been
previously tested, viz. Rail/ road crossing, major water crossings including test on banks
and in place after installation, and scraper traps at the terminals. CONTRACTOR shall
perform all works required for hydrostatic testing after obtaining prior written approval
from the COMPANY.
3.4
The pipeline shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition of
ANSI B 31.8 or ANSI B 31.4, OISD 141 as applicable, and requirements laid down in
this specification.
4.0
HYDROSTATIC TEST PROCEDURE MANUAL

CONTRACTOR shall prepare for COMPANY's approval a hydrostatic test procedure
manual. The procedure shall strictly comply with the requirements of this specification
and shall be submitted to COMPANY for approval well in advance. The procedure
manual shall include all temporary materials & equipment, but not be limited to the
following items:
a)
For the systems to be tested, a diagram indicating all fittings, vents, valves,
temporary connections, relevant elevations and ratings. The diagram shall also
indicate injection locations and intake and discharge lines.
b)
Estimated amount of test water, water sources, including required concentration

of corrosion inhibitors and additives, procedure for inhibitor injection and control
of concentration.
c)
Filling and flushing procedures, including a complete description of all proposed

equipment and instruments (including spares), their location and set-up.
d)
The type and sequence of pigs and the pig tracking systems for cleaning and
removal of air pockets. Pig inspection procedures, including procedure to be
followed in case the calliper pig indicates damage.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 4 OF 17
MEC/S/05/62/03
REVISION A
e)
Procedures for levelling and stabilization after filling and for pressurization and to
allow for temperature stabilization.
f)
Pressure testing procedure including a complete description of all proposed

equipment and instruments (including spares), their location and set-up, and
proposed system for observation and recording of data during the pressure test.
g)
Procedure for detection and location of leaks.
h)
Procedure for dewatering the pipeline section(s) after testing, including a

complete description of all proposed equipment and instruments, (including
spares), their location and set-up, the type and sequence of pigs and the pig
tracking system along with the pig specifications.
i)
Forms for recording the test data.
5.0
TEST DURATION AND PRESSURE
5.1
The duration of hydrostatic test shall be a minimum of 24 hours after stabilization and
the test pressure shall be as indicated in the approved hydrostatic test diagram.
5.2
Unless specified otherwise in the CONTRACT, the maximum base pressure shall not
be higher than the one resulting in a hoop stress corresponding to 90% of SMYS of
pipe material based on the minimum wall thickness in the test section and minimum
test pressure shall not be lower than the one resulting in a hoop stress corresponding
to 85% of SMYS of pipe material based on the minimum wall thickness in the test
section.
6.0
EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION

The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all necessary equipment for performing the work as
stated in cleaning, flushing, filling, levelling, stabilizing, testing and dewatering
procedures. This shall include the following :
a)
Pigs for filling , cleaning and gauging including
Cleaning pigs with spring loaded steel wire brushes except for internal coated
pipes. In this case pigs to be provided with nylon / polyurethane brushes.
Four cup batching pigs
\\Akjha\work contrac\standard TS for Pipe Line WC (Vol-II) MASTER FOLDER\03A hydrostatic testing\Hydrostatic Testing of Onshore Pipeline 03A.doc
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 5 OF 17
MEC/S/05/62/03
REVISION A
Calliper pigs with gauge plate diameter equal to 95% of the heavy wall
pipe in the pipe sections. Gauging pig fitted with gauge plate.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient number of pigs including spares.

b)
Fill pumps : The CONTRACTOR shall determine the type and number of fill
pumps in order to guarantee the following :
Differential head 20% greater than the maximum required.
Flow rate : 400m3 min. ; 1000m3 max.
If a single pump is used, a standby unit must be available.
c)
Variable speed positive displacement pumps equipped with a stroke counter to

pressurise the line with a known stroke and capable of exceeding the maximum
test pressure by at least 20 bar.
d)
Two positive displacement meters to measure the volume of water used for
filling the line. These meters shall be provided with a callibration certificate not
older than one month.
e)
Portable tanks of sufficient size to provide a continuous supply of water to the

pump during pressurizing.
f)
Bourdon pressure gauges of suitable pressure range and accuracy.
g)
Dead weight testers with an accuracy of 0.01 bar measuring in increments of

0.05 bar provided with a calibration certificate not older than one month.
h)
Two 48 hours recording pressure gauges tested with charts and ink gauges
tested with dead weight tester prior to use. These shall be installed atp the test
heads.
i)
Pressure recording charts.
j)
Two temperature recorders for fill water.
k)
Thermocouples for measuring the pipe wall temperature.
l)
Two laboratory thermometers 0C to 60C range, accuracy 0.1 degree to be

used in thermowells.
MECON LIMITED
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
\\Akjha\work contrac\standard TS for Pipe Line WC (Vol-II) MASTER FOLDER\03A hydrostatic testing\Hydrostatic Testing of Onshore Pipeline 03A.doc
NEW DELHI
TITLE
m)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 6 OF 17
MEC/S/05/62/03
REVISION
A
Means to measure the volume of water necessary to drop the line pressure by
0.5 bar (container on scales or graduated cylinder).
n)
Injection facilities to inject additives into the test medium in the required
proportions.
o)
Communication equipment suitable for a continuous connection between the

beginning and the end of the test section and with the inspection team along the
line, in accordance with the requirements of local Authorities.
p)
The temporary scraper traps shall be installed according to the testing sections
fixed in the test procedure manual. Proper piping and valuing arrangements
shall be available to allow launching and receiving of each pig independently.
The test heads shall be sized in conformity with ASME specification Section VIII,
Division 2 with particular reference to Appendices 4 and 5.
q)
Thermocouples for assuring the temperature of the pipe wall shall be installed
on the pipeline to be tested:
1 thermocouple at about 500m distance from the pumping head.

1 thermocouple every 2500m of the pipe the spacing may be increased to
maximum 5000m depending on the terrain and nature of sub-soil along the
alignment of section.
1 thermocouple at about 500m distance from the terminal head.
The spacing may be increased to maximum 5000 metre depending on the terrain and
nature of sub soil along the alignment of test section.
Thermocouples shall be attached on the external surface of the pipe after removal of
external coating and shall be adequately protected and COMPANY's coating
instructions shall be followed.
7.0
PROCEDURES
7.1
Equipment and/or parts which need not or must not be subjected to the test pressures,
must be disconnected or separated from the pipeline to be tested.
7.2
If the difference of minimum and maximum atmosphere temperature should cause

thermal instability on the pipe section directly exposed to atmospheric condition, the
scraper traps and above ground pipeline shall be properly protected.
c:\fateh\standard\stad-eqp.wp
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 7 OF 17
MEC/S/05/62/03
REVISION
A
The pipeline test shall exclude long segments of line exposed to atmospheric
conditions, viz. Aerial lengths on piers, suspension bridges, etc., which shall be tested
separately.
7.3
The test medium shall be soft non-aggressive water furnished by the CONTRACTOR.
The water to be used shall be filtered, shall not be contaminated, and free from sand or
silt. CONTRACTOR shall submit laboratory test reports of water used for testing. The
possible use of sea water shall be subject to its degree of cleanliness, the possibility of
obtaining a pre determined salinity neutralization and the use of corrosion inhibitors,
this at the sole discretion of COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall provide COMPANY
approved corrosion inhibitors, oxygen scavengers and bactericides to be added to the
test water. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all temporary piping which may
be necessary to connect from source of water to its pumps and manifolds/ tankage.
7.4
Before filling operation the CONTRACTOR shall clean the pipeline by air driven pigs
provided with spring loaded bushes and chisels to remove all mill scale rust/ sand from
the inside of pipe section. For this purpose temporary headers for air cleaning shall be
attached to the pipeline. The number of pig runs is depending upon the cleaning results
and shall be determined by the COMPANY at site.
7.5
After cleaning the pipeline by using air and acceptance by Company, gauging shall be
carried out by using gauging pig. The gauge plate diameter shall be equal to 95% of
inside diameter of the heaviest wall pipe in the test section. While computing the ID of
heaviest wall pipe, pipe manufacturing tolerance shall not be considered. A 10mm
thick aluminium plate shall be used for making gauge plate.
After receipt of gauging pig at the other end, the gauge plate shall be inspected in the
presence of Company representative. A deformed, bent or severally nicked plate or
damaged pig shall be evidence of gauging pig run failure and the same is not
acceptable to company. In such cases the Contractor shall repair and rectify the line
and repeat the gauging pig run to the satisfaction and approval of the Company
Representative. Any obstruction and/ or faults such as dents, buckles, flat spots, etc.
analysed and noted during gauging pig run shall be located and any necessary repair
work shall be performed to rectify the same to the satisfaction of the Company. A
written approval shall be obtained from Company regarding successful completion of
gauging pig run.
After acceptance of gauging operation, air header shall be cut and removed. Pretested test headers loaded with three numbers of four cup batching pig shall be welded
to test Section. Un-inhibited water equal to 10% of the volume of test section shall be
introduced in front of the first pig. The first pig shall be launched by introducing about
1.5 km un-inhibited water. Then the second pig shall be launched by pumping the
inhibited water till the second pig is received at the other end. The thermal stablisation
and pressurisation can now the started.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
7.6
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 8 OF 17
MEC/S/05/62/03
REVISION
Thermal Stabilization
After a check has been made to confirm if the pressure has attained at least 1 bar (g)
on the highest section, thermal stabilization can be started.
Thermal equilibrium between the pipeline and environment shall be checked through
the thermocouples installed on the pipeline.
Temperature readings shall be made at 4 hours-intervals. Thermal stabilization shall be
considered to have been achieved when a difference not higher than 1C is attained
between the average values of the last two readings. Thermal stabilization completion
shall be approved by COMPANY.
7.7
Pressurisation
Pressurisation shall be performed in the presence of COMPANY at moderate and
constant rate not exceeding 2 bars/min. One pressure recording gauge shall be
installed in parallel with the dead weight tester. Volume required to reach the test
pressure shall be recorded periodically throughout the pressurization as follows:
-
each 5 bar increments up to 80% of test pressure as recorded by the dead

weight tester;
each 2 bar increment between 80% to 90% of test pressure as recorded by the
dead weight tester;
each 0.2 bar increment between 90% of test pressure to full test pressure as
recorded by the dead weight tester.
The pressurizing shall be cycled according to the following sequence:

a)
Pressurize to 50% of test pressure, hold pressure for 1 hour.
b)
Drop pressure to static head of test section at test head.
c)
Pressurize to 75% of test pressure, hold pressure for 1 hour.
d)
Drop pressure to static head of test section at the test head.
e)
Pressurize to test pressure.
During the pressurization to each test pressure, two tests shall be carried out for the
calculation of air volume in the pipeline under test.
In case, during the hold pressure periods indicated above, a decrease in pressure is
observed, the operations shall not be repeated more than twice, after which the line
shall not be considered capable of test, until the CONTRACTOR has isolated and
eliminated the cause for the lack of water tightness.
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
7.8
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 9 OF 17
MEC/S/05/62/03
REVISION
Air Volume Calculation

In order to check the presence of air in the pipeline, two separate consecutive pressure
lowering of 0.5 bar shall be carried out.
For calculation of air in the pipeline the second pressure lowering shall be used, and
the relevant drained water shall be accurately measured (V1). This amount measured
shall be compared to the theoretical amount (Vp) corresponding to the pressure
lowering that has been carried out, by using the procedure outlined in clause 12.1 of
this specification.
If no air is present in the length under test:
V1
--Vp
In order that the above ratio is acceptable, it shall not differ from 1 by more than 6%
(i.e. 1.06).
If the air found in the pipeline is within the above established tolerance, then the
pressurizing can continue. If the ratio V1 / Vp exceeds 1.06, the hydrostatic testing
cannot go on and additional pig passages shall be performed to remove the air
pockets.
The test shall be repeated as per the above procedure until above estimated
tolerances are satisfied. The pressurizing can then continue, to reach the value of test
pressure.
7.9
Testing
After the section has been pressurized and the air volume test has given acceptable
results the test pressure shall be held for a minimum of 24 hours after stabilization.
After temperature and pressure has stabilized, the injection pump shall be
disconnected and all connections at the test heads shall be checked for leakage. The
pressure recorders shall then be started with the charts in a real time orientation for
continuous recording throughout the test.
During the testing period the following measurements shall be recorded :
-
every one hour pressure measurements form dead weight testers.

every two hours the ambient temperature and the pipe temperature at the
thermocouples.
All data shall be recorded on appropriate forms attached to the hydrostatic test
procedure manual. Care shall be taken that the maximum test pressures are not exceeded.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 10 OF 17
MEC/S/05/62/03
REVISION A
Bleed-off water shall be accurately measured and recorded.

8.0
ACCEPTANCE
8.1
The hydrostatic test shall be considered as passed if pressure has kept a constant
value throughout the test duration, except for change due to temperature effects. Such
change shall be evaluated as described under clause 12.2 of this specification.
The pressure change value as a function of temperature change shall be algebraically
added to the pressure value as read on the meters. The pressure value thus adjusted
shall be compared with the initial value and the test shall be considered as acceptable
if the difference is less than or equal to 0.3 bar. In case of doubt the testing period shall
be extended by 24 hours.
8.2
If test section fails to maintain the specified test pressure after isolation,
CONTRACTOR shall determine by search the location of leakage or failure. All leaks
and failures within the pipe wall or weld seam shall be repaired by replacement of entire
joint or joints in which leakage or failure occurs. In circumferential welds the method of
repair shall be determined by the COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall comply with
instructions of the COMPANY whether to replace a section of the line pipe that
includes the line leak or whether to repair the circumferential weld. This repair should
however meet the requirements of 'Specification for Welding Pipelines and Related
Facilities'. Where failure occur in pipeline field bends, bends shall be replaced with
same degree of bends. After completion of repairs, the hydrostatic test shall be
repeated in full, as per this specification.
8.3
The cost of repairs or replacements, followed by refilling and repressurizing the line,
due to poor workmanship, shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. In the event of leaks
or failures resulting form faulty COMPANY furnished materials, CONTRACTOR shall
be reimbursed for furnishing all labour, equipment, materials, except those materials
furnished by the COMPANY, and transportation necessary to repair and repressurize
the section of the pipeline to the pressure at the time of recognition of leak or line
failure. CONTRACTOR shall be entitled for compensation as per the provisions of the
CONTRACT. All work of reinstalling line pipe, to replace pipe failures shall be done in
accordance with the relevant specification included in the CONTRACT.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 11 OF 17
MEC/S/05/62/03
REVISION
8.4
CONTRACTOR shall haul and stockpile all damaged and defective pipes to storage
locations designated by the COMPANY. All cracks and splice resulting from failures
shall be coated with an application of grease to preserve the characteristics of failures
from corrosion. Joint of failed pipes shall be marked with paint, with a tag indicating
failure details, date and location of failure and pressure at which failure occurred.
9.0
TERMINATION
After the positive results of testing and collection of all data the test shall be terminated
upon written approval given by the COMPANY.
9.1
CONTRACTOR shall dewater the tested line as per the following requirement after test
acceptance.
The dewatering shall be carried out by using four cup pigs and foam pigs driven by
compressed air. The detailed dewatering procedure shall be developed by the
CONTRACTOR in such a way as to provide adequate control of pigs during
dewatering. Pigs and equipment required for dewatering the line shall be furnished by
CONTRACTOR and shall be approved in advance by the COMPANY. Four cup pigs
shall first be passed through the line to displace the water. Foam pigs shall then be
passed in order to complete the line dewatering. CONTRACTOR shall use a number of
foam pigs, each in different colors/ numbered for this purpose. The line shall be
considered dewatered when a negligible amount of water is flushed out by the last
foam pig and approval is given by the COMPANY.
9.2
During dewatering, care shall be taken to properly dispose the discharging water in
order to avoid pollution, damages to fields under cultivation and/or existing structures
and interference with the traffic. Before start of dewatering and disposal of hydrotest
water, a procedure for treatment of inhibited water to prevent pollution shall be
submitted by contractor to owner/ consultant for review and approval.
9.3
Upon completion of the testing and dewatering operation, any provisional traps for pigs
and all other temporary installation relating to the test shall be removed. Subsequently
the individual sections of the line already tested shall be joined in accordance with the
requirements of relevant specifications issued for the purpose.
10.0
TEST REPORT
A complete report signed by CONTRACTOR and the COMPANY shall be submitted
upon completion of the hydrostatic test for each test section.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 12 OF 17
MEC/S/05/62/03
REVISION A
This report shall contain as a minimum:

-
the cleaning, flushing, filling and testing procedures used;
schematic layout of cleaning, filling and testing facilities;
instruments calibration certificates;
a profile of the pipeline that shows the test sites, all instrument and injection
connections;
pipe filling logs and records;
additive specification, required concentration and additive injection records;
pig specifications;
pig inspection records including photographs of the damages;
records of gauging pig survey and photographs;
pressurization and stabilization records;
pressure and temperature recording charts with appropriate information

inscribed thereon;
temperature data along the pipeline;
dead weight tester logs and recording;
air volume calculations;
pressure change due to temperature change calculations;
environmental data;
depressurization logs and records;
dewatering procedure and schematic layout of relevant facilities;
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
dewatering logs and records;
records and photograph of all leaks.
11.0
MEASUREMENTS
11.1
Water Amount Measurement
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 13 OF 17
MEC/S/05/62/03
REVISION
The water volume added to the section to be tested shall be measured during the filling
stage through a positive displacement meter (a turbine meter may also be used). In the
calculation, as per clause 12.1 of this specification, use shall be made of the
geometrical volume of the section in question.
11.2
Pressure Measurement
Pressure shall be measured with a dead weight tester with an accuracy of 0.01 bar that
shall permit readings of at least 0.05 bar.
During the test the pressure shall be recorded by means of a pressure recorder
featuring the following specifications:
Accuracy
0.1% of the full-scale value
Recording
continuous on tape or disk, graph width 100mm
Feed
20mm/h for tape diagrams, 7.5/h for disk diagrams
Recording
to be such as to record pressure between 50% and 90% of the

diagram width.
The pressure recorder shall be checked by means of dead weight tester at the
beginning, during and at the end of the hydrostatic test.
A pressure gauge tested with dead weight tester shall be connected in parallel to the
dead weight tester at the test head.
11.3
Temperature Measurements
Water temperature shall be taken at every 2 hours through the thermocouple that have
been installed on the pipe wall along the section under test on the pipe wall.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 14 OF 17
MEC/S/05/62/03
REVISION A
Further the temperature measurement shall be taken :

-
during the filling operation
during the thermal stabilization stage
during the hydrostatic test
The thermocouples sensitivity shall enable temperature readings with an accuracy of

0.2C.
b)
Water temperature shall also be measured on the pump delivery by means of a

recording thermometer (temperature recorder) throughout the filling stage.
The recording thermometer shall have the following features :
Accuracy
1% of the scale range
Scale - 10 to + 40 C
Recording:
Continuous on tape or disk, diagram within 100mm
Feed :
20mm/h for tape diagrams, 7.5/h for disk diagrams.
c)
Ground temperature shall be taken by measuring pipe temperature at the

thermocouple prior to starting the filling operation.
d)
Environmental temperature shall be recorded from the beginning of

pressurization to the end of the test by means of a recording thermometer
featuring the following characteristics:
Accuracy
1% of the scale range
Scale - 0 to + 60 C
Recording:
Continuous on tape or disk, diagram width 100mm
Feed :
20mm/h for tape diagrams, 7.5/h for disk diagrams.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 15 OF 17
MEC/S/05/62/03
REVISION
12.0
CALCULATIONS
12.1
The theoritical water amount that is necessary for filling the section to be tested shall
be obtained from the geometrical volume of the section considering the pipe
tolerances.
The theoretical water amount that is necessary for pressurizing the section shall be
calculated by means of the following formula:
-6
Vp = (0.884 r i/t +A) x 10 x Vt x P x K

Where:
Vp = computed water amount required to raise by P the pressure in the section
3
to be tested (m ).
Vt =
geometrical volume of the section (m )
P = Pressure rise (bar)

ri=
nominal inner radius of the pipe (mm)
t =
nominal pipe thickness(mm)
A =
isothermal compressibility value for water at the pressurization

6
temperature in the P range (bar-1) x 10 .
(Refer water compressibility factor vs pressure and temperature chart).
For temperature above 30C the values may be extrapolated.
K =
12.2
a dimensionless coefficient that is equal to a value of 1.02 for

longitudinally welded pipe.
The pressure change due to a water temperature change shall be calculated by the
following formula:
B
P = -------------------------- T
0.884 r i/ t +A
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 16 OF 17
MEC/S/05/62/03
REVISION A
Where,
P = pressure change resulting from a temperature change (bar)
T
algaebrical difference between water temperature at the beginning of the test

and water temperature as measured at the end of the test (C).
B=
value of the difference between the thermal expansion of water at the pressure
-1
6
and temperature as measured at the end of the test and that of steel (C ) x 10
(Refer table 1)
13.0
A=
Isothermal compressibility value of water as estimated at the pressure and

-1
6
temperature values obtained at the end of test (bar ) x 10 (Refer Figure 1)
ri=
nominal inner radius of the pipe (mm).
t =
nominal thickness of pipe (mm).
PRECAUTIONS DURING THE TEST

In addition to all that has been expressly described in the procedures for carrying out
the tests, the following additional requirements shall be complied with:
13.1
Provision shall be made for the installation of no-admittance signs to unauthorized

personnel from the roads to the R.O.W.
13.2
Signs stating "PIPE UNDER TEST-KEEP OFF" with local language translation shall be
placed where the pipeline is uncovered, and particularly where the provisional traps
and stations are located. Such areas shall be suitably fenced in such a way as to
prevent access of unauthorized personnel. No unauthorized personnel shall be closer
than 40 m to the pipeline or equipment under test.
13.3
Provisional scraper traps shall be installed in compliance with methods and suitable
locations so that their rupture cannot cause any injuries to the personnel or third
parties.
13.4
The test station shall be placed in such a location as to prevent it from being affected
by a catastrophic failure in the test head.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 17 OF 17
MEC/S/05/62/03
REVISION A
13.5
Once dewatering is over, the sectionalizing valves and other valve assemblies tested
previously, shall be installed at locations shown in the drawings and in accordance with
the procedures contained in the relevant specifications. All thermocouple installed in
the pipeline shall be removed and damaged corrosion coating shall be repaired using
COMPANY approved materials and procedure.
14.0
PRESERVATION OF PIPELINE
When so stated in the CONTRACT, to preserve/conserve the pipeline for a specified
duration, CONTRACTOR shall completely fill the pipeline with water, with sufficient
quantity of corrosion inhibitors depending upon quality of water and the period of
conservation, at a pressure to be agreed upon with the COMPANY at a later stage.
CONTRACTOR shall obtain necessary approval from the COMPANY of the procedure
and the type and quantity of the inhibitors used before commencement of the works.
TABLE - A
MEC/S/O5/62/03
Sheet 1 of 4
0
C
Bar
0.981
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
TABLE I:
-98.62
-95.55
-92.15
-88.74
-85.32
-81.90
-78.47
-75.03
-71.60
-68.16
-64.72
-61.28
-57.84
-54.40
-50.96
-47.53
-44.10
-40.67
-37.24
-33.83
-30.42
-27.02
-23.63
-20.24
-16.87
-13.50
-10.14
-6.80
-3.48
-0.17
+3.13
-79.89
-76.94
-73.68
-70.40
-67.12
-63.84
-60.55
-57.25
-53.96
-50.66
-47.35
-44.05
-40.74
-37.44
-34.13
-30.83
-27.53
-24.23
-20.94
-17.65
-14.37
-11.09
-7.82
-4.56
-1.30
+1.94
+5.17
+8.39
+11.60
+14.80
+17.98
-61.81
-58.99
-55.86
-52.72
-49.58
-46.43
42.27
-40.10
-36.94
-33.77
-30.60
-27.43
-24.26
-21.08
-17.90
-14.73
-11.56
-8.40
-5.23
-2.06
+1.09
+4.25
+7.40
+10.54
+13.67
+16.79
+19.90
+23.00
+26.11
+29.19
+32.27
-44.34
-41.65
-38.64
-35.63
-32.62
-29.60
-26.58
-23.54
-20.51
-17.47
-14.43
-11.38
-8.34
-5.29
-2.25
+0.80
+3.85
+6.89
+9.94
+12.98
+16.01
+19.04
+22.06
+25.08
+28.10
+31.11
+34.12
+37.11
+40.09
+43.07
+46.03
-27.47
-24.89
-22.01
-19.14
-16.24
-13.36
-10.46
-7.56
-4.65
-1.73
+1.18
+4.10
+7.02
+9.95
+12.87
+15.79
+18.72
+21.64
+24.56
+27.48
+30.40
+33.31
+36.22
+39.13
+42.03
+44.92
+47.81
+50.69
+53.56
+56.43
+59.29
-11.14
-8.67
-5.92
-3.16
-0.41
+2.36
+5.15
+7.92
+10.70
+13.50
+16.29
+19.08
+21.88
+24.68
+27.49
+30.29
+33.10
+35.90
+38.70
+41.51
+44.30
+47.10
+49.90
+52.69
+55.48
+58.26
+61.04
+63.80
+66.57
+69.33
+72.06
+4.66
+7.02
+9.65
+12.29
+14.93
+17.57
+22.89
+22.89
+25.55
+28.23
+30.90
+33.58
+36.26
+38.94
+41.63
+44.31
+47.00
+49.69
+52.37
+55.06
+57.75
+60.43
+63.12
+65.80
+68.48
+71.15
+73.81
+76.48
+79.14
+81.78
+84.83
+19.98
+22.23
+24.74
+27.26
+29.78
+32.31
+34.85
+37.39
+39.94
+42.50
+45.05
+47.61
+50.18
+52.75
+55.32
+57.89
+60.46
+63.04
+65.62
+68.19
+70.77
+73.34
+75.90
+78.48
+81.05
+83.61
+86.81
+88.73
+91.29
+93.83
+96.38
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE WATER THERMAL EXPANSION FACTOR AND THE

STEEL THERMAL EXPANSION FACTOR ( 0 C -1 ) (10 -6)
C; \ts\Tender-A,4.doc.
TABLE - A
MEC/S/05/62/03
Sheet 2 of 4
0
C
Bar
0.981
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
TABLE 1:
10
11
12
13
14
15
+34.82
+36.97
+39.36
+41.76
+44.18
+46.60
+49.02
+51.44
+53.88
+56.32
+58.77
+61.21
+63.67
+66.12
+68.58
+71.05
+73.51
+75.97
+78.44
+80.91
+83.37
+85.84
+88.30
+90.67
+93.22
+95.69
+98.14
+100.60
+103.05
+105.50
+107.94
+4922
+51.26
+53.55
+55.84
+58.14
+60.45
+62.76
+65.08
+67.40
+69.73
+72.07
+74.41
+76.74
+79.09
+81.45
+83.80
+86.15
+88.51
+90.87
+93.23
+95.59
+97.95
+100.31
+102.67
+105.03
+107.39
+109.74
+112.10
+114.44
+116.79
+119.13
+63.20
+65.15
+67.33
+69.51
+71.70
+73.90
+76.10
+78.32
+80.53
+82.75
+84.98
+87.22
+89.45
+91.69
+93.93
+96.18
+18.43
+100.68
+102.94
+105.19
+107.45
+109.71
+111.97
+114.23
+116.48
+118.74
+121.00
+123.25
+125.50
+127.75
+130.00
+76.78
+78.64
+80.71
+82.79
+84.87
+86.96
+89.07
+91.17
+93.29
+95.41
+97.53
+99.66
+101.79
+103.93
+106.07
+108.21
+110.36
+112.51
+114.66
+116.82
+118.97
+121.13
+123.29
+125.45
+127.60
+129.76
+131.92
+134.08
+136.24
+138.39
+140.54
+89.99
+91.75
+93.72
+95.70
+97.68
+99.68
+102.67
+103.68
+105.69
+107.70
+109.73
+111.75
+113.79
+115.83
+117.67
+119.90
+121.96
+124.01
+126.06
+128.12
+130.17
+132.24
+134.29
+136.36
+138.42
+140.48
+142.54
+144.61
+146.67
+148.73
+150.79
+102.83
+104.51
+106.39
+108.26
+110.14
+112.04
+113.93
+115.84
+117.76
+119.67
+121.59
+123.52
+125.46
+127.39
+129.34
+131.20
+133.74
+135.19
+137.15
+139.11
+141.07
+143.03
+144.99
+146.96
+148.93
+150.90
+152.87
+154.84
+156.84
+158.78
+160.75
+115.34
+116.93
+118.71
+120.49
+122.28
+124.07
+125.88
+127.69
+129.50
+131.32
+133.15
+134.98
+136.82
+138.67
+140.51
+142.37
+144.22
+146.08
+147.94
+149.81
+151.68
+153.55
+155.42
+157.30
+159.18
161.05
+162.93
+164.81
+166.69
+168.57
+170.45
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE THERMAL EXPANSION FACTOR THE STEEL

THERMAL EXPANSION FACTOR ( 0 C -1 ) (10 -6)
TABLE - A
MEC/S/05/62/03
Sheet 3 of 4
0
C
Bar
0.981
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
TABLE 1:
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
+127.52
+129.02
+130.71
+132.40
+134.10
+135.80
+137.51
+139.22
+140.95
+142.67
+144.42
146.15
+147.90
+149.65
+151.40
+153.16
+154.93
+156.69
+158.47
+160.24
+162.01
+163.80
+165.58
+167.36
+169.16
+170.94
+172.73
+174.53
+176.32
+178.11
+179.90
+139.41
+140.83
+142.42
+144.02
+145.62
+147.24
+148.86
+150.49
+152.11
+153.75
+155.40
+157.04
+158.70
+160.36
+162.03
+163.70
+165.37
+167.05
+168.73
+170.42
+172.10
+173.80
+175.43
+177.19
+178.89
+180.59
+182.30
+184.00
+185.70
+187.42
+189.13
+151.00
+152.36
+153.85
+155.35
+156.87
+158.39
+159.92
+161.46
+163.00
+164.56
+166.11
+167.66
+169.24
+170.81
+172.39
+173.98
+175.56
+177.15
+178.75
+180.35
+181.95
+183.55
+185.16
+186.78
+188.39
+190.01
+191.63
+193.25
+194.88
+196.50
+198.13
+162.31
+163.58
+165.00
+166.42
+167.85
+169.85
+170.73
+172.18
+173.64
+175.10
+176.58
+178.05
+179.54
+181.02
+182.51
+184.00
+185.51
+187.02
+188.53
+190.05
+191.57
+193.09
+194.62
+196.14
+197.68
+199.21
+200.75
+202.29
+203.83
+205.37
+206.92
+173.37
+174.56
+175.90
+177.23
+178.58
+179.93
+181.29
+182.66
+184.03
+185.41
+186.80
+188.20
+189.59
+191.00
+192.41
+193.82
+195.24
+196.66
+198.09
+199.52
+200.97
+202.40
+203.85
+205.30
+206.75
+208.20
+209.66
+211.12
+212.59
+214.05
+215.51
+184.18
+185.30
+186.55
+187.80
+189.07
+190.34
+191.62
+192.91
+194.20
+195.50
+196.80
+198.12
+199.44
+200.75
+202.09
+203.42
+204.76
+206.10
+207.45
+208.80
+210.16
+211.53
+212.89
+214.26
+215.63
+217.00
+218.40
+219.77
+221.16
+222.54
+223.93
+194.75
+195.79
+196.96
+198.14
+199.33
+200.52
+201.72
+202.93
+204.14
+205.36
+206.59
+207.82
+209.06
+210.31
+211.56
+212.81
+214.08
+215.34
+216.61
+217.89
+219.17
+220.46
+221.74
+223.04
+224.33
+225.63
+226.93
+228.24
+229.55
+230.86
+232.18
+205.08
+206.07
+207.16
+208.26
+209.37
+210.49
+211.61
+212.74
+213.88
+215.03
+216.17
+217.33
+218.49
+219.66
+220.84
+222.02
+223.20
+224.39
+225.55
+226.79
+227.99
+229.20
+230.41
+231.63
+232.85
+234.08
+235.31
+236.54
+237.77
+239.01
+240.26
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE WATER THERMAL EXPANSION FACTOR AND `

THE STEEL THERMAL EXPANSION FACTOR ( 0 C -1 ) (10 -6)
TABLE -A
MEC/S/05/62/03
Sheet 4 of 4
0
C
Bar
0.981
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
+215.22
+216.13
+217.15
+218.18
+219.21
+220.25
+221.30
+222.35
+223.42
+224.48
+225.56
+226.64
+227.73
+228.82
+229.92
+231.03
+232.14
+233.26
+234.38
+235.51
+236.64
+237.77
+238.91
+240.06
+241.21
+242.36
+243.52
+244.68
+245.84
+247.01
+248.18
+215.14
+225.99
+226.94
+227.88
+228.85
+229.82
+230.79
+231.78
+232.77
+233.76
+234.76
+235.78
+236.79
+237.81
+238.84
+239.87
+240.91
+241.96
+243.01
+244.06
+245.12
+246.18
+247.26
+248.33
+249.41
+250.49
+251.58
+252.66
+253.76
+254.86
+255.96
+234.88
+235.66
+236.53
+237.41
+238.30
+239.20
+240.11
+241.02
+241.94
+242.87
+243.79
+244.73
+245.68
+246.63
+247.59
+248.55
+249.52
+250.49
+251.47
+252.46
+253.45
+254.45
+255.45
+256.46
+257.46
+258.48
+259.49
+260.52
+261.54
+262.57
+263.60
+244.41
+245.13
+245.94
+246.75
+247.58
+248.40
+249.24
+250.08
+250.93
+251.79
+252.66
+253.53
+254.40
+255.28
+25618
+257.07
+257.97
+258.88
+259.79
+260.71
+261.63
+262.50
+263.49
+264.43
+265.37
+266.31
+267.27
+268.23
+269.18
+270.15
+271.11
+253.79
+254.44
+255.18
+255.93
+256.69
+257.45
+258.22
+258.99
+259.78
+260.57
+261.36
+262.17
+262.98
+263.69
+264.62
+265.44
+266.28
+267.12
+267.97
+268.82
+269.67
+270.54
+271.40
+272.28
+273.16
+274.04
+274.92
+275.82
+276.71
+277.61
+278.51
+263.00
+264.59
+264.27
+264.95
+265.64
+266.33
+267.04
+267.75
+248.47
+269.19
+269.92
+270.77
+271.41
+272.16
+272.92
+273.69
+274.46
+275.23
+276.01
+276.80
+277.59
+278.39
+279.19
+280.00
+280.82
+281.63
+282.46
+283.29
+284.12
+284.95
+285.79
+272.03
+272.57
+273.18
+273.80
+274.42
+275.07
+275.70
+276.35
+277.01
+277.66
+278.33
+279.01
+279.69
+280.38
+281.08
+281.78
+282.49
+283.20
+283.92
+284.64
+285.37
+286.11
+286.85
+287.59
+288.35
+289.11
+289.86
+290.64
+291.40
+292.18
+292.95
TABLE :
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE WATER THERMAL EXPANSION FACTOR AND

THE STEEL THERMAL EXPANSION FACTOR ( 0 C -1 ) (10 -6)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
MAJOR WATER CROSSINGS
(CONVENTIONAL)
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
\\Akjha\work contrac\standard TS for Pipe Line WC (Vol-II) MASTER FOLDER\04A major water crossing\Major Water Crossing -Final 04.doc
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 1 OF 14
MEC/S/05/62/04
REVISION 0
CONTENTS
0.0
DEFINITION
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
GENERAL
3.0
TRENCHING
4.0
CONTINUOUS CONCRETE COATING
5.0
HYDROSTATIC PRE-TESTING
6.0
INSTALLATION
7.0
BACKFILLING AND BANK PROTECTION
8.0
FINAL HYDROSTATIC TEST
9.0
POST-CONSTRUCTION SURVEY
10.0
FINAL CLEAN-UP
11.0
DOCUMENTATION
PREPARED BY
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
00
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 2 OF 14
MEC/S/05/62/04
REVISION
DEFINITION
A major water crossing shall be reckoned the one which will necessitate
passing the gas pipeline across a water body such as perennial river, major
irrigation canal, pond, lake, lagoon, creek etc. using special attention and means.
The parameters required to classify a particular water body as a major water
crossing shall comprise of size, hydrological data, authority/ownership,
importance and other ecological/ environmental factors associated with it, and
the authority to classify it such, shall rest with the COMPANY.
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This specification covers the minimum requirements for the various activities to
be performed by CONTRACTOR for the construction of pipeline major water
crossings by conventional trenching method. Provisions of this specification are
applicable only for "major water crossings" specifically named as such in the
CONTRACT.
1.2

CONTRACTOR.
1.3
CONTRACTOR shall, with due care and diligence, execute the work in
compliance with all laws, by-laws, ordinances, regulations etc. and provide all
services and labour, inclusive of supervision thereof, all materials excluding the
materials indicated as "Company supplied Materials" in the CONTRACT,
equipment, appliances or other things of whatsoever nature required in or about
the execution of the work, whether of a temporary or permanent nature.
1.4
CONTRACTOR shall take full responsibility for the stability and safety of all
operations and methods involved in the work.
1.5
CONTRACTOR shall be deemed to have inspected and examined the work

area and its surroundings and to have satisfied himself so far as practicable as
to the form and nature thereof, including sub-surface conditions, hydrological
and climatic conditions, the extent and nature of the work and materials
necessary for the completion of the work, and the means of access to the work
area.
1.6
CONTRACTOR shall be deemed to have obtained all necessary information as

to risks, contingencies and all other circumstances, which may influence the
work w.r.t. the above.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 3 OF 14
MEC/S/05/62/04
REVISION
1.7
CONTRACTOR shall, in connection with the work, provide and maintain at

his own costs all lights, guards, fencing, watching etc., when and where
necessary or required by COMPANY or by any duly constituted authority
for the protection of the work and properties or for the safety and the
convenience of public and/ or others.
1.8
For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions shall hold :
the words `Shall' and `Must' are mandatory

the words `Should', `May' and `Will' are non-mandatory, advisory, or
recommended.
2.0
GENERAL
2.1
All works of the pipeline major water crossing shall be performed in accordance
with the approved construction drawings, procedures, other applicable
documents as per the CONTRACT, good pipeline practice and as directed by
COMPANY.
2.2
Before start of the field construction, CONTRACTOR shall submit

to
COMPANY, for approval for each major water crossing a complete report
containing at the minimum :i)
installation method
ii)
proposed time schedule indicating start and finish dates and detailed
break-up of time period for all critical activities associated with the work.
iii)
required work area along with layout and location
iv)
equipment to be used (including number and capacity of equipment).
v)
manpower deployment during construction
vi)
proposed sub-contractors and/ or vendors along with their scope of work.
The description of the installation method as a minimum shall include the

following:
a)
Study of water currents in relation to the method of launching (on bottom

and on surface).
b)
Calculation for stability of pipeline during launching and final test.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 4 OF 14
MEC/S/05/62/04
REVISION
c)
Buoyancy studies
d)
Preparation of fabrication yard and launching areas.
e)
Pipeline construction details (handling, stringing, welding, concrete

coating etc.)
f)
Pre-test procedure including trial mix, design & tests for concrete coating.
g)
Procedure for corrosion coating of field joint
h)
Dredging, anchoring program, spoil-deposit and trench survey method

including facilities for COMPANY.
i)
Pulling or other installation method and related calculations.
j)
Pulling arrangement including launchway and anchoring and breaking

device.
k)
Trench correction before launching.
l)
Method of positioning and sinking of pipeline.
m)
Method of rectification of damages to the pipeline, during launching.
n)
Method of backfilling, bank protection and survey.
o)
Final test procedure after backfilling.
p)
Safety systems during launching, rope tests.
q)
Communication.
r)
Abandonment and recovery procedures concurred.
s)
Necessary permission from concerned authorities for crossing.
COMPANY shall inform CONTRACTOR within 21 days if any objection against

the document and procedure described requires resubmission by
CONTRACTOR.
Approval by COMPANY of the methods used by CONTRACTOR shall in no way
relieve CONTRACTOR from the sole responsibility for safe and satisfactory
installation of the crossing.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
2.3
2.4
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 5 OF 14
MEC/S/05/62/04
REVISION
0
CONTRACTOR shall comply with all the conditions and requirements issued by
authorities having jurisdiction in the area where the work is to be performed.
CONTRACTOR shall, at his own responsibility, obtain necessary permits from
the authorities having jurisdiction, for performing his work.
If no public roads exist, CONTRACTOR shall arrange on his own for access to
his work area at no extra cost to COMPANY.
Pre-construction Surveys
Prior to start of any work, CONTRACTOR shall carry out a survey of the major
water crossings and acquaint himself with site conditions and to collect any data
regarding the water velocity and the tidal variations in the flow pattern and shall
verify the suitability of his equipment and the methods of construction.
3.0
TRENCHING
3.1
Dredging/ Excavating
3.1.1
CONTRACTOR shall dredge or excavate the trench for the water crossing in
conformity with the approved drawings. Dredging of the trench shall be executed
as accurately as possible.
3.1.2
The trench shall be excavated to such depth as required to provide the minimum
cover and the pipeline configuration as specified. The pipeline profile of the
crossings shall be followed as accurately as possible. Before laying, the trench
shall be cleaned and levelled. The trench shall be subject to inspection by
COMPANY prior to installation of the pipe.
3.1.3
Navigational traffic shall not be obstructed, unless permission has been given
thereto. CONTRACTOR shall issue all necessary publications according to the
local regulations. Instructions given by authorities shall be followed accurately
and immediately, so that there in no hindrance to traffic. For stoppage of
navigational traffic public notification, PA system, signal/ sign etc. shall be
provided.
CONTRACTOR cannot request a compensation if his work is hampered or
delayed due to weather conditions, any obstacles/ or by any traffic on the spot,
where work is executed.
3.1.4
CONTRACTOR is fully responsible for the execution of the blasting (whenever

permitted) the dredging and excavation work, hopping of the soil, transportation,
dumping on land or in water, all to be executed in agreement with authorities,
land owners and COMPANY.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 6 OF 14
MEC/S/05/62/04
REVISION 0
3.1.5
CONTRACTOR may be obliged to dredge or excavate a trench deeper or wider

than indicated in the drawings in order to properly lay the pipeline in unstable
(underwater) areas, or near and adjacent to the banks of water courses. It shall
be understood that CONTRACTOR is aware of such problems at the time of this
bid and that, when such additional excavation is required, it shall be done by
CONTRACTOR as part of the work and that he will install the necessary
provision and/ or temporary works such as sheet-piling, special filling materials,
etc. at no extra cost to COMPANY.
3.1.6
During, the execution of dredging work of CONTRACTOR, bearings,

measurements and levels shall be taken by or on behalf of COMPANY.
CONTRACTOR shall render assistance for this purpose and make available for
COMPANY appropriate survey boats, fully manned and equipped before the
start of excavation work of the water crossing trench. CONTRACTOR, if so
desired by COMPANY, shall make cross profiles at intervals of not more than
10.0m of the bottom of the water-course along the surveyed center line of the
water crossing. In such a case horizontal measurements shall be taken by
triangulation or taping between known points and shall be made with such
accuracy that the location of each vertical measurement is known within 1.0m.
Vertical measurements shall be taken with a sonic recording device, or with line
and rod, as directed by COMPANY and shall be taken with such accuracy that
each depth is known within 0.2m. Vertical measurements shall be taken at points
averaging not more than 5.0m apart and no two measurements shall be more
than 7.0m apart. The cross profiles shall extend at least 10m on both sides of
the top of the trench.
All measurements shall be witnessed by COMPANY. The resulting profile,
corrected to the elevation of the undisturbed water-course, shall then be the
reference profile. Said profile shall be plotted on a 1:200 vertical and horizontal
scale.
3.1.7
CONTRACTOR shall keep the trench in good condition until the pipe is laid, and
no claim is to be made to the COMPANY by reason of its caving either before or
after the pipe is laid. CONTRACTOR shall do whatever is required to excavate
the trench, install the pipe in it and backfill the trench in accordance with these
specifications at no extra cost to COMPANY.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 7 OF 14
MEC/S/05/62/04
REVISION
3.1.8
Immediately before installation of the water crossing in the excavated trench,

CONTRACTOR shall prepare a profile of the trench bottom along the surveyed
center line of the water crossing for comparison with the reference profile.
CONTRACTOR shall also make cross sections of the trench at intervals of not
more than 100m. All profile and cross section measurements shall be taken as
specified and shall be witnessed by COMPANY. These data shall be submitted
to COMPANY for approval and COMPANY will approve or reject the trench
excavation as completed within 24 hours after receipt of the profile and cross
sections.
3.1.9
CONTRACTOR shall grade the trench in such a manner as to give the

maximum amount of uniform support to the pipeline when it is lowered or pulled
into place. The maximum unsupported span shall not exceed 10.0m.
3.1.10
In submerged sections, where rock or gravel is encountered in the bottom of the

trench, padding is required. The thickness of the padding under the concrete
coated pipe shall at least be 50 cm and after installation at least 50 cm around
the pipe.
Blasting, if any, and padding shall be included in the work.
3.2
Pumping Line
In case CONTRACTOR uses pumping lines to discharge the spoil, he shall take
care of the necessary permits.
Pumping lines, discharges and siphons shall be installed by CONTRACTOR and
removed before the completion of the work. At crossings with existing roads, the
pumping lines shall be led through a casing pipe bored/ jacked under the road or
led through a porch over the road. A stress calculation must then be handed
over to COMPANY. The necessary provisions to embank the dumping area and
also the spoil basins shall be made by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR is
responsible for transportation of the soil and dumping on land and is liable for
damage to works of third parties caused by leakage of pumping lines, etc.
CONTRACTOR shall at all time prevent overflow of pumping water, spoil or
sand over embankments, parcels or roads. Further more, CONTRACTOR shall
safeguard COMPANY from claims of compensation by third parties due to
encountered damage.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
3.3
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 8 OF 14
MEC/S/05/62/04
REVISION
Spoil
Spoil which is not dumped on and including spoil acquired after cleaning the
water crossing trench, shall be transported and dumped in places, designated
thereto by agreement between CONTRACTOR and authorities and approved of
by COMPANY. Spoil shall be transported in (split) barges; only those barges
shall be used that avoid spilling during transportation due to incorrect closing of
the flaps, etc. Spoil which is dumped outside the designated places shall be
removed by CONTRACTOR at first notice by COMPANY.
3.4
Dykes, Dams and Weirs

CONTRACTOR shall install temporary provisions in the existing dykes, dams,
etc. to prevent flooding of low areas.
Therefore in general, in existing dykes, dams, etc a double substituting weir
must be installed before start of excavation in the existing dyke or dam. Such a
double substituting weir can be a closed wall of sheet piling, supported by soil.
The provisions shall be such that the underwater profile of the dredged trench,
the water movement caused by ships, etc. cause no slides/ cave-ins of the dyke
or dam.
4.0
CONTINUOUS CONCRETE COATING

CONTRACTOR shall provide concrete coating over the pipeline including the
bends in accordance with the specification issued for the purpose (refer
specification no. MEC/S/05/11/03 and approved procedure. CONTRACTOR
shall coat the weld joints in order to arrive at a continuously concrete coated
pipeline. However this concrete coating shall be applied after the hydrostatic
pretest.
5.0
HYDROSTATIC PRE-TESTING
CONTRACTOR shall hydrostatically pre-test the pipe string of each water
crossing before installation as per approved procedure.
Joint coating of the welds shall be done after this pre-test.
The section of the pipeline corresponding to the major water crossing shall,
before installation, be subjected to hydrostatic pre-testing to a combined
equivalent stress of 90% of the SMYS of the pipe material.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 9 OF 14
MEC/S/05/62/04
REVISION
After the temperature has been stabilised, the pressure shall be maintained in
the pipeline for at least twenty four hours and recorded by manothermograph.
During the test CONTRACTOR shall check all welds for leakage. Failure, if any,
during the test shall be rectified by the CONTRACTOR. If the same is due to
failure on account of any cause other than defect in material supplied by
COMPANY, the repairs shall be done free of cost, to the satisfaction of
COMPANY.
6.0
INSTALLATION
6.1
CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed scheme for the method he proposes to

adopt for installing the pipeline to COMPANY for approval. CONTRACTOR shall
calculate all stresses in the pipeline while laying and check whether the stresses
remain within permissible limits. A set of all calculations shall be submitted to the
COMPANY for approval.
6.2
CONTRACTOR shall perform all work required to install the water crossings,
including the possible appurtenances indicated in the drawings. The water
crossings shall be installed in such a manner as to comply with the requirements
and conditions stated by the Authorities issuing the permits. CONTRACTOR
shall pay special attention to minimize any damage to embankments and dykes
in the vicinity of water crossings.
6.3
The equipment for launching shall be arranged in such a way that the pipeline is
laid without impact or jerking and is not subjected to stresses of any type other
than those which are allowable. Minimum allowed radius of curvature shall be
followed, particularly at the end of the launching way towards the water in the
freely suspended section.
6.4
After the water-crossing section has been installed in place, CONTRACTOR

shall fill this section including the pertaining land sections with water for the final
testing.
6.5
CONTRACTOR shall check if the position and depth of the water crossing are in
accordance with the approved drawings, by means of a profile of the pipeline,
before and after the water-crossing section is filled with water. CONTRACTOR
shall lower each pipeline section which is not sufficiently deep by dredging or
jetting the underlying ground.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
6.6
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 10 OF 14
MEC/S/05/62/04
REVISION
The maximum allowed horizontal deviation from the required center line shall be
limited to the following :For pipeline dia. upto and including 24" - 300 mm
For pipeline dia greater than 24" - 500 mm
6.7
Prior to backfill the pipeline shall, when laid in the trench, conform to the bottom
contour of the trench grade, so that it will be firmly, uniformly and continuously
supported. COMPANY may employ a diver or use other suitable methods to
inspect the bottom of the trench and/ or after the pipe is installed prior to
backfilling of the trench. CONTRACTOR shall facilitate the work of the diver and
shall furnish the necessary equipment and helpers (other than actual diving
equipment) necessary for the diver/ inspector to perform his work.
6.8
If the pipe does not properly fit the trench or does not rest at sufficient depth to
satisfy the minimum requirements of cover as specified in approved drawings,
the CONTRACTOR shall make necessary corrections to either trench or the
pipe alignment or to both so that the pipe, when finally in position in the trench,
shall fully meet the specifications, failing which CONTRACTOR may be asked to
remove the pipeline. This shall be done at no extra to the COMPANY.
6.9
Installation of Parallel Pipelines

When parallel pipelines are required to be installed for a major water crossing.
CONTRACTOR shall further comply with the following requirements.
6.9.1
Depending on the diameters of the parallel pipelines, the characteristics of the

crossing and the limitations of CONTRACTOR's equipment, CONTRACTOR
may propose installation of the parallel pipelines either together in a combined
operation or separately in a common trench.
6.9.2
If the pipelines are installed together, the minimum clear distance between the
parallel pipelines (measured from the outside diameters of the concrete coated
pipes) shall be 300mm. CONTRACTOR shall provide spacers at sufficient
intervals along the length of the pipe section(s), securely fixed to the pipes, or
shall propose other suitable alternative methods, so as to ensure that the
stipulated minimum clear distance is maintained. The spacers may be removed
before the trench is backfilled.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 11 OF 14
MEC/S/05/62/04
REVISION
CONTRACTOR shall furnish detailed drawings for the pipe assembly showing
the details of spacers/ other arrangements for COMPANY's approval before
start of construction.
6.9.3
If the parallel pipelines are installed separately in a common trench, the

minimum clear distance between the parallel pipelines in the trench shall be
5000mm. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that this minimum spacing be
maintained till the time the trench is backfilled.
7.0
BACKFILLING AND BANK PROTECTION
7.1
Backfilling of the water-crossing section shall be performed as described in the

following clauses.
7.1.1
The bottom of the waterway shall be reinstated to its original level by backfilling
the trench in a manner and with suitable material and as prescribed and
approved by the authorities and COMPANY. In case material other than the
original spoil is required, this shall be supplied and applied by CONTRACTOR.
Wherever boulders, rock, gravel and other hard object are encountered, they
shall not be placed directly on the pipe. Sufficient earth, and or selected and
approved backfill material shall be backfilled initially around and over the pipe to
provide a protective padding or cushion extending to a minimum thickness of 50
centimeters around the pipe before backfilling remainder of the trench with
excavated or other material.
Wherever required by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall cover the (nearly)
backfilled trench with a layer of rock boulders to be approved by COMPANY
over a width equal to the width of the excavated trench with an extra of 5 m on
either side at no extra cost to COMPANY.
7.1.2
Backfilling progress of the trench shall be checked continuously, and a daily

progress report shall be made and handed over to COMPANY.
7.1.3
All embankments and/ or dykes, bed and banks shall be reinstated to their
original state and levels, unless otherwise prescribed in the drawings or by the
Competent authorities or COMPANY.
7.1.4
All remaining spoil-deposits shall be cleaned by CONTRACTOR to the

satisfaction of COMPANY.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 12 OF 14
MEC/S/05/62/04
REVISION
7.2
Bank Protection
7.2.1
Trenches in banks of major water crossings shall be backfilled with soil

approved by COMPANY. The fill at the banks shall be tamped firmly and
reinforced with sacked earth, rip-rap, or by other means as directed by
COMPANY to the satisfaction of authorities having jurisdiction thereof. In areas
where the backfilled soil is expected to be of loose type which is prone to flow,
the trench shall be backfilled with boulder/ crushed rock of minimum 75mm
thickness. The boulder/ crushed rock shall be derived from solid, stable, nonsoluble and approved quality store approved by COMPANY and pipe shall be
provided with adequate padding of soil of a quality approved by COMPANY.
Wherever necessary the boulder/ crushed rock shall be held to the bed by use
of 6.1 wire nets of minimum dia. of 3.2mm, made from steel having tensile
2
strength of 400 N/mm and with a minimum elongation at failure of 12%. The
-2
minimum zinc coating of 275 gm shall be applied on single/ double twisted
wire. After the trench has been backfilled and during the clean up works, the
water crossing shall be cleaned across the whole width of ROW. The existing
bed profile shall be maintained after restorations.
7.2.2
Unless stipulated otherwise by the authorities or by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR

shall protect the banks of the major water crossings by using gravel and
boulders filled embankment mattresses of galvanized iron wire (of specification
as in 7.2.1 above) to be laid over the backfilled, compacted and graded banks.
In case slope of the banks is 1:1 or more, bank protection shall be carried out
using gabions. Bank protection works shall be carried out by CONTRACTOR in
accordance with the drawings included in the CONTRACT. All materials required
for such works shall be supplied by CONTRACTOR and all works carried out in
accordance with specifications, approved drawings, instructions of COMPANY
and to the complete satisfaction of authorities having jurisdiction at no extra cost
to COMPANY.
The length of the above protection shall be equal to the actual bank excavation
edge including damage and further extending 10 m on either sides, The width of
the restoration on the slope shall be determined by the levels :
2m above Highest Water Level, (recordable) or upto the top of bank ,

whichever is higher.
5m below Low Water Level (recordable) or upto pipe trench level in the
bed.
7.2.3
Before final hydrostatic testing, CONTRACTOR shall `prove' the diameter of the
pipeline by passing a gauging (caliper) pig through the pipeline. The gauging
pig shall have a diameter equal to 95% of the internal diameter of the
pipe.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 13 OF 14
MEC/S/05/62/04
REVISION
CONTRACTOR shall supply and install all temporary scraper, launchers.

Receivers and other equipment, piping and materials and consumables for
the purpose.
8.0
FINAL HYDROSTATIC TEST

The complete water crossing must be tested immediately after the approved
backfilling of the trench. The test procedure shall result in a hoop stress in pipe
corresponding to 90% SMYS of the pipe material. After temperature stabilisation
pressure shall be retained in the pipeline for a minimum of 4 hours and recorded
by manothermograph. The hydrostatic testing shall be carried out in accordance
with approved procedures.
9.0
POST-CONSTRUCTION SURVEY
After laying of the pipeline, CONTRACTOR shall carry out a post-construction
survey jointly with COMPANY. Any defects brought to the notice of
CONTRACTOR shall be promptly corrected by CONTRACTOR at his own
expense to the complete satisfaction of COMPANY.
10.0
FINAL CLEAN-UP
After completion of construction, CONTRACTOR shall clear the site of all
balance material and debris. All balance pipe lengths, in case supplied by
COMPANY, shall be returned to COMPANY's designated stock yard(s). Site
shall be cleared to the complete satisfaction of COMPANY and authorities
having jurisdiction. All such works shall be done at no extra cost to COMPANY.
11.0
DOCUMENTATION
11.1
In addition to the documents specified elsewhere in this specification.

CONTRACTOR shall submit to the COMPANY six copies of each of the
following documents / records.
Complete record of pipes `taken-over' from COMPANY, number of pipe

lengths used, and record of return of balance pipe lengths to
COMPANY's designated stock-yard(s).
Copies of the permits obtained from authorities having jurisdiction for the
various works.
Records of Non-destructive testing of welds.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
11.2
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 14 OF 14
MEC/S/05/62/04
REVISION
Clearance certificates from the land owners and authorities having

jurisdiction regarding satisfactory clean-up and restoration of pipeline
ROU and work areas.
After completion of construction CONTRACTOR shall prepare & furnish six sets
of copies and two sets of reproducible of As-built drawing for the crossings.
As-built drawings shall be as a minimum, include the following information.
11.3
True profile of the bed and banks of the water crossing along the pipeline
after backfilling.
True profile of the pipeline as installed and the top of cover to top of pipe
at regular intervals.
Location and angle of sag and over bends.
Extent of backfill.
Extent of bank protection.
All documents shall be in English Language
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PIPELINES CROSSING ROADS,
RAILROADS, MINOR WATER
AND OTHER CROSSINGS

MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
\\Akjha\work contrac\standard TS for Pipe Line WC (Vol-II) MASTER FOLDER\05 pipeline crossing road,railroad , minor water etc\PCR-MWC final-1 05.doc
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

RAILROADS, MINOR WATER AND
OTHER CROSSINGS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 1 OF 10
MEC/S/05/62/05
REVISION 0
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
GENERAL
3.0
ROAD AND RAIL-ROAD CROSSINGS
4.0
CROSSINGS OF BURIED SERVICES
5.0
MINOR WATER COURSE CROSSINGS
PREPARED BY
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

OTHER CROSSINGS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 2 OF 10
MEC/S/05/62/05
REVISION
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This specification covers the minimum requirement for the various activities to
be carried out by the CONTRACTOR for or about the installation of pipelines
crossing roads, railroads, minor water courses and other services.
The provisions of this specification are not applicable for pipelines crossing
water courses, which are specifically designated as "Major Water Courses" in
the CONTRACT.
1.2
This specification shall be road in conjunction with the conditions of all

and CONTRACTOR.
For the purpose of this specification the following definitions shall hold :
the words "Shall" and "Must" are mandatory

the words "Should, "May" and "Will" are non-mandatory, advisory
recommended.
2.0
GENERAL
2.1
Crossing of roads, railroads, buried services, canals and minor water courses
with equipment and/ or personnel is allowed only after acquiring approval from
the authorities having jurisdiction and after making arrangements for
safeguarding the roads, etc. and the buried services with appropriate provisions.
Highways, main-roads and railroads and their verges and banks of water
crossings are not allowed to be used for loading, unloading or stacking of
materials and/ or equipment. For secondary roads, such loading/ unloading is
permitted only after prior approval from the concerned authorities
CONTRACTOR is not allowed to close or divert roads or water courses without
prior approval from the COMPANY and the concerned authorities.
CONTRACTOR shall never unnecesarilly hamper the users of the roads,
railroads, buried services and/ or water courses. The water flow shall not be
obstructed in any way.
2.2
COMPANY reserves the right to demand for individual crossings from the
CONTRACTOR a separate detailed report for approval, containing :
Time schedule
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

OTHER CROSSINGS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 3 OF 10
MEC/S/05/62/05
REVISION
Working method with equipment

Test procedure
Manpower deployment
Calculations of temporary works
Soil investigations, etc.
Such works shall be without any extra cost to COMPANY.

2.3
Pipeline crossings for road, railroad, canals and rivers etc., shall be
hydrostatically pretested ex-situ, prior to joint coating, whenever,
Crossing is executed by boring ;
Crossing is installed in casing pipe;
River crossing pipes which are to be continuously concrete weight coated

(to be tested prior to concrete coating);
Whenever, in COMPANY's opinion, the repair of pipeline at crossing, in

case of a leak during final hydrostatic testing, would require inordinate
amount of effort and/ or time;
Whenever pretesting is insisted upon by the Authorities having

jurisdication over the utility crossed.
The section of the pipeline for the crossings shall be tested as a single string.
Unless specified otherwise in the CONTRACT, the test pressure shall be the
one resulting in a hoop stress corresponding to 90% of SMYS of pipe material.
Test pressure shall be retained in the pipeline for minimum period of 2 hours.
Test section shall be visually examined for leaks/ defects, etc.
3.0
ROAD AND RAILROAD CROSSINGS
3.1
The work under crossings shall include necessary clearing, grading and
trenching to required depths and widths, welding of casing (when required) and
carrier pipes, coating, lowering-in, backfilling, clean-up, restoration to the original
condition and further strengthening and protective works, testing, installation of
assemblies, insulators and seals, and temporary works such as sheet pilling,
bridges, etc.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

OTHER CROSSINGS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 4 OF 10
MEC/S/05/62/05
REVISION
0
The work shall be carried out in accordance with the approved drawings and job
standards, as directed by COMPANY and to the satisfaction of COMPANY and
the authorities having jurisdication over th facility crossed. The work carried out
for road and railroad crossings shall meet the minimum requirements of API RP
1102, latest edition.
Before the installation work of crossings is started, the CONTRACTOR shall
provide suitable barricades, temporary bridge/ bypass work (especially where
roads are open-cut) with railing, if required by COMPANY for safety of traffic.
Adequate traffic warning signals and/ or traffic lights and suitable diversions shall
be provided as directed by COMPANY/ Authority having jurisdication over these
areas. Such diversions shall not cross the pipeline where it has already been
installed, unless proper safeguarding in COMPANY's opinion is ensured.
Prior approval from the statutory authorities shall be obtained to lay the pipeline
across highways/ roads either by boring or by open-cut method. Installation of
the crossing shall be by the method (i.e., boring/ open-cut) approved by
Authorities having jurisdiction. Railroad crossings shall always be bored/ jacked.
3.2
Boring/ jacking of carrier pipes for crossings is allowed only if the pipes for
boring/ jacking are provided with a suitable corrosion coating and
CONTRACTOR remains liable for the suitablity of the pipe and weld-coating of
carrier pipes to be bored and for which coating and method of application are
anyhow to be authorised by COMPANY without prejudice to CONTRACTOR's
liability. In all other cases the carrier pipes shall be cased.
Before start of the boring/ jacking CONTRACTOR shall execute a soil
investigation and determine the ground water table. Based on these
investigations CONTRACTOR shall prepare a construction drawing and submit
to COMPANY for approval including time schedule and soil investigation report.
The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval of COMPANY the method of
boring / trenchless to be carried out, depending on the nature of soil conditions,
nature of crossing, local requirements etc.
During the execution of boring the ground water table over the length of the
boring shall be lowered up to atleast 0.50 M below bottom of the pipeline. This
water table is to be regularly inspected and maintained by CONTRACTOR and
reported to COMPANY. To safeguard the stability of the borepit, CONTRACTOR
shall, if necessary in COMPANY's opinion, use a closed sheetpiling which shall
extend atleast over 50% of the length in undisturbed soil. The length of the
boring shall be in accordance with the length of the ROW of the crossing (road,
railroad, etc.) with minimum 0.6 m extra on either side.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

OTHER CROSSINGS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 5 OF 10
MEC/S/05/62/05
REVISION
If the soil conditions and groundwater for a particular boring give reasons for
this, CONTRACTOR is entitled to suggest to COMPANY for a relaxation of one
or more of the following requirements as defined hereforth :
Soil investigation
Lowering of groundwater table
Sheetpiling
Length of boring etc.
In approaches to the crossing, CONTRACTOR shall eliminate unnecessary

bending of pipe by conforming to the contour of the ground by gradually
deepening the ditch at such approaches as directed by the COMPANY.
3.3
The bottom of the trench and/ or the pit for at least twelve (12) metres at the
approach to each end of a casing shall be graded and if necessary backfilled
with clean sand and compacted upto atleast 95% Proctor density to an elevation
that will provide sufficient and continuous support to the pipeline so that the
pipeline remains correctly aligned at the casing ends during and after backfilling.
3.4
The diameter of the hole for a bored section shall have a hole diameter as close
as practicable to the outside diameter of the carrier or casing pipe. If excessive
void or too large hole results, or if it is necessary, in the opinion of COMPANY,
to abandon the bored hole, prompt remedial measures such as filling the hole
with suitable material shall be taken to the entire satisfaction of the COMPANY
and Authorities having jurisdication thereof at no extra cost to COMPANY.
Equipment used for installation of casing pipe shall be of the type approved by
COMPANY.
An installation consisting of hydraulic jacks shall be provided with easily
readable pressure gauges (in bar) and sealable pressure limits. Their proper
operation shall be demonstrated before the work is started. COMPANY can
request that the maximum pressing force be limited.
At the front of the pipe there may be a cutting ring which may be 12mm larger
than the outside diameter for the pipe or casing. A lubricating pipe can also be
used in jacking, the nipples of which shall not protrude from the cutting edge.
Said lubricating pipe shall not be fixed to the pipe casing. When jacking, only
biologically degradable lubricants shall be used (e.g. WRC Medlube or an
emulsion of bentonite).
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

OTHER CROSSINGS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 6 OF 10
MEC/S/05/62/05
REVISION
0
Removal of soil from the pipeline during jacking shall be done mechanically by
means of a standard, locked auger, which has to be safeguarded against jacking
ahead of the pipe.
During jacking the progress of the pipe to be jacked and the cutting capacity of
the auger shall be mutually adjusted, by regulating the speed of the auger, to
prevent the road from bulging (rpm too low) or cave-ins (rpm too high). In any
case no more soil shall be removed than the volume of the pipe. The auger drive
shall be provided with a clutch.
The progress in the work, the readings of the gauge pipes, the jacking pressures
observed, etc., shall be recorded in a log book, to be shown to COMPANY upon
request. All information shall be supplied to COMPANY on completion of the
work.
If the jacking fails, the casing shall not be withdrawn. It shall be filled with sand
and plugged at either end. The diameter of the casing pipe shall conform to API
RP 1102 recommendations or as directed by the Engineer in - charge.
COMPANY reserves the right to inspect certain lengths of pipes to assess
damages, if any, to the corrosion coating of the carrier pipe used for boring.
CONTRACTOR shall weld additional lengths of pipe and pull the required extra
lengths of COMPANY's inspection. If during inspection any defects are noticed,
CONTRACTOR, in consultation with COMPANY, shall carry out the remedial
measures required.
3.5
While welding of the casing and vent/ drain pipes, internal high or low is not
allowed. Welding of casing and vent/ drain pipes need not be radiographed,
however, only normal visual checks shall be carried out. Before welding, the
single length of pipe shall be inspected in order to check that there is no out of
roundness and dents. When such defects are noticed, these must be completely
removed before joining the pipes. If these defects cannot be repaired, the
defective section shall be cut out.
3.6
In the case of crossing where excavation has been authorised, the welding for
the casing pipe and for a continuous sectio of the pipeline corresponding to the
expected length shall be carried out in the proximity of the crossing. Casing must
be laid immediately after the trenching. Casing pipe must be laid with a single
gradient in order to allow for an easy insertion and, if necessary at a future date,
to allow for the removal or replacement of the pipeline, leaving the casing
undisturbed.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
3.7
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

OTHER CROSSINGS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 7 OF 10
MEC/S/05/62/05
REVISION
0
The assembly of vent pipe units as approved by COMPANY shall be carried out
by direct insertion and welding to the ends of the casing pipe before introducing
the carrier pipe. The operation of assembling and extending the vent pipe shall
be carried out in such a way that there is no contact with the carrier pipe. The
painting/ coating of the vent pipes shall be applied before backfilling as per
relevant specifications.
3.8
The casing pipe shall be considered ready for installation of the carrier pipe,
after careful inspection and internal cleaning with the removal of soil, mud,
stones and other foreign materials.
3.9
Insulators, as approved by COMPANY, shall be securely fastened to the pipe

with all bolts and fixtures firmly tightened. The number of insulators and spacing
shall be as shown in the drawings or at 2.5m intervals (whichever is more
stringent). At the end of both sides of the casing, a double set of insulators shall
be installed.
3.10
Care must be taken in pushing or pulling carrier pipe into the casing so that the
pipe is aligned correctly in the casing and that the pushing or pulling force is
evenly and constantly applied to avoid damages to the insulators. A nose piece
having a diameter equal to that of the pipe shall be welded on the front and back
end of the carrier pipe to facilitate installation of the carrier pipe properly in the
casing and to keep it dry and clean.
3.11
After installation of the carrier pipe section, the casing and the appurtenances,
but prior to making tie-in welds and backfilling, an electrical test shall be
conducted by the CONTRACTOR in the presence of the COMPANY, to
determine the resistance between the casing and the carrier pipe or the carrier
2
pipe and the soil. These tests shall show at least a resistance of 100 kohm/m .
After backfilling and compaction, additional tests shall be conducted to
determine if the casing is electrically shorted to the pipe. If the installation is
found to be shorted, CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and
repairs at his cost, until a test to the satisfaction of the COMPANY is obtained.
4.0
CROSSINGS OF BURIED SERVICES
4.1
The pipeline under construction may pass above or below the existing buried
facilities such as pipelines, cables, etc. Type of crossing shall be such that a
minimum depth of cover as required in the drawings and specifications are
guaranteed. The minimum clearance required between pipeline and the existing
facility shall be 500mm.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

OTHER CROSSINGS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 8 OF 10
MEC/S/05/62/05
REVISION
4.2
Whenever buried services in the ROW are to be crossed by CONTRACTOR, he

shall safeguard the buried facilities and the required precautions shall be taken
as approved by Owner of the buried services and by COMPANY.
4.3
For buried services to be crossed by boring/ jacking, the relevant provisions of

Section 3.0 shall apply.
5.0
MINOR WATER COURSE CROSSINGS
5.1
Minor water crossings are crossings of ditches, canals, water courses, rivers,
streams etc, whether the bed(s) contain(s) water or not, and not being specified
as `Major Water Crossings' in the CONTRACT.
5.2
For minor water crossings a standard drawing or a separate detailed approved

drawing for individual crossing shall be applicable, and all further specifications
are applicable.
5.3
Whenever minor water crossings in the ROW are to be crossed,

CONTRACTOR shall install/ temporary bridges to facilitate movement.
5.4
In crossings of water courses with either moderate flow rate or of torrential

nature with marked and unpredictable flooding, an adequate survey shall be
carried out before starting the work with the object of determining what
precautions are necessary and the most favourable period for executing the
work.
5.5
In case of crossings of water courses for which no special methods of laying are
required, a pipe section of a size as per the the approved drawings shall be
assembled and subsequently laid. Bends shall be of cold field type.
Whenever required by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall, before start of
construction, execute a soil investigation. Based on this soil investigation he shall
prepare construction drawings, work method and time schedule for approval of
COMPANY as well as concerned local agencies.
The depth of the existing bottom of a minor water course crossing shall be
determined in relation to the adjacent stable ground level by taking the average
of four measurements. Measurement shall be taken with a gauge and with
dimensions 60 x 60mm and having a flat bottom. The minimum force to be
exerted shall be 360 N (36 kgf).
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

OTHER CROSSINGS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 9 OF 10
MEC/S/05/62/05
REVISION
CONTRACTOR shall take special care to check with the responsible authorities
for special conditions applying to working on, over, under or through minor water
crossings and CONTRACTOR shall comply with any such conditions. Written
arrangements with authorities shall be drawn up in cooperation with COMPANY.
5.7
For crossings beneath the bed of water courses, the pipe section shal be made
in such a way that it conforms to the existing or future bed as indicated in the
approved drawings. In crossings for which an individual drawing has not been
prepared, the minimum cover of the pipeline shall not be less than that indicated
in the standard drawings for a similar type of crossing.
5.8
Whenever the crossing requries a straight section of pipe between the lower
bends coinciding with the river bed, this section shall be laid at a single
horizontal level.
5.9
For crossings of ditches, canals, banked channels, etc. by boring, the pipe
section shall be prepared, laid and tested in accordance with the applicable
clauses of Section 3.0 of this specification.
5.10
The CONTRACTOR shall arrange temporary installation of diversions as may

be necessary, to ensure the effective functioning of these water courses
crossed, to the entire satisfaction of the concerned Local Authorities as well as
the COMPANY.
5.11
Banks and trenches of minor water crossings shall be backfilled with soil which
is to be approved by COMPANY and shall be thoroughly compacted to prevent
soil and bank erosion as per the drawings and standards to the satisfaction of
authorities having jurisdication thereof and the COMPANY. Whenever boulders,
rock, gravel and other hard objects are encountered, they shall not be placed
directly on the pipe. Sufficient earth, sand or selected and approved backfill
material shall be backfilled initially around and over the pipe to provide a
protective padding or cushion extending to a minimum thickness of 30
centimeters around the pipe before backfilling remainder of the trench with
excavated or other material as per approved drawings and standards.
After the trench has been backfilled and during the clean up works, the minor
water crossing shall be cleaned at least across the whole of the ROW.
When directed by the COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall stabilise and restore
the bank of the water crossings with materials to be supplied by him as follows.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

OTHER CROSSINGS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 10 OF 10
MEC/S/05/62/05
REVISION
The excavation shall be trimmed in steps-and-berms backfilled with well

compacted solid soil, followed by a minimum 0.25m thick layer of properly
shaped boulders (75-150mm) encased in a net of galvanised iron wire of dia
3mm spaced at a maximum distance of 50mm to be laid over the backfilled,
compacted and graded banks.
2
The GI wire shall be made from steel having tensile strength of 400 N/mm and
with a minimum elongation at failure of 10%. The minimum zinc coating of 200
-2
gm shall be applied on single/ double twisted wire.
The length of the above protection shall be equal to the actual bank excavation
edge including damage and extending 2m on either sides. The width of this
protection on the slope shall be determined by the following :
2m plus the highest water level (recoverable) or upto the top of bank
whichever is higher.
Upto the bottom of the crossing or 20m below the highest water level
whichever is smaller.
Bank stabilisation for certain minor water crossings shall be determined by

COMPANY based on nature of crossing e.g. type of river, canal, major nallah,
flood control banks and other water bodies; type of soil, regulations of local
authorities; and any other socio-economic consideration evaluated by the
COMPANY.
5.12
The crossing of any embankments shall be carried out strictly in accordance with
approved drawings.
No drilling work on embankments shall be permitted without prior written
approval from the competent authorities.
SPECIFICATION FOR
PIPING FABRICATION AND ERECTION

MECON LIMITED
NEW DELHI 110 016
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PIPING FABRICATION AND

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 1 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
CODES OF PRACTICE
3.0
FABRICATION
4.0
WELDING
5.0
ERECTION
6.0
INSPECTION
7.0
PROTECTIVE COATING
8.0
FLUSHING
9.0
HYDROSTATIC TESTING
ANNEXURE-1
ANNEXURE-2
ANNEXURE-3
ANNEXURE-4
PREPARED BY
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
1.0
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 2 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
GENERAL
This specification covers the minimum technical requirements for the fabrication,
erection and testing of piping systems in accordance with the requirements of
this specification, approved drawings and as directed by COMPANY.
2.0
CODES OF PRACTICE
2.1
All phases of work pertaining to process lines handling Natural Gas shall be
carried out in accordance with latest edition of ANSI B 31.8 "GAS
TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION PIPING SYSTEM" with modifications
and additions as specified in various sections of this specification.
2.2
All phases of work pertaining to utility lines shall be carried out in accordance
with the latest edition of ANSI B 31.3 "CODE FOR PRESSURE PIPING,
PETROLEUM REFINERY PIPING" CONTRACTOR shall bear the cost of
repair, modifications and replacements, if any, becoming necessary due to noncompliance of codes, this specification or due to disregard of COMPANY's
instructions.
3.0
FABRICATION
3.1
All fabrication shall be carried out in accordance with piping general

arrangement drawings, (prepared by CONTRACTOR and approved by
COMPANY) including this specification and codes as specified in section 2.0.
3.2
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for working to the exact dimensions as per

the approved drawings. Dimensional tolerances to be adopted during
implementation of fabrication work shall be as per attached sketch
"TOLERANCES FOR FABRICATION".
3.3
Flange bolt holes shall generally straddle the established centre lines unless
other orientation is required and as called out in approved drawings.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 3 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
3.4
Threading shall be NPT to ANSI B 1.20.1. Threading shall preferably be done

after bending, forging or heat treatment operation. However if it is not possible,
precaution shall be taken to protect threading against deformation. Thread shall
be clean cut with no burrs or stripping. Dies shall be new, sharp and properly
designed for piping material. Ends shall be reamed to remove burrs.
3.5
All threaded joints shall be aligned properly. The pipe entering unions shall be
true to centrelines so as to avoid forcing of union coupling during make up.
Damaged threads shall be cut from the end of run and the pipe shall be
rethreaded.
3.6
Immediately before testing the piping, all threads of pipe and fittings shall be
thoroughly cleared of cuttings, fuel oil or other foreign matter. The male threads
shall be sealed with thread sealant and the piping made up sufficiently for the
thread to seize. Sealant shall be teflon tape.
3.7
Seal welding of threaded connections when specified shall include the first block
valve, cover all threads. The joint shall be cleaned of all cutting oil and other
foreign material and made up dry to full thread engagement. Instrument
threaded connections which are frequently subjected to testing and
maintenance shall not be seal welded.
3.8
All threaded connections shall be protected from rusting by applying greases or

oil when in operating condition.
3.9
When socket weld fittings or valves are used, pipe shall be spaced
approximately 1/16" to avoid bottoming which could result in excessive weld
stress.
3.10
Where the ends of the piping components being welded have an internal
surface misalignment exceeding 1.6mm, the wall of the component extending
internally shall be trimmed by machining so that the adjoining internal surface
will approximately flush.
3.11
Laying, Cutting and Fitting up

Extensive use of templates, gauges, plumb lines shall be made for laying,
cutting and fitting up of various piping components for fabrication.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 4 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
3.12
Pipe joints shall be accomplished by butt welding for pipe sizes 2" and above
and by screwed coupling for pipes 1" and below with the exception for utilities
piping which shall have socket weld coupling for size upto 1".
3.13
Edge preparation for butt weld joints shall conform to ANSI B 16.25. Cutting of
edges shall preferably be done by machine.
3.14
Pipe bends for piping system below 1" NB shall be used when called for in
approved arrangement drawings. Cold bending will be implemented with special
bending tools with guides to avoid flattening. The minimum radius allowed shall
not be less than five times the outside diameter of pipe. CONTRACTOR shall
obtain COMPANY's approval of bending tool to be used.
3.15
All branch connection shall be joined to header with full penetration weld.
Reinforcement pads where required shall be added only after external and
internal visual inspection of the attachment. Re-inforcement pad shall be
provided with " tapped weep hole. Weep holes shall be plugged.
3.16
On completion of both shop and field fabrication, all sub-assemblies shall be

cleaned from the inside and outside by suitable mechanical means ensuring that
they are free from all loose foreign materials such as scales, sand, weld
spatters, oil, grease, cutting chips etc.
4.0
WELDING
Welding of pipelines shall be done as per applicable codes and Annexure-1
5.0
ERECTION
5.1
Pre-fabrication and Field Assembly

Extent of pre-fabrication shall be purely at the discretion of CONTRACTOR
keeping in view the following :-
5.1.1
Field joint shall be decided by CONTRACTOR keeping in view the transportation

of pre-fabricated pieces to site.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 5 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
5.1.2
There can be some variations in the dimensions and level appearing in the
arrangement drawings and those actually occurring at site due to minor
variations in the location of equipments, structures, cut out etc. Adequate field
joints shall be provided, permitting assembly and erection of pipe work without
major modification.
5.2
Supporting
Location and design of pipe supports shown in approved drawings and support
drawings shall be strictly followed.
5.2.1
Supports shall be installed in such a way that they do not contribute to over
stressing of a line.
5.2.2
Fabrication and erection of additional supporting elements and structural fixtures

which in COMPANY's view are required for proper supporting of the system,
shall be carried out by CONTRACTOR at no extra cost.
5.2.3
All temporary supports, elements required for alignment, erection and assembly
shall be removed after completion of work.
5.3
Equipment hook-up
5.3.1
Prior to hook-up, the alignment and trueness of flange faces shall be checked to
ensure that no undue stresses shall be induced in the system while hooking up.
6.0
INSPECTION
6.1
6.2
CONTRACTOR shall provide all facilities/ assistance to COMPANY for proper

execution of their inspection without any extra charge.
6.3
All piping work shall be subjected to inspection by COMPANY at any time during
fabrication. CONTRACTOR shall furnish to COMPANY detailed work
programme sufficiently in advance, in order to enable COMPANY to arrange for
inspection.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 6 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
7.0
PROTECTIVE COATING
7.1
All above ground piping system shall be applied with protective coating in
accordance with specification for shop & field painting.
7.2
All under ground portion of piping system shall be coated with three layer P.E.
coating. CONTRACTOR shall prepared procedure for epoxy painting of burried
pipeline for approval of COMPANY. Procedure shall include surface preparation,
brand and type of coating to be adopted. Coating of pipes shall not commence
without approval of coating procedure. Total dry film thickness to be achieved
shall not be less than 300 microns. Compatible primer and finish coat as
recommended by coating manufacturer shall only be applied. Coating integrity
shall be checked by "Holiday detector" over full length of coated pipe work.
Coating to be supplied by CONTRACTOR shall be suitable for design
temperature.
7.3
Once the coating has been accepted by COMPANY, backfiling operation can be
started. In order to protect coated pipe from damage, the excavated trench shall
be examined for stone, rock and any other hard substance detrimental to
coating. All such substances shall be removed before lowering the pipe in the
trench. COMPANY may ask for a 100mm padding of clear sand under and
above pipeline in rocky or otherwise hard soil area. No additional payment on
account of padding shall however be admissible.
8.0
FLUSHING
Completed piping systems shall be flushed by CONTRACTOR with fresh water,
to clean the pipe of all dirt, debris, and foreign material. CONTRACTOR shall
prepare a procedure for flushing of the system for approval of COMPANY.
Flushing shall not be commenced without approval of flushing procedure.
8.1
CONTRACTOR shall perform all activities like dismantling and reinstalling of all
strainers, in line instruments etc. before and after completion of flushing.
8.2
Flushing shall be considered as complete only after inspection and approval by

COMPANY.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 5 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
8.3
Disposal of muck and flushing media shall be arranged by CONTRACTOR as

directed by COMPANY, in such a manner that it does not spoil the adjacent
installation. CONTRACTOR shall obtain COMPANY approval regarding the
place and method to be adopted for disposal of debris.
8.4
Record of flushing giving following details shall be submitted by CONTRACTOR

to COMPANY for its approval and records :
a)
Date of flushing
b)
Identification of line : flushed-line number
9.0
HYDROSTATIC TESTING
9.1
Completed piping system as approved by COMPANY shall be hydrostatically

tested in the presence of COMPANY. The general requirements of hydrostatic
testing shall be in accordance with codes specified in section 2.0.
9.2
CONTRACTOR shall prepare hydrostatic test procedure based on specified

codes. The hydrostatic test shall commence only after approval of procedure by
COMPANY.
9.3
Piping system shall be hydrostatically tested to a pressure corresponding to 1.4

times the design pressure.
9.4
Fresh water shall be used as test media. CONTRACTOR shall locate the source
of water supply and arrange for transportation of water to test site.
CONTRACTOR shall arrange at his own cost the water analysis and confirm
that water is suitable for testing. In case any corrosion inhibitor is to added, the
same shall be done after approval of COMPANY.
9.5
Lines repaired subsequent to hydrostatic test shall be retested using the same
procedure as originally adopted. However COMPANY may waive such retest in
case of minor repairs by taking precautionary measures to ensure sound
construction.
9.6
All equipment and instruments used for hydrostatic test shall be approved by
COMPANY before start of tests.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 8 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
9.7
Pressure gauges shall be installed on line to measure test pressures. In case of

longer lines two or more pressure gauges shall be installed as directed by
COMPANY. One gauge shall be installed at the discharge of the pressurising
pump. Pressure gauge used for hydrostatic testing shall be calibrated with dead
weight tester in the presence of Engineer-in-charge. Range of pressure gauge
shall generally be 1.5 times the test pressure.
9.8
Orifice plates and restriction orifices shall not be installed until hydrostatic testing
is completed. Temporary gaskets shall be used during testing.
9.9
First block valve of pressure instruments shall be half open & plugged at the
time of hydrostatic testing. Temperature connections shall be blanked off during
testing.
9.10
All equipments, in line instruments, relief valves shall be disconnected from

piping system by means of blinds during testing. Control valves shall be
replaced by spool pieces during testing.
9.11
High point vents and low point drain required for testing in addition to those
marked in the drawings shall be provided by CONTRACTOR at his own cost.
9.12
All welded and screwed joints shall be kept clean for detecting leaks during
testing.
9.13
Test pressure shall be maintained long enough to facilitate complete inspection

of the system. Minimum duration of test shall be 6 hours unless other wise
specified. Pressurising equipment shall be isolated immediately after test
pressure is attained.
9.14
After successful completion of hydrostatic testing, the piping system shall be

dewatered. All lines shall be completely dried using compressed air.
CONTRACTOR shall make his own arrangement for supply of compressed air.
Drying of lines shall be considered complete on approval by COMPANY.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
9.15
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 9 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Test Records
The records in duplicate shall be prepared and submitted by CONTRACTOR as
below :
a)
Date of test
b)
Identification of pipe tested - line number
c)
Test pressure
d)
Test results
e)
Signature of CONTRACTOR
f)
Approval signature by COMPANY.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 10 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
ANNEXURE-1
WELDING SPECIFICATION
10.0
GENERAL
This specification shall be followed for the fabrication of all types of welded joints
of carbon steel above ground natural gas service piping systems.
The welded pipe joints shall include the following :
a)
All line pipe joints of the longitudinal and circumferential butt welded.
b)
Attachments of castings, forgings, flanges.
c)
Welded manifold headers and other sub-assemblies
d)
Welded branch connections with or without reinforcing pads.
e)
Joints in welded/ fabrication piping components.
f)
The attachments of smaller connections for vents drain drips and other
instrument tappings.
Any approval granted by the Engineer-in-charge or owner's inspectors shall not

relieve the contractor of his responsibilities & guarantees.
1.1
Applicable Codes & Standards

All welding work, equipments for welding, heat treatment, other auxiliary
functions and the welding personnel shall be as per the requirements of the
latest editions of the following approved standards and procedures :i)
Code for gas transmission and distribution piping systems. ANSI B31.8.
ii)
Code for petroleum refinery piping, ANSI B31.3.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 11 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
In addition, the following codes/ specifications referred to in the relevant code of

fabrication shall be followed for the welding/ brazing qualifications, consumable
qualifications and non destructive test procedures.
i)
Standard for welding of pipelines and related facilities API-1104.
ii)
Material Specifications - Welding rods, electrodes and filler

materials - ASME Sec. - IIC.
iii)
Code for non destructive examination ASME Sec-V.
iv)
Qualification standard for welding and brazing procedure and

welders, brazers, welding and brazing operators - ASME Sec-I
In the event of any difference due to the additional requirements mentioned in

this specification, over and above those obligation as per codes, this
specification shall be binding.
1.2
1.3
Base Material
a)
In general carbon steel is used in this plant. The details of material

specifications are given in the welding Specification Chart.
b)
The contractor shall provide the Manufacturer's test certificates for every
heat of the materials supplied by him.
Filler Materials
a)
The Contractor shall provide all the necessary welding electrodes, filler
materials, etc. required for the execution of the work.
b)
The welding electrodes/ filler wires supplied by the Contractor shall

conform to the class specified in the welding specification chart. The
materials shall be of the make approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
1.4
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 12 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
c)
The electrode shall be suitable for the welding process recommended

and base metal used. Unless otherwise specified physical properties of
the welds produced by a electrode recommended for the welding of a
particular base metal shall not be lower than the minimum valves
specified for the base metal and shall correspond to the physical
properties of the class of electrode adopted. The choice of electrode shall
be made after conducting the required tests on the electrodes as per
relevant standards, and shall be the sole prerogative of the Engineer-incharge.
d)
Electrode qualification test records should be submitted as per the

Exhibit-A (attached) in respect of the electrodes tested by the contractor,
for obtaining the approval of the Engineer-in-charge.
e)
The Contractor shall submit batch test certificate from the electrode
Manufacturers giving details of physical and chemical tests carried out by
them, for each batch of electrodes to be used.
f)
All electrodes shall be purchased in sealed containers and stored

properly to prevent deterioration. The electrodes removed from the
containers shall be kept in holding ovens at temperature recommended
by the electrode Manufacture. Out-of-the oven time of electrodes before
they are consumed shall not exceed the limits recommended by the
electrodes manufacturer. The electrodes shall be handled with care to
avoid any damage to flux covering.
g)
All low hydrogen type of electrodes shall be rebaked at 350C for 1 hour
minimum and stored in ovens kept at 80-100C before use.
Recommendations of the electrode Manufacturer shall be followed if
available.
h)
The electrodes, filler wires and flux used shall be free from rust, oil,
greases, earth and other foreign matter which can affect the quality of
welding.
Welding Consumables
The Contractor shall provide at this own expense all the welding
consumables necessary for the execution of the job such as electrodes
filler wires, oxygen, acetylene, etc. and these should bear the approval of
the COMPANY.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 13 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
1.5
Equipment & Accessories
1.5.1
The Contractor should have the arrangement of sufficient number of welding

and cutting equipments, auxiliaries and accessories of sufficient capacities so as
to meet the target schedule.
1.5.2
All the equipment for performing the heat treatment, including transformers,
thermocouples, flow meters, automatic temperature recorders with suitable
calibration arrangement etc. shall be provided by the Contractor, at his own
expense and these should bear the approval of the COMPANY.
1.5.3
Contractor shall make necessary arrangements at his own expense for providing
the radiographic equipment, radiographic films, and all the equipment/ materials
required for carrying out the dye penetrant/ magnetic particle test for satisfactory
and timely completion of the job.
1.5.4
Redoing of any work necessitated by faulty equipments or operation used by the

Contractor, will be done at his own expense.
1.6
Welding Processes
1.6.1
Welding of various materials under this specification shall be carried out using
Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) Process with the approval of the Engineerin-charge.
1.6.2
The welding processes to be employed are given in the welding specification

chart. Any deviation desired by the Contractor shall be obtained through the
express consent of the Engineer-in-charge.
1.6.3
Automatic and semi-automatic welding processes shall be employed only with

the express approval of the Engineer-in-charge. The welding procedure adopted
and consumables used shall be specifically approved.
1.6.4
A combination of different welding processes or a could be employed for a

particular joint only after duly qualifying the welding procedure as per the
requirements of code of fabrication to be adopted and obtaining the approval of
the Engineer-in-charge.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
1.7
End Preparation
1.7.1
End Preparation
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 14 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
The edges to be welded shall be prepared to meet the joint design requirements
by gas cutting, machining or grinding method. After gas cutting, oxides shall be
removed by chipping or grinding.
1.7.2
Cleaning
The ends to be welded shall be properly cleaned to remove paint, oil, greases,
rust, oxides, sand, earth and other foreign matter. The ends shall be completely
dry before the welding commences.
1.8
Alignment and Spacing

Prior to alignment, the contractor shall inspect the pipe ends inside and outside
for damage, dents, laminations etc. Pipe for welding shall be set up correctly
spaced. Temporary attachment of any kind shall not be welded. Every effort
shall be made to reduce misalignment by the use of clamp and rotation of pipes
to the best fit. For pipes of same nominal wall thickness, the off set should not
exceed 1.6mm. Any branch connections sleeve shall be at least 150mm from
any other weld. The welds for fitting shall be so located that top of the weld shall
not come within 50mm of any other weld. The use of internal line up clamps is
mandatory for diameters 10" and above. However, in case where it is impossible
to use internal line up clamp, external line up clamp may be used.
1.9
Weather Conditions
1.9.1
The parts being welded and the welding personnel should be protected from
rain and strong winds. In the absence of such a protection no welding shall be
carried out.
1.10
Welding
1.10.1
Root Pass
a)
Root pass shall be made with electrodes/ filler wires recommended in the
welding specification chart. The preferable size of the electrode is 2.5mm
diameter (12 SWG) but in no case greater than 3.25mm (10 SWG).
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
1.10.2
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 15 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
b)
Uphill welding shall be adopted for welding pipes weld fixed with its axis
horizontal. Downward technique of welding shall not be used for welding
of pipes in horizontal position, unless specifically permitted by Engineerin-charge for a particular case.
c)
The root pass of but joints should be executed properly so as to achieve

full penetration with complete fusion of the root edges. Weld projection
inside the pipe shall not exceed .4mm wherever not specified by the
applicable code.
d)
Any deviations desired from the recommended welding technique and

electrodes indicated in the welding specification chart should be adopted
only after obtaining express approval of the Engineer-in-charge.
e)
Welding shall be continuous & uninterrupted during a pass.
f)
On completion of each run, craters, welding irregularities, slag etc., shall

be removed by grinding and chiselling.
g)
While the welding is in progress care should be taken to avoid any kind of
movement of components, to prevent occurrence of weld cracks.
h)
Fillet welds shall be made by shielded metal arc/ GTAW welding process
irrespective of the thickness and class of piping.
i)
Peening shall not be used unless specified in the welding specification

chart.
Joint Completion
a)
Joint shall be completed using the class of filler wires/ electrodes,

recommended in the welding specification chart.
b)
Two weld beads shall not be started at the same point in different layers.
b)
Butt joints shall be completed with a cover layer that would effect good
cover at the joint edge and a gradual notch free surface.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 16 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
d)
Each weld joints should have a workman like finish.
e)
Weld identification mark shall be stamped clearly at each joint, just

adjacent to the weld. Metal stamping shall not be used on the thin wall
pipe. Suitable paint shall be used on thin wall pipes for identification.
f)
No painting shall be done until the weld joint has been hydrostatically
tested.
1.11
Heat Treatment
1.11.1
Preheating
1.11.2
a)
Preheating requirements for the various materials shall be as per the

welding specification chart attached.
b)
Preheating shall be performed using resistance or induction heating

methods. Preheating by gas burners, utilising any acetylene or oxypropane gas mixtures, with neutral flame may also be carried out when
permitted by the Engineer-in-charge.
c)
Preheating shall extend uniformly to atleast three times the thickness of

the joint, but not less than 100mm, on both sides of the weld.
d)
Preheating temperature shall be maintained over the whole length of the

joint during welding. Temperature indicating crayons or other temperature
indicating devices shall be provided by the contractor to check the
temperature.
Postweld Heat Treatment

a)
Post weld heat treatment, wherever required for joints between pipes,
pipes an fittings, pipe body and supports shall be carried out as per the
relevant specifications, applicable standards and the instructions of the
Engineer-in-charge.
c)
The heat treatment of welded joints shall be carried out as per the
requirements laid down in ANSI B31.8 and welding specification chart.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 17 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
c)
The contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer-in-charge,

the details of the post weld heat treatment procedure, as per Exhibit `B'
attached, that the propose to adopt for each of the materials/ assembly/
part involved, well before carrying out actual heat treatment.
d)
Post weld heat treatment shall be done by using an electric resistance or

induction heating equipment as decided by the Engineer-in-charge.
e)
While carrying out local post weld heat treatment, technique of

application of heat must ensure uniform temperature attainment at all
points of the portion being heat treated. Care shall be taken to ensure
that width of treated band over which specified post weld heat treatment
is carried out, the temperature attained is atleast as that specified in the
relevant applicable standards/ codes.
f)
Throughout the cycle of heat treatment, the portion outside the heated
band shall be suitably wrapped under insulation so as to avoid any
harmful temperature gradient at the exposed surface of pipe. For this
purpose temperature at the exposed surface of the pipes should not be
allowed to exceed 400C.
g)
The temperature attained by the portion under heat treatment shall be

recorded by means of thermocouple pyrometers. Adequate number of
thermocouples should be attached to the pipe directly at the equally
spaced location along the periphery of the pipe joint. The minimum
number of thermocouples attached per joint shall be 1 upto 6" dia, 2 upto
10" dia and 3 upto 12" and above. However the Engineer-in-charge can
increase the required minimum number of thermocouples to be attached
if found necessary.
h)
Automatic temperature recorders which have been duly calibrated should

be employed. The calibration chart of each recorder should be submitted
to the Engineer-in-charge prior to starting the heat treatment operation
and his approval should be obtained.
i)
Immediately on completion of the heat treatment, the post weld heat

treatment charts/ records alongwith the hardness test results on the weld
joints (whenever required as per the welding specification chart), shall be
submitted to Engineer-in-charge for his approval.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
1.12
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 18 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
j)
Each joint shall bear an identification number which shall be maintained

in the piping sketch to be prepared by the contractor. The joint
identification number should appear on the corresponding post weld heat
treatment charts. The same identification numbers shall also be followed
for identification for corresponding radiographic films. The chart
containing the identification numbers and piping sketch shall be
submitted to the Engineer-in-charge in suitable folders.
k)
The hardness of the heat affected zone as well as of the weld metal, after
heat treatment, shall be measured using suitable hardness tester and
shall not exceed the maximum hardness specified in the welding
specification chart. The weld joint shall be subjected to re-heat treatment
when hardness measured exceeds the specified limit, at the contractor's
own expenses.
l)
The contractor shall arrange for the hardness testing and shall maintain
the records of all joints tested. These records shall be checked by the
plant Owner's inspector.
Cleaning of the Weld Joints

All weld joints shall be free from adherent weld spatter, slag, dirt or foreign
matter. This can be achieved by brushing.
1.13
Inspection & Testing
1.13.1
General
a)
The owner's inspector shall have free access to all concerned areas,
where the actual work is being performed. The contractor shall also offer
the Owner's inspector all means and facilities necessary for carrying out
inspection.
b)
The owner is entitled to depute his own inspector to the shop or field
where pre-fabrication and erection of pipelines are being done with (but
not limited to) the following objectives :i.
To check the conformance to relevant standards and suitability of

various welding equipments and the welding performance.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE

ERECTION
c)
1.13.2
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 19 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
ii.
To supervise the welding procedure qualification.
iii.
To supervise the welder performance qualifications.
Contractor shall intimate sufficiently in advance the commencement of

qualification tests welding works and acceptance tests, to enable the
plant owner's inspector to be present to supervise them.
Welding Procedure Qualifications

a)
Welding Procedure Qualification shall be carried out in accordance with

the relevant requirements of API 1104/ ASME Sec-IX or other applicable
codes and other job requirements by the contractor at his expense. The
contractor shall submit the welding procedure specifications in format as
per Exhibit-C (attached) immediately after the receipt of the order.
b)
COMPANY's inspector will review, check and approve the welding

procedure submitted and shall release the procedure for procedure
qualification tests. The procedure qualification test shall be carried out by
the Contractor under field conditions at this own expense. A complete set
of test results in format as per Exhibit-D (attached) shall be submitted to
the COMPANY's inspector for approval immediately after completing the
procedure qualification test and atleast 2 weeks before the
commencement of actual work. Standard tests as specified in the code
shall be carried out in all cases. In addition to these tests, other tests like
radiography, macro/ micro examination, hardness testers, dye penetrant
examination, Charpy V-notch etc. shall be carried out on specimens. It
shall be the responsibility of the contractor to carry out all the tests
required to the satisfaction of the COMPANY's Inspector. The destructive
testing of welded joints shall be as per Annexure-2 and ASME Sec-IX.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
1.13.3
1.13.4
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 20 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Welder's Qualification
a)
Welders shall be qualified in accordance with the API 1104/ ASME IX

and other applicable codes by the contractor at his expense. The butt
weld test pieces of the qualification test shall meet the radiographic tests
requirements as mentioned in this specification. The COMPANY's
inspector shall witness the test and certify the qualification of each welder
separately. Only those welders who have been approved by the
COMPANY's inspector shall be employed for welding. Contractor shall
submit the welder qualification test reports in the standard format and
obtain express approval, before commencement of the work. It shall be
the responsibility of contractor to carry out Qualification tests of welders.
b)
The welders shall always have in their possession the identification card
as shown in Exhibit-E and shall produce it on demand by the
COMPANY's Inspector. It shall be the responsibility, of the Contractor to
issue the identify cards after it has been duly certified by the COMPANY.
If a welder is found to perform a type of welding for which he is not
qualified, he shall be debarred from doing any further work. All welds
performed by an unqualified welder shall be cut and redone by a qualified
welder at the expense of the Contractor.
Visual Inspection
Inspection of all welds shall be carried out by COMPANY as per the latest
editions of the applicable codes and specifications. All finished welds shall be
visually inspected for parallel and axial alignment of the work, excessive
reinforcement, concavity of welds, shrinkage, cracks, under cuts, dimensions of
the weld, surface porosity and other surface defects. Under-cutting adjacent to
the completed weld shall not exceed the limits specified in the applicable
standard/ code.
1.13.5
Non-destructive Examination
The non destructive examination shall mainly consist of examination using x-ray
radiography as detailed in Annexure-4.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 21 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Radiographic examination of one hundred percent (100%) girth welds will be

required by the COMPANY. Welds shall meet the standards of acceptability as
set forth in API 1104 and as per the requirements laid in subsequent
paragraphs.
The CONTRACTOR shall make all the arrangements for the radiographic
examination of work covered by this specification at his expense.
The COMPANY will review all the radiographs of welds and inform the
CONTRACTOR regarding unacceptable welds. The decision of the COMPANY
shall be final and binding in this regard.
All requirements mentioned in the specification shall be arranged and executed
by the CONTRACTOR through his own resources. In addition, for pipes with
wall thickness 9.5mm and above, ultrasonic inspection is required in the
following cases as per Annexure-3 of this specification.
a)
On the first 100 welded joints corresponding to each automatic (GTAW/

GMAW) welding procedure used.
b)
When 20mm or more are cut from the pipe end as supplied, the ends
shall be ultrasonically inspected for an additional length of 20mm to
ensure no lamination exist.
c)
When welds are repaired.
d)
When in the opinion of COMPANY, ultrasonic inspection is required to

confirm or clarify defects indicated by radiography.
e)
When automatic procedure is used at least 10cm on each weld shall be

ultrasonically inspected at COMPANY's discretion.
In addition, ultrasonic inspection may be required for certain critical weldings of

the pipeline (i.e. tie-ins, welding of valves, flanges) randomly selected at
COMPANY's discretion. All fillet and groove welds other than that radiographed
shall be subjected to dye pentrant/ MP inspection. The non destructive test
system used for inspecting welds must be approved by the COMPANY.
Weld quality is judged on the basis of the acceptability criteria mentioned below :
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 22 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Any weld which as a result of radiographic and / or ultrasonic examination in the

opinion of COMPANY exhibits imperfections greater than the limits stated in
API-1104 latest edition or as superseded in this article shall be considered
defective and shall so be marked with an identification paint marker.
In addition to the API-1104 requirements, the welds containing cracks including
crater cracks regardless of size of location are unacceptable.
i.
Any amount of inadequate penetration of the root bead as defined by

API-1104 is unacceptable.
ii.
Any amount of incomplete fusion between the root and bevel as defined
by API-1104 is unacceptable.
iii.
The contractor shall be responsible for carrying out radiography, rectification of

defects and reradiography of weld rectified/ repaired.
The extent of radiography shall be as per specifications to be supplied to

the Contractor. For welds between dissimilar materials, the extent of
radiographic examination shall be more stringent for the two
recommended materials being welded.
Radiographic examination shall be carried out using x-radiation. Gamma

ray sources may be used in place of X-ray with the approval of the EIC in
case of inaccessible joints.
The contractor shall fulfill all the statutory safety requirements while
handling x-ray and Gamma ray equipments.
The Contractor shall furnish all films to the Owner's inspector immediately
after processing. The details of the radiographs alongwith the joint
identification number shall be duly entered in a register and signed by the
Contractor and shall be submitted to the Owner's inspector for approval.
The contractor shall provide the inspector all necessary facilities at site
such as a dark room with controlled temperature, film viewer etc. to
enable him to examine the radiographs.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
1.13.6

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 23 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Magnetic Particle & Liquid Penetrant Examination

a)
1.13.7
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
Whenever such tests are specified, the tests shall be carried out on joints
chosen by the Owner's Inspector.
Hardness Test
Hardness requirement of welds shall be as per welding specification chart.
Hardness testing may be carried out by Vickers, Brinell or Poldy Hardness tester
as agreed by the Owner's Inspector.
1.13.8
Proof Tests
Hydrostatic and pneumatic tests shall be performed as per the requirements laid
down in the respective flushing & testing specification/ applicable codes to
demonstrate the soundness of the welds. The tests shall be conducted only
after fulfilling the requirements of visual examination, radiography etc. and after
the entire work has been certified by the Owner's inspector, as fit for subjecting
to such test.
1.14
Repairs of Welds
a)
Defects ascertained, through the inspection methods, which are beyond

acceptable limits shall be removed from the joint completely by the
process of chipping and grinding.
b)
When an entire joint is judged unacceptable, the welding shall be

completely cut and the edges be suitably prepared as per required
alignment tolerances. The welded joint shall again be examined following
standard practices.
c)
No repair shall be carried out without prior permission of the Owner's

inspector.
d)
Where random radiography is specified, the test welds of each welder

shall be completely radiographed. In the case of pipes of sizes 6" and
below, the first two welds shall be completely radiographed.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
e)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 24 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
For each weld found unacceptable due to a welder's fault, two additional
checks should be carried out on welds performed by the same welder.
This operation is interactive and the procedure of radiographing two
additional welds for each weld deemed unsatisfactory shall be continued
till such time that the two consecutive welds of satisfactory quality are
found for every defective weld.
The contractor shall carry out these additional radiographic testing.
To avoid the possibility of too many defective welds by a single welder
remaining undetected for a long period of time, the Contractor shall
promptly arrange for radiographic examination so that there is no
accumulation of defective joints.
1.15
Limitations on Repairs
Only one attempt at repair of any region is permitted. Repairs are limited to a
maximum 30% of the weld length. For internal or external repairs which open
the weld root, only 20% of the weld length may be repaired. Repairs opening the
root must only be carried out in the presence of COMPANY. The minimum
length of a repaired area shall be 100mm as measured over the recapped
length. Welds containing cracks shall be cut out and rebevelled to make a joint,
COMPANY shall authorise all repairs.
1.16
Weld Rejected by Accumulation of Defects

Where a weld is rejected by the accumulation of defect clause, as defined by
API-1104 and this specification, repairs within these limitations are permitted.
Defects in the filling and capping passes shall be repaired preferentially.
1.17
Documents to be submitted by the Contractor

a)
Welding procedure specifications as per Exhibit-C immediately after

receipt of the order.
b)
Welding procedure qualification records as per Exhibit-D.
d)
Welder performance qualification records as per

immediately after conducting welder qualification tests.
Exhibit-C&D
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 25 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
d)
Proposed heat treatment procedure as per Exhibit-B.
e)
Heat treatment charts and records alongwith the hardness test results.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 28 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
ANNEXURE-A
Sheet 1 of 4
ELECTRODE QUALIFICATIONS TEST RECORD
A:
Tested at
(Site Name)
Date :
Test Period :
B:
Manufacturer's Name
Brand Name
Batch Number & size Tested
Classification & Code
Intended for Welding in positions
In combination with (if any)
Code of Reference (used for testing)
Special requirements (if any)
All - Weld Tensile Test

Base Material used
Pre-heat temperature
Postweld Heat Treatment Details
Visual Examination
Radiographic Examination Results
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 27 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Sheet 2 of 4
Tensile Test Results
:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sl.
Identification U.T.S. Yield Point
Elongation
Remarks
No. Number
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------C:
Impact Test Results

Test Temperature
Notch in :
Type of Specimens (Impd, Charpy:
Size of Specimens :
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Specimen No.
Impact Value
Average
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------D:
Chemical Analysis Result

Electrode size used :
Batch No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------%C
%S
%P
%Si %Mn
%Cr
%Ni
%Mo
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 28 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Sheet 3 of 4
E:
Fillet Weld Test Results

Welding Positions
Base Materials
Size of electrode used
Visual Inspection Results
1)
2)
3)
Micro Test Results
F:
Fracture Test Results
Remarks
Other Test Results

i)
Transverse Tensile Test
In Combination with
Base Material used
Position of Welding
Preheat Temperature
Postweld Heat Treatment :

Radiography
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Identification No.
U.T.S.
Fracture in
Remarks
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 29 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Sheet 4 of 4
2.
Guide Bend Test

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Position
ID No.
Root, Face or
Remarks
Side Bend
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
2
3
4
5
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.
Any other tests
Conclusions
Approved By :
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 30 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
EXHIBIT-B
Sheet 1 of 2
STRESS RELIEF HEAT TREATMENT PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
Name of the Heat - Treatment :.................................................................
Name of the Project :.....................................Specification
Reference No. ..............
1.
General Details
Name of the Equipment : ............................................................................
Name of the Assembly/ Part : .....................................................................
Assembly/ Part Drawing No. : .....................................................................
Material : .................................................................................................
2.
Furnace Details
Type of Heating : Gas/ Oil/ Elec. Res./ Induction (Tick Mark)
Capacity (size) : ........................................................................................
Maximum Temp. (C)
Method of temp. measurement : ...................................................................
Atmosphere Control : .................................................................................
3.
Heat Treatment Cycle Details

Charging Temp. C : ...................................................................................
Rate of Heating, C/Hr : ..............................................................................
Soaking Temp., C : ...................................................................................
Soaking Time, Hrs. : ..................................................................................
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 31 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Sheet 2 of 2
Rate of Cooling, C/Hr : ..............................................................................
Mode of Cooling : ......................................................................................
4.
Other Details, if any : .................................................................................
5.
The following documents are to be furnished :

along with these specification :
i)
Material Test Certificates
ii)
Assembly/ Part Details
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 32 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
EXHIBIT-C
Sheet 1 of 2
STANDARD PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION NO.
for ................................ Welding of .............................. Pipe and Fittings
Process & type ......................................................................................... (Details of

special machines).
Material .................................................................................................... (Pipes to which

the procedure applied, grade of steel, type of pipe, Reference Specification).
Diameter and wall thickness ........................................................................ (Series of dia

and thickness to which procedure is applicable)
Joint Design .............................................................................................
Filler Metal and Number of Beads .................................................................
Electrical or Flame Characteristics ................................................................
Position .....................................................................................................
Direction of Weldings
Downhill, Mixed)
Number of Welders .....................................................................................
Time Lapse between passes ........................................................................
Type of Line-up Clamp ................................................................................
Removal of Line-up Clamp ........................................................................... (Minimum

percentage of welding carried out before removal of clamps)
Cleaning ....................................................................................................
Preheat, Stress Relief .................................................................................
..................................................................................
(Uphill,
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 33 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Sheet 2 of 2
Shielding Flux ............................................................................................
Speed of Travel ..........................................................................................
Sketches and Tabulations (to be attached) ....................................................
Wire Speed (rate of wire speed and variation range) ........................................
Minimum No. of passes which must be completed before discontinuing weld.
Minimum No. of welders required for the first pass and second pass :
Tested
: ....................................... Welder ......................................
Approved
: ....................................... Welding Supt. ............................
Accepted
: ....................................... Chief Engineer ...........................
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 34 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
EXHIBIT-D
Sheet 1 of 2
COUPON TEST RECORD
Location .............................................................................................................
Date ................................... State ................................ Roll Weld ...................... Fixed position
weld ............................................... welder ................................... Mark
.................................................. Welding Time .......................................... Time of day
............................... M. Temperature ................................ F. Weather Condition
........................................ Wing break used ......................................... Voltage
.................................. Amperage ............................................... Type of welding machine
...................................................... Size ................................... Filler Metal
......................................................................................................... Size of reinforcement
........................................................................................... Pipe kind and Grade
............................................................................................. Wall thickness
........................................................... Dia O.D. ............................
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bead No. ............................................................................................................ Size of
electrode ................................................................................................ No. of electrode
..................................................................................................
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Coupon Stenciled ................................................................................................ Original
Dimension of Plate .................................................................................. Original area of plate
2
(inch ) ................................................................................ Maximum Load
................................................................................................... Tensile S/ in. plate area
....................................................................................... Fracture Location
................................................................................................
Procedure
Welder
Qualifying Test
Line Test
Qualified
Disqualified
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 35 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Sheet 2 of 2
Max. tensile strength ................... min. tensile strength ..........................................
Avg. tensile strength ........................ Remarks on tensile strength ...........................
1.
.................................................................................................................
2.
.................................................................................................................
3.
.................................................................................................................
4.
.................................................................................................................
Remarks on Bend Tests

1.
.................................................................................................................
2.
.................................................................................................................
3.
.................................................................................................................
4.
.................................................................................................................
Remarks on Nick Tests

1.
.................................................................................................................
2.
.................................................................................................................
3.
.................................................................................................................
4.
.................................................................................................................
Other Tests ........................................................................................................
( Use back for additional remarks )
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 38 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
EXHIBIT-E
WELDER's IDENTIFICATION CARD
Name
Identification
Date of Testing
Valid Unit
Approval of Welding
Welding Position
Material
Diameter
Wall Thickness
Type of Welding Consumable
Approved By :
Employer's Signature
with Seal
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 37 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
EXHIBIT-F
Sheet 1 of 2
RADIOGRAPHIC PROCEDURE FOR PIPE WELDING
1.
Location
2.
Date of Testing
3.
Name of Supervised Contractor
4.
Material
5.
Dia. & Thickness
6.
Type of Weld Joint
7.
Radiation Source (X-ray, gamma ray)
8.
Type of equipment (external/ internal)
9.
Intensifying screens and material
10.
Filter type and placement mask, diaphragm lead screen etc. adjacent to radiation
sources or specimen.
11.
Geometric relationship (source local spot size, max and min source strength, object to
film distance, radiation angle with respect to weld and film).
12.
Limit of film coverage
13.
Film type and make
14.
Exposure Time
15.
Processing (time temperature for development stop bath or rinse, fixation, washing,
drying etc.)
16.
Density
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 38 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Sheet 2 of 2
17.
Sensitivity
18.
Type of penetrameter
Approval of the COMPANY
Signature of CONTRACTOR
with seal
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 39 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/6
REVISION 0
WELDING SPECIFICATION CHART
EXHIBIT-G
Sheet 1 of 2
Class :
Material Specification :
Pipes
API 5L Gr. X 60, API 5L Gr. B APIS Gr. X 42
Fittings
A 105, A234 Gr. WPB. MSS-SP-75, Gr. WPHY42, MSS-S
Flanges
Alos, MSS-SP-44 Gr. F42, MSS-SP as Gr. WPH 60
Other
44 Gr. F6C
Base Metal of NCL :

Welding Processes : Groove Joints : Butt
Root Pass SMAW Filler Pass SMAW Root Pass SMAW Filler Pass SMAW Filler Joints/
Socket Joints : SMAW
Welding Materials : Groove Joints : Butt
Root Pass
Root Pass
E6010G/ E7010G
Filler Pass F7010G/ E8010G/ E8818G
E7010/ E7018G/ E8018G Filler Pass F7016/ E7018G/ E80118G
Filler Joints/ Socket Joints : E7016/ E7018/ E7018G/ E8018G

Backing Page
Consumable :
Gases : Purging
Sheilding
Gas Composition : Purging
Sheilding
Preheating : 10 min for all welds, 100C Post heating
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 40 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Sheet 2 of 2
Post weld heat treatment :
Holding temp. : 595-650 C
Rate of heating : 200 C/hr max.
Method of cooling : Controlled
Holding Time : 1 Hr. per inch thk

Min holding time : 1 hr.
Rate of cooling : 200C/hr max.
Mechanical property requirements :

Charpy `V' notch impact test valve :
Normal
Average
At temperature
Hardness
:
:
:
:
22 J
27 J
0 C
300 HV10 (for weld & HAZ)
Code of fabrication : ANSI B31.8; API 1104 and welding specifications.
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
MECON LIMITED

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 41 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
TECHNICAL NOTES
1.
Welding, heat treatment and non destructive testing shall be carried out in accordance
with the requirement of ANSI B31.8/ API-1104 and additional requirement specified in
the specification. In case of conflict between code and specification more stringent
conditions shall be applicable.
2.
No welding shall be carried out without preheating the joint to 10C (50 F) when the
ambient temperature is below 10C (50 F).
3.
Preheat shall be applied while welding the following material as detailed below :
API 5L Gr. B
API 5L x Gr. B
A 105
MSS-SP-44 Gr. F60
A 234 GN WPB
MSS-SP-75-WPHY60
:
:
:
:
:
Thickness upto
and inclusive of 12mm
100 F min.
Thickness beyond
12 mm
200 F
4.
For fillet welds complete welding may be carried out using the electrodes
recommended for filler passes.
5.
All weldments & HAZ shall meet the hardness requirements of 300 HV10 during
procedure qualification. If the hardness exceeds 300 HV10 the joints shall be heat
treated at temp. 1100-1250 F for one hour. The heating and cooling rates shall be
decided during procedure qualification subject to a maximum of 200 C/Hr. Hardness
testing shall be carried out by Vickers hardness tester during welding procedure
qualification test only. No hardness test is required for production welds.
6.
The electrodes used shall meet the following additional requirement :

Specification UTS (Min.) (As welded)
7.
Impact (As welded)
E7018-G
52.7 kg/mm
20 ft. lb. at 0C
E7018-I
52.7 kg/mm
E6010
E6018
20 ft. lb. at 0C
All the weldments & HAZ shall meet the impact test requirement of 20 ft. lb at 0C.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 42 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
ANNEXURE-2
1.0
DESTRUCTIVE TESTING OF WELDED JOINT - BUTT WELDS
1.1
Preparation
Having passed the visual and the non destructive inspection, the test weld shall be
subjected to mechanical test.
After satisfactory completion of all visual and non destructive testing the procedure test
weld shall be set aside for a period not less than 24 hours. No further work on the test
weld and no cutting of test specimens from the weld be performed till a period of at
least 24 hours has expired.
Weld specimens, for pipe diameter greater than or equal to 12.3/4" shall be taken from
the positions indicated in Fig. 1 of this specification from areas as free from defects as
possible. For this reason it is necessary to take the previous non destructive tests into
account. The minimum no. of tests to be carried out is given in Table-I of this
specification.
The test shall be carried out at laboratories approved by COMPANY. The specimens
shall be prepared in accordance with the figure given in the paragraphs which refer to
the individual test.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 43 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Table-I
TYPE AND NUMBER OF TEST SPECIMENS FOR
PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION TEST
Pipe Size, Outside diameter
Inches
Number of Specimens
Tensile
API
Tensile
ISO
Nick
Break
Root
Bend
Face
Bend
Side
Bend
Macro
Hardness
Impact
Total
Wall Thickness > inch (12.7mm) and under

Under 2 3/8
2 3/8 to 4 incl.
Over 4 less than

12 3/4
12
24
12 3/4 and over
24
44
Wall Thickness > inch (12.7mm)

4 and smaller
Over 4 less than

12 3/4
12
24
12 3/4 and over
24
44
1.2
Tensile Strength
Specimens for pipe diameter over 12 3/4" shall be taken from the
position indicated in Fig. 1 of this specification. Two API type specimen
shall be taken for pipe diameter greater than or equal to 12 3/4".
1.3
Nick-Break Test
1.3.1
Preparation
Specimens for nick-break test with notches thus worked can break in
the base metal, instead of in the fusion zone; therefore an alternative
test piece may be used after authorisation by the COMPANY with a
notch cut in the reinforcement of outside weld bead to a maximum
depth of 1.5mm measured from the surface of the weld bead.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
1.4
Macroscopic Inspection
1.4.1
Preparation
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 45 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Specimens shall be taken from the positions indicated in Fig. 1 of this

specification and shall be prepared in accordance with ASTM E2 and E3.
The width of the macrosection has to be at least three times the width of the
weld. The section is to be prepared by grinding or polishing and etching to
clearly reveal the weld metal and heat effected zone.
1.4.2
Method
Specimens shall be carefully examined under the microscope with a
magnification of at least 25 times. The COMPANY may ask for a macrograph
with 5 times magnification for documentation purposes.
1.4.3
Requirements
Under macroscopic examination, the welded joints shall show good penetration
and fusion, without any defect exceeding the limits stated in the evaluation
criteria of the nick break test.
1.5
Hardness Test
1.5.1
Preparation
The prepared macrosection is to be used for hardness testing using the Vickers
method with 100 N (10 kg) load. Indentations are to be made along traverses
each approximately 1mm below the surface at both side of the weld.
In the weld metal a minimum of 6 indentations equally spaced along the
traverses are to be made. The HAZ indentations are to be made along the
traverses for approximately 0.5mm each into unaffected material, and starting as
close to the fusion line as possible.
One indentation at each side of the weld along each traverse has to be made on
parent metal. Reference is made to fig. 3 of this specification. The indentation
are to be made in the adjacent region as well as on the opposite side of the
macrosection along the specified traverses.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
1.5.2
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 46 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Method
The test shall be carried out in accordance with Recommendation ISO R81,
Vickers hardness, using laboratory type machine controlled as perrecommendation of ISO R 146 and using a diamond pyramid penetrator set at
2.37 rad. (136) with a load of 100 N (10 kg).
1.5.3
Requirements
Hardness value shall not exceed 300 H VI0 . In case of a single reading slightly
(+10 HV) higher than the specified limit, further indentations should be made to
check if the high value was an isolated case.
All the hardness values obtained from the heat effected zone shall not exceed
100 HV with respect to the average hardness of the values obtained for the
base metal.
If these additional tests mentioned above give a hardness within the
specification limit, the slightly higher value may be accepted.
1.6
Charpy-V-notch Impact Test
1.6.1
Specimens shall be taken from the position indicated in Fig. 1 of this

specification. The test specimens will be prepared in accordance with ISO R
148. Charpy V-notch specimens shall have dimensions as given in Fig. 3 of the
specification.
Three test specimens shall be taken from each sample and they shall be cut
and worked so that their length is transversal and perpendicular to the weld
bead with the notch position as shown in Fig. 4 of this specification. The notch
shall be perpendicular to the roller surface. The test specimens width shall
depend upon the pipe wall nominal thickness as following :
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 47 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Nominal wall thickness in

Test Specimens width in
mm
mm
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------> 12
12
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------> 9.5 and 12
7.5
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5
7 and 9.5
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------<7
2.5
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1.6.2
Test Method
The test shall be carried out as indicated in ISO R 148 "Beam Impact Test Vnotch.
Test pieces shall be immersed in a thermostatic bath and maintained at the test
temperature for at least 15 minutes. They shall than be placed in the testing
machine and broken within 5 seconds of their removal from the batch.
1.6.3
Requirements
The impact energy shall be greater or equal to :------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Test Specimens in
Average of
Minimum
mm
Three specimens
Single Value
Joule (min) (Note-2)
Joules (Note 1)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
27
22
7.5
21.5
17.5
5
18.5
15.0
2.5
10.0
8.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Note:
1)
Only one value is permitted to be lower than average upto the value
specified.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
1.7
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 48 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Bend Test Requirements

The bend test specimens shall be made and tested as per the requirements of
API-1104 sixteenth edition - May, 1983 except that the dimensions of Jig for
guided bend test fig. 5 para 2.6 API-1104 shall be modified as follows :
Radius of the plunger
Radius of the die
Width of the die
A'
B'
C'
=2t
= 3 t + 1.6mm
= 50.8
The acceptance criteria shall however be as per para 2.643 and 2.653 of API1104 sixteenth edition - May, 1983.
Note t = Thickness of Specimen (nominal)
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 49 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
ANNEXURE-3
1.0
In addition to the radiographic inspection ultrasonic inspection is required as per
conditions mentioned in Annexure-1 of this specification.
This section concerns manual ultrasonic inspection. However ultrasonic
inspection by automatic equipment may be used if approved by the COMPANY.
1.1
Equipment and Operators

The CONTRACTOR who carries out the ultrasonic inspection shall have
sufficient qualified personnel, equipment and instrument at his disposal to be
able to effect the tests without hindering or delaying the pipeline assembly
operations.
Calibrate the equipment;

Perform an operational test under production conditions;
Interpret the screen picture;
Evaluate the size and location of reflectors
Interpret the type of defects detected.
The COMPANY has the option of checking the ability of personnel employed for
ultrasonic testing by means of qualification tests.
The CONTRACTOR appointed to carry out UT inspection shall supply the
instruments necessary for their execution on site.
1.2
Specification for Ultrasonic Testing Procedure

Qualification
Before work begins the CONTRACTOR shall present a specification describing
the proposed U.T. procedure qualification.
This specification shall be state, as an indication only but not limited to the
following information :
Type of U.T. equipment used
MECON LIMITED
TITLE

ERECTION
1.3
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 50 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Type and dimensions of transducers

Frequency range
Details for calibration
Coupling medium
Inspection technique
Record details
Reference to the welding procedure where it is intended to adopt the
specification.
Temperature range of the joints to be inspected.
Qualification of Ultrasonic Inspection Procedure

The ultrasonic inspection procedure shall be approved by the COMPANY.
Before inspection begins, the COMPANY may require the qualification test of
the ultrasonic inspection procedure. This specification test consists in testing
(under normal operating conditions) some CONTRACTOR welds made
according to the same production procedure, when there are typical defects the
test intends to detect.
1.4
Test Procedure
Circumferential weld shall be inspected from both sides using angled. Probes.
The surface with which the probe comes into contact shall be free of metal
spatter, dirt, iron oxide and scales of any type: therefore it shall be necessary to
clean a strip at least 50mm wide on both sides of the weld with steel - wire
brushes and anyhow the cleaned strip must be atleast wide enough to allow full
skip examination.
If during the test, echoes of doubtful origin appear, it shall be necessary to
inspect a convenient area on the pipe surface, close to the weld, with a straight
beam transducer in order to check whether any manufacturing defects are
present which could have interfered with the ultrasonic beam.
By way of an example, the equipment shall include but not be limited to the
following :
Ultrasonic equipment and coupling medium

Sample sections for calibration of instruments.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 51 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Equipment for cleaning of surface to be examined.

Rulers calibrated in centimeters for exact location of the position of
defects.
The characteristics of the above-listed instruments and equipment shall

guarantee:
a)
that the required standards of the inspection procedure, as previously

established and approved by the COMPANY, are satisfied.
b)
continuous operation
All the instruments and equipment shall be approved by the COMPANY
before being used. The COMPANY has the authority to reject any item
which is considered unsuitable. The decision of the COMPANY is final.
The CONTRACTOR appointed to carry out ultrasonic inspection shall
also ensure the operational efficiency and maintenance of the
instruments and equipment, and shall immediately substitute any item
rejected by the COMPANY.
All the instrument and equipment necessary for carrying out ultrasonic
inspection on site shall satisfy the requirements laid down by the public
board of institutions which regulate "safety at work".
1.5
Ultrasonic Instruments
The ultrasonic instruments :
Shall be each pulse type, able to generate, receive and display, on the
screen a cathode ray tube (CRT) pulse, at frequencies between 1 and 6
mhz. The useful part of the CRT screen shall be at least 70m wide and at
least 50mm high.
Shall have various amplification, with steps of 1 or 2 dB over a range of a

least 60 dB.
The regulation control shall be accurate to within 1 dB and this accuracy

shall be certified by the instrument manufacturer.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE

ERECTION
1.6
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 52 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
May be powered by a battery or an electric generator. In the first case,

the autonomy of operation (endurance) of the instrument shall be
sufficient to carry on working without frequent interruptions, and the
instrument shall be equipped with an automatic switch which switches it
off when the battery runs down, in the second case, there must be a
voltage stabilising device with a tolerance of 2 volts.
Probes
The probes used shall have dimensions, frequencies, and a refraction angle
suited to the type of steel, the diameter the thickness of the pipeline and to the
joint design.
1.7
Reference Sample Pieces

The efficiency of the equipment used, the effective refraction angle of the probe,
and the beam output points, shall be checked using a V1 and V2 sample block,
IIW type or the calibration block ASTM E-428.
For the calibration of runs and the regulation of detection sensitivity during the
test, a calibration piece be used. This piece shall be taken from the production
material, and will be at least 150mm long (measured in the direction of the axis),
and at least 50mm wide (measured in the direction of the circumference), (see
Fig. 4 of this specification).
In the middle of the inside and the outside surface of the calibration piece a
groove shall be made. The groove will have a rectangular cross-section, a flat
bottom and the following dimensions :
Depth : 1 +/- 0.1mm
Breadth (measured parallel to the 150mm side) : 1 +/- 0.1mm
Length (measured parallel to the 50mm side) not less than 30mm.
In addition, the calibration piece shall have a hole, 2mm in diameter, passing
through its thickness and positioned so that during calibration the echoes
returning from the two grooves do not interfere with those returning from the
hole.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
1.6
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 53 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Calibration
For a precise check of the sound paths necessary for a full inspection of the
weld joint, the probe shall be moved (half skip and full skip distance) until
internal and external notches on the test piece are detected (see Fig. 5 of this
specification).
The relevant defect limits the path lengths on the time base. The calibration of
reference sensitivity is obtained by utilising the through drilled test hole in the
thickness of the reference block to draw the distance amplitude correction curve
relevant to the test probe.
Calibration shall be carried out according to the following procedure : place its
internal vertex until the maximum height of echo is displayed on the screen; this
echo is adjusted to 80% of full screen height by means of the sensitivity adjuster
set in dB. Without varying the amplification, the probe placed at full skip distance
from the hole is moved to detect the external vertex the hole until the maximum
height of echo is obtained. The straight line connecting the peaks of the two
echoes obtained by the above procedure, represents the 100% reference level,
while the one connecting the two points at half height of the same echoes
represents "50% reference level".
The two straight lines shall be marked on the screen with a pen. Calibration
shallbe repeated each time tests are re-started at intervals not longer than 30
minutes during normal operations; each time the conditions fixed in advance are
altered. This calibration is applicable provided that the crystal of the probe is 8 x
9mm size. Should this size of the crystal be different, the value of the sensitivity
obtained from the calibration by a crystal of a different size shall be brought to
the value of sensitivity obtained from the calibration by a 8 x 9mm crystal. The
sensitivities of the two different size probes shall be compared through the
echoes obtained on the notch of the test piece with the probe position at half
skip of the distance.
1.9
Regulation of Amplification during Production Testing

The amplification during production testing shall be obtained by adding 2-6 dB
(according to the surface condition of the pipe and its cleanness) to the
reference amplification.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
1.10
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 54 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
Qualification of Ultrasonic Testing Operators

Before the inspection begins or during the same inspection, the COMPANY may
require a qualification test for the ultrasonic equipment operators.
1.11
Evaluation of Indications given by Ultrasonic Tests

Each time that echoes from the weld bead appear during production testing, the
instrument amplification shall be altered to coincide with the reference
amplifications and the probe shall be moved until maximum respond is obtained
paying attention all the time to the probetube coupling.
If, under these conditions, the height of the defer echo is equal to or greater than
that of the reference echo, the defect shall be evaluated. If the defect has also
been detected by the radiographic and or visual examination, the dimensions
shall be judged according to the type of examination which detects the greater
defects. Returns which are less than 50% of the reference echo, will not be
considered. It returns are above 50% but lower than 100% of the reference
echo, and if the operator has good reasons to suspect that the returns are
caused by unfavorably oriented cracks, he shall inform the COMPANY.
Moreover, when there is a defect to be repaired such defect shall be removed
for a length corresponding to the one where no more return echo is given.
1.12
Other Equipment
The use of rules calibrated in centimeters, attached if possible to the probe, for
the precise location of the position of welding defects, it recommended. Defect
location is effected by measuring the projection distance between the probe
output and the reflecting surface.
The operators carrying out the tests shall have besides the probing instrument,
tools for cleaning the pipe surface (files, brushes, etc.) as well as the coupling
liquid or paste appropriate for the temperature of the section to be examined.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 55 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
ANNEXURE-4
RADIOGRAPHY
1.0
SCOPE
This annexure covers the radiographic inspection of all types of welded joints of
the main pipeline. The welded joints shall include the following :
2.0
i)
Full girth welds on the mainline construction including double jointing of

pipe, if adopted.
ii)
Welds for installation of block valves, insulating joints and other

appurtenances and tie-ins.
iii)
Welds at scraper launching and receiving barrels
iv)
Terminal Piping.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
This specification shall apply in conjunction with the following (all latest edition) :
i)
API 1104, Standard for welding pipelines and related facilities.
ii)
ANSI B31.8, code for Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.
iii)
ANSI B31.4, Code for Liquid Petroleum Transportation Piping System.
iv)
ASTM E94, Recommended practice for Radiographic Testing.
v)
ASTM, E 142, Standard Method for Controlling Quality of Radiographic

Testing.
vi)
The American Society for non-destructive Testing. Recommended

Practice No. SNT-TC-1A Supplement-A.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 56 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
3.0
PROCEDURE
3.1
The radiographic examination procedure to be adopted shall be submitted by

the CONTRACTOR as per Exhibit-F.
3.2
The procedure of radiographic examination shall be qualified to the entire

satisfaction of COMPANY prior to use. It shall include but not be limited to the
following requirements.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Lead foil intensifying screens, at the rear of the film shall be used in all
exposures.
Type 2 and 3 films as per ASTM E-94 shall be used.
A densitometer shall be used to determine film density. The transmitted
film density shall be 2.0 and 3.5 through out the weld. The unexposed
base density of the film shall not exceed 0.30.
Radiographic identification system and documentation for radiographic
interpretation reports and their recording system.
3.3
The CONTRACTOR shall qualify each procedure in the presence of the

COMPANY prior to use.
3.4
The procedure of radiographic examination shall produce radiographs of

sufficient density, clarity and contrast so that defects in the weld or in the pipe
adjacent to the weld, and the outline and holes of the pentrameter are clearly
discernible.
3.5
All the girth welds of mainline shall be subjected to 100% radiographic

examination. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all the radiographs to the
COMPANY, immediately after processing them, together with the corresponding
interpretation reports on approved format. The details of the radiographs
alongwith the joint identification number shall be duly entered in a register and
signed by the CONTRACTOR and submitted to the COMPANY for approval.
3.6
When the radiation source and the film are both on the outside of the weld and
located diametrically opposite each other, the maximum acceptable length of
film for each exposure shall not exceed the values given in Table 4 of API 1104.
The minimum film overlap, in such cases, shall be 40mm. The ellipse exposure
technique may be used on nominal pipe sizes of 2 inch and smaller provided
that the source to film distance used is a minimum of 12 inches.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 57 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
3.7
Three copies of each acceptable radiographic procedure (as outlined in

Specification no. MEC/S/O5/62/02) and three copies of radiographic qualification
records, shall be supplied to COMPANY. One set of the qualifying radiographs
on the job shall be kept by the CONTRACTOR's authorised representative to be
used as a standard for the quality of production radiographs during the job. The
other two sets shall be retained by COMPANY for its permanent record.
3.8
Three copies of the exposure charts relating to material thickness, kilo voltage,
source to film distance and exposure time shall also be made available to
COMPANY by the CONTRACTOR.
3.9
The CONTRACTOR shall, on a daily basis, record for each radiograph (1)
radiography number (2) approximate chainage of weld location, (3) whether or
not the welds meet the specified acceptance standards and (4) the nature and
approximate location of unacceptable defects observed. It must be possible to
relate to a particular butt weld and welder on piping drawing and pipeline
alignment drawing.
3.10
Each day's production of processed radiographs shall be properly packaged

separately, identified by at least the (1) date, (2) radiographic unit, (3) job
locations, (4) starting and ending progress survey stations and (5) shall include
original and three copies of the daily radiographic record. The package shall be
submitted to the COMPANY daily when possible, but in no event later than noon
of the following day.
3.11
The CONTRACTOR shall provide all the necessary facilities at site, such as a
dark room with controlled temperature, film viewer etc. to enable the COMPANY
to examine the radiographs.
3.12
The CONTRACTOR, if found necessary, may modify the procedure of

radiographic examination suiting the local conditions prevailing. This shall,
however, be subject to the approval of the COMPANY.
3.13
COMPANY shall have free access to all the CONTRACTOR's work facilities in
the field.
3.14
Any approval granted by the COMPANY shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of
his responsibilities and guarantees.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 58 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
4.0
RADIATION SOURCE
4.1
Radiographic examination shall be carried out using x-radiations. Radiographic

examination by Gamma rays may be allowed, at the discretion of the
COMPANY, in case of inaccessible joints.
4.2
Whenever possible, pipeline welds will be inspected by placing the radiation

source inside the pipe, on the pipeline axis, with a radiation of 6.28 rad. (360).
If it is impossible to place the radiation source inside the pipe, the weld will be
inspected with the source on the outside. An overlap of at least 40mm at the
ends of each film shall be required to ensure that the first and last location
increment numbers are common to successive films and to establish that no
part of a weld has been omitted.
5.0
LEVEL OF QUALITY
The quality level of radiographic sensitivity required for radiographic inspection
shall be at least equivalent to the values in Figure-6.
6.0
PENETRAMETERS
6.1
The image quality indicator (abbreviation : IQI) shall be used for the qualification
of the welding procedure and during normal line production. Radiographic
sensitivity shall be measured with the wire image quality indicator
(Penetrameter). The penetrameter shall be selected according to DIN 54109 or
ISO 1027. For radiographs made with the source on the outside, a penetrameter
shall be placed on each side of the film with the smaller wire of the penetrameter
turned towards the end of the film itself. When a complete weld is radiographed
in a single exposure using a source inside the piping, four penetrameters
approximately equally spaced around the circumference shall be used. During
the procedure qualification, IQI shall be placed both on the source side and on
the film side. The sensitivity obtained with IQI on the source side shall not be
less than the values shown in Fig. 6 of this specification.
The sensitivity limit may be considered to have been reached when the outline
of the IQI, its identification number and the wire of the required diameter show
up clearly on the radiographs.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 59 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
The COMPANY may authorise use of types of IQI other than those planned,
provided that they conform with recognised standards and only if the
CONTRACTOR is able to demonstrate that the minimum sensitivity level
required is obtained. For this demonstration, a test shall be carried out
comparing the IQI specified and the CONTRACTOR's to show up the
identification number and other details of the proposed IQI, which must be
visible in the test radiograph.
7.0
FILM IDENTIFICATION MARKERS

All films shall be clearly identified by lead numbers, letters, and/ or markers. The
image of the markers shall appear on the films, without interfering with the
interpretation. These markers positions shall also be marked on the part to be
radiographed and shall be maintained during radiography.
8.0
PROTECTION AND CARE OF FILM
8.1
All unexposed films shall protected and stored properly as per the requirements
of API 1104 standard and ASTM E 94.
8.2
The exposed and unexposed film shall be protected from heat, light, dust and
moisture. Sufficient shielding shall be supplied to prevent exposure of film to
damaging radiation prior to and following the use of the film for radiographic
exposure.
9.0
RE-RADIOGRAPHY
9.1
The weld joints shall be re-radiographed in case of unsatisfactory quality of the

radiographs, at the expense of the CONTRACTOR.
9.2
All the repaired weld joints shall be re-radiographed at no extra cost to the
COMPANY in the same manner as that followed for the original welds. In
addition, the repaired weld area shall be identified with the original identification
number plus the letter `R' to indicate the repair.
9.3
When evaluating repair film, radiographers shall compare each section

(exposure) of the weld with the original film to assure repair was correctly
marked and original defect removed.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 60 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
9.4
The COMPANY will review prior to any repair of welds, all the radiographs of
welds which contain, according to the CONTRACTOR's interpretation,
unacceptable defects. The final disposition of all unacceptable welds shall be
decided by the COMPANY.
10.0
QUALIFICATION OF RADIOGRAPHERS
10.1
Pipeline radiographers shall be qualified in according with the requirement of

API 1104 and to the full satisfaction of COMPANY.
10.2
Certification of all the radiographers, qualified as per 10.1 above, shall be

furnished by the CONTRACTOR to the COMPANY before a radiographer will be
permitted to perform production radiography. The certificate record shall include
:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Background and experience record

Training course record
Technical examination record
Doctor's report on radiographer's Oaecuer 0-1 acquity eye test.
Date of qualification.
10.3
The radiographers shall be required to qualify with each radiographic procedure

they use, prior to performing the work assigned to him in accordance with the
specification.
11.0
PRESERVATION OF RADIOGRAPHS
11.1
The radiographs shall be processed to allow storage of films without any

discoloration for at least three years. All the radiographers shall be presented in
suitable folders for preservation alongwith necessary documentation.
11.2
All radiographs shall become property of the COMPANY.
12.0
EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES
12.1
CONTRACTOR shall make necessary arrangement at his own expense, for

providing the radiographic equipment, radiographic films and the accessories for
carrying out the radiographic examination for satisfactory and timely completion
of the job.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 61 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
12.2
For carrying out the mainline radiographic examination the CONTRACTOR shall
be equipped with suitable mobile/ stationary type with rooms. These shall have
all the required facilities for film processing. Film viewer used shall be equipped
with the film illuminator that has a light source of sufficient intensity and can be
suitably controlled to allow viewing film densities upto 4.0 without damaging the
film.
13.0
RADIATION PROTECTION
13.1
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the protection and personal monitoring

of every man with or near radiation sources.
13.2
The protection and monitoring shall comply with local regulations.
13.3
In view of visual hazards in the handling of radioactive source of material,

CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for complying with all rules and
regulations set forth by Atomic Energy Commission or any other Government
agencies of India in this regard and COMPANY shall not be responsible and
shall be kept indemnified by the CONTRACTOR for default(s) of whatever
nature by the Contractor. Safety equipment as considered adequate by the
COMPANY for all necessary personnel shall be made available for use and
maintained for immediate and proper use by the CONTRACTOR.
14.0
DISPLAY OF SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
14.1
The safety provisions shall be brought to the notice of all concerned by display
on a notice board at prominent place at the work spot. The person responsible
for the "safety" shall be named by the CONTRACTOR.
15.0
ENFORCEMENT FOR SAFETY REGULATIONS
15.1
To ensure effective enforcement of the rules and regulations relating to safety

precautions, the arrangement made by the CONTRACTOR shall be open to
inspection by COMPANY or its representatives.
16.0
FIRST AID INDUSTRIAL INJURIES
16.1
CONTRACTOR shall maintain first aid facilities for its employees and those of
its sub-contractors.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

ERECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 62 OF 62
MEC/S/05/62/06
REVISION 0
16.2
CONTRACTOR shall make outside arrangements for ambulance service and for
treatment of industrial injuries. Names of those providing these services shall be
furnished to COMPANY prior to start of work and their telephone no. shall be
posted prominently in CONTRACTOR's field office.
16.3
All critical industrial injuries shall be reported promptly to the COMPANY and a
copy of CONTRACTOR's report covering each personal injury requiring the
attention of physician shall be furnished to the COMPANY.
17.0
NO EXEMPTION
17.1
Not withstanding the above there is nothing in these clauses to exempt the
CONTRACTOR from the operation of any other act or rules in force.
SPECIFICATION
FOR
SHOP & FIELD PAINTING
SPECIFICATION NO. MEC/S/05/62/07A
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
CONTENTS
Sl.
No.
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
7.1
7.2
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
Description
Page
No.
GENERAL
3
SCOPE
3
CODES & STANDARDS
4
EQUIPMENT
5
SURFACE PREPARATION
6
PAINT MATERIALS
16
PAINTING SYSTEMS
21
PRE-ERECTION/ PRE-FABRICATION AND SHOP PRIMING FOR 23
CARBON STEEL, LOW TEMPERATURE CARBON STEEL & LOW
ALLOY STEEL, STEEL STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
ETC.
REPAIR OF PRE-ERECTION/ FABRICATION AND SHOP PRIMING 23
AFTER ERECTION/ WELDING FOR CARBON STEEL, LOW
TEMPERATURE CARBON STEEL & LOW ALLOY STEEL, ITEMS IN
ALL ENVIRONMENTS.
FIELD
PAINT
SYSTEM
FOR
NORMAL
CORROSIVE 24
ENVIRONMENT (FOR CARBON STEEL, LOW TEMPERATURE
CARBON STEEL & LOW ALLOY STEEL)
FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT (FOR 25
CARBON STEEL, LOW TEMPRETURE CARBON STEEL AND LOW
ALLOY STEEL)
FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR HIGHLY CORROSIVE AREA (FOR 26
CARBON STEEL, LOW ALLOY STEEL) EXTERNAL SURFACE OF
UNINSULATED COLUMNS, VESSELS, HEAT EXCHANGERS,
BLOERS, PIPING, PUMPS, TOWERS, COMPRESSORS, FLARE
LINES, STRUCTURAL STEEL ETC.
FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR CARBON STEEL STORAGE TANKS 27
(EXTERNAL) FOR ALL ENVIRONMENTS
FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR CARBON STEEL AND LOW ALLOY 28
STEEL STORAGE TANK (INTERNAL)
COATING SYSTEM FOR EXTRNAL SIDE OF UNDERGROUND 29
CARBON STEEL, PLANT PIPING AND TANKS.
PAINTING UNDER INSULATION FOR (HOT, COLD & SAFETY) 30
CARBON STEEL LOW TEMPERATURE CARBON STEEL &
STAINLESS STEEL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IN ALL
ENVIRONMENT
INTERNAL PROTECTION OF CARBON STEEL WATER BOXES 31
AND TUBE SHEETS OF COOLERS/ CONDENSERS.
FIELD PAINTING SYSTEM FOR GI TOWERS/ NON-FERROUS 31
TUBE SHEET
STORAGE
32
COLOURS CODE FOR PIPING
32
Sl.
No.
19.0
20.0
21.0
22.0
23.0
24.0
Description
Page
No.
35
35
36
37
37
PAINT 38
IDENTIFICATION OF VESSELS, PIPING ETC.

PAINTING FOR CIVIL DEFENCE REQUIREMENTS
GUARANTEE
QUALIFICATION CRITERIA O PAINTING CONTRACTOR.
PROCEDURE
FOR
APPROVAL
OF
NEW
MANUFACTURERS.
ANNEXURE-I- LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURES
40
ANNEXURE-II- LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURES 41-46
PRODUCTS.
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
These technical specifications shall be applicable for the work covered by

the contract, and without prejudice to the various codes of practice,
standard specifications etc. it is understood that contractor shall complete
the work in all respects with the best quality of materials and workmanship
and in accordance with the best engineering practice and instructions of
Engineer-in-charge.
1.2
Wherever it is stated in the specification that a specific material is to be

supplied or a specific work is to be done it shall be deemed that the same
shall be supplied or carried out by the contractor.
Any deviation from this standard without within deviation permit from
appropriate authority will result in rejection to job.
2.0
SCOPE
Scope of work covered in the specification shall include, but not limited to
the following.
2.1
This specification defines the requirements for surface preparation,

selection and application of paint on external surfaces of equipment,
vessels, machinery, piping, ducts, steels structures, external & internal
protection of storage tanks for all services RCC Chimney & MS Chimney
with or without refractory lining and flare lines etc.
2.2
Extent of Works
2.2.1
The following surface and materials shall require shop, pre-erection and
field painting.
a.
All uninsulated C. S. & A.S. equipment like columns, vessels,

drums, storage tanks, heat exchangers, pumps, compressors,
electrical panels and motors etc.
b.
All uninsulated carbon and low alloy piping fitting and valves
(including painting of identification marks), furnace, ducts and
stacks.
c.
All items contained in a package unit as necessary.
d.
All structural steel work, pipe, structural steel supports, walkways,

handrails, ladders, platforms etc.
e.
RCC/ MS chimneys with or without refractory lining & Flare lines.
Page 1 of 49
2.2.2
f.
Identification colour bands on all piping as required including

insulated aluminium clad, galvanised, SS and non-ferrous piping.
g.
Identification lettering/ numbering on all painted surface of

equipment/ piping insulated aluminium clad, galvanised, SS and
non-ferrous piping.
h.
Marking/ identification signs on painted surfaces of equipment/

piping for hazardous service.
i.
Supply of all primers, paints and all other materials required for
painting other than owners supply.
j.
Over insulation surface of equipments and pipes wherever

required.
k.
Painting under insulation for carbon steel and stainless steel as

specified.
l.
Repair work of damaged/ preerection/ fabrication shop primer and

weld joints at field.
The following surface and materials shall not be painted unless otherwise
specified:
a.
Uninsulated austentic stainless steel.
b.
Plastic and/ or plastic coated materials.
c.
Non ferrous materials like aluminium, galvanised piping, gratings

and handrails etc. except G. I. Towers.
2.3
Documents
2.3.1
The contractor shall perform the work in accordance with the following
documents issued to him for executions of work.
2.4
a.
Bill of quantities for piping, equipment, machinery and structure etc.
b.
Piping line list.
c.
Painting specifications including special civil defence requirement.
Unless otherwise instructed final painting on pre-erection/ shop primed

pipes and equipments shall be painted in the field, only after mechanical
Page 2 of 49
completion and testing on system are completed as well as, after

completion of steam purging wherever required.
2.5
Changes and deviations required for any specific job due to clients
requirement or otherwise shall be referred to EIL for deviation permit.
3.0
CODES & STANDARDS
3.1
Without prejudice to the provision of clause 1.1 above and the detailed
specifications of the contract, the following codes and standards shall be
followed for the work covered by this contract.
3.2
IS:5
Colour coding
IS-101
Methods of test for ready mixed paint

and enamels.
IS-2379:1990
Indian standard for pipe line

Identification Colour code.
ASTM
American standard test methods for

Paints and coatings.
ASA A 13.1-1981
Scheme for Identification of piping

Systems : American National Standard
Institution.
Surface Preparation Standards:

Following standards shall be followed for surface preparations:
3.2.1
Swedish Standard : SIS-05 5900-1967/ ISO-8501-1-1998

(Surface preparation standards for painting steel surfaces).
This standard contains photographs of the various standards on four
different degrees of rusted steel and as such is preferable for inspection
purpose by the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.2.2
Steel structure painting

specifications (SSPC-SP).
Council,
U.S.A
(surface
preparations
3.2.3
British standard (surface finish or Blast-cleaned for painting) BS:4232
3.2.4
National Associations of Corrosion Engineers, U.S.A. (NACE)
Page 3 of 49
3.2.5
Various International Standards equivalent to swedish Standard for

surface preparation are given in Table-I.
3.3
The contractor shall arrange, at his own cost, to keep a set of latest edition
of any one of the above standards and codes at site.
3.4
The paint manufacturers instructions shall be followed as far as

practicable at all times. Particular attention shall be paid to the following:
a.
Instructions for storage to avoid exposure as well as extremes of

temperature.
b.
Surface preparations prior to painting.
c.
Mixing and thinning.
d.
Application of paints and the recommended limit on time intervals

between coats.
4.0
EQUIPMENT
4.1
All tools, brushes, rollers, spray guns, abrasive materials hand/ power
tools for leaning and all equipments, scaffolding materials, shot/ wet
abrassive blasting, water blasting equipments & air compressors etc.
required to be used shall be suitable for the work and all in good order and
shall be arranged by the contractor at site and in sufficient quantity.
Mechanical mixing shall be used for paint mixing operations in case of two
pack systems except that the Engineer-in-Charge may allow the hand
mixing of small quantities at his discretion.
5.0
SURFACE PREPARATION, SHOP COAT, COATING APPLICATION &

REPAIR AND DOCUMENTATION
5.1
General
5.1.1
In order to achive the maximum durability, one or more of following

methods of surface preparation shall be followed, depending on condition
of steel surface and as instructed by Engineer-in-Charge. Adhesion of the
paint film to surface depends largely on the degree of cleanliness of the
metal surface. Proper surface preparation contributes more to the success
of the paint protective system:
a.
b.
c.
Manual or hand tools cleaning.

Mechanical or power tool cleaning.
Blast cleaning.
Page 4 of 49
5.1.2
Mill scale, rust, rust scale and foreign matter shall be removed fully to
ensure that a clean and dry surface is obtained. The minimum acceptable
standard in case of manual or hand tool cleaning shall be St. 2 or
equivalent, in case of mechanical or power tool cleaning it shall be St. 3 or
equivalent, in case of blast cleaning it shall be Sa 2 or equivalent as per
Swedish Standard SIS-055900-1967/ ISO-8501-1-1988. Where highly
corrosive condition exits, then blast cleaning shall be Sa3 as per Swedish
Standard.
Remove all other contaminants, oil, grease etc. by use of an aromatic
solvent prior to surface cleaning.
5.1.3
Blast cleaning shall not be performed where dust can contaminate

surfaces undergoing such cleaning or during humid weather conditions
having humidity exceeding 85%.
5.1.4
Irrespective of the method of surface preparation, the first coat of primer

must be applied on dry surface. This should be done immediately and in
any case within 4 hours of cleaning of surface. However, at times of
unfavourable weather conditions, the Engineer-in-Charge shall have the
liberty to control the time period, at his sole discretion and / or to insist on
recleaning, as may be required, before primer application is taken up. In
general, during unfavourable weather conditions, blasting and painting
shall be avoided as far as practicable.
5.1.5
The external surface of R.C.C. chimney to be painted be dry and clean.

Any loose particle of stand, cement, aggregate etc. shall be removed by
rubbing with soft wire brush if necessary, acid etching with 10-15% HCL
solution about 15 minutes shall be carried out and surface must be
thorought washed with water to remove acid & loose particles then dry
completely before application of paint.
5.2
Procedure of Surface Preparation.
5.2.1
Blast Cleaning
5.2.1.1
Air Blast Cleaning

The surface shall be blast cleaned using one of the abrasives: AL202
particles chilled casts iron or malleable iron and steel at pressure of 7kg.
Cm2 at appropriate distance and angle depending on nozzle size
maintaining constant velocity and pressure. Chilled cast iron, malleable
iron and steel shall be in the form of shot or grit of size not greater than
0.055 maximum in case of steel and malleable iron and 0.04 maximum
in case of chilled iron. Compressed air shall be free form moisture and oil.
Page 5 of 49
The blasting nozzles should be venturei style with tungsten carbide or

boron carbide as the material for liners. Nozzles orifice may vary from
3/16 to . On completion of blasting operation, the blasted surface shall
be clean and free from any scale or rust and must show a grey white
metallic lusture. Primer or first coat of paint shall be applied within 4 hours
of surface preparation. Blast cleaning shall bot be done outdoors in bad
weather without adequate protection or when there is dew on the metal
which is to be cleaned, surface profile shall be uniform to provide good
key to the paint adhesion (i.e.35to 50). If possible vacuum collector shall
be installed for collecting the abrasive and recycling.
5.2.1.2
Water Blast cleaning

Environmental, health and safety problems associated with abrassive
blast cleaning limit the application of air blast cleaning in many
installations. In such case water blast cleaning is resorted to.
Water blast cleaning can be applied with or without abrassive and highpressure water blasting. The water used shall be inhibited with sodium
chromate/ phosphate. The blast cleaned surface shall be washed
thoroughly with detergents and wiped solvent and dried with compressed
Air. For effective cleaning abrassives are used. The most commonly used
pressure for high pressure water blast cleaning for maintenance surface
preparation is 3000 to 6000 psi at 35-45 liters/ minute water volume and
pressure upto 10000 psi and water volume of 45 liters/ minute provide
maximum cleaning.
The wate blast cleaned surface shall be comparable to SSPC-SP-12/
NACE No. 5. The operation shall be carried out as per SSPC guidelines
for water blast cleaning. The indicative values for sand injection is
Air
:
300 to 400 Cu.ft/ min.
Water
:
5-10 liter/ min. with corrosion inhibitor
Sand
:
200-400 lbs/ hr.
Nozzle
:
0.5 to 1 dia
Special equipments for water blast cleaning with abrasives now available
shall be used.
5.2.2
Mechanical of Power tool cleaning

Power tool cleaning shall be done mechanical striking tools, chipping
hammers, griding wheels or roating steels wire-brushes. Excessive
burnish of surface shall be avoided as it can reduce paint adhesion. On
completion of cleaning, the detached rust mill scale etc. shall be removed
by clean rags and/ or washed by water or stream and thoroughly dried
with compressed air jet before application of paint.
Page 6 of 49
5.2.3
Maual or hand tool cleaning

Manual or hand tool cleaning is used only where safety problems limit the
application of other surface preparation procedure and hence dones not
appear in the specifications of paint systems.
Hand tool cleaning normally consists of the following:
a.
b.
c.
Hand descaling and/ or hammering

Hand scraping
Hand wire brushing
Rust, mill scale spatters, old coating and other foreign matter, shall be
removed by hammering, scrapping tools, emery paper cleaning, wire
brushing or combination of the above methods. On completion of
cleaning, loose materials shall be removed from the surface by clean rags
and the surface shall be brushed, swept, deducted and blown off with
compressed air/ steam to remove all loose matter. Finally the surface may
be washed with water and dried for effective cleaning.
5.3
Non compatible shop coat primer

The compatibility of finishing coat should be confirmed from the paint
manufacturer. In the event of use of primer such as zinc rich epoxy,
inorganic zinc silicate etc. as shop coat the pant system shall depend on
condition of shop coat, if shop coat is in satisfactory condition showing no
major defects, the shop coat shall not be removed. The touch up primer
and finishing coat(s) shall be identified for application by Engineer-inCharge.
5.4
Shop coated (coated with primer & finishing coat) equipment should not
be repainted unless paint is damaged.
5.5
Shop primed equipment and surface will only be spot cleaned in

damaged areas by means of power tool brush cleaning and then spot
primed before applying one coat of filed primer unless otherwise specified.
If shop primer is not compatible with field primer then shop coated primer
should be completely removed before applications of selected paints
system for particular environment.
5.6
For packaged units/ equipment, shop primer should be as per the paint
system given in this specification. However, manufacturers standard can
be followed after review.
5.7
Coating Procedure and Application:
Page 7 of 49
5.7.1
Surface shall not be coated in rain, wind or in environment where injurious

airbone elements exists, when the steel surface temperature is less than
5 F above dew point when the relative humidity is greater then 85% or
when the temperature is below 40 F.
5.7.2
Blast cleaned surface shall be coated with one complete application of

primer as soon as practicable but in no case later than 4 hrs. the same
day.
5.7.3
To the maximum extent practicable, each coat of material shall be applied

as a continuous film uniform thickness free of probes. Any spots or areas
missed in application shall be recoated and permitted to dry before the
next coat is applied. Applied paint should have the desired wet film
thickness.
5.7.4
Each coat shall be proper state of cure or dryness before the application
of succeeding coat. Material shall be considered dry for recoating when an
additional coat can applied without the development of any detrimental
film irregularities such as lifting or loose of adhesion of the under coat.
Manufacturer instruction shall be followed for intercoat interval.
5.7.5
When the successive coat of the same colour have been specified,
alternate coat shall be tinted, when practical, sufficiently to produce
enough contrast to indicate complete coverage of the surface. The tinting
material shall be compatible with the material and not detrimental to its
service life.
5.7.6
Air spray application shall be in accordance with the following:

a.
The equipment used shall be suitable for the intended purpose,

shall be capable of properly atomizing the paint to be applied, and
shall be equipped with suitable pressure regulators and gauges.
The air caps, nozzles, and needles shall be those recommended by
the manufacturer of the equipment for the material beign sprayed.
The equipment shall be kept in satisfactory condition to permit
proper paint application.
b.
Traps or separators shall be provided to remove oil and condensed

water from the air. These traps or separators must be of adequate
size and must be drained periodically during operations. The air
from the spray gun impinging against the surface shall show
condensed water or oil.
Page 8 of 49
c.
Ingredients shall be kept properly mixed in the spray pots or

containers during application by continuous mechanical
agitation.
d.
The pressure on the material in the pot and of the air at the gun
shall be adjusted for optimum spraying effectiveness. The pressure
on the material in the pot shall be adjusted when necessary for
change in elevation of the gun above the pot. The atomizing air
pressure at the gun shall be high enough to properly atomize the
paint but not so high as to cause excessive fogging of paint,
excessive evaporation of solvent, or less by overspray.
e.
Spray equipment shall be kept sufficiently clean so that dirt, dried

paint, and other foreign materials are not deposited in the paint film.
Any solvents left in the equipment shall be completely removed
before applying paint to the surface begin painted.
5.7.7
f.
Paint shall be applied in a uniform layer, with overlapping at the

edge of the spray pattern. The spray patterns shall be adjusted so
that the paint is deposited uniformly. During application the gun
shall be held perpendicular to the surface and at a distance which
will ensure that a wet layer of paint is deposited on the surface. The
trigger of the gun should be released at the end of each stroke.
g.
All runs and sags shall be brushed out immediately or the paint
shall be removed and the surface repainted.
h.
Areas inaccessible to the spray gun shall be painted by brush: if not

accessible by brush, daubers or sheepking shall be used.
i.
All nameplates, manufacturers identification tags, machined

surface instrument glass, finished flange faces, control valve items
and similar items shall be masked to prohibit coating disposition. If
these surface are coated, the component shall be cleaned and
restored to its original condition.
j.
Edges of structural shapes and irregular coated surface shall be

coated first and an extra pass made later.
k.
If spray gun shown choking, immediately dechoking procedure shall

be followed.
Airless spray application shall be in accordance with the following

procedure: as per steel structure paint manual vol. 1 & vol. 2. By SSPC,
U.S.A., Air less spray relies on hydraulic pressure rather than air
Page 9 of 49
atomization to produce the desired spray. An air compressor or electric

motor is used to operate a pump to produce pressures of 1,000 to 6.000
psi. Paint is delivered to the spray gun at this pressure through a single
hose within the gun, a single paint stream is divided into separate
streams, which are forced through a small orifice resulting in atomization
of paint without the use of air. This result in more repaid coverage with
less overspray. Airless spray usually is faster, cleaner, more economical
and easier to use than conventional airspray.
Airless spray equipment is mounted on wheels, and paint is aspirated in a
hose that sucks paint from any container, including drums. The unit shall
have in built agitator that keep the paint uniformly mixed during the
spraying. The unit shall consists of in built strainer. Usually very small
quantities of thinning is required before spray. Incase of High Build epoxy
coating (two pack), 30:1 pump ratios and 0.020-0.023 tip size will provide
a good spray pattern. Ideally fluid hoses should no be less than 3/8 ID
and not longer than 50ft to obtain optimum results.
In case of gun choking, decoking steps shall be followed immediately.
5.7.8
5.7.9
Brush application of paint shall be in accordance with the following:

a.
Brushes shall be of a style and quality that will enable proper

application of paint
b.
Round or oval brushes are most suitable for rivets, bolts, irregular
surfaces and rough or pitted steel. Wide flat brushes are suitable
for large flat areas, but they shall not have width over five inches.
c.
Paints shal be applied into all corners.
d.
Any runs or sags shall be brushed out.
e.
There shall be minimum of brush marks left in the applied paint
f.
Surface not accessible to brushes shall be painted by spray,

duubers, or sheepkin.
Manual application by sling (where 6 O clock

approachable)
position of pipe is not
A canvas strip (alternatively a tinplate strip) about 450mm wide and 1.5m
longs is hold under the pipe by two men. Liquid coating poured on the
sling at each side of the pipe. The men holding this sling move it up and
down and walk slowly forward while fresh coating is poured on the pipe
and they manipulate the sling so that an even coating is ontained all round
Page 10 of 49
the bottom. This work shall be done vey carefully and by experienced
personnel. There shall bot be any formation of Whiskers and holes in the
coating. The coating film shall be inspected by mirror.
5.7.10
For each coat the painter should know the WFT corresponding to the
specified DFT and standardise the paint application technique to achieve
the desired WFT. This is to be ensured in the qualification trial.
5.8
Drying of Coated Surface
5.8.1
No coat shall be applied unit the preceding coat has dried. The material
shall be considered dry for re-coating when another coat can be applied
without the development of any film irregularities such as lifting or loss of
adhesion of undercoats. Drying time of the applied coat should not exced
maximum specified for it as a first coat; if it exceeds the paint material has
possible deteriorated or mixing is faulty.
5.8.2
No paint shall be force dried under condition which will cause checking,
wrinkling blistering formation of pores, or detrimentally after the condition
of the paint.
No drier shall be added to a paint on the job unless specifically called for
in the manufacturers specification for the paint.
Paint shall be protected from rain, condensation, contamination snow and
freezing until dry to the fullest extent practicable.
5.9
Repair of damaged paint surface.
5.9.1.
Where paint has been damaged in handling and in transportation, the

repair of damaged coating of pre-creation/ fabrication shall be as given
below.
5.9.2.
Repair of damaged inorganic zinc silicate primer after erection/ weldding:

Quickly remove the primer from damaged area by mechanical scraping
and emery paper to expose the white metal. Blasts clean the surfaces
possible. Feather the primer over the intact adjacent surface surrounding
the damaged area by emery paper.
5.9.3
Repair of damaged pre-erection and shop priming in the design

temperature of 90 C to 500 C.
-
Surface preparation shall be done as per procedure 5.9.2
Page 11 of 49
One coat of F-9 shall be applied wherever damaged was observed

on pre-erection/ pre-fabrication/ shop primer of inorganic zinc
silicate coating (F-9) shall not be applied if damaged area is not
more than 5 x 5 cm.
5.10
PAINT APPLICATION
5.10.1
Shop priming/ pre-erection priming with F9 of F12 shall be done only on

blasted surface.
5.10.2
Shop priming/ pre-erection priming with F-9 or F-12 shall be done only
with airless spray.
5.10.3
For large flat surface field painting shall be done by airless spray
otherwise brush can be used.
5.11
Documentation.
1.
A written quality plan with procedure for qualification trials and for the
actual work.
Daily progress report with dedtails of weather condition, particular of
application no of coats and type of materials applied, anomolies, progress
of work versus programme.
Result of measurement of temperature relative humidity, surface profile,
film thickness, holiday detection, adhesion tests with signature of
appropriate authority.
Particular of surface preparation and paint application during trials and
during the work.
Details of non-compliance, rejects and repairs.
Type of testing equipments and calibration.
Code and batch numbers of paint material used.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Page 12 of 49
TABLE-I (for clause 5.0)

SURFACE PREPARATION STANDARDS
S.
NO.
1.
DESCRIPTION
VARIOUS INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS

(EQUIVALENT)
SWEDISH
SSPC-SP
NACE
BRITISH
STANDARD
USA
USA
STANDAR
SIS-05D BS5900 1967
4232: 1967
MANUAL OR HAND TOOL CLEANING

REMOVAL OF LOOSE RUST LOOSE
MILL SCALE AND LOOSE PAINT,
CHIPPING, SCRAPING, SANDING AND
WIRE BRUSHING, SURFACE SHOULD
HAVE A FAINT METALLIC SHEEN.
2.
MECHANICAL
CLEANING
OR
POWER
REMARK
ST.2
SSPC-SP2
THIS
METHOD
IS
APPLIED WHEN THE
SURFACE IS EXPOSED
TO
NORMAL
ATMOSPHERIC
CONDITION
WHEN
OTHER
METHODS
CANNOT BE ADOPTED
AND ALSO FOR SPOT
CLEANING
DURING
MAINTENANCE
PAINTING.
ST.3
SSPC-SP3
-DO-
TOOL
REMOVAL OF LOOSE RUST, LOOSE

MILL SCALE AND LOOSE PAINT TO
DEGREE SPECIFIED BY POWER TOOL
CHIPPING,
DESCALING,
SANDING,
WIRE BRUSHING AND GRINDIN, AFTER
REMOVAL
OF
DUST,
SURFACE
SHOULD HAVE A PRONOUNCED
METALLIC SHEEN.
Page 13 of 49
Page 14 of 49

S.
NO.
DESCRIPTION

(EQUIVALENT)
SWEDISH
SSPC-SP
NACE
BRITISH
STANDARD
USA
USA
STANDARD
SIS-05BS-4232:
5900 1967
1967
REMARKS
3.
BLAST CLEANING (AIR & WATER)
3.1
THERE ARE FOUR COMMON GRADES

OF BLAST CLEANING
WHITE METAL
SA-3
SSPC-SP5
NACE#1
FIRST
QUALITY
3.2
BLAST CLEANING TO WHITE METAL

CLEANLINESS REMOVAL OF
ALL
VISIBLE RUST, MILL SCALE PAINT &
FOREIGN MATTER 100% CLEANLINESS
WITH DESIRED SURFACE PROFILE.
NEAR WHITE METAL
WHERE EXTREMELY
CLEAN SURFACE CAN
BE EXPECTED FOR
PROLONG LIFE OF
PAINT SYSTEMS.
SA 2
SSPC-SP10
NACE
#2
SECOND
QUALITY
THE MINIMUM
REQUIREMENT FOR
CHEMICALLY
RESISTANT PAINT
SYSTEM SUCH AS
EPOXY, VINYL,
POLYURETHANE
BASED AND INORGANIC
ZINC SILICATE PAINTS,
ALSO FOR
CONVENTIONAL PAINT
SYSTEM USED UNDER
FAIRLY CORROSIVE
CONDITIONS TO
OBTAIN DESIRED LIFE
OF PAINT SYSTEM.
BLAST CLEANING TO NEAR WHITE

METAL CLEANLINESS, UNIT AT LEAST
95% OF EACH ELEMENTS OF SURFACE
AREA IS FREE OF ALL VISIBLE
RESIDUES WITH DESIRED SURFACE
PROFILE.
Page 15 of 49

S.
NO.
3.3
3.4
DESCRIPTION

(EQUIVALENT)
SWEDISH
SSPC-SP
NACE
BRITISH
STANDARD
USA
USA
STANDARD
SIS-05BS-4232:
5900 1967
1967
COMMERCIAL BLAST
BLAST CLEANING UNIT AT LEAST
TWOTHIRD OF EACH ELEMENT OF
SURFACE AREA IS FREE OF ALL
VISIBLE RESIDUES WITH DESIRED
SURFACE PROFILE.
SA-2
BRUSH-OFF BLAST
SA-1
SSPC-SP6
SSPC-SP7
No. 3
THIRD
QUALITY
No. 4
BLAST CLEANING TO WHITE METAL

CLEANLINESS, REMOVAL OF ALL
VISIBLE RUST, MILL SCALE , PAINT &
FOREIGN MATTER, SURFACE PROFILE
IS NOT SO IMPORTANT.
Page 16 of 49
REMARKS
FOR STEEL REQUIRED

TO BE PAINTED WITH
CONVENTIONAL
PAINTS FOR
EXPOSURE TO MILDLY
CORROSIVE
ATMOSPHERE FOR
LONGER LIFE OF THE
PAINT SYSTEMS.
6.0
PAINT MATERIALS
Paint manufacturers shall furnish all the characteristics of paint
material on printed literature, alongwith the test certificate for all the
specified characteristics given in this specifications. All the paint
materials shall be of first quality and conform to the following
general characteristics as per the table 6.1, 6.2 and 6.3.
Page 17 of 49
PAINT MATERIALS
TABLE NO.: 6.1 PRIMERS
S.
No
.
1.
DESCRIPTION
Technical Name
2.
Type and composition
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Volume solids (approx)

DFT (Dry dilm thickness) per coat (approx)
Theoretical covering capacity in M2/ coat/ litre
(approx)
Welght per litre in kgs/ litre (approx)
Touch dry at 30 C (approx)
Hard dry at 30 C (approx)
9.
Over Coating Interval (approx.)
10.
Pot life (approx) at 30 C for two component

paints (approx).
P-2
P-4
Chlorinated rubber Zinc

Phosphpate primer
Single pack, air drying
chlorinated rubber
based medium
plasticised with
unsaponlfiable
plasticizer, plgmented
with Zic phosphate.
40%
40-50
8-10
Etch primer/ wash

primer
Two pack polyvinyl
butyral resin medium
cured with phosphoric
acid solution pogmented
with zic tetroxy
choromate.
Epoxy zinc phosphate

primer
Tow component
polyamide cured epoxy
resin medium,
pigmented with zinc
phosphate.
7-8%
8-10
8-10
40%
40-50
8-10
1.3
30 minutes
Min.: 8 hrs.
Max.: no limitation
Min : 8 hrs
Max : No limitation
Not applicable
1.2
2 hrs.
Min.: 2 hrs.
Max.: 24 hrs.
Min : 4.6 hrs
Max : 24 hrs
Not applicable
1.4
After 30 mins.
Min.: 8 hrs.
Max.: 3-6 months
Min : 8 hrs
Max : 3-6 months
8 hrs.
Page 18 of 49
P-6
PAINT MATERIALS
TABLE NO.: 6.2FINISH PAINT
S.
No
1.
Technical Name
2.
3.
4.

DFT (Dry film thickness) per coat
(approx)
Theoretical covering capacity in
M2/ coat/ litre (approx)
Welght per litre in kgs/ litre
(approx)
Overcoating interval (approx)
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
DESCRIPTION
Pot life at 30 C for two component

paints (approx).
F-2
F-3
F-6
F-7
Acrylic
polyurethane
finish paint
Two-pack
aliphatic isocynate
cured acrylic finish
paint
40%
Chlorinated
rubber
based
finish paint
Single pack
plasticised
chlorinated rubber
based medium
with chemical and
weather resistant
pigments.
40%
62%
Tow pack
polyamide cured
epoxy resin
blended with coal/
tar medium,
suitably
pigmented.
65%
30-40
40-50
100-125
100-125
10-13
8-10
5-6
5-2-6.5
1.3
1.2
1.4
1.5
1 hrs.
Overnight
30 minutes
8 hrs.
3 hrs.
Overnight
Min.: Overnight (12)

hrs.
Max.: Unlimited
Min.: Overnight
Max.: Unlimited
Min.: Overnight
Max.: 5 day
4 hrs.
48 hrs.
Min.: 24 hrs.
Max.: 5 day
6-8 hrs.
Not applicable
4-6 hrs.
4-6 hrs.
Epoxy-High build High build coaltar

finish paint
epoxy coating.
Tow- pack
polyamide/
ployamine cured
epoxy resin
medium suitable
pigmented.
Page 19 of 49
PAINT MATERIALS
TABLE NO.: 6.3 FINISH PAINTS
S.
No
1.
F-8
F-9
F-11
F-12
Technical Name
Self priming type surface

tolerant high build epoxy
coating
(Complete
rust
control coating)
Inorganic Zinc Slicate

coating
Heat resistant silicone

aluminum
paint
suitable upto 500 C
temperature
2.
A two-pack air drying

self-curing solvent
based inorganic zinc
silicate coating.
3.
4.

DFT (Dry film thickness) per coat
(approx)
Theoretical covering capacity in
M2/ coat/ litre
Welght per litre in kgs/ litre
(approx)
Overcoating interval (approx)
Two-pack epoxy resin based

suitable
pigmented
and
capable
pigmented
and
capable of adhering to
manually prepared surface
and old coating
72%
100-125
Heat
resistant
synthetic
medium
based
two
pack
aluminum
paint
suitable upto 250C
dry temperature
Heat resistant
synthetic medium
based two pack
aluminum paint
suitable upto 250C
60%
65-75
25%
20-25
20%
20-25
6.0-7.2
8-9
10-12
8-10
1.4
2.3
1.2
1.1
3 hrs.
24 hrs.
Min.: 10 hrs.
Max.: 6 months
30 min.
12 hrs.
Min.: 8 hrs. at 20C
and 50% RH.
Max.: Unlimited
4-6 hrs.
3 hrs.
12 hrs.
Min.: 16 hrs.
Max.: Unlimited
30 min.
24 hrs.
Min.: 16 hrs.
Max.: Unlimited
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
DESCRIPTION
Single pack silicone

resin based medium
with aluminum flakes.
Pot life (approx) at 30 C for two

90 min.
Not applicable
Not applicable
component paints (approx).
Temperature resistance
250 C
500 C
F-14: Specially for mulated polyamine cured coal tal epoxy suitable for-45C to 125C for application under insulation
F-15: Two pack cold curved epoxy phenolic coating suitable for 45C to 125C for application under insulation
F-16: Eoxy siloxane anser coat 738
Page 20 of 49
Notes:
1.
Covering capacity and DFT depends on method of application. Covering

capacity specified above are theoretical. Allowing the loose during the
application, minimum specified DFT should be maintained.
2.
All primers and finish coats should be cold cured and air drying unless
otherwise specified.
3.
All paints shall be applied in accordance with manufacturers instruction

for surface preparation, intervals, curing and application. The surface
preparation, quality and workmanship should be ensured.
4.
Technical data sheets for all paints shall be supplied at the time of
submission of quotations.
6.4
List of recommended manufacturers

The paint shall conform to the specifications given above and the best
quality in their products range of the manufacturers listed in Annexure-I.
7.0
PAINT SYSTEM
The paint system should vary with type of environment envisaged in and
around the plants. Three types of environment as given below are
considered for selection of paint system. The paint system is also given for
specific requirements.
Primers & finish coats covered in table nos. 7.0 to 15.0
PRIMERS
P-2
Chlorinated Rubber Zinc Phosphate Primer
P-4
Etch Primer/ Wash Primer
P-6
Epoxy Zic Phosphate Primer
FINISH COATS/ PAINTS

F-2
Acrylic- Polyurethane finish paint
F-3
Chlorinated Rubber Finish Paint
F-6
High Build Epoxy finish coating
Page 21 of 49
F-7
High Build Coal Tar epoxy coating
F-8
Self-priming surface tolerant high build epoxy

coating
F-9
Inorganic Zinc Silicate Coating.
F-11
Heat resistant Synthetic medium based

Aluminum paint.
F-12
Heat resistant Silicone Aluminum paint.
F-14
Specially formulated polyamine-cured coal for

Epoxy coating
F-15
Epoxy phenolic coating
F-16
Epoxy Siloxane Coating : Amercoat 738
Page 22 of 49
TABLE 7.1:
S. No.
PRE-ERECTION/ PRE-FABRICATION AND SHOP PRIMING FOR CARBON STEEL, LOW

TEMPERATURE CARBON STEEL & LOW ALLOY STEEL, STEEL STRUCTURE, PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT ETC.
DESIGN TEMPERATURE IN
C
SURFACE
PREPARATION
PAINT SYSTEM
7.1.1
-90 TO 4000
SSPC-SP-10
1 COAT OF F-9
7.1.2
401 To 500
SSPC-SP-10
1 COAT OF F-12
TABLE 7.2:
S.
No.
TOTAL DFT IN REMARKS

MICRONS
(MIN.)
65-75
No overcoating is
to be done
40-50
FINISH
COAT
AT SITE
REPAIR OF PRE-ERECTION/ PRE- FABRICATION AND SHOP PRIMING AFTER ERECTION/

WELDING FOR CARBON STEEL LOW TEMPERATURE CARBON STEEL & LOW ALLOY STEEL,
ITEMS IN ALL ENVIRONMENT.
7.2.1
DESIGN
TEMPERATURE IN
C
-90 TO 400
7.2.2
40 TO 500
SURFACE
PREPARATION
SSPC-SP-3
REPAIR ONLY)
SSPC-SP-10
SSPC-SP-3
REPAIR ONLY)
SSPC-SP-10
PAINT SYSTEM
TOTAL DFT IN
MICRONS (MIN.)
(FOR 1 COAT OF F-9
65-75
(FOR 2 COATS OF F-12
40-50
Page 23 of 49
REMARKS
FOR DAMAGED
AREA OF MORE
THAN 5X5 CM.
FOR DAMAGED
AREA OF MORE
THAN 5X5 CM.
TABLE 8.0:
FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR NORMAL CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT (FOR CARBON STEEL, LOW
TEMPERATURE CARBON STEEL & LOW ALLOY STEEL)
ALL NORMAL CORROSIVE AREAS SUCH AS OFF SITES EXTERNAL SURFACE OF UNINSULATED COLUMNS, VESSELS, HEAT
EXCHANGERS, BLOWERS, PIPING, PUMPS, TOWERS, COMPRESSORS, STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS, RCC CHIMNEY WITH
OR WITHOUT REFRACTORY LINE INSIDE CHIMNEY (ALL ENVIRONMENTS), EXCLUDING TANK TOPS, FLARE LINES, D.M.
PLANTS, INTERIOR OF TANKS ETC. FLARE LINES FOR NORMAL CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT ALSO TO NE PAINTED AS PER
TABLE 9.0
S.
NO.
DESIGN
TEMPERATUR
E IN C
SURFACE
PREPARATIO
N
8.1
-90 TO 15
SSPC-SP-10
REPAIR
OF
PRE-FABRICATION
PRIMER 1 COAT OF F-9 @65-75
DFT/ COAT
NONE
8.2
-14 TO 60
SSPC-SP-10
2 COATS OF F-3 @
40 DFT/ COAT
2 X 40 = 80
225
8.3
61 TO 80
SSPC-SP-10
1 COATS OF F-6 @
100 DFT/ COAT
245
8.4
81 TO 250
SSPC-SP-10
REPAIR
OF
PRE-FABRICATION
PRIMER 1 COAT OF F-9 @ 65-75
DFT/ COAT + 2 COATS OF P-2 @
40 DFT/ COAT
2 X 40 = 80
REPAIR
OF
PRE-FABRICATION
DFT/ COAT + 2 COATS OF P-6 @
40 DFT/ COAT
2 X 40 = 80
REPAIR
OF
PRE-FABRICATION
DFT/ COAT
3 COATS OF F-11 @
20 DFT/ COAT
3 X 20 = 60
125
8.5
251 TO 400
SSPC-SP-10
REPAIR
OF
PRE-FABRICATION
DFT/ COAT
2 COATS OF F-12 @
20 DFT/ COAT
2 X 20 = 40
105
8.6
401 TO 500
SSPC-SP-10
REPAIR AS PER 7.2.2
2 COATS OF F-12 @
20 DFT/ COAT
2 X 20 = 40
80
NOTE 1 :
PAINT SYSTEM
FIELD PRIMER
FINISH PAINT
TOTAL
DFT IN
MICRONS
(MIN.)
65-75
REMARKS
No over coating to be
done
follow
repair
procedure
only
on
damaged areas of preerection/ pre-fabrication
primer/ coating F-9
FOR MS CHIMNEY OR WITHOUT REFRACTORY LINING 8.3, 8.4 AND 8.5 SHALL BE FOLOWED.
Page 24 of 49
NOTE 2 :
NOTE 3 :
FOR EXTENAL SURFACE OF RCC CHMNEY: 2 COATS OF F-6 @ 100 DFT/ COAT TO OBBTAIN 2 X
100=200 SHALL BE APPLIED AFTER MAKING SURFACE PREPARATION AS PER GUIDELINES IN 1.5
WHEREVER REQUIRED S.NO. 8.3 SHALL BE USED FOR 14C TO 80C AND S.NO. 8.2 WILL BE DELETED.
Page 25 of 49
TABLE 9.0:
FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT (FOR CARBON STEEL, LOW
TEMPERATURE CARBON STEEL & LOW ALLOY STEEL)
FOR ALL CORROSIVE AREAS ABOVE GROUND WHERE H2S, SO2 FUMES OR SPILLAGES OF ACID/ ALKALI/ SALT
ARE LIKELY
TO COME IN CONTACT WITH SURFACE SUCH AS EXTERNAL SURFACE OF UNINSULATED COLUMNS, VESSELS,
HEAT
EXCHANGERS, BLOWERS, PIPING, PUMPS, TOWERS, COMPRESSORS, FLARE LINES, STRUCTURAL STEEL ETC.
S.
NO.
9.1
DESIGN
TEMPERATUR
E IN C
-90 TO 15
SURFACE
PREPARATION
PAINT SYSTEM
FIELD PRIMER
SSPC-SP-10
REPAIR OF PRE-FABRICATION
DFT/ COAT
NONE
65-75
9.2
-14 TO 80
SSPC-SP-10
DFT/ COAT + 1 COATS OF P-6
@40 DFT/ COAT
1 COATS OF F-6
@ 100
DFT/
COAT
+ 1 COAT OF F-2
@ 40
DFT/
COAT
225
9.3
81 TO 400
SSPC-SP-10
DFT/ COAT
105
9.4
401 TO 500
SSPC-SP-10
REPAIR 2S PER 7.2.2
2 COATS OF F-12
@ 20 DFT/
COAT
2 X 20 = 40
2 COATS OF F-12
@ 20 DFT/
COAT
FINISH PAINT
Page 26 of 49
TOTAL DFT IN
MICRONS (MIN.)
80
REMARKS
Repair of preerection/
pre
fabrication primer
shall
be
done
wherever damage
is observed.
Surface
preparation
is
required only for
repairing
of
damaged
preerection/
fabrication primer
TABLE 10.0:
FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR HIGHLY CORROSIVE (FOR CARBON STEEL, LOW TEMPERATURE
CARBON STEEL & LOW ALLOY STEEL) EXTERNAL SURFACES OF UNINSULATED COLUMNS,
VESSELS, HEAT EXCHANGERS, BLOWERS, PIPING PUMPS, TOWERS, COMPRESSORS, FLARE
LINES, STRUCTURE STEEL ETC.
EXPOSED TO SPILLAGE OR FUMES OF HCL H2S04, SALTY WATER IMPINGEMENT, CHLORIDE ETC.
S.
NO.
DESIGN
TEMPERATUR
E IN C
SURFACE
PREPARATION
PAINT SYSTEM
FIELD PRIMER
10.1
-90 TO 15
SSPC-SP-10
PRIMER 1 COAT OF F-9 65-75
DFT/ COAT
NONE
10.2
-14 TO 80
SSPC-SP-10
DFT/ COAT + 1 COATS OF P-6
@40 DFT/ COAT
10.3
81 TO 400
SSPC-SP-10
DFT/ COAT
10.4
401 TO 500
SSPC-SP-10
REPAIR AS PER 7.2.2
2 COATS OF F-6
@ 100
DFT/
COAT = 2 X 100=
200 + 1 COAT OF
F-2 @ 40 DFT/
COAT
2 COATS OF F-12
@ 20 DFT/
COAT
2 X 20 = 40
3 COATS OF F-12
@ 20 DFT/
COAT
2 X 20 = 40
FINISH PAINT
Page 27 of 49
TOTAL
DFT IN
MICRONS
(MIN.)
65-75
345
105
80
REMARKS
Repair of pre-erection/
fabrication primer shall be
followed. No over coating
is allowed
Surface preparation is
required only for repairing
of damaged pre-erection/
fabrication primer.
TABLE 11.0 :
FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR CARBON STEEL STORAGE TANKS (EXTERNAL) FOR ALL
ENVIRONMENTS.
S. NO.
DESIGN
SURFACE
PAINT SYSTEM
TOTAL DFT IN
REMARKS
TEMPERATURE IN
PREPARATION
MICRONS (MIN.)
FILED PRIMER
FINISH PAINT
C
1.1
EXTERNAL SHELL. WIND GIRDERS APPARATUSES, ROOF TOPS OF ALL GROUND TANK INCLUDING TOP SIDE OF
FLOATING ROOF
OF OPEN TANK AS WELL AS COVERED FLOATING ROOF AND ASSOCIATED STRUCTURAL WORK
ROLLING AND STATIONARY LADDERS,
SPIRAL STAIRWAYS, HAND TAILS FOR ALL ENVIRONMENTS FOR GRUDE
OIL, LDO, HSD, ATF KEROSENE, GASOLINE, MOTOR SPIRIT, DM
WATER, FIREWATER, RAW WATER, POTABLE WATER, ACIDS,
ALKALIS SOLVENTS AND CHEMICALS ETC.
F-6 should be
11.1.1 -14 TO 80
SSPC-SP-10
1 COAT OF F-9 @ 1 COATS OF F-6 285
suitable
for
65-75
DFT/ @ 100
DFT/
occasional water
COAT + 1 COATS COAT + 2 COATS
immersion
F-2 @ 40
OF P-6 @40 OF
DFT/ COAT
DFT/ COAT
65 X 40 = 105
2 X 40 = 80
11.1.2 81 TO 500
SSPC-SP-10
1 COAT OF F-9 @ 2 COATS OF F-12 105
65-75
DFT/ @ 20 DFT/
COAT
COAT
2 X 20 = 40
11.2
EXTERNAL SURFACE OF BOTTOM PLATE (SOIL SIDE) FOR ALL STORAGE TANKS.
F7
should
be
11.2
-14 TO 80
SSPC-SP-10
1 COAT OF F-9 @ 3 COATS OF F - 7 365
suitable
for
65-75
DFT/ @ 100 DFT/
immersion service
COAT
COAT
of the products
3 X 100 = 300
given.
Page 28 of 49
TABLE 12.0 :
FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR CARBON STEEL AND ALLOY STORAGE TANK: (INTERNAL)
S. NO.
DESIGN TEMPERATURE IN
SURFACE PREPARATION
TOTAL DFT IN
REMARKS
PAINT SYSTEM
C
MICRONS (MIN.)
FILED PRIMER
FINISH PAINT
INTERNAL SURFACE OF UNDERSIDE OF FLOATING ROOF, INTERNAL STRUCTURAL OF CONE ROOF, BOTTOM PLATE, ROOF STRUCTURE,
STEEL, LADDERS SUPPORTS FOR STORING GRUIDE OIL, LDO AND HSD (EXCLUDING WHITE OIL PRODUCTS)
F7 should be suitable for
12.1
-14 TO 80
SSPC-SP-10
1 COAT OF F-9 @ 65- 3 COATS OF F-7 @ 100 365
immersion service of the
DFT/ COAT
75 DFT/ COAT
products given.
3 X 100 = 300
12.2
BARE SHEEL OF INSIDE FLOATING ROOF TANK AND CONE ROOF TANK FOR PRODUCTS MENTIONED IN 12.1
12.2.1
-14 TO 80
SSPC-SP-10
PHOSPHATING
20
2 COATS OF @10
TREATMENT
WITH 2 X 10 = 20
PHOSPHATING
CHEMICALS
(2
COATS)
12.3
FLOATING CONE ROOF TANKS FOR PETROLEUM PRODUCTS SUCH AS ATF, GASOLINE, NAPHTHA, KEROSENE, MOTOR SPIRIT,
INSIDE
OF BOTTOM PLATE, UNDERSIDE OF FLOATING ROOF AND SHELL ABOVE MAXIMUM LIQUID LEVEL AND STRUCTURAL STEEL ,
LADDERS ETC.
F-6 should be suitable for
12.3.1
-14 TO 80
SSPC-SP-10
1 COAT OF F-9 @ 65- 3 COATS OF F-6 @ 100 365
immersion
service
of
DFT/ COAT
75 DFT/ COAT
petroleum produce like
3 X 100 = 300
ATF, Kerosene, petrol etc.
12.4
12.4.1
BARE SHELL OF INSIDE OF FLOATING CONE ROOF TANKS FOR PRODUCTS MENTIONED IN 12.3
-14 TO 80
SSPC-SP-10
1 COAT OF F-9 @ 65- NONE
75 DFT/ COAT
65-75
No over coating is allowed

same as per pre-erection
primer, if any
12.5
INTERNAL PROTECTION IF FIXED ROOF TYPE STORAGE TANKS FOR POTABLE WATER: INSIDE OF SHELL, UNDER SIDE OF ROOF AND ROOF STRUCTURE
INSIDE SURFACE BOTTOM PLATE AND STRURAL STEEL WORKS, LADDERS, WALKWAYS, PLATFORMS ETC.
12.5.1
-14 TO 80
SSPC-SP-10
F-6 shall be suitable for
2 COAT OF F-6 @ 40 2 COATS OF F-6 @ 100 280
immersion service.
DFT/ COAT
DFT/ COAT
2 X 40 = 80
2 X 100 = 200
12.6
D. M. (DEMINERALISED WATER) AND HYDROCHLORIC ACID (HCL): INTERNAL SHELL, BOTTOM PLATE AND ALL ACCESSORIES
12.6.1
-14 TO 80
SSPC-SP-10
EBONITE RUBBER LINING AS PER SMMS SPECIFICATION 6-06-204
12.7
EG TANKS (INTERNAL SHELL, BOTTOM PLATE ROOF AND ALL ACCESSORIES)
12.7.1
ALL
SSPC-SP-10
3 COATS VINYL CHLORIDE CO-POLYMER 225
AMERCOAT 23 @ 75 / COAT
12.8
INSIDE PONTOON AND INSIDE OF DOUBLE DECK OF ALL FLOATING ROOFS.
12.8.1
-14 TO 80
SSPC-SP-3
1 COAT OF F-8 @ 1 COATS OF F-6 @ 100 200
100 DFT/ COAT
DFT/ COAT
1 X 100 = 100
12.9
INTERNAL SURFACE OF AMINE & SOUR WATER STORAGE TANKS
12.9.1
-14 TO 80
SSPC-SP-10
1 COAT OF F-9 @ 65- 2 COATS OF F-15 @ 75 215-225
75 DFT/ COAT
DFT/ COAT
2 X 40 = 80
2 X 75 = 150
Page 29 of 49
TABLE 13.0 :
S. NO.
13.1
13.1.1
13.1.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.2.1
13.2
13.2.1
13.3
13.3.1
13.3.2
COATING SYSTEM FOR EXTERNAL SIDE OF UNDERGROUND CARBON STEEL PLANT

PIPING AND TANKS
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
SURFACE PREPARATION
PAINT SYSTEM
IN C
PRIMER
FINISH PAINT
CARBON STEEL PLANT PIPING (UNDERGROUND)
YARD COATING
25 TO 60
SSPC-SP-10
1
COAT
OF 4mm THICK COALTAR
SYNTHETIC FAST COATING WRAPPING
DRYING
PRIMER AS PER AWWA-C-203
TYPE-B AS PER IN 2 LAYER OF EACH
AWWA-C-203 (1991) 2mm THICKNESS
OVER THE DITCH COATING
25 Tto 60
SSPC-SP-10
1
COAT
OF 2
LAYERS
OF
SYNTHETIC FAST COALTAR
BASED
DRYING
PRIMER TAPE COATING AS
TYPE-B AS PER PER AWWA-C-203 &
AWWA-C-203 (1991) AS PER SMMS EIL
SPEC. 6-06-203-REV.2
CARBON STEEL PLANT PIPING (UNDERGROUND)
61 TO 400
SSPC-SP-10
1 COAT OF F-9 @ NONE
65-75 DFT/ COAT
EXTERNAL SIDE OF UNINSULATED UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANKS:
40 TO 80
SSPC-SP-10
1 COAT OF F-9 @ 3 COATS OF F-7 @
65-75 DFT/ COAT
100 DFT/ COAT
3 X 100 = 300
-90 TO 41
SSPC-SP-10
1 COAT OF F-9 @ NONE
81 TO 400 c
65-75 DFT/ COAT
1 COAT OF
NONE
AMERCOAT 738 @
250 DFT/ COAT
Page 30 of 49
TOTAL DFT IN
MICRONS (MIN.)
4mm
4 mm
65-75
365
65-75
250
REMARKS
CTE coating shall

confirm to 120/ 5 as
per BS: 4164
TABLE 14.0 :
S. NO.
14.1
14.1.1
14.1.2
14.2
14.2.1
14.2.2
PAINTING UNDER INSULATION FOR INSULATED (HOT COLD SAFETY CARBON STEEEL,
LOW ALLOY STEEL, LOW TEMPERATURE CARBON STEEL & STAINLESS STEEL PIPING,
STORAGE TANKS EQUIPMENTS IN ALL ENVIRONMENT
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
SURFACE PREPARATION
PAINT SYSTEM
TOTAL DFT IN
IN C
MICRONS (MIN.)
PRIMER
FINISH PINTS
INSULATED CARBON STEEL, LOW ALLOY STEEL AND LTCS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT & TANKS
-4 TO 125
SSPC-SP-10
REPAIR OF PRE- 2 COATS OF F-14 @ 315
FABRICATION
125 DFT/ COAT
PRIMER F-9 @ 65- 2 X 125 = 250 OR 3
75 DFT
COATS OF F-15= 3 X
80=240
OPERATING
SSPC-SP-10
REPAIR OF PRE- 3 COATS OF F-12 @ 105-115
TEMPERATURE 45 TO
FABRICATION
20 DFT/ COAT
125 C BUT DESIGN
PRIMER F-9 @ 65- 3 X 20 = 60
TEMPERATURE 126-400
75 DFT
C
INSULATED STAINLESS STEEL INCLUDING ALLOY-20- PIPING
BELOW 0 C TO ALL ALUMINUM SHEETING WITH ALUMINUM FOIL AND CHLORIDE FREE MINERAL SEALANT
MINUS TEMPRATURE
CONTAINING BARIUM CHROMATE SHALL BE APPLIED
2 COATS OF F-14 @ 250
0 TO 120
SSPC-SP-10
(
15-25 NONE
SURFACE PROFILE)
125 DFT/ COAT
2 X 125 = 250 OR 3
COATS OF F-15= 3 X
80 = 240
14.2.3
121 TO 500
SSPC-SP-10
NONE
14.2.4
501 TO 1000
SSPC-SP-10
NONE
14.2.5
CYCLIC SERVICE-196 TO
480 EXCEPTING 45 TO
120
SSPC-SP-10
NONE
14.3
REMARKS
For other temprature

ranges no painting is
required
under
insulation.
If
the
piping
&
equipments are already
erected then surface
shall be prepared by
cleaning with emery
paper and wash/ flush
with chloride free DM
water
followed
by
wiping with organic
solvent
3 COATS OF F-12 @
20 DFT/ COAT
3 X 20 = 60
1
COAT
OF
AMERCOAT 738 @
150 DFT/ COAT
60
No
pre
erection
primer to be applied
150
Only Amorcoat 738

from
Amoron
is
available for this
temperature range.
1
COAT
OF
AMERCOAT 738 @
150 DFT/ COAT
150
NO PAINTING REQUIRED FOR INSULATED MONEL, IN COLOY AND NICKEL LINES
Page 31 of 49
TABLE 15.0 :
S. NO.
15.1
15.2
DESIGN
TEMPERATURE IN C
Upto 65
Upto 65
NON FERROUS AND
BRASS
TUBE
SHEETS
TABLE 16.0
S. NO.
16.1
16.2
INTERNAL PROTECTION OF CARBON STEEL WATER BOXES AND TUBE SHEETS OF

COOLERS/ CONDENSERS WATER BOXES, CHANNELS, PARTITION PLATES, END
COVERS AND TUBE SHEETS ETC.
SURFACE PREPARATION
SSPC-SP-10
SSPC-SP-10
PAINT SYSTEM
PRIMER
FINISH PAINT
1 COATS OF F-6 @ 2 COATS OF F-7 @
40 DFT/ COAT
125 DFT/ COAT
2 x 125 = 250
1 COATS OF P-4 @ 2 COATS OF F-7 @
8 DFT/ COAT
125 DFT/ COAT
1 COATS OF P-6 @ 2 x 125 = 250
40 DFT/ COAT
TOTAL DFT IN
MICRONS (MIN.)
290
300
REMARKS
For C. S.
FOR
FERROUS
SURFACE
NON
FIELD PAINTING SYSTEM FOR GI TOWERS/ NON-FERROUS TUBE SHEET
DESIGN
TEMPERATURE IN C
Upto 65
Upto 65
NON FERROUS AND
BRASS
TUBE
SHEETS
SURFACE PREPARATION
SSPC-SP-10
SSPC-SP-10
PAINT SYSTEM
FILED PAINT
FINISH PAINT
1 COATS OF P-4 @ 2 COATS OF F-2 @ 40
8-10 DFT/ COAT + DFT/ COAT
1 COAT OF P-6 @ 2 x 40 = 250
4 DFT/ COAT
1 COATS OF P-4 @ 2 COATS OF F-7 @
8 DFT/ COAT
125 DFT/ COAT
1 COATS OF P-6 @ 2 x 125 = 250
40 DFT/ COAT
Page 33 of 49
TOTAL DFT IN
MICRONS (MIN.)
130
300
REMARKS
SHADE AS PER
DEFENCE
REQUIREMENTS
17.0
STORAGE
17.1
All paints and painting materials shall be stored only in rooms to be

arranged by contractor and approved by Engineer-in-Charge for the
purpose. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent fire. The
storage building shall preferably be separate from adjacent building. A
signboard bearing the words PAINT STORAGE NO NAKED LIGHTHIGHLY INFLAMMABLE shall be clearly displayed outside.
18.0
COLOUR CODE FOR PIPING

For identification of pipeline, the colour code as per Table 18.1 shall be
used. Paint material for color-coding shall be as specified in this standard
in clause- 6.0.
18.1
SR. NO.
18.1.1
18.1.2
18.1.3
Colour coding scheme for pipe, equipment, machinery & structure:

DESCRIPTION
ALL KINDS OF WATER

DRINKING WATER
DE-MINERALISED WATER
COOLING WATER
BOILER FEED WATER
CONDENSATE
QUENCH WATER
WASH WATER
PROCESS WATER
PROCESS WATER
FIRE WATER
SEA WATER
STEAM
VERY HIGH PRESSURE STEAM
(VHP)
HIGH PRESSURE STEAM (SH)
MEDIUM PRESSURE STEAM
(SH)
LOW PRESSURE STEAM (SL)
DILUTION STEAM/ PURGE
STEAM
COMPRESSED AIR
PLANT AIR
INSTRUMENT AIR
NITROGEN
OXYGEN
CO2
GROUND
COLOUR
SECOND
COLOUR
BAND
FIRST
COLOUR
BAND
Sea Gree
-do-do-do-do-do-do-do-doFire red
Sea Green
French Blue
Gulf Red
French Blue
Gulf Red
Light Brown
Dark Grey
Ganary Yellow
Oxide Red
Crimson Red
White
Signal Red
Signal Red
-
Aluminiumto
IS2339
-do-do-do-do-
Signal Red
French Blue
Gulf Red
Canary Yellow
Grey
Sky Blue
-do-doCanary Yello
-do-do-
Signal Red
Silver Grey
French Blue
Black
White
Light Grey
Canary Yellow
Page 34 of 49
SR. NO.
18.1.4
18.1.5
18.1.6
DESCRIPTION
GROUND COLOUR
FIRST
COLOUR
BAND
SECOND
COLOUR
BAND
GASES
FUEL GAS AND SOUR GAS
CHARGE GAS
RESIDUE GAS, LPG
ACETYLENE
SWEET GAS
Canary Yellow
-do-do-do-do-
Grey
Signal Red
Oxide Red
Service Brown
Grey
Dark Violet
French Blue
White
-
ACIDS AND CHEMICALS

SULFURIC ACID
NITRIC ACID
HYDROCHLORIC ACID
ACETIC ACID
CAUSTIC
CHLORINE
DARK Violet
-do-do-dosmoke Grey
Canary Yellow
Briliant Green
French Blue
Signal Red
Silver Grey
Light Orange
Dark Violet
Light Orange
-do-do-do-do-
HYDRO CARBONS
NAPTHAS
PROPYLENE
PROPYLENE C.G. (LIQ)
ETHYLENE GLYCOL
ETHYLENE DICHLORIDE
BENZENE
BUTADIENE
ETHANE(LIQ)
PROPYLENE(LIQ)
ETHYLENE(LIQ)
TAR
AROMATIC GASOLINE
METHANOL (LIQ)
PYROLYSIS GASOLINE
MIXED C4(LIQ)
LPG(LIQ)
KEROSENE
DIESEL OIL (WHITE)
DIESEL OIL (BLACK)
Dark Admiralty Grey

-do-do-do-do-do-doDark Admiralty Grey
-do-do-do-do-do-do-do-doLight Brown
-do-do-
Brilliant Green
-do-do-doGulf Red
Canary Yellow
Black
Light Grey
Signal Red
Light Grey
Signal Grey
Brilliant Green
White
Brilliant Green
Signal Green
Brilliant Gren
-do-do-
Black
Smoke Grey
Gulf Red
French Blue
Black
Black
Brilliant Green
Canary Yellow
Gulf Red
Black
Light Brown
Dark Violet
-
18.2
The colour code scheme is intended for identification of the individual

group of the pipeline. The system of colour coding of a ground colour and
colour bands superimposed on it.
18.3
Ground colours as given in Table 18.1 shall be applied throughout the

entire length for uninsulated pipes, on the metal cladding & on surfaces
covered by Clause 2.2.2, ground colour coating of minimum 2m length or
of adequate length not to be mistaken as colour band shall be applied at
places requiring colour bands. Colour band(s) shall be applied at the
following location.
a.
At battery limit points

Page 35 of 49
b.
Intersection points & change of direction points in piping ways.
c.
Other points, such as midway of each piping way, near valves,

junction joints of services appliances, walls, on either side of pipe
culverts.
d.
For zong stretch/ xard piping at 50M interval.
e.
At start and terminating points.
18.4
Identification Sign
18.4.1
Flow direction shall be indicated by an arrow in the location stated in Para

a,b,c & d and as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
18.4.2
Colours of arrows shall be black or white and in contrast to the colour on

which they are superimposed.
18.4.3
Product names shall be marked at pump inlet, outlet and battery limit in a
suitable size as approved by Engineer-in-charge.
18.4.4
Size of arrow shall be either of those given in 18.5.
18.5
Colour Bands
18.5.1
As a rule minimum width of colour band shall conform to the following

table:
Nominal Pipe Size
3 NB and below
Above 3 NB upto 6 NB
Above 8 NB upto 12 OD
Above 12 OD
Width : L(mm)
25mm
50mm
75mm
100mm
Note: For insulated pipes, nominal pipe size means the outside diameter
of insulation.
Nominal pipe size figures are to be inches.
18.5.2
Colour band(s) shall be arranged in the sequence shown in Table 18.1

and the sequence follows the direction of flow. The relative proportional
width of the first colour band to the subsequent bands shall be 4:1,
minimum width of any band shall be as per Clause 18.5.1.
18.5.3
Whenever it is required by the Engineer-in-charge to indicate that a

pipeline carries a hazardous material, a hazard marking of diagonal strips
Page 36 of 49
of black and golden yellow as epr IS:2379 shall be painted on the ground
colour.
18.6
Wherever it is required by the Engineer-in-charge to indicate that a

pipeline carries a hazardous material, a hazard marking of diagonal strips
of black and golden yellow as per IS:2379 shall be painted on the ground
colour.
19.0
IDENTIFICATION OF VESSELS, PIPING ETC.
19.1
Equipment number shall be stencilled in black or white on each vessel,

column, equipment & machinery (insulated or uninsulated) after painting.
Line number n black or white shall be stencilled on all the pipelines of
more than one location as directed by Engineer-in-charge, size of letters
printed shall be as below :
Column & Vessels
Pump, Compressor and other machinery
Piping
-
19.2
150mm(high)
50mm (high)
40-150mm
Identification of storage tanks

The storage tanks shall be marked as detailed in the drawing.
20.0
PAINTING FOR CIVIL DEFENCE REQUIREMENTS
20.1
Following items shall be painted for camouflaging if required by the client.

a.
b.
c.
d.
20.2
All columns
All tanks in offsites
Large vessels
Spheres
Two coats of selected finishing paint as per defence requirement shall be

applied in a particular pattern as per 20.3 and as per the instructions of
Engineer-in-charge.
Page 37 of 49
20.3
Method of Camouflaging
20.3.1
Disruptive painting for camouflaging shall be done in three colours in the

ratio of 5:3:2 (all matt finish).
Dark Green
5:
Light Green
3:
Dark Medium Brown

2
20.3.2
The patches should be asymmetrical and irregular.
20.3.3
The patches should be inclined at 30 degree to 60 degree to the

horizontal.
20.3.4
The patches should be continuous where two surfaces meet at an angle.
20.3.5
The patches should not coincide with corners.
20.3.6
Slits and holes shall be painted and dark shades.
20.3.7
Width of patches should be 1 to 2 meters.
21.0
21.1
All painting materials including primers and thinners brought to site by

contractor for application shall be procured directly from manufacturers as
per specifications and shall be accompanied by manufacturers test
certificates. Paint formulations without certificates are not acceptable.
21.2
Engineer-in-Charge at his discretion, may call for tests for paint

formulations. Contractor shall arrange to have such tests performed
including batchwise test of wet paints for physical & chemical analysis. All
costs there shall be borne by the contractor.
21.3
The painting work shall be subject to inspection by Engineer-in-Charge at

all times. In particular, following stagewise inspection will be performed
and contractor shall offer the work for inspection and approval of every
stage before proceeding with the next stage. The record of inspection
shall ne maintained in the registers. Stages of inspection are as follows:
a.
b.
c.
Surface preparation
Primer application
Each coat of paint
Page 38 of 49
In addition to above, record should inculde type of shop primer already

applied on equipment e. g. Redd oxide zinc chromate or zinc chromate or
Red lead primer etc.
Any defect noticed during the various stages of inspection shall be
rectified by the contractor to the entire satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge
before proceeding further. Irrespective of the inspection, repair and
approval at intermidiate stages of work. Contractor shall be responsible for
making good any defects found during final inspection/ guarantee period/
defect liability period as defined in general condition of contract. Dry film
thickness (DFT) shall be checked and recorded after application of each
coat and extra coat of paint should be applied to make-up the DFT
specified without any extra cost to owner, the extra cost should have prior
approval of Engineer-in-Charge.
21.4
Primer Application
After surface preparation the primer should be applied to cover the
crevices, corners, sharp edges etc. in the presence of inspector
nominated by Engineer-in-Charge.
21.5
The shades of successive coats should be slightly different in colour in

order to ensure application of individual coats, the thickness of each coat
and complete coverage should be checked as per provision of this
specification. This should be approved by Engineer-in-Charge before
application of successive coats.
21.6
The contractor shall provide standard thickness measurement instrument

with appropriate ranges(s) for measuring.
Dry film thickness of each coat, surface profile guage for checking of
surface profile in case of blast cleaning. Holiday directors and pinhole
detector and positector whenever required for checking in case of
immersion conditions.
21.7
Prior to application of paints on surface of chimneys the thickness of the

individual coat shall be checked by application of each coat of same paint
on M. S test panel. The thickness of paint on test panel shall be
determined by using guage such as Elkomere. This thickness of each
coat shall be checked as per provision of this specification. This shall be
approved by Engineer-in-Charge before application of paints on surface of
chimney.
21.8
At the discretion of Engineer-in-Charge, the paint manufacturer must

provide the expert technical service at site as and when required. This
service should be free of cost and without any obligation to the owner, as
Page 39 of 49
it would be in the interest of the manufacturer to ensure that both surface

preparation and application are carried out as per their recommendations.
21.9
Final inspection shall include measurement of paint dry film thickness.

Adhesion Holiday detection check of finish and workmanship. The
thickness should be measured at as many points/ locations as decided by
Engineer-in-Charge and shall be within + 10% of the dry thickness,
specified in the specifications.
21.10
The contractor shall arrange for spot checking of paint materials for Sp.
Gr., flow time (ford cup) and spreading rate.
22.0
GUARANTEE
22.1
The contractor shall guarantee that the chemical and physical properties
of paint materials used are in accordance with the specifications contained
herein/ to be provided during execution of work.
22.2
The contractor shall produce test report from manufacturer regarding the
quality of the particular batch of paint supplied. The Engineer-in-Charge
shall have the right the test wet samples of paint at random, for quality of
same as stipulated in clause 11 above. Batch test report of manufacturers
for each batch paint supplied shall be made available by the contractor.
23.0
QUALIFICATION CRITERIA OF PAINTING CONTRACTOR

Painting contractor who is awarded any job for EIL, projects under this
standard must have necessary equipments, machinery, tool and tackles
for surface preparation, paint application and inspection. The contractor
must have qualified trained and experienced surface preparation, paint
applicator, inspector, and supervisors. The contractor supervisor,
inspector surface perpetrator and paint applicator must be conversant with
the standards referred in this specification the contractors capacity,
capability and competency requirements for the job shall be quantified in
the tender document and shall be assessed by an EIL team before
awarding any job.
Page 40 of 49
24.0
PROCEDURE FOR APPROVAL OF NEW COATING MATERIALS AND

MANUFACTURERS
Following procedure is recommended to be followed for approval of new
manufacturers.
24.1
The manufacturer should arrange testing of the inorganic zinc silicate

coating materials as per the list of tests given in para 24.5 below from one
of the reputed Government laboratories.
24.2
Samples of coating should be submitted to the Govt. laboratory in sealed

containers with batch no. and test certificate on regular format of
manufacturers testing laboratory. The sampling shall be certificate and
sealed by a citifying agency.
24.3
All test panels should be prepared by govt. testing agency coloured

photographs of test panels should be taken before and after the test
should be enclosed alongwith test report.
Sample batch. No. and manufacturers test certificate should ne enclosed
alongwith the report. Test reports contain details of observation and
rusting if any, as per the testing code. Suggested government laboratories
are:
RRL, Hayderabad
HBTI, Kanpur
DMSRDE, Kanpur
IIT, Mumbai
BIS Laboratory
UDCT, Mumbai
RITES, Calcutta
PDIL
24.4
Manufacturers should intimate the company, details of sample submitted

for testing name of Govt. testing agency, date, contact personnel of the
Govt. testing agency. At the end of the test the manufacturer should
submit the test report to the company for approval. The manufacturer(s)
shall be qualified based on the result of these tests and other assessment
and the Companys decision in this regard shall be final and binding on the
manufacturer.
Page 41 of 49
24.5
24.6
Tests required for evaluation of acceptance of coating materials for

offshore application.
Test
ASTM Test Method
Density
Dipping properties
D 1475
D 823
Film Characteristics
Drying time
Flexibility
Hardness
D 1640
D 1737/ D 522
D 3363
Adhesion
Abrasion resistance
DFT/ Coat
Storage Stability
D 2197
D 968/ D 1044
AS PER SSPC GUIDELINES
D 1849
Resistance to
Humidity for 2000 hrs.
Salt Spray for 2000 hrs.
Accelerated Weathering
% Zn in DFT
D 2247
B 117
D 822
G 53
Coating system for panel test shall be decided after discussion with
MECON.
Page 42 of 49
ANNEXURE-I
LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS
Indian Vendors
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
Asian Paints(I) Ltd.

Berger Paints Ltd.
Goodlass Nerlolac Paints Ltd.
Jenson And Nicholson Paint Ltd & chokuGu Jenson & Nicholson Ltd.
Shalimar Paints Ltd.
Sigma Coating, Mumabai
CDC Carboline Ltd.
Premier Products Ltd.
Coromandel Paints & Chemicals Ltd.
Anupam Enterprises
Grand Polycoats
Bombay Paints Ltd.
Vanaprabha Esters & Glycer, Mumbai
Sunil Paints and Varnishes Pvt. Ltd.
Courtaulds Coating & Sealants India (Pvt.) Ltd.
Mark-chem Incorporated, Mumbai (for phosphating chemicals only)
VCM Polyurethane Paint (for polyurethane Paint only)
FOREIGN VENDORS FOR OVERSEAS PRODUCTS

1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
Sigma Coating, Singapore

Ameron, USA
Kansai Paint, Japan
Hempel Paint, USA
Valspar Corporation, USA
Courtaulds Coating, UK.
Note: This list subjected to revision based fresh approval which will be intimated to
PDD/ Vendor Cell.
Page 43 of 49
LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS PRODUCTS

S.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
MANUFACTURER
NAME
P2
CHLORINATED
RUBBER Zp PRIMER
ASIAN PAINTS (I)

LTD.
BARGER PAINT LTD.
ASIOCHL OR HB. ZN.PH

PRIMER RO PC 168
LINSOL HIGH BUILD ZP
PRIMER
-
APCONYL WP 636
(PC 335)
BISON WASH
PRIMER
AMERCOAT 187
JENSOLAC
CHLORINATED RUBBER
HB ZN.PH. PRIMER
AMERON/
GODDLASS
NEROLAC PAINTS
LTD.
JENSON &
NICHOSON PAINTS
LTD. AND CHOKUGU
JENSON
NICHOLSON
SHALIMAR PAINTS
LTD.
6.
SIGMA COATING
7.
CDC CARBOLINE
LTD.
PRIMER PRODUCTS
LTD.
8.
9.
10.
CORAMANDEL
PAINTS CHEMICALS
LTD.
ANUPAM
ENTERPRISES
P4
ETCH PRIMER/
WASH PRIMER
P6
EPOXY ZINC PH.
PRIMER
F9
INORGANIC ZINC
SILICATE PRIMER/
COATING
APCOCIL 605
APCODUR HB.
RO.ZP-PC433
EPILUX 610
ZINC ANODE 304
AMERCOAT 71
DIMET COTE-9
J & N ETCH PRIMER
EPILAC ZINC
PHOSPHATE
PRIMER
CHIOROKOTE ZINC
PHOSPHATE PRIMER
GREY
SIGMA NUCOL
UNICOAT 7321
-
TUFFKOTE ETC
PRIMER
EPIGUARD 4 ZINC
PHOSPHATE
PRIMER GREY
COLTURE CM
PRIMER 7412
CARBOLINE 893
TUFFKOTE ZILICATE
TL
P-15/3A
U-16/92
COROCLORE CR HB.
ZN. PH. PRIMER
CPC WASH PRIMER
ANUCHLOR ZP PRIMER
ANUPRIME 291
COROPEX EPOXY
ZH. PH. HIGH BILD
PRIMER
ANUPAM
ANILICOR A-EZP500
SIGMA COVER
PRIMER (7413)
-
Page 44 of 49
SIGMASIL MC (7568)
CARBOZINC 11
U17/ 92 ETHYL
SILICATE INORGANIC
ZINC
-
LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS PRODUCTS (Contd)

S.
NO.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
MANUFACTURERS
NAME
GRAND POLYCOATS
BOMBAY PAINTS
LTD. THEMPEL
MAKINE PAINTS
VANAPRABHA
ESTERS &
GLYCERIDES,
SUNIL PAINTS AND
VARNISHED PVT.
LTD.
COURTAULDS
COATING LTD.
MARK-CHEM
INCOPORATED,
(FOR PHOSPHATING
CHEMICAL ONLY)
VCM
POLYURETHANE
PAINTS (FOR POLY
EURETHANE PAINTS
ONLY)
JOTUN PAINTS
P2
P4
P6
F9
GP CHILOROPRIME 601
HEMPA TEX HIGHBUILD
4633
GP PPRIME 401
PENTOLITE WASH
PRIMER 8520
HEMPELS SHOP
PRIMER E-1530
GALVASOL 1570
VEGCHLOR HB PRIMER
1143
VEG WASH PRIMER

1181
VEGPOX 1241 Z/
P
SUNCHLOR HB ZINC
PHOSPHATE PRIMER
SUN WASH
SUNPOXY ZINC
PHOSPHATE
PRIMER
INTERGARD 251
INTERZINC
RUST PREVENTIVE
LIQUID DRSAIO
EPOXY CQ
SPECIAL ZINC
PHOSPHATE
PRIMER
KCC PRODUCTS
(KOREA)
JOTACOTE 2
EZ 180(N)
Page 45 of 49
LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS PRODUCTS (Contd.)

S.
No.
1.
2.
3.
MANUFACTURER
NAME
ASIAN PAINTS (I)

LTD.
BARGER PAINT LTD.
F2
ACRYLIC-POLY
YURETHANE FINISH
PAINT
APCOTHANE CF76 (PC
1109)
BARGER THANE
ENAMEL (81)
AMERON/
GODDLASS
NEROLAC PAINTS
LTD.
JENSON &
NICHOSON PAINTS
LTD. AND CHOKUGU
JENSON
NICHOLSON
SHALIMAR PAINTS
LTD.
AMERCOAT 450GL
6.
SIGMA COATING
7.
CDC CARBOLINE
LTD.
PRIMER PRODUCTS
LTD.
CORAMANDEL
PAINTS CHEMICALS
ANUPAM
ENTERPRISES
GRAND POLYCOATS
4.
5.
8.
9.
10.
11.
F3
CHLORINATED
RUBBER FINISH
PAINT
ASIOCHLOR CF 621
(PC 161)
LINOSOL
CHLORINATED
RUBBER HB
COATING
AMERCOAT 515
F6
HIGH BUILD
FINISH PAINT
APCODUR HB
COATING 9466
EPILUX 04 AND 78
HB EPOXY
COATING
F7
HIGH BUILD COAL
TAR EPOXY
COATING
APCODUR CF 300
EPILUX 555
AMER COAT 383

HS
AMERCOAT 78 HB
J & N 993 HB
POLYURETHANE
FINISH PAINT.
JENSON HB
CHLORINATED
RUBBER FINISH
PAINT
EPILAC 981
ENAMEL
EPILAC
SOLVENTLESS COAT
TAR EPOXY
COATING
SHALITHANE FINISH
CHLORKOTE FINISH
EPIGARD KL
FINISH
SIGMADOUR HS
SEMIGLOSS 7530
CARBOLINE 132
SIGMA NUCOL
FINISH 7308
-
SIGMA COVER
CM 7456
CARBOLINE 191
BIPIGARDS BLACK
HB COAL TAR EPOXY
COATING
COLTURIET TCN 300
CARBOMASTIC-14
U3/ 92 POLYURETHANE
CR-71 FINISH PAINT
COROCLORE CR
FINISHING
ANUCHLOR HB
ENAMEL
GP CHILOROGAURD
631
42B/ 4A HIGH
BUILD EPOXY
COROPEX EPOXY
HB COATING
DURACOAT-6000
350B/ 3A, COAL TAR

EPOXY COATING
COROPEX EPOXY
COAL TAR COATING
COROGUARD
GP GUARD HP
234
POLYGUARD GE
ANUTHANE ENAMEL
GP COAT 131, 132
GP BOND 141
Page 46 of 49

S.
NO.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
MANUFACTURERS
NAME
BOMBAY PAINTS
LTD./ PAINTS
VANAPRABHA
ESTERS &
GLYCERIDES,
SUNIL PAINTS AND
VARNISHED PVT.
LTD.
COURTAULDS
COATING LTD.
MARK-CHEM
INCOPORATED,
(FOR PHOSPHATE
PAINTS ONLY)
VCM
POLYURETHANE
PAINTS (FOR POLY
EURETHANE PAINTS
ONLY)
JOTUN PAINTS
KCC PRODUCTS
(KOREA)
F2
F3
F6
F7
PENTATHANE FP 4510
HEMPATEX HIBUILD
4633
VEGCHLOR FP 3140
HEMPADUR HIGH
BUILD 5520
VEGPOX- 3265
VEGPOX 3562
HEMPADUR 1510
SUNTHANE (ALIPHATIC)
SUNCHLOR HB CR
COATING
LPOXY HB PS
901
LPOXY BLACK P. S.
551
INTERTHANE
INTEGARD EM
SERIES
INTERTUF JXA 006/

007/ 010
PENGUARD
KOPOX TOPCOAT
HB ET 5740
JOTAGUARD 85
EH 173
VEGTHANE FP 3641
VEGPOX 4265
PIPCOTHANE
ALIPHATIC
POLYURETHANE
FINISH PAINT
HARDTOP AS
Page 47 of 49

S.
NO.
MANUFACTURERS NAME
F-8
EPOXY MASTIC COATING
SURFACE TOLERANT
1.
ASIAN PAINTS (I) LTD.
APCODOR CF 640
2.
BARGER PAINT LTD.
PROTECTOMASTIC
3.
AMERLOCK 400
4.
AMERON/ GODDLASS
NEROLAC PAINTS LTD.
JENSON & NICHOSON PAINTS
LTD. AND CHOKUGU JENSON
NICHOLSON
5.
SHALIMAR PAINTS LTD.
EPIPLUS 56
6.
SIGMA COATING
SIGMA ETPC ALUMINUM
7.
8.
CDC CARBOLINE LTD.

PRIMER PRODUCTS LTD.
9.
CORAMANDEL PAINTS
CHEMICALS
ANUPAM ENTERPRISES
CARBOMASTIC-15
HB EPOXY MATIC 150B/
150A
-
10.
ANUMASTIC-102
F-11
HEAT RESISTANCE
SYNTHETIC MEDIUM
ALUMINUM PAINT
ASIAN HR ALUMINUM
PAINT (PC 300)
FERROLOT HR
ALUMINUM PANT
F-12
HEAT RESISTANCE SILICON
AL. PAINT
HR SILICON ALUMINUM PAINT
(PC 189)
BARGER HEAT RISISTANT
SILICON ALUMINUM PAINT
AMERCOAT 878
FERROTECT
SYNTHETIC RUBBER
H/R ALUMINUM PAINT
4000
HEAT RESISTING
LUSTROL ALUMINUM
HIGH TEMPERATURE
RESISTANT EPOXY
SUSTEM UPTO 200 C
4062
CARBOLINE 1248
FERRLOTECT SILICON HEAT

RESISTANCE 1000
SILVOTOL HR
ALUMINUM PAINT
-
CPC SILICONE HR ALUMINUM

PAINT
ANUPAM HEAT GUARD
Page 48 of 49
LUSTOTHERM HIGH TEMP

ALUMINUM PAINT
AROSTA FINISH HR
CARBOLINE 4674

S.
NO.
11.
12.
MANUFACTURERS NAME
GRAND POLYCOATS
F8
GP PRIME GUARD
235
HEMPADUR 1708
18.
BOMBAY PAINTS LTD./

HEMPEL MARINE PAINTS
VANAPRABHA ESTERS &
GLYCERIDES,
SUNIL PAINTS AND
VARNISHED PVT. LTD.
COURTAULDS COATING
LTD.
MARK-CHEM
INCOPORATED, (FOR
PHOSPHATE PAINTS
ONLY)
VCM POLYURETHANE
PAINTS (FOR POLY
EURETHANE PAINTS
ONLY)
JOTUN PAINTS
JOTUMATIC 87
19.
KCC PRODUCTS (KOREA)
EH 4158H
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
VEGEPOX MASTIC
2255
LPOXY HIGHBUILD
P.S.901
INTERPLUX
F11
F12
-
KANGAROO HHR
ALUMINUM 4950
VEG HR AL PAINT TO
IS211339
-
HEMPADUR HIGH BUILD 5520
INTERTHERM 50
VEG HHR AL PAINT TO 600C

-
SOLVELITT HEAT RESISTANT SILICON

PAINT
QT 606
Page 49 of 49
SPECIFICATION
FOR
REPAIR OF PIPELINE
CORROSION COATING
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
REPAIR OF PIPELINE CORROSION

COATING
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 1 OF 3
MEC/S/05/62/08
REVISION 0
CONTENTS
1.
SCOPE
2.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
3.
APPLICATION PROCEDURE
4.
INSPECTION/ TEST
PREPARED BY
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
1.0

COATING
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 2 OF 3
MEC/S/05/62/08
REVISION
SCOPE :
This specification covers the minimum requirement of material and equipment,
installation procedure and inspection of repair of damaged polyethylene coatings
on steel pipes.
1.1
The repair shall be carried out using repair patch made of radiation crosslinked
Polyolefin backing, coated on the inside with semi-crystalline thermoplastic
Adhesive and filler mastic
2.0
2.1
CONTRACTOR shall supply all ,equipment and manpower required for a skillful
and adequate application in the field in accordance with the specification.
2.2
The repair material shall be :
Repair patch shall be cross linked polyolefin with semi-crystalline

thermoplastic adhesive (PERP patch make of RAYCHEM or equivalent ).
Filler mastic : PERPFILLER make of RAYCHEM or equivalent.
2.3
The material shall not be older than their period of validity at the time of
Application by CONTRACTOR. Deteriorated/decomposed materials shall not be
used.
2.4
Material shall be stored in sheltered storages in the manufacturer's original

packing and away from direct sunlight and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.0
Application procedure shall be as per manufacturer's recommendations and as
per the following guidelines ( ref. Fig: 1 )
Preparation : Remove coating from damaged area with knife, scraper or power
brush. Scrap off the damaged area and adjacent coating to remove oil, grease,
ruse dirt and moisture.
Preheating : Preheat the exposed bare metal surface to about 60C and
adjacent pipe coating to about 47C with a torch moved back and forth over the
surface.
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE

COATING
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 3 OF 3
MEC/S/05/62/08
REVISION
0
Application of the Filler : Plastic filler shall be applied to all exposed metal
surface. The mastic is heated and smoothed down with a paint scraper to cover
all bare metal in a manner such that all entrapped air is removed.
Application of repair tape : Cut a patch from the tape in a manner such that it
extends 50 mm beyond the damaged area, position it over the damaged area,
heat until the temperature sensitive paint on the outside of the patch changes
colour. It shall be smoothed down to confirm with the contour of lap, and shall
be freed of any air bubbles or wrinkles.
For cosmetic type of defects such as minor gauging tearing, scratches which do
not indicate holiday during holiday inspection, following procedure shall be
adopted :
The defect area shall be roughened to remove loose polyethylene coating, oil
grease, dirt etc.
This shall be followed by application of repair patch as described above.
4.0
INSPECTION, TEST
A visual inspection shall be carried out for the following:
5.0
Mastic extrusion on ends of the patch shall be examined.

There shall be no sign of punctures or pin holes or bend failure. The
external appearance of the patch shall be smooth, free from dimples, air
entrapment or void formation.
The entire repair patch shall have changed colour uniformly.
HOLIDAY INSPECTION
The holiday detector used shall be checked and calibrated easily with an
accurate D.C. Voltmeter. The detector electrode shall be in direct contact with
the surface of coating to be inspected.
The entire surface of the repaired section shall be inspected by means of a full
circle holiday detector approved by company set to a DC Voltage of at least 25
KV. Inspection of repaired patch shall be conducted only after it has cooled
below 50C.
No repaired point shall be covered or lowered in the trench until it has been
approved by the COMPANY.
SPECIFICATION
FOR
DOCUMENTATION FOR PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION
SPECIFICATION NO. MEC/S/05/62/09R
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
\\Akjha\work contrac\standard TS for Pipe Line WC (Vol-II) MASTER FOLDER\69 documentation for pipeline construction\Specification for Documentation for PL Const - 69.doc
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
RECORDS
3.0
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS AND PIPE BOOK
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This specification covers the minimum requirements of various records,

reports and drawings for all aspects of pipeline construction to be
prepared by Contractor and submitted to the Company at intervals as
described in this specification and as directed by Company.
1.2
All document required to prepared and submitted by Contractor as per

this specification shall be in addition to the various reports, records,
methodology statement, calculation, drawings etc. to be submitted by the
Contractor for Companys record, review or approval as per the
requirements of all other specification included in the Contract between
the Company and Contractor.
1.3

specifications and document included in the Contract between Company
and Contractor.
2.0
RECORDS
Contractor shall submit daily, weekly, monthly and after completion to the
Company, various records and reports for Companys documentation
purpose during and immediately after the construction. This shall as
minimum include, but not limited to the following :
2.1
Daily
Separate progress reports of all crews
Daily welding results and repairs
Actual weather conditions
Application for deviations, if any
Page 1 of 8
2.2
Accidents
Damages
Activities required from Company
Materials Receipts
Urgently required materials
Weekly
Up-to-date list of confirmed site instruction issued by Company
Materials `taken over
Material defects and repairs
Outstanding activities of Company
List of installed markers, chainage
Required approval from Company
Progress planned
Reports of manning of all crews, equipment and plant
Report of equipment and plant
Report of accidents
Report of damages
Report of acquired release, permits
Page 2 of 8
2.3
Priced variations
Required materials for next month
Monthly
2.4
Progress report for payment, safety report, report of accidents,

security report, health and environment report, material balance,
approved deviations.
Further, Contractor shall supply (for approval if required to the Company

with document such as but not limited :
Organogram for construction work.
Bio-data of key personnel (including foremen).
(Revised) list of address of personnel in particular of medical staff,

safety and security offers.
(Revised) list of approved coaters.
(Revised) list of approved sub-contractors.
Time schedule.
Acquired permits and/ or approvals from Authorities, if any.
Minutes of meeting with Company with comments, if any.
Material certificates, material receipt.
Guarantee from vendors and sub-contractor.
Calculations, temporary works, bouyance, blasting.
Page 3 of 8
Drawings issued by Contractor.
Vendors drawings.
As-built of route maps, alignment sheets, details drawings and

isometric drawings.
Procedures such as surveying, stacking, fencing.
Welding procedure qualification records, radiographic procedure

qualification, welder qualification.
Coating procedure.
Installation of crossings.
Hydrostatic testing.
Blasting.
Radiographic report alongwith original radiographs
Pipe and welding book.
Reports
-
Material tests (coating, welding, painting)

Computerised Potential Logging Test
Water Samples
Cleaning, Pigging Report before Hydrostatic Test
Hydrostatic Test
Calibration Test
Blasting Trials
Equipment certificate (dead weight tester, instruments,
vessels, equipment)
Manuals
Page 4 of 8
Major water crossings

Waste disposal
Disposal of water after hydrostatic test.
2.5
Contractor shall submit to company colour photographs of various

construction activities/ operations at regular intervals. Size, number and
frequency of the photographs shall be mutually agreed upon at a later
stage. Also Contractor shall make video recordings of all operations right
from the start of construction till the completion of the work, covering to
the extent as instructed by Company and submit to Company. Upon
completion of the work, Contractor and submit edited master tape plus six
copies of video recording in VHS formats or any format ordered by the
Company. The duration of video recording shall be of hour and shall
cover all aspects of the job.
3.0
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS AND PIPE BOOK
3.1
General
Contractor shall prepare as-built drawings of all by or on behalf of
Company issued drawings and of all Contractor work drawings including
vendor drawing, such as but not limited to :
For Pipeline Section :
-
Route Maps
Alignment Sheets
Detail Drawings (road, railway, minor water crossings, major water
crossings, valley crossings)
Isometric drawings of installations
Special installation
Further Contractor shall prepare a pipe Weld Book.
Page 5 of 8
If required by the Company, Contractor shall update the diskettes for

drawings issued for construction of the job.
3.2
As-Built Drawings
Contractor shall prepare a complete set of as-built drawings. From the
start of construction, Contractor shall on daily basis process any changes
in two sets of drawings. Deleted parts shall be indicated in red, new parts
in blue, remarks in green and unchanged parts in yellow. Said drawings
shall be kept at site and be available to Company at all times. Contractor
shall prepare as-built drawings based on these data. On completion of
the work, one revised film transparency of all drawing made as-built by
Contractor containing the as-built information shall be handed over to
Company as well as one complete set of CD ROM/ floppy diskettes as
specified by Company.
Contractor shall prepare and submit a specimen of the layout of the
drawings for Companys approval.
The required measurement for as-built drawing shall be executed by
Contractor by experienced, qualified surveyors.
The surveyors shall daily take care of all measurement required such as
but not limited to:
-
Horizontal location of pipeline with regard to deviations and

Permanent Grid Pillars.
Vertical Level with regard to Mean Sea Level of pipeline and grade.
Location and type of bends, fittings etc. and grades, points of
intersection.
Change of wall thickness, materials.
Location and details of valves, insulating flanges, fencing.
Location and details of crossing pipes, vents.
Location and type of coating.
Location and type of weighting, anchoring.
Location and type of markers.
Page 6 of 8
Location of further appurtenance (Pig-Signallers)

Location of ROU and of pipeline with respect to ROU.
Type of soil.
Type of rock
Type of blasting and ripping.
Sand padding.
Type of road pavement.
Details of bank protection, number of insulators, seals.
Contractor shall also prepare isometric drawings of all installation

(facilitates) etc. for which the data as mentioned in or required for the
Pipe and Welding Book can be identified and these drawings can also be
used for material accounting.
3.3
Nameplates of Equipment
All permanent equipment supplied and installed by Contractor shall be
provided with plates by Contractor. All texts shall be submitted to
Company for approval before plates may be manufactured.
3.4
Pipe Book
Every page of the pipe and Welding Book shall mention:
-
Data relevant to the project and section there of.

Sequential number.
Length brought forward (for pipes and other materials).
Length to bring forward (for pipes and other materials).
Alignment sheet number and atleast the location thereon of two welds on
every page of the pipe Book.
Further,
-
Diameter of pipeline
Length of each pipe
Page 7 of 8
Wall thickness
Pipe number
Heat number, certificate number
Cut and re-numbered pipe ends
Coating type
Date of stringing
Date of welding
Direction of working
Heat treatment
Equipment used for radiography
Limits of water crossings
Test pressure and date of test.
In order to achieve this, Contractor shall identify all pipe elements.

Sample format of Pipe Book shall be submitted for Company approval.
3.5
As-Built Documents
Contractor shall prepare all documents in the prescribed format as
indicated below. In addition to the three hard copies, three copies of final
documents shall also be submitted in electronic media i.e. CD ROM/ floppy
diskettes.
Software used for the preparation of these documents shall be as follows:
Type document
a)
Reports/ Documents
b)
Drawings
Software
MS Office
Auto CAD
For the purpose of preparation of as-built drawings, Contractor shall

update the Issued for construction drawings issued by the Company. It
shall be the Contractors responsibility to covert the drawings furnished by
the Company in hard copy into CAD drawings including scanning,
digitising and converting the drawings into a suitable format compatible
with the AutoCAD and above. As-built drawings shall be prepared only on
AutoCAD drawings.
Page 8 of 8
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PIPELINE MARKERS

MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
Document2
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
PIPELINE MARKERS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 1 OF 4
MEC/S/05/62/10
REVISION 0
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCE CODES AND DRAWINGS
3.0
GENERAL
4.0
AERIAL MARKERS
5.0
KILOMETRE MARKERS
6.0
PIPELINE WARNING SIGN
7.0
ROW BOUNDARY MARKERS
8.0
DIRECTION MARKERS
9.0
NAVIGABLE WATERWAY PIPELINE CROSSING WARNING SIGN

REFERENCE DRAWINGS
MECON STANDARD DRAWINGS
MEC/SD/05/62/10/01
MEC/SD/05/62/10/02
:
:
MEC/SD/05/62/10/03
MEC/SD/05/62/10/04
MEC/SD/05/62/10/05
MEC/SD/05/62/10/06
:
:
PREPARED BY
Document2
K.M. POST
TYPICAL ROW BOUNDARY
MARKER
AERIAL MARKER
DIRECTION MARKER
:
NAVIGABLE WATERWAY PIPELINE
CROSSING WARNING SIGN
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
PIPELINE MARKERS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 2 OF 4
MEC/S/05/62/10
REVISION
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This specification covers the minimum requirements for supply, fabrication and
erection of pipeline markers to be installed by CONTRACTOR at various
locations along the route of a cross-country pipeline.
1.2

and CONTRACTOR.
2.0
REFERENCE CODES
Reference has been made in this specification to the latest revision of the
following code :
API RP 1109 :
Recommended practice for marking liquid petroleum

pipeline facilities.
3.0
GENERAL
3.1
CONTRACTOR shall supply, fabricate and install the pipeline markers along the
pipeline route. The locations of markers as indicated in the approved drawings
shall be treated for guidance purposes only and the exact location of the
markers shall be based on AS BUILT drainage and as directed by COMPANY.
3.2
The pipeline markers shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the
MECON standard drawings included herein. Before start of fabrication of the
markers, CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit for COMPANY's approval
the detailed scheme for the marker plates as applicable for the project.
3.3
The pipeline markers shall be installed, as far as possible, at locations such that
to cause no hindrance to the regular use of the land or to the traffic.
4.0
AERIAL MARKERS
Aerial markers shall in general in installed along the pipeline at every five (5)
kilometres intervals and at places specified by COMPANY. Refer MECON
Standard Drawing No. MEC/SD/05/62/10/03 for details.
Document2
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
5.0
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
PIPELINE MARKERS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 3 OF 4
MEC/S/05/62/10
REVISION
KILOMETRE MARKERS
Kilometre markers shall in general be installed along the pipeline between the
aerial markers at every one (1) kilometre interval. Markers shall indicate
cumulative distance in kilometres from the reference station, as directed by
COMPANY. A kilometre marker is not required if the relative length between its
location and any pipeline warning sign is less than 200 metres. Refer MECON
Standard Drawing No. MEC/SD/05/62/10/01 for details.
6.0

Pipeline Warning Sign shall in general be installed at
National and State Highway Crossings
(2 Nos.)
Other Road Crossings
(1 No.)
Railway Crossings
(2 Nos.)
Minor Water Crossings (less than 15m width)
(1 No.)
Minor Water Crossings (above 15m width)
(2 Nos.)
Major Water Crossings
(2 Nos.)
Valve Station
(1 No.)
And at any other location as shown in the approved drawings and as

directed by the COMPANY.
Pipeline Warning Sign shall identify the existence of the pipeline and display the
name of the COMPANY, with an emergency telephone number, as shown in
MECON Standard Drawing No. MEC/SD/05/62/10/05 for details.
7.0
ROW BOUNDARY MARKERS

Right-of-Way boundary markers shall be fabricated and installed as per the
drawings at every 250 metres interval along the entire pipeline route. These
shall be installed on either side of the pipeline alignment to define the ROW
boundary limits. These shall also be installed at pipeline turning points to
maintain the continuity of the ROW limits. Refer MECON Standard Drawing No.
MEC/SD/05/62/10/02 for details.
Document2
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
8.0
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
PIPELINE MARKERS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 4 OF 4
MEC/S/05/62/10
REVISION
DIRECTION MARKERS
Direction markers as shown in MECON Standard Drawing No. shall be installed
to identify the significant turning points of the pipeline during aerial traverse. One
direction marker shall be installed at each turning point, in addition, two more
direction markers shall be installed along the pipeline alignment, one on either
side of the turning point at 200m from the turning point.
9.0
NAVIGABLE WATERWAY PIPELINE CROSSING WARNING SIGN

The Navigable Waterway Pipeline Crossing Warning Sign shall be fabricated in
accordance with MECON Standard Drawing No. Such Warning Sign shall be
installed one on each bank of navigable water courses at the pipeline crossing
location, in lieu of the Pipeline Warning Sign described in clause 6.0 of this
specification.
Document2
SPECIFICATION FOR
FLUSHING AND TESTING

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
Flushing and Testing
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 1 OF 9
MEC/S/05/62/11
REVISION 0
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
INSPECTION
3.0
FLUSHING
4.0
TESTING
4.1
EXTENT OF TESTING
4.2
GENERAL REQUIREMENT/TEST PREPARATION FOR TESTING
4.3
TESTING MEDIA, TEST PRESSURE AND TEST PRESSURE GAUGES.
4.4
TESTING PROCEDURE
4.5
COMPLETION OF TESTING
4.6
TEST RECORDS
PREPARED BY
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
1.0
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 2 OF 9
MEC/S/05/62/11
REVISION 0
SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements for Inspection, flushing and
testing of piping systems. However testing of steam lines falling under IBR shall
also be governed by Indian Boiler Regulations.
Flushing and testing of all piping system shall be witnessed by the Engineer-inCharge.
2.0
Inspection
During various stage and after completion fabrication and erection, the piping
system shall be inspected by the Engineer- in - Charge to ensure that :
3.0
Proper piping material has been used.
Piping has been erected as per drawings and the instruction of the
engineerin charge.
All supports have been installed correctly.
Test preparations mentioned in this specification have been carried out.
Flushing
Flushing of all lines shall be done before pressure testing. Flushing shall be
done by fresh potable water or dry compressed air, wherever water flushing is
not desirable, to clean the pipe of all dirt, debris or loose foreign materials.
Required pressure of water, flushing shall meet the fire hydrant pressure or
utility water pressure. For air flushing the line, system will be pressurised by
compressed air at the required pressure which shall be 50 psi maximum. The
pressure shall then be released by quick opening of a valve, already in the line
for this purpose. This procedure shall be repeated as many times as required till
the inside of the pipe is fully cleaned.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 3 OF 9
MEC/S/05/62/11
REVISION 0
In line instruments like control valves, orifice plates, rotameters, safety valves
and other instruments like thermowells which may interfere with flushing shall
not be included i m the flushing circuit.
From all permanent strainers the screens/meshes shall be removed before
flushing. Screens/meshes shall be re- installed after flushing but before testing.
In case an equipment such as column, vessel, exchanger etc. forms part of a
piping circuit during flushing, this shall be done with the approval of Engineer- in
- Charge. However equipment thus included in the circuit, shall be completely
cleaned and dried with comprss4ed air, after flushing is completed.
During flushing discharged water/air shall be drained at the place directed the
Engineer- in - Charge. If necessary, proper temporary drainage shall be
provided by the contractor.
Care shall be taken during flushing so as not to damage/spoil work of other
agencies. Precautions shall also be taken to prevent entry of water/foreign
matter into equipment, electric motors, instruments, electrical installations etc. in
the vicinity of lines being flushed.
The contractor shall carry out all the activities required before, during and after
the flushing operation, arising because of flushing requirements, such as but not
limited to the following.
Dropping of valves, specials, distance pieces, online instruments and any other
piping part before flushing. The flanges to disengaged for this purpose shall be
envisaged by the contractor and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. These
flanges shall be provided with temporary gaskets at the time of flushing.
After flushing is completed and approved, the valve, distance pieces, piping
specials etc. shall be re-installed by the contractor with permanent gaskets.
However, flanges of equipment nozzles and other places where isolation is
required during testing, only temporary gaskets shall be provided.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 4 OF 9
MEC/S/05/62/11
REVISION 0
Records in triplicate shall be prepared and submitted by the Contractor for each
piping system for the flushing done in the proforma in Exhibit F.
4.0
Testing
4.1
Extent of testing
With the exclusion of instrumentation. piping system fabricated or assembled in
the field shall be tested irrespective of whether or not they have been pressure
tested prior to site welding of fabrication.
To facilitate the testing of piping systems, vessels and other equipments may be
included in the system with the prior approval of Engineer-in-charge, if the test
pressure specified is equal to or less than that for the vessels and other
equipments.
Pumps, compressors and other votary equipments shall not be subjected to field
test pressures.
Lines which are directly open to atmosphere such as vents, drains, safety
valves, discharge need not be tested, but all joints shall be visually inspected
wherever necessary such lines shall be tested by continuous flow of fluid to
eliminate the possibility of blockage. However, such lines if provided with block
valve shall be pressure tested upto the first block valve.
Seats of all vales shall not be subjected to a pressure in excess of the maximum
cold welding pressure of the valve. Test pressure applied to vales shall not be
grater than the manufacturer is recommendation nor less than that required by
the applicable code. Where desirable set pressure is less than test pressure,
test shall be made through an open valve.
Instruments in the system to be tested, shall be excluded from the test by
isolation or removal, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer-in-charge.
Restrictions which interfere with filling, venting and drawing such as orifice plates
etc. shall not be installed unless testing is complete.
Control valves shall not be included in the test system. Where by-passes are
provided test shall be performed through the by-pass end/or necessary spool
shall be used in place of the control valve.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 5 OF 9
MEC/S/05/62/11
REVISION 0
Pressure gauges which are part of the finished system, but cannot withstand
test pressure shall not be installed until the system has been tested. Where
piping systems to be tested are directly connected at the battery limits to piping
for which the responsibility tests with other agencies, the piping to be tested
shall be isolated from such piping by physical disconnection such as valves or
blinds.
4.2
General Requirement/Test preparation for Testing

Test shall be carried out with permanent gaskets installed unless specified
otherwise or instructed by the Engineer-in- charge.
No pressure test shall be carried out against close valve unless approved by the
Engineer-in-charge.
The Engineer-in-charge shall be notified in advance by the contractor, of the
testing sequence and programme, to enable him to be present for witnessing
the test. The contractor shall be fully responsible for making arrangements with
the local boiler inspector to witness the tests for steam lines falling under IBR.
IBR certificates for these tests shall be obtained in the relevant IBR forms and
furnished to the Engineer-in-charge. Before testing, all piping shall be cleaned
by flushing to make it free from dist loose scale, debris and other loose foreign
materials.
All piping systems to be hydrostatically tested shall be vented at the high points
and the systems purged of air before the test pressure is applied.
Wherever in the line any void is existing due to any reasons, for absence of
control valve, safety valve, check valves etc. it shall be filled with temporary
spools.
All joints welded, screwed or flanged shall be left exposed for examination
during the test. Before pressuring the lines, each weld joint shall be cleaned by
wire brush to free it from rest and any other foreign matter.
Where a system is to be isolated of a pair of companion flanges, a blank shall
be inserted between the companion flanges. Minimum thickness of the blank
shall be designed in accordance with applicable design code.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 6 OF 9
MEC/S/05/62/11
REVISION 0
Open ends of piping system where blanks cannot be used, such as pumps,
compressors, turbines or wherever equipment or pipe spool have been
receivered or disconnected prior to hydrostatic testing, shall be blinded off by
using standard blind flanges of same rating as the piping system being tested.
Pressure gauges used in testing shall be installed as close as possible to the
lowest point in the piping system to be tested, to avoid overstressing of any of
the lower portion of the system. For longer lines and vertical lines, two or more
pressure gauges shall be installed at locations selected by the
Engineer-in-charge. For lines containing check valves any of the following
alternatives shall be adopted for pressure testing. Wherever possible pressurise
up-stream side of valve.
Replace the valve by a temporary spool and re-install the valve after testing.
Provide blind on valve flanges and test the upstream and downstream of the line
separately and remove the blind after testing. All these flanges, temporary
gaskets shall be provided during testing and shall be replaced by permanent
gaskets subsequently. For check valves in lines 1-1/2" and below, flapper or
seat shall be removed during testing (if possible). After completion of testing the
flopper/ seat shall be refitted.
Gas lines when hydrostatically tested shall be provided with additional temporary
supports during testing as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
Piping which is spring or counter weight supported shall be temporarily
supported, where the weight of the fluid would overload the support. Retaining
pins for spring supports shall be removed only after testing is completed and test
fluid is completely drained.
2
When testing any piping system, air or steam of approximately 2 kg/cm (g) may
be used as preliminary test to detect missing gaskets etc. as this avoids the
necessity of purging the gas to make repairs. However, this method may not be
used for this purpose, if the steam temperature is more than the design temp. of
the line.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 7 OF 9
MEC/S/05/62/11
REVISION 0
For jacketed pipes testing of core pipes shall be done on individual pieces where
the pipe is continuously packed, before it is jacketed. The outer jacket shall be
tested separately as a system for piping with discontinuous jacketing, the eore
pipe and the jacket shall be tested as separate system.
4.3
Testing Modes, Test pressure and Test Pressure Gauges
4.3.1
Testing Modes
In general all pressure test shall be hydrostatic using iron free water, which is
clean and free of silt. Maximum clorine content in water for hydrostatic testing
for MS piping shall be 15-20 ppm. Air shall be used for testing only if water
would cause corrosion of the system or overloading of supports etc. in special
cases as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
Where air/water tests are undesirable substitute fluid such as gas, oil, methanol
etc. shall be used as the testing medium, with due consideration to the hazards
involved. These test fluids shall be specified in the line list given to the
contractor.
4.3.2
Test Pressure
The hydrostatic/pneumatic test pressure shall be as indicated in the line list or as
per the instruction of Engineer-in-charge.
The selection of the piping system for one individual test shall be based on the
following :Test pressure required as per line list.
Maximum allowable pressure for the material of construction of piping
depending upon the above requirements and based on construction progress,
maximum length of piping shall be included in each test.
4.3.3
Test Pressure Gauge

All gauge used for field testing shall have suitable range so that the test
pressure of the various system falls in 40% to 60% of gauge scale range.
Gauge shall be of a good quality and in first class working condition.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 8 OF 9
MEC/S/05/62/11
REVISION 0
Prior to the start of any test or periodically during the field test programmes, all
test gauges shall be calibrated using a standard dead weight gauge tester or
other suitable approved testing apparatus. Any gauge having an incorrect zero
reading or error of more than 2% of full scale range shall be discarded. The
Engineer-in-charge shall check the accuracy of master pressure gauge used for
calibration.
4.4
Testing Pressure
4.4.1
Hydrostatic Test
All vents and other connections used as vents shall be kept open while filling the
line with test fluid for complete removal of air. For pressurising and
depressurising the system, temporary isolating valves shall be provided if valves,
vents, drains do not exist in the system.
Pressure shall be applied only after the system/line is ready and approved by
the Engineer-in-charge.
Pressure shall be applied by means of a suitable test pump or other pressure
source which shall be isolated from the system as the desired test pressure is
reached and stabilised in the system.
A pressure gauge shall be provided at the pump discharge for guiding the
system to the required pressure.
The pump shall be attended constantly during the test by an authorised person.
The pump shall be isolated from the system wherever the pump is to be left
unattended.
Test pressure shall be maintained for a sufficient length of time to permit
through inspection of all joints for leakage or signs of failure. Any joint found
leaking during a pressure test, shall be re-tested to the specified pressure after
repair. Test period shall be maintained for a minimum of three hours.
The pump and the piping system to be tested are to be provided with separate
pressure indicating test gauges. There gauges are to be checked by the
standard test gauge before each pressure test.
MECON LIMITED
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
TITLE
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 10 OF 10
MEC/S/05/62/11
REVISION 0
Care shall be taken to avoid increase in the pressure due to atmospheric

variation during the test.
4.4.2
Air Test
When testing with air, pressure shall be supplied by means of a compressor.
The compressor shall be portable type with a receiver after cooler & oil
separator.
Piping to be tested by air shall have joints covered with a soap and water
solution so that the joints can be examined for leaks.
All other activities shall be same as per hydrotesting procedure (specified
above).
4.5
Completion of Testing
After the hydrostatic test has been completed, pressure shall be released in a
manner and at a rate so as not to endanger personnel or damage equipments.
All vents and drains shall be opened before the system is to be drained and
shall remain open till all draining is complete, so as to prevent formation of
vacuum in the system. After draining lines/systems shall be dried by air.
After testing is completed the test blinds shall be removed and equipment/piping
isolated during testing shall be connected using the specified gaskets, bolts and
nuts. These connections shall be checked for tightness in subsequent
pneumatic tests to be carried out by the contractor for complete loop/circuit
including equipments (except rotary equipments).
Pressure tests shall be considered complete only after approved by the
Engineer-in-charge. Defects, if any, noticed during testing shall be rectified
immediately and retesting of the system/line shall be done by the contractor at
his cost.
4.6
Test Records
Records in triplicate shall be prepared and submitted by the contractor for each
piping system, for the pressure test done in the proforma as given in Exhibit `F'.
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CASING INSULATORS
AND END SEALS
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
Document3
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
CASING INSULATORS AND END
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 1 OF 6
SEALS
MEC/S/05/62/12
REVISION 0
CONTENTS
PART-A
PART-B
PART-C
CASING INSULATIONS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
FUNCTION
3.0
DESIGN
4.0
MATERIAL
5.0
CASING END-SEALS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
FUNCTION
3.0
DESIGN
4.0
MATERIAL
5.0
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
PREPARED BY
Document3
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 2 OF 6
SEALS
MEC/S/05/62/12
REVISION
PART-A
1.0
CASING INSULATORS
SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum requirements of design, material,
manufacture and supply of casing insulators intended to be used for cased
pipeline crossings.
2.0
FUNCTION
Pipeline insulators shall be used to support the carrier pipe inside the casing
pipe and electrically isolate the carrier pipe from the casing pipe at the cased
crossings.
The casing insulators shall:
3.0
Resist cold flow and will not soften at design temperature.
Resist corrosion
Resist mechanical damage while being pulled into the casing.
Have high electrical insulating value and low water absorption, thus
preventing leakage and maintain electrical isolation between carrier and
casing pipes
Have high compressive strength in order to assure a permanent support

to the carrier pipe.
DESIGN
The arrangement of insulator shall be generally in accordance with Fig. 3.0. It
shall be made in segments duly held together with cadmium plated bolts and
nuts, to be supplied with casing insulators.
The number of segments shall be two for pipe diameters upto 12 (generally).
For larger diameters, the number of segments may be more than two, but their
number shall be kept minimum.
The skid height shall be such that it is slightly less than the value obtained by
following formula.
Document3
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 3 OF 6
SEALS
MEC/S/05/62/12
REVISION
Casing internal dia-carrier outer dia

2
Manufacturer shall obtain prior approval from COMPANY on casing insulators
drawings/designs.
4.0
MATERIAL
Casing insulators shall be made of injection moulded high density polyethylene
or other material equivalent or superior as approved by COMPANY and shall
meet the following specifications:
5.0
Property
Value
ASTM Test Method
Dielectric strength
450-500 Volts/Mil
D-149
Compresssive strength
3200 psi
D-695i
Tensile strength
3100-5000
D-638, D-651
Impact strength
4.Oft. 1b./inch of notch D-256
Water Absorption
0.01%
D-570

Manufacturer shall furnish material test certificates of the components used in
the assembly of casing insulations as per the requirements of clause 4.0 of this
specification.
Document3
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 4 OF 6
SEALS
MEC/S/05/62/12
REVISION
PART-B
1.0
CASING END-SEALS
SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum requirements of design, material,
fabrication and supply of casing end-seals intended to be used for pipeline
cased crossings.
2.0
FUNCTION
Casing end seals are intended to be used for sealing the annular space
between casing pipe and carrier pipe at casing ends so as to prevent ingress
of moisture and water.
3.0
DESIGN
The scale shall be suitable for the casing and carrier pipe diameters as
applicable for each case.
The casing end-seal shall be flexible to cater for the expansion and contraction
of carrier and casing pipes and shall be able to tolerate both angular and
concentric misalignment of casing pipe without loss of sealing efficiency.
The design of the casing end-scale shall permit easy installation of the seal to
the cased pipeline crossing.
It shall provide moisture-proof seals when installed for the entire anticipated
life of the buried pipeline.
Manufacturer shall obtain prior approval from COMPANY on casing end seals
design/drawings.
4.0
MATERIAL
The casing end-scale shall be made of head shrink high density radiation
crosslinked polyethylene with an adhesive having a melt point suitable for the
pipeline service temperature and ambient temperatures foreseen during
construction. End-seals material shall be resistant to heat, cold, vibration,
impact, abrasion, corrosive fluids, disbonding, organic and bio-deterioration.
Manufacturer shall confirm compatibility of end seals with carrier pipe coating.
Document3
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 5 OF 6
SEALS
MEC/S/05/62/12
REVISION
Casing end seals shall meet following minimum property requirements:

Property
Minimum Value
Test Method
a) Backing (Sleeve and closure patch)

Tensile strength
2200 psi
ASTM D-638
Ultimate Elongation
400%
ASTM D-638
Heat Shock
No visual cracks,
flow or drips
(at 225C, 4 hours)
ASTM D-2671
Ring and Ball softening

point
90C
ASTM E-28
Lap Shear
60C - 25 psi
23C - 250 psi
(2 inch/min)
ASTM D-1002
5 pli
(10 inch/min.)
ASTM
D-1000
b) Adhesive
c) System (as applied)

Peel strength
(To casing and carrier
pipe and closure patch)
5.0

Manufacturer shall furnish material test certificates of the components used in
the assembly of casing end-seals as per the requirements of this specification.
Document3
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 6 OF 6
SEALS
MEC/S/05/62/12
REVISION
PART-C
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
1.0
The Manufacturer shall replaces, at no extra cost, any material not conforming
to the material and performance requirements of this specification.
2.0
Manufacturer shall submit detailed specification of the materials used in the

assemblies, along with instructions for handling, use and installation of the
material for COMPANY approval prior to procurement.
3.0
Manufacturer shall submit all the documents, test reports, records and other
information in six copies to the COMPANY for record after approval as per
clause 2.0 above.
Document3
SPECIFICATION
FOR
VENTS, DRAINS AND WELLS
SPECIFICATION NO.: MEC/S/05/62/15

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
SPECIFICATION FOR
GASKETS, BOLTS & NUTS

MECON LIMITED
NEW DELHI 110 016
AUGUST,1999
c:\fateh\standard\gas-b&n.wp
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
GASKETS, BOLTS AND NUTS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 1 OF 3
MEC/S/05/62/19
REVISION 0
CONTENTS
1.0
GASKETS
2.0
NUTS AND BOLTS
PREPARED BY
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 2 OF 3
MEC/S/05/62/19
REVISION 0
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR GASKETS

1.
Materials for gaskets shall conform to the codes/ standards and specifications given in
the Pipeline Material Specification.
2.
Asbestos filler for spiral wound gaskets shall not have any colour or dye.
3.
Each size of gaskets shall be supplied in bundles labelled with size, rating and material
specifications.
4.
All gaskets shall be inspected as follows :a)
Visual Inspection
b)
Dimensional Check
5.
Material test certificates for all mandatory tests as per the relevant material
specifications and other inspection reports shall be furnished before despatch of
material.
6.
All items shall be inspected and approved (Stagewise) by Purchaser's Representative.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 3 OF 3
MEC/S/05/62/19
REVISION 0
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR BOLTS & NUTS

1.
Materials for stud bolts, M/C bolts, jack screws and nuts shall conform to the codes/
standards and specifications given in the Pipeline Material Specification.
2.
Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the relevant material
specifications.
3.
All bolting shall be as per ANSI B18.2.1 for studs, M/C Bolts and Jack screws and ANSI
B18.2.2 for nuts.
4.
Threads shall be unified (UNC for = 1" dia and BUN for C1" dia) as per ANSI B1.1 with
class 2A fit for studs, M/C bolts and jack screws and class 2B fit for nuts.
5.
Stud bolts shall be fully threaded as specified in the standards, codes.
6.
The nuts shall be double chamfered, heavy hexagonal type.
7.
Heads of jack screws and M/C bolts by heavy hexagonal type. Jack screw end shall be
rounded.
8.
Each size of studs & M/C bolts with nuts and jack screws shall be supplied in separate
bags marked with size and material specifications.
9.
All items shall be inspected and approval (Stagewise) by Purchaser's Representative.
PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION NO. MEC/S/05/62/21B
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.0
MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
4.0
CLASS DESIGNATION CODE
5.0
PIPELINE
6.0
PIPING
7.0
FITTINGS
8.0
BENDS
9.0
FLANGES
10.0
GASKETS
11.0
BOLTING
12.0
THREAD SEALANT
13.0
VALVES
14.0
QUICK OPENING END CLOSURE
15.0
HYDROTESTING VENTS AND DRAINS
TABLE-1
PIPE WALL THICKNESS DETAILS FOR
TABLE-2
INDEX OF PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
ANNEXURE-1
ANNEXURE-II
PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

LIST OF ATTACHMENTS
LINE
1.0
SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements of various piping materials
used in piping/ pipeline system handling natural gas and associate utilities
in the pipeline.
2.0
CODES AND STANDARDS
2.1
Pipeline and terminal facilities envisaged as a part of this project shall be

designed and Engineered primarily in accordance with the provision of
ASME B 31.8- Gas Transmission and Distribution piping system 1995
edition.
2.2
All codes standards and specifications referred herein shall be the latest
edition of such documents.
2.3
For sake of brevity, the intials of the society to which the codes are
referred are omitted in the specification, for example, B16.5 is a code
referring to ANSI/ ASME, A 105 is a code referring to ASTM.
2.4
In addition, MECON specifications for various piping and pipeline

materials shall also be applicable.
3.0
MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Piping material specifications are classified for the general purpose of
selection of material for the class of services. The maximum design
pressure and design temperature together with the fluid in line governs the
selection of material specifications. Deviation of materials from class
specifications may occure due to specific design condition. These
deviations are permissible if they are equal or better than the individual
class requirements.
4.0
CLASS DESIGNATION CODE

The piping class designation consist of three digits numbering system
made up of letter, number, letter e. g. A1A, B1A, D1A, etc as follows:
First letter indicates ANSI class rating e. g.
A-Class 150
B-Class 300
D-Class 600
The middle number indicates differences in the specification within the
same rating and material.
\\Akjha\work contrac\standard TS for Pipe Line WC (Vol-II) MASTER FOLDER\21B piping material spec\Specification for Piping Materials-021B.doc
Page 1 of 6
The last letter indicates type of material e. g..

A-Carbon Steel
5.0
PIPELINE
The material for linepipe shall be as per the requirements of specification
as indicated in table-I.
6.0
PIPING
6.1
Carbon steel pipe shall be made by open hearth, electric furnace or basic
oxygen process only. The steel used shall be fully killed and made with
fine grain structure. The grade and wall thickness of various sizes of pipes
shall be as per piping material specification for the applicable class.
6.2
Pipe dimension shall be in accordance with ANSI B 36.10 for carbon steel
pipes and ANSI B 36.19 for stainless steel pipes.
6.3
All pipe threads shall conform to American Standard taper as per ANSI B
1.20.1 NPT, unless otherwise specified.
6.4
For butt weld end, bevel shall be in accordance to ANSI B 16.25/ API 5L
as applicable.
7.0
FITTINGS
7.1
Fully killed carbon steel shall be used in the manufacture of fittings.
7.2
Threaded joints, if used shall conform to American Standard taper as per

ANSI 1.20.1 NPT.
7.3
Dimension of socket weld/ screwed fittings shall conform to ASME B 16.11
7.4
Bore of socket welded fittings shall suit O. D. of pipe and its thickness.
7.5
Dimensions of butt welded carbon steel fittings upto size 18 NB shall

conform to ASME B 16.9/ MSS-SP-75 as applicable.
7.6
Butt welding ends shall conform to ANSI B 16.25/ API 5L. in case of
difference in thickness of matching ends, requirements of ASME B 31.8
shall apply.
Page 2 of 6
7.7
Integrally reinforced forged branch fittings such as sockolet, threadolet,

weldolet, nippolet etc. shall be as per MSS-SP-97. Fittings not covered in
ASME B 16.9 and MSS-SP-97, shall conform to manufacturers standard.
8.0
BENDS
8.1
Unless otherwise specified for terminal piping, the elbow of radius R = 1.5
D shall only be used.
8.2
For pipeline cold field bends with radius R = 40D (where D is pipe O. D)
for 18 NB shall be used. Limited used of long radius bends (R = 6D) may
be permitted for reason of space constraints.
9.0
FLANGES
9.1
specified.
Flange rating shall be same as ANSI class rating unless othewise
9.2
Dimensions pf flanges shall be in accordance with ANSI B 16.5 for sizes

up to 18 NB.
9.3
Neck of Weld Neck (WN) flanges to suit pipe bore and thickness.
9.4
Bore of Socket Welded (SW) flanges shall suit pipe O.D. and its thickenss.
9.5
Threads for screwed flanges if used shall conform to American Standard

taper as per ANSI B 1.20 1 NPT.
9.6
Sizes for blind flanges shall be indicated by nominal pipe sizes.
9.7
Carbon steel flanges faces shall have serrated finish or smooth finish as
indicated in the material specification. Flanges faces shall have serrated
finish to 250-500 microinches AARH as per ANSI B 16.5 for ANSI class
150# and smooth finish to 125-200 microinches AARH as per MSS-SP-6
for ANSI class 300# & 600#.
9.8
Butt welding ends of WN flanges shall conform to ANSI B 16.25.
9.9
Spectacle blind/ spacer & blinds for sizes upto and including sizes 18 NB
shall be in accordance with API standard 590/ MECON standard.
Spectacle blind shall be used for sizes upto 8 NB and for 10 & above
spacer & blind shall be used.
9.10
Two jack screws 180 apart shall be provided for all spectacle blind
assemblies. The jack screws shall be as per MECONs standard, attached
with this specification.
Page 3 of 6
10.0
GASKETS
10.1
Spiral wound metallic gaskets shall conform to B 16.20 and shall be

provided with compressed asbestos filler. All spiral wound gaskets shall
be provided with carbon steel centering ring. Gasket thickness shall be as
indicated in piping material specification for the applicable piping class.
10.2
Non metallic compressed asbestos gaskets for flanged pipe joints shall
conform to B16.21. Unless specified otherwise, asbestos material shall
conform to IS 2712 Gr. O/1. Gasket thickness shall be as indicated in
piping material specification for the applicable piping class.
11.0
BOLTING
11.1
Nuts for stud bolts shall be American Standard Hexagonal Heavy series
and double chamfered.
11.2
Dimension and tolerances for stud bolts and nuts shall be as per ANSI B
18.2.1 and 18.2.2 with full threading to ANSI B 1.1 Class 2A thread for
bolts and Class 2Bfor nuts. Diameter and length of stud bolts shall be as
per ANSI B 16.5 with full threading.
11.3
Threads for nuts shall as per ANSI B 1.1, as follows:

Nuts for stud dia to 1
Nuts for stud bolts dia 11/8 to 3
11.4
UNC-2B
8UN-2B
Threads for stud bolts shall be as per ANSI B 1.1, as follows.

Studs bolts dia to 1
Stud bolts dia 11/8 to 3
11.5
:
:
:
:
UNC-2A
8UN-2A
Heads of jack screws shall be heavy hexagonal type. Jack screw end shall
be rounded. Stud bolts shall be fully threaded with two hexagonal
nuts.
Page 4 of 6
TABLE-1
MAIN LINE PIPE MATERIAL
Line Pipe Material and thickness shall be indicated in Mainline SOR.

TABLE-2
INDEX OF PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Piping
Class
Service
AIA (150#) NATURAL

GAS
BIA (150#) NATURAL
GAS
DIA
NATURAL
(150#)
GAS
Design
pressure
Kg/ cm2
19.0
Design
Temp. c
C .A. in
mm
Basic
Material
Design
Code
65
1.5
API 5L
49
65
1.5
API 5L
92
65
1.5
API 5L
ASME B
31.8
ASME B
31.8
ASME B
31.8
12.0
THREAD SEALANT
12.1
Threaded joints shall be made with 1 wide PTFE Jointing tape.
13.0
VALVES
13.1
All valves installed above ground within the terminal of sizes 2 and above
shall have flanged ends. Valves of size less than 2 shall have socket
welded ends except for ball valves.
13.2
Flange dimensions and face finish of flanged end valves shall confirm to
clause 9.0 of this specification.
13.3
Butt welding ends of Butt Welded valves shall confirm to ANSI B 16.25.
13.4
Face to face and end to end dimensions shall confirm to applicable

standards.
13.5
Buried valves on mainline shall be provided with stem extension, sealant,

vent/drain & shall have butt welded ends.
13.6
Sectionalising Valves (Block valves) installed on the main pipeline shall

have butt welded ends and shall be full bore to allow smooth passage of
cleaning pigs as well as intelligent pigs.
Page 5 of 6
13.7
Unless specified otherwise. Valves shall confirm to the following

standards:
Screwed / Socket welded / Flanged end valves (1 and below)
Ball Valves
Plug Valves
Check Valves
Globe Valves
Gate Valves
BS 5351
BS 5353
BS 5352
BS 5352
API 602
Flanged / Butt weld end Valves (2 and above)

Ball Valves
Plug Valves
Check Valves
Globe Valves
Gate Valves
13.8
API 6D
API 6D
BS 1868
BS 1873
API 600
Valve operators shall be as indicated below, unless specified otherwise in

the P&ID.
a)
Gate and Globe Valves
i)
For ANSI class 150 and 300 -Hand Wheel operated for size
<12NB
Gear operated for size >14 NB.
For ANSI class 600
- Hand Wheel operated for size <10NB.
Gear operated for size >12 NB.
ii)
14.0
b)
Ball and Plug Valves
i)
For ANSI class 150, 300, 600 Wrench operated for size <4NB.
Gear operated for size >6NB.

Quick opening end closure to be installed on scraper traps shall be equipped with
safety locking devices in compliance with section VIII, division 1, UG-35 (b) of
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel code.
15.0
HYDRO TESTING VENTS AND DRAINS

High point vents and low point drains required for the purpose of hydro testing
shall be of size 0.75 and consist of sockolet, gate valve, flange & blind flange.
Page 6 of 6
SPECIFICATION
FOR
FIELD JOINT COATING
(ON-SHORE PIPELINE)
SPECIFICATION NO. MEC/S/05/62/13B
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
D:\old data\FATEH\Aban Power\TS\Specification for Field Joint Coaitng-13B.doc
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
Page No.
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3.0
2-6
4.0
6 10
5.0
INSPECTION & TESTING
10 - 12
6.0
REPAIR
12
7.0
DOCUMENTATION
13
1.0
SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum requirements of materials, equipment and
installation of field joint anti-corrosion coating of buried onshore pipelines factory
coated with either three layer polyethylene or fusion bonded epoxy coating, byheat
shrink wraparound sleeves or by cold applied tapes conforming to DIN EN 12068
Cathodic Protection External Organic Coatings for the Corrosion Protection of
Buried or Immersed Steel Pipelines used in Conjunction with Cathodic Protection
Tapes and Shrinkable Materials and the requirements of this specification. Unless
modified/ replaced by this specification, all requirements of DIN EN 12068 shall
remain fully applicable and complied with.
specifications and documents included in the Contract between COMPANY and
CONTRACTOR. Unless specified otherwise, all section of this specification shall
apply to all specifications referred in this specification.
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
Reference has been made to the latest edition (edition enforce at the time of
floating the enquiry) of the following standards, codes and specifications:
a)
ASTM D-149
Standard Test Methods of Dielectric

Breakdown voltage and Dielectric Strength of
solid electrical insulating materials at
commercial frequencies.
b)
ASTM D-257
Standard Test Methods for D-C Resistance or

conductance of insulating materials.
c)
ASTM D-570
Standard Method of
Absorption of Plastics
d)
ISO 8502-3
Preparation of Steel Stubstrates before

Application of Paints and Related Products
Test
for
Water
Part-3 Assessment of Dust on Steel Surfaces

Prepared for Painting (Pressure Sensitive
Tape Method).
e)
ISO:8503-1
Part-1 : Specification and definitions for ISO

surface
profile
comparator
for
the
assessment of abrasive blast cleaned
surfaces.
f)
ISO:8503-4
Part-4 : Methods for calibration of ISO

surface profile comparator and for the
Page 1 of 11
determination of surface profile Stylus

instrument procedure.
g)
SIS-055900
Pictorial surface Preparation Standard

for Painting Steel Surfaces.
h)
SSPC-SP 1
Steel Structure Painting Council.
In case of conflict between the requirements of this specification and that of above
referred documents, the requirements of this specification shall govern.
The Contractor shall be familiar with the requirements of these documents and
shall make them readily available at the site to all personnel concerned with
carrying out the works specified in this specification.
3.0
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
3.1
Field Joint Corrosion Coating Material

Field joint anti-corrosion coating material shall be either heat shtrinktable
wraparound sleeve or cold applied tape suitable for a maximum operating
temperature of (+) 60C (Tmax) and shall conform to designation EN 12068 C HT
60 UV. In addition the field joint anti-corrosion coating shall comply the
requirements specified in para 3.2 of this specification.
3.1.1
Heat Shrinkable Wraparound Sleeve

Heat shrinkable wraparound sleeve shall consist of radiation cross-linked thermally
stabilised, ultraviolet resistant semi-rigid polyolefin backing with a uniform thickness
of high shear strength thermoplastic/copolymer hot melt adhesive. The joint
coating system may consist of a solvent free epoxy primer applied to the pipe
surface prior to sleeve application. The backing shall be coated with thermochrome
paint which will change colour when the desired heat during shrinking is attained.
The wraparound sleeve shall be supplied in pre-cut sizes to suit the diameter and
the requirements of overlap.
The total thickness of heat shrinkable wraparound sleeve in the as applied condition
shall be as follows :
Pipe Size
(Specified Outside Diameter)
Upto 10 (273.1mm)
Over 10 (273.1mm) to below 20 (508.0mm)
From 20 (508.0mm) to below 32 (813.0mm)
From 32 (813.0mm) and above
Thickness (mm)
On Pipe Body
On Weld
Bead
Average Min.
(Min.)
2.0
1.8
1.6
2.4
2.2
2.0
Page 2 of 11
The heat shrink wraparound sleeve shall have the required adhesive properties when
applied on various commercial pipe-coating materials. The pre-heat and application
temperatures required for the application of the shrink sleeve shall not cause loss of
functional properties of the pipe coating.
Heat shrink wraparound field joint coating system manufactured by M/s Tyco Adhesives
Raychem and M/s Canusa are acceptable for the supply of field joint coating
materials. The Contractor shall propose the specific grade of field joint coating system
meeting the requirements of this specification from these manufacturers. In case the
Contractor proposes to supply heat shrink wraparound sleeve from any other
manufacturer, then the Contractor shall propose only those coating systems that have
been previously used in pipelines of similar size and operating conditions.
3.1.2
Cold Applied Tapes

Cold applied tapes system shall comprise of primer, an inner wrap and an outer
wrap. The inner and outer wraps shall be asymmetric 3-ply tape with co-extruded
polyethylene carrier film and butyl rubber adhesive layers on both sides. The inner
layer of butyl rubber adhesive of inner wrap shall have a thickness of min. 1.0mm.
The inner and outer wraps are to be spirally wrapped with 55% overlap, equivalent
to two layers each providing a total minimum thickness of 3.0 mm on the pipe body
and 2.5mm on the weld.
The Contractor shall propose only those cold applied tape coating systems that have
been previously used in pipelines of similar size and operating conditions.
3.2
Functional Requirements of Field Joint Coating
3.2.1
Properties of the PE backing shall be as follows :

Sl.
No.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
3.2.2
Property
Tensile Strength at @+25C
Ultimate Elongation @+ 25C
Dielectric withstand with 1000
Volts/sec
Water absorption
@+ 25C for 24 hours
Volume Resistivity @+25C
Unit
Requirement
Test Method
N/mm2
%
kv
12
250
30
DIN EN 12068
DIN EN 12068
ASTM D 149
0.05
ASTM D 570
Ohm-cm
1015
ASTM D 257
Functional Properties of Joint Coating System (As applied)

As applied field joint coating system shall comply the requirements of DIN EN 12068.
Table 1 and 2 corresponding to designation DIN EN 12068 C HT 60 UV, except as
modified below :
a)
Cathodic Disbondment Resistance at Tmax i.e. 60Cshall be 20mm when tested

as per Annexure K of DIN EN 12068. Test shall be carried out at (+) 60C.
Page 3 of 11
b)
Peel Strength shall be as follows :

Peel Strength
Inner to Inner +
Outer to Inner
Outer to Outer
To Pipe Surface
To Factory Coating
Unit
@23C
@Tmax
@23C
@Tmax
@23C
@Tmax
@23C
@Tmax
N/mm
N/mm
N/mm
N/mm
N/mm
N/mm
N/mm
N/mm
Requirement
for Mech
Resistance
Class C
(Minimum)
1.5
0.3
1.5
0.3
3.5
0.3
3.5
0.3
Test Method
as per DIN
EN 12068
Annexure-B
Annexure-C
(Tmax shall be (+) 60C)

Contractor shall obtain prior approval from Company regarding the manufacturer of
the joint coating material. Complete technical details alongwith test certificates
complying with the requirements of clause 3.2.1 and 3.2.2 shall be submitted to
Company for this purpose. The Contractor shall furnish test certificates from an
independent DIN recognized/ approved laboratory for all the properties required for
the specified EN designation of field joint coating and the requirements of this
specification.
3.3
The materials shall not be older than their period of validity at the time of
application by CONTRACTOR. Deteriorated/ decomposed material shall be disposed
of and replaced by CONTRACTOR at his own expense.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the coating materials supplied by him are properly
packed and clearly marked with the following :
-
3.4
Manufacturers name
Material qualification
Batch number
Date of manufacturing and date of expiry.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the manufacturer has carried out all quality control
tests on each batch and manufacturer shall provide test certificates to certify that
the supplied materials meet the manufacturers specifications as indicated in the
purchase order and as approved by COMPANY. Certificates and data sheets
certifying the qualities of the
coating materials shall be submitted by
CONTRACTOR to COMPANY prior to application. COMPANY reserves the right to
have the materials tested by an independent laboratory.
Page 4 of 11
3.5
Materials shall be stored in sheltered storage in the manufacturers original packing

and away from direct sunlight and in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
3.6
CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain mobile facilities which contains all
necessary equipment and its spares for cleaning, coating repairs, inspection and
tests.
3.7
CONTRACTOR shall furnish sufficient number of the following equipment and the
required spares as a minimum for inspection and test purpose for each crew.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Fully automatic full circle adjustable holiday detector with a visible and
audible signal system for inspection of coatings.
Thickness gauge for measuring thickness.
Contact type temperature recording thermometer.
Roughness profile measuring (Stylus) instrument.
4.0
4.1
General
4.1.1
The application procedure shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instruction

and the minimum requirements specified below whichever are most stringent and
shall be demonstrated to and approved by the company. Manufacturers expert
shall supervise the application and shall be available at site upon request during
qualification of application procedure and during construction at CONTRACTORS
cost.
4.1.2
Operators for coating application shall be given necessary instructions and

training before start of work, by the CONTRACTOR. To verify and qualify the
application procedures, all coating applied during the qualification test, shall be
removed for destructive testing as detailed subsequently in this specification.
Contractor shall only utilize those operators who have been approved/ prequalified by the field joint coating manufacturer.
4.1.3
Oil, grease, salt shall be removed from steel surface by wiping with rags soaked
with suitable solvents such as naphtha or benzene. Kerosene shall not be used for
this purpose. Solvent cleaning procedure according to SSPC-SP 1 shall be followed.
4.1.4
Each field joint shall be blast cleaned using a closed cycle blasting unit or an open
expendable blasting equipment. With the first equipment type, steel or chilled shot
and iron grit shall be used and Garnet material with the second one. During blast
cleaning the pipe surface temperature shall be simultaneously more than 5 and
more than 3C above ambient Dew Point, while the ambient Relative Humidity shall
not be greater than 85%. Prior to surface cleaning the surface shall be completely
dry. The surface shall be cleaned to a grade Sa 2 in accordance with Swedish
Standard SIS-055900 with a roughness profile of 50-70 microns.
Surface
roughness profile shall be measured using an approved profile comparator in
accordance with ISO 8503-1 and shall be calibrated prior to the start of the work in
Page 5 of 11
accordance with ISO:8503-3 or ISO:8503-4. The blast cleanliness shall be checked

on every joint and the roughness profile shall be checked 1 every 10 joints.
Dust girt or foreign matter shall be removed from the cleaned surface by an
industrial vacuum cleaner. The dust contamination allowed shall be of a rating max
2 as per ISO:8502-3. The frequency of checking for dust contamination shall be 1
every 10 joints.
Blast cleaned field joint shall be coated within 2-4 hours according to the conditions
below :
-
Relative Humidity (RH) > 80%

Relative Humidity (RH) > 70-80%
Relative Humidity (RH) > 80%
2 Hours
3 Hours
4 Hours
Pipes delayed beyond this point or pipes showing any visible rust stain shall be
blast cleaned again.
4.1.5
The field joint surface shall be inspected immediately after blast cleaning and any
feature of the steel surface such as weld spatter, scabs, laminations or other
imperfections considered injurious to the coating integrity made visible during blast
cleaning shall be reported to the Company Representative and on permission from
Company Representative, such defects shall be removed by filing or grinding. Pipes
affected in this manner shall be then re-blast cleaned if the defective area is larger
than 50 mm in diameter.
4.1.6
The ends of existing pipe protective coating shall be inspected and chamfered.
Unbounded portions of the coating shall be removed and then suitably trimmed.
Portions where parent coating is removed shall be thoroughly cleaned as specified.
The adjacent chamfered areas of the line pipe coating shall be cleaned and
abraded, to expose a clean uniform fresh surface of uncontaminated factory applied
coating.
4.1.7
All steel joint surfaces shall be thoroughly examined before the application of the
coating in order to ensure the surfaces are free of oil, grease, rust, mud, earth or
any other foreign matter. All these substances shall be removed before coating, to
the procedures herein described.
4.1.8
Protection coating shall be applied on the joints immediately after the completion of
cleaning operation.
4.2
Application of Heat Shrink Wraparound / Sleeves

In addition to the general requirements stated above, following shall be taken into
account
Page 6 of 11
4.2.1
The wrap around sleeve shall be of a size such that a minimum overlap of 50mm
before applying is ensured (after shrinking) on both sides of the yard applied
corrosion coating of pipes.
In the cases where carrier pipe is installed by direct boring/ jacking, the overlap on
the mill coating for the leading edges of the joints shall be minimum 200mm. When
this extra overlap is achieved by providing an additional patch of heat shrink tape/
wraparound, it shall be applied in such a manner that the square edge of the patch
on the joint coating is in the direction opposite to the direction of boring/ jacking.
4.2.2
Before centering the wraparound sleeve, the bare steel surface shall be preheated
with torch moved back and forth over the surface or by induction heating. The
minimum preheat temperature shall be as recommended by manufacturer and shall
be checked by means of contact type temperature recording thermometer.
Temperature indicating crayons shall not be used Pre-heat temperature shall be
checked on every joint. Care shall be taken to ensure that the entire circumference
of the pipe is heated evenly. Temperature measuring instruments shall be
calibrated immediately before the start of the works and thereafter at intervals
recommended by the manufacturer of the instrument.
4.2.3
Upon pre-heating the pipe surface shall be applied with two pack epoxy primer of
wet film thickness 100 microns or as per manufacturers recommendation
whichever is higher, to cover the exposed bare metal of the welded field joint and
10mm min. onto the adjacent pipe coating if recommended by the manufacturer.
The wet film thickness of the primer shall be checked or every joint with a wet film
thickness gauge prior to installation of sleeve. Thickness gauge shall be calibrated
once per shift.
4.2.4
Immediately after application of epoxy primer, the wraparound sleeve shall be

entirely wrapped around the pipe within the stipulated time recommended by the
manufacturer. Sleeve shall be positioned such that the closure patch is located to
one side of the pipe in 10 or 2 Oclock position, with the edge of the undergoing
layer facing upward and an overlap of min. 50mm. Gently heat by appropriate
torch the backing and the adhesive of the closure and press it firmly into place.
4.2.5
A heat shrinking procedure shall be applied to shrink the sleeve in such a manner
to start shrinkage of the sleeve beginning from the center of the sleeve and heat
circumferentially around the pipe. Continue heating from the center towards one
end of the sleeve until recovery is completed. In a similar manner, heat and
shrink the remaining side. Shrinking has been completed when the adhesive
begins to ooze at the sleeve edges all around the circumference.
The complete shrinking of the entire sleeve shall be obtained without undue
heating of existing pipe coating and providing due bonding between pipe, sleeve
and pipe coating. The installed sleeve shall not be disturbed until the adhesive has
solidified.
Page 7 of 11
4.3
Application Procedure for Corrosion Protection Tapes
4.3.1
Cold applied joint protection tapes shall be of the type which can be applied by
spirally wrapping on the pipe.
4.3.2
Immediately after the completion of surface preparation the approved primer of

wet film thickness 100 microns or as per manufacturers recommendation
whichever is higher to cover the exposed bare metal of the welded field joint and
10mm min. onto the adjacent pipe coating if recommended by the manufacturer.
Any dirt on the primed surface shall be removed. If the primer is damaged, the
damaged area shall be cleaned and re-primed.
4.3.3
Approximately 100mm of tape interleaving paper shall be peeled back and tape
shall be applied with the adhesive side to the pipe. Whilst continuously removing
the interleaving paper, the tape shall be spirally applied to provide a minimum of
55% overlap. Sufficient tension shall be applied to ensure good conformity,
avoiding air pockets and also continuously smooth out as the wrapping proceeds.
The wrapping shall start and finish to give a minimum of 50mm overlap on to the
adjoining yard applied coating. Outer wrap shall be applied in similar method.
4.4
Pre-Qualification of Field Joint Coating System

The field joint coating system materials and the procedures proposed by the
Contractor shall be pre-qualified during the sleeve installation start-up phase. Five
joints (5) shall be coated with the requirements of this specification and then
inspected and tested in accordance with the requirements of this specification with
respect to the following :
-
Surface preparation cleanliness, roughness profile and dust contamination

Pre-heat temperature (as applicable)
Primer thickness
As applied coating thickness
Holiday detection
Peel test at (+) 23C & (+) 60C on pipe surface & factory applied coating
and at over laps (as applicable). If required to achieve the temperature of
(+) 60C, suitable thermal blanket may be used.
Visual appearance and void after installation on the body, area adjoining the
weld and area adjoining the factory applied coating. (To establish voids
adjoining the weld and factory coating a strip of 50mm wide and 200mm
long shall be stripped and examined).
Company Representative shall witness the tests and inspection. Regular application
of field joint coating shall commence only upon successful completion of the prequalification testing.
After successful completion of the pre-qualification testing as above, the entire field
joint coating shall be removed, the pipe surface re-blasted and field joint coating
re-applied as per the requirements of this specification.
Page 8 of 11
5.0
5.1
Visual Inspection
Visual inspection of the as applied coating shall be carried out on every joint, for
the following :
5.2
Mastic extrusion on either ends of the sleeve shall be examined.
There shall be no sign of punctures or pinholes or bend failure. The external

appearance of the sleeve shall be smooth, free of dimples, air entrapment
or void formation. All sleeves shall be tested for the presence of voids by
knocking on the sleeves. A hollow sound compared to the remainder of the
sleeve may indicate the presence of voids under the sleeve. Such sleeve
shall be tested for adhesion at the discretion of the Company
Representative.
Weld bead profile shall be visible through the sleeve.
Visual indicator provided on the backing and the closure patch showing
desired heat is achieved.
Holiday Inspection
The holiday detector used shall be checked and calibrated daily with an accurate
DC voltmeter. The detector electrode shall be in direct contact with the surface of
coating to be inspected.
The entire surface of the joint section shall be inspected by means of a full circle
holiday detector approved by COMPANY set to a DC voltage applicable as per the
requirements of factory applied mainline coating specification of Company.
Inspection of the sleeves shall be conducted only after the joint has cooled below
50C. The holiday detector used shall be checked and calibrated daily with an
accurate DC voltmeter. The detector electrode shall be in direct contact with the
surface of coating to be inspected.
No field joint shall be covered or lowered in the trench until it has been approved
by the COMPANY.
5.3
As-applied Coating Thickness

Coating thickness shall be checked by non-destructed methods for each field joint.
Average thickness of the as-applied coating on pipe body shall be established based
on measurement at min. eight locations i.e. four measurement on either sides of
the girth weld at 3, 6, 9, & 12 Oclock positions. To establish the minimum
thickness on the girth weld, four measurement shall be taken on apex on the weld
at 3, 6, 9 & 12 Oclock positions. All such measurements shall be recorded.
Page 9 of 11
Company Representative reserves the right to ask for additional measurement at

any location on the field joint coating, whenever doubt arises.
5.4
Peel Strength Testing
5.4.1
One out of every 50 joint coatings or one joint coating out of every days
production whichever is stringent shall be tested to establish the peel strength on
steel and factory applied coating. Contractor shall carry out such testing in the
presence of Company Representative.
5.4.2
From each test sleeve selected as above, one or more strips of size 25mm x
200mm shall be cut perpendicular to the pipe axis and slowly peeled off.
The required peel strength shall meet the requirements of this specification as
applicable for (+) 23C or (+) 60C whichever is feasible. This test shall be
conducted between wrapping & metal and mill coating & between layers at overlap
with joint coating (wherever applicable). After removal of strip, the bulk of
adhesive shall remain adhered to the pipe showing no bare metal, otherwise, test
shall be considered failed. The adhesive layer that remains on the pipe surface
shall generally be free of voids resulting from air or gas inclusion. In case the peel
strength test at a different temperature than that specified in warranted due to the
ambient site conditions, then the peel strength shall comply the recommendation of
the manufacturer. Manufacturer shall be asked to furnish peel strength values
corresponding to various expected temperatures, prior to start of the works.
5.4.3
If the sleeve does not meet the requirements of clause 5.4.2 the adjacent two
sleeves shall also be tested. If the adjacent two sleeves are acceptable the test rate
shall be increased to one sleeve every twenty five until Companys Representative
is satisfied. The test rate can then be reduced as per clause 5.4.1. If either or
both of the adjacent two sleeves do not meet the requirements of clause 5.4.2, the
field joint shall be stopped.
5.4.4
Company Representative reserve the right of 100% removal of sleeves if he is not

convinced that the requirements of clause 5.4.2 are achieved.
6.0
REPAIRS
6.1
If a field joint is detected to be unacceptable after testing as per section 5.0 of this
specification the Contractor shall, at his own cost :
-
Determine the cause of the faulty results of the field coating.
Mobilise the expert of manufacturer, if required.
Test to be complete satisfaction of the COMPANY, already completed field

coatings.
Page 10 of 11
Stop field coating until remedial measures are taken against the causes of such
faults, to the entire satisfaction of the Company.
6.2
CONTRACTOR shall replace all joint found or expected to be unacceptable as per

section 5.0 of this specification.
6.3
CONTRACTOR shall, at his own cost repair all areas where the coating has been
removed for testing by COMPANY.
6.4
After the coating work on welded joints, fittings and repairs to the coating have
been completed the coating as a whole shall be tested with a spark-tester before
lowering or jacking the pipeline.
6.5
COMPANY shall be entitled to check the coating on buried pipelines or parts of

pipelines with equipment such as the "Pearson Meter" and the resistance meter. If
the Coating defects are established, the Contractor shall be responsible for
excavations at such points repair the coating, spark testing and back filling the
excavations without extra charge.
7.0
DOCUMENTATION
7.1
Prior to procurement of coating materials, Contractor shall furnish the following

information for qualification of the manufacturer and material :
i.
ii.
iii.
Complete information as per clause 5.2, DIN EN 12068 alongwith

descriptive technical catalogues.
Test certificates and results of previously conducted tests, for all
properties listed in clause 3.2 of this specification.
Reference list of previous supplies, in last 5 years, of the similar material
indicating the project details such as diameter, quantity, operating
temperature, year of supply, project name, contact person and feed back
on performance.
Once the Companys approval has been given, any change in material or
Manufacturer shall be notified to Company, whose approval in writing of all
changes shall be obtained before the materials are manufactured.
7.2
Prior to shipment of materials from the Manufacturers works. Contractor shall

furnish the following documents :
i.
ii.
iii.
7.3
Test certificates/ results as per Manufacturers Quality Control Procedure

for each batch of materials.
Specific application instructions with pictorial illustrations.
Specific storage and handling instructions.
All documents shall be in English language only.
Page 11 of 11
SPECIFICATION
FOR
3-LAYER POLYETHYLENE COATING OF LINEPIPES
SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/S/05/62/014, Rev-2
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
\\Akjha\work contrac\standard TS for Pipe Line WC (Vol-II) MASTER FOLDER\14 3-layer pe coated line pipe\3-LPE Coating of Linepipes-TS-R2 14.doc
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3.0
PLANT SCALE AND INSTALLATION
4.0
MATERIALS
5.0
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROPERTIES OF COATING
6.0
MEASUREMENT AND LOGGING
7.0
COATING PROCEDURE AND QUALIFICATION
8.0
PIPE SURFACE PREPARATION
9.0
COATING APPLICATION
10.0
11.0
HANDLING, TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE
12.0
REPAIR OF COATING
13.0
MARKING
14.0
QUALITY ASSURANCE
ANNEXURE-I
COATING SYSTEM/ MATERIAL PRE-QUALIFICATION
1.0
SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum requirements for supply/ arrangement of all
materials, plant, equipment, plant sites, consumables, utilities and application
including all labour, supervision, inspection and tests etc. for application of external
anti-corrosion coating of pipes by using 3 Layer Side Extruded Polyethylene Coating
conforming to DIN-30670, 1991, `Polyethylene Coating of Steel Pipes and Fittings'
and the requirements of this specification.
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
Reference has also been made to the latest edition of the following standards,
codes and specifications. The edition enforce at the time of floating the enquiry
shall be termed as latest edition.
a.
ASTM D-149
Standard Test Methods of Dielectric

Breakdown voltage and Dielectric strength of
solid electrical insulating materials at
commercial frequencies.
b.
ASTM D-257
Standard Test Methods for D-C Resistance or

conductance of insulating materials.
c.
ASTM D-543
Standard Method of Test for Ressistance of

Plastics to Chemical Reagents.
d.
ASTM D-570
Standard Method of
Absorption of Plastics.
e.
ASTM D-638
Standard Test Method for Tensile

Properties of Plastics.
f.
ASTM D-792
Standard Test Method of Specific Gravity and

Density of Plastics by Displacement.
g.
ASTM D-1238
Test Method for Low Rate of Thermoplastics

by Extrusion.
h.
ASTM D-1525
Test Method for Vicat Softening Temperature

of Plastics
i.
ASTM D-1603
Test Method for Carbon Black in Olefin

Plastics
j.
ASTM D-1693
Test Method for Environmental Stress

Cracking of Ethylene Plastics
Test
for
Water
Page 1 of 35
k. ASTM D-2240
Test Method for Rubber Property

Durometer Hardness
l.
Test Method for Oxidative Induction Time

of Polyolefins by Differential Scanning
Calorimetry
ASTM D-3895
m.
ASTM G-42
Tentative Methods for Cathodic disbonding of

Pipeline Coatings Subjected to Elevated or
Cyclic Temperatures.
n.
API RP 5L1
Recommended
Practice
Transportation of Linepipe.
o.
API RP 5LW
Transportation of Line Pipe on barges and

marine vessels
p.
DIN EN 10204
Metallic Products Types of Inspection

Documents
q.
DIN 53735
Testing of Plastics : Determination of Melt

Index of Thermoplastics.
r.
ISO 8502-3
Preparation of Steel Stubstrates before

Part-3 Assessment of Dust on Steel
Surfaces Prepared for Painting (Pressure
Sensitive Tape Method)
s.
ISO 9002
Quality Systems : Specification of Production

and Installation
t.
ISO 11124
Preparation of Steel Substrates Before

u.
SIS 055900
Preparation of Steel Substrates before

Visual Assessment of Surface Cleanliness.
v.
APL 5L
Specification for Line Pipe
w.
ASME B 31.8
Gas Transmission and Distribution

Piping Systems
x.
ASME B 31.4
Liquid Transportation systems for

Hydrocarbons, Liquid petroleum Gas
Anhydrous ammonia, and Alcohols
for
Railroad
Page 2 of 35
y.
CSA Z245.20-98
External Fusion Bond Epoxy Coating for

Steel Pipe
The CONTRACTOR shall be familiar with the requirements of these documents

and shall make them readily available at the coating plant to all persons
concerned with carrying out the works specified in this specification.
3.0
PLANT SCALE AND INSTALLATION
3.1
CONTRACTOR shall size coating plant(s) after evaluating the scale of work and the
time schedule required for the works. Coating plant(s), shall be installed into a yard
whose geometry and dimensions are such as to allow the execution of a continuous
work schedule. For this purpose the CONTRACTOR shall ensure non stop work
execution owing to prohibitive adverse weather conditions and when required
CONTRACTOR shall install requisite equipment and plant in roofed and adequately
weather protected areas.
3.2
Plant equipment, machinery and other facilities shall be in first class operating
condition to atleast meet the job requirements of quality and production. Worn out
and improvised plants are not acceptable.
3.3
CONTRACTOR shall, at his own responsibility and cost, provide and prepare all
necessary area for the storage of bare and coated pipe and all other materials, for
coating yard, stock-piling and other temporary installation. For each area,
CONTRACTOR shall provide to stipulate servitude agreements as required with the
relevant Authorities, and, on work completion, to clean, restore and pay servitude
and claims for damages, as applicable.
3.4
CONTRACTOR shall at its own responsibility and cost, provide for water and power
supply and other utilities and consumables and obtain authorisation regarding
access roads and other permits required for the execution of works conforming to
all the requirements of the governing authorities.
3.5
CONTRACTOR shall at its own expense provide a fully equipped laboratory and test
facilities with adequate inventory to carry out tests required for the procedure
qualification and during regular production. Outside testing for qualification and
regular production is not acceptable to COMPANY.
3.6
The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for adherence to all statutory

regulations applicable for handling and disposal of the hazardous chemicals during
the coating works.
3.7
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining all statutory approvals/

clearances from relevant Authorities including Pollution Control Board, as applicable
for the coating plant(s).
Page 3 of 35
4.0
MATERIALS
4.1
The three layer coating system shall comprise of a powder epoxy primer,
polythylene adhesive and a polyethylene top coat. Coating materials shall be
suitable for the service conditions and the pipe sizes involved. The coating materials
i.e. epoxy powder, adhesive and polyethylene compound shall have proven
compatibility. The coating system and materials shall be pre-qualified and approval
COMPANY in accordance with provision Annexure-I of this specification.
CONTRACTOR shall obtain prior approval from COMPANY for the coating system
and coating of all materials.
4.2
The coating materials Manufacturer shall carry out tests for all properties specified
in para 5.3.1 and 5.3.2 for each batch of epoxy, adhesive and polyethylene
compound. In addition, the Manufacturer shall also furnish Infra-red Scan for each
batch of epoxy powder. The coating materials manufacturer shall issue test
certificates as per DIN EN 10204, 3.1B for each batch of materials supplied to
CONTRACTOR and the same shall be submitted to COMPANY for approval prior to
their use.
4.3
In addition to Manufacturers certificate, the CONTRACTOR shall draw samples

from each batch of epoxy, adhesive and polyethylene in the presence of
COMPANY Representative and test for the following properties at the coating
yard at least one week prior to its use, to establish compliance with the
Manufacturers certificates.
a)
Epoxy Powder
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
b)
Adhesive
i.
ii.
iii.
c)
Gel Time
Cure Time
Moisture Content
Thermal Characteristics (Tgl, Tg2, H)
Specific Gravity
Melt Flow Rate
Vicat Softening Point
Polyethylene
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
Melt Flow Rate

Specific Gravity
Moisture Content
Oxidative Induction Time
In case of failure of any of the above tests in a batch, that batch of material shall
be tested for all other tests required as per para 5.3.1 and 5.3.2 including the tests
Page 4 of 35
which failed. If all tests pass, the batch shall be accepted for coating. If any of the
tests fail, entire batch of material shall be rejected and shall not be used for the
coating.
4.4
All materials to be used shall be supplied in sealed, damage free containers and
shall be suitably marked and identifiable with the following minimum information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Name of the manufacturer

Type of material
Batch Number
Place and Date of Manufacture
Shelf Life/ Expiry Date (if applicable)
Quantity
All materials noted to be without above identification shall be deemed/ suspect and
shall be rejected by COMPANY. Such materials shall not be used for coating and
shall be removed from site and replaced by CONTRACTOR at its expense.
4.6
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all coating materials properly stored in accordance
with the Manufacturers recommendation at all times, to prevent damage and
deterioration in quality prior to use.
4.7
CONTRACTOR shall be required to use all materials on a date received rotation

basis, i.e. first in-first used basis.
5.0
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROPERTIES COATING
5.1
The coating must be able to withstand a maximum in service operating

temperature of +65C and shall conform to `S Type of coating as per DIN 30670.
In addition, in open storage the coating must be able to withstand a temperature of
atleast +80C, without impairing its serviceability and properties specified.
5.2
The top coat polyethylene used shall be black readymade compound, fully stabilized
against influence of ultraviolet radiation (.e. sunlight), oxygen in air and heat (due
to environmental temperature as specified above). No appreciable changes shall
occur during exposure to such environments up to at least a period of 6000 hours.
The CONTRACTOR shall submit certificate from Manufacturer in this regard.
5.3
Properties
Properties of coating system and coating material shall comply the requirements
indicated in subsequent paragraph. In case the coating/ material properties are
tested as per test methods/ standards other than specified herein below, the same
may be accepted provided the test procedures and test conditions are same or
more stringent than the specified.
Page 5 of 35
5.3.1
Properties of Epoxy Powder and Adhesive

CONTRACTOR shall choose such a brand of epoxy powder and adhesive that will
achieve the functional requirements and properties of coating system as specified in
para 5.1 and 5.3.3 of this specification respectively. Epoxy powder properties shall
be as per CSA Z245.20.98. The colour of epoxy powder shall be either green or
dark red or any other colour approved by COMPANY except grey colour. Copoymer
grafted adhesive shall have the following properties.
Sl.
No.
a.
b.
c.
5.3.2
Properties
Unit
Requirement
Test Method
Melt Flow Rate (190C / 2.16 kg)

Specific Gravity
g/10 minutes
C
-
1.0
90 min.
0.926 min.
ASTM D1238
ASTM D1525
ASTM D792
Properties of Polyethylene Compound

Sl.
No.
Properties
Units
Requirement
Test Method
a.
Tensile Strength @+25C
N/mm2
17 min.
ASTM D 638
b.
Melt Flow Rate
g/10
minute
0.25 min.
ASTM D 1238
or DIN 53735
0.941 min. (HDPE)
ASTM D 792
Shore D
50 min.
ASTM D 2240
0.05 max
ASTM D 570
Ohm-cm
1015 min
ASTM D 257
Volts/
mm
30,000 min
ASTM D 149
(190C / 2.16 kg)

c.
Specific Gravity @+25C
d.
Hardness @+25C
e.
Water Absorption, 24 hours, @+25C
f.
Volume Resistivity @+25C
g.
Dielectric withstand,1000 Volt/sec rise

@+25C
h.
110 min.
ASTM D 1525
i.
Elongation
600 min.
ASTM D 638
j.
Oxidative Induction Time in Oxygen at

220C, Aluminium pan, no screen
Min
10
ASTM D3895
j.
Environmental Stress Crack Resistance

(ESCR) (for F50)
Medium Density, Condition C
High Density, Condition B
Carbon Black Content
Hours
l.
ASTM D1693
300
300
2 min.
ASTM D1603
Page 6 of 35
5.3.3
Sl.
No.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Properties of Coating System

Properties
Bond Strength (using Type 2 Test
Assembly i.e. Dynamometer)
@ 205C
@ 605C
Impact Strength (min. of 30 impacts on
body along the length. No breakdown
allowed when tested at 25 kV)
Indentation Hardness
Unit
Requirement
Kg/cm
8.0 min
5.0 min.
7 min
Joules per mm
of coating
thickness
mm
DIN 30670
0.2 max
@ 702C
0.3 max
Elongation at Failure
Coating Resistivity (*)
f.
DIN 30670
DIN 30670
@ 232C
e.
Test Method
300 min.
2
DIN 30670
Ohm-m
10 min.
DIN 30670
Heat Ageing (*)
Melt flow rate shall

not deviate by more
than 35% of
original value
DIN 30670
g.
Light Ageing (*)
Melt flow rate shall

not deviate by more
than 35% of
original value
DIN 30670
h.
Cathodic Disbondment
@+65C after 30 days
mm radius of
disbondment
15 max.
(**)
7 max.
@+65C after 48 hrs

i.
ASTM G42
Degree of Cure of Epoxy

Percentage Cure, H
95
Tg
+3/ -2
CSA
Z245.2098(*)
(*)
Test carried out in an independent laboratory of national/ international

recognition on PE top coat is also acceptable.
(**) Disbondment shall be equivalent circle radius of total unsealed area as per
ASTM G42.
(***) Temperature to which the test specimens are to be heated during cyclic
heating shall however be as per the recommendations of epoxy powder
manufacturer.
6.0
MEASUREMENT AND LOGGING

CONTRACTOR shall maintain records in computer using MS ACCESS database
Software containing all the relevant data of individual pipe and pipe coating
including heat number, diameter, length, wall thickness, defects, pipe number,
batches of materials, materials balance, sampling, testing, damages, repairs,
rejects and any other information that COMPANY considers to be relevant and
required for all incoming bare pipes and COMPANY approved outgoing coated
Page 7 of 35
pipes as applicable. CONTRACTOR shall submit this information in the form of a

report at the agreed intervals. The above data shall also be provided in MS
EXCEL/MS ACCESS formant in Compact Disc (CD). CONTRACTOR shall provide a
Computer Terminal to COMPANY Representative for monitoring/tracking of the
above. The CONTRACTOR shall also submit the material balance details to
COMPANY for information at the end of shift.
7.0
COATING PROCEDURE AND QUALIFICATION
7.1
Upon the award of the CONTRACT, the CONTRACTOR shall submit within two(2)
weeks for COMPANY approval, a detailed report in the form of bound manual
outlining, but not limited to the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f
g
Details of plant(s), locations, layout, capacity and production rate(s).

Details of the equipment available to carry out the coating works including
surface preparation, epoxy powder application and its recycling system,
adhesive & polyethylene extrusion, moisture control facilities available for
coating materials.
Details of process control and inspection equipment required for the
coating process such as temperature control, thickness control, holiday
testers, etc.
Details of chemicals pre-treatment facilities including process control and
inspection equipment for phosphoric acid wash, de-ionised-ionised water
wash and chromate wash.
Facilities in the yard for unloading, handling, transport, production,
storage, stockpiling, loading of bare and coated pipes and warehouses for
storage of other coating materials.
Plant Organogram Chart and availability of manpower including coating
specialist.
Details of utilities/facilities such as water, power, fuel, access roads and
communication etc.
After approval has been given by COMPANY, no change in plant set-up shall be
made. However, unavoidable changes shall be executed only after obtaining
written approval from COMPANY.
7.2
At least four(4) weeks prior to the commencement of production coating, a

detailed procedure of CONTRACTOR's methods, material proposed, etc., shall be
formulated by CONTRACTOR and submitted for COMPANY's approval in the form
of a bound manual. The procedure shall include, but not limited to the following
information and proposals:
a.
b.
c.
Pipe inspection at the time of bare pipe receipt.

Steel surface preparation, including preheating, removal of steel defects,
method of pipe cleaning, dust removal, abrasive blast cleaning and surface
profile, methods of measurements and consumables.
Complete details of chemical pre-treatment viz phosphoric acid wash, deionised water wash, and chromate wash including product data sheets,
Page 8 of 35
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
health and safety sheets and manufacturers recommended application

procedure.
Pipe heating, temperatures and control prior to epoxy application.
Complete details of raw materials including current data sheets showing
values for all the properties specified together with quality control and
application procedure recommendation from manufacturer(s).
Application of FBE powder, adhesive and polyethylene, including
characteristics, temperature, line speed, application window, curing time,
etc.
Quenching and cooling, including time and temperature.
Quality assurance system, Inspection and testing methods and reporting
formats, including instrument and equipment types, makes and uses etc.
Detailed method of repair of coating defects duly classified depending upon
nature and magnitude of defects and repairs thereof including coating
stripping technique.
Details of instrument and equipment calibration methods including relevant
standards and examples of calibration certificates.
Complete details and inventory of laboratory and equipment for procedure
qualification and regular production.
Pipe handling and stock piling procedures.
Sample of recording and reporting formats, including laboratory reports,
certificates and requirement as per clause 6.0 of this specification.
Complete details of test certificates for raw materials including test
methods standards used.
Test certificates from PE compound manufacturer for tests for thermal
aging coating resistivity and aging under exposure to light. These test
certificates shall not be older than three years.
Health, safety and environment plans.
Storage details of coating materials and chemicals.
Continuous temperature monitoring at various stages of coating.
Procedure Qualification Tests (PQT) shall be carried out only after obtaining
written approval of the above procedure from COMPANY. No change in the
procedure shall be made after approval has been given by the COMPANY.
However, unavoidable changes shall be executed only after obtaining written
approval from COMPANY.
7.3
Prior to start of production, CONTRACTOR shall, at his expense, carry out a

coating procedure qualification trial for each pipe diameter, and for each plant,
to prove that his plant, materials, and coating procedures result in a quality of
end product conforming to the properties stated in clause 5.3, relevant
standards, specifications and material manufacturers recommendations.
CONTRACTOR shall give seven(7) working days notice to witness procedures and
tests.
A batch representing a normal production run, typically 15 pipes, shall be coated
in accordance with the approval coating procedure and the coating operations
witnessed by COMPANY Representative. Out of these pipes, at least one pipe
Page 9 of 35
shall be coated partly with epoxy and partly with both epoxy and adhesive
layers.
Atleast 5 (five) test pipes shall be selected by Company Representative for
coating procedure approval tests and shall be subjected to procedure
qualification testing as described hereinafter. All tests shall be witnessed by
COMPANYs representative. Out of 5(five) test pipes 1(one) pipe shall be coated
partly with epoxy and partly with both epoxy and adhesive layers. Remaining
4(four) test pipes shall be coated with all three layers.
During PQT, the CONTRACTOR shall qualify various procedures forming a part of
coating operations as detailed subsequently.
7.4
Qualification of Procedures
7.4.1
Epoxy Powder Application & Recycling

During pre-qualification, air pressure in the epoxy spray guns, satisfactory
functioning of monitoring system, line speed vs coating thickness, etc. shall be
established. Dew point of air used to supply the fluidised bed, epoxy spray
system and epoxy recycling system shall be recorded during the PQT.
Also, the CONTRACTOR shall remove samples of reclaimed powder from the
reclamation system. These of reclaimed powder shall be subject to a detailed
visual examination, thermal analysis and moisture content tests. The properties
of the reclaimed powder shall be within the range specified by the Manufacturer
of epoxy powder. In case the properties of the reclaimed powder are out of the
range specified by the Manufacturer, CONTRACTOR shall not the use the
reclaimed powder during the regular production.
7.4.2
Pipe Pre-Heating
The CONTRACTOR shall establish the temperature variation due to in-coming
pipe temperature, line speed variation, wall thickness variation, emissivity,
interruptions, etc. and document the same during the PQT stage. During PQT,
proper functioning of pipe temperature monitoring and recording system
including alarm/ hooter shall be demonstrated to the COMPANY Representative.
7.4.3
Surface Preparation
The procedure to clean and prepare the pipe surface shall be in accordance with
the requirements of this specification. The ratio to shots to grits shall be
established during procedure qualification testing, such that the resultant surface
profile is not dished and rounded. The qualification shall be performed through a
visual inspection, measurement of roughness and check of the presence of dust
in the abrasive blast cleaned pipe surface.
Page 10 of 35
7.4.4
Chemical Pre-Treatment
7.4.4.1
Phosphoric Acid Wash followed by De-ionised Water Wash

The procedure to apply the chemical pre-treatment viz. phosphoric acid wash
followed by de-ionised water wash shall be in accordance with the
recommendation of the manufacturer and shall result in intended cleaning
requirements of this specification. Working solution preparation, maintaining
concentration, application procedure including method of spreading, spreading
rate, drying times, etc. depending upon the cleanliness/ temperature of the
incoming pipe and the line speed shall be established. Temperature of the
chemical, pipe pre-heat temperature vs line speed vs dwell time, rinsing
procedure, testing & control, rectificatory measures, drying procedure etc. shall
be clearly established during PQT. Also the quality of the deionised water shall
be established during PQT.
7.4.4.2
Chromate Treatment
The procedure to apply the chromate treatment shall be in accordance with the
recommendation of the manufacturer. Working solution preparation, maintaining
concentration, application procedure including method of spreading, spreading
rate, drying times, etc. depending upon the temperature of the incoming pipe
and the line speed shall be established. Temperature of the chemical, pipe preheat temperature vs line speed, pipe heating after chromating and time limit
within which the pipe to be heated, testing & control, rectificatory measures,
shall be clearly established during PQT.
7.4.5
Coating Application
The COMPANY Representative will check the correctness of each coating
application operation, values of the main parameters of each operation, preheating pipe surface temperature prior to epoxy powder application temperature,
line speed, fusion bonded epoxy curing time, temperature and flow rate of copolymer adhesive and polyethylene etc. and the same shall be recorded. These
values shall be complied with during regular production.
7.5
Qualification of Applied Coating
7.5.1
Tests on pipe coated partly with epoxy and partly with epoxy &
adhesive Layers
a.
Degree of Cure
Epoxy film samples (min 4 Nos.) shall be scrapped from the coated pipe
using hammer and cold chisel and the samples shall be taken for cure
test using Differential Scanning Calorimatry (DSC) procedure. Care shall
be taken to remove the samples of full film thickness avoiding inclusion of
Page 11 of 35
steel debris. Glass transition temperature differential (Tg) and % cure

(H) shall comply the specified requirements.
b.
Epoxy Layer Thickness

Epoxy layer thickness shall be checked at every one meter spacing at 3,
6, 9 and 12 oclock positions. The thickness shall comply the specified
thickness requirements.
c.
Adhesive Layer Thickness

Adhesive layer thickness shall be checked at every one meter spacing at
3, 6, 9 and 12 oclock positions. The thickness shall comply the specified
thickness requirements.
d.
Holiday Inspection
Entire pipe shall be subject to holiday inspection and the test voltage
shall be set to exceed 5 v/micron of epoxy thickness specified for the
portion coated only with epoxy layer.
e.
Adhesion Test
i)
ii)
f.
Adhesion Test (24 hrs or 48 hrs) shall be carried out on the epoxy
coated pipe. Test method, no. of test specimen and acceptance
criteria shall comply CSA Z.245,20-98, Table 4.
Adhesion of FBE shall also be separately determined at ambient
temperature at two locations by the St Andrews Cross method
and the test shall comply with the specified requirements.
2.5 Flexibility Test

2.5 Flexibility test shall be carried out on the epoxy coated pipe at test
temperature of 0C. Test method, no. of test specimen and acceptance
criteria shall comply CSA Z.245,20-98, Table-4.
g.
Cross-section & Interface Porosity Test

Cross section porosity and interface porosity tests shall be carried out on
the epoxy coated pipe. Test method, no. of test specimen and
acceptance criteria shall comply CSA Z.245,20-98, Table-4.
7.5.2
Tests on pipes coated only with all three layers

a.
Bond Strength
Three test pipes shall be selected for bond strength tests. On each of the
selected pipes, three bond strength test shall be performed for each
Page 12 of 35
specified temperature i.e. one at each end and one in the middle of the
pipe and specified requirements shall be complied with, i.e. bond strength
as well as mode of separation. Length of peel shall be minimum 65mm.
None of these samples shall fail.
b.
Impact Strength
Three test pipes shall be selected for impact strength test and the test
shall meet the requirement.
c.
Two samples for both the temperatures from all pipes shall be taken. If
any one of these samples fail to satisfy the requirements, then the test
shall be repeated on four more samples. In this case, none of the
samples must fail.
d.
Six samples each from two coated pipes i.e. 18 samples in all shall be
tested and the test shall comply the specified requirement. Only one
sample per pipe may fail.
e.
Cathodic Disbondment Test

Two CD test shall be carried out for the total lot of test pipes having all
three layers. One test shall be carried out for 30 days duration and
another test for 45 hours duration The tests shall comply the specified
requirement. Whenever Procedure Qualification is necessitated for
different pipe size with same coating material combination, 48 hours test
only be conducted. 30 days CD test is not mandatory in this case.
f.
Holiday Inspection
All the pipes shall be subject to holiday inspection. The test voltage shall
be as specified in para 10.4(b)
g.
Coating Thickness Measurement

All pipes shall be subject to coating thickness measurement. Acceptance
criteria shall be as per para 10.3
h.
Air Entrapment
One sample each from pipe body and on weld (if applicable) shall be
taken from all four coated pipes and the specified requirements shall be
complied with.
Page 13 of 35
i.
Degree of Cure
Epoxy film samples (minimum 4 no., equally spaced) shall be scrapped
from one coated pipe and the samples shall be taken for cure test using
Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC) procedure. Care shall be taken to
remove the samples of full film thickness avoiding inclusion of steel
debris. Glass transition temperature differential (Tg) and % cure (H)
shall comply with the specified requirements.
7.5.3
Inspection of all test pipes

All pipes shall be subject to the following inspections:
a.
b.
c.
d.
surface cleanliness, surface roughness measurements and dust control

immediately after second abrasive blast cleaning and salt test
immediately after De-ionised water wash.
pH of pipe surface before and after phosphoric acid wash.
visual inspection of chromate coating.
visual inspection of finished coating, cut back dimension, internal/
external cleanliness, end sealing and bevel inspection.
Acceptance criteria for all inspection and testing shall be as specified in this
specification.
7.6
After completion of the qualification tests and inspection as per para 7.4 and 7.5
above, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare and issue to COMPANY for approval a
detailed report of the above tests and inspection including test reports/
certificates of all materials and coatings tested. Only upon written approval from
COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall commence production coating.
7.7
On successful completion of PQT, coating of all five(5) test pipes shall be

removed and completely recycled as per the approval coating procedure
specification, at CONTRACTORs expense. Remaining pipes will be accepted by
COMPANY provided they meet the requirements of this specification and need
not be stripped and re-cycled.
7.8
The CONTRACTOR shall re-establish the requirements of qualification and in a

manner as stated before or to the extent considered necessary by COMPANY, in
the event of, but not limited to, the following :
Every time there is a change in the previously qualified procedure.

Every time there is a change in the manufacturer and change in formulation
of any of the raw materials and change in location of raw material
manufacture.
Every time the coating yard is shifted from one location to the other or every
time the critical coating equipments (induction heater, epoxy spray system,
extruder, etc) are shifted.
Any change in line speed during coating application.
Page 14 of 35
Any time when in COMPANYs opinion the properties are deemed to be

suspect during regular production tests.
7.9
COMPANY reserves the right to conduct any or all the test required for
qualification through an independent laboratory or agency at the cost of
CONTRACTOR when in COMPANYs opinion, the results are deemed suspect.
COMPANYs decision shall be final.
8.0
PIPE SURFACE PREPARATION
8.1
Unless specified otherwise, the pipes shall be supplied free from mill applied oils
but may be subject to contamination occurring during transit.
8.2
Prior to cleaning operation, CONTRACTOR shall visually examine the pipes and
shall ensure that all defects, flats and other damages have been repaired or
removed. The CONTRACTOR shall also remove marking stickers, if any, present
within the pipe. Record shall be kept of such marking on the stickers of ensure
traceability of pipe after coating.
8.3
Any oil, grease, salt or other contaminants detrimental to the formation of a

good coating bond or coating quality shall be removed prior to coating
application. Contaminants may be removed by the use of non-oily solvents.
Gasoline or kerosene shall not be used for this purpose. Visible oil and grease
spots shall be removed by solvent wiping. Solvents cleaning shall be in
accordance with SSPC-SP1. Steel surface shall be allowed to dry before abrasive
cleaning.
8.4
All pipes shall be preheated to a temperature 65C to 85C prior to abrasive blast
cleaning. The external surface of the pipe shall be cleaned using 2 no. dry
abrasive blasting cleaning units to achieve the specified surface cleanliness and
profile. After first abrasive blast cleaning, chemical pre-treatment with
phosphoric acid solution as per para 8.6 shall be carried out prior to second
abrasive blast cleaning. However at the option of CONTRACTOR, chemical pretreatment with phosphoric acid solution as per para 8.6 may be carried out after
the second abrasive blaster.
The abrasive blast cleaning units shall have an effective dust collection system to
ensure total removal of dust generated during blast cleaning from the pipe
surface. The equipment used for abrasive blast cleaning shall meet the specified
requirements and shall be free from oil, water soluble salts and other forms of
contamination to ensure that the cleaning process is not impaired. Traps,
separators and filters shall be checked for condensed water and oil at the start of
each shift and emptied and cleaned regularly. During abrasive blast cleaning the
metallic abrasive shall be continuously sieved to remove fines and
contaminates and the quality checked at every four hours. Abrasive used for
blast cleaning shall comply ISO- 11124.
Page 15 of 35
8.5
Suitable plugs shall be provided at both pipe ends to prevent entry of any
shot/grit into pipe during blast cleaning operations. These plugs shall be
removed after blast cleaning. Alternatively the CONTRACTOR may link pipes
suitably together to prevent the entry of any short/grit into the pipe.
8.6
Chemical Pre-treatment with Phosphoric Acid Solution
8.6.1
All pipes shall provided chemical pre-treatment with phosphoric acid solution.
10% solution of phosphoric acid, Oakite 31 / 33 or equivalent, shall be used to
remove all soluble salts and other soluble contaminations.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide data sheets and supporting documentation for
the phosphoric acid to be used. The documentation shall verify that the
phosphoric acid is suitable for the treatment of line prior to the application of the
specific fusion bonded epoxy powder being applied and the final wil meet fully
the requirements of this specification.
8.6.2
The pipe temperature immediately prior to the phosphoric acid treatment shall
be in the range of 45 to 75 C. Phosphoric acid treatment shall be followed
immediately by washing with de-ionised water. Deionised water used shall
conform to the following requirements :
Sl.
No.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Properties
Turbidity
Conductivity
Hardness
Total Alkalinity as CaCO3
Chloride as Cl
Sulphate as SO4=
PH
Unit
Requirement
NTU
mho/cm
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
-
1 max.
5 max.
Nil
2 to 3
1 max.
1 max.
6.5 to 7.5
Tests to determine the above properties shall be carried out in accordance with
Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater published
jointly by American Public Health Association, American Water Works Association
and Water Pollution Control Federation.
Quality of the deionised water shall be monitored at the start of each shift and at
every four hours interval. Non-compliance of deionised water wrt the above
requirements shall cause for stoppage of the operations.
8.6.3
The pH of the pipe surface shall be determined both before and after the deionised water rinse initially on each pipe and in case of consistent results, the
frequency may be relaxed to once per hour at the discretion of COMPANY
Representative. The measured pH shall be as follows :
Before de-ionised water wash
After de-ionised water wash
:
:
1 to 2
6 to 7
Page 16 of 35
8.6.4
After the de-ionised water wash, the pipe shall be dried with dry air and
preheated to a temperature of 65C to 85C.
8.6.5
The salt tests shall be carried out after de-ionised water rinse. One test shall be
carried out at one end of each pipe. The acceptance criteria shall be 2g/cm2.
An approved salt meter (SCM 400 or equivalent) shall be used to carry out salt
tests and shall be calibrated in accordance with the equipment manufacturers
recommendation.
8.7
Abrasive cleaning carried out shall be such that the resultant surface profile is
not dished and rounded when viewed with 30X magnification. The standard of
finish for cleaned pipe shall conform to near white metal finish to Sa 2 of
Swedish Standard SIS 055900 latest edition. Surface of pipe after abrasive blast
cleaning shall have an anchor pattern of 50 to 70 microns(Rz). This shall be
measured for each pipe by a suitable instrument such as surface profile depth
gauge. In addition the pipe surface after blast cleaning shall be checked for the
degree of cleanliness (Sa 2), degree of dust and shape of profile. Degree of
dust shall comply the requirements of ISO:8502 3. Acceptance limit shall be
either quality rating 2 or Class 2.
8.8
All pipes shall be visually examined for presence of any shot/ grit/ loose material
left inside the pipe during blast cleaning. Suitable mechanical means (stiff brush)
shall be employed to remove the same before the pipes are processed further. In
addition, inside surface of the pipe shall also be visually inspected for presence
of any foreign material or shots and grit (free or embedded/ sticking to pipe
inside surface). The pipe inside surface shall be examined using sharp floodlight
focused at the middle of the pipe at one end while inspection is carried out
visually from other end. Any foreign material or shots/ grit present in the pipe
shall be completely removed by mechanical/ brush, high pressure air jets, by
tilting of pipe etc.
8.9
At no time shall the blast cleaning be performed when the relative humidity
exceeds 85%. The CONTRACTOR shall measure the ambient conditions at
regular intervals during blast cleaning and coating operations and keep records
of prevailing temperature, humidity and dew point.
8.10
The blast cleaned surface shall not be contaminated with dirt, dust, metal
particles, oil, water or any other foreign material, nor shall be surface or its
anchor pattern be scarred or burnished. All blast cleaned pipe surface shall be
kept in dust free enclosure prior to coating. After blast cleaning, all surfaces shall
be thoroughly inspected under adequate lighting to determine anchor pattern,
quality of blasting and identify any surface defects prior to coating application.
All surface defects such as slivers, scab, burns, laminations, welds spatters,
gouges, scores, indentations, slugs or any other defects considered injurious to
the coating integrity made visible during blast cleaning shall be reported to the
COMPANY Representative and on permission from COMPANY Representative,
such defects shall be removed by filing or grinding. After any grinding or
Page 17 of 35
mechanical repairs, the remaining wall thickness shall be checked and compared
with specified thickness. Ay pipes having thickness less than 95% of specified
thickness shall be kept aside and disposed off as per the instructions of
COMPANY Representative. The method employed to remove surface defects shall
not burnish or destroy then anchor pattern or contaminate the surface.
Pneumatic tools shall not be used unless they are fitted with effective air/ oil and
water traps. Where burnishing results in destruction of anchor pattern, the
anchor patter shall be restored by suitable means. Pipes which have damages
repaired by grinding and have ground areas more than 50mm in diameter shall
be recycling-blasted.
Any dust or loose residues that have been accumulated during blasting and/ or
during filing/ grinding operations shall be removed by vacuum cleaning.
If contamination of surface occurs, the quality of blast cleaning method and
process shall be examined. If the surface roughness is outside the specified limit,
the blast cleaning material shall be checked and replaced.
8.11
Upon Completion of the blasting operations, the quality control supervisor shall
accept the pipe for further processing or return for re-blasting after removal of
defects/ imperfections. In case imperfections are considered detrimental to the
coating quality, the same shall be reported to COMPANYs Representative for
final decision on rejection or re-blasting/ removal of defects. Re-blasting/
removal of defects or returning pipe to the yard shall be at the CONTRACTORs
cost.
COMPANYs Representative, in additions, reserves the right to initiate any of the
above actions during periodic inspections for oil, dust, salt, imperfections, surface
defects, lack of white metal finish etc.
8.12
In order to ensure that pipe with defects are not processed further, provisions
shall be available to lift the pipes from inspection stand.
8.13
Chemical Pre-treatment with Chromate Solution
8.13.1
Following completion of abrasive blast cleaning, all pipe surface shall be

chemically Pre-treated with a 10% strength chromate solution.
8.13.2
The CONTRACTOR shall provide data sheets and supporting documentation for
the chemical to be used. The documentation shall verify that the chemical is
suitable for the treatment of line pipe prior to the application of the specific
fusion bonded epoxy powder being applied and the final coating will meet fully
the requirements of this specification.
8.13.3
The chemical pre-treatment shall be applied fully in accordance with the

chemical suppliers instructions and in a manner that ensures 100% uniform
coverage of the pipe surface without introducing surface contamination.
Page 18 of 35
8.13.4
The CONTRACTOR shall check that the concentration for the chemical pretreatment solution remains within the range recommended by the chemical
manufacturer for the pipe coating process. The concentration shall be checked at
the make up of each fresh solution and once per hour, using a method approved
by the chemical manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR shall also ensure that the
chemical pre-treatment solution remains free from contamination at all times.
Recycling of chemical pre-treatment solution is not permitted.
8.13.5
The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the temperature of the substrate is

maintained between 40C and 80C and the chromate solution temperature does
not exceed 60 or as recommended by the manufacturer.
8.13.6
The chromate coating shall be smooth, even, free from runs, drips or excessive
application and lightly adherent with no flaking of the coating. The chromate
coated steel must be thoroughly dried immediately after application and shall be
achieved by boiling off any residual solution on the surface.
8.14
The total allowable elapsed time between completion of the blasting operations
and commencement of the pre-coating and heating operations shall be such that
no detectable oxidation of the surface occurs. Relative humidity readings shall
be recorded every half on hour during the blasting operations in the immediate
vicinity of the operations. The maximum elapsed time shall not exceed the
duration given below :
Relative Humidity %
> 80
70 to 80
< 70
Maximum elapsed time

2 hours
3 hours
4 hours
Any pipe not processed within the above time-humidity requirement shall be
completely re-blasted. Any pipe showing flash rusting shall be re-blasted even if
the above conditions have not been exceeded.
8.15
Pipe handling between abrasive blasting and pipe coating shall not damage the
surface profile achieved during blasting. Any pipe affected by the damage to the
surface exceeding 200mm2 in area/ or having contamination of steel surface shall
be rejected and sent for re-blasting.
9.0
COATING APPLICATION
The external surface of the cleaned pipe conforming to clause 8.0 of this
specification shall be immediately coated with 3-layer extruded polyethylene
coating in accordance with the procedures approved by COMPANY, relevant
standards and this specification. In general, the procedure shall be as follows :
Page 19 of 35
9.1
Pipe Heating
9.1.1
Immediately prior to heating of pipe, all dust and grit shall be removed from
both inside and outside of the pipe by a combination of air blast, brushing and
vacuum cleaning. Suitable arrangement shall be made to protect the bevel ends
from getting damaged during the coating operation.
9.1.2
Induction heater or gas furnace shall be used for heating the pipe. The method
shall be capable of maintaining uniform temperature along the total length of the
pipe, and shall be such that it shall not contaminate the surface to be coated. In
case of induction heating, appropriate frequency shall be used to ensure `deep
heating and intense skin heating is avoided. Gas fired heating system shall be
well adjusted so that no combustion products are deposited on the steel surface.
This shall be demonstrated on bare pipes prior to start of PQT. Oxidation of the
cleaned pipe surfaces prior to coating (in the form of bluing or other apparent
oxide formation) is not acceptable.
9.1.3
External surface of the pipe shall be heated to about 190C or within a

temperature range (min. to max.) as recommended by the powder
manufacturer. Required pipe temperature shall be maintained as it enters the
coating chamber.
9.1.4
Temperature of the pipe surface shall be continuously monitored & recorded by

using suitable instruments such as infrared sensors, contact thermometers,
thermocouples etc. The recording method shall allow to correlate each line pipe.
The monitoring instrument shall be able to raise an alarm/ activate audio system
(hooter) in the event of tripping of induction heater/ gas fired heater or in the
event of pipe temperature being outside the range recommended by the
manufacturer.
Any deviation from the application temperature range
recommended by manufacturer shall be rectified. If immediate rectification is
not feasible, the production shall be stopped until cause of deviation has been
removed. Any pipe coated during the duration of temperature deviation shall be
identified by marking and rejected. Such rejected pipes shall be stripped and
recoated.
9.1.5
Temperature measuring & monitoring equipment shall be calibrated twice every

shift and/ or as per COMPANY representatives instruction.
9.1.6
Contractor shall ensure that pipe surface emissivity variations are minimised
during pipe heating. To avoid significant variance, more than once blasted joints
should be coated at the same time and not mixed with joints blasted only once.
9.2
Pipe Coating
9.2 .1
Subsequent to pipe heating, coating consisting of following layers shall be

applied onto the pipe.
Page 20 of 35
i.
ii.
iii.
Electrostatic application of epoxy powder of minimum dry film thickness

0.150 mm, unless otherwise specified. The maximum thickness shall not
exceed the epoxy thickness specified by epoxy powder manufacturer.
Grafted co-polymer adhesive applied by extrusion, minimum thickness
0.200 mm.
Polyethylene coating by extrusion.
The coated pipe shall be subsequently quenched and cooled in water for a period
which shall sufficiently lower the temperature of pipe coating to permit handling
and inspection.
9.2.2
Minimum total thickness of finished coating shall be as under :

Pipe Size
Specified outside diameter (mm)
Upto 10 (273.1)
Over 10 (273.1) to below 20 (508.0)
From 20 (508.0) to below 32 (813.0)
(*)
Min. Coating Thickness (mm)(*)

Normal Type (n)
1.8
2.0
2.25
HDPE material is to be used as top coat.
Required coating thickness shall be normal type (n), unless otherwise specified.
9.2.3
Coating materials shall be inspected in accordance with the manufacturers

recommendation prior to coating application and it shall be ensured that the
materials are moisture free. In case the relative humidity exceeds 80%, the
adhesive and polyethylene material shall be dried using hot air as per the
directions of COMPANY representative.
9.2.4
Prior to starting the application of fusion bonded epoxy powder, the recovery
system shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove any unused powder remaining
from a previous line pipe coating application. The use of recycled powder shall
be permitted subjected to:
9.2.5
a)
satisfactory qualification of the reclaimed system during PQT stage
b)
the proportion of the reclaimed powder in the working mix does not
exceed 20% at any one time.
c)
the quality of the recycled powder being routinely checked during

production, at a minimum frequency of once per shift and consistently
meets the requirements stated at para 5.3.1.
Dry air, free of oil and moisture shall be used in the coating chamber and
spraying system and for this purpose filters, dehumidifier/ heater as required
alongwith control & monitoring system shall be provided for this purpose. Dew
point of air used to supply the fluidized bed, epoxy spray system and epoxy
Page 21 of 35
recycling system shall be at least (-) 40C and this shall be shall monitored
during the regular production.
9.2.6
Air pressure in the epoxy spray guns shall be controlled, continuously monitored
and recorded by using suitable instruments. The air pressure shall be controlled
within the limits established during coating procedure qualification.
The
monitoring system shall be able capable of raising an alarm/ activate audio
system (hooter) in the event of change in air pressure beyond the set limits. Any
deviation from the pre-set limits shall be rectified. If immediate rectification is
not feasible, the production shall be stopped until cause of deviation has been
removed. Any pipe coated during the duration of air pressure deviation shall be
identified by suitable marking and rejected. Such rejected pipes shall be stripped
and recoated.
9.2.7
Extruded adhesive layer shall be applied before gel time of the epoxy coating has
elapsed. The application of the adhesive layer shall not be permitted after epoxy
is fully cured. The CONTRACTOR shall establish, to the satisfaction of the
COMPANY representative, that the adhesive is applied within the gel time
window of epoxy and at the temperature recommended by the adhesive
manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR shall state the minimum and maximum time
interval between epoxy and adhesive application at the proposed pre-heat
temperature and line speed.
9.2.8
Extruded polyethylene layer shall be applied over the adhesive layer within the
time limit established during PQT stage and within the time/ temperature range
recommended by the manufacturer. The extrusion temperatures of the adhesive
and polyethylene shall be continuously recorded. The monitoring instruments
shall be independent of the temperature control equipment. The instruments
shall be calibrated prior to start of each shift.
9.2.9
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that there is no entrapment of air or void formation

along the seam weld (where applicable) during application of coating. Air
entrapment below the coating and also along the coating overlap shall be
prevented by forcing the coating on to the pipe using high pressure roller of
suitable design during coating application. In case it is not adequately achieved,
CONTRACTOR shall supplement by other method to avoid air entrapment. The
methods used shall be witnessed and approved by COMPANY.
9.2.10
Resultant coating shall have a uniform gloss and appearance and shall be free
from air bubbles, wrinkles, holidays, irregularities, discontinuities, separation
between layers of polyethylene & adhesive, etc.
9.2.11
Coating and/ or adhesive shall terminate 120mm (+)20/(-)0 mm from pipe ends.
The adhesive shall seal the end of applied coating. CONTRACTOR shall adopt
mechanical brushing for termination of the coating at pipe ends. Edge of the
coating shall be shaped to form a bevel angle of 30 to 45.
Page 22 of 35
9.2.12
Failure to comply with any of the above applicable requirement and of the
approved procedure shall be cause for the rejection of the coating and such
coating shall be removed in a manner approved by COMPANY at CONTRACTORs
expense.
10.0
10.1
General
CONTRACTOR shall establish and maintain such quality assurance system as are
necessary to ensure that goods or services supplied comply in all respects with
the requirements of this specification. The minimum inspection and testing to be
performed shall be as indicated subsequently herein.
10.2
Visual Inspection
Immediately following the coated, each coated pipe shall be visually checked for
imperfections and irregularities of the coating. The coating shall be of natural
colour and gloss, smooth and uniform and shall be blemish free with no dust or
other particulate inclusion. The coating shall not slow and defects such as
blisters, pinholes, scratches, wrinkles, engravings, cuts swelling, disbonded
zones, air inclusions, tears, voids or any other irregularities. Special attentions
shall be paid to the areas adjacent to he longitudinal weld (if applicable),
adjacent to the cut back at each of pipe and within the body of the pipe.
In addition inside surface of the pipe shall also be visually inspected for presence
of any foreign material or shots and grit (free or embedded/ sticking to pipe
inside surface). The pipe inside surface shall be examined using sharp floodlight
focussed at the middle of the pipe at line end while inspection is carried out
visually form other end.
10.3
Coating Thickness
a.
The coating thickness shall be determined by taking atleast 10

measurement at locations uniformly distributed over the length and
periphery of each pipe. In case of weld pipes, five of the above readings
shall be made at the apex of the weld seam, uniformly distributed over
the length of the coated pipe. All the readings must meet the minimum
requirements. However, localised coating thickness of less than the
permissible minimum thickness can be tolerated on the condition that it
does not attain a total extent of more than 5cm2 per meter length of
coated pipe, and the actual coating thickness does not drop more than
10% below the permissible minimum coating thickness at these locations.
The frequency of thickness measurement as stated above shall be initially
on every pipe, which shall be further reduced depending upon
consistency of results, at the sole discretion of COMPANYs
representative. Resultsof all measurement shall be recorded.
Page 23 of 35
10.4
10.5
b.
Thickness of epoxy and adhesive shall be measured at the beginning of

each shift and whenever the plant re-starts after any stoppage for
compliance. Coating of epoxy and adhesive on portion of pipe required
for this purpose, stripping and recoating of such partly coated pipe shall
be at CONTRACTORs expense.
c.
Coated pipes not meeting the above requirements shall be rejected. The
CONTRACTOR shall remove the entire coating and the pipe shall be
recycled to the cleaning and coating operations as per the approved
procedure and shall be to CONTRACTORs expenses.
Holiday Detection
a.
Each coated pipe length shall be checked over 100% of coated surface by
means of a holiday detector of a type approved by COMPANY for
detecting holidays in the finished coating.
b.
The holiday detector shall be a low pulse DC full circle electronic detector
with audible alarm and precise voltage control with DIN VDE 0433 Part 2.
The set voltage for inspection shall be 25 kV. Travel speed shall not
exceed 300 mm/s.
c.
CONTRACTOR shall calibrate the holiday detector at least once every 4

hours of production. CONTRACTOR shall have necessary instruments or
devices for calibrating the holiday detector.
d.
Any pipe coating shall be rejected if more than 1(one) holiday & area
more than 100 cm2 in size are detected in its length attributable to
coating process.
e.
Holidays which are lesser in number and size than those mentioned in (d)
above, shall be repaired in accordance with a approved procedure and
shall be to CONTRACTORs expense.
Bond Strength Test

a.
CONTRACTOR shall conduct bond strength test for composite coating as

per clause 5.3.3 (a) of this specification. A minimum of 65mm length
shall be peeled. First 20mm and last 20mm shall not be counted for
assessment of bond strength.
b.
The frequency of test for cut back portions shall be one pipe in every
fifteen(15) pipes coated and for middle of pipe shall be one pipe in every
sixty(60) pipes coated or one pipe per shift whichever is higher. On each
selected pipe, bond strength shall be performed for each specified
temperature. Test shall be performed at each cut back portion and one
in the middle of pipe. The system shall disbond/ separate cohesively
either in adhesive layer or in polyethylene layer. Majority of the peeled off
Page 24 of 35
area on the pipe shall show presence of adhesive. Disbondment/

separation at epoxy to steel interface or epoxy/ adhesive interface or
adhesive/ polyethylene interface shall not be permitted. The failure mode
shall be recorded for each test.
10.6
10.7
c.
In case the above tests do not comply with the above requirement,
CONTRACTOR shall test all the preceding and succeeding coated pipes. If
both pipes pass the test, then the remainder of the pipe joints in that
shift shall be deemed satisfactory. If either pipe fails to meet the
specified requirements, all pipes coated during the shift shall be tested
until the coating is provided acceptable. Rejected coated pipes shall be
stripped and re-coated in accordance with approved procedure, at
CONTRACTORs expense.
d.
The frequency of bond strength test as per para 10.5(b) for cut back
portion may be reduced depending upon the consistently of result to one
pipe in every twenty five(25) instead of every fifteen pipes, at the sole
discretion of the COMPANY Representative.
Impact Strength
a.
Impact resistance test shall be conducted as per clause 5.3.3 (b) of this
specification. Initially the frequency of test shall be 2(two) coated pipes
per shift, which may be further reduced and/ or waived depending upon
consistently acceptable results at the sole discretion of COMPANYs
representative.
b.
Minimum thirty(30) impacts located equidistant along the length of

coated pipe shall be performed.
c.
Immediately after testing, the test area shall be subjected to holiday

detection at the same voltage as used prior to impact strength test. The
pipe shall be rejected if any holiday is noted in the test area.
d.
In case of test failure, retesting and disposal of coated pipe shall be as

per 10.5(c) above.
a.
Indentation hardness test shall be as per clause 5.3.3 (c) of this

specification. The frequency of test shall be initially 2(two) coated pipes
per shift which shall be further reduced to one test each on 2 coated
pipes per week at random after 1 week of consistently acceptable results.
Two samples for each temperature shall be taken from the cut back
portion of coated pipe and one in middle of the pipe for this test.
b.

per 10.5(c) above.
Page 25 of 35
10.8
10.9
Air Entrapment Test

a.
Strips from bond strength tests or coated pipe may be used to help
determine the porosity of the finished coating. Strip shall be also cut from
longitudinal weld (if applicable) at cut back portion and examined for the
presence of voids.
b.
Bond strength strip shall be viewed from the side and at the failure
interface. At the pipe bond strength test location, utility knife shall be
used to cut the edge of the coating to a 45 angle and view with a
microscope. Similar examination shall be done in the coating cut back
area.
c.
One sample each either on the bond strength strip or coated pipe and
strip cut from the longitudinal weld (if applicable) shall be examined for
air entrapment per shift. Strips shall be viewed from the side.
d.
All examination shall done using a 30X magnification hand-held

microscope. The polyethylene and adhesive layers shall have no more
than 10% of the observed area taken up with air entrapment (porosity or
bubbles). Air entrapment shall not occupy more than 10% of the
thickness in each case. Bubbles shall not link together to provide a
moisture path to the epoxy layer.
e.

per 10.5(c) above.
Degree of Cure
a.
Epoxy film samples shall be removed from cut back portion of the coated
pipe using hammer and cold chisel and the samples shall be taken for
cure test using DSC procedure. Care shall be taken to remove the
samples of full film thickness avoiding inclusion of steel debris. Glass
transition temperature differential (Tg) and % cure (H) shall comply
the specified requirements.
b.
Frequency of this test shall be once per shift. Pipe shall be selected
randomly by COMPANY Representative during the middle of a shift.
Suitable provisions/ arrangements as per the instructions of COMPANY
Representative shall be made by the CONTRACTOR for this purpose.
c.
In case of test failure, production carried out during the entire shift shall
be rejected, unless the CONTRACTOR proposes a method to establish the
compliance with the degree of cure requirements of all pipes coated
during that shift.
Page 26 of 35
10.10
10.11
Epoxy Layer Adhesive Test

a.
Adhesion of epoxy layer shall be determined at ambient temperature by

the St Andrews Cross method i.e. by cutting two straight lines through
the epoxy layer with a sharp knife. The incisions shall intersect at an
angle of 30/ 150. The epoxy coating shall resist disbondment from the
steel when attempts are made to flick/ lift the coating from the 30 angle
with a sharp knife.
b.
Frequency of this test shall be once per shift. The test shall be carried out
at the cut back portion of the pipe from which the Degree of Cure test
has been carried out as per para 10.9 above.
c.

per 10.9(c) above.
Cathodic Disbondment Test

a.
48 hours CD test shall be conducted as per clause 5.3.3. (h) of this

specification.
b.
The frequency of this test shall be once in every two weeks or one test
representing each batch of epoxy powder used, whichever is more
frequent.
c.
In case the test fails to conform to the specified requirement, at the

option of the CONTRACTOR, all pipes coated after the previous
acceptable test and prior to next acceptable test shall be rejected or the
test shall be repeated or the shall be repeated using two additional
samples taken from the same end of the affected pipe.
When both retests conform to the specified requirement, the lot of pipes
shall be accepted. When one or both the retests fail to conform to the
specified requirement, all coated pipes after previous acceptable test and
prior to next acceptable shall be rejected. All rejected pipes shall be
stripped, re-cleaned and re-coated. COMPANY may consider a further
retest program to determine whether any of the affected pipe meet the
criteria for acceptance upon written request by the CONTRACTOR.
10.12
Damages occurring to pipe coating during above tests shall be repaired in

accordance with approved coating repair procedure.
10.13
Repairs occurring on account of the production test are however excluded from
above mentioned limitations at para 10.4 (d) above.
10.14
COMPANY, reserves the right to perform inspection and witness tests on all
activities concerning the pipe coating operations starting from bare pipe to
finished coated pipe ready for dispatch and also testing of raw materials.
Page 27 of 35
CONTRACTOR shall give reasonable notice of time and shall provide without
charge reasonable access and facilities required for inspection to the COMPANYs
Representative. Inspection and tests performed or witnessed by COMPANYs
Representative shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTORs obligation to perform
the required inspection and tests.
10.15
In case rate of defective or rejected pipes and/ or samples tests are 10% or
more for a single shift (typically 8 hours), CONTRACTOR shall be required to stop
production and carry out a full and detailed investigation and shall submit
findings to COMPANY for approval. CONTRACTOR shall recommence the
production only after getting the written permission from COMPANY.
Under no circumstances any action or omission of the COMPANYs representative
shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility for material and quality of
coating produced. No pipes shall be transported from the coating plants unless
authorised by COMPANY in writing.
11.0
HANDLING, TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE
11.1
The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for the pipe and for the pipe
identification marking from the time of taking over of bare pipe from COMPANY
until such time that the coated line pipes are `handed over and/ or installed in
the permanent installation as the case may be according to the provisions of the
Contract.
At the time of taking over of bare pipes CONTRACTOR shall inspect and record
all the relevant details referred above including pipe defects in the presence of
COMPANY. All pipes shall be checked for bevel damages, weld seam height,
dents, gouges, corrosion and other damages. COMPANY Representative shall
decide whether pipe defects/ damages are suitable for repair. Damage to the
pipes which occur after the CONTRACTOR has taken delivery such as dents,
flats, or damage to the weld ends shall be cut off or removed and pipes
rebevelled and repaired again as necessary. The cost of this work, as well as that
of the pipe lost in cutting and repair shall be to the CONTRACTORs account. All
such works shall be carried out after written approval of the COMPANY. Any
reduction in length shall be indicated in the CONTRACTORs pipe tracking
system.
11.2
The CONTRACTOR shall unload, load, stockpile and transport the bare pipes
within the coating plant(s) using suitable means and in a manner to avoid
damage to pipes.
The CONTRACTOR shall stockpile the bare pipes at the storage area of the
coating plant. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and furnish to COMPANY a
procedure/ calculation generally in compliance with API RP-5L1 for pipe stacking,
which shall be approved by COMPANY prior to commencement.
Page 28 of 35
11.3
The CONTRACTOR shall load, unload, transport and stockpile the coated pipes
within the coating plant using approved suitable means and in a manner to avoid
damage to the pipe and coating. The procedure shall be approved by COMPANY
prior to commencement of work.
11.4
Coated pipes may be handled by means of slings and belts of proper width
(minimum 60mm) made of non-abrasive/ non-metallic materials. In this case,
pipes to be stacked shall be separated row by row to avoid damages by rubbing
the coated surface in the process of taking off the slings. Use of round sectional
slings are prohibited. Fork lifts may be used provided that the arms of the fork
lift are covered with suitable pads preferably rubber.
11.5
Bare/ coated pipes at all times shall be stacked completely clear from the ground
so that the bottom row of pipes remain free from any surface water. The pipes
shall be stacked at a slope so that driving rain does not collect inside the pipe.
Bare/ coated pipes may be stacked by placing them on ridges of sand free from
stones and covered with a plastic film or on wooden supports provided with
suitable cover. This cover can, for example, consist of dry, germ free straw with
a plastic film, otherwise foam rubber may be used. The supports shall be spaced
in such a manner as to avoid permanent bending of the pipes.
Stacks shall consist of limited number of layers such that the pressure exercised
by the pipes own weight does not cause damages to the coating. CONTRACTOR
shall submit calculations for COMPANY approval in this regard. Each pipe section
shall be separated by means of spacers suitably spaced for this purpose. Stacks
shall be suitably secured against falling down and shall consist of pipe sections
having the same diameter and wall thickness. The weld seam of pipes shall be
positioned always in a manner so as not to touch the adjacent pipes.
The ends of the pipes during handling and stacking shall always be protected
with bevel protectors.
11.6
The lorries used for transportation shall be equipped with adequate pipe
supports having as many round hollow beds as there as pipes to be placed on
the bottom of the lorry bed. Total width of the supports shall be at least 5% of
the pipe length and min. 3 Nos. support shall be provided. These supports shall
be lined with a rubber protection and shall be spaced in a manner as to support
equal load from the pipes. The rubber protection must be free from all nails and
staples where pipes are in contact. The second layer and all following layers shall
be separated from the other with adequate number of separating layers of
protective material such as straw in plastic covers or mineral wool strips or
equivalent, to avoid direct touch between the coated pipes.
All stanchions of lorries used for transportation shall be covered by non-abrasive
material like rubber belts or equivalent. Care shall be exercised to properly cover
the top of the stanchions and other positions such as reinforcement of the truck
body, rivets, etc. to prevent damage to the coated surface. Slings or non-metallic
Page 29 of 35
straps shall be used for securing loads during transportation. They shall be
suitable padded at the contact points with the pipe.
11.7
Materials other than pipes and which are susceptible of deteriorating or suffering
from damages especially due to humidity, exposure to high thermal excursions or
other advers weather conditions, shall be suitably stored and protected.
Deteriorated materials shall not be used and shall be replaced at CONTRACTORs
expenses. These materials, shall always be handled during loading, unloading
and storage in a manner so as to prevent any damage, alteration and dispersion.
When supplied in containers and envelopes, they shall bot be dropped or thrown,
or removed by means of hooks, both during the handling operations till their
complete use. During unloading transport and utilization, any contact with water
earth, crushed stone and any other foreign material shall be carefully avoided.
CONTRACTOR shall strictly follow Manufacturers instructions regarding storage
temperature and methods for volatile materials which are susceptible to change
in properties and characteristics due to unsuitable storage. If necessary the
CONTRACTOR shall provide for a proper conditioning.
11.8
In case of any marine transportation of bare/ coated line pipes involved, the
same shall be carried out in compliance with API RP 5LW. CONTRACTOR shall
furnish all details pertaining to marine transportation including necessary
drawings of cargo barges, storing/ stacking, sea fastening of pipes on the
barges/ marine vessels to the COMPANY for approval prior to undertaking such
transportation works. In addition CONTRACTOR shall also carry out requisite
analyses considering the proposed transportation scheme and establish the same
is safe and stable. On-deck overseas shipment shall not be allowed.
12.0
REPAIR OF COATING
CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY, its methods and materials proposed to
be used for executing a coating repair and shall receive approval from COMPANY
prior to use. In open storage the repair coating materials must be able to
withstand a temperature of atleast +80C, without impairing its serviceability
and properties. CONTRACTOR shall furnish manufacturers test certificates for
the repair materials clearly establishing the compliance of the repair materials
with the applicable coating requirements indicated in this specification.
All pipe leaving coating plant, shall have sound external coating with no holiday
porosity on 100% of the surface.
Defects, repairs and acceptability criteria shall be as follows :
Pipes showing porosities or very small damage not picked up during

holiday test and having a surface less than 0.5 cm2 or linear damage
(cut) of less than 3 cm shall be repaired by stick welding using material of
same quality.
Page 30 of 35
Damages caused to coating by handling such as scratches, cuts, dents,

gouges, not picked up during holiday test, having a total reduced
thickness on damaged portion not less than 2.0mm and an area not
exceeding 20 cm2 shall be rebuild by heat shrink patch only and without
exposing to bare metal.
Defects or size exceeding above mentioned area or holidays of width less

than 300 mm shall be repaired with heat shrinks repair patch by exposing
the bare metal surface.
Defects exceeding the above and in number not exceeding 2 per pipe and
linear length not exceeding 500mm shall be repaired using heat
shrinkable sleeves of HTLP80 or equivalent.
Pipes with bigger damage shall be stripped and recoated.
In case of coating defect close to coating cut back, CONTRACTOR shall

remove the coating throughout the entire circumference of the pipe down
to the steel surface and increase the coating cut back length. Now if the
coating cut back exceeds 140mm of linear length of pipe then the coating
shall be repaired by the use of heat shrinkable sleeves thereby making up
the coating cut back length of 120mm.
Not withstanding the above, under no circumstances, if the defects exceeds

70mm from the original coating cut back length, the entire coating shall be
removed and the pipe shall be recycled through the entire coating procedure.
Irrespective of type of repair, the maximum nos of repair of coating shall be as
follows :
Holiday repair of size 100 cm2 attributable to process of coating

application shall be maximum of one per pipe.
In addition to the above, defects to be repaired by heat shrink patch/

sleeve shall be maximum 2(two) per pipe.
Defects exceeding the above limits shall cause pipe coating rejection, stripping
and recoating. The above is exclusive of the repairs warranted due to testing as
per this specification.
All repairs carried out to coating for whatever reason shall be to the account of
CONTRACTOR.
Cosmetic damages occurring only in the Polyethylene layer only need not be
repaired by exposing upto steel surface, as deemed fit by the COMPANY
representative. In any case the CONTRACTOR shall establish his material,
methods and procedure of repair that results in acceptable quality of product by
testing and shall receive approval from COMPANY prior to use.
Page 31 of 35
Testing of repairs shall be in the same form as testing coating. All repairs shall
result in a coating thickness no less than the parent coating thickness.
CONTRACTOR shall test repairs to coating as and when required by COMPANY.
13.0
MARKING
CONTRACTOR shall place marking on the outside surface of the coating at one
end of the coated pipe, and marking shall indicate, but not limited to the
following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Pipe number, Heat number

Diameter & Wall Thickness
Coated Pipe Number
Colour band
Any other information considered relevant by COMPANY.
Pipe Manufacturer Name
Inspection Mark/ Punch
CONTRACTOR shall obtain prior approval on making procedure to be adopted

from the COMPANY.
14.0
QUALITY ASSURANCE
14.1
The CONTRACTOR shall have established within the organisation and, shall
operate for the contract, a documented Quality System that ensures that the
requirements of this specification are met in all aspects. The Quality System shall
be based upon ISO 9001/2 or equivalent.
14.2
The CONTRACTOR shall have established a Quality Assurance Group within its
organisation that shall be responsible for reviewing the Quality System and
ensuring that it is implemented.
14.3
The CONTRACTOR shall submit the procedures that comprise the Quality System
to the COMPANY for agreement.
14.4
The CONTRACTORs Quality System shall pay particular attention to the control
of Suppliers and sub-contractors and shall ensure that the requirements of this
specification are satisfied by the Suppliers and Sub-contractors operating Quality
system in their organisation.
14.5
The CONTRACTOR shall, prior to the commencement of work, prepare and issue
a Quality plan for all of the activities required to satisfy the requirements of this
specification. The plan shall include any sub-contracted work, for which the subcontractors Quality plans shall be submitted. The plan shall be sufficiently
detailed to indicate sequentially for each discipline the requisite quality control,
inspection , testing and certification activities with reference to the relevant
procedures and the acceptance standards.
Page 32 of 35
14.6
The CONTRACTORs Quality system and associated procedures may, with due
notice, be subject to formal audits. The application of quality control by the
CONTRACTOR will be monitored by the COMPANY Representatives who will
witness and accept the inspection testing and associated work required by this
specification.
Page 33 of 35
Coating system/ Material Prequalification

Coating material Manufacturers acceptable to Company are as follows :
Epoxy
BASF/Basepox
Jotun
3M
Dupont
Bitumese Speciaux, France
Adhesive
BASF/Basell
Boresalis
Dupont
SK Corporation\
Polyethylene :
Novacorp
BASF/Basell
Boresalis/Borouge
SK Corporation
Malaysian Polyethylene Malaysia (ETILINAS)
ELF ATOCHEM, FRANCE
Contractor shall propose coating system(s) indicating specific grade of epoxy, adhesive and
polyethylene manufactured by any of the above mentioned material Manufactures and submit
the details as per Table 1. The proposed costing system shall be capable of meeting the
functional requirements and properties of coating indicated in this specification. The coating
system must have been pre-qualified by the coating material Manufacturer by actual
application on 5 pipes and must have been successfully subjected to the tests as indicated in
Table 2. The tests must have been carried out by an independent test laboratory of national /
international recognition.
In case the Contractor proposes any coating system (combination of epoxy, adhesive and
polyethylene) that has been previously approved by the company, the above tests need not be
carried out by the coating material Manufacturer.
Tests carried out in accordance with other coating standards may be used in so far as their
procedures are the same or more stringent than the procedures in this document Such
information shall include full reports on test procedures and results and be signed by the
laboratory representatives and certification body.
Page 34 of 35
Table 1
Manufacturers Data on Coating System and Materials
Coating System data
Epoxy
Adhesive
Polyethylene Compound
Coating System Designation

Coating Material
combination (s)
Technical Data Sheet
covering all properties as
per specifications
Laboratory Test Reports in
support of technical data
Manufacturers Name
Product Trade Name
Manufacturers Name
Product Trade Name
Manufacturers Name
Product Trade Name
Technical Data sheet

covering all properties
as per specification
Laboratory Test
Reports in support of
technical data
Certificate of
Compatibility with
Adhesive
Storage Instructions
Shelf Life

per specification
Laboratory Test Reports
in support of technical
data
Certificate of
Compatibility with epoxy
and polyethylene
Shelf Life

per specification
Laboratory Test Reports
in support of technical
data
Certificate of
Compatibility with
Adhesive
Shelf Life
Safety Data Sheets

and HSE instructions
Safety Data Sheets and

HSE instructions
Safety Data Sheets and

HSE instructions
Certificate of Compatibility
of proposed materials
Application Procedure
Table 2
S.No
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Properties
Bond Strength
Impact Strength
Indentation hardness
Cathodic Disbondment
Degree of Cure
Coating Resistivety
Heat Ageing
Light Ageing
Frequency (1)
5 Pipes
3 Pipes
5 Pipes
3 Pipes
2 Pipes
2 Pipes
2 Pipes
2 Pipes
2 Pipes
Applicable Requirement
Para 10.5
Para 10.6
Para 10.7
Para 5.3.3(d) & 7.5.2(d)
Para 5.3.3(h) & 7.5.2(e)(2)
Para 5.3.3(i) & Para 10.9(a)
Para 5.3.3 (e)(3)
Para 5.3.3 (f)(3)
Para 5.3.3 (g)(3)
1)
Test frequency shall be as indicated in this table and the

paragraphs of the specific are not applicable.
frequency indicated in the applicable
2)
Two tests each on the selected pipes i.e 30 days and 48 hours test shall be carried out on each test
pipe.
3)
Previously carried out tests in an independent laboratory of national / international recognition on PE

top coat are also acceptable.
Page 35 of 35
PROCESS & PIPING DESIGN SECTION

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
SEAMLESS FITTINGS AND FLANGES
UPTO 400mm (16) NB
SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/TS/05/62/025, Rev-1
\\Akjha\work contrac\standard TS for Pipe Line WC (Vol-II) MASTER FOLDER\25 Seamless Fitting & Flange upto 16 inch\TS - Seamless Fittings & Flanges - 025-R1.doc
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
SEAMLESS FITTINGS AND
FLANGES UPTO 400mm (16) NB
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/TS/05/62/025
REV-1
Page 1 of 6
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3.0
MANUFACTURERS QUALIFICATION
4.0
MATERIALS
5.0
DESIGN AND MANUFACTURE
6.0
INSPECTION AND TESTS
7.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
8.0
MARKING
9.0
DOCUMENTATION
Revision No.
Date
Page No.
Revised by
Checked by
Approved by
K.P. Singh
A.K. Johri
Niraj Gupta
PREPARED BY :
CHECKED BY :
APPROVED BY :
K.P. SINGH
A.K. JOHRI
NIRAJ GUPTA
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
1.0
FOR
REV-1
Page 2 of 6
SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum requirements for the design,
manufacture and supply of following items to be installed in pipeline system
handling hydrocarbons in liquid or gaseous phase:
-
Seamless fittings 400 mm (16) NB and smaller, such as tees, elbows,

reducers and caps.
Flanges 400 mm (16) NB and smaller, such as welding neck flanges
and blind flanges.
The specification does not cover the above mentioned items which are to be
installed in pipeline system handling sour hydrocarbons (liquid/ gas) service
as defined in NACE standard MR-01-75-98.
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
following codes, standards and specifications:
a)
ASME B 16.5
Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
b)
ASME B 16.9
Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt

Welding Fittings
c)
ASME B 16.11
Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding

and Threaded
d)
ASME B 31.4
Liquid Transportation Systems for

Hydrocarbons, Liquid Petroleum Gas,
Anhydrous Ammonia and Alcohols
e)
ASME B 31.8
Gas Transmission and Distribution

Piping Systems
f)
ASTM A 370
Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
g)
API 590
Steel Line Blanks
h)
MSS-SP-25
Standard Marking System for Valves,

Fittings, Flanges and Unions
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
3.0
REV-1
Page 3 of 6
i)
MSS-SP-44
Steel Pipeline Flanges
j)
MSS-SP-75
Specification for High Test Wrought

Welded Fittings
k)
MSS-SP-97
Forged Carbon Steel Branch Outlet

Fittings-Socket Welding, Threaded
and Butt Welding Ends
Manufacturer who intends bidding for fittings, must possess the records of a
successful proof test, in accordance with the provisions of ASME B 16.9/ MSSSP-75, as applicable. These records shall be submitted at the time of bidding.
4.0
MATERIALS
4.1
The basic material for fittings and flanges shall be as indicated in the Material
Requisition. Additionally, the material shall also meet the requirements
specified hereinafter.
4.2
Each heat of steel used for the manufacture of fittings and flanges shall have
carbon equivalent (CE) not greater than 0.45% calculated from check analysis
in accordance with following formula :
Mn
Cr + Mo + V
Ni + Cu
CE = C + ------- + --------------------- + --------------6
5
15
Carbon contents on check analysis shall not exceed 0.22%.
4.3
Unless specified otherwise, Charpy V-notch test shall be conduced for each
heat of steel, in accordance with the impact test provision of ASTM A370 at
0C temperature. The average absorbed impact energy values of three fullsized specimens shall be 27 joules.
The minimum impact energy value of any one specimen of the three
specimens analysed as above, shall not be less than 80% of the abovementioned average value.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
REV-1
Page 4 of 6
4.4
Steel used shall be fully killed.
4.5
Hardness testing shall be carried out by Manufacturer in accordance with

ASTM A 234. Hardness testing shall cover at least 10% per item, per size, per
heat per manufacturing method.
5.0
5.1
Flanges such as welding neck flanges and blind flanges shall conform to the
requirements of ASME B 16.5. Spectacle blind, spacer & blind shall conform to
API 590.
5.2
Fittings such as tees, elbows and reducers shall be seamless type and shall
conform to ASME B 16.9 for sizes 50 mm (2)NB and above and ASME B16.11
for sizes below 50mm(2)NB.
5.3
Fittings such as weldolets, sockolets, nippolets, etc., shall be manufactured in

accordance with MSS-SP-97.
5.4
Type, face and face finish of flanges shall be as specified in Material

Requisition.
5.5
Stub-in or pipe to pipe connection shall not be used in the manufacture of

tees. Tees shall be manufactured by forging or extrusion methods. The
longitudinal weld seam shall be kept at 90 from the extrusion. Fittings shall
not have any circumferential joint .
5.6
All butt weld ends shall be beveled as per ASME B16.25.
5.7
Repair by welding on flanges and parent metal of the fittings is not allowed.
6.0
6.1
The Manufacturer shall perform all inspection and tests as per the requirement
of this specification and the relevant codes, prior to shipment at his works.
Such inspection and tests shall be, but not limited to, the following:
6.1.1
Visual inspection.
6.1.2
Dimensional checks.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
REV-1
Page 5 of 6
6.1.3
Chemical composition, mechanical properties and hardness examination.
6.1.4
All finished wrought weld ends shall be 100% ultrasonically tested for
lamination type defects. Any lamination larger than 6.35 mm shall not be
acceptable.
6.1.5
All other tests not specifically listed but are required as per applicable
standard/ specification.
6.2
Purchasers Inspector may also perform stage-wise inspection and witness

tests as indicated in Clause 6.1 at Manufacture's Works prior to shipment.
Manufacturer shall give reasonable notice of time and shall provide, without
charge, reasonable access and facilities required for inspection to the
Purchasers Inspector.
Inspection and tests performed/ witnessed by the Purchasers Inspector shall
in no way relieve the Manufacturer's obligation to perform the required
inspection and tests.
7.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
Manufacturer shall submit following certificates to Purchasers Inspector:
8.0
a)
Test certificates relevant to the chemical analysis and mechanical

properties of the materials used for construction as per this specification
and relevant standards.
b)
Test reports on non-destructive testing.
MARKING
Each item shall be marked with indelible paint with the following data:
a)
Manufacturer's marking
b)
Material Specification
c)
Size and schedule number
d)
Heat number
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
REV-1
Page 6 of 6
9.0
DOCUMENTATION
9.1
At the time of bidding, Manufacturer shall submit the following documents:

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Reference list of previous supplies of similar fittings of similar

specification.
Clausewise list of deviations from this specification, if any.
Brief description of the manufacturing and quality control facilities at
Manufacturer's works.
Manufacturer's qualification requirement as per clause 3.0 of this
specification.
Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) enclosed with this tender duly signed,
stamped and accepted.
9.2
Prior to shipment, Manufacturer shall submit six copies of test certificates as

listed in clause 7.0 of this specification.
9.3
All documents shall be in English language.

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
FOR
FLANGES AND WELDED FITTINGS
(SIZE 450mm (18) NB AND ABOVE)
SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/TS/05/62/026, R-0
\\Akjha\work contrac\standard TS for Pipe Line WC (Vol-II) MASTER FOLDER\26 flange & welded fittings 18 inch & above\Specification for Flanges & Welded Fittings 26.doc
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
REV-0
PAGE 1 OF 9
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
Page No.
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3.0
4.0
MATERIALS
5.0
6.0
7.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
8.0
PAINTING, MARKING AND SHIPMENT
9.0
DOCUMENTATION
Prepared By :
Checked By :
Approved By :
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
1.0
REV-0
PAGE 2 OF 9
SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum requirements for the design,
manufacture and supply of following items to be installed in pipeline
system handling hydrocarbons in liquid or gaseous phase :
Carbon Steel Welded Fittings 450mm (18) NB and above, such as

tees, elbows, reducers and caps.
Carbon Steel Flanges 450mm (18) NB and above, such as welding

neck flanges and blind flanges.
This specification does not cover the above mentioned items which are to
be installed in pipeline system handling sour hydrocarbons (liquid/ gas)
service as defined in NACE Standard MR-01-75.
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
2.1
following Codes, Standards and Specifications:
a)
ASME B31.8
Gas Transmission
Systems
and
Distribution
b)
ASME B31.4
Pipeline Transportation Systems for Liquid

Hydrocarbons,
Liquid
Petroleum
Gas,
Anhydrous Ammonia and Alcohols
c)
ASME B16.5
Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
d)
ASME B16.9
Factory Made Wrought Steel Butt Welding

Fittings
e)
ASME B16.47
Large Diameter Steel Flanges
f)
ASME B16.25
Butt-welding Ends
Piping
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
REV-0
PAGE 3 OF 9
g)
ASME Sec VIII/IX
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
h)
ASTM A370
Standard Test Methods and Definitions for

i)
MSS-SP-75
Specification for High Test Wrought Welded

Fittings
j)
MSS-SP-44
Steel Pipeline Flanges
2.2
In case of conflict between the requirements of this specification and the

requirement of above referred Codes and Standards, the requirements of
this specification shall govern.
3.0
The design of fittings shall be established by mathematical analysis
contained in ASME Sec. VIII/ ASME B31.3. The design of fittings for
which mathematical analysis is not available shall be established by proof
testing. These records shall be submitted at the time of bidding,
qualifying the complete range of fittings offered. Manufacturer who
intends bidding for fittings must posses the records of a successful proof
test in accordance with the provisions of ASME B16.9 and/ or MSS-SP-75.
These records shall be submitted at the time of bidding, qualifying the
complete range of fittings offered. Failure to submit such records at the
time of bidding may become a cause of rejection of the offer.
4.0
MATERIALS
4.1
The steel used in the manufacture of fittings and flanges shall be fully
killed carbon steel with a grain size of ASTM 7 or finer as defined in ASTM
E112. This requirement shall not apply to quenched and tempered
fittings. The basic material for fittings and flanges shall be as indicated in
the Material Requisition. Additionally, the material shall also meet the
requirements specified hereinafter.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
4.2
FOR
REV-0
PAGE 4 OF 9
Each heat of steel used for the manufacture of fittings and flanges shall
have carbon equivalent (CE) not greater than 0.45 calculated from check
analysis in accordance with the following formula:
Mn
Cr + Mo + V
Ni + Cu
CE = C + --------- + ------------------- + -----------6
5
15
4.3
Carbon contents on check analysis shall not exceed 0.22%.
4.4
Unless specified otherwise, Charpy V-notch test shall be conducted at 0C

temperature for each heat of steel, in accordance with the impact test
provisions of ASTM A370 for flanges and MSS-SP-75 for all fittings.
The average absorbed impact energy values of three full-sized specimens
shall be 27 joules. The minimum impact energy value of any one
specimen of the three specimens analysed as above, shall not be less than
80% of the above mentioned average value. In addition, the average
shear area shall comply the requirements of MSS-SP-75.
4.5
Hardness test shall be carried out as per ASTM A370 for each heat of steel
used. A full thickness cross-section shall be taken for this purpose and
the maximum hardness of base metal, weld metal and heat affected zone
shall not exceed 248 HV10.
4.6
One transverse guided weld bend test shall be performed for each lot of
welded fittings produced from the same heat in accordance with
provisions of MSS-SP-75. The dimension A in guided bend test shall not
exceed 4.0 times the nominal wall thickness and dimension B shall be
equal to A+2t+3.2mm, where t is nominal wall thickness.
4.7
One transverse weld tensile test shall be conducted on each heat/ lot of
welded fittings in accordance with the requirements of MSS-SP-75.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
REV-0
PAGE 5 OF 9
5.0
5.1
Flanges such as weld neck flanges and blind flanges shall conform to the
requirements of ASME B16.5 upto size DN 600mm (24) excluding DN
550mm (22), MSS-SP-44 for sizes DN 550mm (22) and ASME B16.47 for
sizes DN 650mm (26) and above.
5.2
Spectacle blind and Spacer & blind shall conform to the requirements of
API 590 upto sizes DN 600mm (24). For sizes above DN 650mm (26)
and above, Spectacle blind and Spacer & blind shall conform to
Manufacturers standard.
5.3
Type, face and face finish of flanges shall be as specified in Material

Requisition.
5.4
Fittings such as tees, elbows and reducers shall be either welded or

seamless type. All fittings shall comply with the requirements of MSS-SP75.
5.5
Tees shall be manufactured by forging or extrusion method. Stub-in or

pipe to pipe connection shall not be used in the manufacture of tees. The
longitudinal weld seam shall be kept at 90 from the extrusion. Fittings
shall not have any circumferential weld joint.
5.6
All butt weld ends shall be bevelled as per ASME B16.5/ MSS-SP-44/ ASME
B16.47 as applicable for flanges and MSS-SP-75 for fittings.
5.7
The reinforcement of inside weld seam shall be removed for a distance of

100mm from each end of welded fittings.
5.8
All welds shall be made by welders and welding procedures qualified in

accordance with provisions of ASME Sec. IX. The procedure qualification
shall include impact test for weld/ heat affected zone, hardness test and
guided bend test and shall meet the requirements of Clauses 4.4, 4.5 and
4.6 of this specification, respectively.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
REV-0
PAGE 6 OF 9
5.9
Repair by welding on flanges and parent metal of fittings is not allowed.

Repair of weld seam by welding shall be carried out by welders and
welding procedures duly qualified as per ASME Section IX and API 1104
and records for each repair shall be maintained.
Repair welding
procedure qualification shall include all tests which are applicable for
regular production welding procedure qualification.
6.0
6.1
The Manufacturer shall perform all inspections and tests as per the
requirement of this specification and the relevant codes, prior to shipment
at his works. Such inspections and tests shall be, but not limited to, the
following :
6.1.1
All fittings and flanges shall be visually inspected. The internal and
external surfaces of the fittings shall be free from any strikes, gouges,
burrs and other detrimental defects.
6.1.2
Dimensional checks shall be carried out on finished products as per ASME

B16.5/ MSS-SP-44/ ASME B16.47 as applicable for flanges and ASME
B16.9/ MSS-SP-75 as applicable for fittings and as per this specification.
Fittings not covered in MSS-SP-75 shall be checked as per Manufacturers
standard.
6.1.3
Chemical composition and mechanical properties shall be checked as per

relevant material standards and this specification, for each heat of steel
used.
6.1.4
The non-destructive inspection shall be carried out as given below :

a)
All butt and repair welds for welded fittings shall be examined
100% by radiography. Acceptance limits shall be as per API 1104.
b)
When elbows of size > 18 NB are manufactured, the first elbow of

each radius, diameter and wall thickness shall be ultrasonically
checked for sufficient wall thickness in areas where a minimum wall
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
REV-0
PAGE 7 OF 9
thickness is to be expected. This shall be followed by random

inspection of one out of every three elbows of the same radius,
diameter and wall thickness.
c)
All finished wrought weld ends shall be 100% tested for lamination
type defects by ultrasonic test. Any lamination larger than 6.35mm
shall not be acceptable.
d)
Magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination shall be

performed on cold formed butt welding tees with extruded outlets,
that are subjected to an extreme fiber elongation of greater than
5% shall be carried out as per the Supplementary Requirement SR3
of MSS-SP-75.
e)
Welds which cannot be inspected by radiographic methods shall be

checked by ultrasonic or magnetic particle methods. Acceptance
criteria shall be as per ASME Section VIII Appendix 12 and
Appendix 6, respectively.
6.2
Purchasers Inspector reserves the right to perform stagewise inspection

and witness tests, as indicated in Clause 6.1 of this specification at
Manufacturers Works prior to shipment.
Manufacturer shall give
reasonable notice of time and shall provide, without charge, reasonable
access and facilities required for inspection, to the Purchasers Inspector.
Inspection and tests performed/ witnessed by Purchasers Inspector shall
in no way relieve the Manufacturers obligation to perform the required
inspection and tests.
7.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
Manufacturer shall furnish the following certificates :
a)
Test certificates relevant to the chemical and mechanical properties

of the materials used for manufacture of flanges and fittings as per
relevant standards and this specification.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
REV-0
PAGE 8 OF 9
b)
Test Reports on radiography, ultrasonic inspection and magnetic

particle examination.
c)
Test reports of heat treatment carried out as per the specification.
d)
Welding procedures and welders qualification reports.
e)
Test certificates for each fitting stating that it is capable of

withstanding without leakage a test pressure which results in a
hoop stress equivalent to 100% of the specified minimum yield
strength for the pipe with which the fitting is to be attached
without impairment of serviceability.
8.0
8.1
After all required inspection and tests have been carried out, all external
surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove grease, dust & rust and
shall be applied with standard mill coating for protection against corrosion
during transit and storage. The coating shall be easily removable in the
field. Manufacturer shall furnish the details of paint used at the time of
bidding.
8.2
Ends of all fittings and weld neck flanges shall be suitably protected to
avoid any damage during transit. Metallic or high impact plastic bevel
protectors shall be provided for fittings and flanges. Flange face shall be
suitably protected to avoid any damage during transit.
8.3
All fittings and flanges shall be marked as per MSS-SP-25.
8.4
Package shall be marked legibly with suitable marking ink to indicate the
following :
a)
b)
c)
d)
Manufacturers Name
Type of flange(s) and fittings(s)
Nominal diameter, thickness and material grade
Purchase order number and item serial number
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
REV-0
PAGE 9 OF 9
9.0
DOCUMENTATION
9.1
Manufacturer shall furnish at the time of bidding, the following

documents:
9.2
a)
Reference list of similar supplies including all relevant details, viz.

Project, Year, Client, Location, Size and Service.
b)
Record of successful qualification test of fittings in compliance with

the requirement of this specification.
c)
Brief description of the manufacturing, heat treatment and quality

control facilities of the Manufacturers Works.
d)
Clause-wise list of deviations from this specification, if any.
Within three weeks of placement of order, Manufacturer shall submit four

copies of method of manufacture, testing and quality control procedure
for raw material and finished product for Purchasers approval.
Once the approval has been given by Purchaser, any changes in design,
material and method of manufacture shall be notified to the Purchaser,
whose approval in writing of all changes shall be obtained before the
flanges and fittings are manufactured.
9.3
Within four weeks from the approval date, Manufacturer shall submit six
copies of all documents as listed in Clause 9.2 of this specification.
9.4
Prior to shipment, the Manufacturer shall submit six copies of the test
certificates as listed in Clause 7.0 of this specification.
9.5
All documents shall be in English Language only.

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
FOR
ASSORTED PIPES
SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/TS/05/62/59A, R-0
\\Akjha\work contrac\standard TS for Pipe Line WC (Vol-II) MASTER FOLDER\59A assorted pipe spec\Specification for Assorted Pipes 59A.doc
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
ASSORTED PIPES
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/TS/05/62/59A
REV-0
PAGE 1 OF 9
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
IBR PIPES
3.0
HYDROSTATIC TEST
4.0
MARKING & DESPATCH
ANNEXURE-I :
Page No.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
Prepared By :
Checked By :
Approved By :
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
ASSORTED PIPES
REV-0
PAGE 2 OF 9
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
All pipes and their dimensions, tolerances, chemical composition, physical

properties, heat treatment, hydrotest and other testing and marking
requirements shall conform to the latest codes and standards specified in
the Material Requisition (MR). Deviation(s), if any, shall be clearly
highlighted in the offer.
1.2
Testing
1.2.1
Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the applicable
material specifications. Test reports shall also be furnished for any
supplementary tests as specified in the MR & Clauses 1.10 & 1.11.
1.2.2
Material test certificates (physical property, chemical composition &

treatment report) shall also be furnished for the pipes supplied.
1.3
Manufacturing Processes
1.3.1
Steel made by Acid Bessemer Process shall not be acceptable.
1.3.2
All longitudinally welded pipes other than IS:3589 should employ

automatic welding.
1.4
Pipe shall be supplied in single or double random length of 4 to 7 and 7 to

14 meters, respectively.
1.5
a)
Seamless and E.R.W. pipes shall not have any circumferential seam
joint in a random length. However, in case of E.FS.W. pipe, in one
random length one welded circumferential seam of same quality as
longitudinal weld is permitted. This weld shall be at least 2.5 m
from either end. The longitudinal seams of the two portions shall
be staggered by 90. Single random length in such cases shall be 5
to 7m.
b)
Unless otherwise mentioned in the respective material code,

E.FS.W. pipes < 36 shall not have more than one longitudinal
seam joint and E.FS.W. pipes 36 shall not have more than two
longitudinal seam joints.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
ASSORTED PIPES
REV-0
PAGE 3 OF 9
1.6
Pipe with screwed ends shall have NPT external taper pipe threads
conforming to ASME/ ANSI B1.20.1 upto 1.5 NB & IS:554 for 2 to 6 NB.
1.7
Pipe with bevelled ends shall be in accordance with ASME B16.25. Weld
contours shall be as follows:
Material
Carbon Steel (Except Low
Temp. Carbon Steel)
Alloy Steel Stainless Steel &
Low Temp. Carbon Steel
Wall Thickness
Upto 22mm
> 22mm
Upto 10 mm
>10 mm & Upto 25 mm
> 25 mm
Weld Contour
Figure 2 Type A
Figure 3 Type A
Figure 4
Figure 5 Type A
Figure 6 Type A
1.8
Gavanished pipes shall be coated with zinc by hot dip process conforming
to IS:4736/ ASTM A 153.
1.9
All austenitic stainless steel pipes shall be supplied in solution annealed

condition.
1.10
I.G.C. Test for Stainless Steels
1.10.1
For all austenitic stainless steel pipes, intergranular corrosion test shall
have to be conducted as per following:
ASTM A262 practice B with acceptance criteria of 60 mils/ year
(max.)
OR
ASTM 262 practice E with acceptance criteria of No cracks as
observed from 20X magnification & Microscopic structure to be observed
from 250X magnification.
1.10.2
When specifically asked for in MR for high temperature application of

some grades of austenitic stainless steel (eg.SS 309, 310, 316, 316H etc.),
ASTM A262 practice C with acceptance criteria of 15 mils/ year (max.)
shall have to be conducted.
1.10.3
For the IGC test as described in 1.10.1 & 1.10.2, two sets of samples shall
be drawn from each solution annealing lot; one set corresponding to
highest carbon content and the other corresponding to the highest pipe
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
ASSORTED PIPES
REV-0
PAGE 4 OF 9
thickness. When testing in is conducted as per Practice E, photograph of

microscopic structure shall be submitted for record.
1.11
All welded pipes indicated as CRYO & LT in MR shall be impact tested

per requirement and acceptance criteria of ASME B31.3. The impact test
temperature shall be 196 C & -45 C for stainless steel and carbon
steel, respectively, unless specifically mentioned otherwise in MR.
1.12
Pipes under NACE category shall meet the requirements given in

MR-01-75.
1.13
Specified heat treatment for carbon steel & alloy steel and solution
annealing for stainless steel pipes shall be carried out after weld repairs.
Number of weld repairs at the same spot shall be restricted to maximum
two by approved repair procedure.
1.14
For black or galvanised pipes to IS:1239, the minimum percentage of

elongation shall be 20%.
2.0
IBR PIPES
2.1
IBR Documentation
2.1.1
Pipes under purview of IBR shall be accompanied with IBR certificate

original in Form IIIA, duly approved and countersigned by IBR authority/
local authority empowered by the Central Boiler Board of India. Photocopy
of the original certificate duly attested by the local boiler inspector where
the supplier is located is the minimum requirement for acceptance.
2.1.2
For materials 1 Cr- Mo (ASTM A335 Gr. P11/ A691 Gr. 1 Cr) & 2
Cr-1Mo (ASTM A335 Gr.P22/ A691 Gr. 2 Cr.), from III-A approved
by IBR shall include the tabulation of Et , Sc & Sr values for the entire
temperature range given below. Et , Sc & Sr values shall be such that
throughout the temperature range
where,
SA
:
Et
:
Et / 1.5
Sr / 1.5
Sc
Sa
Allowable stress at the working metal temperature.

Yield point (0.2% proof stress at the working metal
temperature).
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
ASSORTED PIPES
SA (psi)
Material
A335 Gr. P11

A 691 Gr. 1 Cr
A335 Gr. P2/
A691 Gr. 2 Cr
Sc
Sr
REV-0
PAGE 5 OF 9
The average stress to produce elongation of 1% (creep) in

1,00,000 hrs at the working metal temperature.
The average stress to produce rupture in 1,00,000 hrs. at
the working metal temperature and in no case more than
1.33 times the lowest stress to produce rupture at this
temperature.
Temperature (F)
500
600
650
700
750
800
850
900
950
1000
1050
1100
17200
18900
17900
16700
18300
17900
16200
18000
17900
15600
17600
17900
15200
17300
17900
15000
16800
17800
14500
16300
14500
12800
15000
12800
9300
9900
10800
6300
6300
7800
4200
4200
5100
2800
2800
3200
Note:
SA values given above are as per ASME B31.3-1999. Values shall be as per
the latest edition prevailing.
2.2
For carbon steel pipes under IBR, the chemical composition shall conform
to the following;
Carbon (max.)
Others (S, P, Mn)
:
:
0.25%
As prescribed in IBR regulation.
The chemical composition as indicated in this clause is not applicable for

pipes other than IBR services.
3.0
HYDROSTATIC TEST
Refer Annexure I.
4.0
MARKING AND DESPATCH
4.1
All pipes shall be marked in accordance with the applicable codes,

standards and specifications. In addition, the purchase order number, the
item code & special conditions like IBR, CRYO, NACE, etc., shall also
be marked.
4.2
Pipes under IBR, CRYO, & NACE shall be painted in red stripes, light
purple brown stripes & canary yellow stripes, respectively, longitudinally
throughout the length for easy identification.
4.3
Paint or ink for marking shall not contain any harmful metal or metallic
salts such as zinc, lead or copper which cause corrosive attack on heating.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
ASSORTED PIPES
REV-0
PAGE 6 OF 9
4.4
Pipes shall be dry, clen and free from from moisture, dirt and loose
foreign materials of any kind.
4.5
Pipes shall be protected from rust, corrosion and mechanical damage

during transportation, shipment and storage.
4.6
Rust preventive used on machined surfaces to be welded shall be easily

removable with a petroleum solvent and the same shall not be harmful to
welding.
4.7
Both ends of the pipe shall be protected with the following material:
Plain end
Bevel end
Threaded end
:
:
:
Plastic cap
Wood, Metal or Plastic cover
Metal or Plastic threaded cap
4.8
End protectors to be used on bevelled ends shall be securely and tightly

attached with belt or wire.
4.9
Steel end protectors to be used on galvanised pipes shall be galvanised.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
ASSORTED PIPES
REV-0
PAGE 7 OF 9
ANNEXUREI
3.0
HYDROSTATIC TEST
3.1
All pipes shall be hydrostatically tested.
3.2
The mill test pressure shall be as follows:
3.2.1
Seamless, E.R.W. & Spiral Welded

a)
Carbon Steel
Material Standard
ASTM A 106 Gr. B
API 5L Gr. B, Seamless
API 5L, E.R.W.
API 5L, Spiral
ASTM A333 Gr.3 & 6, Seamless
ASTM A 333 Gr. 3 & 6, E.R.W.
b)
Test Pressure Standard

ASTM A 530
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
ASTM A 530
ASTM A 530
Seamless Alloy Steel
Material Standard
ASTM A335 GR.P1, P12, P11, P22, P5, ASTM A 530
P9
ASTM A268 TP 405, TP410
ASTM A530
c)
Seamless Stainless Steel
Material Standard
ASTM A312 Gr.TP304, 304L, 304H, 316, ASTM A 530
316L, 316H, 321, 347
d)
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
Seamless Nickel Alloy

Material Standard
B161 UNS No.2200
B165 UNS No.4400
B167 UNS No.6600
B407 UNS No.8800

ASTM B161
ASTM B165
ASTM B167
ASTM B407
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
ASSORTED PIPES
e)
REV-0
Welded Nickel Alloy

Material Standard
3.2.2
PAGE 8 OF 9
ASTM B725 UNS No.2200, 4400
ASTM B725
ASTM B517 UNS No.6600
ASTM B517
ASTM B514 UNS No.8800
ASTM B514
Electric Fusion Welded

a)
Carbon Steel & Alloy Steel E.FS.W. (16 & above)

Material Standard
API 5L Gr.B
ASTM A 671 Gr.CC65, 70 (Cl.32)
ASTM A 672 Gr.C60, 65, 70 (Cl.12,22)
ASTM A 671 Gr.CF60, 65, 66, 70 (Cl.32)
ASTM A 691 Gr. Cr, 1Cr, 1 Cr, 2
Cr, 5Cr, 9Cr (Cl.42)
P=2ST/ D
S=90% of SMYS (except for API 5L
Gr.B)
S=85% of SMYS for API 5L Gr.B
T=Nominal Wall Thickness
D=O.D. of Pipe
b)
Stainless Steel E.FS.W. (2 to 6)

The hydrostatic test pressure in kg/ cm2 for the following materials
shall be as given below:
Size
2
3
4
6
Material Gr.1:
ASTM A312 TP304/ 304H/ 316/ 316H/ 321/

347 welded
Material Gr.2:
ASTM A312 TP 304L/ 316L welded
Pipe Schedule: S10

Material Material
Gr.1
Gr.2
100
80
80
60
80
50
65
35
Pipe Schedule : S40

Material Material
Gr.1
Gr.2
155
130
155
130
155
130
90
75
Pipe Schedule : S80

Material Material
Gr.1
Gr.2
230
190
230
190
230
190
155
130
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
ASSORTED PIPES
c)
REV-0
PAGE 9 OF 9
Stainless Steel E.FS.W. (8 and above).
Material Standard
ASTM A358 TP 304L, 304, 304H, P = 2ST/D
316L, 316, 316H, 321, 347 S = 85% of SMYS
(Classes 1, 3 & 4)
T = Nominal Wall Thickness
D = O.D. of Pipe
ASTM A358 TP 304L, 304, 304H, P = 2ST/D
316L, 316, 316H, 321, 347 S = 72% of SMYS
(Classes 2 & 5)
T = Nominal Wall Thickness
D = O.D. of Pipe
3.2.3
Carbon Steel Pipes to IS Standards

Material Standard
IS :1239
IS :3589

IS :1239
IS :3589
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PIPELINE PRE-COMMISSIONING AND
COMMISSIONING
OF
PIPELINE PROJECT
SPECIFICATION NO. MEC/S/05/62/61, R-1
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
PIPELINE PRE-COMMISSIONING
AND COMMISSIONING OF
PIPELINE PROJECT
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 1 OF 8
MEC/S/05/62/61
REVISION 1
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
1.0
INTRODUCTION
2.0
GENERAL
3.0
THE WORK
4.0
PRE-COMMISSIONING CHECKS
37
5.0
DOCUMENTATION
78
PREPARED BY
Page No.
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
1.0
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
PIPELINE PROJECT
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 2 OF 8
MEC/S/05/62/61
REVISION - 1
INTRODUCTION
This specification covers the minimum technical requirements for precommissioning and commissioning of gas pipeline, including precommissioning activities such as pre-commissioning checks, flushing of
terminal piping, dewatering, swabbing and nitrogen purging.
2.0
GENERAL
The scope of work for testing and commissioning including pre-commissioning
activities shall include, but not limited to the manpower, machinery &
equipment, detailed procedures, materials and consumables, communications
etc. to perform the work satisfactorily.
Contractor shall prepare detailed procedures for flushing of terminal piping,
dewatering, swabbing, inertisation and commissioning of the pipeline, covering
all aspects of work for companys approval. This shall include, but not limited
to, the sequence and description of all operations, data on materials,
equipment, instruments, consumables, communications systems, necessary
calculations, detailed time schedule and organisation chart.
The Contractor shall be responsible for demonstrating the successful
completion of all the activities i.e. flushing of terminal piping, dewatering,
swabbing, inertisation and commissioning of the pipeline. All necessary work
to perform the job successfully including necessary modifications required shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Contractor shall design and supply all temporary line connections, valves,
instruments, etc. as required during the various operations.
In the event of any detail which is not fully addressed, it is warranted by
Contractor that work shall be performed in accordance with companys
specification and the best recognised practices in the on-shore pipeline
industry.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
3.0
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
PIPELINE PROJECT
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 3 OF 8
MEC/S/05/62/61
REVISION 1
THE WORK
The work to be performed by the Contractor shall consist of the following
activities :
Pre-commissioning :
Entire pipeline project shall be checked with respect

to latest P&IDs and other design specification.
Dewatering
Removal of hydrotest water from the entire pipeline

network system.
Swabbing
Reducing the amount of remaining water in the

main pipeline system which is left behind after
completion of the dewatering operations to make
the pipeline free of water.
Inertisation
Inertising the entire pipeline with nitrogen.
Commissioning
Charging the entire pipeline network with the

product and achieving normal operating conditions
of the pipeline.
4.0
PRE-COMMISSIONING CHECKS
4.1
The pre-commissioning checks shall be carried out for the pipeline to ascertain
that the pipeline system has been mechanically completed in all respects.
These checks shall cover the main pipeline including distribution network
system and sectionalising valve stations. The pre-commissioning checks shall
include the following:
i)
System Checks
The entire facilities shall be checked against the latest P&IDs and other
design specification codes.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
PIPELINE PROJECT
ii)
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 4 OF 8
MEC/S/05/62/61
REVISION - 1
Checking of Field Instruments

All the field instruments like control valves, sectionalising valves,
transmitters, solenoid valves, shut down switches, alarms etc. shall be
checked physically and also for their intended application by simulating
the operating conditions. It will also include checking of different
meters, gauges action of shutdown valves etc. as applicable.
iii)
Survey of the Pipelines

This shall be performed to confirm that proper fittings/ supports, route
markets, fencing around SV Stations etc. have been intalled along the
pipeline.
iv)
Checking of Communications System

This is to check that there is proper communications with adequate
back-up power to ensure uninterrupted communication.
v)
Checking of Electrical Distribution System

This is to ensure safety and also to ensure an uninterrupted power
supply during startup and normal pipeline operation.
vi)
Checking of Instruments, Controls & Interlocks

This is to check that instrument controls and interlocks are functional as
per the normal operating conditions.
vii)
Checking of Utilities
This is to check that utilities like power, nitrogen, UPS system
instrument air, etc. are available prior to startup.
viii)
Any other checks as may be considered necessary.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
PIPELINE PROJECT
4.2
DEWATERING
4.2.1
General
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 5 OF 8
MEC/S/05/62/61
REVISION - 1
During the dewatering operation the major quantity of hydrotest water shall be
removed from the main pipeline and distribution network. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor to develop suitable dewatering procedure and submit for
Companys approval.
The disposal of the water shall be performed such that no harm is done to the
environment.
4.2.2
Operational Requirements
The dewatering operation shall consist of number of dewatering pig runs when
air is used as propellant for pig trains.
Bi-directional cup pigs shall be used and will be suitable for traversing the
entire length of the pipeline/ pipe segment being dewatered. Contractor shall
ensure that all the pigs are designed to prevent damage to the pipeline internal
coating, if any.
The Contractor shall propose the minimum speed and the back pressure of the
pigs in order that continuous operation will be performed without the pig getting
stuck. Contractor shall submit all the calculations regarding this procedure and
a contingency plan for implementation in case the pigs get stuck.
Contractor shall provide a suitable compressor for oil-free air with sufficient
capacity and pressure.
Upon arrival of the pigs at the receiving end the Contractor in the presence of
Companys representative shall remove the pigs without delay.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
4.2.3
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
PIPELINE PROJECT
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 6 OF 8
MEC/S/05/62/61
REVISION 1
Acceptance Criteria
Before proceeding to the next stage of the inertisation operation Contractor
shall ensure that bulk of the water has been removed from the pipeline.
Contractor shall specify when the dewatering phase if finished and shall obtain
approval of the company before proceeding to the next inertisation phase.
4.3
Swabbing
4.3.1
General
The swabbing operation is meant to reduce the remaining water in the pipeline
to bring the pipeline into touch dry condition.
Swabbing operation shall be carried out to ensure that there is no free water
left inside the pipeline. This is done by driving number of swabbing pigs so that
the weight increase in pig before and after the swabbing operation is not more
then 25%. The Contractor shall submit the detailed procedure along with the
duration of the swabbing operation and obtain approval of the company before
starting the operation.
4.3.2
Acceptance Criteria
The Contractor shall ensure that the swabbing operation is considered to be
completed when it is established that there is no free water left in the pipeline
and the pipeline has achieved a touch dry condition. This shall be subject to
companys approval.
4.4
Inertisation
During the inertisation operation, the air left in the pipeline shall be replaced by
nitrogen before admitting the product natural gas that the pipeline will
ultimately carry.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
PIPELINE PROJECT
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 7 OF 8
MEC/S/05/62/61
REVISION - 1
The inertisation operation shall start as soon as possible after the swabbing
operation has been completed and approved by the company. Contractor
shall submit the detailed purging procedure for approval for the company prior
to its implementation.
Nitrogen needed for inertisation of the pipeline, shall be provided by the
Contractor. The maximum allowable oxygen content inside the pipeline shall
be less than 1% by volume.
Multiple separation pigs with nitrogen slugs in between shall be used for
pipeline commissioning. At least three batches of nitrogen separated by four
separation pigs shall be used for inertisation of the pipeline during charging of
gas in it. The combined nitrogen column length to be used for inertisation
should be at least 5% of the total pipeline length.
4.4.1
Safety Review before start of commissioning

A pre-startup safety review shall be carried out of the pipeline system before
permitting entry of natural gas into the new facility. Owner/ Owners
representative shall also participate in the pre-startup safety review.
4.5
COMMISSIONING
4.5.1
General
Commissioning of pipeline shall be considered completed when the line is
charged with product natural gas at operating pressure and the total system
operated at normal operating parameters for a minimum period of 72 hours
with all the instruments, controls and interlocks working satisfactorily at normal
operating conditions. Contractor shall submit a detailed commissioning
procedure for companys approval.
5.0
DOCUMENTATION
Contractor shall submit for approval of the company the complete description,
detailed procedure and time schedule of all the dewatering, swabbing, purging
and commissioning operations, as applicable.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
PIPELINE PROJECT
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 8 OF 8
MEC/S/05/62/61
REVISION - 1
Documents shall also contain all procedures and safety plans to be followed
while carrying out the activities.
Upon successful completion of the work, Contractor shall prepare a final report
of the work which shall include necessary charts, diagrams, graphs,
calculations, recordings, daily logs, measurements, details of the operation,
etc. Report shall also include all certificates of calibration of instruments
required together with records of calibration performed at site prior to the start
of any operation.
5.1
Spares and Consumables

Supply of spares, tools and consumables for start-up & commissioning.
5.2
Safety
Follow the safety practice during execution of pre-commissioning/
commissioning works as detailed in the scope of work. Maintain and follow all
safety practices equivalent or better than those being practiced for the pipeline
during pre-commissioning and commissioning.
SPECIFICATION
FOR
HEALTH, SAFETY
AND
ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
MANAGEMENT
SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/S/05/62/65
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
CONTENTS
Clause No.
Title
Page No.
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3.0
HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT (HSE) REQUIREMENTS 1 - 6
4.0
DETAILS OF HSE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM BY CONTRACTOR
6-7
ANNEXURES
1.
ANNEX-A-RELEVANT I.S. CODES
2.
ANNEX-B-REPORTING FORMATS 5 NOS.
3.
ANNEX-C-DOs & DONTS ABOUT SAFETY ASPECTS AS PER

FACTORIES ACT
8
9 18
1.0
SCOPE
This specification establishes the Healthy, Safety and Environment (HSE)
management requirement to be compiled with by the Contractors during
construction.
Requirement stipulated in this specification shall supplement the
requirement of HSE management given in relevant Act (S)/ legislations.
General Condition of Contract (GCC) Special Condition of Contract (SCC)
and Job Specifications. Where different documents stipulate different
requirements, the most stringent shall be adopted.
2.0
REFERENCES
This document should be read in conjunction with following:
-
General Conditions of Contract (GCC)

Special Conditions of Contract (SCC)
Job Specifications
Relevant IS Codes (refer Annexure-A)
Reporting Formats (refer Annexure-B)
3.0
REQUIREMENT OF HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM TO BE COMPLETED BY BIDDERS.
3.1
Management Responsibility
3.1.1
The Contract should have a document HSE policy to cover commitment of

the organization to ensure health, safety and environment aspects in their
line of operations
3.1.2
The HSE management system of the Contractor shall cover HSE

requirement including but not limited to what specified under clause 1.0 &
2.0 mentioned above
3.1.3
Contractor shall be fully responsible for planning and implementing HSE

requirement to the satisfaction of the company. Contractor as a minimum
requirement shall designate/deploy the following to co-ordinate the above:
No. Of workers deployed
Up to 250
-
Designate one safety supervisor who

will guide the workers from time to time,
as well as impart training basic
guidelines at least weakly once.
Page 1 of 19
Above 250 & upto 500
Deploy one qualified and experienced

safety Engineer/ Officer who will guide
the workers from time to time as well as
impart basic guideline & training at least
weakly once.
Above 500
(for every 500 or less)
One additional safety engineer/Officer

whose function will be as mentioned
above
Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless GAIL/ MECON & their
representatives from any and all liabilities arising out of non fulfillment of
HSE requirements.
3.1.4
The Contractor shall ensure that the Health, Safety and Environment
(HSE) requirements are clearly understood & faithfully implemented at all
levels, at each and every site/ work place.
3.1.5
The Contractor shall promote and develop consciousness for Healthy,

Safety and Environment among all personnel working for the Contractor.
Regular awareness programs and fabrication shop/work site meeting shall
be arranged on HSE activities to cover hazards involved in various
operations during construction.
3.1.6
Arrange suitable first aid measures such as First Aid Box, trained
personnel to give First Aid, Stand by Ambulance or Vehicle and install fire
protection measures such as: adequate number of steel buckets with sand
and water and adequate fire extinguishers to the satisfaction of GAIL/
MECON.
3.1.7
The Contractor shall evolve a comprehensive planned and documented

system for implementation and monitoring of the HSE requirements. This
shall submitted to GAIL & MECON for approval well in advance, prior to
start of work. The monitoring for implementation shall be done by regular
inspection and compliance to the observations thereof. The Contractor
shall get similar HSE requirements implemented at his sub-contractor (s)
work site/ Office. However, compliance of HSE requirement shall be the
sole responsibility of the Contractor. Any review/ approval by GAIL/
MECON shall not absolve the Contractor of his responsibility/ liability in
relation to all HSE requirements.
3.1.8
Non-Conformance on HSE by the Contractor (including his Subcontractors) as brought out during review/ audit by MECON/ OWNER
representative shall be resolved forthwith by Contractor. Compliance
report shall be possibility submitted to MECON/ GAIL at the earliest.
Page 2 of 19
3.1.9
The Contractor shall ensure participation of his Resident Engineer/Site-inCharge in the Safety Committee/HSE Committee meetings arranged by
GAIL/ MECON. The compliance of any observation shall be arranged
urgently. Contractor shall assist GAIL/MECON to achieve the targets set
by them on HSE during the project implementation.
3.1.10
The Contractor shall adhere consistently to all provisions of HSE

requirements. In case of non-compliance or continuous failure in
implementation of any of HSE provisions; GAIL/ MECON may impose
stoppage of work without any Cost & Time implication to Owner and/or
impose a suitable penalty for non-compliance with a notice of suitable
period, upto a cumulative limit of 1.0% (one percent) of Contract value
with a ceiling of Rs. 10 lakhs. This penalty shall be in addition to all other
penalties specified else where in the contract. The decision of imposing
stoppage of work, its extent & monitory penalty shall rest with
MECON/GAIL & binding on the Contractor.
3.1.11
All fatal accidents and other personnel accidents shall be investigated by a

team of Contractors senior personnel for root cause and recommend
corrective and preventive actions. Findings shall documented and suitable
actions taken to avoid recurrences shall be communicated to
GAIL/MECON. GAIL/MECON shall have the liberty to independently
investigate such occurrences and Contractor shall extend all necessary
help and co-operation in this regard.
3.2
House Keeping
3.2.1
Contractor shall ensure that a high degree of house keeping is maintained

and shall ensure the followings:
a.
All surplus earth and debris are removed/disposed off from the
working site to identified location (s).
b.
Unused/Surplus Cables Steel items and steel scrap lying scattered

at different places within the working areas are removed to
identified location (s).
c.
All wooden scrap, empty wooden cable drums and other

combustible packing materials shall be removed from work place to
identified location(s).
d.
Roads shall be kept clear and materials like pipes, steel, sand,
boulders, concrete chips and bricks, etc. shall not be allowed in the
roads to obstructs free movement of men & machineries.
Page 3 of 19
3.3
e.
Fabricated steel structurals, pipes & piping materials shall be

stacked properly for erection.
f.
Water logging on rods shall not be allowed.
g.
No parking of trucks/ trolleys, cranes and trailors etc. shall be

allowed on of roads, which may obstruct the traffic movements.
h.
Utmost care shall be taken to ensure over all cleanliness and

proper up keep of the working areas.
i.
Trucks carrying sand, earth and pulverized materials etc. shall be

covered while moving within the plant areas.
Healthy, Safety and Environment

a)
The Contractor shall provide safe means of access to any working

place including provision of suitable and sufficient scaffolding at
various stages during all operations of the work for the safety of his
workmen, and GAIL/ MECON. Contractor shall ensure deployment
of appropriate equipment and appliances for adequate safety and
healthy of the workmen and protection of surrounding areas.
b)
The Contractor shall ensure that all their staff workers including
their sub-Contractor (s) shall wear Safety Helmet and Safety shoes.
Contractor shall also ensure use of safety belt, protective goggles,
gloves etc. by the personnel as per jobs requirements. All these
gadgets shall conform to relevant IS specification equivalent.
c)
Contractor shall ensure that a proper Safety Net System shall be

used at appropriate locations. The safety net shall be located not
more than 30 feet (9.0 metrs) below the working surface at site to
arrest or to reduce the consequences of possible fall of persons
working at different heights.
d)
Contractor shall ensure that flash back arrester shall used while
using gas Cylinders at site. Cylinders shall be mounted on trollys.
e)
The Contractor shall assign to his workmen, tasks commensurate

with their qualification, experience and state of health for driving of
vehicles, handling and erections of materials and equipments. All
lifting equipments shall be tested certified for its capacity before
use. Adequate and suitable lighting at every work place and
approach there to shall be provided by the contractor before
starting the actual work/ operation at night..
Page 4 of 19
f)
Hazardous and/or toxic material such as solvent coating or thinners

shall be stored in appropriate containers.
g)
All hazardous materials shall be labeled with the name of the

materials, the hazards associated with its use and necessary
precautions to be taken.
h)
Contractor shall ensure that during the performance of the work all
hazards to the health of personnel have been identified assessed
and eliminated.
i)
Chemical spills shall be contained & cleaned up immediately to

prevent further contamination.
j)
All personnel exposed to physical agents such as ionizing or nonionizing radiation ultraviolet rays or similar other physical agents
shall be provided with adequate shielding or protection
commensurate with type of exposure involved.
k)
Where contract or exposure of hazardous materials could exceed

limits or could otherwise have harmful affects, appropriate personal
protective equipments such as gloves, goggles, aprons, chemical
resistant clothing and respirator shall be used
l)
Contractor shall ensure the following facilities at work sites:

I)
A Crche where 10 or more female workers are having

children below the age of 6 years.
II)
Reasonable Canteen facilities are made available at

appropriate location depending upon site conditions.
m)
Suitable facilities for toilet, drinking water, proper lighting shall be

provided at site and labor camps, commensurate with applicable
Laws/Legislation.
n)
Contractor shall ensure storage and utilization methodology of

material that are not detrimental to the environment. Wherever
required Contractor shall ensure that only the environment friendly
material are selected.
o)
All person deployed at site shall be knowledgeable of and comply

with the environmental laws, rules & regulation relating to the
hazardous materials substance and wastes. Contractor shall not
dump, release or otherwise discharge or dispose off any such
materials without the authorization of GAIL/ MECON.
Page 5 of 19
4.0
DETAILS OF HSE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM BY CONTRACTOR
4.1
On Awards of Contract
The Contractor shall prior to start of work submit his Health. Safety and
Environment Manual of procedure and HSE Plans for approval by
GAIL/MECON. The Contractor shall participate in the pre-start meeting
with GAIL/MECON to finalize HSE plans including the following.
-
Job procedure to be followed by Contractor for activities covering

Handling of equipments, Scaffolding, Electric Installation,
describing the risks involved, actions to be taken and methodology
for monitoring each.
Organizations structure alongwith responsibility and authority

records/ reports etc. on HSE activities.
4.2
During job execution
4.2.1
Implement approved Health, Safety and Environment management

procedure including but not limited to as brought our under para 3.0.
Contractor shall also ensure to:
-
Arrange workmen compensation insurance, registration under ESI

Act, third party liability insurance etc. as applicable.
Arrange all HSE permits before start of activities (as applicable) like
her work, confined space, work at heights, storage of
Chemicals/explosives materials and its use and implement all
precautions mentioned therein
Submit timely the completed check list on HSE activities, Monthly

HSE report, accident report, investigation report, etc. as per
GAIL/MECON requirements. Compliance of instructions on HSE
shall be done by Contractor and informed urgently to
GAIL/MECON.
Ensure that resident Engineers/Site-In-Charge of the Contractor

shall amend all the Safety Committee/HSE meeting arranged by
GAIL/ MECON only in case of his absence from site, a seconds
senior most person shall be nominated by him in advance and
communicated to GAIL/MECON.
Display at site office and work locations caution boards, list of

hospitals for emergency services available.
Page 6 of 19
Provided posters, banners, for safe working to promote safety

consciousness
Carryout audits/inspection at sub Contractor work as per approved

HSE documents & submit the reports for GAIL/MECON review.
Assistk in HSE audits by GAIL/ MECON and submit compliance

report.
Generate & submit HSE records/ reports as per HSE Plan.
Appraise GAIL/MECON on HSE activities at site.
Page 7 of 19
ANNEXURE-A
RELEVANT IS-CODES FOR PERSONNEL PROTECTION
IS:2925-1984
Industrial Safety Helmets.
IS:4770-1968
Rubber gloves for electrical purposes
IS:6994-1973 (Part-I)
Industrial Safety Gloves (Leather & Cotton)
IS:1989-1986 (Part-I & III): Leather safety boots and shoes.

IS:3738-1975
Rubber knee boots
IS:5557-1969
Industrial and Safety rubber knee boots.
IS:6519-1971
Code of practice for selection, care and repair of

Safety footwear
IS:11226-1985
Leather Safety footwear having direct moulding sole.
IS:5983-1978
Eye protectors.
IS:9167-1979
Ear protectors.
IS:3521-1983
Industrial Safety belts and harness.
Page 8 of 19
ANNEXURE-B
Format 1.0
1.0 HEALTHY, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT
(HSE) PLAN
Project:________________________________
date:___________________________________
Contractor:_______________________________
Owner:______________________________________
(To be prepared & submitted by each Construction Agency)

Activity
Description
PREPARED BY
Procedure/
W.I./
Guidelines
Code of
Conformance
Performing Function
Performance
Checker
Approver
REVIEWED
Audit Function
Customer Review/
Audit Requirements
APPROVED BY
Page 9 of 19
2.0 MONTHLY CHECKLIST CUM COMPLIANCE REPORT REGARDING HSE (1/6)

Project: _________________________
Date: _________________________
Inspection By:___________________
Contractor
Owner
:_______________________
:________________________
Note: write NC (Not Concern) wherever any of the items are not applicable
Item
Yes
No
Remark
Action
HOUSEKEEPING
Waste containers provided and used
Sanitary facilities adequate and Clean
Passageways and Walkways Clear
General neatness of working areas
Proper Material Storage
Wooden Boards properly stacked & nails
removed
Cords, leads out of walk and traffic ways
Scraps removed from the work site
Other
PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE
EQUIPMENT
Goggies: shields
Face protection
Hearing protection
Safety Shoes provided
Hand protection
Respiratory Masks etc.
Safety Belts
Safety Helmets
Other
EXCAVATIONS/ OPENINGS
Excavation permit
Excavated earth kept away from edge
Dewatering pump kept away from edge
Safe access into excavated area
Openings properly covered or barricaded
Excavations shored
Excavations barricaded
Overnight lighting provided
Other
Page 11 of 19
MONTHLY CHECKLIST CUM COMPLIANCE REPORT REGARDING HSE (2/6)
Item
WELDING CUTTING
Valid not work permit
Flashback arrester provided for
cylinders
Power cable not crossing the welding
cable
Adequate earthing provided
No combustible materials kept near
welding & cutting works
Gas cylinder chained upright & kept in
trolleys
Cables and hoses not obstructing
Screens or shields used
Flammable materials protected
Fire extinguisher (s) accessible
Other
SCAFFOLDING
Fully decked platform
Guard and intermediate rails in place
Toe boards in place & tied properly
Adequate shoring
Adequate access
Other
LADDERS
Extension side rails I m above
Top of landing
Properly secured at top & bottom
Angle 70 from horizontal
Other
Yes
No
Remark
Action
Page 12 of 19
ITEM
HOISTS, CRANES AND DERRICKS
Condition of cables and sheaves OK
Condition of slings, chains, hooks and
eyes OK
Inspection and maintenance logs
maintained
Outinggers used
Singh/barricades provided
Signals observed and understood
Qulified opretors
Other
MACHINERY, TOOLS AND
EQUIPMENT
Proper instruction
Saftey devices
Proper cords
Inspections and maintenance
Other
VEHICLE AND TRAFFIC
Rules and regulations observed
Inspection and mantinance
Licensed drivers
Others
YES
NO
REMARK
ACTION
Page 13 of 19

Item
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
Emergency instruction posted
Fire extinguishers provided
Fire-aid equipment
Secured against storm damage
General nemeses
In accordance with electrical
requirements
Other
FIRE PREVENTION
Personnel instructed
Fire extinguishers checked
No smoking in prohibited areas.
Hydrants clear
Other
ELECTRICAL
Proper wiring & earthing
ELCBs provided
Ground fault circuit interruptors
Protection against damage
Prevention of tripping hazards
Proper electrical cable joints
Light poles secured
Clear way to power distribution board
Proper rating of fuses
Yes
No
Remark
Action
Page 14 of 19

Item
HANDLING AND STORAGE OF
MATERIALS
Properly stored or stacked
Passageways clear
Other
FLAMMABLE GASES AND LIQUIDS
Containers clearly identified
Proper storage
Fire extingui HSErs nearby
Other
WORKING AT HEIGHT
Erection plan
Safety nets
Safety belts tied properly
Illumination
No loose material at height
NO body under working area
All openings covered
Other
ENVIRONMENT
Chemical and other Effluents properly
disposed
Cleaning liquid of pipes disposed off
properly
Seawater used for hydrotesting
disposed off as per agreed proceeding
Lubricant Waste/Engine oils properly
disposed
Waste from Canteen office, sanitation
etc. disposed properly
Disposal of surplus earth, stripping
materials, Oily rags and combustible
materials done properly
Green belt protection
Yes
No
Remark
Action
Page 15 of 19
MONTHLY CHECKLIST CUM COMPLIANCE REPORT

REGARDING HSE (Contd. 6/6)
Item
HEALTH CHECKS
Hygienic conditions at labour camps
OL
Availability of First Aid facilities
Proper sanitation at site, officer and
labour camps
Arrangements of medical facility
Measures for dealing with illness
Availability of potable drinking waters
for workmen & staff.
Provision of cretches for children.
ERECTION
Slings/ Dshakle checked
Signal Man
Tag line for guiding the load
Protecting the slings from sharp edges
No loose materials at height
Ladder & platform welding inspected
No one under the suspended load
Stay rope
SWL
Yes
No
Remark
Action
___________________
Signature of Resident
Engineer with Seal
Page 16 of 19
ANNEXURE-B
Format-3
3.0 ACCIDENT REPORT
(To be submitted by Contractor after every accident within 2 hours of accident)
Report No:___________________
Date: _______________________
Name of Site:-_______________________
CONTRACTOR______________________
NAME OF THE
INJURED..
FATHERS NAME..
SUB-CONTRACTOR
M/S..
DATE & TIME OF ACCIDENT.
LOCATION
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF ACCIDENT
CAUSE OF ACCIDENT
NATURE OF INJURY/DAMAGE
MEDICAL AID PROVIDED/ACTIONS TAKEN
INTIMATION TO LOCAL AUTHORITIES
DATE:
To
SIGNATURE OF CONTRACTOR
WITH SEAL
:
:
OWNER..
RCM/SITE-IN-CHARGE, MECON
1 COPY
1 COPY
Page 17 of 19
ANNEXURE-B
Format-4
4.0 SUPPLEMENTARY ACCIDENT & INVESTIGATION REPORT
Project:_____________________
_________
Supplementary to Report No:

(Copy enclosed)
Site:________________________
Date:_______________________
Contractor:______________________
NAME OF THE INJURED .
FATHERS NAME...
SUB-CONTRACTOR M/S...
DATE & TIME OF ACCIDENT
LOCATION
BRIEF DESCRIPTION & CAUSE OF A ACCIDENT
NATURAL OF INJURY/DAMAGE
COMMENTS FROM MEDICAL PRACTITIONER WHO ATTENDED THE VICTIM/INJURED
SUGGESTED IMPROVEMENT IN THE WORKING CONDITION IF ANY
LOSS OF MANHOURS AND IMPACT ON SITE WORKS
ANY OTHER COMMENT BY SAFTEY OFFICER.

Date : __/__/__/
CONTRACTOR
SIGNATURE OF
WITH SEAL
To
:
:
OWNER
RCM/SITE-IN-CHARGE, MECON
1 COPY
1 COPY
Page 18 of 19
5.0
MONTHLY Health, Safety & Environment (HSE) REPORT

(To be submitted by each Contractor)
Actual work start Date:________________
For the Month of:__________________
Project:_____________________________
Report No:________________________
Name of the Contractor:________________
Status as on:_______________________
Name of Work:_______________________
Name of Safety officer:_______________
Item
Total strength (Staff Workmen)
Number of HSE meeting
organized at site
Number of HSE awareness
programmes conducted at site
Whether workmen compensation
policy taken
Whether workmen compensation
policy valid
Whether workmen registered
under ESI Act
Number of Fatal Accident
Number of Loss Time Accident
(Other than Fatal)
Other accident (Non Loss Time)
Total No. of Accident
Total man-hours worked
Man-hour loss due to fire and
accident
Compensation cases raised with
Insurance
Compensation cases resolved
and paid to workmen
Remark
This Month
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Date: __/__/__
To:
OWNER..
RCM/SITE-IN-CHARGE MECON
Cumulative
Safety Officer/RCM
(Signature and name)
1 COPY
1 COPY
Page 19 of 19
SPECIFICATION
FOR
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEMS
REQUIREMENTS
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
\\Akjha\work contrac\standard TS for Pipe Line WC (Vol-II) MASTER FOLDER\66 quality assurance system\Specification - Quality Assurance Plan - Reqd. - 66.doc
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 1 OF 9
REQUIREMENTS
MEC/S/05/62/66
REVISION 0
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
Page No.
1.0
INTRODUCTION
2.0
DEFINITIONS
1-2
3.0
CONTRACTORS SCOPE OF WORK
2-4
4.0
QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
4-7
ATTACHMENTS
TITLE
NUMBER
FORMAT FOR QUALITY PLAN
FORMAT 00001
FORMAT FOR OBSERVATION ON
FORMAT 00002
PREPARED BY
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
1.0
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 2 OF 9
REQUIREMENTS
MEC/S/05/62/66
REVISION
INTRODUCTION
This specification establishes the Quality Assurance Requirements to be met by
the sub-contractors (including turnkey Contractors) and their sub-vendors.
In case of any conflict between this specification and other provisions of the
contract/ purchase order, the same shall be brought to the notice of MECON,
at the stage of bidding and shall be resolved with MECON, prior to the
placement of order.
2.0
DEFINITION
Bidder
For the purpose of this specification, the word Bidder means the person(s),
firm, company or organisation who is under the process of being contracted by
MECON/ Owner for delivery of some products (including service). The word is
considered synonymous to supplier, contractor or vendor.
Correction
Action taken to eliminate the detected non-conformity.
Refers to repair, rework or adjustment and relates to the disposition of an
existing non-conformity.
Corrective Action
Action taken to eliminate the causes of an existing non-conformity, defect or
other undesirable situation in order to prevent recurrence.
Preventive Action
Action taken to eliminate the causes of a potential non-conformity, defect or
other undesirable situation in order to prevent its recurrence.
Process
Set of inter-related resources and activities which transform inputs into
outputs.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 3 OF 9
REQUIREMENTS
MEC/S/05/62/66
REVISION
Special Process
Processes requiring pre-qualification of their process capability.
3.0
CONTRACTORS SCOPE OF WORK
3.1
Prior to award of contract

The bidder shall understand scope of work, drawings, specifications and
standards etc., attached to the tender/ enquiry document, before he makes an
offer.
The bidder shall submit milestone chart showing the time required for each
milestone activity and linkages between different milestone activities alongwith
overall time period required to complete the entire scope of work.
The bidder shall develop and submit manpower and resource deployment
chart.
The bidder shall submit, alongwith the bid, a manual or equivalent document
describing/ indicating/ addressing various control/ check points for the purpose
of quality assurance and the responsibilities of various functions responsible
for quality assurance.
3.2
After the award of contract

The bidder shall submit the schedule for submission of following documents in
the kick-off meeting or within two weeks of the placement of order, whichever
is earlier.
Detailed Bar Chart

Quality plan for all activities, required to be done by the bidder, to
accomplish offered scope of work.
Inspection and test plans, covering various control aspects.
Job procedures as required by MECON/ Owner.
Procurement schedule for items to be supplied by contractor covering
inspection of the same.
Various documents submitted by the bidder shall be finalised in consultation

with MECON. Here it shall be presumed that ones a bidder has made an offer,
he has understood the requirements given in this specification and agrees to
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 4 OF 9
REQUIREMENTS
MEC/S/05/62/66
REVISION
comply with them in totality unless otherwise categorically so indicated during

pre-award stage through agreed deviation/ exception request. All Quality
Assurance Plan (QAP) documents shall be reviewed by concerned functional
groups of MECON and the bidder shall be required to incorporate all comments
within the framework of this specification at this stage of the contract. It is
also obligatory on the part of the bidder that obtains approval on every Quality
Assurance Plan (QAP) documents, before he starts using a particular document
for delivery of contracted scope of work. Participation of MECON/ Owner in
review/ approval of quality plan/ QAP documents does not absolve the
contractor of his contractual obligations towards specified and intended use of
the product (or service) provided/ to be provided by him under the contract.
3.3
During job execution

During job execution, the bidder shall fully comply with all quality document
submitted and finalised/ agreed against the requirements of this specification.
Approval of MECON on all these documents shall be sought before start of
work.
Bidder shall produce sufficient quality records on controlled/ agreed forms
such that requirements given in this specification are objectively/
demonstrable.
Bidder shall facilitate MECON/ Owner during quality/ technical audits at his
works/ sites.
Bidder shall discharge all responsibilities towards enforcement of this
specification on all his sub-contractors for any part of the scope which is subcontracted.
4.0
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
4.1
The bidder shall nominate an overall incharge of the contract titled as Project
Manager for the scope of work of agreed contract. The name of this person
shall be duly intimated to MECON including all subsequent changes, if any.
MECON shall correspond only with the project manager of the bidder on all
matters of the project. The project manager of the bidder shall be responsible
for co-ordination and management of activities with bidders organisation and
all sub-vendors appointed by the bidder.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 5 OF 9
REQUIREMENTS
MEC/S/05/62/66
REVISION
After award of work, the bidder may review augmentation of manpower and
resources deployment chart (submitted earlier), detail it out, if so consented
by MECON/ Owner and resubmit the same as issued for effective
implementation of the project.
4.2
The bidder shall plan the contract scope of work on quality plan format such
that no major variation is expected during delivery of contract scope of work.
These quality plan shall be made on enclosed format complete in all respect.
The quality plan shall be assumed to be detailing bidders understanding and
planning for the contract/ offered scope of work. The bidder shall plan the
type of resources including various work methodology which he agrees to
utilize for delivery of contract scope of work.
4.3
The bidder is required to review the contract at all appropriate stages to

evaluate his capabilities with respect to timely and quality completion of all
activities pertaining to contracted scope of work and shall report for
constraints, if any to MECON/ Owner.
4.4
The design activities, if any, performed during delivery of contract scope of

work shall be so controlled that the outputs is reliable enough. It is expected
that during development of design, the bidder shall take recourse to detailed
checking, inter departmental reviews and documented verification methods.
4.5
For all documents which the bidder is likely to utilise for delivery of contract
scope of work, a system must exist which assures that latest/ required
version(s) of the document(s) is available at all location/ point of use.
4.6
In case the bidder decides to sub-contract any part/ full of the contract scope
of work (without prejudice to main Contractual condition), the bidder shall :
Evaluate the technical and financial capabilities and past performance of

the sub-contractor(s) and their products and/ or services before
awarding them with the sub-contracted scope of work. Selection of a
sub-contractor should meet MECON approval in documented form.
Requirement of this specification shall be enforced on sub-contracted

agency also. The bidder shall choose sub-contractor based on their
capability to meet requirements of this specification also.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 6 OF 9
REQUIREMENTS
MEC/S/05/62/66
REVISION
Note: It may so happen that, in a given situation, a sub-contractor may not

have a system meeting the requirements of this specification. In all
such eventualities, bidder may lend his system to sub-contractor for the
contract such that sub-contractor effectively meets the requirements of
this specification. In all such cases MECON shall be duly informed.
4.7
Bidder shall establish adequate methodology such that the materials supplied
by the Owner/ MECON shall be adequately preserved, handled and made use
of for the purpose for which they are provided.
4.8
All output delivered against contract scope of work shall be suitably identified
in such a manner that either through identification or some other means,
sufficient traceability is maintained which permits effective resolution of any
problem reported in the outputs.
4.9
Critical activities shall be identified and the bidder is required to have

documented methodologies which he is going to utilize for carrying out such
activities under the contract scope of work. Wherever it is difficult to fully
inspect or verify the output (special process), bidder shall pre-qualify, the
performers and methodologies.
4.10
All inspections carried out by the bidders surveillance/ inspection staff shall be
conformity to quality plans and/ or inspection and test plans. All inspection
results shall be duly documented on controlled/ agreed forms such that results
can be co-related to specific product, that was inspected/ tested.
4.11
All inspection, measuring & test equipments (IMTEs) shall be duly calibrated as
per National/ International standards/ codes and only calibrated and certified
IMTEs shall be utilized for delivery of contract scope of work.
4.12
All outputs/ products delivered against contract scope of work shall be duly
marked such that their inspection status is clearly evident during all stages/
period of the contract.
4.13
All non-conformities (NCs) found by the contractors inspection/ surveillance

staff shall be duly recorded, including their disposal action. The deficiencies
observed during stage of the product, shall be recorded and resolved suitably.
Effective corrective and preventive action shall be implemented by the bidder
for all repetitive NCs, including deficiencies.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 7 OF 9
REQUIREMENTS
MEC/S/05/62/66
REVISION
4.14
All deficiencies noticed by MECON/ Owner representative(s) shall be recorded

on a controlled form (Format No. 00002). Such deficiencies shall be analysed
by the bidder and effective and appropriate correction, corrective and
preventive actions shall be implemented. Bidder shall intimate MECON/ Owner
of all such corrective and preventive action implemented by him.
4.15
Bidder shall establish appropriate methodologies for safe and effective

handling, storage, preservation of various materials/ inputs encountered
during delivery of contract scope of work.
4.16
Bidder shall prepare sufficient records for various processes carried out by him
for delivery of contract scope of work such that requirements of this
specification are objectively demonstrable. In case MECON/ Owner finds that
enough objective evidence/ recording is not available for any particular
process, bidder shall be obliged to make additional records so as to provide
sufficient objective evidence. The decision of MECON/ Owner shall be final
and binding on such issues.
4.17
The bidder shall arrange internal quality audits at quarterly intervals, to

independently assess the conformance by various performers to the
requirements of this specification. The findings of such assessment shall be
duly recorded and a copy shall be sent to MECON/ Owner for review.
4.18
For all special processes, bidder shall deploy only qualified performers.
Wherever MECON/ Owner observes any deficiency, the bidder shall arrange
the adequate training to the performer(s) before any further delivery of work.
MECON LIMITED
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 8 OF 9
REQUIREMENTS
MEC/S/05/62/66
REVISION
OBSERVATION OF QUALITY ASPECTS

Job No. and Description
Issued to : M/s
FORMAT - 00002
No. :
Date :
Location of Work :
Item of Work :
Details of Observation(Deficiency)
Recommended Course of Action
Time Allowed for Correction :

Issued by : _____________________________________
Name of Signature of RCM, MECON Site
Corrective Action taken report by Contractor/ Vendor :
Date :
Distribution (before resolution) :
Project Manager
Chief Business Executive
Owner
MECON
Name and Signature
MECON Inspection
New Delhi
Resident Construction
Manager, MECON Site
Verification of Resolution by MECON :
Date :
Distribution (before resolution) :
Project Manager
Chief Business Executive
Owner
MECON
Name of Signature
MECON Inspection
New Delhi
Resident Construction
Manager, MECON Site
FORMAT 00001
Bidders Quality Plan
Activity Description
Note: 1)
2)
Project Name :
General
Procedure
Number
Code of
Conformance
Performing Functions
Performer
Checker
Reviewer/
Approver
PO/ Contract Ref:

Inspection Functions
Type of
Sampling
Testing and
(Approval)
Plan
Inspection
Surveillance
Code
Audit Function
Audit Scope
Owners/ MECON
Review/ Audit
Requirement
The bidder ensures that the filled up format conforms to minimum requirements on Quality Plan/ Quality Assurance, specified by MECON on drawings/ standards/ specifications/ write-up.
The bidder confirms that document is issued for information/ approval of Owner/ MECON for the project implementation
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CALIPER PIGGING
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
\\Akjha\work contrac\standard TS for Pipe Line WC (Vol-II) MASTER FOLDER\70 caliper pigging spec\Specification for Caliper Pigging - 70.doc
CONTENTS
Sl. No.
Description
1.0
INTENT
2.0
OBJECTIVE
3.0
SCOPE OF WORK
4.0
VELOCITY OF DIFFERENT PIGS
5.0
FOAM PIG RUN
6.0
GAUGE PIG RUN
7.0
CLEANING PIG RUN
8.0
CALIPER PIG RUN
9.0
PIG TRACKING
10.0
MARKER DEVICES
11.0
DEFECT VERIFICATION
12.0
ABNORMAL SITUATIONS
13.0
WORK REPORT
14.0
INFORMATION TO BE FURNISHED BY BIDDER
Page No.
SPECIFICATION FOR CALIPER PIGGING

1.0
INTENT
The intent of this specification is to setforth the requirements of the
caliper pigging. The specification is not intended to be all-inclusive and the
use of this specification will not absolve the contractor of his responsibility
of generating valid, interpretable and physically verifiable data.
2.0
OBJECTIVE
The objective of the present pigging programme to access the internal
geometry of the following pipelines and detect significant geometry
defects if any, which may affect safe operation of the pipeline.
The relevant technical specifications of the pipeline including launcher and
receiver details in the Annexure.
3.0
SCOPE OF WORK
To achieve the above objective, contractors SCOPE OF WORK includes
running of adequate numbers of foam pigs, cleaning pigs (magnet, brush,
commination of brush and magnet, scraper, pin wheel etc.), gauge pig
and caliper pig.
Further the scope of work comprises supply of skilled personnel, all
equipment e.g. foam pigs cleaning pigs, gauging pig, caliper pigs, pig
locating and pig tracking devices, spares consumables, communication
and transportation including their mobilisation and demobilisation. It is
expressly understood that this do not limit the scope of work of the
CONTRACTOR in any way. The quantities to be mobilized for different
equipment (different types of pigs pig tracking device, marker device)
accessories, spare and consumables need to be carefully evaluate by the
CONTRACTOR taking in to the consideration that caliper pigging of various
Page 1 of 9
pipelines in the scope of work should be carried out without any constraint
and turn around time.
The contractor shall submit the details of each type of pig including foam,
gauge cleaning and caliper for approval of MECON/ GAIL, which he
proposes to use. Pigs shall be launched in the pipeline only after their
design and size has been approved by MECON/ GAIL. Due care shall be
taken not to damage internal coating by the contractor, while proposing
the pigs for internally coated pipeline.
The detailed scope of work shall be, but not limited to under
-
Supply of all equipment, personnel and consumables.
Running of foam, Gauge, Cleaning and Caliper pigs and Tracking to

generate valid data.
4.0
Placement of marker devices along the Row over the pipeline.
Identification of defects in the field as found
Preparation of work reports.
VELOCITY OF DIFFERENT PIGS

Contractor shall be required to maintain velocities of propelling medium in
such a way that the objective of each pig run shall be achieved.
5.0
FOAM PIG RUN

Contractor to carry out adequate number of foam pigs runs in each
pipeline covered under Scope of Work prior to running of cleaning pigs to
make a final assessment of the line piggability to the satisfaction of the
Contractor and provide detailed daily site report for each run in the
approved format before commencing the subsequent run. Contractor to
select size of the foam pigs in such a way that the objective shall be
achieved.
Page 2 of 9
6.0
GAUGE PIG RUN

Contractor to carry out adequate number of gauging pig runs in each
pipeline covered under Scope of work including pig tracking for pipeline to
assess any internal restriction in the pipeline that may restrict the passage
of cleaning and caliper pig. Contractor to provide detailed daily site report
for each run in the approved format before commencing the subsequent
run Gauge pig shall be equipped with a gauge plate made of Aluminium
having its diameters 95% of minimum pipeline Internal Diameter (I.D.).
The gauge pig should be able to pass over or negotiate lateral tees or
bends on the pipeline.
7.0
CLEANING PIG RUN
7.1
Pipelines with Internal Coating

Contractor to carry out adequate number of cleaning pig runs by running
suitable cleaning pigs in the pipelines including pig tracking till such time
contractor is satisified with himself about the degree of cleanliness of
pipeline and provide detailed daily site report for each run in the approved
format before commencing the subsequent run. Choice of the type of
cleaning pig has been left to the contractor. The contractor shall assure
that the pigs, which are proposed to be used, are adequately soft and
they do not damage internal coating under any circumstances.
The
brushes and scrappers used shall be of nonmetallic/ plastic material.

However, the details of these pigs including their construction details of
brushes, scrappers etc. (if applicable) shall be submitted to MECON/ GAIL
for approval before their usage.
7.2
Pipelines Without Internal Coating

CONTRACTOR to carry out adequate numbers of cleaning pig runs by
running suitable cleaning pigs in pipeline covered under SCOPE OF WORK
including pig tracking till such time CONTRACTOR is satisfied with himself
Page 3 of 9
about the degree of cleanliness of pipeline and provide detailed daily site
report for each run in the approved format before commencing the
subsequent run. Choice of the type of cleaning pig has been left to the
contractor. Contractor may deploy brush cleaning pig, magnetic cleaning
pig, combination of brush and magnet, scrapper pig etc. the cleaning pigs
should be able to pass over negotiate lateral tees or bends on the pipeline
8.0
CALIPER PIG RUN

CONTRACTOR to carry out adequate number of electronic geometry
(caliper) pig runs each pipeline covered under SCOPE OF WORK including
pig tracking for each pipeline decided after findings of gauging pig run to
generate valid and interpretable geometry data of the pipeline and
analysis of data of the caliper survey to detect the nature, extent and
location of geometry defect. Contractor to provide detailed daily site
report for each run in the approved format before commencing the
subsequent run. The caliper should be capable of inspecting entire length
of the pipeline i.e. from launcher to receiver in single run. Battery life
should be adequate to commensurate with the run time required to travel
the pipeline length. The electronic recorder system should have requisite
data storage capacity. The drive cups should have requisite resistance to
wear and tear to maintain effective seal throughout the entire run time.
The measurement shall cover the entire 360 of internal pipe wall
circumference using properly oriented and suffcient quantity of sensors.
For internally coated pipelines adequate care shall be taken by using soft
cups so that no damage takes place to the internal coating of pipe. The
tool shall be capable to identify and locate the following features as
minimum.
-
Individual Girth weld
Dent, ovality, buckles, or any other out of roundness, change in

pipeline I.D. and difference of thickness.
Bend with bend radius and degree of bend.
Page 4 of 9
Valves or any partially closed valves.
Tees/ off-takes.
The caliper pig should have minimum capability to identify and detect the
defects of following threshold.
Dent
3% of outer diameter (O. D.)
Ovality
5% of outer Diameter (O. D.)
Location accuracy
Axial 3.0m
Circumferential : 12
(For dents, ovalities and pipeline feature as detailed above).

9.0
PIG TRACKING
The movement of any type of pig (Except, foam pig) put into the line
during caliper pigging shall be required to be monitored along the pipeline
length from launcher to receiver trap. The BIDDER shall detail out the
complete methodology of pig tracking proposed to be deployed by him
including complete technical details of the equipment and device proposed
to be used for this purpose.
It is proposed that pig tracking would be done in a discrete manner at
least 5 to and 10 km - interval on each pipeline at preselected locations.
The exact KM chainage of these locations shall be decided at site in
consultation with the Contractor and CONSULTANT/ COMPANY.
10.0
MARKER DEVICES
The contractor shall submit the details of marker devices, which he
proposes to place for relocating the defect accurately in the field, when
the same has been identified as a result of Caliper survey.
Page 5 of 9
The contractor shall be responsible for placing these devices (Marker

Magnets or Locator coils or any other device) at suitable interval so that
the defect can be easily located in the field with minimum above ground
measurement. It may be noted that placement of marker devices, their
retrieval and locating the identified defect in the field shall be the
responsibility of the contractor. The liquidation of defects, if any, is
however, not included in the scope of work of the contract.
11.0
DEFECT VERIFICATION
At the discretion of the COMPANY/ CONSULTANT identify at least two
verification dig sites for each pipeline jointly with MECON and GAIL from
the recorded data and provide MECON/ GAIL with their distance from the
nearest pipeline feature or reference marker to facilitate location of defect
in the field.
The contractor shall depute his representative to observe the verification
at verification sites for proving that filed log detected anomalies conform
to sizing including linear and circumferential positions.
12.0
ABNORMAL SITUATIONS
The objective of this section is to write down foreseeable abnormal
circumstances for taking appropriate measures, should such a condition
arise during implementation of project.
The following abnormal condition have been foreseen by the Comapny.
However, if the BIDDER foresees any other abnormal condition, he is free
to make a mention of the same in his technical BID offer:
12.1
Tool Failure
CONTRACTOR is required to get valid interpretable and verifiable data for
pipeline. In case CONTRACTORS equipment fails to perform electronic
Page 6 of 9
geometry inspection to generate valid data for any of the pipeline,

CONTRACTOR will make extra runs of pigs to get valid and physically
verifiable data.
12.2
Stuck-Up Tool
The BIDDER shall details out a contingency plan in his BID as proposed by
him in case any of the pigs get stuck up. The plan shall identify procedure
for exactly locating the stuck up pig, detail procedure for retrieval of pig,
equipment, including support facilities required to retrieve the pig.
If pig do not move from stuck up location, by any measure, then the
pipeline section shall have to be cut for retrieval of Pig. Necessary
erection, fabrication and modification of pipe with new pipe piece after
retrieval of pig shall be done by Contractor. The cost for this works shall
be borne by Contractor on actuals. After fabrication & erection, pigging
contractor shall run Gauge pig to check internal restriction, if any.
Locating the stuck up pig and its retrieval shall be the responsibility of the
CONTRACTOR.
13.0
WORK REPORT
The work report shall be prepared and submitted in hard copy (4 sets)
and Electronics media (2 sets)
The work report shall consist of following as a minimum.
-
All field activities.
Equipment description
List of installations
List of significance with feature information and installation

reference
Survey log and enlargement areas of special interest to suitable

scale.
Page 7 of 9
14.0
INFORMATION TO BE FURNISHED BY BIDDER IN HIS OFFER FOR

EVALUATION.
-
List of similar projects executed in the past.
Specification of foam pigs, cleaning pigs, gauge pig and caliper pig
for pipelines with and without internal coating respectively.
Details of caliper pig in following respect.

Max.% of Nominal pipeline ID tool can pass (% of ID)
Minimum deformation level reported (as % of ID)
Accuracy of measurement (% of ID)
Bend radius tool able to negotiate
details of pig tracking equipment and pig tracking procedure.
Pig contingency plan.
Proposed methodology for execution of pipeline pigging.
Sample reporting format.
Minimum velocity of various pigs acceptable to bidder for generation of

valid data.
Page 8 of 9
ANNEXURE
PIPELINE DETAILS
NOMINAL DIAMETER mm (inch.)
300 (12)
DESIGN PRESSURE Kg/ cm
92
DESIGN TEMPERATURE, C
65
WALL THICKNESS, mm
6.4 & 11.1
400 (16)
450 (18)
PIG LAUNCHER DETAILS:

BODY SIZE NB, mm (inch)
PIG RECEIVER DETAILS:

BODY SIZE NB, mm (inch)
NUMBER OF SECTIONALIZING
VALVE STATIONS
Page 9 of 9
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
FIELD JOINT COATINGS OF PIPELINE
FOR HDD CROSSING
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
Page No.
1.0
01
SCOPE
01 -
2.0
02
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
01 -
3.0
SPECIFICATION FOR FIELD JOINT COATING MATERIAL
4.0
11
5.0
INSPECTION
11 - 12
6.0
TESTING
12 - 12
7.0
REPAIR OF FIELD JOINT COATING
13 - 13
8.0
REPAIR OF PIPE COATING DEFECTS
14 - 14
9.0
DOCUMENT
14 - 14
02 - 07
08 -
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
General
This specification covers the minimum requirement for application of anticorrosion field joints coating on welded pipe section and field tie-in joints
referred to here in after as Joint(s). The contractor shall perform all work in
accordance with this specification, latest pipeline coating practices and to
the full satisfaction of the Owner. The anti-corrosion pipe joint coating shall
be compatible with yard applied, Ultra Violet (UV) radiation protected, 3
layer side extruded polyethylene coating conforming to DIN-30670. The
sleeve width shall be suitable for cut back of 120 20 mm to be left at
both the ends of coated pipes. The job includes supply of all materials
equipment, consumables, labour, supervision, quality control, inspection
repairs.
1.2
Manpower, Material & Equipment
1.2.1
The Contractor shall supply wrap around heat shrinkable sleeves which is
composed of two parts such as adhesive coated wrap around and a
curable modified epoxy primer alongwith applicator pads.
1.2.2
The supply of wrap around heat shrinkable sleeve shall be under

Contractors scope.
1.2.3
The Contractor shall provide all skilled/ unskilled personnel required for
execution of this work.
1.2.4
The joint coating operation starting from cleaning and surface preparation
till application of joint coating and wrapping of the pipe joints shall be
performed under the supervision of skilled personnel who are well versed
in the work.
1.2.5
Contractor shall at his own cost provide a fully equipped laboratory and
test facilities with adequate inventory to carry out tests required for
procedure qualification and during regular production, for testing of joint
coating system.
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
2.1
Provision of the following documents/ codes shall generally be followed for

standard of specification and workmanship.
a)
DIN 30672 : Corrosion protection tapes and Heat Shrinkable

Sleeves.
\\Akjha\work contrac\standard TS for Pipe Line WC (Vol-II) MASTER FOLDER\74 field joint for HDD crossing\Specification for FPJ Coating for HDD Crossing - 074-f.doc
Page 1 of 14
b)
SIS 055900 : Pictorial surface preparation standard for painting

steel surfaces.
c)
SSPC SP1 : Steel structure painting council Solvent Cleaning.
2.2
In case of conflict between the requirements of this specification and that

of above referred documents/ codes, the requirements of this
specifications shall govern.
3.0
SPECIFICATION FOR FIELD JOINT COATING MATERIAL
3.1
General
This scope covers the minimum requirement of materials, equipment
required for installation of field joint coating by wraparound fibrereinforcement heat-shrinkable sleeve used for corrosion protection and
sealing of field joints in pipelines that are forced through the soil by
Horizontal Directional Drilling technique. The sleeves shall be suitable for
3LPE/FBE coated pipes operating up to 60C continuously.
3.1.1
3.1.2
Each Joint Coating System shall consist of :

a)
A wraparound heat shrinkable sleeve reinforced with fibre-glass.

The sleeve shall be coated with a higher- shear- strength
thermoplastic hot-melt adhesive.
b)
A solvent-free, two component liquid epoxy primer
c)
A specifically designed wear cone
d)
A clamping belt
Sleeve Backing
The heat shrinkable sleeves shall be manufactured from minimum 1.0 mm
thick radiation cross linked, thermally stabilized, UV -resistant heatshrinkable fabric, composed of a fibre glass reinforcement and polyolefin
fibres, embedded in a polyolefin matrix.
Page 2 of 14
3.1.3
Sleeve Adhesive
The inner surface of the sleeves shall be coated with a controlled
thickness of minimum 1mm of adhesive which in combination with the
modified epoxy primer, will bond to and seal to the steel pipe and common
yard applied medium temperature yard coatings.
3.1.4
Epoxy Primer
The Epoxy primer shall be a solvent free, modified two components liquid
epoxy type primer, which is applied to cleaned and dry steel surface.
When the sleeve coatings, comes in contact with the liquid primer during
installation, a strong bond is formed upon full curing of the system.
3.2
Properties of Field Joint Coating Material

The pipe sleeves furnished under this specification shall be tested and
shall meet the requirements specified in the table below:-
3.2.1
Heat-Shrinkable Sleeve Material

Property
Cold Crack
Chemical
resistance
Test
Method
ISO 4675
ISO 175
Condition
Requirement
Below 40C
168 hrs. immersion on either

0.1 N
NaCl @ 23C, 0.1N H2 SO4 @
3.2.2
Followed by test for

bursting strength
ISO 3303
23C, 0.1 N NaOH @ 23C,

Fuel oil @ 23C. Petroleum jelly
@ 70C
23C
Thermal ageing
ISO 188
150C
Followed by test for

bursting strength
ISO 3303
23C
168 hrs.
1100 N Min.
1700 N Min.
Adhesive material
Property
Condition
Softening point
Test
Method
ASTM E28
Peel Strength
DIN 30672
23C. CHS*
100 mm/ min.
60C
Requirement
85C minimum
200 N/cm minimum
60 N/ cm
Page 3 of 14
Property
Test
Method
DIN 30672
Peel Strength
After immersion for 4 weeks
at 23C~NaOH pH12 H2SO4
pH2 ground water solution:1.2% H3PO4
1.6% KOH
1.2NaCl
1.0% Fe2O3
Peel Strength after
conditioning for 30
cycles from -30C to 60C
3.2.3
Condition
Requirement
23C. CHS*
100 mm/ min.
200 N/cm minimum
DIN 30672
23C. CHS*
100 mm/ min.
60 N/cm minimum
Shear strength
ISO 4587
200 N/cm minimum
Corrosive effect
ASTM D
2671
23C. CHS*
50 mm/ min.
120C.
16 hrs.
No corrosion
Primer Material
Property
Density
Test Method
Condition
ASTM D1084
23 +/- 0.5 C
Part A: 2 rpm, spindle #6
Part B: 20rpm, spindle #3
Part A: 60+/- 30 Pas

Part B: 1.55+/-0.55 Pas
23C
100:40
100:60
2
1000 N/cm minimum
Mixing ratio
Shear strength
By weight
By volume
ISO 4587
23C. CHS*
50 mm/ min.
Requirement
* CHS = Cross Head Speed

3.2.4
Functional Properties
Sl.
No.
a)
Test Method
Condition
Requirement
Impact
resistance
Penetration
resistance
DIN 30672
23C.
Class C
60C.
Class C
c)
Specific coating
resistance
DIN 30672
23C.
d)
Cathodic
disbondment
resistance
Resistance to
split
propagation
ASTM G42
60C.
30 days
No holidays when tested

at 20 KV
Minimum 70% of original
resistance thickness left;
no holidays when tested
at 20 KV
8
10 Ohm sq. m minimum;
no oxidation on pipe
surface
15 mm increase in radius
of disbondment max.
b)
e)
Property
DIN 30672
TEST METHOD*
1
No cut propagation
Page 4 of 14
Sl.
No.
f)
g)
Property
Test Method
Condition
Requirement
Resistance to
circumferential
edge loading
Resistance to
local edge
loading (chisel
test)
TEST METHOD*
2
50 KN minimum
TEST METHOD*
3
6 KN minimum
*Test Methods
3.3
Test Methods
3.3.1
Resistance to split propagation (Test Method -1)

A rectangular piece of 50mm width by 150 mm length shall be cut from the
material as delivered. A 5mm long, clean cut shall be made mid-way in the
piece along once of the long edges perpendicular to this edge. The
sample shall be mounted on a clamp that holds it securely and avoids any
shrinking during testing.
The assembly shall be placed in an air-circulating oven present at 1700C.
After 15 minutes, the sample shall be removed from the oven, allowed to
cool down to room temperature and examined for cut propagation.
This test simulates the unlikely event when the sleeve gets cut during the
installation phase. Sleeves based upon extruded polyelfin show a distinct
tendency to propagate the cut along the total width of the sleeve. Sleeves
suitable for HDD works shall not exhibit this behaviour.
3.3.2
Resistance to circumferential edge loading (Test method -2)

The sleeve shall be installed on a DN 200 three -layer PE coated steel
pipe piece. A thick wall steel ring that fits a DN 200 three-layer PE coated
steel pipe with a tolerance of 0.2+-0.2 mm shall be positioned against the
front edge of the wear cone sleeve and then pushed towards the sleeve
system at a constant speed of 5 mm/ min over a distance of 50 mm. The
forces necessary shall continuously be registered. The minimum required
force shall be less than 50 KN.
During the pushing or pulling operation, any obstacle protruding from the
smooth pipe surface is loaded by the surrounding soil that passes by. This
test simulates the shear forces that are exerted on to the sleeve by rigid
soil type.
3.3.3
Resistance to local edge loading (Chisel test: Test Method -3)
Page 5 of 14
The sleeve shall be installed on a DN 200 three-layer-PE coated steel

pipe piece.
A chisel as depicted in Figure -1 shall be positioned against the front
edge of the wear cone sleeve and, pushed parallel to the pipe surface
towards the sleeve system at a constant speed of 5mm/ min over a
distance of 50 mm. The forces necessary shall continuously be
registered. The minimum required force should not be less than 6 KN.
During the pushing or pulling operation, the pipe may traverse soil area
containing solid particles, such as stones, pebbles or crushed rock. These
particles tend to rip away the pipe coating locally. Any obstacle protruding
from the smooth pipe surface is lifted, leading to soil undercutting. This
test determines the resistance of sleeve against this type of abuse.
I5mm
35mm
View AA
Figure- 1 Chisel
Page 6 of 14
3.4
Qualification for
Manufacturer
3.4.1
Prior to procurement of coating materials, Contractor shall furnish the

following information for qualification of the Manufacturer and material:
3.4.2
3.4.3
Contractors
supplied
Materials
and
their
a.
Complete descriptive technical catalogs describing the materials

offered along with samples of corrosion coating materials, its
properties and application instruction as applicable specifically to
the project.
b.
Reference list of previous supplies, in last 5 years, of the similar

material or manufacturer shall be notified to Company, whose
approval in writing of all charges shall be obtained before the
materials are manufactured.
Contractor shall ensure that the coating materials supplied by him are
properly packed and clearly marked with the following :-
Manufacturers name
Material Qualification Certificate Number
Batch Number
Date of Manufacturing and date of expiry
Prior to shipment of materials from the Manufacturers Works. Contractor

shall furnish the following documents:
a.
b.
c.
Test certificate/results as per Manufacturers Quality Control

Procedure for each batch of materials complying with the
requirements of relevant sub-clauses of clause no. 3.2 of the this
specification.
Specific application instructions with pictorial illustrations.
Specific storage and handling instructions.
3.4.4
All documents shall be in English language only.
3.5
Storage of Materials
4.0
Material shall be stored in sheltered storage by the Contractor in the

manufacturers original packing and away from direct sunlight and in
accordance with manufacturers instructions.
Page 7 of 14
4.1
General
a)
The application procedure shall be in accordance with

manufacturers instruction and the minimum requirements required
below whichever are the most stringent and shall be demonstrated
to and approved by the Owner.
b)
Contractor shall provide and maintain mobile facilities which

contains all necessary tools, propane torches, epoxy primer pumps,
silicon rollers, testing instruments, equipment, and spares for
cleaning, coating, repairs, inspection and testing.
c)
Contractor shall furnish sufficient number of the following

equipment and the required spares as a minimum for inspection
and testing purpose for each crew :
-
4.2
Fully automatic full circle adjustable holiday detector with

audio and visual output signal for inspection of coating.
Portable Tensile Strength Tester
Digital Thermometer
Solid state digital thickness gauge for measuring thickness
of joint coating.
Pipe Surface Preparation

a)
The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and dry the joint surface by
power tool cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP1. The complete
procedure and details of equipment used shall be prepared by the
Contractor for Owners approval prior to commencement of joint
coating work.
b)
Prior to cleaning operation, Contractor shall visually examine the

joint surface area and shall ensure that all defects, flats and other
damages have been repaired or removed.
c)
Where oil, grease or other materials detrimental to the finished

coating is present, it shall be removed with a continuous removal
solvents cleaning system to remove completely all such materials in
accordance with SSPC-SP1.
d)
The standard of finish for cleaned pipe surface shall conform to SA

2 of Swedish Standard SIS-055900 latest edition. The degree of
preparation required to obtain an end product that fulfil the
Page 8 of 14
requirements of this specification may not be sufficiently covered

and is not limited by SIS-055900. Surface of pipe after shot blasting
shall be have an anchor pattern of 50 to 70 microns. This shall be
measured by a suitable instrument such as Elecometer.
e)
Piper temperature immediately prior to blasting shall be minimum

20C. At no time shall be blast cleaning be performed when the
relative humidity exceeds 85%. Surface temperature must be at
least 3C above the dew point temperature.
f)
The abrasive blast material shall be free of impurities and

inclusions, water and oil. All abrasives shall be removed after blast
by brush or vacuum type cleaner prior to applying joint coating.
The abrasive shall be stored in a dry condition and maintained dry
during use.
g)
The compressed air for blasting shall be free of water and oil.
Contractor to verify air cleanliness at the start of the work and every
four hours thereafter. Separators and the traps shall be provided at
the compressor and blasting station. Separators and traps shall be
checked daily for effective moisture and oil removal during coating
operations.
h)
The ends of existing line pipe protective coating shall be inspected

and chamfered. Unbonded portions of the coating shall be
removed and then suitably trimmed. Portions where parent coating
is removed shall be thoroughly cleaned as specified.
i)
Pipe shall be visually inspected by Contractor immediately after

blast cleaning for surface defects such as slivers, laminations,
leafing, scores, indentation slugs or any other defects considered
injurious to the coating integrity. Such defects shall be reported to
Owner and on permission from Owner, such defects shall be
removed by filling or grinding in such a way as not to blue the
steel.
Page 9 of 14
4.3
Procedure
a)
The application procedure shall be in accordance with

manufacturers instruction and the minimum requirements specified
below whichever are the most stringent and shall be demonstrated
to and approved by the owner.
b)
Applicators for coating application shall be given necessary

instructions and training before start of work by the
CONTRACTOR. To verify and qualify the application procedures,
all coating applied during the qualification test, shall be removed for
destructive testing until the requirements stated in sections
Inspection and testing of this specification are met.
c)
Prior to surface cleaning, the surface shall be completely dry. An

effective heating equipment which shall not give rise to deposits
shall be used. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to existing
coating.
d)
All pipe joint surfaces shall be thoroughly examined before the

application of the coating in order to ensure that the surfaces are
free of oil, grease, rust, mud, earth or any other foreign matter.
e)
Liquid epoxy primer shall be applied on the joints immediately after

the completion of heating operation.
f)
The heat shrink sleeve is then wraparound the joint while the primer
is still wet and shall overlap the existing pipe coating by minimum
100 mm on each side.
g)
The wraparound sleeve is shrunk on pipe joint with a propane torch

moved back and forth over the surface when heated above 125C,
the sleeve shall shrink tightly around the substrate on to the wetprimer. At the time of application of the primer, th pipe surface
temperature shall be at least 60C at every point. To check this,
approved temperature indicators shall be used . temperature
indicating crayons shall not be used.
h)
The wraparound sleeve shall be entirely wrapped around the pipe

positioning the closure patch off to one side of the pipe in 10m or 2
Oclock position, with edge of the undergoing layer facing upward
and an overlap of min. 100 mm.
i)
Heat shrinking shall be procedure shall be applied to shrink the

sleeve in such a manner that all entrapped air is removed using
gloved hands and hand rollers. The complete shrinking of entire
Page 10 of 14
sleeves shall be obtained without undue heating of existing pipe

coating and providing due bonding between pipe, sleeve and pipe
coating. A thermochrome paint shall be applied a an closure patch
to indicate that sufficient heat/ temperature has been obtained. The
joint coating shall have wear cone applied over the leading edge of
the sleeve and the clamping belt tightened over it.
j)
Application of Wear Cone - The leading edge will be given an extra

wear cone. Start by heating the leading edge area of the main
sleeve to 700C. Wrap the leading edge sleeve over the transition
Mill coating. Ensure that the closure is placed away from the main
sleeve closure Shrink the leading edge sleeve.
k)
Application of Metal Belt - The metal belt shall be applied over the
wear cone sleeve. The metal belt will be tightened using the
strapper tool supplied by the manufacturer.
l)
Sufficient manpower working on opposite sides of each pipe joint

are required for installation of the sleeve.
m)
The installed sleeve shall not be disturbed until the adhesive has
solidified.
5.0
INSPECTION
5.1
For wraparound coating, a visual inspection shall be carried out for the
following :
-
Mastic extrusion on either ends of the sleeves shall be examined

There shall be no sign of punctures or pinholes or bond failure.
The external appearance of the sleeves shall be smooth, free of
dimples, air entrapment or void formation.
Weld bead profile shall be visible over the sleeves.
The entire closure patch shall have changed colour uniformly.
5.2
Holiday Inspection
5.2.1
The Holiday Detector used shall be checked and calibrated daily with an
accurate D.C. voltmeter. The detector electrode shall be in direct contact
with the surface of coating to be inspected.
5.2.2
The entire surface of the joint section shall be inspected by means of a full
circle Holiday Detector approved by OWNER set to DC Voltage of at least
25 kV for wraparound sleeves. Inspection of the heat shrink sleeve coating
shall be conducted only after the joint has cooled below + 50C.
Page 11 of 14
5.2.3
All the coated joints shall be subjected to Holiday Detection test.
5.2.4
An installed sleeve with more than two holiday shall be stripped and a new
one be installed.
6.0
TESTING
a)
OWNER reserves the right to test one out of every 30 joint coating
subject to a minimum of 2 joints. CONTRACTOR shall provide all
assistance in removing and testing of field joint coatings. From
each test sleeve, one or more strips of size 25 mm x 200 mm shall
be cut one perpendicular to the pipe axis and slowly peeled off.
This test shall be conducted between either sleeve and metal or
sleeve and mill coating as per direction of Owner/ Engineer-incharge.
b)
The required peel strength shall be 60 N/cm (min.) at 23C. The

system shall fail only in the adhesive layer. No failure either in
adhesion to steel or adhesion to backing shall be permitted. The
adhesive layer that remains on the pipe surface shall be free of
voids resulting from air or gas inclusion.
c)
If the sleeve taken away for test does not meet the requirement of
clause 6.0 (b), the adjacent two sleeves do not meet the
requirements of clause 6.0 (b) the field joint coating shall be
stopped until OWNER is satisfied with application methods.
d)
For the test tensile strength, two parallel incisions spaced 1 CM.
Apart are made right down to the surface of the steel. A further
incision shall then be at right angles to the first angles to the first
two incisions. With the aid of a 1 cm. Wide knife the coating is lifted
over a length of about 2 cm. And clamped into the tensile tester,
where upon a uniform pull is exerted at an angle of 90 degree. The
tensile strength shall be more than a 2500psi.
e)
Coating thickness shall be checked by non destructive method for

each field joint.
Page 12 of 14
7.0
REPAIR OF FIELD JOINT COATING
7.1
If a field joint is detected to be unacceptable after inspection and testing

as per clause no. 6.0 of this specification. The CONTRACTOR shall , at
his own cost :
-
determine the cause of the faulty results of the coatings.
mobilise the services of expert of manufactures, if required.
test to the complete satisfaction of the OWNER, already completed

field joint coatings.
stop joint coating until remedial measures are taken against the
causes of such failures, to the complete satisfaction of the
OWNER.
7.2
CONTRACTOR shall replace all the joints coating found or expected to be

unacceptable as per clause no. 6.0 of this specification.
7.3
CONTRACTOR shall, at his own cost repair all areas where the coating
has been removed for testing by the OWNER or by the CONTRACTOR
to the complete satisfaction of the OWNER.
7.4
The upright edges of the damaged areas shall be chamfered, in addition

to the steel shall be free from rust, dirt, oil and grease. The coating around
the damaged area shall be roughened. After thorough mixing (in
accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer) the filler shall
be applied, to sufficient Thickness with the aid of stooping knife, whilst
observing ample overlap hardening. The material will require the approval
of OWNER.
7.5
After the coating work on welded joints and repairs to the coating have
been completed, The coating area as a whole shall be tested with sparktester before pull back/ lowering/jacking the pipeline.
7.6
Company shall be entitled to check the coating on buried pipelines or

parts of pipelines with equipment such as the Pearson meter and the
resistance meter. If the coating defects are established, the Contractor
shall be responsible for excavation at such points, repairing the coating,
spark testing and backfilling the excavations without extra charge.
Page 13 of 14
8.0
REPAIR OF PIPE COATING DEFECTS
8.1
Any defect or damage in pipe coating observed till incorporation on

permanent works shall be rectified by the Contractor at his risk and cost.
However, for repair of damaged coating observed during taking over of
Owner supplied pipe, if any, shall be paid extra in accordance with the
relevant items of Schedule of Rates.
8.2
Field repair of coated pipes shall be carried out by using same type of
wraparound sleeves used for joint coating.
8.3
The repair procedure shall be same as specified herein above for

application of anti-corrosion field joint coating on welded pipe.
9.0
DOCUMENTATION
9.1
Prior to start the coating works at site Contractor shall furnish following
Owner/ Consultants approved documents in addition to that mentioned in
clause no. 3.4 of this specification.
-
9.2
Procedure for field joint coating & their repair

Procedure for repair of pipe line coating defects
Procedure qualification record
Inspection test plan
Inspection format
Final submission of all documents after finish the work shall be as per
relevant specification & SCC enclosed with the tender or as per direction
of Engineer-in-charge.
Page 14 of 14
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PIPELINE CROSSINGS
USING HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL
DRILLING METHOD
SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/S/05/62/75
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
\\Akjha\work contrac\standard TS for Pipe Line WC (Vol-II) MASTER FOLDER\75 pipe line crossing using HDD method\Specification for PL CUHDDM 75.doc
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
PIPELINE CROSSINGS USING
HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL
DRILLING METHOD
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/S/05/62/75
REV-0
Page 1 of 11
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
DESIGN AND ENGINEERING
36
3.0
CONSTRUCTION
6 10
4.0
DOCUMENTATION
10 11
PREPARED BY :
Page No.
CHECKED BY :
APPROVED BY :
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
DRILLING METHOD
REV-0
Page 2 of 11
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This specification covers the minimum requirements for various activities to be

carried out by the Contractor for the engineering and construction of pipeline
crossing using directional drilling method.
1.2
This specification shall be read in conjunction with the requirements of

specification and other documents included in the CONTRACT between owner
and Contractor.
1.3
Contractor shall, execute the work in compliance with laws, by laws, ordinance
and regulations. Contractor shall provide all services, labour, inclusive of
supervision thereof, supply of all materials (excluding Owner supplied
Material), equipment , appliances etc..
1.4
Contractor shall take full responsibility for the stability and safety of all
operation and methods involved in the work.
1.5
Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected and examined the work area
and its surroundings and to have satisfied himself as far as practicable with the
surface conditions, hydrological and climatic conditions, the extent and nature
of the work and materials necessary for the completion of the work, and the
means of access to the work area.
1.6
Contractor shall be deemed to have obtained all necessary information with

regard to risks, contingencies and all other circumstances, which may influence
the work.
1.7
Contractor shall, in connection with the work, provide and maintain at his own
costs all lights, guards, fencing, as necessary or directed by Owner or their
representative.
1.8
For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions shall hold.
1.9
The words `Shall and `Must are mandatory.
The words `Should, May and Will are non mandatory, advisory, or
recommendatory.
Contractor shall provide free of charge reasonable facilities to Owners

personnel to witness all stages of construction.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
DRILLING METHOD
REV-0
Page 3 of 11
2.0
DESIGN AND ENGINEERING
2.1
The limits of each crossing shall be determined by the Contractor on the basis
of crossing profile based on survey drawings, design, equipment, installation
technique and site condition. Contractor shall furnish all engineering design
calculation and crossing drawings etc. to owner for their approval prior to
execution of the work.
2.2
Within the entire limits of crossing, the minimum cover to top of coated pipe
shall be as specified in the Special Conditions of Contract (SCC).
However, wherever the drilled length for a crossing includes the crossings of
obstacles such as roads, railroads, cannals, streams, etc. The following
minimum requirements of cover to the pipe shall be satisfied unless specified
otherwise in the scope of work in SCC.
For Road Crossing
1.4 m from top of road to top of pipe.
For railroad crossing
1.7 m from base of Rail to top of pipe.
For canal crossing
1.5 m from lowest bed level to top of pipe.
In case the pipeline crosses other utilities, viz., other pipelines, sewers, drain
pipes, water mains, telephone conduits and other underground structures, the
pipeline shall be installed with at least 500 mm free clearance from the
obstacle or as specified in the drawing or such greater minimum distance as
may be required by authorities having jurisdiction. Also in all cases, the
minimum covers specified above shall be maintained within the entire limits of
crossing.
2.3
The entry and exit points of the pipeline at ground level shall not come within
the limits of crossing as defined in the crossing drawings.
2.4
Contractor shall carry out calculations for determining the maximum

permissible overburden on pipe, to check that the empty pipeline is safe from
collapse at any point along the drilled crossing section. Contractor shall submit
these calculations to Owner for approval.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
DRILLING METHOD
2.5
REV-0
Page 4 of 11
Pipeline Axis
The plane containing the pipeline route axis shall be perpendicular to the
horizontal plane. There shall be no bending of the pipeline route axis at
depths shall lower than 2 meters below ground level.
2.6
Back-reamed hole and Pipeline Interface
2.6.1
Contractor shall derive combination of:

-
Back-reamed hole diameter

Bentonite density
Pipeline submerged weight in bentonite (and means to achieve that
weight)
to optimise the crossing design in terms of pipeline stresses and power

requirement
2.6.2
Contractor shall indicated what maximum shear stress in the pipeline coating
will result from his choice of above parameters and other characteristics
described in this section.
2.6.3
Contractor shall furnish all calculations for Onners approval. If shear stress in
pipe coating is, in the opinion of Owner, beyond the permissible limits,
Contractor shall revise his choice of parameters to reduce shear stress on pipe
coating to permissible value.
2.7
Contractor shall determine in the minimum allowable elastic bend radius for
pipe from the following consideration:
2.7.1
Maximum Longitudinal Stress During Installation

Total maximum longitudinal stress in the pipeline due to tension and bending
at any location shall not exceed 90% of the SMYS of the pipe material.
Contractor shall, in order to check this requirement, evaluate the maximum
tensile forces to which the pipeline is subjected to at any phase of its
installation during the pulling operation.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
DRILLING METHOD
2.7.2.
REV-0
Page 5 of 11
Maximum Equivalent Stress During Final Hydrostatic Test

After installation, the pipeline shall be hydrostatically tested to a minimum test
pressure equal to 1.4 times the design pressure or at a pressure stipulated in
the Special Conditions of Contract whichever is higher. However, during
hydrostatic testing, the combined equivalent stress in the pipeline due to
bending and test pressure shall not exceed 90% of the SMYS of pipe material.
2.7.3
Maximum Equivalent Stress During Service

Permissible values of maximum equivalent stress during services shall be
governed by the requirements of ANSI B 31.8/B 31.4 as applicable. The details
of pipeline operating parameters are provided in the Special Conditions of
Contract.
2.7.4
The minimum allowable radius of curvature for the pipeline shall be the
highest value of the minimum pipeline elastic radius as computed from the
considerations outlined in clause 2.7.1 to 2.7.3 above after correction for
drilling inaccuracies or multiplication by the factor 1.85. whichever results in
the highest permissible value of minimum elastic bend radius.
2.7.5
Contractor shall submit all calculations for Companys approval alongwith

procedure.
2.8
Pipeline Configuration along the Support String Before Entry Point
2.8.3
Contractor shall determine the required pipeline configuration in order to allow

smooth pull in the crossing entry point and admissible stress in the supported
pipeline string. Pipeline combined stress shall not exceed 95% of the specified
minimum yield strength for line pipe material.
2.8.4
Contractor shall furnish all calculation and specify the number of required
supports, description of the supports, their co-ordinates and capacity in metric
tons.
2.8.5
Contractor shall also furnish a drawing of the launching ramp indicating the
pipeline configuration.
2.8.6
The distance between each roller shall also be specified and justified.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
DRILLING METHOD
REV-0
Page 6 of 11
2.9
Contractor shall, based on result of design and engineering carried out by him,
prepare construction drawings for the crossing and shall submit the same for
Owners approval. Construction drawings shall indicate the pipeline profile with
levels furnished at sufficient intervals for proper control during construction.
Other relevant details viz., entry and exit angles, radius of bends, etc. shall
also be indicated. Contractor shall also calculated the total length of pipeline
required as well as the maximum tension required on the pull head of the rig.
2.10
All construction works shall be carried out in accordance with the construction
drawings approved by Owner.
2.11
Before commencement of any field work, Contractor shall furnish for Owners
approval all design calculations and construction drawings as stipulated in the
above clauses.
3.0
CONSTRUCTION
Contractor shall comply with all the conditions and requirements issued by
Authorities having jurisdiction in the area where the work is to be performed.
If no public road exists, Contractor shall arrange on his own for access to his
work area at no extra cost to owner.
3.1.0
Installation Procedure
3.1.1
Contractor shall, before commencing any work at site, submit for Owners
approval a detailed installation procedure.
3.1.2
The installation procedure as a minimum shall include the following:

a)
Project Organisation Chart:

This shall indicate Contractors organisational set-up at site and
manpower deployment.
b)
Details of fabrication yard and launching areas.
c)
Details of Equipment :
Contractor shall furnish the complete list of all equipment to be
deployed for preparation of pipe string and installation of crossing.
Technical characteristics and capacity of each equipment including
instrumentation, monitoring and control equipment shall be furnished in
details.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
DRILLING METHOD
REV-0
Page 7 of 11
d)
Pipeline string preparation details (hauling, stringing, welding etc.)
e)
Hydrostatic test procedure (pre and post installation)
f)
Disposal methodology of bentonite slurry.
g)
Method of installation covering all steps of construction, viz. Rig up,

Pilot hole, Back-Reaming, Pulling Down, Backfilling etc.
h)
Calculation for maximum pulling force on the rig and recommended

maximum pulling velocity.
i)
Time schedule for construction.
3.1.3
The time schedule shall be in accordance with overall time schedule for the
project.
3.1.4
Approval by Owner of the methods used by Contractor shall in no way relieve

Contractor from the sole responsibility for safe and satisfactory installation,
working and operational use of the pipeline crossing.
3.2
Pipe String Preparation

Complete pipe string shall be prepared as a single string for pulling. Welding,
radiographic inspection of joints and joint coating of the string shall be
performed in accordance with the respective applicable specifications included
in the Contract document.
3.3
Pre-testing
3.3.1
Contractor shall hydrostatically pre-test the complete pipe string of each

crossing before installation as per approved procedure for a minimum period of
24 hours.
3.3.2
After pre-testing, joint coating of the welds shall be done as per specification
for specific field joint coating of pipeline for HDD crossing included in the
contract document
3.3.3
The section of the pipeline corresponding to the crossing shall, before

installation, be subjected to hydrostatic test pressure as stipulated in the
Special Conditions of Contract. During the test, Contractor shall check all welds
for leakage. Failure, if any, during the test shall be rectified by the Contractor.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
DRILLING METHOD
REV-0
Page 8 of 11
3.4
Gauging
3.4.1
Before pre and post installation hydrostatic testing, Contractor shall prove the
diameter of the pipeline by passing a gauging pig through the pipeline. The
gauging pig shall have a diameter equal to 95% of the nominal internal
diameter of the pipe. Contractor shall supply and install all temporary scraper
launchers/ receivers and other equipment, piping and materials and
consumables required for the purpose.
3.5
Installation
3.5.1
Installation shall be done in accordance with approval installation procedure.
3.5.2
The lateral offset of the actual exit point of the pilot hole from the calculated
and theoretical exit point shall not exceed half per cent (0.5%) of the length of
the crossing.
3.5.3
The length tolerance shall not exceed one per cent of the crossing length,
subject to the condition that the actual exit point shall not be within the limits
of crossing as defined in the approved drawings.
3.5.4
Back reaming shall be done separately from the pipeline pulling operation. The
size of the back-reamed hole shall be adequate (approximately 1.5 times the
pipeline diameter) to allow enough clearance for a smooth pull-back of the
pipeline.
3.5.5
Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the drilled hole till such time
the pipeline is pulled in.
3.5.6
During pulling operation, the buoyancy of the pipeline shall be controlled by

suitable approved methods so as to maintain the buoyancy as close as possible
to zero during pull-back in order to reduce friction forces of the pipeline in the
hole.
3.5.7
Bentonite slurry of specified viscosity shall be pumped into the hole,

preventing the wall from collapsing and protecting the pipeline coating.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
DRILLING METHOD
REV-0
Page 9 of 11
3.6
Contractor shall be responsible for the integrity of the corrosion

coating.
3.6.1
Before pull-back operation, megger test shall be done for the entire pipeline
(externally corrosion coated) string made for crossing by HDD method.
3.6.2
After pull-back operation to ensure the integrity of pipeline coating, again

megger test shall be done for the bored string before tied-in to the mainline
pipe. The megger value before & after pulling operation of the pipeline string
shall be nearly same and acceptable to Owner.
3.6.3
However, if, in Owners opinion, the integrity of external corrosion coating of

bored pipeline string is not established by above (Clause No. 3.6.1 & 3.6.2),
then further in order to ensure the integrity of coating of the bored pipeline
string, megger test of the coating shall be carried out in accordance with the
following steps:
a)
The test must be carried out before the bored pipe is tied-in to the
mainline pipe
b)
Measure the natural potential of the bored pipe at both ends.
c)
Set up the temporary impressed current system with a digital

multimeter connected to measure the output current. Position the test
electrode anode as far from the bored pipe as interconnecting cable will
allow and no closer than 10 meters.
d)
Place the reference electrode at the remote end (opposite to impressed

current system) to monitor the bored pipe potential
e)
Impress a current into the bored pipe start at Zero amp. and increase
slowly until the bored pipe potential is depressed to 1.5 V with respect
to the reference electrode.
f)
Note the current from the digital multimeter and calculate the current
density.
g)
The desirable value of calculated current density should be less than 70

micro ampere per square meter of drilled pipe surface in contact with
the soil.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
DRILLING METHOD
REV-0
Page 10 of 11
3.6.4
If Contractor again fails to establish the integrity of coating of the bored

pipeline string and the same is not acceptable to Owner, the above works shall
not be continued further until the cause analysed and rectified by the
Contractor to the entire satisfaction of Owner.
3.7
Final Hydrostatic Test
3.5.1
The complete crossing section shall be tested after installation. The test
pressure shall be as stipulated in the Special Conditions of Contract. After
temperature stabilisation, pressure shall be retained in the pipeline for a
period of 6 hours and recorded by manothermograph. The hydrostatic testing
shall be carried out in accordance with approved procedures and specification
detailed elsewhere in the document.
3.8
Final Clean up
3.8.1
After completion of construction, Contractor shall clear the site of all balance
material and debris and bentonite slurry. All balance pipe lengths shall be
returned to Owners designated stock yard(s). Site/ ROW shall be cleared to
the complete satisfaction of the land owners and authorities having
jurisdiction. All such works shall be done at no extra cost to Owner. The Owner
shall be indemnified against any/ all claims arising as a result thereof.
4.0
DOCUMENTATION
4.1
In additional to the documents specified elsewhere in this specification.

Contractor shall submit to the Owner the following documents/ records.
4.2
Copies of the permits obtained from authorities having jurisdiction.

Records of pre and post installation hydrostatic testing.
Record of non-destructive testing of welds.
Clearance certificate from the land owners and authorities having
jurisdiction regarding satisfactory clean-up and restoration of the pipeline
ROW and work sites.
After completion of construction, Contractor shall prepare and furnish six sets
of copies and two sets of reproducible of Às-built for the crossings. As built
drawings shall , as a minimum include the following information
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
DRILLING METHOD
4.3
REV-0
Page 11 of 11
True profile of the crossing along the pipeline.

True profile of the pipeline as installed and the depth of cover to top of
pipe at regular intervals.
Location of entry and exit point and angles of entry and exit alongwith
lateral offset of exit point from the original pipeline alignment.
Location and angle of field bends
Location of pipeline markers.

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
FOR
FLOW TEES
D:\TS\Flow Tees - 011 - TS.doc
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
FLOW TEES
REV-0
Page 1 of 8
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3.0
MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATION
4.0
MATERIALS
5.0
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
6.0
7.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
8.0
9.0
WARRANTY
10.0
DOCUMENTATION
Revision No.
PREPARED BY :
Date
Revised by
CHECKED BY :
Checked by
Approved by
APPROVED BY :
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
1.0
FLOW TEES
REV-0
Page 2 of 8
SCOPE
This specification covers the basic requirements for the design, manufacture and
supply of carbon steel flow tees to be installed in pipeline system for handling
hydrocarbons in liquid or gaseous phase.
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
Reference has also been made in this specification to the latest edition of the
a)
ASME B 31.4
Liquid
Transportation
Systems
Hydrocarbons,
Liquid
Petroleum
Anhydrous Ammonia and Alcohols.
for
Gas,
b)
ASME B 31.8

System
c)
ASME B 16.9
Factory made wrought steel butt welding

fittings.
d)
ASME Sec. VIII
Boiler & Pressure Vessels Code-Rules for the

construction of pressure vessels.
e)
ASME Sec. IX
Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code-Welding &

Brazing Qualifications.
f)
ASTM A 370
g)
MSS-SP-53
Quality Standard for Steel Castings and

Forgings for Valves, Flanges and fittings and
other Piping components and - Magnetic
Particle Examination Method.
h)
MSS-SP-75
Specification for High Test Wrought Butt

Welding Fittings
i)
API 1104
Specification for Welding Pipeline and Related

Facilities
j)
SSPC-VIS-1
Steel Structures Painting Council
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
FLOW TEES
REV-0
Page 3 of 8
In case of conflict between the requirement of this specification and the codes,
standards and specifications referred above, the requirements of this
3.0
Manufacturer who intend bidding for flow tees must possess the records of a
successful proof test for tees used in the fabrication of flow tees, in accordance
with the provisions of ASME B16.9/ MSS-SP-75. These records shall be submitted
at the time of bidding.
4.0
MATERIALS
4.1
Material for the pressure containing parts of the flow tees shall be indicated in
the data sheet. Other parts shall be as per manufacturer's standard suitable for
the service conditions indicated in data sheet and shall be subjected to approval
by Purchaser.
4.2
Fully killed Carbon steel shall be used in the manufacture of flow tees.
4.3
Each heat of steel used for the manufacture of pressure containing parts of the
flow tees shall have carbon equivalent (CE) not greater than 0.45 calculated from
the check analysis in accordance with the following formula.
CE = C + Mn/6 + (Cr+Mo+V)/5 + (Ni +Cu)/15
4.4
When specified in Data sheet, Charpy V-notch test shall be conducted for each
heat of steel used in manufacture of pressure containing parts of flow tee. Test
shall conform to the provisions of ASTM A-370 and at a temperature of 0C for
pressure containing parts material. The Charpy impact test specimen shall be
taken in the direction of principal grain flow and notched perpendicular to the
original surface of the plate or forging. The average impact energy values of full
sized three specimens shall be as follows, unless indicated otherwise in the data
sheets :
Diameter
(inches)
Base Metal
(joules)
Weld Metal and HAZ

(joules)
For all sizes
27
27
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
FLOW TEES
REV-0
Page 4 of 8
Minimum impact energy value of any one specimen shall not be less than 80%
of the above average values.
4.5
When specified in the data sheet, hardness test shall be carried out as per ASTM
A 370 for each heat of steel used. The maximum hardness of base metal, weld
metal and HAZ of all pressure containing parts shall be 248 HV10, unless
otherwise specified.
5.0
5.1
Flow tees shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with the provisions
of codes and standards referred in Section 2.0 of this specification. Design factor
and corrosion allowance indicated in data sheet shall be taken into account for
design of flow-tees.
5.2
Flow tees shall generally conform to the figure shown in the data sheet and shall
meet following requirements as minimum :
a)
An internal pipe having the same diameter as the connecting pipeline

allowing the passage of scraper/ instrumented pigs, provided with
holes/slots located in the centre line of the branch. The holes shall be
designed to prevent the pig getting stuck or damaged without affecting
the flow through the branch line. The area of the holes/slots shall be
atleast equal to the internal area of branch size.
b)
A forged/ submerged arc welded `tee' as per ASME B 16.9/ MSS-SP-75

enclosing the internal pipe fixed to it by suitably shaped forged steel rings.
Machined steel rings shall not be used. Circumferential welding on the
branch outlet is not acceptable. Pup shall not be provided either at the
run or at the branch.
5.3
Butt weld ends shall be beveled as per MSS-SP-75.
5.4
All flow tees shall be completely stress relieved as per MSS-SP-75.
5.5
Stub-in or pipe to pipe connection shall not be used in the manufacture of flow
tees. Flow tees shall be manufactured by forging or extrusion methods. In case
flow tees are manufactured using welded tees, the longitudinal weld seam shall
be at least 90 to the branch connection.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
FLOW TEES
REV-0
Page 5 of 8
5.6

accordance with ASME Section-IX. The welding procedure qualification test shall
be include charpy impact test and hardness test and shall meet the requirements
of cllause 4.3 and 4.5 of this specification respectively.
5.7
Repair by welding on parent metal is not allowed. Repair of welds shall be

carried out only after specific approval by Purchaser's Representative for each
repair. The repair welding shall be carried out by the welders and welding
procedures duly qualified as per ASME Section-IX and records for each repair
shall be maintained.
6.0
6.1
The manufacturer shall perform all inspections and tests as per the requirements
of this specification and the relevant codes, prior to shipment, at his works. Such
inspection and tests shall be, but not limited to the following :
6.1.1
All flow tees shall be visually inspected.
6.1.2
Dimensional checks shall be carried out as per the approved drawing.
6.1.3
Chemical composition and Mechanical properties shall be checked as per MSSSP-75 and this specification for each heat of steel used.
6.1.4
Non destructive examination of individual flow tees shall be performed as given

below:
a)
100% inspection by radiography shall be carried out on all butt welds of

pressure containing parts. Acceptance limits shall be as per API 1104.
b)
Welds which in Purchaser's Representative's opinion cannot be inspected

by radiographic methods shall be checked by ultrasonic or magnetic
particle methods. Acceptance criteria shall be as per ASME Section VIII
Appendix-12 and Appendix-6 respectively.
c)
lamination type defects for a distance of 25mm from the end. Any
lamination larger than 6.35mm shall not be acceptance.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
FLOW TEES
d)
6.2
REV-0
Page 6 of 8
All forgings shall be wet magnetic particle examined on 100% of the

forged surfaces. Method and acceptance shall comply with MSS-SP-53.
Purchaser's Representative shall also perform stagewise inspection and witness

tests as indicated in clause 6.1 at manufacturer's works prior to shipment.
Manufacturer shall give reasonable notice of time and shall provide without
charge reasonable access and facilities required for inspection, to the Purchaser's
Representative.
Inspection and tests performed/ witnessed by Purchaser's Representative shall in
no way relieve the Manufacturer's obligation to perform the required inspection
and tests.
7.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
7.1
Manufacturer shall submit following certificates to Purchaser's Representative :

a)

b)
Test reports on radiographic and ultrasonic inspection and wet magnetic

c)
Certificates for each flow tee stating that it is capable of withstanding

without leakage for a test duration of 15 minutes and test pressure which
results in a hoop stress equivalent to 90% of the specified minimum yield
strength and for the pipe with which the flow tee is to be attached
without impairing its serviceability.
d)
Test reports on heat treatment carried out.
8.0
8.1
Flow tees entire surface shall be thoroughly cleaned, freed from rust and grease
and applied with sufficient coats of corrosion resistant paint, after all the required
tests have been performed and accepted by Purchaser's Representative. The
surface preparation shall be carried out by shot blasting to SP 6 in accordance
with "Steel Structures Painting Council - Visual Standard - SSPC-VIS-1".
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
FLOW TEES
REV-0
Page 7 of 8
8.2
Manufacturer shall indicate the type & recommended coats of corrosion resistant
paint used, in the drawing submitted for approval.
8.3
Flow tees shall be marked with indelible paint with the following data :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Manufacturer's Name
Nominal diameter in inches D1 x D2
End thickness in mm T1 x T2
Material
Tag numbers
8.4
Flow tees shall be suitably protected to avoid any damage during transit. Metallic
or high impact plastic bevel protectors shall be provided for weld ends.
9.0
WARRANTY
Purchaser will be reimbursed by Manufacturer for any flow tee furnished to this
specification which fails under field hydrostatic testing or does not perform
satisfactory during the pigging operation and if such failure or non-performance
is caused by a defect in the flow tees which is outside the acceptance limits of
this specification. The reimbursement cost shall include cost of flow tee, labour
and equipment rental for finding, excavating, cutting, and installation of replaced
flow tee in position.
10.0
DOCUMENTATION
10.1
At the time of bidding, bidder shall submit the following documents :a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
General arrangement drawing of flow tees with overall dimensions and

details of internal sleeve and cross sectional drawings.
Reference list of previous supplies of flow tees of similar specification with
relevant details viz Project, Year of supply, Client, size, Rating and service
for the last five years.
Clausewise list of deviation from this specification, if any.
Records of successful proof test for tees used for fabrication of flow tees,
qualifying the range of sizes quoted.
Brief description of the manufacturing, heat treatment and quality control
facilities of the manufacturers work.
stamped and accepted..
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
FLOW TEES
10.2
REV-0
Page 8 of 8
Within two weeks of placement of order, the manufacturer shall submit four
copies, of but not limited to, the following drawings, documents and
specifications for approval.
a)
Fabrication drawings and relevant calculations for pressure

parts.
containing
b)
Calculation for the holes/slots sizes/ flow area.
c)
Method of manufacture, welding procedure and heat treatment details.
d)
Quality control Manual.
Once the approval has been given by Purchaser, any change in design, material
method of manufacture shall be notified to Purchaser whose approval in writing
of all changes shall be obtained before the flow tees are manufactured.
10.3
Within four weeks from the approval date Manufacturer shall submit one
reproducible and six copies of the approved drawings, documents and
specification as stated in clause 10.3 of this specification.
10.4
Prior to shipment, Manufacturer shall submit one reproducible and six copies of
test certificates as listed in clause 7.0 of this specification.
10.5
All documents shall be in English Language.

MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
FOR
LONG RADIUS BENDS
D:\TS\Lond Redius Bends - 015-R1.doc
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
LONG RADIUS BENDS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 1 OF 8
MEC/TS/05/62/015
REVISION 1
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3.0
MATERIAL
4.0
MANUFACTURE
5.0
6.0
MARKING, PACKING AND SHIPMENT
7.0
WARRANTY
8.0
DOCUMENTATION
Revision No.
PREPARED BY :
Date
Revised by
CHECKED BY :
Checked by
Approved by
APPROVED BY :
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
1.0
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
LONG RADIUS BENDS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 2 OF 8
MEC/TS/05/62/015
REVISION 1
SCOPE
This specification covers long radius steel pipe bends to be manufactured in
accordance with the requirements of MSS-SP (Manufacturers Standardisation
Society Standard Practice) 75, latest edition, to be used in pipeline system
handling Natural Gas. The selection of options permitted by MSS-SP-75 shall be
as described below. All applicable requirements contained in the MSS-SP-75
shall be fully valid unless cancelled, replaced or amended by more
requirements as stated in this specification. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this specification and MSS-SP-75, the requirements of this
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
following codes, standards and specifications.
a)
ANSI B31.8

System.
b)
ASME Sec. VIII

Div. 1
c)
ASME Sec IX
Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code

Welding and Brazing Qualifications
d)
API Spec. 5L
Line Pipe
e)
ASTM Part-I
Steel Piping, Tubing, Fittings
In case of conflict between the above reference documents and this

specification, the requirements of the specification shall prevail.
3.0
MATERIALS
3.1
Bends shall be fabricated from bare steel line pipe (to be issued as free issue
item by Purchaser). The details of free issue line pipe material is given
separately in LR Bend Data Sheet & Purchase Requisition.
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
LONG RADIUS BENDS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 3 OF 8
MEC/TS/05/62/015
REVISION 1
3.2
All mechanical properties of the bends after finishing shall be same as pipe
specification as referred in section 3.1. The following tests shall be conducted
on finished bends and test procedures shall be as per pipe specification as
referred in para 3.1.
3.2.1
One transverse tensile test will be conducted to establish the yield strength,
ultimate tensile strength and elongation of :
a)
b)
Base material at inside radius of the bend.

Base material at outside radius of the bend.
3.2.2
One all weld tensile test will be conducted (wherever applicable) to establish
yield strength, ultimate tensile strength and elongation of weld material on
bend.
3.2.3
Three transverse Charpy-V-notch impact tests shall be conducted on full sized

specimen of the same heat in accordance with ASTM A370 at 0C for each of
the following :
a)
b)
3.2.4
Base material at outside radius of the bend.

Weld material of bend
Guided Bend Tests

One face and one root guided bend weld test shall be performed on samples
cut from one bend per heat of steel. The dimensions À in guided bend test
shall not exceed 4.0 times the nominal wall thickness and dimension `B shall
be equal to A + 2t + 3.2mm.
4.0
MANUFACTURE
4.1
Bends shall be manufactured by hot bending of pipe applying induction heating

only.
The adopted procedure shall be completed by suitable heat treatment to
achieve the required mechanical and chemical properties of the finished bends
and is accepted only after written approval of the Purchaser. The procedure
shall ensure uniform bending without any defects other than those allowed in
this specification and pipe specification as referred in para 3.1.
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
TITLE
4.2
LONG RADIUS BENDS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 4 OF 8
MEC/TS/05/62/015
REVISION 1
When bending, the weld wherever applicable shall be located at approx. 10 from
the neutral zone, measured at outside of the bend as indicated in figure below.
10
W E LD H ER E
OR
HERE
B E N D IN G P L A N E
BEND
10
4.3
Bevels at the ends shall be as specified in MSS-SP-75 unless otherwise specified

differently in the material/ purchase requisition.
4.4
Bends shall not have any circumferential joint.
4.5
No repair by welding is allowed on any part of the bends.
4.6
The cooling of the bend immediately after bending shall be an interval cooling,
alternatively with water and air at a minimum pressure of 2 atmospheres.
4.7
The procedure shall be such which shall not require any additional heat
treatment after bending. If such a heat treatment is required, it is permitted only
after the written approval of purchaser and shall be carried out at Manufacturers
expense.
4.8
Bulges, dents and flat areas shall not appear within 100mm from end of the bend.
For the remaining part of the bend these deviations from the original contour of
the pipe are permitted but the same shall be repaired, provided these deviations
shall not exceed 6.5% of nominal wall thickness in height/ depth and the same
shall not extend (in any direction) over a distance of more than 25% of nominal
diameter.
4.9
The excess weld material wherever applicable at the inside of the bend shall be
removed over a distance of 100mm at both ends.
4.10
Tolerances
The dimensions of bends shall be controlled to make sure that they are
manufactured according to the tolerances indicated below over and above the
requirements of MSS-SP-75
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
TITLE
4.10.1
4.10.2
4.10.3
LONG RADIUS BENDS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 5 OF 8
MEC/TS/05/62/015
REVISION 1
Minimum Inside Diameter
-2.5% of inside nominal

diameter except 200mm from ends
Bend Angle
Bend Radius
1% of bending nominal
Diameter
The manufacturer shall check the wall thickness of the pipe before and after
bending along the outside radius either at distances approximately equal to
pipe diameter or 300mm whichever is less. The measured wall thickness shall
be atleast equal to :
tmin
0.95 (tnom. -
t)
tnom
nominal wall thickness as specified in the

material/ purchase requisition.
0.35mm for a wall thickness smaller than

10mm.
0.50mm for a wall thickness 10mm or more.
Ovality may be defined as :

OD max. OD min
OD nom.
The above value shall be < 1% within 100mm from each end and < 6% for
remaining part of the bend. The measurement shall be made over the
circumference of the bend either at distance approximately equal to pipe
diameter or 300mm whichever is less.
4.10.4
Wrinkles
Measurements of the outside diameter shall be taken in the plane of the bend
at locations where wrinkles are present (OD max.) and at locations where
wrinkles are not present (OD min,). The acceptance limit shall be as defined
below.
OD max. OD min
------------------------- < 1%
OD nom.
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
LONG RADIUS BENDS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 6 OF 8
MEC/TS/05/62/015
REVISION 1
5.0
5.1
The manufacturer shall perform all inspection and tests as per the
requirements of this specification and MSS-SP-75 prior to shipment at his
works. Such inspection and tests shall be, but not limited to, the following :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Verify that the unfinished product arriving at manufacturers shop is in

full compliance with the pipe specification as referred in para 3.1.
Visual Inspection.
Dimensional and tolerances check as per MSS-SP-75 and requirements
of section 4.0 of this specification.
Check heat treatment, if carried out, as required and maintain its
records.
Temperature against time recorder charts for each induction heating.
Material properties shall be checked to meet the requirements of section
3.0 of this specification.
The non-destructive inspection on the finished bend shall be carried out
as given below :
5.2
All longitudinal seam welds shall be fully radiographed and

acceptance limits shall be as per pipe specification as referred in
para 3.1.
The full circumference of both ends of each bend after bevelling
shall be ultrasonically tested for laminations over a length of 25mm
and acceptance limits shall be as per pipe specification as referred in
para 3.1.
Purchasers Representative reserves the right to perform stagewise inspection

and witness tests on all bends as indicated in para 5.1 at Manufacturers
works, prior to shipment.
charge reasonable access and facilities required for inspection, to the
Purchasers Representative. Inspection and test performed or witnessed by
Purchasers Representative shall in no way relieve the Manufacturers
obligation to perform the required inspection and tests. Under no
circumstances any action of the Purchasers Representative shall relieve the
Manufacturer of his responsibility for the material, design, quality and
operation of the equipment.
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
5.3
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
LONG RADIUS BENDS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 7 OF 8
MEC/TS/05/62/015
REVISION 1
Test Certificates
The Manufacturer shall produce the Certificates (in original) for all, but not
limited to, the following :
a)
Certificates of chemical analysis and mechanical tests carried out on

pipe and bends separately.
b)
Certificates of required non-destructive test inspection.
c)
Certificates of heat treatments, if any.
d)
Certificates of all other tests as required in this specification.
In case any of the above said certificates are not available during the final
inspection, the supply shall be considered incomplete.
6.0
MARKING, PACKING AND SHIPMENT
6.1
All bends shall be marked as per MSS-SP-75.
6.2
All loose and foreign material i.e. rust, grease, etc. shall be removed from
inside and outside of the bends.
6.3
All bends except bevelled ends shall be coated internally and externally with a
thin film of zinc chromate red oxide paint for protection against corrosion
during transit and storage. The coating shall be easily removable in the field.
Manufacturer shall furnish the details for the same.
6.4
Both ends of all bends shall be suitably protected to avoid any damage during
transit by means of metallic bevel protectors.
6.5
Package shall be marked legibly with suitable marking to indicate the

following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Order Number
Package Number
Manufacturers Name
Size (Inches) and wall thickness (mm)
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
7.0
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
LONG RADIUS BENDS
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 8 OF 8
MEC/TS/05/62/015
REVISION 1
WARRANTY
Purchaser will be reimbursed by Manufacturer for any bend furnished on this
order that fails under field hydrostatic test if such failure is caused by a defect
in the bend which is outside the acceptance limits of this specification. The
reimbursement cost shall include bend cost, labour cost and equipment rental
for searching, excavation, cutting out and installation of replaced bend in
position. The field hydrostatic test pressure will not exceed that value which
will cause a calculated hoop stress equivalent to 100% of specified minimum
yield strength of the attached pipe.
8.0
DOCUMENTATION
8.1
8.2
At the time of bidding, bidder shall submit the following documents :
8.3
a)
Reference list of previous supplies of bends of similar specifications.
b)
Clause-wise list of deviation from this specification, if any.
c)
Brief description of manufacturing and quality control facilities of the

Manufacturers works.
Within one week of placement of order the Manufacturer shall submit four
copies, of the manufacturing process and quality assurance plan for pipe and
bends.
Once the approval has been given by Purchaser any change in material and
method of manufacture and quality control shall be notified to Purchaser
whose approval in writing of all such changes shall be obtained before the
bends are manufactured.
8.4
reproducible and six copies of the documents as stated in para 8.3 of this
specification.
8.5
Prior to shipment, the Manufacturer shall submit one reproducible and six
copies of test certificates as listed in para 5.3 of this specification.
SPECIFICATION
FOR
INSULATING JOINTS
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
D:\TS\Insulating Joints - 09 - TS.doc
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
INSULATING JOINTS
REV-0
Page 1 of 10
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3.0
MATERIALS
4.0
DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
5.0
6.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
7.0
8.0
GUARANTEE
9.0
DOCUMENTATION
PREPARED BY
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
1.0
INSULATING JOINTS
REV-0
Page 2 of 10
SCOPE
This specification cover the basic requirements for design manufacture, testing
and supply of carbon steel insulating joints to be installed in onshore pipeline
systems handling hydrocarbons in liquid or gaseous phase including Liquified
Petroleum Gas (LPG).
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
2.1
Reference has been made in this specification to the latest edition of, the
following Codes, Standards and Specifications.
a)
ASME B 31.8
Gas Transmission
System
b)
ASME B 31.4
Liquid
transportation
systems
for
hydrocarbons, LPG, Anhydrous Ammonia and
Alcohols
c)
ASTM A 370
Mechanical testing of Steel Product
d)
ANSI B 16.25
Butt Welding Ends
e)
ASME Section
Boiler & pressure Vessel Code viii & ix
f)
API 1104
Standard for welding pipelines and Related

facilities.
g)
SSPC-VIS-1
Steel Structures
Standard.
h)
MSS-SP-53
Quality standard for steel castings and

forgings for valves flanges and fittings and
other piping components - magnetic particle
examination method.
i)
MSS-SP-75
Specification for high test wrought welding

fittings.
&
Distribution
painting
Council
piping
Visual
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
INSULATING JOINTS
j)
NACE RP 0286
REV-0
The electrical isolation

protected pipelines.
Page 3 of 10
of
cathodically
2.2
In case of conflict between the requirements of this specification and any code,
Standard or Specification referred to in this Specification, the requirements of
this specification shall govern.
3.0
MATERIALS
3.1
Material for the pressure containing parts of the insulating joints shall be as
indicated in the data sheets. Material for pups shall be equivalent or superior to
the material of connecting pipeline which is indicated in the data sheets. Other
part shall be as per manufacturer's standard suitable for the service condition
indicated in Insulating Joint Data Sheets and shall be subject to approval by
purchaser.
3.2
Insulating joints which are subject to field welding by purchaser, shall have
carbon equivalent (CE) not exceeding 0.45 based on check analysis for each heat
of steel calculated according to the following formula :
CE = C + Mn/6 + (Cr+Mo+V)/5 + (Ni +Cu)/15
3.3
When specified in the IJ Data Sheet, charpy V-notch test shall be conducted on
each heat of base material, weld metal and heat affected zone of all pressure
containing parts such as body, welding ends in accordance with the impact test
provisions of ASTM A 370 at a temperature of 0 C. The charpy impact test
specimens shall be taken in the direction of principal grain flow and notched
perpendicular to the original surface of the plate of forging. Average impact
energy value of three full sized specimens shall be 27 joules. Minimum impact
energy value of any one specimen shall not be less than 80% of the average
impact energy specified. No specimen shall exhibit less than 80% shear area.
3.4
Carbon steel used for the manufacture shall be fully killed
3.5
When specified in data sheet, hardness test shall be carried out as per ASTM
A370 for each heat of steel used. The maximum hardness of base metal, weld
metal and heat affected zone of all pressure parts shall be 248 HV10, unless
specified otherwise.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
INSULATING JOINTS
REV-0
Page 4 of 10
3.6
Insulation material shall be minimum 20 mm thick and shall comply section 5,

NACE RP 0286.
4.0
DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
4.1
Mechanical
4.1.1
Insulating joints shall be of integral type fabricated by welding and with pups on
either side as shown in data sheet. A corrosion allowance as indicated in data
sheet shall be considered in design. Bolted and threaded joints are not
acceptable.
4.1.2
All materials used for the manufacture of the insulating joint shall be in
accordance with clause 3.0 of this Specification.
4.1.3
Insulating joints shall be designed using the design principles of ASME SectionVIII Div. 1. The design shall be checked for the following two cases :
Case-I :
Design Pressure (as per Data Sheet) + Axial Force (F)
The Axial force shall be calculated as under :

F = 0.1 x S x A
Where
S = SMYS of connected pipe (refer Data Sheet)
A = Metal cross-sectional area of connected pipe.
The allowable stress in this case shall be less than or equal to 0.5 x SMYS of
insulating joint material.
Case-II :
Hydrostatic Test Pressure
The allowable stress in this case shall be less than or equal to 90% of SMYS of
insulating joint material.
All design parameters shall be as per Insulating Joint Data Sheet. Detailed
calculations shall be submitted for Purchaser approval.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
INSULATING JOINTS
REV-0
Page 5 of 10
4.1.4
Insulating joint design and materials shall be capable of being vacuum tested to
1 millibar.
4.1.5
The joint between pipe pup pieces and main forging shall be full penetration butt
weld type. Weld design shall be such as resulting in a weld joint factor of 1.0.
4.1.6
Butt weld ends shall have ends as per ASME B16.25. However, end preparation
for butt welding ends having unequal thickness with respect to connecting pipe,
shall be as per ASME B31.4/ B31.8 as applicable.
4.1.7
The reinforcement of inside weld seam, in case pups fabricated from LSAW
pipes, shall be removed for a distance of at least 50mm from each end.
4.1.8
Insulating joints shall allow free passage of scraper/ instrumented pigs. The
internal bore shall be same as that of connecting pipe including its tolerances.
4.1.9
The insulating joint shall be formed by sandwiching and locking in positions the
insulating material in a bell and spigot type of joint. The joint shall be assembled
in such a way that its various components are firmly locked in position and the
completed joint is capable of withstanding stresses due to designed operating
conditions and field hydrostatic testing.
4.1.10
Insulating joints shall be suitable for aboveground or underground installations

as indicated in the data sheets.
4.1.11

accordance with the provisions ASME section IX. The procedure qualification
shall include impact test and hardness test and shall meet the requirements of
clause 3.3, 3.5 of this specification.
4.1.12
Repair welding on parent metal is not allowed. Repair of welds shall be carried
out only after specific approval by purchaser's representative for each repair.
The repair welding shall be carried out by welders and welding procedures duly
qualified as per ASME section IX and records for each repair shall be maintained.
4.1.13
Internal diameter at the welding end shall not vary more than + 1, -3 mm from
the nominal internal diameter.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
INSULATING JOINTS
REV-0
Page 6 of 10
4.1.14
Out of roundness measured at the root face of the welding ends shall not be
more than 0.5% of the specified inside diameter.
4.2
Electrical
4.2.1
The average dielectric strength of the insulating joint shall be minimum 15 kilo
Volts.
4.2.2
Two cleats as shown in data sheet shall be provided on the pups on either side
of the insulating joint for connecting 10 mm2 and 50 mm2 cables for
measurement/ shorting purposes. Cleats shall be attached to the insulating joint
by welding.
5.0
5.1
The manufacture, shall perform all inspection and tests as per the requirements
of this specification and the relevant codes, prior to shipment at his works. Such
inspection and tests shall be, but not limited to the following:
5.1.1
All insulating joints shall be visually inspected.
5.1.2
Dimensional checks shall be carried out as per the purchaser approved drawings.
5.1.3
Chemical composition and mechanical properties including hardness shall be

checked as per relevant material standards and this specification, for each heat
of steel used.
5.1.4
Non-destructive inspection of insulating joints shall be carried out as given

below:
a)
100% radiography shall be carried out on all butt & repair welds of
pressure containing parts. Acceptance limits shall be as per API 1104.
Welds which in purchaser's Representative opinion can not be inspected
by radiographic methods,shall be checked by ultrasonic or magnetic
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
INSULATING JOINTS
REV-0
Page 7 of 10
b)
All finished weld ends shall be 100% ultrasonically tested for lamination
type defects for a distance of 5Omm from the ends. Any lamination
larger than 6.35 mm shall not be acceptable.
c)
All forgings shall be wet magnetic particle inspected on 100% of forged

surfaces. Method and acceptance shall comply MSS-SP-53.
d)
All fillet weld of thickness < 6mm shall be examined 100% by magnetic
particle inspection and 6mm shall be examined 100% by UT.
Accetpance criteria for MPI & UT shall be as per ASME Sec.VIII Appendix6 & Appendix-12 respectively.
5.1.5
Insulating joint shall be hydrostatically tested to a pressure as indicated in data

sheet. The test duration shall be of 15 minutes.
5.1.6
After the hydrostatic test insulating joints shall be tested with air at 5 kg/cm2 for
10 minutes. The tightness shall be checked by immersion or with a frothing
agent. No leakage will be accepted.
5.1.7
Dielectric Test
5.2
a)
Insulation resistance of each insulating joint shall be atleast 25 megaohms when checked with 500-1000 V DC.
b)
Insulating joint before and after the hydrostatic test, shall be tested for
dielectric integrity for one minute at 5000 V A.C., 50 cycles and the
leakage current before and after hydrostatic test shall be equal. Testing
time voltage and leakage shall be recorded and certified. No repair shall
be permitted to the insulating joints failed in the above mentioned tests.
Purchaser reserves the right to perform stagewise inspection and witness test as
indicated in Para 5.1 at Manufacturer's works prior to shipment. Manufacturer
shall give reasonable notice of time and shall provide without charge reasonable
access and facilities required for inspection to the purchaser's Representative .
Inspection and tests performed/witnessed by the Purchaser's Representative
shall in no way relieve the Manufacturer's obligation to perform the required
inspection and test.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
INSULATING JOINTS
REV-0
Page 8 of 10
6.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
6.1
Manufacturer shall submit following certificates to Purchaser's Representative.

a)

properties including hardness of the materials used for construction of
insulating joint as per this specification and relevant standards.
b)
Test reports on non-destructive testing.
c)
Test certificates for hydrostatic and air tests.
d)
Test certificate for electrical test.
e)
Test report on vacuum test.
7.0
PAINTING, MARKING AND SHIPMENT.
7.1
Insulating joint surface shall be thoroughly cleaned, freed from rust and grease
and applied with sufficient coats of corrosion resistant paint. Surface preparation
shall be carried out by shot blasting to SP-6 in accordance with "steel structures
painting council - Visual standard SSPC-VIS-l.". External surfaces of burried
insulating joints shall be painted with three coats of suitable coal tar epoxy resin
with a minimum dry film thickness of 300 microns.
Manufacturer shall indicate the type of corrosion resistant paint used, in the
drawings submitted for approval.
7.2
Insulating joints shall be marked with indelible paint with the following data:a.
Manufacturer's name
b.
Suitable for inch nominal diameter pipeline
c.
End thickness in mm
d.
Material
e.
Design Pressure/ Hydrostatic Test Pressure
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
INSULATING JOINTS
f.
g.
h.
REV-0
Page 9 of 10
ANSI Class Rating

Tag No.
Year of Manufacture
7.3
Insulating joints shall be suitably protected to avoid any damage during transit.
Metallic bevel protectors shall be provided to weld ends.
7.4
Only those insulating joints which have been inspected and certified by
Purchaser shall be shipped.
8.0
GUARANTEE
8.1
The manufacturer shall guarantee that the materials used comply with the
requirements of this specification.
8.2
Manufacturer shall replace or repair insulating joints found defective due to

inadequate engineering or quality of material.
8.3
Manufacturer shall replace the insulating joint without delay if the defect or
malfunctioning can not be eliminated.
8.4
Any defects occurring within 12 months from the date of installation or within 30
months from the date of despatch, whichever is earlier, shall be repaired making
all necessary modifications and repair of defective parts free of charge to the
purchaser.
9.0
DOCUMENTATION
9.1
9.2
At the time of bidding, Bidder shall submit the following documents:a)
General arrangement drawing along with cross sectional view, overall

dimensions and details of insulating meterials recommended.
b)
Reference lists of previous supplies of insulating joint of similar

specification.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
c)
9.3
INSULATING JOINTS
REV-0
Page 10 of 10
Within three weeks of placement of order, the Manufacturer shall submit four
copies of but not limited to the following drawings, documents and specifications
for approval.
a)
Fabrication drawings and relevant calculations for pressure containing

parts.
b)
Welding procedure and method of manufacture for all phases of

manufacture.
c)
Quality Assurance Plan (QAP)
Once the approval has been given by purchaser any changes in design, material
and method of manufacture shall be notified to the Purchaser whose approval in
writing of all changes shall be obtained before the insulting joint are
manufactured.
9.4
specifications as listed in 9.3 of this specification.
9.5
Prior to shipment, the manufacturer shall submit one reproducible and six copies
of the test certificates as listed in Clause 6.0 of this specification.

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
FOR
SPLIT TEES
(HOT TAP MATERIAL)
SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/TS/05/62/011A, Rev-1
D:\TS\Specification for Split Tee (011A) - R1.doc
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SPLIT TEES (HOT TAPPING
MATERIAL)
REV-1
Page 1 of 8
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3.0
4.0
MATERIALS
5.0
6.0
7.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
8.0
9.0
WARRANTY
10.0
DOCUMENTATION
May,05
Jan,05
Rev
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
MATERIAL)
1.0
REV-1
Page 2 of 8
SCOPE
This specification covers the basic requirements for the design, manufacture and
supply of carbon steel split tees as hot tap material to be installed in pipeline system
for handling hydrocarbons in liquid or gaseous phase.
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
a)
ASME B 31.4
Liquid Transportation Systems for Hydrocarbons,

Liquid Petroleum Gas, Anhydrous Ammonia and
Alcohols.
b)
ASME B 31.8
Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping System
c)
ASME B 16.5
Steel Pipe Flanges & Flanged Fittings
d)
ASME B 16.9
Factory made wrought steel butt welding fittings.
e)
ASME B 16.25
But Welding Ends
f)
ASME Sec. VIII
Boiler & Pressure Vessels Code-Rules

construction of pressure vessels.
g)
ASME Sec. IX
Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code-Welding & Brazing

Qualifications.
h)
ASTM A 370
i)
MSS-SP-44
Steel Pipe Flanges
j)
MSS-SP-53
Quality Standard for Steel Castings and Forgings for

Valves, Flanges and fittings and other Piping
components and - Magnetic Particle Examination
Method.
k)
MSS-SP-75
Specification for High Test Wrought Butt Welding

Fittings
l)
API 1104
Specification
Facilities
for
Welding
Pipeline
and
for
the
Related
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
MATERIAL)
m)
SSPC-VIS-1
REV-1
Page 3 of 8
In case of conflict between the requirement of this specification and the codes,
standards and specifications referred above, the requirements of this
3.0
Manufacturer who intend bidding for fittings should possess the records of a
successful proof test for split tees qualifying the ranges of sizes quoted, in
accordance with the provisions of ASME B16.9/ MSS-SP-75. These records shall
be submitted on demand by Client/ Consultant before or after placement of
order.
4.0
MATERIALS
4.1
The basic materials required for manufacturing of split tees have been indicated
in the data sheet. Other additional materials required for manufacturing split
tees shall be as per manufacturer's standard suitable for the service conditions
indicated in data sheet and shall be subjected to approval by Purchaser.
4.2
Fully killed Carbon steel shall be used in the manufacture of split tees.
4.3
Each heat of steel used for the manufacture of pressure containing parts of the
flow tees shall have carbon equivalent (CE) not greater than 0.45 calculated from
the check analysis in accordance with the following formula.
CE = C + Mn/6 + (Cr+Mo+V)/5 + (Ni +Cu)/15
Carbon content on check analysis shall not exceed 0.22%.
4.4
When specified in Data sheet, Charpy V-notch test shall be conducted for each
heat of steel used in manufacture of split tee. Test shall conform to the
provisions of ASTM A-370 and at a temperature of -20C. The Charpy impact test
specimen shall be taken in the direction of principal grain flow and notched
perpendicular to the original surface of the plate or forging. The average impact
energy values of full sized three specimens shall be 27 Joules, unless indicated
otherwise in the data sheets :
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
MATERIAL)
REV-1
Page 4 of 8
Minimum impact energy value of any one specimen of the three specimens
analysed shall not be less than 80% of the above average values.
4.5
When specified in the data sheet, hardness test shall be carried out as per ASTM
A 370 for each heat of steel used. A full thickness cross section shall be taken
for this purpose and the maximum hardness of base metal, weld metal and HAZ
of all pressure containing parts shall not exceed 248 HV10, unless otherwise
specified.
5.0
5.1
Split tees shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with the provisions
of codes and standards referred in Section 2.0 of this specification. Flanges upto
size 16 shall conform to the requirements of ASME B16.5. Design factor and
corrosion allowance indicated in data sheet shall be taken into account for design
of split-tees.
5.2
Split tees shall generally conform to the figure shown in the data sheet and shall
meet following requirements as minimum :
a)
Sleeves shall be designed to meet pressure & reinforce requirements of

ASME Codes.
b)
Fittings shall be manufactured with controlled carbon equivalent for its

welding in harsh out side environments.
c)
Split tee shall be of full branch or reducing branch & meet the
requirement for fittings with hot tap machine.
5.3
Butt weld ends shall be beveled as per MSS-SP-75/ B16.25.
5.4
Split tees shall be manufactured by hot drawn, full branch/ reduced branch
opening, snug-fitting sleeve or fabricated full size nipple, branch outlet welded to
snug-fittings sleeve.
5.5

accordance with ASME Section-IX. The welding procedure qualification test shall
include charpy impact test and hardness test and shall meet the requirements of
clause 4.3 and 4.5 of this specification respectively.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
MATERIAL)
REV-1
Page 5 of 8
5.6
Repair by welding on parent metal is not allowed. Repair of welds shall be

carried out only after specific approval by Purchaser's Representative for each
repair. The repair welding shall be carried out by the welders and welding
procedures duly qualified as per ASME Section-IX and records for each repair
shall be maintained.
6.0
6.1
The manufacturer shall perform all inspections and tests as per the requirements
of this specification and the relevant codes, prior to shipment, at his works. Such
inspection and tests shall be, but not limited to the following :
6.1.1
All split tee shall be visually inspected.
6.1.2
Dimensional checks shall be carried out as per the approved drawing.
6.1.3
Chemical composition and Mechanical properties shall be checked as per MSSSP-75 and this specification for each heat of steel used.
6.1.4
Non destructive examination of individual split tees shall be performed as given

below:
a)
100% inspection by radiography shall be carried out on all pressure

containing welds on fittings. Acceptance limits shall be as per API 1104.
b)
Welds which in Purchaser's Representative's opinion cannot be inspected

by radiographic methods shall be checked by ultrasonic or magnetic
c)
lamination type defects for a distance of 25mm from the end. Any
lamination larger than 6.35mm shall not be acceptance.
d)
All forgings shall be wet magnetic particle examined on 100% of the

forged surfaces. Method and acceptance shall comply with MSS-SP-53.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
MATERIAL)
6.2
REV-1
Page 6 of 8
Purchaser's Representative shall also perform stagewise inspection and witness

tests as indicated in clause 6.1 at manufacturer's works prior to shipment.
Representative.
Inspection and tests performed/ witnessed by Purchaser's Representative shall in
no way relieve the Manufacturer's obligation to perform the required inspection
and tests.
7.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
7.1
Manufacturer shall submit following certificates to Purchaser's Representative :

a)

b)
Test reports on radiographic and ultrasonic inspection and wet magnetic

c)
Certificates for each split tee stating that it is capable of withstanding

without leakage for a test duration of 15 minutes and test pressure which
results in a hoop stress equivalent to 90% of the specified minimum yield
strength and for the pipe with which the split tee is to be attached without
impairing its serviceability.
d)
Test reports on heat treatment carried out.
8.0
8.1
Split tees entire surface shall be thoroughly cleaned, freed from rust and grease
and applied with sufficient coats of corrosion resistant paint, after all the required
tests have been performed and accepted by Purchaser's Representative. The
surface preparation shall be carried out by shot blasting to SP 6 in accordance
with "Steel Structures Painting Council - Visual Standard - SSPC-VIS-1".
8.2
Manufacturer shall indicate the type & recommended coats of corrosion resistant
paint used, in the drawing submitted for approval.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
MATERIAL)
8.3
REV-1
Page 7 of 8
Split tees shall be marked with indelible paint with the following data :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Manufacturer's Name
Nominal diameter in inches D1 x D2
End thickness in mm T1 x T2
Material
Tag numbers
8.4
Split tees shall be suitably protected to avoid any damage during transit. Metallic
or high impact plastic bevel protectors shall be provided for weld ends.
9.0
WARRANTY
Purchaser will be reimbursed by Manufacturer for any Split tee furnished to this
specification which fails under field hydrostatic testing or does not perform
satisfactory during the pigging operation and if such failure or non-performance
is caused by a defect in the Split tees which is outside the acceptance limits of
this specification. The reimbursement cost shall include cost of Split tee, labour
and equipment rental for finding, excavating, cutting, and installation of replaced
Split tee in position.
10.0
DOCUMENTATION
10.1
b)
c)
d)
10.2
General arrangement drawing of split tees with overall dimensions and

cross sectional drawings.
Reference list of previous supplies of split tees of similar specification with
relevant details viz Project, Year of supply, Client, size, Rating and service
for the last five years.
Quality Assurance Plan (QAP), data sheets enclosed with the tender
enquiry duly filled in/ stamped and signed by the Bidder.
copies, of but not limited to, the following drawings, documents and
a)
Fabrication drawings and relevant calculations for pressure

parts.
containing
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
MATERIAL)
REV-1
Page 8 of 8
b)
Calculation for fittings thickness.
c)
Method of manufacture, welding procedure and heat treatment details.
d)
Quality control Manual.
Once the approval has been given by Purchaser, any change in design, material
method of manufacture shall be notified to Purchaser whose approval in writing
of all changes shall be obtained before the Split tees are manufactured.
10.3
specification as stated in clause 10.2 of this specification.
10.4
test certificates as listed in clause 7.0 of this specification.
10.5
FORM NO. 11.20(4.4)F-09 REV-0
QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

FOR
CONTRACTOR
ORDER NO. & DATE
STRUCTURAL AND MECHANICAL

EQUIPMENT
SUB-CONTRACTOR
ORDER NO. & DATE
INSTRUCTIONS FOR FILLING UP :
Sl.
No.
1
1.0
Description (with equipment

heading, place of use and brief
specifications)
Reducing Branch Split Tee
PACKAGE NO. : 05/51/23H6/GAIL/011A-A

PACKAGE NAME : SPLIT TEES
MR NO. : MEC/23H6/05/21/M/001/S011A-A
TS No.: MEC/TS/05/62/011A
CODES FOR EXTENT OF INSPECTION, TESTS, TEST CERTIFICATES & DOCUMENTS :
1. QAP shall be submitted for each of the equipment separately with break up
of assembly/sub-assembly & part/component or for group of equipment
having same specification.
2. Use numerical codes as indicated for extent of inspection & tests and
submission of test certificates & documents. Additional codes & description
for extent of inspection & tests may be added as applicable for the plant
and equipment
3. Separate identification number with quantity for equipment shall be
indicated wherever equipment having same specifications belonging
to different facilities are grouped together.
4. Weight in kilograms must be indicated under Column-5 for each item.
Estimated weights may be indicated wherever actual weights are not
available.
ABBREVIATIONS USED :
CONTR
: CONTRACTOR
MFR
: MANUFACTURER
H
: HOLD
R
: REVIEW
W
: WITNESS
PROJECT : CREATION OF INVENTORY FOR RLNG CONSUMERS
KEY TO SYMBOLS :
*
: MFR/ CONTRACTOR - AS APPLICABLE
** : TEST TO BE PERFORMED, IF APPLICABLE
EQUIPMENT DETAILS
Identification Quantity
Unit
No.
No./M
Weight
(MR Item No.)
(Kg)
3
1.1 - 1.6
4
As per
MR
5
@
Code
Description
1. Visual
2. Dimensional
3. Fitment & Alignment
4. Physical Test (Sample)
5. Chemical Test (Sample)
6. Ultrasonic Test
7. Magnetic Particle Test (MPI)
8. Radiography Test
9. Dye Penetration Test
10. Metallographic Exam.
11. Welders Qualification &
Weld Procedure Test
12. Approval of Test and Repair
Procedure
13. Heat Treatment
14. Pressure Test
15. Leakage Test
16. Balancing
17. Vibration Test
Manufacturer's
Name and Address
Expected
Schedule of
Final Inspn.
6
@
7
@
Code
Description
18. Amplitude Test
19. Sponge Test
20. Dust/ Water Ingress Test
21. Friction Factor Test
22. Adhesion Test
23. Performance Test/Characteristic
Curve
24. No Load/ Free Running Test
25. Load/ Overload Test
26. Measurement of Speeds
27. Accoustical Test
28. Geometrical Accuracy
29. Repeatability and Positioning
Accuracy
30. Proving Test
31. Surface Preparation
32. Manufacturer's Test Certificates
for bought-out items
33. IBR/ Other Statutory agencies
compliance certificate
Code Description
34. Internal Inspection Report
by Contractor
35. Hardness Test
36. Spark Test for Lining
37. Calibration
38. Safety Device Test
39. Ease of Maintenance
40. Fire Test (Type Test)
41. Charpy V-Notch Test
42. Operational Torque Test
43. ENP (Electroless Nickel Plating)
Execution
44. Painting
45. Anti-Static Test
46. Hydrostatic Double Block &
Bleed Test
47. Functional Test
48. Pneumatic Double Block &
Bleed Test
49. Proof Test (Type Test)

Final Inspection/ Test by
Raw Material and In-Process
Stage Inspection
MFR
CONTR
MECON
MFR
CONTR
MECON
8
1,2,4,5,8,
13,14,31,
35,37,41
44
9
-
10
-
11
1,2,6,8
12
-
13
1,2
Code DOCUMENTS:
D1. Approved GA drawings
D2. Information and other
reference drg/ stamped
drgs released for mfg.
D3. Relevant catalogues
D4. Bill of matl./Item no./
Identification
D5. Matchmarks details
D6. Line/ Layout diagram
D7. Approved erection
procedures
D8. Unpriced sub P.O. with
specification and amendments, if any
D9. Calibration Certificate of
all measuring instruments
and gauges
D10. X-Ray Reports
Test Certificates &

Documents to be
submitted to MECON
Acceptance Criteria
Standards/ IS/ BS/
ASME/ Norms and
Documents
REMARKS/
SAMPLING PLAN
14
1,2,4,5,6,8,13,14,34,
35,41
15
MECON's T.S. &
Relevant Standards
mentioned therein
16
QAP NO. TO BE ALLOTED BY MECON

NO. MEC/23H6/05/21/M/001/QAP-011A
For MECON (Stamp & Signature)
@ = BIDDER TO INDICATE
d:\fateh\feeder line\tender rfq\flanges &fittings\QAP - Mechanical Equipment-Split Tee Sheet1
For CONTRACTOR/ SUB-CONTRACTOR

(Stamp & Signature)
SHEET 1 OF 1
REV
0

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
FOR
PRESSURE SAFETY VALVES
D:\TS\PSV - TS - 056 (R-1).doc
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
REV-1
Page 1 of 9
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
VALVE SIZING
3.0
VALVE CONSTRUCTION
4.0
NAMEPLATE
5.0
6.0
SHIPPING
7.0
GUARANTEE
8.0
REJECTION
Revision No.
Page No.
Date
Revised by
Checked by
Approved by
K.P. Singh
A.K. Johri
Niraj Gupta
PREPARED BY :
CHECKED BY :
APPROVED BY :
K.P. SINGH
A.K. JOHRI
NIRAJ GUPTA
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
REV-1
Page 2 of 9
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
1.1.1
This specification together with the attached data sheets covers the requirements for
the design, materials, nameplate marking, testing and shipping of pressure safety
valves.
1.1.2
The related standards referred to herein and mentioned below shall be of the latest
editions prior to the date of the Purchaser's enquiry :
ASME B 1.20.1
Pipe threads
ASME B 16.5
Pipe flanges and flanged fittings
ASME B 16.20
Ring joint gaskets and grooves for steel pipe flanges
ASME Sec.VIII
Boiler & pressure vessels codes for unfired pressure

vessel
API RP 520
(Part-I & II)
Sizing, selection and installation of pressure relieving

devices in refineries
API RP 521
Guide for pressure relieving and depressurising

systems
API 526
Flanged steel safety-relief valves
API 527
Commercial seat tightness of refineries relief valve

with metal to metal seats
DIN 50049
Document on material testing
IBR
Indian boiler regulations
1.1.3
In the event of any conflict between this specification, data sheets, related standards,
codes etc, the Vendor should refer the matter to the Purchaser for clarifications and
only after obtaining the same, should proceed with the manufacture of the items in
question.
1.1.4
Purchaser's data sheets indicate the selected valve's relieving area, materials for the
body, bonnet, disc, nozzle, spring, indicative inlet/outlet connection sizes, bellows etc.
However, this does not relieve the Vendor of the responsibility for proper selection with
respect to the following :
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
a)
b)
REV-1
Page 3 of 9
Sizing calculations and selection of valve with proper relieving area to meet the
operating conditions indicated.
Selection of materials for all parts of the valve suitable for the fluid and its
conditions indicated.
1.1.5
All process-wetted parts, metallic and non-metallic, shall be suitable for the fluids and
service specified by the Purchaser. The service gas composition shall be as given in
Annexure-I.
1.2
Bids
1.2.1
Vendor's quotation shall include a detailed specification sheet for each pressure safety
valve which shall provide all the details regarding type, construction materials, relieving
area, relieving capacity, orifice letter designation, overpressure, blowdown, operating
pressure, etc., and any other valve accessories.
1.2.2
All the units of measurement for various items in the Vendor's specification sheets shall
be to the same standards as those in Purchaser's data sheets.
1.2.3
All the material specifications for various parts in the Vendor's specification sheets shall
be to the same standards as those in Purchaser's data sheets.
1.2.4
Deleted.
1.2.5
Vendor shall enclose catalogues giving detailed technical specifications and other
information for each type of pressure safety valve covered in the bid.
1.2.6
Vendor's quotation, catalogues, drawings, operating and maintenance manual, etc.,

shall be in English.
1.2.7
Vendors quotation shall include detailed sizing calculation for each pressure safety
valve. Published data for certified discharge coefficient and certified flow capacities and
actual discharge area shall be furnished. Data used by Vendor without the above
mentioned supported documentation shall, on prima-facie basis, be rejected.
1.2.8
All valves shall have been type tested for capacity as per ASME. A copy of the certificate
shall be provided.
1.2.9
Vendor shall also quote separately for the following :

a)
b)
Two years recommended operational spares for each pressure relief valve and
its accessories. List of such spares without price shall be indicated alongwith
technical bid and separately with price.
Any specific tools needed for maintenance work.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
1.2.10
FOR
REV-1
Page 4 of 9
Vendors quotation shall include general arrangement and sectional drawings showing
all features and major parts with reference numbers and material specification.
IMPORTANT
The drawings to be submitted alongwith the bid shall be in total compliance
with the requirement of technical specification and data sheets of the valves
with no exception & deviation.
1.2.11
Vendors quotation shall include Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) enclosed with this tender
duly signed, stamped & accepted.
1.3
Drawings and Data
1.3.1
Detailed drawings, data, catalogues required from the Vendor are indicated by the
Purchaser in this specification. The required number or reproducibles and prints should
be dispatched to the address mentioned, adhering to the time limits indicated.
1.3.2
Within two weeks of placement of order, Vendor shall submit six copies of certified
drawings and specification sheets for each pressure safety valve for Purchasers final
approval. These documents shall specially include the following :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Flange face to face dimension.

Height of the complete valve assembly.
Weight of the complete valve assembly.
Cold bench set pressure for the valve to be tested at atmospheric temperature
and back pressure.
The cold test medium to be used for bench test in case it is different from air.
Horizontal reaction force at center line of valve outlet.
Relieving capacity of the valve under the same operating conditions.
Over pressure and blowdown/ reclosing pressure for each valve.
1.3.3
Vendor shall provide test certificates for all the tests indicated in clause 5.0 of this
specification. In addition Vendor shall provide the Manufacturers certificate of
conformity to Purchasers specifications as per clause 2.2 of Din 50049.
1.3.4
Within 30 days from the approval date, Manufacturer shall submit to Purchaser one
reproducible and six copies of the approved drawings, documents and specifications as
listed in clause 1.3.2 above.
1.3.5
Prior to shipment, Manufacturer shall submit one reproducible and six copies of the
following:
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
a)
b)
FOR
REV-1
Page 5 of 9
Test certificates for all the tests indicated in clause 5.0 of this specification.
Manual for installation, erection, maintenance and operation instructions,
including a list of recommended spares for the valves.
2.0
VALVE SIZING
2.1
Sizing shall be carried out using the formulae mentioned in the following standards,
whenever the sizing code mentioned in the Purchaser's data sheets refers to them:
Sizing Code
Standard
API
API RP 520 Part-I
ASME
ASME boiler and pressure vessel code section VIII titled

- Unfired pressure vessels
IBR
Indian Boiler Regulations Paragraph 293
2.2
Discharge co-efficient of Vendor's pressure safety valves shall be minimum 0.975 as per
API 520. However, for valves covered under IBR, regulations of IBR shall govern.
2.3
For flanged pressure safety valves, the orifice letter designation and the corresponding
relieving area indicated in the Purchaser's data sheet shall be as per API 526. For a
valve of given inlet and outlet sizes and letter designation, relieving area of the valves
offered by Vendor shall meet those in API-526, as a minimum.
2.4
The discharge capacity of selected pressure safety valves shall be calculated based on
certified ASME capacity curves or by using ASME certified discharge coefficient and
actual orifice area. Higher valve size shall be selected in case pressure relief valve
discharge capacity is less than the required flow rate.
2.5
The definitions of various terminologies used in Purchaser's data sheets are as per
paragraph 3.1 of API RP 520 Part-I.
3.0
VALVE CONSTRUCTION
3.1
Body
3.1.1
Unless otherwise mentioned end connection details shall be as below :a)

b)
Threaded end connections shall be to NPT as per ASME B 1.20.1.

Flanged end connections shall be as per ASME B 16.5.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
c)
REV-1
Page 6 of 9
Flanged face finish shall be serrated concentric to paragraphs 6.3.4.1, 6.3.4.2

and 6.3.4.3 of ASME B 16.5. The face finish as specified in data sheets, shall
have serrations as follows.
Serrated
125 AARH
63 AARH
:
:
:
250 to 500 microinches AARH

3.1.2
For flanged valves, inlet and outlet sizes & ratings and center to flange face dimensions
shall be in accordance with API-526. Dimensional tolerances shall be as mentioned
therein.
3.1.3
Body drain with a plug shall be provided as a standard feature on every pressure safety
valve.
3.2
Trim
3.2.1
The term `trim' covers all the parts of the valves exposed to and in contact with the
process fluid except for the body and bonnet assembly.
3.2.2
Valves shall in general be of the full nozzle full lift type, unless otherwise specified.
3.2.3
Wherever stelliting of disc and nozzle has been specified, it stands for stelliting of the
seat joint and the entire disc contour, unless otherwise mentioned.
3.2.4
Resilient seat/ seal or Ò rings wherever used shall be suitable for pressure and
temperature conditions specified.
3.3
Bonnet and Spring
3.3.1
All valves shall be provided with a cap over the adjusting bolt.
3.3.2
Lifting lever shall be provided whenever the fluid to be relieved is steam or air.
3.3.3
Valve spring design shall permit an adjustment 5% of the set pressure as a minimum.
3.3.4
Carbon Steel spring shall be cadmium/ nickel plated.
3.3.5
The allowable tolerances in set pressures are as below :

2
0.14 kg/cm (g) for set pressures upto and including 5 kg/cm (g);
2
3% for set pressure above 5 kg/cm (g).
3.3.6
Bonnet shall be of the enclosed type in general. Open type of bonnet may be used only
for non-toxic fluids.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
REV-1
Page 7 of 9
3.4
Pilot
3.4.1
Wherever pilot operated valves are specified, pilot shall be non-flowing type and shall
be designed fail safe.
3.4.2
All accessories like back flow preventer, pilot filter etc. required for proper operation of
pilot operated valves as per indicated service conditions shall be included.
3.4.3
Wherever the body is part of flow path, body material shall be same as trim material, as
a minimum.
4.0
NAMEPLATE
4.1
Each pressure safety valve shall have a S.S. nameplate attached firmly to it at a visible
place, furnishing the following information:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Tag number as per Purchaser's data sheets.

Manufacturer's serial no. or model no.
Manufacturer's name/ trade mark.
Nominal flanged size in inches and rating in lbs. for both inlet and outlet.
Orifice letter designation.
Valve set pressure.
Cold bench test set pressure.
Unit of the above pressures shall be marked in the same units as those followed in
Purchaser's data sheets.
5.0
5.1
Unless otherwise specified, Purchaser reserves the right to test and inspect all the items
at the Vendors works.
5.1.1
Purchaser's Inspector shall perform inspection and witness test on all valves as
indicated in the Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) attached with this specification.
5.2
Vendor shall submit the following test certificates and test reports for Purchasers
review:
a)
b)
Material test certificate from the foundry (MIL certificate) for each valve body
and bonnet castings, nozzle, disc etc.
Certificate of radiography / x-ray for valve castings. 100% radiography shall be
carried out for all valve castings with body rating of 600# and above. A
minimum of two shots shall be taken for all curved portion of the body and
bonnet.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
c)
d)
FOR
REV-1
Page 8 of 9
Hydrostatic test reports for all valve bodies and functional test reports for all
valves as per clause 5.3 and 5.4 of this specification.
IBR certificate in Form III item 11 and shall be furnished for all safety valves in
steam service in addition to Form III C. Form III C shall also be furnished for
pressure relief valves in distribution network.
5.3
Hydrostatic Test
5.3.1
Each pressure safety valve body and nozzle shall undergo hydrostatic test as per outlet
flange and inlet flange ANSI rating, respectively. However all the safety valves castings
covered under IBR shall be tested as per IBR regulations. There shall not be any visible
leakage during this test.
5.4
Functional Tests
5.4.1
Assembled valves shall be subjected to functional tests as below :

a)
Cold bench set pressure test

Pressure relief valve shall be tested for opening at specified set pressure and
also for seat tightness.
b)
Seat Leakage test as per API

2
Whenever the specified set pressure is less than or equal to 70 kg/cm g, the
valve shall meet the seat tightness requirements specified in API RP-527. The
maximum permissible leakage rates for conventional and balanced bellow valves
against various sizes shall be as specified therein. Whenever the specified set
2
pressure exceeds 70 kg/cm g, the Vendor shall submit the leakage rates of
valves for approval by the Purchaser.
Where bubble tightness has been specified, there shall be no leakage or bubbles
of air at the specified percentage of set pressure.
c)
5.5
Valve lift test
Witness Inspection
All pressure safety valves shall be offered for pre-despatch inspection for following as a
minimum :
a)
b)
c)
d)
Physical dimensional checks and workmanship

Hydrostatic test as per clause 5.3 of this specification.
Functional test on representative samples.
Review of all certificate and test reports as indicated in clause 5.2 of this
specification.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
REV-1
Page 9 of 9
In the event of tests being not witnessed by Purchaser, the tests shall anyway be
completed by the Vendor and documents for same submitted for scrutiny.
6.0
SHIPPING
6.1
Valves shall be supplied as a whole, complete with all the accessories like cap, lifting
lever, test gag, etc.
6.2
All threaded and flanged opening shall be suitably protected to prevent entry of foreign
material.
7.0
GUARANTEE
7.1
Manufacturer shall guarantee that the materials and machining of valves and fittings
comply with the requirements in this specification and in the Purchase Order.
7.2
Manufacturer is bound to replace or repair all valve parts which should result defective
due to inadequate engineering or to the quality of materials and machining.
7.3
If valve defect or malfunctioning cannot be eliminated, Manufacturer shall replace the

valve without delay,
7.4
Any defect occurring during the period of Guarantee shall be attended to by making all
necessary modifications and repair of defective parts free of charge to the Purchaser as
per the relevant clause of the bid document.
7.5
All expenses shall be to Manufacturers account.
8.0
REJECTION
8.1
Vendor shall make his offer in detail with respect to every item of the Purchaser's
specifications. Any offer not conforming to this shall be summarily rejected.
FOR
CARTRIDGE FILTER & ACCESSORIES
(Dry Gas Filters)
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
D:\TS\Cartridge Filter - 017 - TS.doc
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
CARTRIDGE FILTER
REV-1
Page 1 of 10
CONTENTS
Sl.
No.
Description
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
SCOPE OF SUPPLY
3.0
SCOPE OF SERVICES
4.0
DESIGN
5.0
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
6.0
7.0
PROTECTION AND PAINTING
8.0
PACKAGING AND IDENTIFICATION
9.0
SPARE PARTS
10.0
INFORMATION/ DOCUMENTS/ DRAWINGS

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH THE OFFER
11.0
INFORMATION/ DOCUMENTS/ DRAWINGS

TO BE SUBMITTED BY SUCCESSFUL VENDOR
12.0
ORDER OF PRECEDENCE
10
PREPARED BY
Page No.
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
CARTRIDGE FILTER
REV-1
Page 2 of 10
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
This specification outlines the minimum requirements under which the

manufacturer shall design, manufacture, test and supply Cartridge Filter for
separating solid contaminants from the gas stream.
2.0
SCOPE OF SUPPLY
2.1
The vendor's scope of supply shall be Cartridge Filter alongwith accessories

complete in all respects as per data sheet enclosed. The detailed scope of work
is as follows :
The filters shall comprise of the following :
3.0
Filter vessel alongwith necessary filtering cartridge.
Necessary nozzles, companion flanges, blind flanges (with nuts, bolts,

gaskets etc.) on the filter vessel as specified in the data sheets.
Cartridge supporting arrangement inside the vessel.
Quick opening closure for maintenance and filter element replacement.
Instruments, viz PSV as per Instrumentation inputs.
Necessary supports for filter vessel.
Cleats for platforms and ladders.
Foundation bolts & base plate for embedding/ grouting into civil
foundation.
Documents clause 10, 11 & elsewhere in spec.
Spare parts for two years normal operation.
SCOPE OF SERVICES
Engineering, design and manufacturing.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
CARTRIDGE FILTER
REV-1
Page 3 of 10
Procurement of raw materials etc. from sub-vendors.
Preparation and submission of documentation for design approval by

purchaser/ consultant.
Inspection and testing as per T.S.
Surface preparation, protective coating and painting as per T.S.
Packaging for transportation to site and supply.
4.0
DESIGN
4.1
Following codes & standards (latest edition) shall be followed for design,
manufacture, testing etc. of the equipment.
4.2
ASME Sec-VIII Div-1
ASME Sec-IX
Welding and Brazing Qualifications
ASME Sec-II & ASTM
Material Specifications
ANSI B16.5
Pipe Flanges & Pipe Fittings
ANSI B16.1
Forged Steel
Threaded
ASME B16.47
Large Diameter Steel Flanges
ANSI B36.10
Welding & Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
Fittings Socket Welded
&
For purpose of material selection national code of the country of origin shall also
be acceptable provided the vendor specifically establishes, to the satisfaction of
the purchaser, the equivalence or superiority of the proposed material with
respect to those specified.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
CARTRIDGE FILTER
REV-1
Page 4 of 10
5.0
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
5.1
The cartridge shall be of PECO/ PALL/ FILTERITE/ VELCON/ FACET/ BURGESS

MANNING make. For porous metal cartridge, FUJI/ PALL/ PORAL/ MOTT are
acceptable.
5.2
Filter elements must withstand a pressure of 1.0 kg/cm2(g) without breaking or

failure.
5.3
At least 300mm space from bottom tangent line to be provided.
5.4
Filtering efficiency shall be as per enclosed data sheet.
5.5
Particle size shall be as indicated in the data sheets.
5.6
The end closure to be high pressure quick release type interlock to open only
when vessel is completely depressurised. The Quick Opening Closure shall be
one of the following makes only : a) Peerless, b) Grinell, c) Peco, d) Siirtec, e)
Huber Yale, f) G.D. Engineering.
5.7
Filter element should be suitable for specified mole% of CO2.
5.8
Core of filter element shall be of SS material.
5.9
A davit/ hinged arrangement shall be provided for the closure for convenient
handling. The closure shall have perfect sealing arrangement to prevent leakage.
5.10
The equipment shall be of the type as mentioned in the data sheets and shall
meet the duty requirements and performance parameters as mentioned therein.
5.11
Vendor shall submit calculations for sizing of the equipment together with all
supporting documents/ catalogues/ nomographs etc. with the bid. The type,
model and number of cartridge shall be selected based on allowable pressure
drop and supplier's recommendation. The total internal cross sectional area of
mounted cartridge shall not be less than inlet nozzle area for inlet size upto 150
NB. The calculation for the selected number of cartridge shall be furnished,
alongwith the bid.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
CARTRIDGE FILTER
REV-1
Page 5 of 10
5.12
Suitable baffle plates shall be provided in the vessels for proper fluid flow
distribution. Vessel diameter shall be minimum twice the diameter of inlet nozzle.
All internal nuts and bolts shall be of stainless steel irrespective of material of
construction of vessel.
5.13
All nozzles/ pipes on the vessel shall be of seamless construction. All nozzle less
than or equal to 50 NB size shall be provided with 2 Nos., 6mm thick stiffeners at
90 degress to each other. All nozzles above 80 NB size, shall be provided with
reinforcement pads.
5.14
All flanges shall be WNRF except DPT connection which is to be socket welded.
5.15
Dimensions of flanges including shell flanges, blind head cover flanges, nozzle
flanges and blind flanges shall be as per ANSI B16.5. Larger flanges shall be as
per ANSI B16.47.
5.16
Pressure parts joined by butt welds shall be with full penetration welds. Where
both sides welding is not accessible, root run by tungsten inert gas process or
backing strip, shall be used to ensure full penetration. Backing strip if used, shall
be removed after welding.
5.17
Vessels shall be post weld heat treated, whenever it is required due to service
requirement or due to code requirements. Vessels shall be post weld heat
treated as a complete unit and no welding shall be permitted after the post weld
heat treatment is completed.
5.18
For vessels in stainless steel construction, lower allowable stress values shall be
considered as per ASME Code for their design.
5.19
Filter vessel shall be provided with lifting and earthing lugs. Fire proofing and
insulation supports shall be provided if indicated in data sheet.
6.0
6.1
Equipment shall be subjected to stagewise expediting, inspection and testing at

vendor's/ sub-vendor's works by purchaser/ its authorised inspection agency.
Vendor shall submit Quality Assurance (QA) procedures before commencement
of fabrication. Approved QA procedures shall form the basis for equipment
inspection.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
CARTRIDGE FILTER
6.2
REV-1
Page 6 of 10
Testing at vendor's works shall include but not limited to the following:
Non destructive tests such as radiography, dye penetration tests.

Hydrostatic test at 150% of design pressure for the vessel.
Any other tests as per data sheets/ standards/ codes.
6.3
Any or all the tests, at purchaser's option, shall be witnessed by purchaser/ its
authorised inspection agency. However, such inspection shall be regarded as
check-up and in no way absolve the vendor of this responsibility.
6.4
Extent of radiography shall be 100%.
7.0
PROTECTION AND PAINTING
7.1
All exposed carbon steel parts to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned from
inside and outside to remove scale, rust, dirt and other foreign materials by wire
brushing and sand blasting as applicable. Minimum acceptable standard in case
of power tool cleaning shall be St. 3 and incase of blast cleaning shall be Sa 2
as per Swedish Standard SIS 0055900.
7.2
Non-ferrous materials, austenitic stainless steels, plastic or plastic coated

materials, insulated surfaces of equipment and pre-painted items shall not be
painted.
7.3
Stainless steel surfaces both inside and outside shall be pickled and passivated.
7.4
Machined and bearing surfaces shall be protected with varnish or thick coat of
grease.
7.5
Depending on the environment, following primer and finish coats shall be

applied.
i)
Environment
Description
Normal Industrial
Surface
Preparation
Sa 2
Primer
2 coats of Redoxide zinc chromate each

25 microns (min.) thick.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
CARTRIDGE FILTER
ii)
iii)
iv)
Corrosive Industrial
Coastal and Marine
All Environment
(temp. 80-400C)
REV-1
Page 7 of 10
Finish Coat
2 coats of synthetic enamel, each 25

microns (min.) thick.
Surface
Preparation
Sa 2
Primer
2 coats of Epoxy zinc chromate each 35

Finish Coat
2 coats of Epoxy high build paint each 100

Surface
Preparation
Sa 2
Primer
2 coats of high build Chlorinated Rubber

zinc phosphate, each 50 microns (min.)
thick.
Finish
2 coats of chlorinated rubber paint, each

35 microns (min.) thick.
Surface
Preparation
Sa 2
Finish
2 coats of heat resistant aluminium paint

suitable for specified temp. each 20
thick. (All values refer to dry film
thickness).
7.6
The colour of finish coat shall be intimated to vendor after placement of order.
8.0
PACKAGING AND IDENTIFICATION
8.1
All packaging shall be done in such a manner as to reduce the volume. The
equipment shall be dismantled into major components suitable for shipment and
shall be properly packed to provide adequate protection during shipment. All
assemblies shall be properly match marked for site erection.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
CARTRIDGE FILTER
REV-1
Page 8 of 10
8.2
Attachments, spares parts of the equipment and small items shall be packed
separately in wooden-cases. Each item shall be appropriately tagged with
identification of main equipment, its denomination and reference number of the
respective assembly drawing.
8.3
Detailed packing list in water-proof envelope shall be inserted in the package

together with equipment.
8.4
Each equipment shall have an identification plate giving salient equipment data,
make, year of manufacture, equipment number, name of manufacturer etc.
9.0
SPARE PARTS
9.1
Vendor shall submit his recommended list of spare parts with recommended
quantities and itemised prices for first two years of operation of the equipment.
Proper coding and referencing of spare parts shall be done so that later
identification with appropriate equipment will be facilitated.
9.2
Recommended spares and their quantities should take into account related
factors of equipment reliability, effect of equipment downtime upon production
or safety, cost of parts and availability of vendor's service facilities around
proposed location of equipment.
9.3
Vendor shall also submit a list of recommended commissioning spares with

quantities and the itemised prices.
10.0
INFORMATIONS/ DOCUMENTS/ DRAWINGS TO BE SUBMITTED WITH

THE OFFER
Contractor shall submit with the offer four copies each of the following:
10.1
Manufacturer's complete descriptive and illlustrative catalogue/ literature.
10.2
The completion schedule activity wise.
10.3
In case of failure to submit the documents listed above, the offer may be
rejected.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
CARTRIDGE FILTER
11.0
REV-1
Page 9 of 10
INFORMATION/ DOCUMENTS/ DRAWINGS TO BE SUBMITTED BY

SUCCESSFUL VENDOR
Successful vendor shall submit six copies unless noted otherwise, each of the
following :
11.1
Inspection & test reports for all mandatory tests as per the applicable code. Test
reports for any supplementary tests, in nicely bound volumes.
11.2
Material test certificates (physical) property, chemical composition, make, heat

treatment report etc.) as applicable for items in nicely bound volumes.
11.3
Statutory test certificates, as applicable.
11.4
Filled in QAP for Owner's/ Consultants approval. These QAP's shall be submitted
in four copies.
11.5
WPS & PQR, as required.
11.6
Within two(2) weeks of placement of order, the detailed fabrication drawings

alongwith mechanical design calculations for Owner's/ Consultants approval.
These drawings shall be submitted in four copies.
11.7
Detailed completion schedule activity wise, within one week of placement of

order.
11.8
Weekly & fortnightly progress reports for all activities including procurement.
11.9
Purchase orders of bought out items soon after placement of order.
11.10
Manufacturer's drawings for bought out items, in 4 copies, for Owner's/

Consultant approval within 4 weeks.
11.11
Manufacturer related information for design of civil foundation & other matching
items within 6 weeks of LOI.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
11.12
CARTRIDGE FILTER
REV-1
Page 10 of 10
All approved drawings/ documents as well as inspection and test reports for
Owner's/ Consultants reference/ record in nicely category wise bound volumes
separately.
Note: All drawings, instructions, catalogues, etc. shall be in English language
and all dimensions shall be metric units.
12.0
ORDER OF PRECEDENCE
The following order of precedence shall govern in interpretation of various
requirements and data :
Data Sheets
This Specification
Codes & Standards
Vendors Standards
SPECIFICATION
FOR
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
D:\TS\QOEC - 013 - TS.doc
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
REV-0
Page 1 of 7
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3.0
MATERIALS
4.0
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
5.0
6.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
7.0
8.0
GUARANTEE
9.0
SPARES
10.0
DOCUMENTATION
PREPARED BY
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
1.0
REV-0
Page 2 of 7
SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum requirements for design and manufacture of quick
opening end closures to be installed at various blow-down points of the pipeline handling
Natural Gas. This specification does not cover quick opening end closures for sour
hydrocarbons service as defined in NACE standard MR0175-98.
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
Reference has been made in this specification to the latest edition of the following
codes, standards and specification :
a)
ANSI B 31.8
Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems
b)
ANSI B 16.25
Butt - Welding Ends
c)
ASME Sec. VIII
Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code Rules for the

Construction of Pressure vessels
d)
ASME Sec. IX
Qualification standard for Welding and Brazing

procedures, welders, brazers and welding and
brazing operators.
e)
API 6H
Specification on End closures, Connectors and

Swivels
f)
API 1104
Specification for Welding Pipeline and Related

Facilities
g)
SSPC-VIS-1
In case of conflict between the requirement of this specification and the requirements of
above referred documents, the requirements of this specification shall govern.
3.0
MATERIALS
3.1
Material used in the manufacture of pressure containing parts of quick opening endclosure shall be fully killed carbon steel, forged construction. In addition, the material
shall also meet the requirements specified herein.
The minimum SMYS of the material of pressure containing part of the closure shall be
35,000 psi.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
REV-0
Page 3 of 7
Other components shall be as per Manufacturer's Standard. However, all the materials
used shall be suitable for the service conditions indicated in Annexure-I, which will be
subject to approval by Purchaser.
3.2
Material of the ends to be field welded by Purchaser shall have carbon equivalent not
more than 0.45 based on check analysis, for each heat of steel used, calculated as per
the following formula:
Mn
Cr + Mo + V
Ni +Cu
CE = C+ ---------- + --------------------- + ------------6
5
15
3.3
Unless specified otherwise, Charpy V-notch test shall be conducted for each heat of
steel, in accordance with the impact test provisions of ASTM A 370 at temperature of
0oC. The average absorbed impact energy valves of three full-sized specimens shall be
27 joules.
The minimum impact energy value of any one specimen of the three specimens
analysed as above, shall not be less than 80% of the above mentioned average values.
3.4
Hardness test shall be carried out as per ASTM A 370 for each heat of steel used. A full
thickness cross section shall be taken for this purpose and the maximum hardness of
base metal, weld metal and HAZ of all pressure containing parts shall not exceed 248
HV10.
4.0
4.1
End closure shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of ANSI B 31.8 and
ASME Sec. VIII Division 1. Corrosion allowance and design factor as indicated in the data
sheets shall be considered in the design of end closure.
4.2
Diameter, thickness, material, ANSI Rating of the pipeline with which the end closure to
be welded is indicated in the Data Sheets. End closure supplied shall be suitable for the
same.
4.3
End closure shall be of clamp ring, band lock or equivalent type and operable by a single
lever operation. The threaded closures are not acceptable.
4.4
End closure shall be of hinged and quick opening type and shall consist of a safety
system allowing the opening only when there is no pressure in the line.
4.5
End closure shall be suitable for installation in vertical position at an elevation of 2.0
meters above ground level. The safety system and the lever for operating the closure
shall be at a convenient position so that easy access is possible for operator from
ground without usage of any structure or platform.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
REV-0
Page 4 of 7
4.6
When closed, the closure shall provide a positive seal without any leakage. Gaskets or
seals when provided for this purpose shall be self sealing and suitable for the service
condition indicated in Annexure-I & Data Sheets.
4.7
For vertical installation, a suitable lifting device shall be provided to hinge the closure
plug, head or door, clear for vertical access into the opened closure. The lever of the
closure shall be provided in vertical plane so that vertical up and down operation is
achievable.
4.8
The handling device shall be attached to the welding end hub, which shall be suitable for
such attachment.
4.9
End closure shall be provided with a butt-welding end for direct welding with the
pipeline. The weld end shall be prepared in accordance with ANSI B31.8.
4.10
All welds shall be made by welders and welding procedures qualified in accordance with
the provisions of ASME Sec. IX. The procedure qualification shall also include impact test
and hardness test when required as per clause 3.3 and 3.4 of this specification and shall
meet the requirements as specified therein.
4.11
Completed assembly shall be stress relieved as per the provisions of the design codes.
4.12
The tolerance on internal diameter end out of roundness shall be as per connected pipe
specifications indicated in the Data Sheet.
5.0
5.1
Manufacturer shall perform all inspection and tests as per the requirements of this
specification and the relevant codes, prior to shipment at his works. Such inspection
shall be, but not limited to the following :
5.1.1
All closures shall be visually inspected.
5.1.2
Chemical composition and mechanical properties shall be checked.
5.1.3
Dimensional check shall be carried out as per the approved drawings.
5.1.4
Hydrostatic test shall be conducted for all end closures complete in all respects, at a
pressure equal to 1.5 times the design pressure. Test duration shall be as 15 minutes.
No leakage is allowed.
5.1.5
All butt welds shall be 100% radiographically inspected. Procedure and acceptance
criteria shall be as per API 1104.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
REV-0
Page 5 of 7
5.1.6
Welds, which cannot be radiographically inspected, shall be inspected by ultrasonic or

magnetic particle methods. Procedure and acceptance criteria shall be as per ASME Sec.
VIII, Appendix Ù' and Appendix-VI respectively.
5.1.7
All finished wrought weld ends shall be ultrasonically inspected for lamination type
defects for a distance of 50mm from the end. Any lamination larger 6.35mm shall not be
accepted.
5.1.8
A minimum of two closing and opening cycles shall be performed and correct operation
of both quick opening and safety system shall be established.
5.2
Purchaser's Representative reserves the right to perform inspection and witness tests
including hydrostatic test, as indicated in para 5.1 at manufacturer's works prior to
shipment. Manufacturer shall give reasonable notice of time and shall provide without
Representative.
Inspection and tests performed/ witnessed by Purchaser's Representative shall in no way
relieve the Manufacturer's obligation to perform the required inspection and tests.
6.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
Manufacturer shall furnish the following certificates:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Test certificates relevant to chemical and mechanical properties of the material

used as per the relevant standards.
Hydrostatic test certificates.
Report on Non-Destructive examination.
Certificate of satisfactory performance of end closure as per clause 5.1.8.
Certificates of stress relieving.
The certificates shall be considered valid only when signed by the Purchaser's inspector.
7.0
7.1
After all inspection and tests required have been carried out, all external surfaces shall
be thoroughly cleaned to remove grease, dust and rust. Surface preparation shall be
carried out by shot blasting to SP-6 in accordance with "Steel Structures Painting Council
- Visual Standard - SSPC-VIS-1". Machined parts shall be coated with anti-rust
removable paint and non-machined parts shall be applied with two coats of protective
paint. Manufacturer shall indicate the type of paints used in the drawings submitted for
approval.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
7.2
REV-0
Page 6 of 7
Marking shall be done on a stainless steel plate and affixed to the body permanently.
Marking shall include the following :a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Manufacturer's Name
Suitable for
dia. X
ANSI Rating
Tag Number
Year of Manufacturer
Thick Pipeline.
7.3
Before shipment, closures shall be properly packed against damage during

transportation. Bevel ends shall be protected with metallic & high impact plastic
bevel protectors.
7.4
Only those closures, which have been inspected and certified by Purchasers
Representative, shall be shipped.
8.0
GUARANTEE
8.1
Manufacturer shall guarantee that the closure alongwith the davits is in compliance with
the requirements of this specification for material and workmanship. Manufacturer shall
replace or repair all parts which should result defective due to inadequate engineering of
quality of material or workmanship. In case the defect cannot be eliminated,
Manufacturer shall replace the closure without any delay. Any defects occurring within
the time period specified elsewhere shall be required making all necessary modifications
and repair of defective parts free of charge ot the purchaser.
9.0
SPARES
9.1
Manufacturer shall furnish list of recommended spares and accessories for Quick
Opening End Closures required during start up and commissioning. Cost of such spares
shall be included by the Manufacturer in the item rates indicated in Purchase
Requisition.
9.2
Manufacturer shall furnish separately a list of recommended spares and accessories

required for two years of normal operation and maintenance of Quick Opening End
Closures.
10.0
DOCUMENTATION
10.1
Manufacturer shall furnish at the time of bidding, the following documents:a)
General Arrangement Drawings of end closure with over all dimensions and
showing the operational arrangement.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
10.2
REV-0
Page 7 of 7
b)
Clause wise list of deviation from this specification, if any listed at one place in
the document.
c)
Reference list of similar supplies for the past five years including project, client,
year of supply & contact person.
d)
Descriptive technical catalogues of the manufacturer.
e)
Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) enclosed with this tender duly signed, stamped
and accepted.
Within two weeks of placement of order, the manufacturer shall submit four copies of,
but not limited to, the following drawings, documents and specifications for approval :a)
Calculations according to relevant codes for the end closure.
b)
Closure assembly and sectional drawing showing all parts with materials and
dimensions.
c)
Welding procedure and method of manufacture.
Once the above said documents have been approved by the Purchaser, any change in
design, material and method of manufacture shall be notified to the Purchaser, whose
approval in writing of all changes shall be obtained before the closures are
manufactured.
10.3
Within four weeks from the approval date, Manufacturer shall submit one reproducible
and six copies of Approved drawings, documents and specifications listed in clause 10.2
of this specification.
10.4
Prior to shipment, the Manufacturer shall submit one reproducible and six copies of the
following :-
10.5
a)
Test certificates as listed in clause 6.0 of this specification.
b)
Manual for installation, erection instructions, maintenance and operation

instructions.
All documents shall be in English Language only.
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PIG SIGNALLERS
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
D:\Technical Specifications & Standards\048 - Pig Signaller - TS.doc
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
PIG SIGNALLERS
REV-0
Page 1 of 6
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
MATERIALS
3.0
4.0
5.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
6.0
7.0
SPARES AND ACCESSORIES
8.0
GUARANTEE
9.0
DOCUMENTATION
PREPARED BY
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
1.0
PIG SIGNALLERS
REV-0
Page 2 of 6
SCOPE
This specification covers the basic requirements for the design and
manufacture testing & supply of pig signallers, used for the detection of
passage of scraper and instrumented gauging pigs, to be installed in pipeline
systems handling hydrocarbons in liquid or gaseous phase including Liquefied
Petroleum Gas (LPG). This specification does not cover pig signallers for sour
hydrocarbons (liquid/ gas) service as defined in NACE Standard MR 017598.
2.0
MATERIALS
2.1
All materials used in the manufacture of the main components of the pig
signallers shall be as indicated in the data sheets. Other components shall be as
per manufacturer's standard suitable for the service conditions indicated in
Annexure I and data sheets which will be subject to approval by Purchaser.
2.2
Scarfed welding base, shall have Carbon Equivalent (CE) not greater than 0.45
on check analysis, calculated as per the following formula :
CE = C +
Mn
-------- +
6
Cr + Mo + V
Ni + Cu
--------------------- + --------------5
15
2.3
Fully skilled carbon steel shall be used in the manufacture of pig signallers.
2.4
The maximum hardness of the base material, weld metal heat affected zone of
the pressure ciontaining parts shall be 248 HV10. Hardness test shall be carried
out as per ASTM A370 for each heat of steel used.
3.0
3.1
Pig signallers shall be bi-directional type having pivot-less tumbler mechanism

and laminated trigger blades.
3.2
Pig signallers shall be designed to meet the requirements of pipeline material,

diameter, wall thickness & service conditions indicated in the data sheet.
3.3
Design of pig signallers shall be such that any possibility of signaller being
operated by line pressure is eliminated.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
PIG SIGNALLERS
REV-0
Page 3 of 6
3.4
Design of pig signallers shall also be such that repair and installation of internals/
accessories are possible under pressure, without removing the unit from the line.
3.5
Pig signallers shall be provided with a visual indicator to indicate the passage
of pigs, by means of spring loaded metal shaft. The arm shall lock in down
position when manually reset.
3.7
Pig signallers shall be fitted with sealed, weather proof and explosion proof
microswitch for remote signal indication. The area classification and rating of
microswitch shall be as indicated in data sheet. Suitable for installation in NEC
class I Division 1, hazardous area. Microswitch shall have the following rating:
2 Amp, 24 Volts, 50 Hz.
Type : SPDT.
Contacts : 2 NO and 2 NC
3.8

accordance with the provision of ASME Section IX.
The procedure qualification shall include hardness test and shall meet the
requirements of clause 2.4 of this specification
3.9
Whenever specified in the data sheet, pig signallers shall be provided with
extension, suitable for installation on underground pipeline.
4.0
4.1
Manufacturer shall perform all inspection and tests required to supply the
signallers as per the requirements of this specification.
4.2
All pig signallers shall be visually inspected.
4.3
Chemical composition & mechanical properties including hardness shall be

checked for each heat of steel used.
4.4
All welds shall be non destructively examined.
4.5
The welding end shall be inspected ultrasonically over the entire circumference
for lamination type defects. Any lamination larger than 6.35 mm shall not be
acceptable.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
PIG SIGNALLERS
REV-0
Page 4 of 6
4.6
Hydrostatic test shall be conducted at a pressure equal to 1.5 times the design
pressure. Hydrotest duration shall be 15 Minutes.
4.6
Manufacturers shall perform functional tests to

performance of both manual and electrical indications
5.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
5.1
Manufacturer shall supply the test certificates for material compliance as per the
relevant Material Standards.
5.2
Certificate for hydrostatic test and functional test
5.3
Test reports on heat treatment carried out, if any.
6.0
6.1
Exterior surface of the pig signallers shall be thoroughly cleaned, freed from rust
and grease and applied with sufficient coats of corrosion resistant paint.
Manufacturer shall indicate the type and corrosion resistant paint used in the
drawings submitted for approval. In case of pig signallers with extension, the
burried portion shall be coated with three coats of coal tar epoxy resin. The
minimum dry film thickness shall be 300 microns.
6.2
A corrosion resistant metal tag shall be permanently attached with each unit,
with the following marking:i)
Manufacturers name
i)
Suitable for installation in_______mm dia. pipeline
ii)
ANSI Rating
iii)
Tag No.
establish
satisfactory
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
PIG SIGNALLERS
REV-0
Page 5 of 6
6.3
Each unit shall be suitably protected to avoid any damage during transit. Care
shall be exercised during packing to prevent any damage to the welding ends. All
machined surfaces subject to corrosion shall be well protected by a coat of
grease or other suitable materials.
7.0
7.1
Manufacturer shall furnish list of recommended spares and accessories for Pig
Signallers required during start up and commissioning. Cost of such spares shall
be included by the Manufacturer in the item rates indicated in Purchase
Requisition.
7.2
Manufacturer shall furnish separately a list of recommended spares and

accessories required for two years of normal operation and maintenance of Pig
Signallers.
8.0
GUARANTEE
8.1
Manufacturer shall guarantee that the pig signallers comply with the
requirements stated in this specification and in the purchase order. Manufacturer
shall replace or repair all parts found to be defective due to inadequate
engineering or quality of material. Manufacturer shall replace the signaller
without delay, if the defect or malfunctioning cannot be eliminated.
8.2
Any defects occuring within the time period specified elsewhere shall be repaired
making all necessary modifications and repair of defective parts free of charge to
the purchaser.
9.0
DOCUMENTATION
9.1
b)
c)
d)
General Arrangement drawing with overall dimensions.

Clause wise list of deviation from this specification, if any.
Reference list of similar supplies of pig signaller shall be furnished
including project, year of supply, client, size, rating and service for last
five years.
stamped and accepted.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
PIG SIGNALLERS
9.2
REV-0
Page 6 of 6
copies, but not limited to, of the following drawings, documents and
a)
Fabrication drawings/ sectional arrangement drawings showing all parts

with reference numbers and material specification.
b)
Assembly drawing with overall dimension.
c)
Welding and testing procedure.
e)
Cable connection details and cable specification.
Once the approval has been given by Purchaser, any change in design, material,
etc. shall be notified to the Purchaser whose approval in writing for all changes
shall be obtained before Pig Signallers are manufactured.
9.3
Within four weeks from the approval date, Manufacturer shall submit one
reproducible and six copies of the approved drawings and specifications as listed
in 9.2 of this specification.
9.4
following :
9.5
a)
Test certificates as per clause 5.0 of this specification.
b)

instructions.
SPECIFICATION
FOR
SCRAPPER TRAP
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
D:\Technical Specifications & Standards\007 - Scrapper Trap - TS.doc
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SCRAPPER TRAP
REV-1
Page 1 of 10
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3.0
MATERIALS
4.0
5.0
6.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
7.0
8.0
GUARANTEE
9.0
SPARES
10.0
DOCUMENTATION
PREPARED BY
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
1.0
SCRAPPER TRAP
REV-1
Page 2 of 10
SCOPE
This specification covers the basic requirements for design, manufacture, inspection,
testing & supply of scrapper launching & receiving traps to be installed in pipeline
system transporting non-sour hydrocarbons in liquid or gaseous phase including
Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG). This specification does not cover scraper launching &
receiving trap for sour hydrocarbons (liquid/ gas) services as defined in NACE Std. MR01-75.
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
2.1
Reference has also been made in this specification to the latest edition of the following
codes, standards and specifications :
a)
ASME B 31.4
Pipeline Transportation System for Liquid

Hydrocarbons and Other Liquids
b)
ASME B 31.8
Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping System
c)
ASME B 16.5
Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanges Fittings
d)
ASME B16.9
Factory made Wrought Steel Butt Welding Fittings
e)
ASME B 16.11
Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and

Threaded
f)
ASME B 16.25
Butt-Welding Ends
g)
ASTM A370
Mechanical testing of steel products
h)
ASME Sec-VIII and IX :
Boiler and Pressure Vessels Codes.
i)
API 1104
Specification for Welding Pipeline and

Related Facilities
j)
MSS-SP-44
Specification for High Test Wrought Welding

Fittings.
k)
MSS-SP-75
Specification for High Test Wrought Welding

Fittings
l)
MSS-SP-97
Integrally Reinforced Forged Branch Outlet Fittings

Socket Welding Threaded and Butt Welding Ends
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SCRAPPER TRAP
m)
SSPC-VIS-1
REV-1
Page 3 of 10
Steel Structure Painting Council
In case of conflict between the requirements of this specification and the requirements
of above referred documents, the requirements of this specification shall govern.
3.0
MATERIALS
3.1
Materials and thicknesses of main components used in manufacture of traps shall be

indicated by Manufacturer and shall be suitable for service conditions indicated in the
data sheets and annexures. These shall be subject to approval by purchaser. The steel
used shall have a minimum SMYS of 35,000 psi.
3.2
Fully killed carbon steel shall be used.
3.3
Material of the ends to be field welded by purchaser shall have carbon equivalent less
than or equal to 0.45 based on check analysis, for each heat of steel, calculated
according to the following formula.
CE = C +
3.4
Mn
Cr + Mo + V
Ni + Cu
-------- + --------------------- + --------------6
5
15
For Scraper Traps, specified to be used for Gas service or High Vapour Pressure (HVP)
liquid service, Charpy V-notch test shall be conducted at 0C for each heat of steel used
in the manufacture of pressure containing parts of the traps. Test procedure shall
conform to ASTM A-370. The Charpy V-notch test specimens shall be taken in the
direction of principal grain flow and notched perpendicular to the original surface of the
plate or forging. The minimum average absorbed impact energy values of three full sized
specimens shall be as under, unless otherwise indicated in the Data sheets :Diameter
(inches)
Base Metal
(Joules)
Weld Metal and HAZ

(Joules)
For all size
27
27
The minimum impact energy value of any one specimen of the three specimens
analysed as above, shall not be less than 80% of the above mentioned average values.
For scrapper Traps, specified to be used for other hydrocarbon service, the Charpy Vnotch test requirements as stated above are not applicable.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
3.5
SCRAPPER TRAP
REV-1
Page 4 of 10
For Scraper Traps, specified to be used for Gas service or High Vapour Pressure (HVP)
liquid service, hardness test shall be carried out as per ASTM A370 for each heat of steel
used. A full thickness cross section shall be taken for this purpose and the maximum
hardness of the base material, weld metal and heat affected zone (HAZ) of all the
pressure containing parts shall not exceed 248 HV10. The maximum difference in
hardness of Base metal, Weld metal and Heat affected zone (HAZ) of pressure
containing parts of the traps shall be less than 80 points Vickers HV10.
For scrapper Traps, specified to be used for other hydrocarbon service, the hardness test
requirements as stated above are not applicable.
4.0
4.1
The cylindrical portion of the trap shall be designed as per design code and design factor
indicated in the data sheets. Quick end closure shall be designed as per sec. ASME Sec.
VIII, Div. 1 for design conditions indicated in data sheets. A corrosion allowance of 3
mm shall be considered in design of the traps. Quality of welding shall be such that weld
efficiency factor of 1.0 is achieved.
4.2
The trap shall be capable of handling instrumented pigs, model like Linalog 360 of AMF
Tuboscope or British gas magnetic inspection vehicle or equivalent and scraper pigs as
specified in scraper Trap data sheet.
4.3
The trap body and neck, diameter has been indicated in the data sheet. Trap length to
suit the purpose and thickness to meet the class rating shall be suggested by the
manufacturer and approved by the purchaser. Circumferential weld on scraper tarp
body and neck shall not be permitted.
4.4
Concentric or eccentric reducer, as indicated in data sheets, used in the manufacture of

traps shall conform to MSS-SP-75.
4.5
Vents and drains shall be provided on each trap. The trap shall be provided with a
suitable slope and the drain location shall be such that complete drainage of the trap is
possible. Sizes for vent and drain shall be as indicated in data sheet.
4.6
All branch connections shall be made by weldolets/ nippolet or by extrusions as indicated

in the data sheet. All weldolets shall confirm to MSS-SP-97 and nippolets shall be
manufacturers standard. The extruded opening shall be adequately heat treated and
stress relieved.
4.7
End connections of traps shall be flanged or butt welded as indicated in data sheet.
a)
Flanged ends, if specified shall have dimension as per ASME B16.5 for sizes upto
24" NB (excluding 22 NB) and as per ASME B16.47 / MSS-SP-44 for sizes 22 NB
and 26 NB and above. Flanges shall be as indicated in data sheets.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
b)
c)
4.8
SCRAPPER TRAP
REV-1
Page 5 of 10
Butt weld ends if specified shall have ends prepared as per ASME B16.25.
However, end preparation for butt welding ends having unequal thicknesses with
respect, to connecting pipe shall be as per ASME B31.4/ ASME B31.8 as
applicable.
The location & orientation of all nozzle connections shall be submitted for
purchaser's approval before manufacturing.
The quick opening end closure shall be of clamp ring or band lock type or equivalent
design. The closure shall also consist of a safety relief system allowing the opening only
when there is no pressure in the trap. Screwed type or plug-in type of end closures are
not acceptable. End closure shall be hand operated and operable by one operator. End
closures of size 24" and above shall be fitted with worm gear operator for the opening of
the closure.
Hinge of the closure shall be so designed that the weight of the end closure is fully
supported with out sagging.
4.9
Receiving traps shall be provided with a pig indicator in the middle of the neck and the
indicator shall conform to the specification issued for the purpose. Pig indicator shall be
suitable for bi-directional operation and shall have visual flag and manual reset. The
same shall also have provision for remote indication. REFER SPECIFICATION No.
MEC/S/05/62/48 and Pig Signaller Data Sheet.
4.10
Suitable handling system for inserting and retracting the scraper and instrumented pigs
from the trap shall be provided with each trap. Handling system shall consist of a
fabricated structural steel framework comprising a bench fitted with a purpose-designed
cradle for the pig. A pusher/ puller mechanism operated by a cable system employing a
hand cranked winch shall be mounted on the bench framework for inserting/ retracting
the pig from the trap. The bench frame should be suitable for bolting to the floor. All
parts of the handling system in contact with each other shall be of the anti spark type.
4.11
Fabricated steel supports, minimum two numbers at suitable spacing shall be provided
with traps for mounting on concrete blocks. These supports will not be subjected to
pipeline achorage forces. The material of support shall be compatible with trap material
for welding purposes. All welds shall be examined by magnetic particle method.
4.12
Completed assembly shall be stress relieved as per the provisions of the design codes.
4.13
All welds shall be made by welders and welding procedures qualified in accordance with
the provisions of ASME Sec. IX. The procedure qualification shall include impact test and
hardness test when required as per clause 3.4 & 3.5 of this specification and shall meet
the requirements as specified therein.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SCRAPPER TRAP
REV-1
Page 6 of 10
4.14
Repair by welding on parent metal is not allowed. Repair of welds shall be carried out
only after specific approval by purchaser's representative for each repair. The repair
welding shall be carried out by the welders and welding procedures duly qualified as per
ASME Section IX and records for each repair shall be maintained. The repair welding
procedure qualification shall include impact test and hardness test when required as per
clause 3.4 & 3.5 of this specification and shall meet the requirements as specified
therein.
4.15
The traps shall be equipped with a half internal removable filtering basket consisting of a
punched plate with a least five rows of drain holes.
4.16
The filtering basket shall slide on guides on wheels and in all cases the material of the
parts being in contact with each other shall be of the anti spark type.
4.17
The tolerance on internal diameter and out of roundness at the ends for the welding
end of the neck (at the end where connecting pipeline will be welded) shall be as per
applicable connected pipe specification as indicated in the data sheet.
5.0
5.1
The manufacturer shall perform all inspections and test as per the requirements of this
specification and the relevant codes prior to shipment at his works. Such inspections and
tests shall be, but not limited to the following :-
5.1.1
All trap shall be visually inspected.
5.1.2
Chemical composition and mechanical properties including hardness shall be checked for
each heat of steel used.
5.1.3
Dimensional check shall be carried out as per the approved drawings.
5.1.4
Hydrostatic test shall be conducted for all scraper traps complete in all respects including
mounting of pig indicators at a pressure equal to 1.5 times the design pressure. The test
pressure shall be held for a minimum period of one hour.
5.1.5
All butt welds shall be 100% radiographically inspected. Procedure and acceptance
criteria shall be as per API 1104.
5.1.6
Ultrasonic or magnetic particle inspection shall be carried out on all welds which in
Purchaser's Representative's opinion can not be radiographically inspected. Procedure
and acceptance criteria shall be as per ASME Sec. VIII, Appendix-U and VI respectively.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SCRAPPER TRAP
REV-1
Page 7 of 10
5.1.7
All finished wrought weld shall be 100% ultrasonically inspected for lamination type
defects for a distance of 50mm from the end. Any lamination larger than 6.35 mm shall
not be acceptable.
5.1.8
All forgings shall be wet magnetic particle examined on 100% of the forged surfaces.
Method and acceptance shall comply with MSS-SP-53.
5.1.9
A minimum of two closing and opening cycles shall be performed and correct operation
of both quick opening closure and safety system shall be ascertained.
5.2
Purchaser's Representative reserves the right to perform stage wise inspection and
witness tests including hydrostatic test, as indicated in specification at manufacturers
works prior to shipment. Manufacturer shall give reasonable notice of time & shall
provide without charge reasonable access and facilities required for inspection, to the
purchaser's representative.
Inspection and tests performed / witnessed by Purchaser's Representative shall in no
way relieve the Manufacturer's obligation of specific integrity of the scraper traps.
Manufacturer's equipment shall be subject to examination and approval by purchaser to
ensure proper fabrication and testing of traps.
6.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
Manufacturer shall furnish the following certificates
a)
Test certificates relevant to the chemical and Mechanical properties including

Hardness of the materials used for manufacture of trap as per relevant standards
and this specification.
b)
Hydrostatic test certificates.
c)
Test reports on radiography, ultrasonic inspection and magnetic particle

examination.
d)
Test reports on heat treatment carried out, if any.
The certificate shall be considered valid only when signed by purchasers representative.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SCRAPPER TRAP
REV-1
Page 8 of 10
7.0
7.1
After all inspection and test required have been carried out, all external surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned to remove grease, dust and rust. Surface preparation shall be carried
out by shot blasting to SP-6 in accordance with "Steel Structures Painting Council Visual
Standard - SSPC-VIS-1". Machined parts shall be coated with anti-rust removable paint
and non machined parts shall be applied with two coats of protective paint.
Manufactures shall indicate the type of paint used in the drawings submitted for
approval.
7.2
Marking shall be done on a stainless steel plate and affixed to the body by means of
corrosion resistant fasteners. Marking shall include the following :a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
Manufacturer's Name
Trap/ Neck Diameter, Thickness
Material
ASME Class Rating
Tag Number
Design Pressure
Design Temperature
Test Pressure
Design Factor
Year of Manufacture
Empty weight of the trap assembly.
7.3
Before shipment, traps shall be properly packed against damage during

transportation. All machined surface subject to corrosion during transit shall be well
protected by coat of grease or other suitable material. All traps shall be provided with
suitable protectors, for flange faces, securely attached to the traps. Bevel ends shall
be protected with metallic or high impact plastic bevel protectors.
7.4
Only those traps, which have been inspected and certified by the purchasers
inspector shall be supplied.
8.0
GUARANTEE
8.1
Manufacturer shall guarantee that the trap alongwith accessories is in compliance with
the requirements of this specification for materials and workmanship. Manufacturer shall
replace or repair all parts which should result defective due to inadequate design or the
workmanship. In case the defect can not be eliminated, Manufacturer shall replace the
trap without any delay. Any defect occurring within the time period specified elsewhere
shall be repaired making all necessary modifications and repair of defective parts free of
charge to the purchaser.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SCRAPPER TRAP
REV-1
Page 9 of 10
9.0
SPARES
9.1
Manufacturer shall furnish list of recommended spares and accessories for Scrapper
Traps required during start up and commissioning. As a minimum, the commissioning
spares shall include 200% extra consumable spares viz. gaskets/ o-rings/ seals etc. for
each trap. Cost of such spares shall be included by the Manufacturer in the item rates
indicated in Purchase Requisition.
9.2
Manufacturer shall furnish separately a list of recommended spares and accessories

required for two years of normal operation and maintenance of Scraper Traps.
10.0
DOCUMENTATION
10.1
Manufacturer shall furnish at the time of bidding, the following documents:-
10.2
a)
General arrangement drawing of scraper trap, pig signallers, quick opening end
closure with overall dimensions.
b)
Clause wise list of deviations from this specification, if any listed at one place in
the document.
c)
Reference list of similar supplies for the past five years including project, client
year of supply & contact person.
d)
Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) enclosed with this tender duly signed, stamped
and accepted.
Within two weeks of placement of order, the manufacturer shall submit four copies of,
but not limited to, the following drawings, documents and specifications for approval.
a)
Calculations according to the relevant codes for the body including branch
connections and quick end closures.
b)
Trap assembly and sectional drawings showing all parts with materials and
dimensions.
c)
Support Assembly Drawing.
d)
Arrangement & details of foundation bolts for pig handling and lifting system,
where applicable.
e)
Welding procedure and method of manufacture.
MECON LIMITED
REGD. OFF RANCHI
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
SCRAPPER TRAP
REV-1
Page 10 of 10
Once the above said documents have been approved by the Purchaser, any changes in
design, material and method of manufacturer shall be notified to the Purchaser, whose
approval in writing of all changes shall be obtained before the traps are manufactured.
10.3
Within four weeks from the approval date Manufacturer shall submit one reproducible
and six copies of all approved drawings, documents and specification as listed in clause
10.4
Prior to shipment, the manufacturer shall submit one reproducible and six copies of the
following :
10.5
a)
Test certificate as listed in clause 6.0 of this specification.
b)
Manual for installation, erection instructions, maintenance and operations

instruction.

MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
FOR
PLUG VALVES
(NB 2)
SPECIFICATION NO.: MEC/TS/05/62/003, Rev-2
D:\old data\FATEH\MP Region\Kailaras\Tender RFQ\Plug Valves\Plug Valves - 003 - TS-R2.doc
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
PLUG VALVES
REV-2
Page 1 of 13
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
Page No.
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3.0
MATERIALS & TEST PROCEDURES
4.0
DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION
5.0
INSPECTION & TESTS
6.0
EXTENT OF INSPECTION & TESTING
7.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
8.0
PAINTING, MARKING & SHIPMENT
10
9.0
SPARES & ACCESSORIES
10
10.0
DOCUMENTATION
11
11.0
GUARANTEE
12
PREPARED BY :
CHECKED BY :
APPROVED BY :
Gurdeep Singh
A.K. Sarkar
A.K. Johri
Date
Date
Date
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
PLUG VALVES
1.0
REV-2
Page 2 of 13
SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum requirements for design, manufacture and supply
of carbon steel plug valves of size DN 50mm (2") and above and ANSI Class 150# thru
900# for use in onshore pipeline systems handling non sour hydrocarbons in liquid
phase or gaseous phase including Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG).
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
2.1
All valves shall be manufactured and supplied in accordance with the Twenty Second
Edition, January, 2002, or the latest edition of American Petroleum Institute (API)
Specification 6D, twenty first edition, 1994 including supplement 1 & 2 thereof with
additions and modifications as indicated in the following sections of this specification.
2.2
Reference has also been made in this specification to the latest edition of the following
Codes, Standards and Specifications :
ASME B 16.5
Pipe flanges and flanged fittings
ASME B 16.25
Buttwelding ends
ASME B 16.34
Valves Flanged, threaded and welding end
ASME B16.47
Large diameter steel flanges
ASME B 31.3
Chemical & process plant piping system
ASME B 31.4
Liquid transportation systems for hydrocarbons and

other liquids
ASME B 31.8
Gas transmission and distribution piping systems
ASME Sec.VIII
Boiler and pressure vessel code
ASTM A 370
Standard test methods and definitions for mechanical

testing of steel products
ASTM B 733
Autocatalytic nickel phosphorous coating on metals
API 6FA
Fire test for valves
API 1104
Welding of pipelines and related facilities
BS:6755 (Part-II)
Testing of valves Specification for fire type - testing

requirements
MSS-SP-6
Standard finishes for contact faces of pipe flanges and

connecting-end flanges of valves and fittings
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
PLUG VALVES
2.3
REV-2
Page 3 of 13
MSS-SP-44
Steel pipeline flanges
SSPC-VIS-1
Steel structures painting council-visual standard
In case of conflict between the requirements of this specification, API 6D and the
Codes, Standards and Specifications referred in clause 2.2 above, the requirements of
this specification shall govern. Order of precedence shall be as follows :
Data Sheets
This Specification
API 6D Specification
Other Referred Codes & Standards
Manufacturers Standard
3.0
MATERIALS & TEST PROCEDURES
3.1
Material for major components of the valves shall be as indicated in Valve Data Sheet.
Other components shall be as per Manufacturer's standard which will be subject to
approval by Purchaser.
3.2
Carbon steel used for the manufacture of valves shall be fully killed.
3.3
Chemical composition (check analysis) of valve end connection which are subject to
further welding by Purchaser shall meet the following requirements for each heat of
steel used:
a)
Carbon
:
0.22% (max.)
b)
Manganese
:
1.70 % (max.)
c)
Silicon
:
0.55 % (max.)
d)
Phosphorus
:
0.030 % (max.)
e)
Sulphur
:
0.030 % (max.)
Total percentage of Vanadium, Niobium and Titanium shall not exceed 0.20. Residual
elements shall not exceed the following limits :
a)
Nitrogen
:
0.019 %
b)
Nickel
:
0.30 %
c)
Copper
:
0.20 %
d)
Aluminum
:
0.070 %
e)
Chromium
:
0.15 %
f)
Molybdenum
:
0.05 %
Carbon equivalent (CE) as calculated by the following shall not exceed 0.45%.
CE = C
Mn
Cr + Mo + V
Ni + Cu
+ -------- + ---------------------- + --------------6
5
15
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
3.4
FOR
PLUG VALVES
REV-2
Page 4 of 13
For valves specified for Gas Service or high vapour pressure liquid service, charpy VNotch test on each heat of base material shall be conducted as per API 6D, for all
pressure containing parts such as body, end flanges and welding ends as well as the
bolting material for pressure containing parts. Unless specified otherwise in Valve Data
Sheets, the Charpy impact test shall be conducted at 0C. The Charpy impact test
specimen shall be taken in the direction of principal grain flow and notched
perpendicular to the original surface of plate or forging.
Unless specified otherwise in Valve Data Sheets, the minimum average absorbed
energy per set of three specimens shall be 27 J with an individual minimum per
specimen of 22 J.
3.5
For valves specified for Gas Service or high vapour pressure liquid service, the hardness
of base material of body and principal parts of the valve such as plug, stem, etc., shall
not exceed 22 RC.
3.6
Plug for valve size DN 200mm (8) and above or as specified in Valve Data Sheets shall
have Electroless Nickel Plating (ENP) or equivalent. The hardness of plating shall be
minimum 50 RC. Manufacturer shall ensure that the adhesive strength of plating is
sufficient so as to prevent peeling of plating during operation of the valve.
3.7
All process-wetted parts, metallic and non-metallic, shall be suitable for the fluids and
service specified by the Purchaser. The service gas composition when applicable shall
be as given in Annexure-I.
4.0
4.1
The Manufacturer shall have a valid license to use API 6D monogram for manufacture
of Plug Valves.
4.2
Valve pattern shall be short, regular or venturi as specified in the following table:
Class
150
300
600
900
Size Range, NB mm (inch)

50-100 (2-4)
150-300 (6-12)
350 (14) & above
50-100 (2-4)
150-250 (6-10)
300 (12) & above
50-250 (2-10)
300 (12) & above
50-250 (2-10)
300 (12) & above
Pattern
Short
Regular
Venturi
Short
Regular
Venturi
Regular
Venturi
Regular
Venturi
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
PLUG VALVES
REV-2
Page 5 of 13
4.3
Valve shall have an inherent feature using line pressure to ensure that the line pressure
cannot cause taper locking of the plug/ plug movement into taper i.e. valves shall be of
pressure balanced design.
4.4
Cover shall be bolted to the body and screwed connections are not acceptable.
4.5
Soft seats to achieve a seal between plug and body are not permitted.
4.6
All valves shall have provisions for secondary sealant injection under full line pressure
for seat and stem seals. Sealant injection points shall be provided with a ball type check
valve or needle valve to replace the sealant injection fitting under full line pressure.
4.7
Valves shall have vent and drain connections as per API 6D.
4.8
When specified in the Valve Data Sheet, valves shall be designed to withstand a
sustained internal vacuum of at least one milli-bar in both open and closed position.
4.9
Valve design shall ensure repair of gland packing under full line pressure.
4.10
a)
Valve ends shall be either flanged or butt welded or one end flanged and one end butt
welded as indicated in Valve Data Sheet. Flanges of the flanged end cast/ forged body
valves shall be integrally cast/forged with the body of valve. Face-to-face/ end-to-end
dimensions shall conform to API 6D.
b)
Flanged end shall have dimensions as per ASME B16.5 for valve sizes upto DN 600mm
(24 inches) excluding DN 550mm (22 inches) and as per MSS-SP-44 for valve sizes DN
550mm (22 inches) & for DN 650mm (26 inches) and above. Flange face shall be either
raised face or ring joint type as indicated in Valve Data Sheet. Flange face finish shall be
serrated or smooth as indicated in Valve Data Sheet. Smooth finish when specified shall
be 125 to 200 AARH. In case of RTJ flanges, the groove hardness shall be minimum
140 BHN.
c)
Butt weld end preparation shall be as per ASME B16.25. The thickness of the pipe to
which the valve has to be welded shall be as indicated in Valve Data Sheet. Valves
shall be without transition pups. In case significant difference exists between
thickness of welding ends of valve and connecting pipe, the welding ends of valve
shall have bevel preparation as per ASME B31.4 or ASME B31.8, as applicable.
4.11
Valves shall be provided with position indicator and stops at the fully open and fully
closed positions.
4.12
Valves of size DN 200mm (8) and above shall be equipped with lifting lugs. Tapped
holes and eye bolts shall not be used for lifting lugs.
4.13
Valves shall have locking devices to be locked either in full open or full close position
when indicated in the Valve Data Sheets. Locking devices shall be permanently attached
to the valve operator and shall not interfere with operation of the valve.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
PLUG VALVES
REV-2
Page 6 of 13
4.14
Valves shall be of fire safe design as per BS:6755 (Part-II)/ API 6FA, if indicated in
Valve Data Sheet.
4.15
Valves shall be suitable for either buried or above ground installation as indicated in the
Valve Data Sheet.
4.16
Valves with stem extension, when indicated in Valve Data Sheet shall have following
provisions :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
4.17
Valves provided with stem extension shall have water proof outer casing. Length
of stem extension shall be as indicated in the Valve Data Sheet. The length
indicated corresponds to the distance between the centreline of the valve
opening and the top of the mounting flange for valve operating device (gear
operator/ power actuator as applicable).
Vent and drain connections shall be terminated adjacent to the valve operator
by means of suitable piping anchored to the valve body. Pipe used shall be API
5L Gr. B/ ASTM A106 Gr. B, with Sch. 160. Fittings shall be ASTM A105/ ASTM
A 234 Gr. WPB, Socket Welded, ANSI class 6000.
Sealant injection lines shall be extended and terminated adjacent to the valve
operator in manner as indicated in (b) above.
Stem extension and stem housing design shall be such that the complete
assembly will form a rigid unit giving a positive drive under all conditions with no
possibility of free movements between valve body stem extension or its
operator.
Outer casing of stem extension shall have 3/8" or " NPT plugs at the top and
bottom, for draining and filling with oil to prevent internal corrosion.
Operating Devices
a)
Valves shall have a power actuator or manual operator as indicated in the

Valve Data Sheet. Manual operated valves of size < DN 100mm (4) shall be
wrench operated and valves of sizes > DN 150mm (6") shall be gear operated.
Each wrench operated valve shall be supplied with wrench. Valve design shall be
such that damage due to malfunctioning of the operator or its controls will only
occur in the operator gear train or power cylinder and damaged parts can be
replaced without the bonnet being removed.
b)
The power actuator shall be in accordance with the specification issued for the
purpose and as indicated in the valve and actuator data sheet. Operating time
shall be as indicated in valve data sheet. Valve operating time shall correspond
to full close to full open / full open to full close under maximum differential
pressure corresponding to the valve rating. For actuated valves, the actuator
torque shall be atleast 1.25 times the maximum torque required to operate the
valve under maximum differential pressure corresponding to the valve class
rating.
c)
Operating device shall be designed for easy operation of valve under maximum
differential pressure corresponding to the valve rating.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
PLUG VALVES
REV-2
Page 7 of 13
d)
For manual operation of all valves, the diameter of the hand wheel or the length
of operating lever shall be such that under the maximum differential pressure,
the total force required to operate the valve does not exceed 350 N.
Manufacturer shall also indicate the number of turns of hand wheel (in case of
gear operator), required to operate the valve from full open to full close
position.
e)
Direction of operation of hand wheel or wrench shall be in clock-wise direction

while closing the valve. Hand wheels shall not have protruding spokes.
f)
Gear operators, if specified, shall have a self locking provision and shall be fully
encased in waterproof/ dustproof/ weatherproof/ splashproof enclosure and
shall be filled with suitable grease.
4.18
Repair by welding is not permitted for fabricated and forged body valves. However
repair by welding as per ASME B16.34 is permitted for cast body valves. Repair shall be
carried out before any heat treatment of casting is done. Repair welding procedure
qualification shall also include impact test and hardness test when required as per
Clause 3.4 and 3.6 of this specification and shall meet the requirements as specified
therein.
4.19
The tolerance on internal diameter and out of roundness at the ends for welded ends
valves shall be as per connected pipe specification as indicated in the Valve Data Sheet.
4.20
Valve stem shall be capable of withstanding the maximum operating torque required to
operate the valve against the maximum differential pressure corresponding to
applicable class rating. The combined stress shall not exceed the maximum allowable
stresses specified in ASME section VIII, Division-1.
For Power Actuated Valves, the valve stem shall be designed for maximum output
torque of the selected power actuator (including gear box, if any) at the valves stem.
5.0
INSPECTION & TESTS
5.1
The Manufacturer shall perform all inspection and tests as per the requirements of this
specification and the relevant codes, prior to shipment at his works. Such inspection
and tests shall be, but not limited to, the following :
5.1.1
All valves shall be visually inspected.
5.1.2
Dimensional check shall be carried out as per the Purchaser approved drawings.
5.1.3
Chemical composition and mechanical properties shall be checked as per relevant

material standards and this specification, for each heat of steel used.
5.1.4
a)
Non-destructive examination of individual valve material and component

consisting of but not limited to castings, forgings, plates and assembly welds
shall be carried out by the Manufacturer.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
PLUG VALVES
b)
REV-2
Page 8 of 13
Valves castings shall be radiographically examined at the cover and body

portion, seat location, flanged body ends and circumference of ends to be field
welded. Procedure and acceptance criteria shall be as per ASME B16.34. The
extent of radiography shall be as follows :
ANSI Class 150
All Sizes
Nil
ANSI Class 300
DN 400mm (16")
DN 450mm (18")
Nil
100%
ANSI Class 600

and above
All Sizes
100%
All castings shall be wet magnetic particle inspected 100 % of the internal
surfaces. Method and acceptance shall comply with ASME B16.34.
c)
Valve forgings shall be examined by ultrasonic method. Inspection procedure

and acceptance criteria shall be as per Annexure E of ASME B16.34.
5.1.5
Areas which, in Purchaser's Inspectors opinion, cannot be inspected by radiographic

methods shall be checked by ultrasonic or magnetic particle methods and acceptance
criteria shall be as per ASME Sec-VIII, Division I, Appendix 12 and Appendix 6
respectively.
5.1.6
a)
b)
c)
Weld ends of all cast valves shall be 100% radiographically examined and
acceptance criteria shall be as per ASME B16.34.
After final machining all bevel surfaces shall be inspected by dye penetrant, or
wet magnetic particle methods. Any defects longer than 6.35mm shall be
rejected and also defects between 6.35mm and 1.59mm that are separated by a
distance less than 50 times their greatest length. Weld repair of bevel surface is
not permitted. Rejectable defects must be removed.
All finished wrought weld ends subject to welding in the field shall be 100%
ultrasonically tested for lamination type defects for a distance of 50mm from the
end. Laminations shall not be acceptable.
5.1.7
All valves shall be tested in compliance with the requirements of API 6D. Hydrostatic
shell testing shall ensure that the whole of the shell is subjected to the test pressure. If
necessary, the empty shell shall be pressure tested prior to assembly of the plug. The
drain, vent and sealant lines shall be either included in the hydrostatic shell test or
tested independently. No leakage is permissible during hydrostatic testing.
5.1.8
A supplementary air seat test as per API 6D shall be carried out for all valves. No
leakage is allowed. Test pressure shall be held for at least 15 minutes.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
5.1.9
FOR
PLUG VALVES
REV-2
Page 9 of 13
Manufacturer who intends bidding must submit at bid stage, certificate and report for
successful fire safe tests for all types of valves in accordance with BS:6755 (Part-II)/
API 6FA, as applicable in Valve Data Sheet.
Failure to comply with the requirement shall be a cause of rejection of the offer.
5.1.10
Valve shall be subjected to Operational Torque Test as per supplementary test

requirement of API 6D under hydraulic pressure equal to the maximum differential
pressure corresponding to the valve rating. The maximum handwheel force shall not
exceed 350 N.
5.1.11
Power actuated valves shall be tested after assembly at the valve Manufacturer's works.
Actuator shall be capable to allow minimum five consecutive "opening" and "closing"
cycles. To achieve this, the Manufacturer shall provide "closing" and "opening"
operations. This test shall be conducted on one valve out of a lot of five valves of the
same size, rating and actuator type. In case the test result dose not meet the
requirements, retesting/ rejection of the lot shall be as decided by Purchaser's
Inspector.
The actuator shall be adjusted to ensure that opening and closing time is within the
limits stated in Actuator Data Sheet issued for the purpose.
The hand operator installed on the actuator shall also be checked after the cyclic
testing, for satisfactory manual over-ride performance.
5.2
Purchaser reserves the right to perform stagewise inspection and witness tests as
indicated in para 5.1 at Manufacturer's works prior to shipment. Manufacturer shall give
reasonable access and facilities required for inspection to Purchaser's Inspector.
Purchaser reserves the right to request additional testing at any time to confirm or
further investigate a suspected fault. If the suspected fault is confirmed, the cost
incurred shall be to Manufacturer's account.
In no case shall any action of Purchaser or his representative relieve the Manufacturer
of his responsibility for material, design, quality or operation of valves.
Inspection and tests performed/ witnessed by the Purchaser's Inspector shall in no way
relieve the Manufacturer's obligation to perform the required inspection and tests.
6.0
EXTENT OF INSPECTION & TESTING
6.1
Purchaser's Inspector shall perform inspection and witness test on all valves as
indicated in the Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) attached with this specification.
6.2
The hydrostatic testing and cyclic opening and closing of the valves with the operator
shall be witnessed by Purchaser's Inspector.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
PLUG VALVES
7.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
7.1
Manufacturer shall submit the following certificates :
REV-2
Page 10 of 13
a)
Mill test certificates relevant to the chemical analysis and mechanical properties
of the materials used for valve construction as per the relevant standards.
b)
Test certificates on hydrostatic and pneumatic test complete with records of

timing and pressure of each test.
c)
Test reports conforming to clause 5.1.9 of this specification, if applicable.
d)
Test reports on radiographic and ultrasonic inspection.
e)
Test reports on operation of valves conforming to clause 5.1.10 and 5.1.11 of

this specification.
f)
All other test reports and certificates as required by API 6D and this
specification.
The certificates shall be valid only when signed by Purchaser's Inspector. Only those
valves which have been certified by Purchasers Inspector shall be dispatched from
Manufacturer's works.
8.0
PAINTING, MARKING & SHIPMENT
8.1
Valve surface shall be thoroughly cleaned, freed from rust and grease and applied with
sufficient coats of corrosion resistant paint. Surface preparation shall be carried out by
shot blasting to SP 6 in accordance with "Steel Structures Painting Council - Visual
Standard - SSPC-VIS-1". For the valves to be installed underground, when indicated in
Valve Data Sheet, external surfaces of the buried portion of valves shall be painted with
three coats of suitable coal tar epoxy resin with a minimum dry film thickness of 300
microns.
8.2
Manufacturer shall indicate the type of corrosion resistant paint used, in the drawings
submitted for approval.
8.3
All valves shall be marked as per API 6D. The units of marking shall be metric except
Nominal Diameter which shall be in inches. Marking shall be done by die-stamping on
the bonnet or on the housing. However for buried valves the marking shall be done on
the above ground portion of the stem housing only.
8.4
Valve ends shall be suitably protected to avoid any damage during transit. All threaded
and machined surfaces subject to corrosion shall be well protected by a coat of grease
or other suitable material. All valves shall be provided with suitable protectors, for
flange faces, securely attached to the valves. Bevel ends shall be protected with metallic
bevel protectors.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
PLUG VALVES
REV-2
Page 11 of 13
8.5
All sealant lines and other cavities of the valves shall be filled with sealant before
shipment.
8.6
Packaging and shipping instructions shall be as per API 6D.
8.7
Packages shall be marked legibly, with suitable marking ink, the following.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Order Number
Manufacturer's Name
Valve Size and Rating
Tag Number
Serial Number
9.0
SPARES & ACCESSORIES
9.1
Manufacturer shall recommend and quote separately the spares for valves required for
commissioning and two years of normal operation. List of such spares without price
shall be indicated alongwith technical bid and separately with price.
9.2
Manufacturer shall recommend and quote unit price separately for the accessories (like
wrench, sealant injector, etc.), sealant and special tools required for maintenance of
valves.
10.0
DOCUMENTATION
10.1
At the time of bidding, the bidder shall submit the following documents :
a)
General arrangement/ assembly drawings showing all features and relative

positions & sizes of vents, drains, gear box & other external parts together with
overall dimensions.
b)
Sectional drawing showing major parts with reference numbers and material
specification.
c)
Reference list of similar plug valves manufactured and supplied in last five years,
indicating all relevant details including project, year, client, location, size rating,
service, etc.
d)
Torque curves for the power actuated valves alongwith break torque and
maximum allowable stem torque. In addition, sizing criteria and torque
calculations shall also be submitted for power actuated valves.
e)
Descriptive technical catalogues of the Manufacturer.
f)
Copy of valid API 6D certificate, wherever applicable.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
PLUG VALVES
REV-2
Page 12 of 13
g)
Details of support foot, including dimensions and distance from valve centre
line to bottom of support foot.
h)
Quality Assurance Plan enclosed with this tender duly signed, stamped and
accepted.
IMPORTANT
The drawings to be submitted alongwith the bid shall be in total compliance
with the requirement of technical specification and data sheets of the valves
with no exception & deviation.
10.2
Within two weeks of placement of order, the manufacturer shall submit six copies of,
but not limited to, the following drawings, documents and specifications for approval :
a)
Design drawings and relevant calculations for pressure containing parts and
other principle parts.
b)
Detailed sectional arrangement drawing showing all parts with reference

numbers and materials specification.
c)
Assembly drawings with overall dimensions & clearances required and showing
all features. Drawing shall also indicate the numbers of turns of handwheel (in
case of gear operator) required for operating the valve from full open to full
close position and the painting scheme.
d)
Welding, heat treatment, testing and quality control procedures.
e)
Details of corrosion resistant paint to be applied on the valves.
f)
Design calculation for pressure containing parts.
Manufacture of valves shall commence only after approval of the above documents.
Once approval has been given by Purchaser, any change in design, material and
method of manufacture shall be notified to the Purchaser, whose approval in writing for
all changes shall be obtained before the valves are manufactured.
10.3
Within 30 days from the approval date, Manufacturer shall submit one reproducible and
six copies of the approved drawings, documents and specification as listed in clause
10.4
following :a)
b)
instructions, including a list of recommended spares for the valves.
10.5
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
PLUG VALVES
REV-2
Page 13 of 13
11.0
GUARANTEE
11.1
Manufacturer shall guarantee that the materials and machining of valves and fittings
comply with the requirements in this specification and in the Purchase Order.
11.2
Manufacturer is bound to replace or repair all valve parts which should result defective
due to inadequate engineering or to the quality of materials and machining.
11.3
If valve defect or malfunctioning cannot be eliminated, Manufacturer shall replace the

valve without delay.
11.4
Any defect occurring during the period of Guarantee shall be attended to by making all
necessary modifications and repair of defective parts free of charge to the Purchaser as
per the relevant clause of the bid document.
11.5

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
FOR
CHECK VALVES
D:\old data\FATEH\MP Region\Kailaras\Tender RFQ\Check Valve\Check Valves - 004 - TS-R2.doc
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
CHECK VALVES
REV-2
Page 1 of 8
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3.0
MATERIALS
4.0
5.0
6.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
7.0
8.0
9.0
DOCUMENTATION
10.0
GUARANTEE
PREPARED BY
Page No.
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
1.0
FOR
CHECK VALVES
REV-2
Page 2 of 8
SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum requirements for design, manufacture
and supply of carbon steel check valves of size DN 50mm (2) and above and
ANSI class 150, 300 and 600 , for use in onshore pipeline systems handling
non-sour hydrocarbons in liquid phase or gaseous phase including Liquefied
Petroleum Gas (LPG).
2.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
2.1
All valves shall be manufactured and supplied in accordance with the latest
edition of American Petroleum Institute (API) Specification 6D or 594 or British
Standard BS:1868, with additions and modifications as indicated in the
following sections of this specification.
For Contractual purpose, the edition in force at the time of floating of the
enquiry shall be termed as latest edition.
3.0
MATERIALS
3.1
Material for major components of the valves shall be as indicated in Valve Data
Sheet. Other components shall be as per Manufacturers standards which will
be subject to approval by Purchaser.
3.2
3.3
The Carbon Equivalent (CE) of valve end connections which are subject to
further field welding by Purchaser, shall not exceed 0.45% (as calculated by
the following formula) on check analysis for each heat of steel used :
CE = C
3.4
Mn
Cr + Mo + V
Ni + Cu
+ -------- + ---------------------- + --------------6
5
15
Charpy V-Notch test on each heat of base material shall be conducted as per
API 6D, clause 7.5, for all pressure containing parts such as body, end flanges
and welding ends as well as bolting material for pressure containing parts.
Unless specified otherwise, the Charpy impact test shall be conducted at 0C.
The Charpy impact test specimen shall be taken in the direction of principal
grain flow and notched perpendicular to the original surface of plate or forging.
The minimum average absorbed energy per set of three specimens shall
be 27 J with an individual minimum per specimen of 22 J. No specimen shall
exhibit less than 80 percent shear area.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
CHECK VALVES
REV-2
Page 3 of 8
3.5
All process wetted parts, metallic and non-metallic, shall be suitable for the
fluids and service specified by the Purchaser.
4.0
4.1
Following types of check valves, meeting the requirements of applicable

standards (refer clause 2.1 of this specification) are acceptable :
a)
b)
c)
Swing check valve

Dual plate check valve
Axial flow (Nozzle) check valve
Valve design shall be suitable for the service conditions indicated in Valve Data
Sheet. Corrosion allowance indicated in Valve Data Sheet shall be considered in
valve design.
4.2
In case of swing check valves, the disc hinge shall be mounted on the valve
body and shall not be attached to the valve body cover. Valve body cover joint
shall be of bolted design. Screwed covers shall not be used.
4.3
Valves shall be provided with non-renewable integral type seats as indicated in

Valve Data Sheet. Non-renewable seats shall be of a design which does not
required renewal over the design life of the valve.
4.4
Valves shall be provided with drain connection as per the Manufacturers

standard. Drain tapping shall be provided in a position suitable to completely
drain the valve with valve in horizontal position.
4.5
Valve ends shall be either flanged or butt welded or one end flanged and one
end butt welded as indicated in Valve Data Sheet. Flanged end shall have
dimensions as per ASME B16.5 for sizes upto DN 400mm (16). Flanges of the
flanged end cast body valves shall be integrally cast with the body of the
valve.
4.6
Butt weld end preparation shall be as per ANSI B16.25. The thickness of the
pipe to which the valve has to be welded shall be as indicated in Valve Data
Sheet. Valves shall be without transition pups. In case difference exists
between thickness of valve neck end and connecting pipe, the bevel end of
valve shall be prepared as per ANSI B31.8 or ANSI B31.4, as applicable.
4.7
Valves of size DN 200mm (8) and above shall be equipped with lifting lugs.
Tapped holes and eye bolts shall not be used for lifting lugs.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
CHECK VALVES
REV-2
Page 4 of 8
4.8
An arrow indicating the direction of flow shall be embossed or cast on the body
of all valves.
4.9

accordance with the provisions of ASME Section IX. The welding and repair
welding procedure qualification shall include impact test and shall meet the
requirements of clause 3.4 of this specification.
4.10
Repair by welding is permitted for cast body valves subject to written approval
by Purchaser and shall be carried out as per ANSI B16.34. Repair shall be
carried out before any heat treatment of casting is done.
5.0
5.1
The Manufacturer shall perform all inspection and tests as per the requirements
of this specification and the relevant codes, prior to shipment at his works. Such
inspection and tests shall be, but not limited to, the following :
5.1.1
All valves shall be visually inspected.
5.1.2
Dimensional check on all valves shall be carried out as per the Purchaser
approved drawings.
5.1.3
Chemical compositions and mechanical properties shall be checked as per

relevant material standards and this specification, for each heat of steel used.
5.1.4
a)
Where applicable, the body castings of valves shall be radiographically

examined on 100% of the surface of critical areas as per ANSI B16.34.
Procedure and acceptance criteria shall be as per ANSI B16.34.
b)
Where applicable, valve body made by forging and plate components

shall be ultrasonically examined in accordance with procedure and
acceptance standard of Annexure E of ANSI B16.34.
c)
The extent of radiography/ ultrasonic examination shall be as follows :

ANSI class 150
All sizes
ANSI class 300
< DN 400mm (16) > DN 450mm (18) -
Nil
100%
ANSI class 600
All sizes
100%
Nil
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
CHECK VALVES
REV-2
Page 5 of 8
5.1.5
All valves shall be tested in compliance with the requirements of applicable

standard (refer clause 2.0).
5.2
Purchaser reserves the right to perform stage-wise inspection and witness tests
as indicated in clause 5.1 above at Manufacturers works prior to shipment.
Manufacturer shall give reasonable access and facilities required for inspection to
the Purchasers Inspector.
Purchaser reserves the right to require additional testing at any time to confirm
or further investigate a suspected fault. The cost incurred shall be to
Manufacturers account.
In no case shall any action of Purchaser or its Inspector relieve the Manufacturer
of his responsibility for material, design, quality or operation of valves.
Inspection and tests performed/ witnessed by the Purchasers Inspector shall in
no way relieve the Manufacturers obligation to perform the required inspection
and tests.
6.0
TEST CERTIFICATES
Manufacturer shall submit the following certificates :
a)
Mill test certificates relevant to the chemical analysis and mechanical

properties of the materials used for the valve construction as per the
relevant standards.
b)
Hydrostatic test certificates complete with records of timing and pressure

of each test.
c)
Test reports of radiograph and ultrasonic inspection, as applicable.
d)
All other test reports and certificates as required by applicable standard

and this specification.
The certificates shall be valid only when signed by Purchasers Inspector. Only
those valves which have been certified by Purchasers Inspector shall be
despatched from Manufacturers works.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
CHECK VALVES
REV-2
Page 6 of 8
7.0
7.1
Valve surface shall be thoroughly cleaned, freed from rust and grease and
applied with sufficient coats of corrosion resistant paint. Surface preparation
shall be carried out by shot blasting to SP-6 in accordance with Steel Structures
Painting Council Visual Standard SSPC-VIS-1.
7.2
All valves shall be marked as per applicable standard. The units of marking shall
be metric except nominal diameter which shall be in inches.
7.3
Valve ends shall be suitably protected to avoid any damage during transit. All
threaded and machined surfaces subject to corrosion shall be well protected by
a coat of grease or other suitable material. All valves shall be provided with
suitable protectors for flange faces, securely attached to the valves.
7.4
Packaging and shipping instructions shall be as per applicable standard.
7.5
On packages, the following shall be marked legibly with suitable marking ink:
a)
Order Number
b)
Manufacturers Name
c)
Valve Size and Rating
d)
Tag Number
8.0
8.1
Manufacturer shall recommend and quote separately the spares for valves
required for commissioning and two years of normal operation.
9.0
DOCUMENTATION
9.1
At the time of bidding, Manufacturer shall submit the following documents :

a)
General arrangement drawings showing all features together with overall

dimensions and actual valve bore size.
b)
Sectional drawing showing major parts with reference numbers and

material specification.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
CHECK VALVES
9.2
REV-2
Page 7 of 8
c)
Details of corrosion resistant paint proposed to be applied.
d)
Reference list of similar supplies of check valves, including project, year,

client, location, size, rating, services, etc. shall be furnished by the
Manufacturer for the last three years. (The valves shall be proven
for service indicated in Valve Data Sheet).
Within three weeks of placement of order, the Manufacturer shall submit four
copies of, but not limited to, the following drawings, documents and
specifications for Purchasers approval.
a)
Detailed sectional drawings showing all parts with reference numbers and
material specification.
b)
Assembly drawings indicating overall dimensions, features and painting

scheme.
Once the approval has been given by Purchaser, any changes in design, material
and method of manufacture shall be notified to Purchaser whose approval in
writing of all changes shall be obtained before the valve is manufactured.
9.3
Within 30 days from the approval date, Manufacturer shall submit to Purchaser
one reproducible and six copies of all approved drawings, documents and
specifications as listed in clause 9.2 above.
9.4
Prior to shipment, Manufacturer shall submit to Purchaser one reproducible and

six copies of the following :
a)
b)
Manual for installation, erection, maintenance and operation instructions,

including a list of recommended spares for the valves.
9.5
10.0
GUARANTEE
10.1
Manufacturer shall guarantee that the materials and machining of valves and
fittings comply with the requirements in this specification and in the Purchase
Order.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
FOR
CHECK VALVES
REV-2
Page 8 of 8
10.2
Manufacturer is bound to replace or repair all valve parts which should result
defective due to inadequate engineering or to the quality of materials and
machining.
10.3
If valve defect or malfunctioning cannot be eliminated, Manufacturer shall

replace the valve without delay,
10.4
Any defect occurring during the period of Guarantee shall be attended to by

making all necessary modifications and repair of defective parts free of charge
to the Purchaser as per the relevant clause of the bid document.
10.5

MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
FOR
GLOBE VALVES
D:\old data\FATEH\MP Region\Kailaras\Tender RFQ\Globe Valve\TS - Globe Valve.doc
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
GLOBE VALVE
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 1 OF 11
MEC/TS/05/62/005
REVISION 0
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
Page No.
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
DOCUMENTATION
3.0
4.0
OPERATION
5.0
6.0
RADIOGRAPHY OF CAST VALVES
7.0
IBR CERTIFICATION
8.0
QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN (QAP)
9.0
MARKING
10
10.0
DESPATCH
11
PREPARED BY :
CHECKED BY :
APPROVED BY :
GURDEEP SINGH
A.K. SARKAR
A.K. JOHRI
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
GLOBE VALVES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 2 OF 11
MEC/TS/05/62/005
REVISION 0
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
Vendor shall supply valves along with auxiliaries, if any, such as gear operator,
bypasses, drains, etc., specified in the valve specification sheets and this
specification.
1.2
Vendor shall quote in strict accordance with the valve Data / Specification
sheets, technical specification and enclosures to this specification. Deviations
to the Specification / Data sheets, if any, shall be indicated as per clause 2.0.
1.3
All codes and standards for manufacturing, testing, inspection etc., shall be of
latest editions.
1.4
Associated Gas Composition

As per Annexure-I
1.5
Materials
1.5.1
Material for major components of the valves shall be as indicated in Valve Data
Sheet. However, Manufacturer shall confirm that valve trim material is suitable
for Natural Gas with composition/ quality as given in clause 1.4. Other
components shall be as per Manufacturer's standards which will be subject to
approval by Purchaser.
1.5.2
Carbon equivalent (CE) of valve end connections which are subject to further
field welding , as calculated by the following formula, shall not exceed 0.45 on
check analysis for each heat of steel used.
CE = C
Mn
Cr + Mo + V
Ni + Cu
+ -------- + ---------------------- + --------------6
5
15
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
GLOBE VALVES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 3 OF 11
MEC/TS/05/62/005
REVISION 0
2.0
DOCUMENTATION
2.1
Vendor shall submit with the offer the following :
2.1.1
Manufacturers complete descriptive and illustrative Catalogue/ Literature.
2.1.2
Detailed dimensioned general arrangement and cross-sectional drawings with

Parts/ material lists, weight etc., for valves to manufacturers standard.
2.1.3
Drawings for valves with accessories like gear operator, extension bonnet,
extended stems with stands bypass, etc., giving major salient dimensions.
2.1.4
One copy of the valve technical specification and data sheets signed as
ACCEPTED by the manufacturer with all deviations marked clearly.
2.1.5
If the valve is regretted or has no deviation, the manufacturer shall write

clearly on valve specification sheets as REGRET or NO DEVIATION.
2.1.6
If there is any deviation in the specification, the same shall be listed clause
wise. Even clauses which are acceptable shall be categorically confirmed as
ACCEPTED.
2.1.7
On failure to submit document as specified in clauses 2.1.1 to 2.1.6 above, the

offer is likely to be rejected.
2.2
Vendor shall submit for approval the drawings mentioned in item no 2.1.2 &
2.1.3 after placement of order and before start of manufacture. No other
drawing shall be submitted for approval.
2.2.1
Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the applicable
code. Test reports shall also be furnished for any supplementary tests as
specified in clause 3.11 to 3.16.
2.2.2
Material test certificates (Physical property, chemical composition & heat

treatment report) of the pressure containing parts shall be furnished for the
valves supplied. Material test certificates for the other parts shall also be
furnished for verification during inspection.
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
GLOBE VALVES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 4 OF 11
MEC/TS/05/62/005
REVISION 0
3.0
3.1
Valves shall be designed, manufactured, tested, inspected and marked as per

the manufacturing standards design codes and standards (Latest editions)
indicated in the respective valve specification sheets. Any conflict between the
the technical specifiction, specification sheets and referred standard codes shall
be brought to the notice of the purchaser for clarifications, but generally
technical specification, data sheets shall govern. No deviation to specification/
standard shall be permitted through vendor drawings approval. Approval of
drawings shall be valid only for design features.
3.2
Bonnet extension wherever specification the valve sheet to BS : 6364 shall be

for Non Cold Box Application unless otherwise specified in the requisition.
Even if not called for in valve sheet, valves indicated as CRYO shall be
supplied with bonnet extension.
3.3
For heavy valves provisions shall be available for lifting by way of lugs, eye
bolts and such standard devices.
3.4
All flanged valves shall have flanges integral (except forged valves) with the
valve body. Flange finish shall be as per valve specification sheet.
3.5
For all weld end valves with bevel end as per ANSI B16. 25.
The contour of bevel shall be as follows :
3.6
Material
Wall Thickness
Weld Contour
Carbon steel
(Except low temp.
carbon steel )
Alloy steel,
Stainless steel &
low temp. carbon steel
upto 22 mm
> 22 mm
figure 2 type A
figure 3 type A
upto 10 mm
> 10 mm to 25 mm
> 25 mm
figure 4
figure 5 type A
figure 6 type A
If an overlay weld-deposit is used for the body seat ring and seating surface,
the seat ring base material shall be at least equal to the corrosion resistance of
the material of the shell.
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
GLOBE VALVES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 5 OF 11
MEC/TS/05/62/005
REVISION 0
3.7
Valve body/ bonnet shall be forged/ cast as specified. Forging is acceptable in

place of casting but not vice-versa.
3.8
Material of construction of yoke shall be minimum equivalent to body/ bonnet

material.
3.9
Stem shall be forged or machined from forged / rolled bar. No casting is

permitted, .
3.10
Stelliting / hard facing by deposition shall be minimum 1.6 mm. Renewable

seat ring may be seal welded.
3.11
As a pre qualification low temperature carbon steel, (LTCS), 3 Ni steel

(CRYO) & austenitic stainless (CRYO) valves shall be subjected to cryogenic
test as per BS 6364 and test shall be witnessed and certified by third party
inspection agency like Lloyds, B.V., DNV or EIL. For INDIAN vendors,
inspection agency shall be MECON only. The vendor has to submit test
certificate for prototype valves along with the offer. Prototype test carried on a
particular size, rating and design will qualify valves of sizes equal to and below
the particular size of the same rating and design.
Cryogenic testing as per BS 6364 shall be carried out at temperature (-45 C),
(-100 C) & (-196 C ) for LTCS, 3 Ni steel (CRYO) & austenitic stainless
steel CRYO valves respectively.
3.12
Repair welding procedure for austenitic stainless steel valves in CRYO service
shall have to be qualified for impact test as per ANSI B31.3. Minimum
acceptable impact energy shall be 20J or lateral expansion of 0.38 mm at temp
of -196 Deg C
3.13
Wherever impact test of SS studs/ nuts is called for in the data sheet, the
impact value shall be 27J at the intended service temperature specified in the
data sheets.
3.14
For all austenitic stainless steel valves Inter Granular Corrosion (IGC) test shall
have to be conducted as per following :
-
ASTM A 262 practice B with acceptance criteria of 60 Mills/ Year (Max.)

For all materials forged, rolled, wrought and casting.
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
GLOBE VALVES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 6 OF 11
MEC/TS/05/62/005
REVISION 0
OR
-
ASTM A 262 practice E with acceptance criteria of No cracks as observed

form 20X magnification For all materials other than castings. Microscopic
structure to be observed form 250X magnification in addition.
3.15
When specifically asked for in MR for high temperature application of some

grades of austenitic stainless steel (eg. SS309, 310, 316, 316H etc.) ASTM A
262 practice C with acceptance criteria of 15 Mils/ Year (Max.) shall have
to be conducted.
3.16
For the IGC test as described in 3.14 & 3.15 two sets of samples shall be
drawn from each solution annealing lot, one set corresponding to highest
carbon content and other set corresponding to highest pressure rating
3.17
Spiral wound bonnet gasket are to be provided with inner/ outer ring except
when encapsulated gaskets type body- bonnet joints are employed. Outer ring
may be avoided in case of Non- circular spiral wound gasket used in 150#
valve provided the outermost layer of spiral touches the bolts ascertaining the
centering.
4.0
OPERATION
4.1
Generally the valves are hand wheel of lever operated. Gear operation shall be
provided as under :
Class
Size Requiring
Gear Operator
900 #
1500 #
2500 #
6 and Larger
3 and Larger
3 and Larger
For sizes lower than these ranges, hand wheel shall be provided.
4.2
Gear operator shall be totally enclosed bevel gear in grease case with grease
nipples/ plugs with position indicators for open / close position.
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
GLOBE VALVES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 7 OF 11
MEC/TS/05/62/005
REVISION 0
4.3
Where gear operator is not called for as per clause 4.1 but vendor
recommends a gear operator, he shall highlight such case/s and quote
separate prices for the valve and gear operator.
4.4
Gear operator shall be so designed to operate effectively with the differential

pressure across the closed vale equal to the cold non-shock pressure rating.
4.5
Hand wheel diameter shall not exceed 750 mm and lever length shall not
exceed 500 mm. on both sides. Effort to operate shall not exceed 35 kgs at
hand wheel periphery. However failing to meet the above requirements vendor
shall offer gear operated valve and quote as per clause 4.3.
5.0
5.1
Every valve shall be subjected to all the mandatory tests and checks called in
the respective codes/ data sheet.
5.2
Every valve, its components and auxiliaries be subjected to all the mandatory
tests and checks called in the respective codes, data sheets etc. by the
manufacturer.
5.3
Though the extent of inspection by purchaser or his authorised representative

shall be as under, however exact extent with hold points shall be decided by
MECON and recorded in the form of inspection plan.
FORGED VALVES :
1)
Visual and dimensional inspection.
2)
Review of material test certificates.
3)
Any mandatory or supplementary test.
4)
Hydrostatic test on 10% valves selected on random basis.
5)
Strip check as applicable for valves
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
GLOBE VALVES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 8 OF 11
MEC/TS/05/62/005
REVISION 0
CAST STEEL VALVES :

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Visual and dimensional inspection.

Review of material test certificates.
Review of radiographs/ radiographic reports of any other NDT
tests wherever applicable as per data sheet.
Any mandatory or supplementary test.
Hydrostatic test. 100% for body, 10% other test.
Strip check as applicable for valves.
5.4
In case of motor operated or actuator operated valves, functional/operational

checks as per the requirements of the specifications shall be made on each
valve.
6.0
RADIOGRAPHY OF CAST VALVES
6.1
Valves under critical, very highly critical, lethal and toxic services shall be
radiographed as specified in respective data sheets When specifically not
mentioned in individual data sheet, valve casting shall undergo radiographic
examination as specified hereunder :
...........................................................................................................
Material
Rating
Size Range Radiography
...........................................................................................................
All
150 #
24 And Below Nil
150 #
26 And Above 100%
300 #
16 And Below Nil
300 #
18 And Above 100%
600 #
All Sizes
100%
& Above
...........................................................................................................
6.2
Radiography procedure, areas of casting to be radiographed shall be a per ANSI

B-16.34 and acceptance criteria shall be as per ANSI B-16.34 Annexure-B.
However for areas of casting to be radio-graphed for types of valve not covered
in ANSI B-16.34, vendor shall enclose details of areas to be radiographed in line
with ANSI B-16.34.
6.3
Random radiography wherever specified in individual data sheets, the sampling

shall be per size of the quantity ordered for each foundry.
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
GLOBE VALVES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 9 OF 11
MEC/TS/05/62/005
REVISION 0
6.4
Radiography wherever specified in the data sheets or as per clause 6.1 shall be
done by X-Ray/ Gamma-Ray to get the required sensitivity.
6.5
Over and above the stipulation laid down in clauses 6.1, 6.2, 6.3 & 6.4, all valve
castings shall only be procured among the foundries after obtaining approval
from Client / Consultant.
7.0
IBR CERTIFICATION
7.1
For valves described IBR valves shall be in accordance with the latest IBR
(Indian Boiler Regulation) including the requirements specified in the
specification.
7.2
SW/ BW end carbon steel valves under IBR< the chemical composition shall
conform to the following :
Carbon (Max)
Others (S,P, Mn)
:
:
0.25%
As per IBR regulations
7.3
For valves described IBR test certificate in form III-C shall be furnished,
signed by IBR inspection authority or an approved representative.
7.4
All IBR valves shall be painted red in body-bonnet/ body cover joint.
8.0
QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN (QAP)
8.1
Procurement of Bought out Materials

All critical materials such as casting, forging, pressure holding parts, electrical
and instrument accessories, etc. shall be purchased by the Vendor from GAIL/
MECON approved suppliers meeting Qualification Criteria stipulated if any.
Vendor shall submit a list of bought out materials and sub-vendors for these
bought out materials for MECON approval within 2 weeks from Telefax/ Letter
of Intent.
8.2
Calibration Records
Vendor shall use only calibrated measuring and test instruments and maintain
calibration records. Vendor shall furnish records of calibration of measuring and
test instruments including re calibration records to concerned Inspection
Authority.
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
8.3
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
GLOBE VALVES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 10 OF 11
MEC/TS/05/62/005
REVISION 0
Quality Records
Vendor shall maintain quality records as per approved procedures. Inspection
Reports & Test Record. Copies shall be furnished to Inspection Authority.
8.4
Final Documentation
8.4.1
Final drawings/ documents consisting of technical data manual/ mechanical

catalogue is a compilation of as built certified, drawings and data,
manufacturing and test records, installation, operating and maintenance
instructions. For drawings where Purchasers approval is required, the final
certified drawings shall be included. Final documents shall be legible
photocopies in A4, A3 or A2 size only. The purchase requisition shall also form
a part of the final documentation.
8.4.2
Final documentation shall be bound in Hard board folder(s) of size 265 mm x

315 mm (10 x 12) and shall not be more than 90 mm thickness.
9.0
MARKING
9.1
Valve markings, symbols, abbreviations etc. shall be in accordance with MSSSP-25 or the standard referred in specification sheet as applicable. Vendors
name, valve rating, material designation, nominal size, direction of flow (if any)
etc. shall be integral on the body.
9.2
Each valve shall have a corrosion resistant tag giving size, valve tag / code no,
securely attached on the valve body.
9.3
Paint or Ink for marking shall not contain any harmful metal or metal salts
such as zinc, lead or copper which causes corrosive attack on heating.
9.4
Carbon steel valves shall be painted with coats of red oxide zinc chromate
primer or single coat of aluminum paint. Forged valves supplied chemically
blackened (phosphated) is also acceptable.
9.5
All alloy steel high temp valves shall be painted with heat resistant silicone
paint suitable for intended temperature.
MECON LIMITED
DELHI
TITLE
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
GLOBE VALVES
SPECIFICATION NO.
PAGE 11 OF 11
MEC/TS/05/62/005
REVISION 0
9.6
All 3 Ni Steel / LTCS valves shall be painted with one coat of inorganic zinc
silicate coating.
10.0
DESPATCH
10.1
Valves shall be dry, clean and free from moisture, dirt and loose foreign
materials of any kind.
10.2
Valves shall be protected from rust, corrosion and any mechanical damage
during transportation, shipment and storage.
10.3
Rust preventive on machined surfaces to be welded shall be easily removable

with a petroleum solvent or not harmful to welding.
10.4
Each end of valves shall be protected with the following materials :

Flange face
Bevelled end
SW & Scrd. End
:
:
:

Plastic cap
10.5
End protectors to be used on flange faces shall be attached by at least three

bolts or wiring through bolt holes and shall not be smaller than the outside
diameter of the flange. However plastic caps for SW & SCRD. End valves shall
be press fit type.
10.6
End protectors to be used on beveled end shall be securely and tightly

attached.
10.7
For special service valves additional requirement of despatch shall be

prescribed in data sheet.

MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
FOR
TEMPORARY CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM
SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/TS/05/62/016A, R-1
D:\old data\FATEH\MP Region\Kailaras\Tender RFQ\TCP&PCP\Temporary Cathodic Protection - 016A-R1.doc
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 1 of 19
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.0
CORROSION DATA
4.0
CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN PARAMETERS
5.0
CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN CRITERIA
6.0
SYSTEM DETAILS
7.0
INSTALLATION
8.0
CIVIL WORKS
9.0
TESTING AND INSPECTION AT WORKS
10.0
PACKING AND TRANSPORT
11.0
SYSTEM TESTING COMMISSIONING AND INTERFERENCE MITIGATION
12.0
SYSTEM MONITORING
13.0
DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS
14.0
INSTRUMENTS, TOOLS AND SPARES
15.0
INFORMATION REQUIRED WITH BID
Page No.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 1 of 19
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This specification defines the requirements of design, engineering supply of materials,

installation, testing and commissioning of temporary cathodic protection system of
external surface of cross country underground pipeline/structure including
supplementing of corrosion survey, investigation for interference/ interaction problems
and mitigation of the same. Unless otherwise specified monitoring of the temporary
cathodic protection system till the commissioning of permanent C.P. System shall be
carried out by temporary C.P. contractor.
This specification defines the basic guidelines to develop a suitable temporary cathodic
protection system for the structure required to be protected. All data required in this
regard shall be taken into consideration to develop an acceptable design and for
proper engineering of the system.
1.2
Compliance with these specifications and/ or approval of any of the contractor's

documents shall in no case relieve the contractual obligations.
1.3
In case where temporary and permanent cathodic protection works are being
executed by the same agency, activities of permanent CP system which are common
to temporary CP system shall be completed as part of temporary CP system. In cases
where temporary and permanent cathodic protection works are being executed by
different agencies, the contractual scope of work shall be referred for further details.
1.4
All work to be performed and supplies to be effected as a part of contract shall require
specific approval of owner or his authorised representative. Major activities requiring
approval shall include but not be limited to the following :
2.0
Corrosion survey data interpretation report and design basis for CP system.
CP system design package
Purchase requisitions for major equipment and vendor approval
Detailed engineering package
Field testing and commissioning procedure
Procedures for interference testing and mitigation
CPL survey and system monitoring procedures
CODES AND STANDARDS

The system design, performance and materials to be supplied shall unless otherwise
specified, conform to the requirements of latest relevant applicable standards of :BIS specifications
BS specifications and codes of practice
ANSI specifications
NFPA publications
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 2 of 19
NACE publications
IEC publications
DNV publications
IEEE publications
DIN publications
ASTM publications
In case of conflicting requirements amongst any of the above standards the
publication having most stringent requirement shall be governing.
3.0
CORROSION DATA
3.1
The corrosion survey including soil resistivity data along ROW and other data required
for CP design is attached with this document. However, verification of its veracity and
adequacy shall be the entire responsibility of the contractor. In addition, contractor
shall have to generate/ collect additional data as required for completeness of the job.
Contractor shall also carry out soil resistivity survey at temporary mode ground bed
locations for proper design of ground beds. Wenner's 4-pin method or approved equal
shall be used for such measurements. Survey instruments shall have maximum AC and
DC ground current rejection feature.
3.2
Additional data to be collected

The following data shall be collected to generate design data for evaluation of
interaction/ interference possibilities due to presence of other services in ROW/ in
vicinity.
i.
Route and types of foreign service/pipeline in and around or crossing the right
of way (including those existing and those which are likely to come up during
contract execution or any abandoned pipelines.
ii.
Diameter, wall thickness, pressure, pipeline coating against corrosion, soil

cover used in case of pipelines.
iii.
Detail of the existing cathodic protection system protecting the services i.e.
location, rating, type of protection, anode beds, test station locations and their
connection schemes.
iv.
Graphical representation of existing structure/ pipe-to soil potential records.

T/R unit current/ voltage readings.
v.
Remedial measures existing on foreign pipeline/services to prevent interaction.
vi.
Possibility of intergration/isolation of CP system, Which may involve

negotiations with owners of other services.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 3 of 19
vii.
Crossing and parallel running of electrified and non-electrified traction (along

with information regarding operating voltage, type AC/DC etc.) as well as
abandoned tracks near ROW having electrical continuity with the tracks in use.
viii.
Crossing and parallel running of any HT/AC/DC overhead

(existing/proposed) along with details of voltage, type AC/DC etc.
ix.
Voltage rating, number of cores and sheathing details of under ground power
cables, along ROW or in its vicinity.
x.
Information on existing and proposed DC/AC power sources and system having
earth as return path, in the vicinity of the entire pipeline, route such as HV/DC
sub stations, fabrication yards with electric welding etc.
xi.
Any other relevant information that may be needed in designing and

implementing proper protection scheme for the proposed pipeline.
line
Unless otherwise mentioned, Contractor shall condut necessary potential

gradient survey for any existing anode ground bed that may interfere with the
CP system of the pipeline covered under this project.
3.3
xii.
Any masonry work for other concrete or non conductive constructions in the
ROW which may block the CP current or cause interference to the pipeline.
xiii.
Any underground
cable
running
in parallel or crossing the ROW.
Report
On completion of all field work a report incorporating all the results generated from
surveys and details of additional data collected shall be furnished. The report shall also
contain detailed interpretation of survey results and resistivity data enclosed, probable
interference prone areas etc. to form design basis for the scheme of cathodic
protection. This report shall be plotted on semi-log graph sheets.
4.0

Unless otherwise specified in the project specifications, following parameters shall be
used for design of temporary cathodic protection system.
Those parts of sacrificial anode cathdic protection system which will be integrated with
permanent CP system shall be designed based on permanent CP parameters.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
4.1
Page 4 of 19
Protection current density

(i)
Pipe lines having polyethylene coatings

Pipeline
surrounding
Protection current density*

Temporary CP
Permanent CP
(A/m)
(MA/m)
50
0.120
100
0.120
Normal soil
Marshy
area/
buried
in
sea
water/
HDD
crossing
High
resistivity
area (more than
100 m)
(ii)
25
100
Pipe lines having FBE Coatings

Protection current density*
Temporary CP
Permanent CP
(A/m)
(MA/m)
200
0.300
300
0.500
150
0.250
Pipeline
surrounding
Normal soil
Marshy area
High
resistivity
area (more than
100 m)
Pipe to soil "ON" potential shall not be more negative than (-) 1.5V.
* Actual current density to be adopted shall be decided based upon soil and other
environmental conditions, proximity of foreign pipelines and structures affecting
interference. Where considered necessary for satisfactory protection of pipeline the
current density shall be suitably increased by contractor.
4.2
Safety factor for current density : 1.3
4.3
Anode utilisation factor :
4.4
Pipeline natural potential : (-) 0.45 V
4.5
Unless otherwise specified in project specification the design life of temporary CP shall
be one year and that of permanent CP shall be 30 years.
0.65 for Mg. Anode

0.80 for Zn Anode
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 5 of 19
5.0
5.1
Cathodic protection system shall be designed to meet the following criteria:

a)
the pipe to electrolyte Potential measurement shall be 9S150 MV ormore

nigative as measured between pipe surface and saturated CU-CU 804,
reference electrode containing electroly when cathodic protection is applied but
on potential measurement shall not go more negative than than (-) 1500 MV.
b)
The pipeline shall be considered protected when a minimum of (-) 300 millivolt
potential potential shift has been achieved from the initial native potential to the
CP ÒN potential.
c)
In rare circumstances a minimum polarisation shift of (-) 100 millivolts shall

indicate adequate levels of cathodic protection for the pipeline. The formation of
decary of this polarisation shall be used in the criteria.
Discretion to use any of the criteria listed above shall solely rest with the
Owner/ Owners representative.
5.2
A positive potential swing of 50-100 mV shall be considered the criteria for presence of
an interaction situation requiring investigation and incorporation of mitigation measures
by the CONTRACTOR.
6.0
SYSTEM DETAILS
The system shall include the following major equipment/sub-systems unless otherwise
specified:
-
Sacrificial anodes and anode ground beds

Test stations
Surge diverter/grounding cell
Polarisation cells
Interconnecting cables
Cable to pipe connections
Spark Gap Arrester
All equipment shall be new and supplied by approved reputed manufacturers.

Equipment offered shall be field proven. Equipment requiring specialised maintenance
or operation shall be avoided as far as possible and prototype equipment shall not be
accepted. Make and construction of all material shall be subject to owner's approval.
The detailed specification of each system and equipment shall be furnished by the
contractor. However, certain minimum requirements for the major equipment are
highlighted in this document.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 6 of 19
As far as possible equipment including test stations, anode lead junction boxes, etc.,
shall be located in safe area. All equipment located in hazardous areas shall be of
flame proof type as per IS:2148 for gas groups IIA & IIB and temp. class T3.
6.1
Anode Ground Beds
6.1.1
The pipeline shall be protected by prepacked zinc/ magnesium anodes.
6.1.2
Anodes shall be installed along the pipeline at suitable intervals as per pipeline protection
voltage attenuation calculations and ground bed resistance/ current output of anode
installations. Minimum one anode installation shall be provided for every one km. of the
pipeline. In congested area, minimum one anode installation shall be provided for every
250 meter of pipeline length.
6.1.3
Each electrically continuous section of pipeline shall preferably be protected totally by one
type (material) of anodes to avoid inter-anode circulation currents.
6.1.4
The anodes shall be installed at sufficient depth to reach moist soil and shall be
separated from the pipe line by at least 5m and 2m for magnesium and zinc anodes
respectively. The anode connections to pipeline shall be routed through test stations.
6.1.5
At the temporary cathodic protection anode ground bed, the leads of all the anodes shall
be joined together in a junction box filled with epoxy and buried. A single cable shall be
routed from the junction box to the test station. At permanent CP anode ground bed (i.e.
at cased crossing), the leads of all the anodes shall be brought up to the test station and
shall be terminated individually.
6.1.6
For sacrificial anode ground bed which shall be integrated with permanent CP System the
leads of all the anodes shall be brought up to the test station and shall be terminated
individually.
6.1.7
The number of anodes at each ground bed shall be sufficient for providing the specified
pipe protection current density taking into consideration the ground bed resistance, pipe
coating resistance, cable resistance, etc. Contractor shall prepare a table for number of
anodes required at different soil resistivities to produce the specified protection current.
6.2.1
Magnesium anode
The anode shall be of high manganese, magnesium alloy packed with special back fill.
The metallurgical composition, potential and consumption rate of anode shall be as
below:
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
(i)
6.2.2

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 7 of 19
Composition:
Element
Weight
Manganese
Copper
Silicon
Zinc
Aluminum
Iron
Nickel
Other metallic elements
Each
Total
Magnesium
0.5 1.3%
0.02% max.
0.05% max.
0.05% max.
0.01% max.
0.03% max.
0.001% max.
0.05% max.
0.3%
Balance
(ii)
Anode closed circuit potential
1.5 volts
(iii)
Anode consumption rate
7.9 kg/(A yr)
Zinc Anode
The anode shall confirm to the requirements of ASTM 418 standard. The anode
(other than ribbon anode) shall be packaged with special back fill. The metallurgical
composition of anode, potential and consumption rate shall be as below:
(i)
Composition:
Element
Aluminium
Cadmium
Copper
Iron
Lead
Zinc
Weight
0.005%
0.0035%
0.002% max.
0.0014% max.
0.0035% max.
Remainder
(ii)
Anode closed circuit potential
1.1 volts
(iii)
Anode consumption rate
11.24 kg/(A yr)
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 8 of 19
6.2.3
Contractor shall furnish spectographic analysis from each heat both for zinc and
magnesium anodes along with electrochemical test results.
6.2.4
Special Backfill
The composition of special back fill for anodes shall be as below:
Gypsum
Bentonite
Sodium Sulphate
75%
20%
5%
6.2.5
The anodes shall be provided with cable tail of sufficient length to reach junction box
test station as applicable without tension.
6.2.6
Tolerance in fabrication of anodes

The anode surface shall be free from cracks which may reduce the performance of the
anode.
Any cracks which follow the longitudinal direction of elongated anodes shall not be
acceptable.
Small cracks in the transverse direction of elongated anodes and in anodes of other
shapes may be accepted provided the cracks would not cause any mechanical failure
during service of the anode considering that the combination of cracks and lack of
bond to the anode core is detrimental.
For transverse cracks the acceptable limits shall be furnished by the bidders along with
the offer.
The anode shall be free from excessive shrinkages. The following limits shall be used:
-
Maximum 10% of the depth of anode or 50% of the depth of the anode core
whichever is less. The depression may be measured from the edged of one
side.
The surface of the anodes shall be free from coatings and slag/dross inclusions etc.
The maximum deviation from straightness shall not exceed 2%.
The weight tolerance on individual anodes may be taken as 5%. The total weight of
the anodes shall not have negative tolerance.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 9 of 19
Recommended dimensional tolerance shall be as follows:

Length
Width/thickness
2.5%
5%
6.3
Test Stations
6.3.1
Test stations shall be provided along the pipeline ROW for monitoring the performance
of the Cathodic Protection system at intervals not exceeding 1000 meters in
uncongested & 250 meters in congested area unless otherwise specified. In addition
to above, test stations shall also be provided at the following locations:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
At both sides of major road crossings

At all insulating joints
At vulnerable locations with drastic changes in soil resistivity
At connections of surge diverters, grounding cells and polarisation cells
At HT AC/DC overhead line crossings and selected locations where HT
overhead line is in the vicinity of the pipeline.
At railway line crossings and running parallel to the pipeline.
At both sides of major river crossings.
At high voltage cable crossings or along routes where HV cables are running in
parallel.
In the vicinity of DC net works or grounding system where interference
problems are suspected.
At crossings/parallel running of other pipeline structures
At both sides of cased crossings
At any other locations considered vulnerable locations where interference is
expected
At any other locations considered necessary by owner/owners representative
6.3.2
Test stations for bonding shall be provided with shunt and resistor as a means to
monitor and control current.
6.3.3
Test stations used for sacrificial anodes shall have shunt for measurement of anode
current, and provision for resistance insertion to limit the anode current output.
6.3.4
Test station with current measuring facility shall be provided at each intermediate CP
station drainage point (to measure pipeline from drainage point), at interference prone
areas, on both sides of major river crossings and at least at two additional locations
along the pipeline ROW between two CP stations.
6.3.5
All test stations shall have weather proof enclosure, having degree of protection IP 55
with hinged lockable shutter. Enclosure shall be made of sheet steel of at least 3 mm
thickness and shall be suitable for M.S. post mounting. The test stations shall be
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 10 of 19
designed with terminals required for both temporary and permanent CP system and
shall be suitable for total life of permanent CP system.
6.3.6
The test stations shall be installed with the front of the test station facing the pipeline.
The name plate of test stations shall in minimum carry following information.
-
Test station number

Chainage in km
Test station connection scheme type
Distance from pipeline in meters
Direction of product flow
6.3.7
Terminal blocks and different scheme of wiring as required shall be provided in the
test station as per the test station connection scheme sketch.
6.3.8
The location of all the test stations shall be marked with their connection schemes and
other relevant information's on alignment sheets. A detailed test station schedule shall
be prepared.
6.4
Surge diverter, grounding cell and polarisation cell
6.4.1
Where high voltage (66 KV and above) transmission line runs in parallel or crosses the
pipeline, the pipeline shall be grounded through polarisation cells & zinc anodes of
minimum 20 kg net each. Alternatively, grounding could be done directly with zinc
galvanic anodes of minimum 20 kg net each at the discretion of owner. Grounding
shall be done at regular intervals where transmission lines run parallel within 25 meter
of the pipeline to ground any surges on the pipeline that would appear in case of
transmission line faults.
6.4.2
In case of continuous induction of voltage on the pipeline beyond safe limits is

expected or observed during commissioning due to HV Line or other of any rating., the
pipeline shall be grounded to the earth system of nearest HV transmission tower of
the transmisison line causing the voltage induction through polarisation cell or the
pipeline shall be grounded to a separate earthing system of zinc galvanic anodes
through polarisation cell. Alternatively, the pipeline shall be directly grounded with
zinc galvanic anodes of minimum 20 kg net each at the discretion of the owner. The
polarisation cell shall be installed in test station.
6.4.3
Spark gap arrestor shall be connected across each insulating joint to protect in from
high voltage surges.
6.4.4
Alternatively, zinc grounding cell may be provided across insulating joints along ROW
where the pipeline on both the sides of the insulating joint are cathodically protected
and difference of protection voltage is not more then 0.4 volts.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 11 of 19
Alternatively, owner on its own discretion may permit use of Magnesium / Zinc
galvanic anodes for protection of insulating joints. Choice between Magnesium or zinc
anodes shall depend upon the potential valves on either side of the insulating joint.
These anodes shall be sized for the specified design life of permanent cathodic
protection system.
6.4.5
The total system including cables, cable termination, anodes/ surge divertors shall be
suitable for the anticipated fault current at the location of installation.
6.4.6
Unless otherwise specified on data sheet, the minimum rating of grounding cells,
polarisation cells and surge diverters shall be as below:
(i)
Grounding Cell
Type
Current rating
:
:
Zinc, 2 or 4 plate type

Suitable to pass more than
10kA surge
(ii)
Polarisation cell
Type
Solid state or Electrolytic multiple pairs

S.S plats type ground
Suitable to pass 5KA or more surge
(iii)
Spark
-
Rating
Gap Arrester
Type
Current, 8/20 wave
Spark over AC voltage:
50 Hz
Impulse (1.2/50)
micro sec)
:
:
Spark gap
100 kA
:
:
1 kV
2.2 kV
6.4.7
The grounding cell, spark gap arresters, and polarisation cell system shall be sized for
the design life of permanent CP system. The zinc or magnesium anodes meant for
pipeline grounding shall also be sized for the life of the permanent CP system taking
into account the current discharge from the anodes. The grounding system shall have
minimum resistance to earth to restrict the pipeline voltage as per NACE criteria.
6.4.8
In case of HT transmission overhead lines of voltage below 66KV also requisite

mitigation measures should be provided to take care of continuous induction of
voltage interface due to presence of transmission line in close proximity.
6.5
CP at Cased Crossing
At cased crossings where casing is coated, the casing shall be protected by sacrificial
anode installations. The sacrificial anode installations shall be provided at both ends of
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 12 of 19
casing. The anode installation shall be sized based on permanent C.P. design
parameters specified for the main pipeline.
The carrier pipe inside the casing shall be protected by zinc ribbon anodes well
connected to the outer surface of bottom of carrier pipe extending upto hour hand
positions of 4 and 8 o'clock. The anodes shall be placed at close intervals as per
design parameters calculations and sized based on the permanent CP design
parameters.
6.6
Painting
The sheet steel used for fabrication shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased to
remove mill scale, rust, grease and dirt. Fabricated structures shall be pickled and then
rinsed to remove any trace of acid. The under surfaces shall be prepared by applying a
coat of phosphate paint and a coat of yellow zinc chromate primer. The under surfaces
shall be free from all imperfections before undertaking the finished coat. After
preparation of the under surface, spray painting with two coats of final paint shall be
done. The finished panel shall be dried in oven in dust free atmosphere. Panel finish
shall be free from imperfections like pin holes, orange peels, run off paint, etc.
All unpainted steel parts shall be cadmium plated to prevent rust information.
6.7
Cables
Cables shall be annealed high conductivity, tinned, stranded copper conductor, XLPE
insulated 650/1100 V grade, armoured, PVC sheathed. The size of the copper
conductor shall be 6 sq mm for anode cable from anode to buried junction box, 10 sq
mm from junction box to test station, 10mm from test station to pipeline. The size of
the conductor shall be 6 sq mm for potential measurement, 10 sq.mm for current
measurement and 25mm for bonding, polarisation cell/grounding cell and surge
diverter connection purpose. The anode cable from anode to junction box (buried)
shall be unarmoured. The length of anode tail cable shall be sufficient enough to reach
junction box (buried) in case of temporary CP anodes and up to test station in case of
permanent CP sacrificial anodes. PE Sleeves shall be provided for unarmoured cables.
7.0
INSTALLATION
7.1
Cable Laying
7.1.1
Cables shall be laid in accordance with approved layout drawings to be prepared by

the contractor. No straight through joint shall be permitted in a single run of cable.
Cable route shall be carefully measured and cables cut to required length.
7.1.2
All cables inside station/plant area shall be laid at a depth of 0.75 M. Cables outside
station/plant area shall be laid at a depth of 1.5m. Cables shall be laid in sand under
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 13 of 19
brick cover back filled with normal soil. Outside the station/plant area the routes shall
be marked with Polyethylene cable warning mats placed at a depth of 0.9m from the
finished grade.
7.1.3
All underground unarmoured cables forming part of permanent CP system shall run
through PE sleeves. Cables along the pipeline shall be carried along the top of the pipe
by securely strapping it with adhesive tape or equivalent as required.
7.1.4
RCC or GI pipes of proper size shall be provided for all underground cables for road
crossings.
7.1.5
Cables shall be neatly arranged in trenches in such a manner that criss-crossing is

avoided and final take off to equipment is facilitated.
7.2
Cable to Pipe Connections

All the cable connections to the pipeline including charged foreign pipeline shall be
made using an approved exothermic process. A suitable water proof sealing system of
the cable connections shall be made which will be compatible with parent coating
system of the pipeline after exnothernice process.
For charged pipeline pin-brazing shall be used. Eutectic solder shall not be acceptable
for charged or non-charged pipeline.
8.0
CIVIL WORKS
All civil works associated with the complete cathodic protection work shall be included
in the scope of contractor. This shall include providing cable trenches, foundation for
equipment and all test stations, etc.
9.0
TESTING AND INSPECTION AT WORKS
9.1
OWNER/OWNER's representative shall visit the works during manufacture of various

equipment to assess the progress of work as well as to ascertain that only quality raw
material is used for the same. All necessary assistance during such inspections shall be
provided.
The minimum testing, inspection requirements for all components/ equipments shall
confirm to the requirements as defined in the relevant codes and standards. Detailed
inspection and testing procedures along with the acceptance criteria shall be prepared
by CONTRACTOR for OWNER's approval.
9.2
9.3
Test certificates including test records, performance curves etc., shall be furnished. All
test certificates shall be endorsed with sufficient information to identify equipment to
which the certificate refers to and must carry project title, owner's name and purchase
order details etc.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 14 of 19
9.4
Owner reserves the right to ask for inspection of all or any item under the contract
and witness all tests and carry out inspection or authorise his representative to
witness test and carry out inspection. CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER or
OWNER's representative at least 20 days in advance giving exact details of tests, dates
and addresses of locations where the tests would be carried out.
10.0

All equipment/material shall be protected for inland/marine transport, carraige at site
and outdoor storage during transit and at site. All packages shall be clearly, legibly
and durably marked with uniform block letters giving the relevant equipment/material
details. each package shall contain a packing list in a water proof envelope. Copies of
the packing list in triplicate, shall be forwarded to owner prior to despatch. All items of
material shall be clearly marked for easy identification against the packing list.
11.0
SYSTEM TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND INTERFERENCE MITIGATION
11.1
System testing at site
11.1.1
Contractor shall furnish the detailed field testing and commissioning procedure for
approval. Field tests as per the approved procedures shall be carried out on the
equipment/systems before being put into service. the acceptance of the complete
installation shall be contingent upon inspection and field test results.
11.1.2
Before the CP facilities are placed in operation all necessary tests shall be carried out
to establish that all equipment, devices, wiring and connection, etc., have been
correctly installed, connected and are in good working condition as required for
intended operation.
11.1.3
Owner/owner's representative may witness all the tests. At least one week's notice
shall be given before commencing the tests.
11.1.4
All tools, equipments and instruments required for testing shall be provided by
CONTRACTOR.
11.1.5
Generally following tests shall be carried out and recorded in proforma given in
subsequent clauses:
Checking
Visual inspection, comparison with

drawings and specifications.
Inspection
Detailed physical inspection
Testing
Simulation tests of equipment to

determine its operational fitness.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
(i)
Page 15 of 19
Cables
-
(ii)
REV-1
Cable no.
Voltage grade
Conductor cross-section
Continuity check
Voltage test
Insulation resistance values between core and earth
All cables shall be tested by 500 V megger
Insulating joint
Checking of insulating joint for leakage, before and after energisation of
C.P. by means of insulating joint tester. Structure to electrolyte
potential of both protected and non-protected sides of insulating joint
shall be checked before and after energistaion of CP system.
(iii)
Polarisation cell
-
(iv)
Grounding cell
-
(v)
Location
Type (no. of anodes)
Ratings
Surge diverter
-
(vi)
Location/identification number
Rating
Check for electrolyte
Check for wiring
Check for standby current drain with CP energisation (current
drain with respect to voltage across the cell shall be recorded)
Location/identification no.
Ratings
Check for healthiness
Anode ground beds

-
Location/test station number

Current output of the ground bed
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
(vii)
REV-1
Page 16 of 19
Spark Gap Arrester

-
Location/ identification No
Ratings
11.2
Commissioning
11.2.1
Natural pipe to soil potential shall be measured at each test station location prior to
connecting anodes to pipeline. The pipe to soil potential observation shall be repeated
after connecting the anodes and allowing sufficient time for polarisation. The current
output of the anode installation shall also be measured to ensure that it does not
exceed the output current capacity of the anodes. In case the anode output current
exceeds the rated capacity it shall be controlled by insertion of resistance element in
the anode circuit inside test station and the pipe to soil potential shall be rechecked for
adequacy of protection. Additional anodes shall be provided where required to achieve
desired level of protection.
Each anode installation shall become individually operational as above.
11.2.2
After connecting all the anode ground beds to pipeline, measurement of pipe to soil
potentials shall be taken at each test station to ensure conformity to protection
criteria.
11.2.3
In case of insufficient protection as per the CP design criteria on any portion of the
pipeline, CONTRACTOR shall carry out necessary additions modification to the
provided protection in consultation with the ENGINEER.
11.3
Interference Mitigation
Investigation shall be made for stray current electrolysis of the pipeline, AC induction
on pipeline due to overhead high voltage line, interference due to high voltage DC
lines, electric traction, etc.
Measurements including pipe to soil potential and pipeline current etc., on the
pipeline/structure being CP protected shall be made to investigate the current
discharge and collection locations.
In case of fluctuating stray currents investigation shall be made continuously over a
period of time and if required simultaneously at different locations to find out the stray
current source. For long time measurements, recorders shall preferably be used.
Where foreign pipeline (unprotected or protected by independent CP system) runs in
parallel to the pipeline in same trench or very near to the pipeline, and is not bonded
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 17 of 19
to the pipeline then investigation shall be made for current discharge points on both
the pipelines.
Mitigation measured shall be provided depending on type of interference. These shall
include installation of bond with variable resistor and diodes, installation of galvanic
anodes for auxiliary drainage of current, adjustment/relocation (if possible) of
offending interference source, provision of electric shield etc., depending on the type
of interference.
Bonding with foreign pipeline/structure as a mitigation measure shall be provided
where the owner of the pipeline/structure has no objection, otherwise, alternative
mitigation measure shall be provided. Where bonding is provided for mitigation the
bonding resistor shall be adjusted for optimum value for minimum/no interference.
Galvanic anodes installed as a mitigation measure shall be sized for the life specified
for permanent CP.
12.0
SYSTEM MONITORING
The temporary CP system provided shall be monitored at all the test stations once in a
month for healthiness/adequacy of protection till commissioning of permanent CP or
for design life of temporary CP specified, whichever is less. During this period if any
deficiency/interference in protection system is noticed the same shall be
rectified/augmented by additional anodes as required. The monitoring report shall be
submitted regularly to owner for his review/information.
13.0
13.1
General
13.1.1
Within three weeks from the date of issue of PURCHASE ORDER, CONTRACTOR shall
submit four copies of the list of all drawings/ data/ manuals/ procedures for approval,
identifying each by a number and descriptive title and giving the schedule date. This
list shall be revised and extended, as necessary, during the progress of work
13.1.2
All drawings and documents shall be in English and shall follow metric system. Number
of copies of each submission shall be as follows unless otherwise specified.
Submission
a.
For review/approval
No. of Copies
6
b.
Drawings issued for execution

construction
c.
Final / As built drawings

execution/construction
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
d.
REV-1
Operation/Maintenance manual,
vendor data
Page 18 of 19
13.2
Contract drawings and documents
13.2.1
As a part of the contract, drawings and documents shall be furnished which shall
include but not be limited to the following:
a.
b.
c.
13.2.2
Report on corrosion survey

Basis of system design calculations, equipment selection criteria and sizing
calculations.
Bill of material, material requisitions, purchase requisitions
Detailed construction drawings (including as built drawings)

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Sacrificial anode fabrication drawings

Typical layout drawing for anode ground bed installation and connection
Equipment layout, cable layout and schedules
Fabrication, installation and connection scheme drawing for different types of
test stations.
Fabrication and installation details of surge diverter, grounding cell and
polarisation cell with its enclosure and housing
Cable-to-pipe joint details for charged and non-charged pipelines.
Incorporation of anode beds, polarisation cell, surge diverters, test stations,
etc., and other relevant features of CP system design in Pipeline alignment
sheet and other related drawings
Identification of section of pipeline affected by interference, source of
interference and details of interference mitigation arrangements provided.
various measurement data at all relevant test stations with and without
mitigation measures provided.
i.
Detailed commissioning report including various measurement data at all test

stations, etc.
j.
Vendor drawings and catalogues, test certificates
k.
Operation and maintenance manual
l.
Miscellaneous
Equipment inspection and testing procedure
Construction, installation procedures
Field testing and commissioning procedures
Procedure for monitoring of cathodic protection after commissioning
Quality control procedures
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 19 of 19
14.0
INSTRUMENT, TOOLS AND SPARES
14.1
CONTRACTOR shall supply all instruments, tools and tackles necessary for proper
operation and maintenance of complete cathodic protection system and associated
equipment.
14.2
CONTRACTOR shall provide a list of spares and consumables required for proper
operation and maintenance of part of cathodic protection system to be integrated with
permanent CP system designed on the basis of permanent CP design parameters and
associated equipment, for two years operation of the system.
15.0
INFORMATION REQUIRED WITH THE BID

Bidders are advised in their own interest to provide the following information along
with the bid without which the bids are liable for summary rejection.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Basis and calculations for preliminary system design for cathodic protection
system.
List of formulas to be used for detailed system design calculations.
Basis of system design, design calculations, equipment selection criteria, sizing
calculations along with characteristics curves for various equipments.
Preliminary bill of material for major equipment.
Details of the equipment/material offered along with technical leaflets/related
literatures/catalogues, make, rating, type test certificates.
Dimensions, weight and general arrangement drawings for each offered
equipment.
List of instruments, tools and tackles offered for maintenance and operation.
List of recommended maintenance/operation spares.
Clause-wise deviations, if any, to the specifications along with justifications.

MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
FOR
PERMANENT CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM
SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/TS/05/62/016B, R-1
D:\old data\FATEH\MP Region\Kailaras\Tender RFQ\TCP&PCP\Permanent Cathodic Proection - 016B-R1.doc
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/TS/05/62/016B
REV-1
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.0
SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION
4.0
CORROSION SURVEY
5.0
6.0
7.0
SYSTEM DETAILS
8.0
INSTALLATION
9.0
SHOP INSPECTION AND TESTING
10.0
11.0
FIELD TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
12.0
INTERFERENCE MITIGATION
13.0
CLOSE INTERVAL POTENTIAL SURVEY
14.0
15.0
16.0
Page 2 of 24
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 1 of 24
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This specification defines the requirements of system design, engineering, equipment/

materials, installation, testing and commissioning of a permanent impressed current
Cathodic Protection System for underground cross-country pipelines including
supplementing of corrosion survey, close interval potential logging survey,
investigations for interaction / interference problems and mitigation of the same and
taking corrective action of the protection system is found in adequate/ damaged at
any location after mitigation of the same.
This specification provides the basic parameters to develop a suitable permanent
impressed current cathodic protection system for the structures requiring protection.
All data required in this context shall be taken into consideration to develop an
acceptable design and for proper engineering of the system.
Compliance with these specifications and / approval of any documents submitted by
contractor shall in no case relieve the contractor of his contractual obligations.
1.2
Unless otherwise specified in job specifications for contracts involving complete system
design, supply of material /equipment, system installation and commissioning,
integration of the permanent impressed current CP system with the temporary CP
system (whether provided by a different contractor or included alongwith permanent
CP system) shall be the responsibility of the permanent CP contractor whose scope
shall include disconnection of sacrificial anodes wherever required.
This specification includes certain activities which are common with the temporary
cathodic protection facilities. In cases where temporary and permanent cathodic
protection works are being executed by the same agency, the common activities
would be completed as part of temporary cathodic protection system. In cases where
temporary and permanent cathodic protection works are being executed by different
agencies, the contractual scope of work shall be referred for further details.
2.0
CODES AND STANDARDS

The system design, performance and materials to be supplied shall, unless otherwise
specified, conform to the requirements of the following latest relevant applicable
specifications :
BIS Specifications
BS specification and codes of practice
ANSI specification
NFPA publications
NACE publications
IEC publications
DNV publications
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 2 of 24
IEEF publications
DIN publications
In case of conflicting requirements amongst any of the above standards, the
publication having most stringent requirement shall be governing.
3.0
SYSTEM IMPLIMENTATION
All work to be performed and supplies to be effected as a part of contract shall require
specific approval of owner or his authorised representative. Major activities requiring
approval shall include but not limited to the following :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Corrosion survey data interpretation report and plot plans for land acquisition.
Conceptual system design.
Basic engineering package.
Purchase requisition for major equipment and vendor approval.
Detailed engineering package.
Field testing and commissioning procedures.
Procedures for interference testing and mitigation.
As built documentation.
i)
CPL survey procedure.
4.0
CORROSION SURVEY
4.1
General
4.1.1
The details of corrosion survey including soil resistivity data along the right of way and
other data required for CP design are attached with this specification. However,
verification of its veracity and adequacy shall be the entire responsibility of the
contractor. In addition contractor shall have to generate / collect additional data
required for completeness of the job.
4.1.2
To carry out soil resistivity measurement (at pipeline depth) Wenners 4-pin method or
an equivalent method approved by owner shall be used. Survey instruments shall have
maximum AC and DC ground current rejection feature.
4.2
Soil resistivity survey at impressed current anode ground bed plot
4.2.1
Each selected anode bed plot shall be sub- divided into sub-plots. Sizes of sub-plots
shall depend upon the expected depth for soil resistivity investigations. Each of these
sub-plots shall be investigated for restivity data individually. Sufficient observations
shall be taken at each of these sub-plots as required and desired by Owner/ Owners
representative to obtain sufficient information about sub- soil stratification and,
wherever possible, to establish the depth of water table/ basement. The number of
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 3 of 24
subplots at each ground bed plot may very from six to ten. The exact number of subplots etc shall be decided at site in consolation with OWNER/ OWNERs representative.
4.2.2
Number, location, demarcation and size of sub-plots and number of sets of resistivity
observations required for each sub-plot shall be individually decided for each ground
bed plot location.
4.2.3
One or more ground bed plots may be required to be selected and surveyed at each
CP station to form a suitable ground bed.
4.3
Topographic Surveys
Cathodic protection stations consisting of anode ground bed, CP power supply
equipment etc. alongwith all associated cabling upto pipeline and any other related
equipment and accessories for CP stations shall be demarcated on the ground. Ground
plots so demarcated shall be surveyed for all other topographical and cadestral
features and topo- sheets shall be developed by the CONTRACTOR which should be
suitable for use in land acquisition etc.
4.4
Additional data to be collected

The following data shall be collected to generate design data for evaluation of
interaction / interference possibilities due to presence of other services in ROW/
vicinity. Client shall provide assistance for liaison work to the extent possible.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
Route and types of foreign services / pipeline in and around or crossing the
right of way (including those existing and those which are likely to come up
during contract execution).
Diameter, wall thickness, pressure, soil cover, and coating scheme used in case
of pipelines.
Details of the existing cathodic protection system protecting and services i.e.
location, rating, type of protection, anode beds, test station locations and their
connection scheme.
Remedial measures existing on foreign pipeline/ services to prevent interaction.
Graphical representation of existing structure/ pipe-to-soil potential records,
T/R unit current / voltage readings.
Possibility of integration / isolation of CP systems which may involve
negotiations with owners of other services.
Information on existing and proposed DC/AC power sources and system using
earth return path in the vicinity of the entire pipeline route such as HVDC
substations, fabrication yards with electric welding etc.
Crossing and parallel running of electrified and non-electrified traction
(alongwith information regarding operating voltage, AC/DC type etc.) as well
as abandoned tracks near ROW having electrical continuity with the tracks in
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
ix)
x)
xi)
REV-1
Page 4 of 24
use and the track to soil potential measurement using Cu to CuSo4 half cell
after tracks in use.
Crossing or parallel running of any existing or proposed HT AC/DC overhead
power lines alongwith details of voltage, AC/DC type etc.
Voltage rating, phases, sheathing details of underground power cables along
ROW or in its vicinity.
implementation proper protection scheme for the proposed pipeline.
Unless otherwise mentioned, contractor shall conduct necessary potential gradient

surveys for any existing anode ground beds that may interfere with the CP system of
the pipelines covered under this project.
4.5
Report
On completion of all field work, a report incorporating all the results generated from
surveys and details of additional data collected shall be furnished. The report shall also
contain detailed interpretation of survey results and resistivity data enclosed, probable
interference prone areas etc. to form a design basis for the scheme of cathodic
protection. This report shall also include various drawings prepared in connection with
the above work. The soil resistivity values shall be plotted on semilog graph sheets.
5.0
5.1
Protection current density range :

i)
Pipeline with FBE Coating

Pipeline Surroundings
Normal Soil
Marshy Area
High Resistivity Area (more than 100
ohm-mtr. Resistivity)
ii)
Minimum pipe protection current

density Milli-amp./sq. mtr. *
0.3
0.5
0.25
Pipeline with Polyethylene Coating

Pipeline Surroundings
Normal Soil
Marshy Area
High Resistivity Area (more than 100
ohm-mtr. Resistivity)
Minimum pipe protection current

density Milli-amp./sq. mtr. *
0.120
0.200
0.100
The pipe to soil ON potential must not exceed a value more negative than (-) 1.5V.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 5 of 24
Actual current density to be adopted shall be decided based on soil and other
environmental conditions, proximity of foreign pipelines and structures and
other interference areas affecting the installation. Where considered necessary
for satisfactory protection of pipeline, the current density shall be suitably
increased by Contractor.
5.2
Safety Factory
(SF)
: 1.3
5.3
Protection Current Density to be

considered for Pipeline without Coating
in Soil
(I2)
: 10 mA/m2
5.4
Service Life
(SL)
: 30 years
5.5
Type of Anode
5.6
Anode Consumption Rate
5.7
Type of Tail Cable
: XLPE Insulated/ PVC Sheathed
5.8
Size of Tail Cable
: 10mm2
5.9
Type of Anode bed
: Horizontal/ Vertical/ Deepwell
5.10
Shape of Anode for Swallow Bed

System
: Sheet Steel Canistered Anode prepackaged with petroleum coke breeze
5.11
Shape of Anode for deep well anode

bed
: String Anode
5.12
Current Density for Anode
5.13
Anode Utilisation Factor
5.14
Total Circuit Resistance

(RC)
(Anode to ground resistance, anode &
cathode cable resistance & pipe to earth
resistance for CP System
: MMO Coated Titanium Anode/ HiSiCr

Fe Anode
0.2 kg/amp Year for HiSiCrFe anode
2.0 mg/ Amp Year for MMO Titanium
anode
10 Amp/m2 for HiSiCrfe Anode

100 Amp/m2 for MMO Titanium anode
(UF)
: 0.85 for centrally connected HiSiCrFe

anode / MMO Titanium Anode
0.6 for centrally connected HiSiCrFe
anode
: 0.5 - 1.0 ohm
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 6 of 24
5.15
Coating Resistance
: 10,000 ohm/m2 for normal soil

4,500 ohm/m2 for marshy area
15,000 ohm/m2 for high resistvity area
5.16
Steel resistivity
: 2.2 x 10-5 ohm-m
5.17
Cathode Polarisation at Drainage Point

(Off Potential)
: (-) 1.25 V (max.)
5.18
Cathode Polarisation at farthest Point

(Off Potential)
: (-) 0.95V (min)
5.19
Pipeline Natural Potential
: (-) 0.45 V
6.0

Cathodic protection system shall be designed to meet the following criteria:
i)
ii)
iii)
7.0
The pipe to soil potential measurements shall be between (-) 0.95 V (Off)
(-) 1.25 V (Off) with respect to a copper/ copper sulphate reference electrode
using current interrupter installed in power supply line.
In rare circumstances, a minimum polarisation shift of (-) 100 millivolts may be
accepted as an adequate level of cathodic protection for the pipeline with the
written approval of owner.
Discretion to use any of the criteria listed above shall solely rest with the
owner/ owners representative.
A positive potential swing of 50 to 100 millivolts shall be considered as
sufficient to indicate the presence of an interaction situation requiring
investigation and incorporation of mitigation measures by the CONTRACTOR.
SYSTEM DETAILS
The system shall include the following major equipment / sub-system unless otherwise
specified in project specifications :
CP stations
TR units/ cathodic protection power supply modules (CPPSM).
Anode ground beds and anodes.
Anode lead junction box.
Test stations.
Permanent reference cells.
Electrical resistance probes.
Polarisation cell/ surge divertor/ grounding cell/ spark gap arrester
CP system at cased crossing.
Cables.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 7 of 24
The detailed specification of each system and equipment shall be furnished by the
CONTRACTOR. However, certain minimum requirements for the major equipment are
highlighted in this document.
All equipment shall be new and procured from approved reputed manufacturers.
Equipment offered shall be filed proven. Equipment requiring specialised maintenance
or operation shall be avoided as far as possible. Protytype equipment shall not be
accepted. Make and construction of all materials shall be subject to owners approval.
As far as possible, equipment including test stations, anode lead junction boxes etc.
shall be located in safe non-hazardous areas. However, all equipment to be installed in
hazardous areas shall be of flameproof type confirming to IS:2148 and suitable for gas
groups IIA & IIB and temperature class T3.
7.1
Cathodic Protection Stations

The number and exact locations of CP stations shall be worked out based on the
corrosion survey data collected. In addition, the following guidelines shall be followed
for selecting the locations.
i)
ii)
iii)
Number of CP stations and their selected location shall ensure that these
remain valid and are adequate for the full design life of the system after
considering all foreseeable factors.
As far as possible, the availability of nearly low resistivity areas for location of
associated ground beds must be ensured while selecting the locations of CP
stations.
As far as possible, locations of intermediate CP stations shall co-incide with the
locations of SV stations.
The proposed locations of CP stations are detailed in project specifications. The same
shall be verified for adequacy by the contractor and any additional requirements shall
be clearly brought out at the bidding stage itself.
7.2
Transformer Rectifier Unit/ CPSSM
7.2.1
Cathodic protection transformer rectifier unit (T/R Unit) working on controlled

rectification principle shall supply power for cathodic protection system. The T/R unit
shall be provided at CP stations where reliable power supply is available and specified
in project Specification.
The T/R unit shall be filed proven. The design, internal component quality, ratings and
layout of components shall ensure high MTBF and low MTTR.
The T/R unit shall conform to MECONs specification no MEC/TS/05/62/072 and T/R
unit data sheet.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 8 of 24
7.2.2
Cathodic Protection Power supply Module (CPPSM) for supply of power to Cathodic
Protection System shall work on DC input power supply & control the output DC
supply using power switch mode principle. The CPPSM shall be field proven. The
design, internal components, quality, rating & layout of components shall ensure high
MTBF & low MTTR. The CPPSM shall conform to MECON Standard Specification No.
MEC/TS/05/62/072A and CPPSM Data Sheet.
7.2
Anode Ground Beds and Anodes

i)
ii)
iii)
Each CP station shall have an independent anode ground bed which may be of
shallow or deep well construction depending upon the corrosion data collected
by the contractor. Deep well ground beds may also be used in the congested
locations where availability of suitable land for spread out ground beds is
restricted.
Ground bed shall be located electrically remote from the pipeline. Nearest part
of the anode bed shall atleast be 100 metres away from the pipeline. The
anodes installed in the ground shall be located in perennially moist strata,
wherever possible. Horizontal ground beds shall be at right angles to the
pipeline, as far as possible.
Anodes shall be of MMO coated titanium anode or HiSiCrFe anode. alongwith
tail cable.
MMO Titanium Anode
MMO Anode Dimension

Weight of Anode
Max. Recommended
Current density
Service Life
Anode Cable
Cable Length
As per manufacturers
recommendation
Recommended by manufacturer
w.r.t. dimension
100 A/m2
35 years
Single MMO Anode XLPE/PVC
Streng MMO Anode EPR/CSPE
As required
High Silicon Chromium Cast Iron Anode

Anode shall conform to ASTM A518M-86, Gr-III & composition shall be as
below :Silicon
Manganese
Carbon
Chromium
Copper
Molybdenum
Iron
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
14.2 14.75%
1.5% max.
0.7 1.1%
3.25 5.0%
0.5% max.
0.2% max.
Reminder
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 9 of 24
The anode shall be hollow type centrally connected or solid type end
connected, cable to anode joint shall be reliable and adequate for derigh life of
anode.
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
7.3
Sheet steel anode canisters of adequate size shall be provided for each anode
of selected Anode canisters shall be filled with petroleum coke breeze with a
typical carbon content of 91.77%. String anode shall be used for days well
ground bed.
In case of deep well ground beds calcined fluid petroleum coke breeze with a
typical carbon content of 91.77% shall be provided in the well surrounding the
anodes.
Each shallow anode bed shall contain anodes with canisters positioned
horizontal or vertical in the soil with suitable backfill at appropriate depth with
respect to configuration horizontal or vertical.
Layout of anode installation in anode bed shall be detailed out in drawings
showing anode installation details, anode grouping, anode wiring, anode cable
routing etc.
The deepwell anode ground bed details shall include the details of anodes,
deepwell casing, anode positioning, anode cable supporting, deepwell gas
venting, active, passive portions of ground bed etc.
Anodes shall be supplied complete with tail cables which shall be long enough
for termination on their associated junction boxes without intermediate joints.
Exact lengths and termination details shall be indicated in construction
drawings by Contractor.
Anode bed separation from pipeline shall be tested for interaction.
Potential gradient around the anode bed shall be within safety requirements
and its effective boundary shall be defined and secured.
In case two parallel pipelines running in the same ROW. The anode ground
beds of respective pipelines shall be located on the respective sides of the
pipelines.
The depth of deepwell anode ground bed shall be sufficient enough to reduce
anode influence on incidental structures within proposed location.
Anode Junction Box

i)
Depending on the size and configuration of anode ground beds, one or more
anode junction boxes shall be provided at each ground bed.
All cable tails from individual anodes shall be terminated onto these anode
junction boxes which shall be further connected to anode cable coming from
CP station power source.
ii)
Junction boxes shall have sheet steel enclosure of minimum 3 mm thickness
and hinged lockable shutters. They shall be weatherproof with degree of
protection IP-55. Junction boxes shall have anode bus and terminal plate with
adequate number of antiloosening type of identified terminals. Provision shall
be made for measurement and control of individual anode current by providing
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
iii)
7.5

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 10 of 24
suitable shunt and resistors. Anode disconnecting link shall be provided for
each anode circuit. 30% spare terminals shall be provided.
In case of sectionalized ground beds, an additional common anode
disconnecting link for each section of ground bed shall be provided for
disconnection of any section of ground bed.
Cathode Junction Box

One cathode junction box shall be provided at each CP Station for Permanent Pipe to
soil potential measurement circuit & cathode connection. Junction boxes shall have
sheet steel enclosure of minimum 3 mm thickness and hinged lockable shutters. They
shall be weatherproof with degree of protection IP-55. Junction boxes shall have
cathode bus and terminal plate with adequate number of antiloosening type of
identified terminals.
7.4
Test Stations
i)
Test stations shall be provided along the pipeline ROW for monitoring the
performance of the cathodic protection system at intervals not exceeding 1000
meters. In addition to above, test stations shall also be provided at the
following locations :a)
At both sides of major road crossings.
b)
At all insulating joints.
c)
At vulnerable locations with drastic changes in soil resistivity.
d)
At locations of grounding cells, surge diverters and polarisation cells.
e)
At HT AC/DC overhead line crossings selected locations where HT
overhead is in the vicinity of the pipeline.
f)
At railway line crossings and along running parallel to the pipeline.
g)
At both sides of major river crossings.
h)
At high voltage cable crossing or along routes where HV cables are
running in parallel.
i)
In the vicinity of DC network or grounding systems where interference
problems are suspected.
j)
At crossings of other pipelines/ structures.
k)
At the locations of reference cell and ER probe installation.
l)
At both sides of cased crossings.
m)
Locations where interference is expected.
n)
At any other locations considered necessary by OWNER/ OWNERS
representative.
ii)
iii)
Bond stations shall be provided at required locations as a means to monitor

and control current flow between the pipeline and foreign pipelines / structures
that may exist in common ROW.
Test stations with current measuring facility shall be provided at interval not
exceeding 3.0 KM, at each intermediate CP station drainage point (to measure
pipeline current on any one side of pipeline from drainage point), at
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
7.5
REV-1
Page 11 of 24
interference prone areas, on both sides of major river crossings and at least at
two additional locations along the pipeline ROW between two CP stations.
All test stations shall have weatherproof enclosure, with hinged lockable
shutter and degree of protection IP-55. Enclosure shall be made of sheet steel
of atleast 3 mm thickness and shall be suitable for MS post mounting.
Test station shall be installed with the face of the test station facing the
pipeline. The nameplate of test stations shall carry the following minimum
information :
Test station number
Chainage in Km.
Test station connection scheme
Distance from pipe line in mtrs.
Direction of product flow.
Number of terminals and different schemes of wiring shall be as per the test
station connection scheme sketch. Minimum twenty percent spare terminals
shall be provided in each test station.
The location of all the test station shall be marked with their connection
scheme and other relevant information on alignment sheets. A detailed teststation schedules shall be prepared.
Permanent Reference Cells

i)
High purity copper / copper sulphate reference cells with proven high reliability
shall be provided for stable pipe to soil potential measurement reference at CP
stations and at computerized test station locations along ROW.
ii)
Three numbers reference electrodes shall be installed at each
cathodic
protection station.
iv)
The reference cell for high resistivity areas shall be suitable for the prevailing
dry soil conditions to give maximum service life.
v)
Permanent reference cells shall be installed with backfill material.
vi)
Silver/ Silver Chloride reference cells in place of copper / copper sulphate cells
shall be provided at marshy area locations where water table is high and subsoil water or soil shows chlorine concentration more than 300 PPM.
vii)
The cable from reference cells shall be provided upto CP power source at CP
stations. The cable shall be routed through cathod junction box near pipeline.
viii)
7.6

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
The life of reference cell shall be minimum 20 years under installed condition.
Electrical Resistance Probe

Where specified in project specifications, electrical resistance probes utilising the
electrical resistance technique shall be provided along the pipeline at marshy areas
and at vulnerable locations to monitor the external corrosion activity on the pipeline.
The lead wires of the probe shall be connected to pipeline and terminated inside test
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 12 of 24
station enabling periodic resistance measurement with the probe using a portable
measuring instrument.
The material of the E/R probe element shall be of the same alloy as of the pipeline
material.
The E/R probes shall be provided preferably at the bottom portion of pipeline. The
locations of E/R probes shall be got approved.
Portable E/R probe reading instrument shall be supplied by contractor.
7.7
Polarisation Cell and Surge Divertor / Grounding Cell

i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
Where high voltage (66 KV and above) transmission line runs in parallel or
crosses the pipeline, the pipeline shall be grounded through polarisation cells &
zinc anodes of minimum 20 kg net each. Alternatively, grounding could be
done directly with zinc galvanic anodes of minimum 20 kg net each at the
discretion of owner. Grounding shall be done at regular intervals where
transmission lines run parallel within 25 meter of the pipeline to ground any
surges on the pipeline that would appear in case of transmission line faults.
In case of continuous induction of voltage on the pipeline beyond safe limits is
expected or observed during commissioning due to HV Line of any rating or
others equipment., the pipeline shall be grounded to the earth system of
nearest HV transmission tower of the transmisison line causing the voltage
induction through polarisation cell or the pipeline shall be grounded to a
separate earthing system of zinc galvanic anodes through polarisation cell.
Alternatively, the pipeline shall be directly grounded with zinc galvanic anodes
of minimum 20 kg net each at the discretion of the owner. The polarisation cell
shall be installed in test station.
Spark gap arrestor alongwith zinc ground cell shall be connected across each
insulating joint to protect in from high voltage surges.
Alternatively, zinc grounding cell may be provided across insulating joints along
ROW where the pipeline on both the sides of the insulating joint are
cathodically protected and difference of protection voltage is not more then 0.4
volts.
The total system including cables, cable termination, anodes/ surge divertors
shall be suitable for the anticipated fault current at the location of installation.
Unless otherwise specified on data sheet, the minimum rating of grounding
cells, polarisation cells and surge diverters shall be as below:
a)
Grounding Cell
b)
Type
:
Current rating :
Polarisation cell
Zinc, 2 or 4 plate type.

Suitable to pass more than 10KA surge
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 13 of 24
Type:- Solid station Electrolytic tie multi pairs S.S plate grounding cell.
c)
Spark Gap Arrester
Type
:
Current, 8/20
:
micro second wave
Spark- over, AC Voltage
50 Hz
:
Impulse (1.2/50
:
micro sec)
7.8
Spark gap.
100 Kilo Amp.
1 KV
2.2 KV
vii)
The grounding cell, spark gaparrester and polarisation cell system shall be
adequately sized and suitable for the design life of permanent CP system. The
directly buried zinc or magnesium anodes shall also be adequately sized for the
life of the permanent CP system, taking into consideration discharge from the
anodes. The grounding system shall have minimum resistance to earth to
restrict the pipeline voltage as per NACE Criteria.
viii)
HT transmission overhead lines of voltage below 66KV also required mitigation

measures should be provided to take care of continuous induction of voltage
interface due to presence of transmission line in close proximity.
CP at cased crossing
i)
At cased crossing where casing is coated, the casing shall be protected by

sacrificial anode installations which shall be provided at both ends of casing.
The anode installation shall be sized based on the permanent C.P. design
parameters and design life specified for the main pipeline but where casing is
uncoated additional protection for casing is not required.
The carrier pipe inside the casing shall be protected by zinc ribbon anodes weld
connected to the outer surface of bottom of carrier pipe extending upto hour
hand position of 4 and 8 oclock. The anodes shall be placed at close intervals
as per design calculations and shall be sized based on the permanent CP
design parameters and design life.
7.9
Painting
The sheet steel used for fabrication shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased to
remove mill scale, rust, grease and dirt. Fabricated structures shall be pickled and then
rinsed to remove any trace of acid. The under surface shall be prepared by applying a
coat of phosphate paint and a coat of yellow zinc chromate primer. The under surface
shall be free from all imperfections before undertaking the finishing coat.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 14 of 24
After preparation of the under surface, spray painting with two coats of final paint
shall be done. The finished panels shall be dried in ovens in dust free atmosphere.
Panel finish shall be free from imperfections like pinholes, orange peels, runoff paint
etc. Bidder shall furnish detailed painting procedure alongwith bids.
All unpainted steel parts shall be cadmium plated to prevent rust formation.
7.10
Cables
i)
ii)
7.11
Cables shall be annealed high conductivity tinned stranded copper conductor,

XLPE insulated, PVC sheathed, 650/1100 V grade, armoured for
Cathode/Anode / measurement cable. Unless otherwise specified in project
specifications, the size of the copper conductor shall be minimum 35 sq. mm.
for anode and cathode cables, 6 sq. mm. for potential measurement and
reference cells, 10 sq. mm. for current measurement, 25 sq. mm. for bonding/
grounding and 10 sq. mm. for anode tail cables. The anode tail cables shall be
XLPE insulated & PVC sheathed and not be armoured and length shall be
sufficient for termination on anode lead junction box without any joint. PE
sleeves shall be provided for unarmoured cables.
The T/R unit incomer cable shall be minimum 10 sq. mm. aluminium, 650/1100
V PVC insulated, armoured, PVC sheathed.
Panel Cabling and cable glands

Adequate space shall be provided inside the panel for termination of cables.
Termination shall be performed using crimped lugs. Tags with cable numbers
engraved on it shall be attached to each cable at both ends. Cable glands shall be
double compression type of Nickel/ Chromium plated brass. The lugs shall be of tinned
copper. Phases of AC power cables shall be identified with red, yellow, blue PVC
adhesive material.
The armour of the cables from pipeline to CP station (potential measurement,
reference cell & drainage cables etc.), CP station to ground bed (anode cable) and test
station to pipeline shall be earthed only at one end of the cable to avoid armour
carrying CP current.
8.0
INSTALLATION
8.1
Cable Laying
j)
Cables shall be laid in accordance with approved layout drawings to be

prepared by the contractor. No straight through joint shall be permitted in a
single run of cable. Cable route shall be carefully measured and cables cut to
required length. Enough slackness in cable shall be provided near anodes to
account for any settling of anode.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
8.2
REV-1
Page 15 of 24
All cables inside station / plant area shall be laid at a depth of 0.75 M. Cables
outside station / plant area shall be laid at a depth of 1.5m. Cables shall be laid
in sand under brick cover and back filled with normal soil. Outside station /
plant area, the routes shall be marked with polythylene cable warning mats
placed at a depth of 0.9 mtr. from the finished grade.
In case of above ground cable installations, all un-armoured CP cables shall be
laid in GI conduits of sufficiently large size.
All underground unarmoured cables shall run through PE sleeves. Distant
measurement cables and permanent reference cell cables routed along the
pipeline shall be carried at the top of the carrier pipe by securely strapping it
with adhesive tape or equivalent as required.
RCC or GI pipes of proper size shall be provided for all underground cables for
road crossings.
Cables shall be neatly arranged in trenches in such a manner that crisscrossing is avoided and final take-off to equipment is facilitated.
Cable to pipe connections

All cable connections to the pipeline including charged foreign pipelines shall be made
by an approved exothermic process. A suitable water proof sealing system of the cable
connections shall be made which will be compatible with parent coating system of the
pipeline after exnothernice process.
For charged pipeline pin-brazing shall be used. Eutectic solder shall not be acceptable
for charged or non-charged pipeline.
8.3
Ground bed fencing

A chain link fencing shall be provided around each ground bed location as per job
requirements.
8.4
Civil Works
All civil works as per enclosed specifications associated with the complete cathodic
protection system are included in scope of contractor. This shall include providing
cable trenches and foundations for all equipment, outdoor T/R units, anode lead
junction boxes, all test stations, polarisation cells, etc.
9.0
SHOP INSPECTION AND TESTING

i)
Owner/ Owners representative shall visit the works during manufacture of

various equipment to assess the progress of work as well as to ascertain that
only quality raw materials are used. All necessary assistance shall be provided
by contractor and vendors during such inspections.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
ii)
iii)
iv)
10.0
REV-1
Page 16 of 24
The minimum testing, inspection requirements for all components / equipment

shall conform to requirement as defined in the relevant codes and standards.
Detailed inspection and testing procedures alongwith the acceptance criteria
shall be prepared by contractor for Owners approval.
Test certificates including test records, performance curves etc. shall be
furnished with sufficient information to identify the equipment to which the
certificate referes and must carry project title, owners name and purchase
order details etc.
Owner reserves the right to ask for inspection of all or any item 7under the
contract and witness all tests and carryout inspection or authorise his
representative to witness tests and carryout inspection. Contractor shall notify
the Owner/ Owners representative atleast 20 days in advance giving exact
details of tests, dates and addresses of locations where the tests would be
carried out.

All equipment / material shall be protected for inland/marine, transport, carriage at
site and outdoor storage during transit and at site. All packages shall be clearly, legibly
and durably marked with uniform block letters giving the relevant equipment /
material details. Each package shall contain a packing list in a water proof envelope.
Copies of the packing list, in triplicate, shall be forwarded to owner prior to despatch.
All items of material shall be clearly marked for easy identification against the packing
list.
11.0
FIELD TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
11.1
System Testing at Site

The contractor shall furnish the detailed field testing and commissioning procedures
for approval. Field tests as per these approved procedures shall be carried out on the
equipment / systems before these are put into service. Acceptance of the complete
installation shall be contingent upon inspection and test results. Field testing shall
include but not be limited to the following.
i)
ii)
iii)
Contractor shall carryout pre-commissioning operation after completion of

installation of the system including all pre-commissioning checks, setting of all
equipment, control and protective devices. All site tests, reliability and
performances tests shall be carried out by contractor.
Before the electrical facilities are put into operation, necessary tests shall be
carried out to establish that all equipment, devices, wiring and connection have
been correctly installed, connected and are in good working condition as
required for the intended operation.
Owner/ Owners representative may witness all tests. At least one weeks
notice shall be given before commencing the tests.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
iv)
v)
Page 17 of 24
All tools, equipment and instruments required for testing shall be provided by
contractor.
Generally, the following minimum tests must be carried out and recorded in
proformas given in subsequent clauses :
Checking
a)
-
REV-1
Inspection
Testing
Visual inspection, comparison with drawings

and specifications.
Detailed physical inspection, if necessary, by taking apart
the component parts.
Simulation tests of equipment to determine its
operational fitness.
Cables
Cable no.
Voltage grade.
Conductor cross section
Continuity check
Voltage test
Insulation resistance values between each core & earth, between cores.
All cables shall be tested by 500V megger.

b)
-
E/R Probe
Location / Identification number
Checking of wiring as per schematics
Resistance reading of probe
c)
-
Reference Cell
Location
Potential reading
Type of cell
d)
Insulating Joint
Insulation resistance across the joint shall be checked before and after
charging the pipeline by means of insulating joint tester. Pipe to soil potential
of both protected and non-protected sides of the insulating joint shall be
checked before and after energisation of CP system.
e)
-
Surge Diverter
Location / identification number
Rating
Check for healthyness
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
f)
-
11.2

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 18 of 24
Polarisation Cell
Location / Identification number
Rating
Check for electrolyte
Check for wiring
Check standby current drain after CP system energisation. (Current drain with
respect to voltage across the cell shall be recorded).
Details of grounding provided for the polarisation cell.
g)
-
Spark Gap Arrester

Location/ identification NO
Ratings
h)
-
Anode Ground Bed

Location / Station
Check for actual layout and compliance with drawings
Resistance of each individual anode
Current dissipation by each individual anode with respect to anode voltage
Total resistance of complete anode bed
Mutual interference
i)
-
Grounding Cell
Location
Type / no. of anodes
Ratings
CP Commissioning Procedure
A model commissioning procedure for a 2 station CP system of a pipeline is given
below for general guidance. Contractor shall develop detailed commissioning
procedure as per this guideline and get it approved before commencing CP system
commissioning activities.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
On completion of installation of anode beds and other systems as envisaged in

this specification, they shall be individually checked, tested and compared
against the agreed specifications and procedure.
The CP commissioning shall be carried out with current interrupter provided in
the output of the CP TR/ ECU Unit to measure CP ON & OFF potentials.
Current dissipated by each anode shall be corrected through anode lead
junction box.
Electrical continuity of the entire pipeline shall be verified in conformity with
design.
Input resistance of the pipeline at all the drainage points shall be checked and
recorded.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 19 of 24
All current measuring test stations shall be calibrated and recorded.

Temporary protection facilities provided (if any) which do not form part of
permanent CP shall be disconnected from the system & removed unless agreed
otherwise.
The pipeline shall be allowed to depolarize for atleast 72 hours after switching
off the protection (if any) of all other pipelines in the common R.O.W.
Before the pipeline are put on charge by switching on any of the CP stations,
natural structure-to-electrolyte potential values at all the test stations of the
system shall be measured with respect to Copper/ Copper Sulphate half cell.
CP station no. 1 shall be energised so as to achieve a maximum pipe soil
potential (PSP) as specified at the test station nearest to the drainage point,
and observations on either spread of protected portion of pipeline under this
CP station shall be taken for PSP values pipeline current values across the
cross section of the pipeline shall also be determined at all the intended test
stations influenced by this station.
CP station no. 1 shall now be switched off and CP station no. 2 shall be
switched on and measurement procedure as adopted in above step (at cl. IX)
shall be repeated.
All the CP stations of the system shall be switched off and the pipelines shall
be allowed to depolarize. All the CP stations in the system shall then be
simultaneously switched 'on' and PSP values at the drainage points of pipeline
shall be brought to a value of maximum PSP as specified, and a complete set
of PSP observations shall be taken.
Another complete set of PSP observations shall be taken after lines have
stayed on charge for 24/ 48 hours. If there are appreciable differences in these
observations as compared to those of earlier set, a third set of observations
shall be taken after 72 hrs. Maximum drainage point protective potentials shall
not be allowed to go beyond the maximum PSP values as specified, in any
case.
The output of all CP stations shall then be so adjusted that the sites of
occurrence of least negative protective potentials are increased to (-) 1.00 V. A
full set of observations shall again be taken 72 hrs. after the adjustment of
potentials and the protection system shall be left in this state of operation.
xiii)
xiv)
Care shall be exercised to ensure that power supply remains uninterrupted

during the period of commissioning. In case of an interruption, the test in
progress shall be repeated after allowing time for polarization. More sets of
observations may be advised to be taken by the Owner/ Owner's
representative in any of the above mentioned steps.
PSP values at each of the test stations of the existing pipelines shall be
measured and plotted where existing pipelines run in parallel to the new
pipeline and mutual interference situations between the pipelines shall be
identified and necessary mitigation shall be carried out.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 20 of 24
Interference situations shall also be identified and mitigated by comparing

different sets of readings taken at same test stations at different intervals of
time under identical conditions where positive potential swing exceed 50 mV.
xv)
xvi)
xvii)
xviii)
Final records of testing and commissioning including graphical representation

of final structure to electrolyte potential readings shall be compiled with
interpretation in consolation with owner/ owner's representative and
submitted.
As a result of these tests, if any deficiencies are found in the system, the same
shall be rectified by the contractor at no extra cost or time effect, to the
complete satisfaction of Owner/ Owner's representative. Such deficiencies shall
include mitigation of interference problems that may be found existing in the
course of testing and commissioning. A set of PSP observations shall also be
taken during the peak of the first dry season after commissioning the system
into regular operation. Any deficiency found in the protection of the pipeline
shall have to be rectified by the contractor at his own cost.
If it is found during commissioning that the sites of occurrence of least
negative protective potentials are less negative than (-) 1.00 V even after 72
hrs. of operation, then the drainage point potentials shall be increased
depending upon anode ground bed currents in consolation with Owner/
Owner's representative In any case, the drainage point protective 'ON'
potential values shall not exceed the PSP values specified at cl. 5.1 of this
document and the pipe to soil 'OFF' potential shall not exceed a value more
negative than (-) 1.20 V at any location on the pipeline.
The current dissipated by individual anodes shall be measured from the anode
lead junction box and corrected for equal dissipation to the extent possible
keeping the total ground bed current same.
12.0
INTERFERENCE MITIGATION
12.1
Investigation shall be made for stray current electrolysis of the pipeline, mutual
interference between the pipeline and foreign pipelines / structures, interference on
foreign pipelines / structures due to the CP of the pipeline and ground bed,
interference on metallic structures which lie in between pipeline and ground bed or
near to ground bed, AC induction on pipeline due to overhead high voltage power
lines, interference due to high voltage DC lines, electric traction etc.
12.2
Measurements including pipe to soil potentials and pipe currents etc. on the pipeline /
structure being CP protected and on foreign pipelines / structures, and ground
potential gradient etc. shall be made to investigate the current discharge and pickup
locations. In case of fluctuating stray currents, investigations shall be made
continuously over a period of time and if required simultaneously at different locations
to find out the stray current source (s). Recorders shall be preferably be used for long
time measurements.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
REV-1
Page 21 of 24
12.3
Wherever foreign pipelines which may or may not be protected by an independent CP

system run in parallel to the protected pipeline, either in the same trench or very near
to the protected pipeline and are not bonded to it, investigations shall be performed
for current discharge points on both the pipelines.
12.4
Mitigative measures shall be provided depending upon the type of interference. These
shall include installation of bond with variable resistor and diodes, installation of
galvanic anodes for auxiliary drainage of current, adjustment/ relocation (if possible)
of offending interference source, provision of electrical shield etc. depending on the
type of interference.
Bond with foreign pipelines / structures as a mitigation measure shall be provided
where the owners of the foreign pipelines / structures have no objection. Otherwise
alternative mitigatio measures shall be provided. Wherever bonding is provided for
mitigaiton, the bonding resistor shall be adjusted for optimum value for minimum / no
interference. Galvanic anodes installed as a mitigaiton measure shall be adequately
sized for the design life specified for permanent CP system.
12.5
Where high voltage (66 KV and above) transmission lines run in parallel or cross the
pipeline, the pipeline shall be grounded through polarisation cells at regular intervals
to ground any surge on the pipeline that would appear in case of transmission line
faults. Alternatively, grounding could also be done with galvanic anodes (Magnesium
or Zinc depending on pipeline voltage) at the discretion of the owner. These grounding
installation shall be provided wherever transmission lines run within 25 mtr. of the
pipeline.
A.C. voltage measurements shall also be made on the pipeline to find out continuous
induction of voltage beyond safe limits. In such a case, the pipeline shall be grounded
to ht enearest transmission galvanic (zinc or magnesium) anodes at the discretion of
the owner.
13.0
CLOSE INTERVAL POTENTIAL SURVEY

Where specified, contractor shall carry out a close internal potential survey over the
entire length of pipeline by computerised potential logging method and identify
suspected holiday spots on the pipeline coating, after the back filling has been
consolidated sufficiently and CP system has stabilized. Contractor shall identify the
necessary pipe coating required to be repaired. Detailed procedures for running this
survey shall be submitted for approval.
The close interval potential logging survey shall be carried out at approx. 0.75m
intervals & both ON & OFF potentials shall be measured by operating the current
interrupters of CP TR/ ECU unit during survey
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
14.0
14.1
General
14.2
REV-1
Page 22 of 24
i)
Within three weeks from the date of issue of Purchase Order, Contractor shall
submit four copies of the list of all drawings / data/ manuals / procedures to be
submitted for approval, identifying each document by a number and
descriptive title and schedule date. This list shall be revised and extended, as
necessary, during the progress of work.
ii)
All drawings and documents shall be in English and shall follow metric system.
Number of copies for each submission shall be as follows unless specified
otherwise :
Submission
No. of copies
a)
For Review/ Approval
6 copies
b)
Drawings issued for

execution / construction
6 copies
c)
Final / As-built drgs.
6 copes and one set of

reproducible.
d)
Operation / Maintenance
Manual, Vendor data
6 copies
Contract Drawings and Documents

As a part of the contract, drawings and documents to be furnished by the contractor
shall include but are not limited to the following :
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
a)
b)
Report on corrosion survey.

Basis of system design and design calculations, equipment selection criteria
and sizing calculations.
Bills of material, material requisitions and Purchase requisitions.
Detailed construction drawings (including as-built status).
Separate layout drawings for each CP station showing anodeground bed
location, anodeground bed installation details, CP station location, cable
laying, ROW location. Drainage connection location, permanent reference cell
locations and topographic details of the entire area.
Equipment layout, cable layout and schedules.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
p)
15.0
REV-1
Page 23 of 24
Marker drawings for cable route, anode-ground bed, drainage connection

point, permanent reference cell, E/R probe, polarisation cell, pipeline grounding
anodes, grounding cells, etc.
Fabrication details of High Silicon cast iron canistered anode with tail cable.
Fabrication, connection and installation drawing for anode-junction box.
Anode- ground bed construction and installation details for horizontal anodeground bed and deep well ground bed.
Fabrication, installation and connection scheme drawing for different types of
test-stations.
Fabrication and installation details of Copper/ Copper Sulphate type, Silver/
Silver Chloride type and Zinc type permanent reference cells, E/R probes,
grounding cells, surge divertor, etc.
Fabrication and installation details of polarisation cell and its enclosure/
housing.
Cable to pipe joint details for charged and non charged pipelines.
Incorporation of corrosion survey data, CP stations, test stations, anode beds,
polarisation cells, grounding cells, grounding anodes, surge divertors etc. and
other relevant features of CP system in pipeline alignment sheets and other
related drawings.
Identification of sections of pipeline affected by interference, sources of
interference, details of interference mitigation arrangements provided. Various
measurement data at all relevant test stations with and without mitigaiton
measures provided.
Detailed commissioning report including various measurement data at all test
stations.
Vendor drawings and catalogues, test certificates.
Operation and maintenance manual.
Miscellaneous
Equipment inspection and testing procedures.
Construction, installation procedures.
Field testing and commissioning procedures.
Procedures and report on close interval potential survey.
Procedure for monitoring of cathodic protection after commissioning.
Quality control procedure.

i)
ii)
Contractor shall provide a list of all instruments, tools and tackles necessary for
proper operaiton and maintenance of complete cathodic protection system and
associated equipemnt alongwith prices.
Contractor shall provide a list of spares and consumables required alongwith
prices for proper operaiton and maintenance of complete cathodic protection
system and associated equipment for two years operaiton of the system.
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
PROCESS & PIPING

DESIGN SECTION

PERMANENT CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
16.0
REV-1
Page 24 of 24
INFORMATION REQUIRED WITH THE BID

Bidders are advised in their own interest to provide the following information
alongwith the bid offer without which the bids are liable for summary rejection :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
Basis and calculations for preliminary system design of permanent cathodic

protection system.
List of formula to the used for detailed system design calculations, with brief
explanations.
Basis of system design, design calculations, equipment selection criteria, sizing
calculations alongwith characteristic curves for various equipments.
Preliminary bill of material for major equipment.
Details of the equipment/ material offered along with technical leaflets /
related literature / catalogues, make, rating, type test certificates etc.
Dimensions, weight and general arrangement drawings for each offered
equipment.
List of instruments, tools, tackles offered for maintenance and operation.
List of recommended maintenance / operation spares.
Clause wise deviations, if any, to the specifications alongwith justifications.

MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
FOR
CORROSION SURVEY
SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/TS/05/62/016C
D:\old data\FATEH\MP Region\Kailaras\Tender RFQ\TCP&PCP\Specification - Corrosion Survey - 016C.doc
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.0
GENERAL
4.0
SOIL RESISTIVITY SURVEY
5.0
TESTS ON SOIL SAMPLES
6.0
ADDITIONAL DATA COLLECTION
7.0
REPORT
8.0
Page No.
1.0
SCOPE
The specification covers the corrosion survey including measurement of
soil resistivity, chemical analysis of soil/ water and other cathodic
protection related data collection along right of way of the pipelines.
2.0
CODES AND STANDARDS

Equipment and measurement techniques shall unless otherwise
specified, conform to the requirement of following latest applicable
standards:BIS Specifications
BS Specifications and Codes of Practice
NACE Publications
3.0
GENERAL
This specification defines the basic guidelines for carrying out the
corrosion survey. Contractor shall be responsible for providing
necessary data interpretation based on corrosion survey measurement
which is intended to form a basis for design of cathodic protection
system for the pipeline to be burried along ROW.
4.0
SOIL RESISTIVITY SURVEY
4.1
Unless otherwise specified the soil resistivity measurements shall be

carried out at intervals of approximately 500 mtr. along the ROW.
Where soil resistivity is less than 100 ohm mtr and two successive
readings differ by more than 2:1 then additional soil resistivity readings
in between the two locations shall be taken.
4.2
To carryout the soil resistivity measurement Wenners 4 pin method or

approved equal shall be used. The depth of resistivity measurement
shall be around the burial depth of the pipeline or 1.5 mtr
approximately. At locations where multi layer soil with large variation
in resistivity/ corrosiveness is expected and/ or locations specifically
advised by Owner or his representative resistivity measurements at
additional depth of upto 2.5 mtr (approx.) or more shall be taken. In
general the resistivity of soil which shall be surrounding the pipe shall
Page 1 of 5
be measured. Hence the depth of measurement/ electrode spacings

may vary depending on totography and strata at the area. In general,
electrode spacing, shall be approximately equal to 1.5 times the depth
of the pipelines.
4.3
At places where Right-of-way has not yet been cleared measurement

shall eb made right over the centre line of pipeline route surveyed
accounting for the cuttings/ fillings also.
4.4
Observations shall be made enclosing the soils adjoining the trench

wherever pipeline trenching has already been done.
4.5
The observations shall be made enclosing the soil immediately

surrounding the pipeline route where right of way has been cleared but
trenching has not been done.
4.6
All measurement shall be taken at right angles to the right of way

unless otherwise asked by Owner or his representative at site.
4.7
At places in right of way where other pipelines are already existing care
shall be taken to precisely locate such pipes line and take such
precautions that observations are not adversely affected by presence of
such pipelines.
4.8
Care shall also be taken that the observations are not influenced by
presence of other earth currents in the area especially in the vicinity of
HT lines and plants using earth return in their source of power etc.
4.9
Wherever possible/ advised by Owner or his representative depth of

water table shall be determined by resistivity observations.
4.10
All measurements shall be made and recorded in metric units. While

recording the data reference to the nearest point shall be made. The
provide visual representation of variations in the resistivities along right
of way, values shall be plotted on semilog graph sheets. The resistivity
graph shall also indicate the resistivities at additional depths measured
at various locations and depth of water table.
Page 2 of 5
5.0
TESTS ON SOIL SAMPLES

Soil/ water samples shall be collected along the right of way for
analysis. Samples shall be collected on an average at one location per
every 10 km along right of way with minimum at two locations. Exact
locations shall be decided at site depending on the type of soil, soil
resistivity and in consultation with Owner or his representative. The
soil samples shall be collected at 1 mtr and 2 mtr depth at each
location.
The collected soil/ water samples shall be analysed to determine
presenceand percentage of corrosive compounds including moisture
content, oxygen activity and pH value.
6.0
ADDITIONAL DATA COLLECTION

The following data shall be collected with a view to generate design
data of evaluation of cathodic protection interaction possibilities due to
presence of other services in right of way and its vicinity.
6.1
Route and types of foreign service/ pipelines in and around or crossing

the right of way.
6.2
Diameter, wall thickness, pressure, soil cover etc. of the foreign

pipeline.
6.3
Voltage rating, phases and sheathing details of parallel running or

crossing cables with ROW.
6.4
Foreign pipeline coating details.
6.5
Details of exiting cathodic protection systems protecting the services

including rating and location of grounds bed test station locations and
connections schemes etc. Where pipeline is likely to pass close to any
existing ground bed, necessary anode-bed potential gradient survey
shall be carried out.
6.6
Interference remedial measures existing on foreign pipelines/ services/

shall be collected from the owner of the foreign pipeline/ services.
Page 3 of 5
6.7
Graphical representation of existing structure/ pipe to soil potential

records, Transformer Rectifier Unit/ CP Power source voltage/ current
readings.
6.8
Possibilities of integration/ isolation of the pipeline CP System with

foreign pipeline/ structure CP System, which may involved negotiation
with Owners of foreign services.
6.9
Information on existing and proposed DC/ AC power sources and

system in the vicinity of the entire right of way.
6.10
Crossing and parallel running of electrified and non-electrified railway

tracks alongwith details of operating voltage and type (AC/ DC).
6.11
Crossings or parallel running of any H.T. AC/ DC overhead line with in

approximately 25 mtr from ROW alongwith details of voltage rating,
fault level etc.
6.12

implementing of proper cathodic protection scheme for the proposed
pipeline.
7.0
REPORT
On completion of all the field and laboratory work an interim report
incorporating results generated from surveys, additional data collected,
results of test carried out, etc. shall be submitted for comments/
approval. The final report incorporating comments/ missing data shall
be furnished for records. The report alongwith various drawings,
graphs etc. prepared in connection with the work shall be submitted
alongwith six prints by the contractor.
8.0

Bidder shall provided following information alongwith the bid without
which the bids are liable for summary rejection.
8.1
Instruments that will be used for carrying out soil resistivity survey.
Page 4 of 5
8.2
Measures that will be taken to avoid foreign pipelines/ HT lines etc.

affecting the soil resistivity observations.
8.3
Measurement location identification procedure.
8.4
Procedure for collection of soil samples.
8.5
Description of soil test procedure.
8.6
Specification of soil testing instruments.
8.7
Formats for presentation of results.
Page 5 of 5

FOR
CATHODIC PROTECTION POWER
SUPPLY MODULE (CPPSM)
SPECIFICATION NO. MEC/05/S/26/072A
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
D:\old data\FATEH\MP Region\Kailaras\Tender RFQ\TCP&PCP\CPPSM-spec.doc
Page 1 of 9
CONTENTS
Sl.No.
Description
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.0
SERVICE CONDITIONS
4.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.0
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
6.0
CONTROLS, INDICATIONS AND METERING
7.0
PAINTING
8.0
SPARES
9.0
10.0
DRAWINGS
ANNEXURES
1)
2)
DATA SHEETS
APPROVED VENDORS FOR COMPONETS
Page 2 of 9
1.0
SCOPE
Cathodic Protection Power Supply Modules (CPPSM) working on switch
mode principle are intended to supply power to cathodic protection
system for under ground pipelines. This specification covers the
requirements for the design, manufacture, testing, delivery to site and
commissioning of the CPPSM (if specified in data sheet).
2.0
CODES AND STANDARDS
2.1
In general the equipment covered by this specification shall, unless

otherwise specified, be in line with the requirements of any of the latest
applicable standards of :
a)
Indian Standards Institution (ISI)
b)
International Electromechanical Commission (IEC)
c)
American Standards Institution (ANSI)
2.2
Wherever the requirements in this specification are in conflict with any of

the above standards, the requirements under this specification shall be
binding.
3.0
SERVICE CONDITIONS
The CPPSM shall be suitable for installation in non air-conditioned
restricted ventilated room in locations having generally warm and dusty
atmosphere. Service condition shall be as specified in the data sheet. It
not specifically mentioned therein, a design ambient temperature of 400 C
and an altitude not exceeding 1000 M above mean sea level shall be
considered.
Page 3 of 9
4.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4.1
CPPSM shall be fabricated with 1.6/2-mm thick sheet steel and structural
steel. Frames shall be enclosed by using 2 mm thick sheet steel and doors
and covers shall be made of 1.6 mm sheet steel. Wherever required,
suitable stiffeners shall be provided. CPPSM shall be free standing type
unless otherwise specified in data. Hinged doors shall be provided at the
front and back where required. Suitable louvers shall be fitted for
ventilation. Degree of protection for the panel shall be IP.41.
4.2
All instruments shall be switchboard type and back connected. 660V PVC
insulated wires with stranded copper conductor of size 2.5 mm2 shall be
used for control wiring. All fuses shall be provided inside the panel and
shall be link type. Terminal blocks shall be Elmex type or approved
equivalent.
4.3
All live parts shall be properly shrouded. This shall ensure Complete safety
to personnel intending routine maintenance by opening the panel doors.
4.4
CPPSM shall be suitable for bottom cable entry unless otherwise specified
in the data sheet and shall be supplied complete with cable termination
lugs and cable glands. Cable glands shall be single compression nickel
plated.
4.5
All components and devices shall be provided with screwed nameplates.

Nameplates shall be 3 ply (white/black/white) two colour laminated
plastic.
5.0
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
5.1
The CPPM shall be a D. C. Voltage / Current controller operating on

switching mode principle. Input power supply as mentioned in data sheet
shall be converted into a continuously variable / adjustable output
voltage/current by the control of duty cycle of conduction of the power
semiconductor device. The CPPSM shall have two distinct modes of
operation as below :
a)
Manual Mode
In manual mode the output voltage of CPPSM shall be continuously

adjustable over the entire rated output voltage range. The set output
voltage (Vos) shall remain constant irrespective of output current. Current
Page 4 of 9
limit feature shall be provided in this mode of operation. The current limit
(Ips) shall be continuously adjustable from zero to rated output current.
b)
Auto Mode
In this mode of operation the out put of the CPPSM shall operate in an
external closed loop with pipe-to-soil potential (PSP) in feed back loop.
The CPPSM shall adjust the output voltage so that the PSP as measured
by reference cell always remain equal to the set potential. The set
potential (Vps) shall be continuously adjustable over the specified range.
CPPSM shall be designed to operate with the number of reference cells (to
be provided by others) as specified in data sheet. In case of more than
one reference cell being provided, CPPSM shall automatically select the
reference cell having less negative potential than the others use the same
for CPPSM auto control (e.g. (-) 0.8 V is less negative than (-) 0.9 V).
In case of open circuit or short circuit or potential being less negative than
a minimum set potential (Vrs) for the controlling reference cell, the CPPSM
shall sense these conditions as reference cell failure and shall
automatically switch over to the other healthy reference cell for control.
Should a fault occur in all the reference cells, the output current of the
CPPSM shall adjust automatically to a preset value (Ips) which shall be
adjustable.
In no case shall the maximum PSP be allowed to exceed the specified
maximum potential in any combination of circumstances. (The maximum
potential is the maximum PSP measured by any of all the connected non
faulty ref. Cell).
5.2
CPPSM shall continuously monitor the PSP and necessary annunciation

shall be provided in case of PSP either exceeding the specified maximum
limit (Vpm) or remaining lower than the specified minimum limit (Vpn).
5.3
CPPSM shall operate on a switching frequency preferably above 20 KHZ.

The overall efficiency shall preferably be above 80 %. The output of
CPPSM shall be filtered / smoothened to provide DC output with less than
5 % ripple. Output regulation for no load to full load and with input
voltage variation shall be better than + 5% of the output setting
throughout the range of output voltage and over the specified ambient
temperature variation. CPPSM shall be suitable for ungrounded input
supply system and shall allow grounding of positive terminal of its output.
Page 5 of 9
5.4
CPPSM shall preferably be of natural cooled type. In case of forced

cooling, adequate redundancy shall be provided for the cooling fans to
ensure high reliability of the system.
5.5
CPPSM shall have input filters to minimise the A. C. feedback to the power
supply. Radio interference noise emitted by CPPSM shall be minimized to
allow proper operation of telecom and SCADA systems in the vicinity.
CPPSM output shall be protected against lightning surges and high voltage
surges due to possible faults in high voltage transmission lines along the
pipelines.
5.6
CPPSM shall be field proven and shall be suitable for unattended operation
at remote locations. CPPSM design, internal component layout and
component rating shall ensure high MTBF and low MTTP. Design life of
CPPSM shall not be less than fifteen years. Prototype equipment shall not
be acceptable.
6.0
CONTROLS, INDICATIONS AND METERING
6.1
Following controls shall be provided on CPPSM front door :
6.2
a)
ON/OFF switch for CPPSM output
b)
ON/OFF control for input thru MCCB
c)
Auto/Manual mode selector switch
d)
Potentiometers for Vos, Vps and Ips settings
Following controls shall be provided inside the module :

a)
6.3
Potentiometer for Vrs, Vpm, and Vpn settings.
CPPSM shall have following indicating lights :

a)
CPPSM ON/OFF
b)
Preference cell controlling (number of lamps same as number of

reference cells).
c)
Reference cell faulty (number of lamps same as number of

reference cells).
d)
Pipeline over protected
Page 6 of 9
e)
Pipeline under protected
f)
Auto-mode failure
It shall be possible to switch off all the indication lamps by a single switch.
6.4
6.5
Following metering shall be provided on the CPPSM :

a)
Output voltage (Preferably Digital)
b)
Output current (Preferably Digital)
c)
Digital voltmeter to measure PSP (Set and actual through a selector

switch for all the reference cells) (Alternatively analog voltmeter
with 0.5 accuracy class may be accepted).
d)
Input voltage and current.
If specified in data sheet, CPPSM shall incorporate provision for remote

monitoring of CPPSM through SCADA system as below :
a)
b)
Potential free contacts for the following :

-
All the reference cells failed
Pipe line overprotected
Pipe line under protected
System in manual mode
System in auto-mode
4 to 20 mA isolated signal for the following

-
7.0
PSP (- 4V to 0V)
PAINTING
The sheet steel used for fabrication shall be thoroughly cleaned and
degreased to remove mill scale, rust, grease and dirt. Fabricated
structures shall be pickled and then rinsed to remove any trace of acid.
Page 7 of 9
The under surfaces shall be prepared by applying a coat of phosphate and

a coat of zinc oxide / phosphate primer. The under surface shall be free
from all imperfections before undertaking the finishing coat. It shall then
be spray painted with two coats of epoxy paint. Colour of final paint shall
be vendor standard unless otherwise specified in data sheet. The finished
panel shall be dried in stoving ovens in dust free atmosphere. Panel finish
shall be free from imperfections like pinholes, orange peels etc. All
unpainted steel parts shall be cadmium plated or suitably treated to
prevent corrosion.
8.0
SPARES
The vendor shall indicate item wised unit prices and recommended
quantity of spares for two years normal operation and separately those for
start up and commissioning.
9.0
9.1
The owner or his authorised representatives may visit the works during
manufacture of equipment to assess the progress of work as well as to
ascertain that only quality raw materials are used for the same. He shall
be given all assistance to carry out the inspection.
9.2
Detailed test procedures alongwith the facilities available at vendors

works shall be submitted alongwith the bid. Owners representative shall
be given minimum four works advance notice for witnessing the final
testing. Test certificates including test records and performance data etc.
shall be furnished by the vendor.
9.3
Final acceptance tests shall be carried out at manufactures works under

his care and expense. All the instruments and equipment required for
testing shall be arranged by contractor. Acceptance tests shall include but
not be limited to the following :
9.3.1 Visual Inspection

This shall include
-
Completeness of the equipment in line with specs.
Checking of all settings
All labels provided and satisfactory
Page 8 of 9
Dimensional checking
Proper mounting of components and neatness of wiring etc.
Model number
9.3.2 Functional testing both in Auto and Manual mode.

9.3.3 Heat run test (full load test) shall be carried out for a minimum duration
of 100 hours on all units except that in case of identical ratings for more
than one unit, heat run may be conducted only on one of the identical
units. During this test, measurements shall be carried out to prove that
the operating temperatures of various components margins as per good
engineering practice/established guidelines.
10.0
DRAWINGS AND DATA
10.1
Vendor shall furnish all data/drawings/documents specified in the vendor

data requirement.
10.2
Approval of the drawing shall not relieve the manufacturer of his

responsibility to equipment conforming to the relevant specification and
standards or for any mistakes, errors or omissions in the drawing.
10.3
Following minimum information shall be furnished with bed :
10.4
a)
Clause wise deviations, if any, to the specifications.
b)
Track record and reference list for past suppliers.
c)
Technical detail along with block schematics.
d)
General arrangement drawing along with dimension.
e)
Guaranteed technical particulars (Ref. Cl. 16 of data sheet).
f)
Recommended list
commissioning.
of
spares
for
years
operation
and
Following documents as a minimum shall be supplied after placement of

order :
a)
Power and control circuit diagrams
Page 9 of 9
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Ratings of major components and actual design parameters

considered.
Terminal diagram and connection details.
Installation instructions
Field testing and commissioning procedures
Maintenance and operation manual.
Page 10 of 9

Specification For Onshore Pipelines

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specification For Onshore Pipelines

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specification For Onshore Pipelines

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What specifications are covered in the document?

What specifications are covered in the document?

What testing procedures are mentioned?

What testing procedures are mentioned?

GAIL (India) Limited

SPECIFICATION FOR MAINLINE CONSTRUCTION

SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING OF ONSHORE CROSS-COUNTRY

SPECIFICATION FOR HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF

SPECIFICATION FOR MAJOR WATER CROSSINGS

SPECIFICATION FOR PIPELINE CROSSING ROADS,

SPECIFICATION FOR PIPING, FABRICATION AND ERECTION

SPECIFICATION FOR SHOP AND FIELD PAINTING

SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF PIPELINE CORROSION COATING

SPECIFICATION FOR DOCUMENTATION FOR

SPECIFICATION FOR PIPELINE MARKERS

SPECIFICATION FOR FLUSHING AND TESTING

SPECIFICATION FOR CASING INSULATORS AND END SEALS

SPECIFICATION FOR VENTS, DRAINS AND WELLS

SPECIFICATION FOR GASKETS, NUTS AND BOLTS

PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATION FOR FIELD JOINT COATING

SPECIFICATION FOR 3 LPE COATING OF PIPE

SPECIFICATION FOR FITTINGS & FLANGES UPTO 16 SIZE

SPECIFICATION FOR FLANGES & WELDED FITTINGS

SPECIFICATION FOR ASSORTED PIPES FOR TERMINALS

D:\old data\FATEH\IDPL_Dholpur\SCC\Final\Content - Vol-II, III & IV.doc

SPECIFICATION FOR PRE-COMMISSIONING/ COMMISSIONING

SPECIFICATION FOR HEALTH, SAFETY AND

SPECIFICATION FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE

SPECIFICATION FOR CALIPER PIGGING

SPECIFICATION FOR FIELD JOINT COATING OF PIPELINE

SPECIFICATION FOR PIPELINE CROSSING USING

SPECIFICATION FOR FLOW TEE

SPECIFICATION FOR LONG RADIUS BENDS

SPECIFICATION FOR INSULATING JOINTS

SPECIFICATION FOR SPLIT TEE

SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE SAFETY VALVE

SPECIFICATION FOR CARTRIDGE FILTER

SPECIFICATION FOR QOEC

SPECIFICATION FOR PIG SIGNALLERS

SPECIFICATION FOR SCRAPPER TRAP

SPECIFICATION FOR PLUG VALVES

SPECIFICATION FOR GLOBE VALVE

SPECIFICATION FOR CHECK VALVES

Specification for Temporary Cathodic Protection System

Specification for Permanent Cathodic Protection System

Specification for Corrosion Survey

Specification for Cathodic Protection CPPSM Units

D:\old data\FATEH\IDPL_Dholpur\SCC\Final\Content - Vol-II, III & IV.doc

SPECIFICATION NO. MEC/S/05/62/01A

(PROCESS & PIPING DESIGN SECTION)

PROCESS & PIPING

REFERENCE CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS

REQUIREMENTS OF R.O.U. AND ACCESS THERETO

HANDLING, HAULING, STRINGING AND STORING OF MATERIALS

SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS ON THE PIPELINE

WORKING SPREAD LIMITATIONS

CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION OF RIGHT-OF-WAY

MAINTENANCE DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD